JP2023080433A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: When opening/closing of a variable winning device 65 and a probability variable area solenoid 65f is driven according to each jackpot type, and when the probability variable area solenoid 65 is driven, balls shot by a rightward shooting game can pass a probability variable area switch 65g. A probability variable area 65d for each jackpot round is configured to be set so as to be validated or invalidated according to each jackpot type. Accordingly, when balls are detected by the probability variable area switch 65g and when a probability variable area 65d of the round is set validly, a game machine is configured so as to be shifted to "a probability variable state" after completion of the jackpot.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 18

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

This gaming machine is configured to generate at least a predetermined first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and wins a winning game in the second game state. There is also a game machine that is configured to allow the second game state to be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295672 A

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a shooting means capable of shooting game balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a game area where game balls can flow down, and Judging means for executing a predetermined judgment based on the entry of a ball, and when the result of the predetermined judgment is a specific result, a plurality of patterns are variably displayed and the specific pattern is stopped at the end of the variative display. display means for displaying; and variable ball entry means provided in the game area for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means is opening and closing means for opening and closing a ball entry area; a specific area into which a game ball can enter; a first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area; and a game that has not entered the specific area. A game machine comprising second detection means for detecting balls and sorting means for sorting into a state in which game balls can flow down to the specific area and a state in which game balls cannot flow down, wherein the first detection means A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions is set in advance so that detection of the game ball is effective at least corresponding to the type of a specific symbol, and the sorting means determines that the game ball is the first The gaming machine is controlled to operate such that the game ball flows down to the specific area in the variable action times that can be detected by the detection means, and the gaming machine is associated with execution of a predetermined variable action out of the plurality of variable actions. display control means for causing the display means to execute, at a specific timing, a specific notification display prompting a predetermined player to enter the game ball into the specific area; discrimination information storage means for storing such discrimination information; storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means; When the identification information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the identification information storage means in the effective variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the game, the player is instructed to specify a state different from the special game state. A granting means for granting a profit state, and a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols as performances that are executed before the display of the specific notification display that is executed at the specific timing. and execution means for selecting and executing one common performance from.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a starting ball entry area provided in a game area where the game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the starting ball entry area and display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and for stop-displaying the specific pattern at the end of the variable display. and variable ball entry means provided in the game area for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable motions after the specific symbol is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means occupies the ball entry area. a specific area into which a game ball can enter; a first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area; and a first detection means for detecting a game ball that has not entered the specific area. 2. A gaming machine comprising: detecting means; and sorting means for sorting into a state in which a game ball can flow down to the specific area and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down, wherein the first detecting means detects the type of the specific symbol. A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions are set in advance, and the game ball detection becomes effective at least corresponding to the above-described variable motion, and the distribution means detects the game ball when the game ball is detected by the first detection means. In the variable motion obtained, the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area, and the gaming machine performs a predetermined game in relation to execution of the predetermined variable motion among the plurality of variable motions. display control means for causing the display means to perform a specific notification display at a specific timing to prompt a player to enter a game ball into the specific area; discrimination information storage means, memory control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means, and corresponding to the type of the specific symbol When the determination information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the effective variable operation times set as the above, a special profit state different from the special game state is given to the player. Giving means, and one common effect out of a plurality of common effects that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the effect executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and execution means for selecting and executing As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, and is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main controller. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and the reserved ball execution area. It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot random number table typically. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table. In each game state, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol winning probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special symbol fluctuation time, the second special symbol It is the list which explained fluctuation time and the right-handed right-handed propriety. It is the figure which showed the transition destination of the game state based on the discharge mode in each game state, and the jackpot type etc. which were elected. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a reservation number table for special figure 1, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a reservation number table for special figure 2. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is 11A and 11B are diagrams schematically showing an example of a C table of a stop pattern table, and FIG. 11D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a D table of a stop pattern table; (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 losing variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 losing variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically an example of a jackpot opening table. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a probability variable area open table. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 probability variable area effective table. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 probability variable area effective table. Operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid and the probability variable area solenoid in each round when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", detection timing of the ball in the big winning opening switch and the probability variable area switch, addition timing of the value of the probability variable area passing number counter , It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the setting timing of the probability variable area effective flag and the probability variable transition flag during the period when the big winning opening opening and closing plate is closed. Operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid and the variable probability area solenoid in each round when winning the jackpot type "variable probability B", detection timing of the ball in the big winning opening switch and the variable probability area switch, addition timing of the value of the probability variable area passing number counter , It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the setting timing of the probability variable area effective flag and the probability variable transition flag during the period when the big winning opening opening and closing plate is closed. Operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid and the probability variable area solenoid in each round when winning the jackpot type "variable probability C", detection timing of the ball in the big winning opening switch and the probability variable area switch, addition timing of the value of the probability variable area passing number counter , It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the setting timing of the probability variable area effective flag and the probability variable transition flag during the period when the big winning opening opening and closing plate is closed. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal pattern, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal pattern fluctuation time table, (c) is normal FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of an electric power release table; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time saving end condition table. 1 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the 1st pending|holding information storage area, 2nd pending|holding information storage area, and execution information storage area. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows time saving counting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing relief arrival counting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows probability variation area|region control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing processing during the opening of the big winning opening executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows probability change area passage judging processing which is performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing normal electric duty control processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command reception processing during a jackpot performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the hit production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation processing during a jackpot performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing voting effect processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation processing during probability variable area|region opening performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the competition production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. Shows the transition of the performance on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows the state where the jackpot is won based on the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the jackpot opening is being executed. It is a figure, and (b) is a figure which showed the state from the state of (a) when the jackpot opening is over and the 1st round is started. It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that a certain period (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 59 (b), and the first round is continuously executed. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the first round has ended and the second round has progressed from the state of (a). It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that a certain period (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 60 (b), and the second round is continuously executed. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the second round has been completed from the state of (a) and progressed to the third round. It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, and (a) shows the state of progressing to the fourth round after the end of the third round from the state of FIG. 61 (b). (b) shows that the fourth round is being executed continuously from the state of (a), the player executes a right-handed game to win the variable winning device 65, and the ball is sent to the probability variable area 65d. It is a diagram showing the state of passing, (c), the 4th round is continuously executed from the state of (b), the variable probability area 65d is closed, the variable winning device 65 is still open. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the fourth round has been completed from the state of (c) and progressed to the fifth round. It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, and (a) shows the state of FIG. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball has progressed from the state of (a) to the 7th round without passing the ball through the probability variable region 65d of the 6th round. , (c) is a diagram showing the state of progressing from the state of (b) to the 8th round without allowing the ball to pass through the probability variable region 65d of the 7th round, and (d) is ( It is the figure which showed the state which progressed to the 9th round from the state of c) without letting a ball pass through the probability variable area|region 65d of the 8th round. It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that the 9th round is continuously executed from the state of (d) in FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which the variable winning device 65 is executed and the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d, and (b) shows that a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of (a), and continues It is the figure which showed the state in which the 9th round is performed. It shows the transition of the effect on the third pattern display device during the jackpot game, and (a) shows the state in which the 9th round has ended and the 10th round has progressed from the state of FIG. 64 (b). It is a figure and (b) is the figure which showed the state where the 10th round is continuously performed from the state of (a). It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that a certain period (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 65 (b), and the tenth round is continuously executed. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has elapsed from the state of (a), and the tenth round is subsequently executed. 66(a) shows the progress of the 10th round from the state of FIG. 66(b) and progresses to the jackpot ending. Yes, (b) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of (a), the jackpot ending is still being executed, and the result of the success of the "competition effect" is displayed. It is a diagram. 67(a) shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, and (a) shows that a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 67(a), and the jackpot ending is continuously executed. 67(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a failure result of the "competition effect" is displayed, and (b) shows that a certain period of time (about several seconds) has elapsed from the state of FIG. 67(b), and the jackpot ending continues. It is the figure which showed the state currently performed. It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, and shows the state in which a certain period (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. is. Shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows the state where the jackpot is won based on the dynamic display of the second special pattern and the jackpot opening is being executed. It is a figure, and (b) is a figure which showed the state from the state of (a) when the jackpot opening is over and the 1st round is started. It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that a certain period (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 70 (b), and the first round is continuously executed. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of (a), and the first round is continuously being executed. It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that a certain period (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 71 (b), and the 1Rth is continuously executed. It is a figure showing a state, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has elapsed from the state of (a), and the first round is subsequently executed. 72(a) shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, and (a) shows the state in which the first round has ended and the second round has progressed from the state of FIG. 72(b). It is a figure, and (b) shows a state in which the second round is continuously executed from the state of (a), and although the variable probability area 65d is closed, the variable winning device 65 is still open. (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the second round has ended and progressed to the third round from the state of (b), and (d) is from the state of (c), It is the figure which showed the state which progressed to the 4th round, without making a ball pass through the probability variable area|region 65d of the 3rd round. It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that the fourth round is continuously executed from the state of (d) in FIG. 73, and the player hits right. It is a diagram showing a state in which the variable winning device 65 is executed and the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d, and (b) is the fifth round after the fourth round is completed from the state of (a). (c) shows that the fifth round is being executed continuously from the state of (b), and the player executes a right-handed game to cause the variable winning device 65 to win. , is a diagram showing a state in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d, and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the fifth round has been completed and the state has progressed to the sixth round from the state of (c). . It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that the 6th round is continuously executed from the state of (d) in FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which the variable winning device 65 is executed and the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d, and (b) shows that a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of (a), and continues It is the figure which showed the state in which the 6th round is performed. It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, and (a) shows the state of progressing to the seventh round after the end of the sixth round from the state of FIG. 75 (b). It is a figure and (b) is a figure which showed the state which progressed to the 8th round after the 7th round was completed from the state of (a). It shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) is a diagram showing the state in which the 8th round is continuously executed from the state of FIG. 76 (b), (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the 8th round has ended and progressed to the 9th round from the state of (a). Shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ninth round has ended and the tenth round has progressed from the state of (a). Shows the transition of the production in the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, (a) shows that a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 78 (b), and the tenth round is continuously executed. FIG. 78B is a diagram showing a state in which a winning result of the "competition effect" is displayed, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a result is being displayed in which the "competition effect" is lost. 79A shows the transition of the effect on the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, and FIG. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the 10th round has ended from the state of FIG. 79 (b) and progressed to the jackpot ending. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of the variable winning device in the second embodiment. (a) shows that in the second embodiment, the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1 is in an open state (immersion state), and the second variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e2 to the sixth variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e6 are five probability variations FIG. 4B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when all of the area opening/closing plates are in a closed state (protruding state); In the second embodiment, the second variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e2 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e1 and the third variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e3 to the sixth variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e6 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when all the variable probability area opening/closing plates of No. 5 are in a closed state (protruding state). (a) shows that in the second embodiment, the third variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e3 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1, the second variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e2, and the fourth variable probability area opening/closing plate Variable for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when any of the 5 probability variable region opening and closing plates of the region opening and closing plate 65e4 ~ the sixth probability variable region opening and closing plate 65e6 is in a closed state (protruding state) It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device 65, (b), in the second embodiment, the fourth probability variable area opening and closing plate 65e4 is in the open state (immersion state), and the first probability variable area opening and closing plate 65e1 ~ When the 5 probability variable area opening/closing plates of the 3rd probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e3, the 5th probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e5 and the 6th probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e6 are all in a closed state (protruding state), in the variable winning device 65 It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has entered. (a) shows that in the second embodiment, the fifth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e5 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first to fourth probability variable region opening/closing plates 65e1 to the fourth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e4 and the sixth probability variable A schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when all the 5 variable probability region opening and closing plates of the region opening and closing plate 65e6 are in a closed state (protruding state). In (b), in the second embodiment, the sixth variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e6 is in an open state (immersed state), and the first to fifth variable probability area opening/closing plates 65e1 to 65e5 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when all the variable probability area opening/closing plates of No. 5 are in a closed state (protruding state). (a) is, in the second embodiment, when the 6 probability variable area opening/closing plates of the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1 to the sixth probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e6 are all in a closed state (protruding state), variable winning device 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the 65. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment, and is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main controller. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a probability variable area open table in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 probability variable area effective table in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the special figure 2 probability variable area|region effective table in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid and the variable probability area solenoid in each round when the jackpot type "variable probability A" is won, the detection timing of the ball in the large winning opening switch and the variable probability area switch, the number of times of passing the variable probability area It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the timing of adding the value of the counter, the period during which the big winning opening opening and closing plate is closed, and the setting timing of the variable probability region effective flag and the variable probability transition flag. In the second embodiment, the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid and the variable probability area solenoid in each round when winning the jackpot type "variable probability B", the detection timing of the ball in the big winning opening switch and the variable probability area switch, the number of times the variable probability area passes It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the timing of adding the value of the counter, the period during which the big winning opening opening and closing plate is closed, and the setting timing of the variable probability region effective flag and the variable probability transition flag. In the second embodiment, the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid and the variable probability area solenoid in each round when winning the jackpot type "variable probability C", the detection timing of the ball in the large winning opening switch and the variable probability area switch, the number of times the variable probability area passes It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the timing of adding the value of the counter, the period during which the big winning opening opening and closing plate is closed, and the setting timing of the variable probability region effective flag and the variable probability transition flag. It is a flow chart which shows probability variation area|region control processing performed by MPU in a main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing processing during the opening of the big winning opening executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, and is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main controller. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and the reserved ball execution area. It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot random number table typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table. In each game state, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol winning probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special symbol fluctuation time, the second special symbol It is the list which explained fluctuation time and the right-handed right-handed propriety. It is the figure which showed the transition destination of the game state based on the discharge mode in each game state, and the jackpot type etc. which were elected. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 1. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 2. FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is 11A and 11B are diagrams schematically showing an example of a C table of a stop pattern table, and FIG. 11D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a D table of a stop pattern table; (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 losing variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 losing variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically an example of a jackpot opening table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal pattern, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal pattern fluctuation time table, (c) is normal FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of an electric power release table; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time saving end condition table. 1 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the 1st pending|holding information storage area, 2nd pending|holding information storage area, and execution information storage area. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing ST counting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows time saving counting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing relief arrival counting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing processing during the opening of the big winning opening executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing normal electric duty control processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a relief counter display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the hit production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. Fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the time of transition from the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state" FIG. 143(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state has shifted to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and FIG. 143(b) is a diagram of FIG. 143(a). From the state, the variable display of the special symbol in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is executed "50 times", and the last fluctuation display in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is stopped. There is, FIG. 143(c) is a diagram showing the state immediately after the state of FIG. 143(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 143(c), has stopped from the state in FIG. 143(c). (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table in the second embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table in the second embodiment. It is a diagram showing. In each game state of the second embodiment, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right. It is the figure which showed the transition destination of the game state based on the discharge|fire mode in each game state of 2nd Embodiment, and the jackpot classification etc. which were elected. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 1 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 2 in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an E table of a stop pattern table in the second embodiment; (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an F table of the stop pattern table in the second embodiment; It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 losing variation pattern table in the second embodiment, (b) is an example of a special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table in the second embodiment It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 losing variation pattern table in the second embodiment, (b) is an example of a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table in the second embodiment It is a figure shown typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time saving end condition table in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing relief counter display processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the hit production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. In each game state of the third embodiment, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right. It is the figure which showed the transition destination of the game state based on the discharge|fire mode in each game state of 3rd Embodiment, and the big hit classification etc. which were elected. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 1 in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figures 2 in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the G table of the stop pattern table in the third embodiment; (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the H table of the stop pattern table in the third embodiment; It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 losing variation pattern table in the third embodiment, (b) is an example of a special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table in the second embodiment It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 losing variation pattern table in the third embodiment, (b) is an example of a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table in the second embodiment It is a figure shown typically. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing relief counter display processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment, and is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main controller. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters in 4th Embodiment, each holding ball storage area, and the holding ball execution area. (a) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 jackpot random number table of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a special figure 2 jackpot random number table of the fourth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table of the fourth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table of the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram showing. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the special-figure 2 small hit classification table in 4th Embodiment. In each game state of the fourth embodiment, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right. It is the figure which showed the transition destination of the game state based on the discharge|fire mode in each game state of 4th Embodiment, and the jackpot classification etc. which were elected. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 1 in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figures 2 in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 2 loss/small hit A in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing special figure 2 big hit/small FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a winning B variation pattern table; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot opening table in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the small hit opening table in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time saving end condition table in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio ramp control device according to a fourth embodiment; It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the 1st pending|holding information storage area, 2nd pending|holding information storage area, and execution information storage area in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving counting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing relief arrival counting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening-and-closing control processing performed by MPU in a main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing specific area device opening/closing control processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a process during the opening of the big winning opening at the time of a small hit, which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small winning end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing performed by MPU in a main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing relief counter display processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the hit production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, and is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main controller. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and the reserved ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot random number table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table. In each game state, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol winning probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special symbol fluctuation time, the second special symbol It is the list which explained fluctuation time and the right-handed right-handed propriety. It is the figure which showed the transition destination of the game state based on the discharge mode in each game state, and the jackpot type etc. which were elected. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 1. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the reservation number table for special figure 2. FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is , and a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table; (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table of the stop pattern table; , and a diagram schematically showing an example of an F table of a stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table is. In the left-handed game in the "normal game state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first start opening, the upper second start opening, and the lower second start opening, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the first special symbol It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol, and the drive timing of the solenoid for normal electric service and the solenoid for the big winning opening opening/closing plate. In the left-handed game at the time of "normal game state", the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols in the low probability state of special symbols reaches 900 times due to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the low probability time shortening state is reached. It is a timing chart when rushing. In the left-handed game in the "normal game state", during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is 900 due to the variable display of the second special symbol. It is a timing chart in the case of reaching the time and entering the low probability time shortening state. In the right-handed game during "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first start opening, the upper second start opening, the lower second start opening, and the normal A timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display of symbols, the variable display of special symbol 1 and the variable display of special symbol 2, and the drive timing of the solenoid for normal electric service and the solenoid for opening and closing the big winning opening. is. In the right-handed game during the "latency probability fluctuation state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first start opening, the upper second start opening, and the lower second start opening, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the special symbol 1 It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display and the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the drive timing of the solenoid for normal electric service and the solenoid for the big winning opening opening/closing plate. It is the figure which showed typically an example of a jackpot opening table. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit open table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal pattern, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal pattern fluctuation time table, (c) is normal FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of an electric power release table; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time saving end condition table. 1 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of a first pending information storage area, a first execution information storage area, and a second pending information storage area and a second execution information storage area; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing the other stopping process executed by the MPU in the main control device; It is a flow chart which shows time saving counting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing ceiling reaching counting processing executed by an MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing processing during the opening of the big winning opening executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a small winning opening and closing control process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing processing during small hit opening executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing normal electric duty control processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a hitting instruction display process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device; FIG. It shows the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state". It is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variable effect of the special symbol, (a) shows the special symbol until reaching the ceiling during the "normal game state". In a state where the number of executions of the variable display is two more times, it is a diagram showing a state in which only the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and (b) shows the state of (a) to the first It is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of special symbols is finished and the number of executions of variable display of special symbols until reaching the ceiling is reduced to one more time. The next variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is being executed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. In (d), from the state of (c), only the variable display of the second special pattern ends and the ceiling is reached, and the main display right FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a hitting instruction and an effect hitting instruction are displayed; (a) to (d) show, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached by the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". It is a diagram showing the transition, (a) is a state in the "normal game state", in a state where the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols until reaching the ceiling is two more, only the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. It is a diagram showing a state in progress, (b), from the state of (a), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is It is a diagram showing a state that has been reduced to one more time, (c) is, from the state of (b), the next variable display of the first special symbol is started, in the main display area Dm "super reach" effect mode is being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also started, and (d) shows only the variable display of the second special symbol from the state of (c). is finished, the ball reaches the ceiling, and the state shifts to the ``normal figure low probability time shortening state'', where only the main display right-handed instruction is displayed, and the performance-oriented hitting instruction is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state", a) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect result of losing in the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode executed in the variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 255(d) is displayed. In (b), from the state of (a), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode that has been executed in the variable display of the first special symbol ends, and the third symbol that is lost is the main display area. It is a diagram showing the state displayed in Dm, (c), from the state of (b), in the main display area Dm, in the main display area Dm, it is reported that it has reached the ceiling and has shifted to the "normal map low probability time shortened state" and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the performance hitting instruction is being executed, and (d) is a transition notification from the state (c) to the “normal figure low probability time shortening state” and the performance hitting method It is the figure which showed the state where the instruction|indication was complete|finished and the 3rd design displayed in this "general pattern low probability time reduction state" switched from the 1st special design to the 2nd special design. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of an audio ramp control device according to a sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a ceiling reaching notification process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. Fig. 264(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state" in the conventional pachinko machine. is a diagram showing a state in which only the first special symbol variation display is being executed in a state where the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is two more times during the "normal game state". FIG. 264(b) is a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. FIG. 264(c) shows that the next variable display of the first special symbol starts from the state of FIG. 264(b) and reaches the ceiling in the central part of the main display area Dm. 264(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the second special symbol variable display is also started, and FIG. 264(d) shows the state of FIG. During execution, only the variable display of the second special pattern ends and the ceiling is reached, and the state shifts to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' and the right-handed instruction for the main display and the instruction for the production method are displayed. It is a figure showing. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". 265(a) is a state in which only the first special symbol variable display is being executed in the state of the "normal game state" in which the number of executions of the special symbol variable display until reaching the ceiling is two more. FIG. 265(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol ends from the state of FIG. FIG. 265(c) shows the next variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 265(b), and reaches the ceiling in the central part of the main display area Dm 265(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the display of the second special symbol is also started, and FIG. During the execution of the arrival notification effect, only the variable display of the second special pattern ends and the ceiling is reached, the state shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", and only the right-handed instruction for the main display is displayed, and the hitting for the effect FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which direction instructions are not executed; In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". In 266(a), from the state of FIG. 265(d), the ceiling reaching notification effect in the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed, and in FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d), the main display It is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed in the upper left part of the area Dm is erased, FIG. FIG. 266(c) shows the state of FIG. 266(b), the ceiling reaching notification effect is finished, the ceiling is reached, and the transition to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" It is a diagram showing a state in which it is notified that it has been done, and the performance hitting instruction is being executed, and FIG. 266(d) shows the state of FIG. The transition notification and the production hitting instruction are completed, and the third pattern displayed in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. be. In the "normal game state" in the seventh embodiment, when the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the transition to the "general figure low probability time reduction state" is performed, and the special that will reach the ceiling It is a timing chart when the variable display of the special symbol 2 is being executed in parallel at the timing when the variable display of the symbol 1 ends. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing ceiling reaching notification extension processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, during the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling by the variation performance of the first special symbol FIG. 270(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 270(a) shows the first special symbol in the state where the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is one more time in the "normal game state". 270(b) is a diagram showing a state in which variable display of and second special symbols are being executed in parallel, and ceiling reaching notification effects are being executed in the main display area Dm. From the state of (a), only the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the ceiling is reached, and it is a diagram showing the state of shifting to the "general figure low probability time shortening state", Fig. 270 (c) FIG. 270(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling-reaching notification effect is completed and the effect hitting instruction is being executed from the state in FIG. 270(b), and FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the effect hitting instruction is finished and the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, during the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling by the variation performance of the first special symbol FIG. 271(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 271(a) shows the first special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is one more time in the "normal game state". 271(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of and the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. From the state of (a), only the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and reaches the ceiling, and shows the state of transition to "general pattern low probability time shortening state", Fig. 271 (c) and Fig. 271(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously being executed from the state of FIG. 271(b), and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being continuously executed. . In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, during the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling by the variation performance of the first special symbol FIG. 272(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variation production, FIG. 272(a) is a diagram showing a state where the variation display of the second special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. 271(d), FIG. 272(b) FIG. 272(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed and the effect hitting instruction is being executed, and FIG. 272(c) is a diagram of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state from which the instruction|indication of how to play for production|presentation was complete|finished from the state, and the variable display of the 2nd special design started execution. It is a timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special symbol 2 during the "normal game state" of the eighth embodiment and shifting to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state". It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing ceiling reaching standby processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 command processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 command processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. Shows the transition of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling of the "normal game state" of the eighth embodiment FIG. 278(a) shows the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is two more times during the "normal game state". It is a diagram showing a state in which the display is being executed in parallel, and FIG. 278(b) shows that only the variable display of the first special symbol is completed from the state of FIG. 278(c) shows the next variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 278(b). is started and the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, and FIG. 278(d) is the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which the main display right-handed instruction is displayed after reaching the "normal map low probability time shortening state". Shows the transition of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling of the "normal game state" of the eighth embodiment FIG. 279(a) shows that the ceiling arrival standby effect is completed from the state of FIG. FIG. 279(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a command is being executed, and FIG. 279(b) shows a transition notification from the state of FIG. The direction instruction is completed, and the third pattern displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm during the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is shown to have switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. FIG. 279(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol has started from the state of FIG. 279(b). During the "normal game state" of the ninth embodiment, although the variable display of the special symbol 1 reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal low probability time shortening state", during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol 1, It is a timing chart in the case of a big hit in the variable display of the special symbol 2. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ceiling reaching effect switching processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It shows the transition of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 283(a) shows the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is one more time during the "normal game state". FIG. 283(b) is a diagram showing a state in which all the displays are stopped, and FIG. 283(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. FIG. 283(c) is a diagram showing the state being executed, and FIG. 283(c) starts the variable display that will win the jackpot of the second special symbol from the state of FIG. 283(b), and reaches the ceiling notification effect 283(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variation display of the second special symbol jackpot is stopped from the state in FIG. 283(c). It shows the transition of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 284(a) is a variable display of special symbols in the "universal pattern high probability time reduction state" shifted from the state of FIG. is a diagram showing a state in which the number of times of execution is 99 times, FIG. 284(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the game state is shifted to the "normal game state", and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state switched from the 2nd special design to the 1st special design. It is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal pattern of the 10th embodiment, (b) schematically shows an example of a normal pattern fluctuation time table of the 10th embodiment FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing an example of an ordinary electric service open table according to the tenth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 80, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable probability region 65d (see FIG. 3) is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid during the jackpot game state, and the variable probability region 65d (see FIG. 3) that is set to be valid. A game machine capable of generating a ``probability change state'' after the end of a jackpot game according to the intention of the player by shooting the ball according to the intention of the player with the aim of winning the ball at the top will be explained.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which, after a so-called jackpot game, an additional profit game state that is advantageous to the player is added in correspondence with the symbols that have hit the jackpot. Note that the additional profit gaming state includes, for example, a high-probability state m of a jackpot probability, a high-probability state of a hit probability, a shortened state of pattern variation for displaying the result of the jackpot lottery, and a state for displaying the result of the winning lottery. , a high support state for improving the frequency of the jackpot lottery, a state for improving the reservation function to reserve the right of the jackpot lottery, and various combinations thereof.

In a conventional gaming machine, acquisition of the additional profit game state is substantially determined in a jackpot lottery, and thereafter, if game control is normally executed, the additional profit game state is started after the jackpot game. is configured as For this reason, the player has little interest in acquiring additional profit gaming states, and there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention provides a launching means capable of shooting a game ball, a starting ball entry area provided in a game area where the game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the starting ball entry area. Judging means for executing a predetermined judgment based on the ball being thrown, and a display that variably displays a plurality of patterns when the result of the predetermined judgment is a specific result, and stops displaying the specific pattern at the end of the variable display. and a variable ball entry means provided in the game area for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific pattern is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means is a ball entry means. Opening and closing means for opening and closing the area, a specific area into which a game ball can enter, first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area, and detection of a game ball that has not entered the specific area. and a distribution means for distributing a state in which game balls can flow down to the specific area and a state in which game balls cannot flow down to the specific area, wherein the first detection means detects the specific pattern. A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions are set in advance at which the detection of the game ball is effective at least corresponding to the type of the game ball, and the distribution means determines that the game ball is detected by the first detection means. In the variable action times that can be detected, the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area, and the gaming machine performs a predetermined display control means for causing the display means to perform a specific notification display at a specific timing to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the specific area; discrimination information storage means for storing; memory control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means for a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means; When the determination information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the effective variable operation times set as above, a special profit state different from the special game state is given to the player. and one common effect selected from a plurality of common effects that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols as the effect executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and execution means for selecting and executing a performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to obtain the effect of improving interest in acquiring the additional profit gaming state.

More specifically, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, when the probability variable region 65d is opened, the round in which the ball detection by the probability variable region switch 65g is enabled is configured to be different. Also, if the number of rounds in which the ball is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, regardless of whether the probability variable region 65d for each jackpot round is valid or invalid according to each jackpot type, the probability variable in subsequent rounds Region 65d is configured to be disabled. By configuring in this way, in one jackpot, out of the 6 rounds in which the probability variable area 65d is opened, a predetermined number of rounds are selected to pass the ball through the probability variable area 65d, and as a result, the effective probability variable area It is possible to make it a game property whether to pass and shift to "probability variable state" or not to pass through the effective probability variable area and shift to "general pattern high probability time shortening state". As a result, it is possible to improve interest in acquiring the additional profit gaming state.

In the first embodiment, the opening/closing plate 65a for the variable ball entry means will be described as an example, but any configuration may be used as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. For example, opening/closing means as a so-called tulip-shaped prize winning opening, opening/closing means as a prize winning opening by a plate body that can be retracted from the game board surface, or opening/closing means as a winning opening that can be protruded in a so-called bridging manner may be used. .

Also, for example, as the specific region of the variable ball entry means, the probability variable region 65 capable of generating the "probability variable state" will be described as an example in the first embodiment, but any It may be a configuration, for example, a specific area as a time saving area that can generate a "time reduction state", a specific area as a latent probability variable area that can generate a "latency probability variable state", and a jackpot game state It may be a specific area as a possible condition device (so-called V winning opening), or a specific area as a condition device that can generate a small winning game state.

Furthermore, for example, as the first detection means or the second detection means of the variable ball entry means, the probability variable region switch 65g as a magnetic proximity switch will be described as an example in the first embodiment, but within the scope of the present invention. For example, optical detection means as an optical photosensor capable of detecting light such as visible light and infrared rays, detection means as a fiber sensor using an optical fiber, and a laser. Laser sensors used, color sensors that can detect the amount of light received in red, blue, green, etc., mechanical detection means that can detect by mechanical contact such as limit switches and microswitches, and images taken by cameras An image discrimination sensor capable of detecting the presence or absence of an object, an ultrasonic sensor capable of detecting ultrasonic waves, or the like may be used.

Further, for example, the variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e will be described as an example of the distribution means of the variable ball entry means in the first embodiment, but any configuration may be used as long as it does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention. Often, for example, distribution means for distributing the flow path of the spheres by driving them at regular intervals, distribution means for alternately switching the flow paths as the spheres flow in, and rotating by colliding the spheres during the rotation. A distribution means capable of changing the flowing direction of another ball by colliding with another ball, or a distribution means capable of switching the flow into a condition device capable of generating a jackpot game state, or the like may be used.

Furthermore, for example, as a predetermined effective variable operation times, in the first embodiment, a plurality of jackpot rounds determined for each jackpot type by the probability variable area effective table 202h will be described as an example, but within the scope of the present invention Any configuration may be possible, for example, a part or the entire period of a fixed 1 or 2 or more jackpot rounds determined by the jackpot type, or 1 or 2 fixedly determined regardless of the jackpot type Partial period or the entire period of the above jackpot rounds, Partial period or the entire period of multiple small winning rounds determined for each small winning type, Partial period of 1 or 2 or more small winning rounds determined by the small winning type Alternatively, it may be the entire period, or a partial period or the entire period of one or more small hit rounds that are fixedly determined regardless of the small hit type.

Further, for example, as the display control means, the display control device 114 will be described as an example in the first embodiment, but any configuration may be used as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. A voice output device that can output a message prompting the ball to enter a specific area at a specific timing, and can detect the ball entering a specific area with the five human senses (i.e., sight, hearing, touch, taste or smell). Alternatively, an effect means capable of executing a series of notification effects from before the specific area is opened to when the ball enters the specific area until the player wins a prize may be used.

Furthermore, for example, as the discrimination information storage means, in the first embodiment, the probability variation transition flag 203k will be described as an example, but any configuration may be used as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Provided in the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110, or a counter capable of determining the presence or absence of detection by the first detection means, or a mechanical determination means capable of mechanically determining the presence or absence of detection by the first detection means Storage means or the like may be used.

Further, for example, as a storage control means, in the first embodiment, only the passage to the probability variable region 65d that is set to be valid is reflected in the probability variation transition flag 203k, and the passage to the probability variation region 65d that is set to be invalid is the probability variation transition Although the process of not reflecting the flag 203k will be described, any configuration may be used as long as it does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention. , and processing to not count passage to the invalidly set probability variable region 65d in the counter, and processing to reflect only the first winning in the flag or counter, and not to reflect the winning after the second time in the flag or counter, etc. It's okay.

Furthermore, for example, as a granting means, by turning on the probability variable flag 203j based on the passage of the ball to the probability variable region 65d, a process of generating a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends will be described, but the gist of the present invention Any configuration may be used as long as it does not deviate from the above. or a process of shifting to a predetermined game state based on the passage of a ball through a specific area.

Further, for example, as a common effect, in the first embodiment, an example in which a plurality of patterns of the introduction effect 81e of "competition effect" are provided will be described, but any configuration may be used as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. There may be, for example, multiple types of special effects in the effects set for each selected character, and effects performed until reaching a fixed effect (for example, "Aim for V" etc.) A plurality of patterns may be provided.

Here, the specific notification display in the present invention will be explained. In the first embodiment, the specific notification display of the present invention will be explained using the character message 81d of "If you vote for the ○ boat, aim at the attacker" which is executed in the 4th to 9th rounds of the jackpot game. However, any form may be used as long as the notification prompts the player to win a prize in one of the winning openings. It may be a notification prompting the player to win a prize in the specific area, a notification prompting the player to shoot a ball when the number of remaining rounds is low, or a notification for allowing the player to select one of the options. Alternatively, it may be a notification or the like prompting the player to shoot the ball in a specific shooting mode. In the first embodiment, processing of S1651 to S1660 in the probability variable region open processing (S1604, see FIG. 57) is provided as the processing for executing the specific notification display. Details of the specific notification display will be described later.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and prize winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 64, 71, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content of the advance notice display executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as "variable effect"). Also used as

Also, the variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. For example, it is executed triggered by winning a first starting port 64 or a second starting port 71 (see FIG. 3) described later, and after the pattern (third pattern described later) is changed for a predetermined time, it is stopped and displayed. The result of the lottery (whether it is a big win or not) for the winning prize is presented to the player according to the combination of the symbols.

Furthermore, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) to be described later are unified. Stage” and “Island Stage” are provided. Various effects such as the variable effects described above and the "ready-to-reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

In addition, the "ready-to-win display" means a display one step before the "big win display" indicating that a big win will occur in the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. . Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) continues to fluctuate without stopping. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "ready-to-win display" is roughly divided into one unit of elements that constitute the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit of elements that constitute the effect is referred to as a "fluctuation element"), Developed and executed from the "normal reach" variable element, "super reach" variable element with a higher expected jackpot than the "normal reach" variable element, and similarly "normal reach" variable element Developed and executed, A variable element of "special reach" having a higher expectation for a big hit than a variable element of "super reach" is prepared.

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the variable effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the variable element of "high-speed change" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed in the variable effect so that the player cannot see it. This is performed when the player presses the frame button 22 . Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is changed repeatedly in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

Also, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach" or When it develops into the variable element of "special reach", the selection screen of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of "normal reach". It may be configured as

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as variable elements of "Super Reach" or variable elements of "Special Reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach". , according to the determination, the variable element of "super reach" and the variable element of "special reach" are executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. It may be constituted by an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined.

In addition, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the side, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it is a position where the player can press it. For example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper tray 17 or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower tray 50 to be described later.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined "ready-to-win display" is performed, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps. lights up or blinks to notify that the big win is in progress or that the "ready-to-win display" just before the big win is in progress. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") is applied to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 with chrome plating. .) A plating member 36 made of resin is attached.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51 is a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of , a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the period of pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer responsible for each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery A random number generator used for the system, a clock pulse generator circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120 , the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121 , and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 503 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , a variable prize winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit of the third pattern occurs, and a first special prize that is one of the third patterns (so-called special patterns). A first start port 64 that triggers the lottery of symbols, a second start port 71 that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, and a through that triggers the lottery of the second symbol (so-called normal symbol). A variable display device unit 80 having a gate 67, an ordinary electronic device 72 that allows a ball to enter the second starting port 71 by being in an open state, a third pattern display device 81, a second pattern display device 83, etc. and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 .

The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting opening 71, the ordinary electric terminal 72, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 3, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 3) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the central part (hereinafter, the act of shooting a ball with momentum hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as a "right-handed game". On the other hand, the act of causing the shot ball to pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is called a “left-handed game”). In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the ball can or easily enters the first starting port 64, while the ball enters the second starting port 71, the variable winning device 65, and the through gate 67. It is configured to be difficult or not to enter the ball. Also, in a right-handed game, the ball can or easily enter the second starting port 71, the variable winning device 65, and the through gate 67, while the ball is difficult or likely to enter the first starting port 64. configured not to.

Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A special pattern provided with a state LED group 37a, a special LED group 37b, and a right-handed notification lamp 37c made up of a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, is provided on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 3). A display device 37 is provided. The special symbol display device 37 displays each variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols is referred to as " "dynamic display") is performed, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The status LED group 37a indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variable display has not been performed among the balls that have won (entered) the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, which will be described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds (hereinafter, a round may be simply referred to as “R”) and an error display are indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors indicates various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot refers to the period from opening to closing of the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a that opens and closes the variable prize winning device 65, which will be described later, in order to divide the number of prize balls in the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of one embodiment, when "30 seconds" elapses after the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is started, or when 10 balls win during the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, It is configured to run one "round".

The special LED group 37b consists of a total of 12 LEDs, an upper LED group 37b1 consisting of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 likewise consisting of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game executed based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 64. FIG. In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 71. FIG.

Specifically, in the upper LED group 37b1, a dynamic After displaying (in the first embodiment, the uppermost LED in the upper LED group 37b1 and the lower LEDs are sequentially lit one by one, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a pattern indicating the determination result (first embodiment , any one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns is stopped and displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 displays dynamic display ( In the first embodiment, the lower LEDs of the lower LED group 37b2 are sequentially lit one by one from the uppermost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed. Any one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns is displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big win, the type (type) of the big win is displayed. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, a hit/fail judgment (jackpot lottery) is performed to determine whether or not a ball entered into the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 is a big win, and if it is determined that a big hit has occurred in each hit/fail determination, , the jackpot type is also determined according to the winning prize openings 64 and 71, and the variable prize winning device 65 is opened and closed according to each jackpot type.

As the jackpot type determined in the first embodiment, based on the winning to the first start port 64, "10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "variable probability A")", "10 round probability variable jackpot (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "variable probability B") ", "10 rounds variable probability jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "variable probability C")", "10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "variable probability D") There is)”, “10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable probability E”)”, “10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable probability F”)” are prepared ( See Figure 8). In addition, based on the winning of the second start port 71, "10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "variable probability G")", "10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "variable probability H") Yes)”, “10 rounds variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable I”)”, “10 rounds variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable J”)”, “10 rounds variable jackpot ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “variable probability K”)”, “10 round variable probability jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable probability L”)”, “10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “variable probability M”) Yes)”, “10 rounds of variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable N”)”, “10 rounds of variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable O”)”, “10 rounds of variable jackpot ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “variable probability P”)”, “10 round variable probability jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable probability Q”)”, “10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “variable probability R”) Yes)”, “10 rounds variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable S”)”, “10 rounds variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable T”)”, “10 rounds variable jackpot ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "probability variation U")" is prepared (see FIG. 9).

Here, "normal game state" refers to a game state that is not "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", jackpot probability of each special symbol , and a state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is normal (that is, a low probability state) and the opening of the normal electrode 72 is short. That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of each special pattern is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the normal pattern hits than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "general pattern high probability time reduction state". It is configured so that the probability is low (equivalent to the “normal pattern low probability time shortening state”) and the opening time of the normal electric 72 is also short.

Although details will be described later, in the "normal game state", when a so-called right-handed game is played, the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 71 (hereinafter referred to as the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 71). This is sometimes referred to as a "wining assist state"), but is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. It should be noted that, in the "normal game state", if a ball fired in a right-handed game is detected (for example, detection of a ball passing through the through gate 67, etc.), it means that a game that is not encouraged is being executed. In order to suggest to the player and the people involved in the hall, a predetermined warning (for example, voice output of "Please return to the left-handed game" or display of "Please return to the left-handed game" on the third symbol display device 81 etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the non-recommended right-handed game in the "normal game state", and to realize the game performance according to the game specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the winning probability of the special symbols is low, a predetermined number of times ("900 times" in the first embodiment) are continuously won in the dynamic display. If not, as a relief measure for the player, although the probability of winning the jackpot of the special symbols and the probability of winning the normal symbols are in a low probability state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened and the normal electric combination 72 is opened. Equipped with a function (so-called ceiling function) that generates a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" that lengthens the time (hereinafter, when the probability of winning a special symbol is low probability, in the dynamic display 900 times” to enter the “normal low probability time reduction state” without winning the jackpot continuously is called “relief condition fulfillment”, and if the probability of winning the special symbol is low probability state, “relief The number of times that the condition is satisfied is sometimes referred to as the “number of times that the relief condition is satisfied”).

Then, the "general pattern high probability time shortening state" is a low probability state similar to the "normal game state" and the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" described later, but the jackpot probability of each special pattern is normal. As the probability of winning increases, the time of variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter, variable display of normal symbols is referred to as "variable display") is shortened, and the opening time of normal electric role 72 is increased (hereinafter, normal symbols As the probability of winning increases, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is extended. In this "normal figure high probability time shortening state", the normal electric 72 provided above the second starting port 71 in the front view becomes easy to be in an open state, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is the second starting port 71 It becomes a state where it is easy to enter the ball.

That is, in the "general figure high probability time shortening state", although the jackpot probability of the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit by the normal symbol is likely to be derived in a short time than the "normal game state", This is a state in which the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72 is prolonged. Therefore, in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", it is easy to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the second start port 71, so the prize ball based on the win to the second start port 71 (for example, 1 It is possible to play the game while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in possession by obtaining pieces/winning prizes.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is a predetermined number of times (150 in the first embodiment) after the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is started. times), until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the probability of winning the normal symbol is in a high probability state. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times, the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" is changed to the "normal game state".

In addition, when it is detected that the ball is shot by a left-handed game in the "ordinary figure high probability time shortening state", "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state" or "probability fluctuation state" described later (for example, the second 1 detection of a winning ball into the starting hole 64, etc.), and a predetermined warning (e.g., "Please hit right") to suggest to players and hall officials that a game that is not encouraged is being executed. ”, a display of “Please hit right”, etc.). By configuring in this way, it is suppressed that the non-encouraged left-handed game is continuously executed in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or "probability fluctuation state" As a result, it becomes possible to realize the playability according to the game specifications.

Then, the "general pattern low probability time reduction state" is a low probability state similar to the "normal game state" and the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" described later, and the jackpot probability of each special pattern is normal. While the probability of winning is in a state as low as the "normal game state", the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is "variable probability state" and "shortened high probability time state of normal patterns". (Hereinafter, while the probability of hitting the normal pattern is low, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is increased. In addition, the "high-precision time-saving function" and "low-precision time-saving function" may be collectively referred to as "time-saving function"). The ball will enter the second starting port 71 easily.

That is, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", although the jackpot probability of the special pattern and the probability of the normal pattern are equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit due to the variable display of the normal symbol is higher than the "normal game state" This is a state in which it is easy to be drawn out in a short time, and the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72 is long. Therefore, in the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", it is easy to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the second start port 71, so the prize ball based on the win to the second start port 71 (for example, 1 It is possible to play the game while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in possession by obtaining pieces/winning prizes.

This "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is when the jackpot is not won continuously "900 times" in the low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, that is, in the low probability state of the special pattern "900 times ” is performed, when the losing continues to be extracted, it is configured to shift to the “normal pattern low probability time shortening state”.

In addition, the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" is a dynamic special symbol of a predetermined specified number of times (1000 times in the first embodiment) after the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is started. Until the display is executed, the variable display time of the normal symbols is shortened, and the open time of the normal electric part 72 is extended. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times, the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" is changed to the "normal game state".

In addition, when it shifts from the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state", it is configured so as not to be able to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" again. On the other hand, based on the fulfillment of the relief condition, a "general pattern low probability time reduction state" occurs, and in the "general pattern low probability time reduction state", the time reduction end condition based on the number of times of dynamic display of special symbols is established. In the case of shifting to the "normal game state", if the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols reaches the number of relief condition establishment times, it is configured to be able to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state". may

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state", as an added value after the end of the jackpot, it is a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special pattern is increased, and the probability of winning of the normal pattern is increased, and the high-accuracy time-saving function is activated. state.

That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which a big winning result by special symbols is easily derived, a winning result by normal symbols is easily derived, and further, the open state of the normal electric combination 72 is prolonged. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", since the ball fired by the right-handed game easily enters the second starting port 71, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed, and the second starting A prize ball (for example, 1 ball/winning prize) is obtained based on the winning to the mouth 71, and the game can be played while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in the player's possession. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", it is possible to play a game in a state in which a big winning game (special game state) based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is likely to occur.

Here, each jackpot type will be described. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of rounds are set for each jackpot type in which the variable probability region solenoid 65f described later is driven and the variable probability region 65d is opened (see FIG. 17). Specifically, when the probability variable region 65d is open during the round of the big hit, the ball fired by the right-handed game can pass through the probability variable region switch 65g, but when the probability variable region 65d is opened, Entry is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g in the round in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid for each jackpot type (hereinafter, the probability variable region 65d that is set to be valid may be referred to as “effective probability variable region”). In this case, after the end of the jackpot, the "probability change state" is generated, while the probability variable region 65d is set to be invalid (hereinafter, the probability variable region 65d that is set to be invalid may be referred to as "invalid probability variable region"). In the round, even if the winning is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g, it is configured not to generate the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot (see FIGS. 18 and 19. Hereinafter, the probability variable region The case where the ball detection by the probability variable area switch 65g when the ball passes through 65d is effective is sometimes referred to as "the probability variable area 65d is effective".). Therefore, when the ball is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g, and the probability variable region 65d of the round is set to be valid (hereinafter, the probability variable region 65d of the round is set to be valid) The detection of the ball by the area switch 65g may be referred to as "passing through the effective probability variable area"), and after the jackpot is completed, the game is configured to shift to the "probability variable state".

Therefore, the jackpot type "probability variable A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable A" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable B" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable B" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable C" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable C" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type “probability variable D” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot type "probability variable D" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable E" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable E" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type “probability variable F” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable F" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable G" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable G" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "Variable Probability H" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable H" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable I" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable I" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable J" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable J" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable K" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable K" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type “probability variable L” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable L" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable M" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot type "probability variable M" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type “probability variable N” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable N" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable O" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable O" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable P" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable P" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "Variable Probability Q" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable Q" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable R" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable R" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "Variable Probability S" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable S" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type “probability variable T” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable T" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type "Variable Probability U" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "probability variable U" can be selected, and when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the It is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As a stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to losing, 11 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability A", and "variable probability B" for the jackpot type. There are 11 types of display patterns corresponding to , 11 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability C", 10 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability D", and display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability E" There are 10 types of display patterns for , and 10 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability F", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type, and is associated with a random display pattern in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, the stop display of the losing can be recognized, while the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D" ”, “variable probability E” and “variable probability F”.

In addition, as a stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, five types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability G", and five types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability There are 5 types of display patterns corresponding to "H", 5 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability I", 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability J", and 4 types corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability K". There are 4 types of display patterns, 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability L", 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability M", and 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability N". , There are 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability O", 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability P", 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability Q", 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability There are 4 types of display patterns corresponding to "R", 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability S", 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability T", and 4 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability U". There are four types of display patterns, for a total of 64 types of display patterns. And each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type similarly to the upper LED group 37b1, and is previously associated with a random display pattern. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, the stop display of the losing can be recognized, while the jackpot types "variable probability G", "variable probability H", "variable probability I", and "variable probability J" are displayed. ”, “variable probability K”, “variable probability L”, “variable probability M”, “variable probability N”, “variable probability O”, “variable probability P”, “variable probability Q”, “variable probability R”, “variable probability S”, “variable probability T ” or “Variable Probability U” is difficult to identify.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to shift to the "probability variable state" when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game. On the other hand, although the details will be described later, during the jackpot game, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o described later is less than a predetermined value ("2" in this embodiment), each jackpot type for each jackpot round While setting the validity or invalidity of the probability variable region 65d according to the setting of the validity or invalidity of the probability variable region 65d, when the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o reaches a predetermined value, that is, the ball is moved by the probability variable region switch 65g When the number of detected rounds reaches or exceeds a predetermined value, regardless of whether the probability variable region 65d is valid or invalid for each jackpot round according to each jackpot type, the probability variable region 65d in subsequent rounds is disabled. (See remarks column of FIGS. 18 and 19).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, during the jackpot game, the player guesses which jackpot round probability variable region 65d is set to be effective, and when it is expected that it is set to be effective Performs a notification effect in the third symbol display device 81 so as to execute a right-handed game while the probability variable area solenoid 65f is being driven and pass the ball through the probability variable area 65d. On the other hand, if the player expects that the probability variable region 65d of the round is set to be invalid, the right-handed game is interrupted while the probability variable region solenoid 65f is driven, and the probability variable region 65d is set. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a notification effect so as not to let the ball pass through.

For this reason, if there are few display patterns corresponding to each jackpot type, and the player can recognize which jackpot type it is, the player will be able to recognize the jackpot in which the probability variable area 65d is set to be effective. Only in the round, while the variable probability region solenoid 65f is driven, the ball is passed through the variable probability region 65d by continuing the right-handed game, and it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" without fail. A game result different from the pay-out rate based on the game specification that has been used may be derived, and there is a risk of causing an unexpected disadvantage in the game hall.

Therefore, by configuring in this way, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display must be grasped. If so, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish which kind of jackpot only by the display result of the variable presentation, and a game property is created that makes the player guess which kind of jackpot it is, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is a lamp for suggesting a game state in which the ball is encouraged to be shot in a right-handed game. This right-handed notification lamp 37c is in a non-lighting state in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged and right-handed games are not encouraged, while in the "probability fluctuation state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, " Ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state” or “normal pattern low probability time shortening state”, or it becomes a lighting state during the jackpot game. The player can recognize whether or not a right-handed game should be played by checking the right-handed informing lamp 37c and the right-handed game suggestion display on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, during the jackpot game, the player is made to guess whether or not the variable probability region 65d of each jackpot round is set effectively, and according to the guess result, Then, while the probability variable area solenoid 65f is driven, the third symbol display device 81 performs a notification effect so as to determine whether or not the right-handed game is required to be executed. Since the variable winning device 65 is in an open state, the right-handed game suggestion display in the right-handed informing lamp 37c and the third symbol display device 81 is always lit during the jackpot game. .

By configuring in this way, even if the notification effect for determining whether or not to execute the right-handed game while the probability variable region solenoid 65f is being driven is being executed, the player can use the special symbol display device 37 The right-handed game suggestion display in the right-handed information lamp 37c and the third symbol display device 81 can be confirmed. As a result, the player can recognize that any prize ball can be acquired by executing a right-handed game during the jackpot.

A game area of the game board 13 is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 3 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display unit 80, the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 (hereinafter referred to as "starting ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71") Triggered by "win"), while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the special pattern display device 37, the liquid crystal display that performs the variation effect of the third pattern according to the game state. (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device"), and a second symbol display composed of LEDs capable of executing variable display of normal symbols using the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. A device 83 (hereinafter, the second symbol display device 83 may be referred to as a "normal symbol display device 83" for convenience of explanation) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later. , are displayed.

Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of a plurality of patterns, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 to display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is controlled by the main controller 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed by the special pattern display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special pattern display device 37 is performed using the third pattern of the third pattern display device 81. It is. In place of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels, LEDs, or the like.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when both the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are suspended, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed ( So-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation) is configured to be possible. That is, during execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the start winning to the first starting port 64, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is suspended based on the starting winning to the first starting port 64. In this state, furthermore, when the second starting port 71 is started and won, the dynamic display of the second special symbol that has won later is executed before the dynamic display of the first special symbol that has won first. configured to obtain

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a back pattern made of a wooden box and a number from "0" to "9". The main design with "9") has a large number on the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) have characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. almost all over the front of the wooden box. An imitation accessory pattern is added, and an even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern so as to be displayed in green and small and on the front side of the accessory pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is constructed so that a jackpot is generated after the variable performance is completed.

Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that all the main symbols can appear even if any jackpot type is won. Specifically, for example, even when the jackpot type “probability variable A” is won, there is a case where a variation performance is performed in which the same main symbols with the numbers “2” and “8” are aligned. By configuring in this way, for example, at the time of stopping the variable effect, the content of the game value that can be given cannot be determined, that is, which jackpot type is won, and which jackpot round probability variable region 65d is effectively set by the player, so that in which jackpot round during the jackpot, if the probability variable region 65d is passed through, the ``probability variable state'' can be entered. It is possible to create a new game property such as , and improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds is the main display region Dm in which the third pattern is variably produced and reserved. A cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of balls and the like, and the other upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main patterns are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform a variable performance. It should be noted that the arrangement of numbers may be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, the left symbol row Z1 may be arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, while the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and when performing a variable effect corresponding to the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state, the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3. →The third symbols are stop-displayed on the activated line L1 in the order of the middle symbol row Z2. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning special symbol set (displayed) for each game state. be done.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm.

In the cockpit display area Db, the variation display (variation effect) of the balls entered in the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 corresponding to the special symbol set for each game state is not executed. This is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls).

In the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds, there are a dynamic display of the first special symbol and a fourth symbol display area 87 for the special symbol 1 that can change in synchronization with the number of held balls, and a dynamic display area of the second special symbol. A fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2, which can be changed in synchronization with the target display and the number of held balls, and a right hitting instruction 89 for main display are configured to be displayable.

The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 includes a reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 that displays the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in numbers, and a dynamic display of the first special symbol (variation effect) It is composed of a special figure 1 variable area 87b that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 is configured to be able to display the reservation number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the range of "0" to "4" in numerical designs. Specifically, when the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved dynamic display of the first special symbol is 0, and reserved for special figure 1 When the number display 87a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 1, and the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "2". If it is, it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 2, and if the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "3", the number of the first special symbol It shows that the number of pending dynamic display is 3, and if the number of pending display 87a for special figure 1 displays "4", the number of pending dynamic display of the first special symbol is 4. indicates that there is

That is, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 is the content of the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. , and in all game states in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, so as to match the content of the number of pending balls in the pending symbol display area Db1 described later. to be displayed.

The special figure 1 variable area 87b is a display area for showing the execution and result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and is configured such that the display color of the square symbol can be changed. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special figure 1 variation area 87b is white→red→orange→yellow→green→light blue→blue→ It is configured to change at a high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, change again from white to red to . . . during execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Then, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the special figure 1 variable area 87b is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square pattern of the variation area 87b for special figure 1 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was lost, and the square pattern of the variation area 87b for special figure 1 is stopped in red, the dynamic display of the first special symbol indicates a big win. That is, the square pattern of the special figure 1 variable area 87b is displayed so as to correspond to the display contents of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the main display. All game states displayed in the area Dm are configured to be synchronized with the display contents of the main display area Dm.

The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 includes a reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 that displays the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in numbers, and a dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect) It is composed of a special figure 2 variable area 88b that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 is configured so that the number of reserved numbers for dynamic display of the second special symbol can be displayed in the range of "0" to "4". Specifically, when the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0, and reserved for special figure 2 When the number display 88a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1, and the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "2". If it is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 2, and when the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "3", the second special symbol It shows that the number of pending dynamic display is 3, and if the special figure 2 pending number display 88a displays "4", the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol is 4. indicates that there is

That is, the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 is the contents of the number of reserved balls of dynamic display of the second special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. , and in all game states in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, so as to match the content of the number of pending balls in the pending symbol display area Db2 described later. to be displayed.

Special figure 2 variation area 88b is a display area for showing the execution and result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, similar to special figure 1 variation area 87b, the display color of the square symbol is configured to be changeable. It is Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special figure 2 variation area 88b is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It is configured to change at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, repeat the change from white to red to . . . during dynamic display of the second special symbol. Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the special figure 2 variable area 88b is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square pattern of the special figure 2 variation area 88b is stopped in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special figure was lost, and the square figure of the special figure 2 variation area 88b is stopped in red, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to indicate that it was a big win. That is, the square pattern of the special figure 2 variable area 88b is displayed so as to correspond to the display contents of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the main display. All game states displayed in the area Dm are configured to be synchronized with the display contents of the main display area Dm.

The main display right-handed instruction 89 is always displayed in synchronization with the right-handed informing lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37. It is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time shortening state or the normal pattern low probability time shortening state or during the jackpot game.

In addition, since the main display right hitting instruction 89 is important display information that suggests the player how to hit, other display contents (for example, the main display area It is configured to be displayed in the foreground (foremost layer) with priority over the third symbol of each symbol row displayed in the central part of Dm, super reach effect, etc.).

On the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 4B, for example, in the "normal game state", a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. . In the sub-display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, indicating that it is easier than usual to transition to a big win, and a shooting mode that is encouraged according to the game state. etc. are suggested to the player. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair, the color of the usually white headband, and the appearance of another character.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variable effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol When the ball enters the first starting port 64, or the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) changes the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (dynamic display). When a ball enters the second starting port 71 while being held, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of held balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 or the number for special figure 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 It is also displayed in the reserved number display 88a, and further, the variation effect of the special symbol corresponding to the game state is also displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the reserved symbol display area Db1 of the cockpit display area Db. be

In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved ball (number of reserved balls 1 time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed according to the game state. Designs ("○" design (white circle design) in the normal display mode) are displayed respectively, and according to the number of displayed reserved designs displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, depending on the game state The number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed (prioritized display) is displayed.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved design is displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1a, the first special design that is set to be displayed according to the gaming state Or it shows that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed one each in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, the game state Indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed and set according to is two times, and three in total, one each in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c When the reserved pattern is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern set to be displayed according to the game state is three times, and the first to fourth reserved patterns are displayed. When a total of four reserved symbols are displayed one each in the areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is four times. indicates that In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special design or the second special design set to be displayed according to the game state is 0. This indicates that there is no pending variable effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only one of the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol can be executed, and the second special symbol can be executed. Although it is configured to be able to execute the lottery game preferentially, it may be configured to execute the lottery game of special symbols according to the order of winning (so-called winning order fluctuation), and the first special symbol The first lottery game and the second special symbol lottery game may be configured to be executable at the same time. Further, the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol may be configured to be displayed simultaneously on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the first reservation symbol display area Db1a, and execution symbols larger than the reservation symbols displayed in the reservation symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d are provided. configured to be displayed. Further, in this execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a are moved (shifted) and displayed as executed symbols.

The executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 are erased when the variable effect being executed in the main display area Dm is completed, and the displayed suspended symbols are shifted to the lower reserved symbols as the executed symbols are erased. It moves and is displayed as a pattern. Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol in the "normal game state", it was displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol. When the executed symbols are erased, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a are moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved design displayed in the second reserved design display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the first reserved design display area Db1a. Further, the reserved design displayed in the third reserved design display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the second reserved design display area Db1b. Further, the reserved design displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the third reserved design display area Db1c.

In the first embodiment, the number of suspended balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times at the maximum. The number of balls is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the holding balls are displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. A number may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description is continued. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which the ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 performs a normal symbol winning lottery due to the turn-on. This through gate 67 is only used as a lottery trigger for variable display of normal symbols, and is constructed so that prize balls or the like are not paid out even when a ball passes through. In addition, a normal prize winning opening capable of acquiring a normal symbol lottery opportunity may be provided, and a normal symbol lottery opportunity may be obtained, and a predetermined prize ball may be paid out.

On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, an ordinary electric terminal 72 is arranged. The normal electric element 72 is mainly composed of a retractable plate 72a and a normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the retractable plate 72a.

The main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) of the first embodiment normally maintains the protruding/retracting plate 72a of the normal electric part 72 in a projecting state, and covers the upper side of the second starting port 71 in front view, It prevents the ball from flowing into the second starting port 71 . Then, when a win is won in the variable display of normal symbols, the normal electric solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined period of time, and the hive board 72a of the normal electric combination 72 is moved from the protruded state to the game board for a predetermined period of time. 13 is driven to an immersed state in which the ball is immersed in the second starting port 71, and the ball that is hit to the right and flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is the second starting port 71. It is configured to be in a state in which it is easy to win a prize at the starting port 71, that is, in a prize assisting state.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a win in the variable display of normal symbols changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" and "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", the winning probability of the normal pattern is set to a low probability state (for example, 70/100), and in the variable display of the normal pattern, the "probability fluctuation state ”and “General pattern high probability time shortening state”, making it difficult to enter the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 into the immersive state (open state), “Probability fluctuation state” and “General pattern It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the second starting port 71 from the high probability time shortening state. On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state", the winning probability of normal symbols is set to a high probability state (for example, 99/100), and in the variable display of normal symbols "normal game state" and " By making it easier to win a win than the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", the haunting plate 72a of the ordinary electric worker 72 is made easier to enter (open state), and the second start port 71 can be easily won. Configure.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the high-probability state of the normal symbols, the variable display derives the hit with a high probability (that is, 99%), so the "probability fluctuation state" in which the normal symbols are in a high-probability state; In the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", most of the balls fired in the right-handed game are configured to be able to win the second start port 71. On the other hand, among the low-probability states of the normal symbols, in the "normal game state", although the variable display can lead to a win with a low probability (that is, 70%), the opening time of the normal electrode 72 is short, It is configured such that a ball shot in a right-handed game is unlikely to enter the second starting port 71.例文帳に追加In addition, among the low probability states of normal symbols, in the "normal low probability time reduction state", the variable display is in a state in which a win can be derived with a low probability (that is, 70%), and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is a long time like the "probability fluctuation state" and "ordinary figure high probability time shortening state", so that the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the second start port 71.

As a result, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the ball fired in the right-handed game is entered into the second start port 71 while playing the game. By making it possible to perform the above, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of own balls from the "normal game state" by paying out the prize balls based on the winning to the second start port 71. .

In addition, as in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", instead of changing the probability of winning the normal symbol from the "normal game state", according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal electric It is also possible to change the time for which the haunting board 72a of the role 72 is immersed (opened) or the number of times the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 is immersed (opened) per time. Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary figure high probability time reduction state", the time for the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 to be immersed is made longer than the "normal game state", or one hit , the number of times that the haunting board 72a of the normal electric combination 72 is immersed may be increased more than in the "normal game state". In addition, in the “probability fluctuation state” or “normal pattern high probability time shortening state”, the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased, the immersion time of the haunt board 72a of the normal electric role 72 is increased, and the normal electric role 72 At least two of increasing the number of retractions of the protruding/retracting plate 72a may be performed at the same time.

The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the first embodiment), a normal electric machine 72 provided above the second start port 71 when viewed from the front is activated for a predetermined period of time, and when it stops at a symbol other than a predetermined symbol (“x” symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric part 72 is deactivated (the closed state is maintained). It is

The number of reserved balls of the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the above-described second symbol reservation lamp 84 (hereinafter referred to as the second symbol reservation lamp 84, for convenience of explanation, "normal symbol reservation lamp 84" ) is also illuminated. Four normal design reserve lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of reserves, and arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81 . Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed according to the number of lighted normal symbol reserved lamps 84. - 特許庁

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal design display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the special design display device 37 or the third design display device. A part of 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting hole 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. A game nail or the like is planted around the first starting port 64 so that about 6 balls (so-called S1=6) fired in a left-handed game win a prize per minute. When the ball enters the first starting port 64, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by turning on the first starting port switch. (See FIG. 5), a lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol is made. Then, the dynamic display according to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the first special symbol according to the game state. A variation effect based on is executed. The first starting hole 64 is also one of the prize winning holes from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game.

On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, there is provided a second starting port 71 through which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric circuit 72 is in the open state. A game nail is planted in the periphery of the second start port 71 so that about 90 balls fired in a right-handed game win a prize per minute when the normal electric part 72 is in an open state. . When the ball enters the second starting port 71, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second starting port switch. (See FIG. 5), a lottery for the second special symbol jackpot is made. Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation based on the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. A performance is performed. The second starting hole 71 is also one of the prize winning holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters the game.

A variable winning device 65 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so that the stop symbol of the big win is displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, three identical symbols ("777 etc.)) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot game. After that, according to the type of jackpot, a special game state ( The game state transitions to the jackpot game). As this special game state, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, which is normally closed (protruded from the game board 13 board surface), is kept until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses, or until the ball is will be released until 10 prizes are won).

When the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened, it is closed when a predetermined time elapses after opening or when a predetermined number of winnings is detected, and after the closure, the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened again. be. The opening/closing operation of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is configured to be repeatable up to, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player. As a value (game value) is given, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

In addition, inside the variable winning device 65, there are a large winning opening switch 65c for detecting a ball that has won the variable winning device 65, a probability variable area 65d provided downstream of the large winning opening switch 65c, and the probability variable A discharge passage 65h is provided downstream of the region 65d (on the right side in front view).

Furthermore, the probability variable region 65d detects the probability variable region opening and closing plate 65e, the probability variable region solenoid 65f (see FIG. 5) capable of opening and closing the probability variable region opening and closing plate 65e, and the ball that has flowed downstream of the probability variable region opening and closing plate 65e. It is configured with a possible probability variable area switch 65g. In addition, only in the state in which the probability variable area solenoid 65f is opened, the detection of the ball in the probability variable area switch 65g is configured to be possible. This probability variable region solenoid 65f is configured such that the rounds that are driven to open are different depending on the type of jackpot (see FIG. 17). A discharge passage switch (not shown) capable of detecting balls passing through the discharge passage 65h is provided to enable detection of balls passing through the discharge passage 65h. It is configured to be able to recognize whether it has passed through the variable probability region 65d or passed through the discharge passage 65h.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability variable region effective table 202h, when the probability variable region 65d is opened, a predetermined number of effective variable operation to enable the ball detection by the probability variable region switch 65g At least one or more rounds are set for each jackpot type (see FIGS. 18 and 19). Therefore, only when the ball is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g and the probability variable region 65d of the round as the predetermined number of effective variable operation times is set to be effective, after the jackpot ends, the "probability variable state ” is configured to move to The driving mode of the probability variable area solenoid 65f and the details of the probability variable area effective table 202h will be described later in FIGS.

Affixing spaces K1 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It is visible through window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65 and 71 are guided through an out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. The winning balls of the winning holes 63 , 64 , 65 and 71 are guided to the ball discharging path and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as the balls passing through the out hole 66 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing a program, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 sets the dynamic display and variable performance of each special symbol in the jackpot lottery, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

In addition, the ROM 202 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reservation number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a fluctuation pattern table 202e, a jackpot open table 202f, a probability variable area open table 202g, a probability variable area effective table 202h, and a normal figure. At least a random number table 202i, a normal figure fluctuation table 202j, a normal electric service open table 202k, and a time saving end condition table 202m are stored. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. perform lottery for big hits, setting of dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, setting of variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of variable display in the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. Therefore, it is used in MPU 201 of main controller 110 . In the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, various control timings, game state transitions, etc. will also be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 15. FIG.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third pattern display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot pattern. A jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting a variable performance mode, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and variation pattern selection. A variation type counter CS1 used for .

In addition, for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 83, the normal pattern per counter C4 is used, and for the initial value setting of the normal pattern per counter C4, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used.

Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of "2 milliseconds", which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30). , and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 as appropriate. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved balls related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, "0 to 9999"), and reaches the maximum value (eg, "9999" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999"). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter of a range of "0 to 9999". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 29).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64 (start win), the first reserve first to It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reservation areas in the fourth area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (starting winning), the second reserve first to It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation area in one of the fourth areas.

The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a big hit. Also, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a big hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery in the first special pattern and the second special pattern stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

The jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment has a low probability state used when the game state is a special symbol low probability state, and a game state is a special symbol low probability state for a big hit for each set value. It is divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the high probability state of the special pattern with a high probability of becoming.

Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently for each set value. In addition, an increase in the number of large-hit random numbers necessary for shifting from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers corresponding to the losing. That is, when increasing the number of big-hit random numbers in order to shift from a low-probability state to a high-probability state, the number of losing random numbers is reduced, and the decrement is assigned as the number of big-hit random numbers. Thus, by varying the number of big win random numbers according to the game state, the probability of winning a big win is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment, when the setting value is "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 32, and its value "0 to 31" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of each special symbol with the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is 32 /10000=0.32/100 (ie, 0.32%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 315, and the values "0 to 314" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of the special design of the set value "1" is 315/10000 = 3.15/100 (that is, 3.15%), the special design The high-probability state is set so that the jackpot is about 10 times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9968 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "32". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9685 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "315 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( setting). In other words, the set value "1" special symbol low probability state (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") loss probability of each special symbol Is set to be 9968/10000 = 99.68/100 (that is, 99.68%), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the high probability state of special symbols (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is It is set so that 9685/10000=96.85/100 (that is, 96.85%).

That is, at the set value "1", the increase in the number of random numbers for big hits in the high probability state of special symbols is reduced by decreasing the number of random numbers for losing in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. While compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers increased from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" (that is, 9968 or less). is configured to

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 34, and the values "0 to 33" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is 34/ It is set so that 10000=0.34/100 (that is, 0.34%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 317, and the values "0 to 316" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of the special design of the set value "2" is 317/10000 = 3.17/100 (that is, 3.17%), the special design The high-probability state is set so that the jackpot is about 10 times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9966 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "34". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9683 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "317 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( setting). That is, the set value "2" special symbol low probability state (that is, "normal game state", "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state") loss probability of each special symbol Is set to be 9966/10000 = 99.66/100 (that is, 99.66%), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the special symbol high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is It is set so that 9683/10000=96.83/100 (that is, 96.83%).

That is, at the set value "2", the increase in the number of random numbers for big hits in the high probability state of the special symbols is reduced by decreasing the number of random numbers for losing in the "normal game state" where the staying rate is the highest in the game. While compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers increased from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase accompanying the change of the set value is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the ``normal game state''. (that is, 9966 or less).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "1" (low probability state: 0.32% → 0.34%, high probability state: 3.15%→3.17%), it can be said that this is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "1".

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 36, and the values "0 to 35" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol with the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is 36/ It is set so that 10000=0.36/100 (ie 0.36%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 319, and the values "0 to 318" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuation state") of the special design of the set value "3" is 319/10000 = 3.19/100 (that is, 3.19%), the special design The high-probability state is set so that the jackpot is about 10 times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9964 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "36". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9681 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "319 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( setting). That is, the set value "3" special symbol low probability state (that is, "normal game state", "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state") loss probability of each special symbol Is set to be 9964/10000 = 99.64/100 (that is, 99.64%), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the high probability state of special symbols (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is It is set so that 9681/10000=96.81/100 (that is, 96.81%).

That is, at the set value "3", the increase in the number of random numbers for big hits in the high-probability state of the special symbols is reduced by decreasing the number of random numbers for losing in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. While compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers increased from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase accompanying the change of the set value is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the ``normal game state''. (that is, 9964 or less).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "2" (low probability state: 0.34% → 0.36%, high probability state: 3.17%→3.19%), it can be said that this is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the setting value "2".

In this way, by changing the odds of winning a big win for each set probability value and changing the likelihood of winning a big win, it is possible to change the rate of winning balls for each probability set value, which is given to the player. You can change the amount of game value you get. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of game characteristics of the game played in the pachinko machine 10 and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot. in the case of a counter that can take the value of ", it returns to "0" after reaching "119"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, the jackpot is selected from the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area as the first reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71, the jackpot is selected from the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 71. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area as the second reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number (jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot, That is, if it is a random number that becomes a loss (loss random number value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (jackpot random value) that will result in a jackpot, a variable effect The fluctuation pattern and stop type in will be those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 119", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. This jackpot type table 202b includes a special-figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a special-figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. and are provided.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a corresponding special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the jackpot type table 202b is divided into the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and furthermore, the game state corresponds to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. attached table.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when passing through the effective variable probability area, that is, the player guesses that the variable probability area 65d of a predetermined round is set to be effective, and during the opening of the variable probability area 65d of the round When a right-handed game is executed and the ball passes through the probability variable area 65d set to be valid by the probability variable area effective table 202h, the winning probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state until the next big win is won. And, the winning probability of normal symbols also shifts to a "probability fluctuation state" which is a higher probability state than the "normal game state".

Also, when the right-handed game is not executed while the probability variable region 65d of the round is open, and the ball does not pass through the probability variable region 65d set to be valid by the probability variable region effective table 202h, or the probability variable region 65d of the predetermined round is set to be valid, the player executes a right-handed game while the probability variable area 65d of the round is open, and the ball passes through the probability variable area 65d set invalid by the probability variable area valid table 202h. If the number of rounds played exceeds a predetermined value, or in either case, the probability of winning the special symbol is in a low probability state, but the special symbol is a specified number of times (150 times in the first embodiment). Until it is done, the normal pattern hit probability will shift to a high probability state "normal pattern high probability time reduction state".

Therefore, as a jackpot type, the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 10 rounds, and the jackpot types "variable A", "variable B", "variable C”, “Variable D”, “Variable E”, “Variable F”, “Variable G”, “Variable H”, “Variable I”, “Variable J”, “Variable K”, “Variable L”, “Variable M", "variable probability N", "variable probability O", "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" and "variable probability U".

In the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 8, when a jackpot occurs in all game states, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 19" is associated with the jackpot type "probability variable A". The value of the jackpot type counter C2 "20 to 39" is associated with the jackpot type "variable probability B", and the value "40 to 59" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "variable probability C". The value of the jackpot type counter C2 "60 to 79" is associated with the jackpot type "variable probability D", and the value "80 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "variable probability E". The value "100 to 119" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "variable probability F".

Therefore, in the winning lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d is the value that becomes the jackpot. In this case, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area can be selected from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. If the value of the type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "variable probability A" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "118", the jackpot type "variable probability F" can be selected.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot type "variable probability A" is 20/120, the jackpot type "variable probability B" is 20/120, and the jackpot type "variable probability C" is 20/120. , the jackpot type “variable probability D” is 20/120, the jackpot type “variable probability E” is 20/120, and the jackpot type “variable probability F” is 20/120. That is, when a big win is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, all the big win types can be won at an equal rate.

In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1, the maximum number of rounds for all jackpot types is 10R, the conditions for shifting to the "probability fluctuation state" are set to be the same, and all jackpot types are evenly distributed. It is possible to win at a rate, but depending on the jackpot type, it is configured so that the round that validates the ball detection by the probability variable area switch 65g when the probability variable area 65d is opened is different (see FIG. 18).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the first start port 64 can be won and the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed, but it is difficult to win the second start port 71. Since the dynamic display of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is mainly executed in the game state of the left-handed game (that is, the "normal game state"). is configured as

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 9, when the second special symbol jackpot occurs in all gaming states, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type "variable probability G" 0 to 7” are associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 “8 to 15” is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability H”, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 “ 16 to 23” are associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 “24 to 31” is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability J”, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability K” 32 to 39” are associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 “40 to 47” is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability L”, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability M” 48 to 55” are associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 “56 to 63” is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability N”, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability O” 64 to 71” are associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 “72 to 79” is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability P”, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability Q” 80 to 87” are associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 “88 to 95” is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability R”, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability S” 96 to 103” are associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 “104 to 111” is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability T”, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type “variable probability U” 112 to 119” are associated.

That is, in the lottery for the second special symbols in all game states, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a big hit. , the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area can be selected from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "variable probability G" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "118", the jackpot type "variable probability U". can be selected.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot type "variable probability G" is 8/120, the jackpot type "variable probability H" is 8/120, and the jackpot type "variable probability I" is 8/120. , The jackpot type "probable variable J" is 8/120, the jackpot type "probable variable K" is 8/120, the jackpot type "probable variable L" is 8/120, the jackpot type "probable variable M" is 8/120, the jackpot type "probable variable N ” is 8/120, the jackpot type “variable probability O” is 8/120, the jackpot type “variable probability P” is 8/120, the jackpot type “variable probability Q” is 8/120, the jackpot type “variable probability R” is 8/120, The jackpot type “variable probability S” is 8/120, the jackpot type “variable probability T” is 8/120, and the jackpot type “variable probability U” is 8/120. That is, when a big win is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, all the big win types can be won at an equal rate.

In addition, in the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, the maximum number of rounds for all jackpot types is 10R, the conditions for shifting to the "probability fluctuation state" are set to be the same, and all jackpot types are evenly distributed. It is possible to win at a rate, but depending on the jackpot type, the round that makes the ball detection by the probability variable area switch 65g effective when the probability variable area 65d is opened is configured to be different (see FIG. 19).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11, the game mode in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the game state transition conditions and transition destinations in each game state will be described. FIG. 10 shows, in each game state, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the second It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of 2 special symbols and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right. Also, FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the shooting mode in each game state and the transition destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type and the like. Although FIG. 11 also shows the transition of the game state when the game is played in the non-recommended shooting mode, the description thereof will be omitted here for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 10, the transition to the "normal game state" is triggered by dynamic display of special symbols in the factory default state, the RAM clear state, and the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" 150 times. (So-called end of power supply. See FIG. 11.) Or, when the dynamic display of special symbols in the "general pattern low probability time reduction state" is executed 1000 times (so-called end of power supply. See FIG. 11 ), and

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the "normal game state", as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol winning probability is also in a low probability state. Furthermore, in the "normal game state", the left-handed game is encouraged, and the ball shot in the left-handed game mainly wins the first starting port 64. - 特許庁Then, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "5 seconds to 190 seconds", and the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 is "5 seconds to 190 seconds". (see FIGS. 12 to 15, which will be described later). In addition, in this "normal game state", when a right-handed game is performed, the firing mode is detected by the through gate 67 or the like, and based on the detection, a voice is generated in order to suppress the shooting in the right-handed game. The output device 226 (see FIG. 5) or the like is configured to execute the prohibition of hitting to the right.

Then, the opportunity to shift to the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is when the effective probability variable region is not passed in all jackpot types, that is, the probability variable region 65d of the predetermined round is set invalid. Guess, do not run a right-handed game while opening the probability variable region 65d of the round, if the ball does not pass through the probability variable region 65d set to be valid by the probability variable region effective table 202h, or of a predetermined round A player speculates that the probability variable area 65d is set to be valid, executes a right-handed game while the probability variable area 65d is open in the round, and sets the probability variable area 65d invalid by the probability variable area valid table 202h. When the number of rounds passed by the ball reaches a predetermined value or more, in either case, the "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur, so it shifts to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" ( See Figure 11).

In this "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", as described above, while the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is a high probability state. Furthermore, in the "normal figure high probability time reduction state", as in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is the second You can win a prize at the starting port 71 . Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is "15 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 12 to 15 to be described later). It should be noted that, in this "normal figure high probability time shortening state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "probability variable state" is when all the jackpot types pass through the effective probability variable region, that is, the player guesses that the probability variable region 65d of the predetermined round is set to be effective. When the right-handed game is executed while the probability variable region 65d of the round is open and the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d set to be valid by the probability variable region effective table 202h (see FIG. 11).

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is in a high probability state, and the normal symbol winning probability is also in a high probability state. Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the second start port 71 in which the high-accuracy time-saving function is operating. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is "15 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 12 to 15 to be described later). In this "variable probability state", right-handed games are encouraged, so even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is when the jackpot is not won continuously "900 times" in the low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, that is, the low probability of the special pattern This is the case where the failure continues to be extracted while the dynamic display is performed "900 times" in the state (see FIG. 11).

In addition, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is also a low probability state, but the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is long (see FIG. 23). Furthermore, in the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter the second start port 71 in which the low probability time reduction function is operating. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is "15 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 12 to 15 to be described later). In addition, in this "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within a range of, for example, "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the first embodiment, depending on the pending number of suspended variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the rough effect mode of the variable effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and at the time of losing is determined. selected. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a long pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "long") in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected for each effect mode, and a variation time shorter than the long pattern. and a short pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "short") in which a shorter fluctuation time than the middle pattern is likely to be selected. It is

Specifically, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, and "normal reach" as "reach display" "Normal reach" effect mode in which only the variable element is executed, "Super reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and the same "normal reach" change Any one of six performance modes can be selected, including a "Special Reach" performance mode in which variable elements of "Special Reach" are executed by developing from the element.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, there are a "non-reach (long)" production mode, a "non-reach (middle)" production mode, and a "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (long)" production mode, The "reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode may be collectively referred to as "the "non-reach" production mode". In the third symbol display device 81 in which . This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop and "ready-to-win display" does not occur.

In addition, the variable element of "high-speed variation" is, for example, in the variable performance of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is , a variable element that is rapidly scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third pattern is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third pattern cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the previously stop-displayed variable production is irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, specific production modes ("non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode) are excluded. It is configured so that the variable element of "low speed variation" is performed at the

The "low speed variation" variable element means that, in the third symbol variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the "high speed variation" variable element, the third symbol is displayed at a speed that is visible to the player. A moving element that scrolls to In this "low-speed variation" variable element, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in order while allowing the player to recognize the display contents of the third symbol. When the same third symbol is stopped in the two symbol rows (for example, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4)) that are stopped and displayed first, it is assumed that the "ready-to-win display" occurs and the "normal reach" is displayed. While it develops into a variable element, when a different third pattern stops in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 which are stopped and displayed first, the remaining pattern row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is finished. is configured to Details of each variable element including the variable element of "high-speed variation" or the variable element of "low-speed variation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "low speed variation" variation element is performed after the "high speed variation" variation element is performed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stop in order, A different third pattern is stopped in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped first, the remaining one pattern row Z2 is stopped, and one variation effect is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the "low-speed variation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed variation" is performed, and the "high-speed variation" variation is performed. After the completion of the elements, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped at the same time, and the third symbol different from the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (for example, the two symbol rows that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode). is stopped, the other symbol row Z2 is also stopped, and the variation effect of 1 is completed.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode means that the same third pattern is stopped in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped and displayed first in the variation production of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81. Immediately after that, the "normal reach" variable element is executed, and another "reach display", that is, one of the production modes of "reach display" that does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" be.

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "super reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

Among the presentation modes, the "special reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "special reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting port 64 It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first storage area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second start opening 71, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting opening 71 It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second storage area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the stop pattern selection counter C3 according to the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of variable performances of both special symbols currently on hold (number of pending balls) The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the values is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) of both special symbols in standby.

Also, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number table 202c on hold provided in the ROM202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode, which is a rough mode of the variable effect, is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the acquired third symbol variation effect, In order to change the selection ratio of the production mode according to whether it is a low probability time shortening state or a normal game state, and (3) how many pending ball numbers of the variable production are held. is.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the stop patterns, that is, the "non-reach" performance mode, the "normal reach" performance mode, the "super reach" performance mode, and the "special reach" performance, are used when the jackpot lottery is won and when the jackpot lottery is lost. The degree of expectation for a big win is changed for each performance mode by configuring the mode selection ratio to be different. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the ``non-reach'' performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected.

By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode in which it is easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired result of the lottery is a big win, the stop pattern table 202d makes it easy to select an effect that makes it easy to win a big win and makes it difficult to select an effect that makes it difficult to win a big win. Based on, it is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) which is a rough content of the variable performance. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and a performance mode (stop pattern) of a variable performance is selected based on a stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that makes it difficult to win a big win. Configure to select. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third pattern in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win in the variable performance and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. In the case of the variable performance, it is difficult for the big win to occur, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode (stop pattern), the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, as the second reason, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol is the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible the useless ball (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) based on the ball entering the second start port 71 in the state of reaching.

Specifically, the number of standby times for the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and since the variation production is executed for at least a certain period of time, the "probability In the game state where the ball is likely to enter the second start port 71 in the "variation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol easy to reach. In these game states, if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected, the ball entering the second start port 71 in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached occurs frequently, and the second start port In spite of entering 71, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be acquired. In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached, if a variable performance with a long variation time is selected, the first special symbol is suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first start port 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player judges that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the first start hole 64, and the variable effect is terminated and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. Until then, the game is interrupted by stopping the shooting of the balls. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special pattern or second special symbol) is easily reached, and the maximum number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) The number of held balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variable time is likely to be selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball entering the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. can.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), the ball is newly inserted into either the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variable effect cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demonstration screen or the like. When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Instead, they lose interest in the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first start port 64 and the second start port 71 because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will be judged to be a machine with which it is difficult to obtain a game value, and the game will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the number of pending balls of the variable effect is small, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variable time is likely to be selected. there is As a result, a situation in which the third pattern display device 81 is not subjected to the variable performance can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

In addition, as a fourth reason, in the gaming state in which the right-handed game is executed, by setting the execution time of the variable display of the first special symbol long, the number of times of execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is reduced. (that is, to increase the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a right-handed game is recommended in the "probability fluctuation state", the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". When the normal electric combination 72 is in the open state by the right-handed game, the ball can be entered into the second starting port 71, so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be easily executed. However, in spite of the continuation of the right-handed game, the ball does not pass through the through gate 67 that will activate the normal electrode 72, or the ball enters the open normal electrode 72. If the ball is not played, all the reserved balls of the second special pattern that have been stored so far are digested, and there is a possibility that the dynamic display of the second special pattern that becomes executable will be lost. In this way, when there is no executable second special symbol reserved ball, and there is an executable first special symbol reserved ball, dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. Become.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the case where the dynamic display of the second special symbol wins the jackpot is higher than the case where the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins the jackpot. is configured to have a higher probability of transitioning to the "probability fluctuation state" (details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19). Therefore, it is configured to facilitate the continuation of the ``Renso'' when winning the jackpot through the dynamic display of the second special symbol rather than winning the jackpot through the dynamic display of the first special symbol. .

For this reason, although the right-handed game is continued, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the dynamic display of the executed first special symbol wins a jackpot, the second The probability of shifting to the ``probability fluctuation state'' is lower than when winning a jackpot in the dynamic display of 2 special symbols, and the possibility of ending the ``renso'' is higher.

In order to avoid such an event that the game value obtained by the player is lower than expected, the game state ("probability fluctuation state", "normal figure high probability time reduction state" and In the "general figure low probability time reduction state"), by setting the execution time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol long, the number of times of dynamic display of the first special symbol can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the details of the pending number table 202c will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a diagram schematically showing the reservation number table 202c1 for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and FIG. 12(b) is for special figure 2 corresponding to the second special symbol It is the figure which showed typically the number table 202c of reservations.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the first starting port 64, whether the variation effect is appropriate and Based on the game state at the time point and the total number of reservations of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol at the same time point, refer to the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1 to select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 It is configured. Further, when performing the variation performance of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second start port 71, the propriety of the variation performance, the game state at that time, and the second special at that time Based on the total number of reservations of the variable effect of the design, reference is made to the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2, and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 is selected. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the special figure 1 reserved number table 202c1 of FIG. 3", the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 13A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Also, at the time of extracting a loss in the "normal game state", when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "4", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 13(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d selected. On the other hand, when extracting the jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Next, at the time of extracting the loss of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", A table 202d1 of stop pattern table 202d regardless of the number of pending balls (see FIG. 13(a)) is selected. Also, at the time of jackpot extraction of "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", C table 202d3 of stop pattern table 202d regardless of the number of pending balls (see FIG. 13(c)) is selected.

Next, as shown in the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2 of FIG. , the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 13A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Also, when extracting a loss in the "normal game state", when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "4", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 13(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d selected. On the other hand, when extracting the jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Next, when extracting the loss of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "1" , the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 13A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. In addition, at the time of extracting the loss of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the number of pending balls of the second special pattern is "2 to 4 , the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 13(d)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. On the other hand, at the time of jackpot extraction of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", C table 202d3 of stop pattern table 202d regardless of the number of pending balls (see FIG. 13(c)) is selected.

In addition, when extracting a jackpot in the dynamic display of any special design, the first special design is lost in "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" Also at the time of extraction, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ according to the number of reserved balls. For example, when a big win is won and the number of held balls is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured so that a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected.

In this case, for example, in each rendering mode in which "ready-to-reach display" is executed, a rendering mode in which only the time of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. . By configuring in this way, for example, when the variation production is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four times, even if the variation element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 5 seconds, At the time when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" ends (when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" is recognized), the "ready-to-win display" may occur in the variation performance. Therefore, even if the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the rendering mode in which the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" rendering mode is executed is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variable performance will result in a big hit or a loss at the time of execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13(a) schematically shows an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 13(b) schematically shows an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 13C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. Also, FIG. 13D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 13A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In addition, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

That is, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected on the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode on the B table 202d2. is configured as On the other hand, in the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2, each "reach display" is configured to be selected at the same rate.

Therefore, the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are selected so that the long effect mode and the middle effect mode are different only in the "non-reach" effect mode, so the A table 202d1 is selected in comparison with the B table 202d2. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance tends to be relatively long. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to shorten the variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the A table 202d1.

In this way, in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the pending variable production. configured to For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in which the variable effect time is relatively short is selected. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is small, in order to ensure the ball entry time to the first start port 64 (second start port 71), the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode A "non-reach (long)" performance mode with a longer variable performance time is selected. As a result, the ``non-reach (long)'' performance mode with a longer variable presentation time than when the ``non-reach (middle)'' presentation mode is selected can be performed, so that the ball enters the first starting port 64. - 特許庁It becomes easy to secure the time, and by increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is executed can be maintained. .

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the first start port 64 Alternatively, the determination of the variable performance based on when the ball enters the second starting port 71 and the determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the entering are made so that substantially the same performance mode is selected. is configured to

Specifically, for example, in the case of a losing variable effect, either one of the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, but the A The table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 have a "non-reach (long)" effect mode, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, or a "special reach" effect mode. are set to the same value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 allocated to .

That is, based on the number of pending balls of the variable production, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the "non-reach" production mode is selected or the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is selected. , and substantially the same effect mode is selected, with the only difference being the time of the variable elements of the "high-speed variation". Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same (similar) even if the game state changes (for example, the number of held balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice" is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of starting winning, the contents of the variable presentation to be executed are substantially the same (similar), and the pre-reading In the variable performance that is the target of the notice, it is possible to execute the performance that does not cause any inconsistency with the contents of the pre-reading notice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4", The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”.

Note that the C table 202d3 is a stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of a big win, and since "ready-to-win display" always occurs, the "non-ready-to-win" effect mode is set so as not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13(d), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in the D table 202d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

Therefore, as shown in the C table 202d3, in the variable effect at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the "special reach" effect mode>"super reach" effect mode>"normal reach" effect mode, and the A table 202d1, B As shown in the table 202d2 and the D table 202d4, in the variable effect at the time of losing, the selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "normal reach" effect mode > "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. there is Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player according to the performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

From the above, the type of special symbol, the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of pending balls of the variable effect at that time By determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, the game By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on the situation in which is performed, a performance mode for enhancing the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be selected.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened A table 202d may be provided. Also, it may be configured to select the effect mode based on the total reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Furthermore, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d having completely different selection rates for each effect mode may be provided according to the number of pending balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, in performing a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice", the number of pending balls at the time of deciding the pre-reading notice execution The number of pending balls at the time of execution of the variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. In such a case, it is necessary to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the processing complicated.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 29). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting hole 64, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first reservation first to fourth areas. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting hole 71, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 71. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation time (rough variation pattern) of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determine the time of variation. The audio ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the fine pattern variation mode based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1. Also, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance You can increase the degree of freedom to choose. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as the variation pattern table 202e, a special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 used when the first special symbol is lost, and a special figure 1 big winning variation pattern table 202e2 used when the first special symbol is a big winning. And, a special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 used when the second special symbol is lost, and a special figure 2 big winning variation pattern table 202e4 used when the second special symbol is big winning are prepared.

FIG. 14(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation pattern table 202e2. In addition, FIG. 15(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 stored in the ROM202, and FIG. 15(b) is a figure 2 stored in the ROM202 It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e4 for big hits. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, each variation pattern table 202e1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of losing, "E0: non-reach (long)" which is referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, and "non-reach (middle)" production mode "E1: non-reach/middle" referred to when is determined, "E2: non-reach/short" referred to when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is determined, and " For "E3: Normal Reach" referred to when the "Normal Reach" production mode is determined, "E4: Super Reach" for reference when the "Super Reach" rendition mode is determined, and "Special Reach" rendition It is divided into "E5: Special Reach" for reference when the mode is determined.

In addition, as the effect mode at the time of the big hit, "E3: Normal reach" referred when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E4: Super reach" referred when the "super reach" effect mode is determined For "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined.

A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area with the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random value), that is, If the value is lost, refer to the reserved number table 202c1 for special figure 1, and select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time. , the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area was reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the first special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach long" includes "high speed variation (long)" with a total variation time of "15 seconds". variable element + variable element of "low-speed variation"" (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time").

In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach/long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for "Variation element of", and only "Variation element of "High speed variation (long)" + Variation element of "Low speed variation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol, "high-speed change (long)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

Here, each variable element constituting the variation pattern will be described. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of "high-speed variation", the variable element of "low-speed variation", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" A variable element, a "revariation" variable element, is provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. When the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the like is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the variable production (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). ), and when the “non-reach (middle)” production mode is selected, “5 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the variable production (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “high-speed fluctuation (medium)”), When the "non-reach (short)" effect mode or the like is selected, the variable effect is performed for "2 seconds" at the beginning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed change (short)"). It should be noted that when the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the later-described "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" is started after the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "10 seconds" is executed, and it is determined whether or not the third symbol is visibly scrolled and varied to generate "ready-to-win display". It is a variable element to show. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode are selected, and the "non-reach (long)" production mode, " When the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode is selected, it is performed for "5 seconds" after the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation".

That is, in the "non-reach (middle)" production mode or the "non-reach (short)" production mode, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, each pattern row of the third pattern display device 81 is changed to "low-speed fluctuation is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop) without going through the variable elements of . In addition, when the variable element of this "low-speed variation" ends, the variable effect may end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode includes the variable element of "high speed variation" of "10 seconds" and the variable element of "low speed variation" of "5 seconds". A variation production is configured with a variation pattern including. In addition, in the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the variable elements of "high-speed variation" of "5 seconds". Furthermore, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the "high-speed variation" variable element of "2 seconds".

The variation element of "normal reach" is the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "reach formation symbol") in the two symbol rows that stop first in the variation element of "low speed variation". It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur depending on the result of the variation of the symbol row. This "normal reach" variable element is performed for "5 seconds" after the "low speed change" variable element when the "normal reach" effect mode or the like is selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, a pattern of directly displaying "loss display", a pattern of directly displaying "jackpot display", and a pattern of "super reach" are displayed. A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" variable element, and a pattern that once displays a temporary "loss display" and then executes a "re-fluctuation" variable element are prepared. It is

The variation element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variation element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "battle effect"). This "super reach" variable is performed "40 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "missing display" appears.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variable element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a special effect (for example, "competition effect") different from the predetermined effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "160 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-fluctuation" after the "failure display" appears is prepared.

In addition, it is configured to develop into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" after executing the variable element of "normal reach", but instead of this configuration, reach formation after "low speed change" It may be configured such that when the symbols stop, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" develops directly without going through the variable element of "Normal Reach". Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display", and the "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after execution of the variable element of "re-variation".

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of the "missing display", the variable elements of the "re-variation" are not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-fluctuation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "loss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot If you go to , there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the variation element of this "re-variation" is selected only in the big hit variation pattern tables 202e2 and 202e4 (see FIGS. 14(b) and 15(b)), and the loss variation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e3 (see FIG. 14 (a) and FIG. 15(a)) is configured not to be selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E1: non-reach middle" has one of "only "high-speed variation (medium)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "5 seconds" Variation patterns are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 14(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "only the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (medium)"" It is "0 to 9" and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (medium)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (medium)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E3: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" + One variation pattern of “Normal reach” variation element” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed variation” + variation element of “normal reach””. In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "variation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 9" for "element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 9”) is associated with “variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'”. In other words, in the case of the "super reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: Special Reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach' is '0 to 9', and the variable element of 'high speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low speed fluctuation' + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element” is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 9”) is associated with “a variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “special reach””. In other words, in the case of the "special reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "Variable element of 'special reach'" is selected.

In addition, since the variation pattern at the time of losing the first special symbol is determined as the variation pattern as it is, the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. In addition, although selection is performed using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used together for selection (selection of presence/absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(b), the variation pattern table 202e2 for the special figure 1 jackpot, which is referred to at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the first reservation ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit, the reservation number for special figure 1 By referring to the table 202c1, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area A rendering mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E3: normal reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Revariation" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Two variation patterns are selectably prepared as "variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed Variation pattern of "variation element + variation element of "normal reach"" is 30%, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation" + variation element of "normal reach" + "re-variation It is set so that the variation pattern of "variable element of" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element" is easily selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring so that the fluctuation pattern of ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is also selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 14(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" fluctuation factor + “re-fluctuation” fluctuation factor” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured so that a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'" is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 14(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 50%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Special Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "variation element" variation pattern and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation The fluctuation patterns of the elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be equally expected in any variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(a), the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss referred to when the second special symbol is lost will be described. If the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding area with the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a big hit value (jackpot random value), that is, it is a losing value. In this case, referring to the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and stored in the same reserved area. An effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area was reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the second special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach long" includes "high speed variation (long)" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds". variable element + variable element of "low-speed variation"" (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time").

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach/long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for "Variation element of", and only "Variation element of "High speed variation (long)" + Variation element of "Low speed variation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "high-speed change (long)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E1: non-reach middle" includes one of "only "high-speed variation (medium)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "5 seconds" Variation patterns are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "only the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (medium)"" It is "0 to 9" and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (medium)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (medium)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E2: non-reach short" includes one of "only "high-speed variation (short)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "2 seconds" Variation patterns are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach/short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" It is "0 to 9", and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (short)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E3: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" + One variation pattern of “Normal reach” variation element” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed variation” + variation element of “normal reach””. In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "variation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E4: Super Reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 9" for "element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 9”) is associated with “variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'”. In other words, in the case of the "Super Lee" production mode in the variable production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 16A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach' is '0 to 9', and the variable element of 'high speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low speed fluctuation' + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element” is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 9”) is associated with “a variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “special reach””. In other words, in the case of the "special reach (middle)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" variable element + variable element of “special reach”” is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the variation pattern table 202e4 for the special figure 2 to be referred to when the second special symbol is hit will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the second reservation ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit, the reservation number for special figure 2 By referring to the table 202c2, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area A rendering mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E3: normal reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Revariation" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Two variation patterns are selectably prepared as "variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 15B, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed Variation pattern of "variation element + variation element of "normal reach"" is 30%, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation" + variation element of "normal reach" + "re-variation It is set so that the variation pattern of "variable element of" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of “variation factor of” is likely to be selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring so that the fluctuation pattern of ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is also selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 15(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variable element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" ” variable element + “re-fluctuation” variable element” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured so that a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'" is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 15(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 50%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Special Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "variation element" variation pattern and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation The fluctuation patterns of the elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be equally expected in any variation pattern.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The normal figure per counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). In addition, when the counter C4 per normal pattern makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the counter per normal pattern C4.

In addition, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) 1 It is updated twice and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 29).

The value of the counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30)), and the timing at which it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 In, it is stored in one of the general pattern reservation first to fourth areas provided in the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i in the order stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h, and the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 stored in the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i hit judgment.

The value of the random number that is the winning pattern is set by the random number table 202i stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state (for example, 70/100 in the low probability state, 99/99 in the high probability state). 100 etc.), and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern retention ball execution area 203i of the RAM 203 matches the random number value set by the random number table 202i per normal pattern. , it is determined to be a hit. Then, the normal pattern variation table 202j is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal pattern is set (for example, 15 seconds when the time saving function is not activated, 0.1 seconds when the time saving function is activated), After the lapse of the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "O" is lighted and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, the normal electric role opening table 202k is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is set (for example, 0.1 seconds × 1 time when the time saving function is not activated, 5 times when the time saving function is activated) 8 seconds×1 time, etc.), and during the opening time, the retractable board 72a of the ordinary electric member 72 operates to open, and during this time, the ball can enter the second starting port 71.

On the other hand, if the value of the counter C4 per general pattern stored in the general pattern reservation area does not match the value of the random number that is set by the random number table 202i per general pattern, it is determined to be lost. Then, the variable display time is set by referring to the normal symbol variation table 202j according to the game state, and after the variable display time has elapsed in the normal symbol display device 83, the "x" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol (normal symbol). Lights up. In addition, the random number table 202i per normal pattern, the normal pattern variation table 202j, and the normal electric role release table 202k will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, input/output It also has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output, hereinafter abbreviated as “I/O”) are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 27) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 46) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, and a normal figure reserved ball number counter 203g. , Normal figure reservation ball storage area 203h, Normal figure reservation ball execution area 203i, probability variation flag 203j, probability variation transition flag 203k, probability variation region effective flag 203m, probability variation region open timer 203n, probability variation region passage number counter 203o, short time low probability flag 203p , time-saving high-precision flag 203q, time-saving counter 203r, relief counter 203s, and relief setting completed flag 203t.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is a special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed on the display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) is up to four times. A counter that counts up to

The first reserved ball number counter 203a (special area passage number counting means) is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 27) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning to the first start port 64 is detected and the number of pending balls for dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added to the maximum value "4" (first number). (see S305 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S508 in FIG. 33).

The second pending ball number counter 203b, like the first pending ball number counter 203a, is the second starting port 71 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Suspension of dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (variation performance of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the start winning It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting times) up to four times.

As with the first reserved ball counter 203a, the second reserved ball counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initialization process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 27). Then, every time the start winning to the second start port 71 is detected and the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 31 (see S309 of ). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the first reserved ball. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the number command or the second reserved ball number command (see S312 in FIG. 31). The first reserved ball number command is sent to the second start port 71 every time the start winning to the first starting port 64 is detected and the first reserved ball counter 203a is incremented by 1. This is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 dynamically displays the first special symbol or second special symbol reserved by the main controller 110 by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of suspensions of dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. In addition, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 is detected, the main controller 110 transmits the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113 By doing so, the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol managed by the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual dynamic display (variation Even if the number of reserved balls is deviated from the number of reserved balls in the performance), the deviation can be corrected by the first received number of reserved balls command or the second received number of reserved balls command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command In the number of balls command, not only the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b incremented by 1, but also the trigger for adding the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b Along with the above starting winning, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6) are also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 is the first The number of pending pitches command or the second number of pending pitches command is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 .

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is Before the variable performance based on each value is executed, it is read ahead, and how the variable performance becomes (whether it becomes a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed. Then, based on the result of determination by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the contents and execution timing (timing) of the "holding change notice".

It should be noted that the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be separately transmitted. As a command that indicates the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, the first Generates a command for the number of 1 reserved balls or a command for the number of 2 reserved balls, and generates a command similar to the variation pattern command and the stop type command (preliminary variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) based on the incoming ball, and controls the voice lamp. It may be configured to transmit to device 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the first start port 64. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores (holds) data corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) up to four times. It has areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the second start port 71. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the second starting port 71 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores (holds) data corresponding to one starting prize in the second special symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f starts execution, or the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 dynamic It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display and variable effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device In order to execute the dynamic display of 81 and the setting of variable effect, etc., the data (counter C1 to C3, CS1), the data corresponding to the oldest start winning is shifted to this holding ball execution area 203f. Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the first special symbol or second special symbol jackpot lottery, the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set target display and variable effect.

As described above, the setting of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect include the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery. C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first starting port 64 (start winning), The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the second starting port 71 (start winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reservation areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first reservation ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. It is

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to 1. Although each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e is collectively provided, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64 (start winning) is stored. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the empty areas of the 4 reservation areas (1st reservation 1st to 4th areas). remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the first start port 64 that is older in terms of time is stored, and the first reserve first area stores the data to the first start port 64 that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 71 (start winning) is stored. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reservation areas (2nd reservation 1st to 4th areas). be. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the second starting port 71 that is older in terms of time is stored, and the second reserve first area stores the data to the second starting port 71 that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing a value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. there is

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect of the special symbol, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If so, the data stored in the second reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when the execution start timing of the variable effect comes, the MPU 201 stores no data in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the first reserved area, the data stored in the first reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referenced in the variation start process (see FIG. 34), and a big win lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result. and determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81, based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, the special symbol A variable performance is performed.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, it determines whether or not data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is changed to the jackpot random number of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the second holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the second holding ball storage area 203e stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Suppose that In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, the data in the second reserved fourth area to the second reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the second reservation areas (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

On the other hand, when the MPU 201 determines that the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when it is time to start executing the variable effect, then the first reserved ball storage area 203e It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reservation first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reservation first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reservation ball execution area 203f. shift to Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the first holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the first holding ball storage area 203d stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Suppose that In this state, the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, the data in the first reserved fourth area to the first reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first reserved second area to the first reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the first reservation area (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

In this way, the data related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are stored separately. When the data is stored, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and when the data regarding the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not stored, the first special symbol is displayed. When the dynamic display is stored, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and by performing the dynamic display based on each data, the first special A dynamic display of the symbol and a dynamic display of the second special symbol can be performed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The normal pattern holding ball number counter 203g displays the normal pattern based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of variable display of normal symbols performed by the device 83 up to a maximum of 4 times.

As with the reserved ball number counters 203a and 203b, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203g is set to "0" as an initial value by the initialization process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 27). Then, each time the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected and the number of held balls for variable display relating to normal symbols increases, 1 is added to the maximum value "4" (see S405 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal pattern is executed (see S705 in FIG. 44).

The normal pattern holding ball storage area 203h is a memory for storing the normal pattern per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of passage of the ball to the through gate 67. FIG. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern from the counter buffer 203c, and stores the normal pattern reserved ball. Store in area 203h. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h has four reserved areas (normal pattern holding first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

The normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i is a memory for storing the data (the value of the normal pattern per counter C4) to be referred to in the process of starting the execution or the normal pattern winning lottery and variable display processing during execution. be.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal design, in order to execute the processing such as the setting of the normal design winning lottery and the setting of the variable display of the normal design display device 83, the above-mentioned normal design reservation ball Of the data stored in the storage area 203h (the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern), one data is shifted to this normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h and the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i will be described. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h and the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to perform processing such as normal symbol winning lottery and setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. be.

As described above, the normal symbol winning lottery and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83 use the normal symbol winning counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery. The normal pattern holding ball storage area 203h stores the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the through gate 67 .

The normal map holding ball storage area 203h is composed of four holding areas (normal map holding first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (normal pattern reservation 1st to 4th area) is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern that stores the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern.

In this general pattern holding ball storage area 203h, data acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (value of counter C4 per general pattern) is stored up to 4 times, but in that case, 4 holding Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant areas (1st to 4th areas for normal map reservation). In other words, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored, and the data of the ball passing through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored in the first area of the normal map reservation area. Data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is composed of only one area. Similar to the general-pattern holding ball storage area 203h, the general-pattern holding ball execution area 203i is provided with a general-pattern random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the general-pattern counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of normal symbols, the data stored in the first general pattern reservation area of the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203h is transferred to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203i. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i is referred to in the normal pattern variation processing (see FIG. 44), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed, and the contents of the variable display to decide. In the normal symbol display device 83, under the control of the main controller 110, variable display is performed based on the determined contents.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable display of normal symbols, the random value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern in the first area of the normal pattern retention ball storage area 203h. is shifted to a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern of the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i.

Then, when the shift of the data to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i is completed, the normal pattern holding first area becomes empty, so it is stored in each area (2nd to 4th) of the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203h. Shift processing is performed to shift the (suspended) data to areas (first to third) with area numbers one smaller. In the first embodiment, the data is shifted only for the general pattern reservation areas (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (reserved) in the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203h.

Here, the data shift performed with respect to each reservation area in the normal figure reservation ball storage area 203h is demonstrated. For example, when it is determined to start variable display of normal symbols, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g is "4", and all areas (first to fourth) of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h Suppose data is stored. In this state, the data of the normal pattern reservation first area is shifted to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203i, and when the normal pattern reservation first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 is the other area (2nd to 4th) , are shifted to areas (1st to 3rd) whose area number is 1 smaller. In other words, the data of the 2nd area of the reservation of the general pattern is shifted to the 1st area of reservation of the general pattern, the data of the 3rd area of the reservation of the general pattern is shifted to the 2nd area of the reservation of the general pattern, and the data of the 4th area of the reservation of the general pattern. is shifted to the 3rd area for general map reservation.

Further, for example, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g when the start determination of the variable display of the normal pattern is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the normal pattern reserved second area to the normal pattern. Shift to the drawing reservation first area to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the general pattern reservation area (third to fourth) where data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the general map reservation area (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (reserved) in the normal drawing reservation area (second to fourth), so it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The probability variation flag 203j is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. The variable probability flag 203j is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, when the variable probability transition flag 203k described later is turned on, the variable probability flag 203j is set to ON (see S6403 in FIG. 43). Then, when the jackpot is won, it is set to OFF (see S602 in FIG. 38). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable probability flag 203j is turned on, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state as the special symbol high probability state. .

Probability variation transition flag 203k is a flag for indicating that a high probability state of special symbols (that is, "probability variation state") occurs in the ON state. The variable probability shift flag 203k is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, during the jackpot, when the ball is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g, if the probability variable region effective flag 203m described later is turned on (S6308 in FIG. 42: Yes), the probability variable transition flag 203k in the off state is turned on (see S6309 in FIG. 42). After that, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 43), when the high probability state of the special symbol is set by turning on the probability variation transition flag 203k, that is, when the probability variation flag 203j is set to ON, the probability variation transition The flag 203k is set to OFF (see S6402 in FIG. 43).

The probability variable region valid flag 203m is a flag for indicating that the probability variable region 65d of the round is set to be valid in the ON state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability variable area effective flag 203m is set to ON, when the ball is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g, the probability variable transition flag 203k is set to ON, and the jackpot ends. It is configured so that a "probability change state" will occur later.

The variable probability area valid flag 203m is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the probability variable area effective table 202h (see FIGS. 18 and 19) is set based on the jackpot type (see S652 in FIG. 38), and each round starts during the jackpot. Every time, based on the probability variable region effective table 202h set in the jackpot, the probability variable region effective flag 203m is set to ON (see S6105 in FIG. 40). After that, when the probability variable region 65d is closed in the big winning opening open process (see FIG. 41), the probability variable region effective flag 203m is set to OFF (see S6211 and S6220 in FIG. 41).

The probability variable area open timer 203n is a timer counter for measuring the opening time of the probability variable area 65d. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability variable region open timer 203n is started (added) at the timing when the probability variable region 65d is set to be opened, and the value of the probability variable region open timer 203n reaches "5000", That is, when "10 seconds" have passed since the variable probability region 65d is set to open, the variable probability region 65d is configured to be closed.

The probability variable area open timer 203n is cleared as an initial value of "0" when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and when a jackpot is won (see S603 in FIG. 38). Then, when the probability variable region 65d is set to open in the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 39), this probability variable region open timer 203n is started (see S6056 in FIG. 39). When the probability variable area open timer 203n is started, the value of the probability variable area open timer 203n is incremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) is executed (that is, every 2 milliseconds). 5000", that is, when 10 seconds have passed since the probability variable area 65d was opened (see S6217 of FIG. 41: Yes), or in a situation where the closing process of the big winning opening is executed, the probability variable area When 65d is open (see S6208: Yes in FIG. 41), this variable probability area open timer 203n is cleared to "0" (see S6212 and S6221 in FIG. 41).

The probability variable area passage count counter 203o is a counter that counts the number of rounds in which the ball is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g during the jackpot. In the first embodiment, if the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o is less than a value of 2 or more as an effective variable operation set for each jackpot type (in the first embodiment, less than "2"), the probability variable area While the effective flag 203m can be turned on, when the value of the probability variable area passing number counter 203o is equal to or more than the value as the effective variable operation set for each jackpot type ("2" or more in the first embodiment), It is configured so as not to turn on the probability variable region valid flag 203m in subsequent rounds (see remarks in FIGS. 18 and 19).

In addition, when the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is equal to or greater than the value as an effective variable operation set for each jackpot type, when the ball passes through the probability variable area 65d after that, the ball is entered by the probability variable area switch 65g. It may be configured not to detect.

This variable probability area passage count counter 203o is cleared to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and when a jackpot is won (see S603 in FIG. 38). Then, in the first count when the ball is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g in each jackpot round, 1 is added when the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o is smaller than the value set for each jackpot type. (see S6306 in FIG. 42). After that, in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 43), the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o is cleared to "0" (see S6409 in FIG. 43).

It should be noted that the probability variable area passing number counter 203o is a value set for each jackpot type (in the first embodiment, the jackpot type "variable probability A" to "variable probability F" at the time of winning the jackpot (see S603 in FIG. 38). If "2" is set as an effective variable operation, and "3" is set as an effective variable operation if the jackpot type "variable probability G" to "variable probability U"), and the ball is detected by the variable probability area switch 65g in each jackpot round , and the value of the variable probability area passage number counter 203o is not "0", the configuration may be such that 1 is subtracted. In this case, when the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o becomes "0", the probability variable area valid flag 203m not on.

The time reduction low probability flag 203p is in the ON state and is in the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", which is the low probability state of the normal pattern, the shortened state of the variable display time of the normal pattern, the open long period of the normal electric role 72 This is a flag to indicate that the The time-saving low-accuracy flag 203p is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM is cleared (see S116 in FIG. 27). Then, in the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed more than a total of "899 times" (that is, "900 times" or more) in the low probability state of the special symbol and the number of relief condition establishment times is reached. In order to shift to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the time reduction low probability flag 203p is set to ON (see S5406 in FIG. 37). After that, when the value of the time saving counter 203r described later is no longer greater than "0" in the time saving counting process executed in the fluctuation stopping process executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol is stopped, and the time saving When the low probability flag 203p is set to ON (see S5303: No in FIG. 36), or is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S604 in FIG. 38).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time saving low probability flag 203p is turned on, the special symbol is in a low probability state and the normal symbol is also in a low probability state, and the random number table 202i per normal symbol is referred to. However, the normal symbol variable display time is set by referring to the normal symbol variation table 202j as the normal symbol shortening state, and the normal symbol open state is the normal symbol open extended state. The table 202k is referred to and the ordinary electric circuit 72 is driven to open.

The time-saving high-probability flag 203q is in the ON state, "normal pattern high-probability time shortening state" or "probability fluctuation state", which is a high probability state of normal symbols, and a shortening state of variable display time of normal symbols, This is a flag for indicating that the ordinary electric circuit 72 is in an extended open state. The time-saving high-accuracy flag 203q is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM is cleared (see S116 in FIG. 27). Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at the end of the jackpot, regardless of the jackpot type and the state of the variable probability transition flag, the time-saving high-accuracy flag 203q is set to ON (see S6404 or S6405 in FIG. 43). . Thereafter, when the value of the time saving counter 203r, which will be described later, is no longer greater than "0", and the If the time-saving high-accuracy flag 203q is set to ON (see S5303: Yes in FIG. 36), or is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S604 in FIG. 38).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time-saving and high-probability flag 203q is turned on, as a high-probability state of normal symbols, the random number table 202i for normal symbols is referred to, and a winning lottery for normal symbols is performed. , the normal symbol variation table 202j is referred to as the shortened state of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is set, and the normal symbol opening table 202k is referred to as the extended open state of the normal symbol 72, and the normal symbol 72 is set. is opened.

Next, the time-saving counter 203r is a counter for determining the end condition of the "time-saving function", and counts the number of times the dynamic display of each special pattern is executed after the jackpot ends and when the relief condition is satisfied, and determines the time-saving end condition. This is a counter for determination. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, time-saving end conditions are set differently depending on the number of executions of special symbols at the time of a big win and at the time of relief conditions being established, and execution of dynamic display of the set special symbols. When the number of times is performed, the ``time saving function'' being executed is terminated, and the ``normal pattern high probability time reduction state'' or ``normal pattern low probability time reduction state'' is configured to shift to the ``normal game state''. It is

The time saving counter 203r is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 27) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Also in the winning process, the value of the time saving counter 203r is cleared to "0" as the initialization process at the time of the big win (see S605 in FIG. 38). Then, in the jackpot end processing, when the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned off, "150" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203r (see S6406 in FIG. 43). In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is more than "899 times", that is, when the value of the relief counter 203s described later becomes a value larger than "899" And, similarly, when the relief setting completion flag 203t described later is not set to ON, "1000" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203r (see S5404 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the value of the time saving counter 203r is subtracted by 1 each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed once in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" ( See S5301 in FIG. 36).

Then, when the value of the time saving counter 203r becomes "0" (S5302 in FIG. 36: No), it is determined that the time saving end condition based on the number of times of execution of each special symbol is met, and the time saving high accuracy that is turned on is determined. It is configured to set the flag 203q or the time saving low probability flag 203p to OFF (see S5304 or S5305 in FIG. 36) and end the "time saving function".

The relief counter 203s is a counter for counting whether or not to shift to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" based on the number of times dynamic display of special symbols is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when dynamic display of special symbols is executed "900 times" in the low probability state of special symbols, that is, when the value of the relief counter 203s reaches "900", , It is configured to shift the game state to "normal figure low probability time shortening state".

The relief counter 203s is set to "0" as an initial value in the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S117 in FIG. 27). Then, in the low probability state of special symbols, that is, in the "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", dynamic display of special symbols is executed once. 1 is added every time (see S5402 in FIG. 37). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the value of the relief counter 203s reaches "900", if the relief set flag 203t described later is not set to ON (that is, if it is OFF), While setting "1000" to the value of the time saving counter 203r, the time saving low probability flag 203p is set to ON (see S5404 and S5406 in FIG. 37), and the state shifts to "general map low probability time shortening state".

The relief counter 203s is cleared to "0" at the beginning of the winning process when a big win is won (see S607 in FIG. 38). Thus, every time a big win occurs, the number of relief condition fulfillment times is set again, and when the period during which the special symbols are not won in the dynamic display of the special symbols after the big win game reaches a predetermined period, relief measures are taken for the player. As a result, it is possible to generate a "normal figure low probability time reduction state".

The relief setting completion flag 203t is a flag for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the special symbols has reached the number of relief condition establishment times after the jackpot game. This relief setting completion flag 203t is set to OFF as an initial value in the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S117 in FIG. 27). Then, in the low-probability state of the special symbols, when the dynamic display of the special symbols does not win the jackpot "900 times" in succession, that is, when the value of the relief counter 203s reaches "900", the jackpot wins. After the game, the ceiling function is set to ON assuming that it has been activated once (see S5405 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning a big win (see S606 in FIG. 38).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the relief setting completion flag 203t is set to ON, that is, when the ceiling function is activated even once after the jackpot game, the ceiling function is not generated again. By referring to the relief set flag 203t, the ceiling function to be activated after the big win game can be limited to once.

In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, when a big win is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a jackpot referred to for opening control of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is stored. A release table 202f is stored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot release table 202f will be described. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot opening table 202f stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The jackpot opening table 202f is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type that generated the jackpot of each special symbol, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, etc. (the number of rounds, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of prizes won, number of prize balls) and the game state to be shifted after the end of the big win are defined.

First, the jackpot opening table 202f includes the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 (hereinafter, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 are collectively referred to as the “starting port 64 , 71”) are selected based on the type of the jackpot won, and the opening modes and the like are classified.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", it is referred to when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F" For "normal game state" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", jackpot type "probable variable G", "probable variable H", "probable variable I”, “Variable J”, “Variable K”, “Variable L”, “Variable M”, “Variable N”, “Variable O”, “Variable P”, “Variable Q”, “Variable R”, “Variable S", "probable variable T" or "probable variable U", which is referred to when winning, "normal high probability time reduction state, probability fluctuation state, normal low probability time reduction state" 65a is defined.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot release table 202f, the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F ”, the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 (hereinafter, the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 may be referred to as the “large winning opening”) is operated for 10 rounds. is repeatedly opened and closed. The opening time of the jackpot (the opening time may be hereinafter referred to as "OP time") is set to "30 seconds", and the interval is the closing time between one round of the jackpot and the next round. The time (hereinafter, the interval time may be referred to as "IT time") is set to "1 second", and the jackpot ending time (hereinafter, the ending time may be referred to as "ED time"). It is set to "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", at the time of winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", After the jackpot game ends when the area is not passed, it shifts to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", When "Variable probability E" or "Variable probability F" is won and after the jackpot game when passing through the effective variable probability area, the state is shifted to "Variable probability state".

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal high probability time reduction state/probability fluctuation state/normal low probability time reduction state", the jackpot types "variable probability G", "variable probability H", "variable probability I", "variable probability J”, “variable K”, “variable L”, “variable M”, “variable N”, “variable O”, “variable P”, “variable Q”, “variable R”, “variable S”, “variable When "T" or "Variable Probability U" is won, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the jackpot type "variable probability G", "variable probability H", "variable probability I", "variable probability J" , "variable probability K", "variable probability L", "variable probability M", "variable probability N", "variable probability O", "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" Or at the time of winning the "probability variation U", after the jackpot game ends when it does not pass through the effective probability variation area, it shifts to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state", the jackpot type "variability G", "Variable H", "Variable I", "Variable J", "Variable K", "Variable L", "Variable M", "Variable N", "Variable O", "Variable P", "Variable Q", At the time of winning to "probability variation R", "probability variation S", "probability variation T" or "probability variation U", after the jackpot game when passing through the effective probability variation area, to shift to "probability variation state" is configured to

In this way, in the "continuous" state in which the right-handed game is maintained and the special symbol jackpots occur frequently, the OP time, IT time, and ED at the time of the jackpot when one of the jackpot types is won. By configuring the time to be shorter than the OP time, IT time and ED time of the initial jackpot in the ``normal game state'', the time to complete the entire jackpot during the ``continuous game'' state is shortened and the ``continuous game'' state is achieved. , it is possible to shorten the arrival time to the next jackpot. As a result, the time until the next big win occurs in the "continuous" state can be shortened, and the time until the next big win arrives in spite of the "continuous" state is prolonged, thereby improving the game of the player. By generating a series of big wins at an early stage while suppressing the excitement of the game, the player can feel refreshed and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by making the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the initial jackpot in the "normal game state" longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "continuous game state", It becomes possible to execute various productions. By configuring in this way, for example, explanation of the game method in the pachinko machine 10 at the OP time and ED time of the first big win (for example, suggestion of shooting mode, suggestion of prevention of forgetting to remove the card inserted in the card sand, future (explanation of the game state, etc.), and a performance to congratulate the first big win from the "normal game state" can be executed, making it easier for the player to understand the game method of the pachinko machine 10, and finally winning the big win. It is possible to perform a performance that contributes to improving the interest of the player by making the player feel.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state" jackpot types "probability variation A", "probability variation B", "probability variation C", "probability variation D", "probability variation E" Or, if "variable probability F" is won, in each round from 4R to 9R, the player guesses whether the variable probability area 65d of the round is set to be valid, and the variable probability area 65d is set to be valid. When it is assumed that there is, the third symbol display device 81 performs a notification effect so that the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d by executing the right-handed game while the probability variable region 65d is open, and then From the 10th R, an effect for informing the game state after the big win derived from the game results of the 4R to 9R (that is, either "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state") It is configured to spend up to the ED time.

With this configuration, even when the number of prizes awarded to the variable prize winning device 65 reaches 10 during execution of the performance of notifying the result in the 10th round and the 10th round ends and the ending shifts to the jackpot, At the big win ending, the performance of the result notification can be continued and executed until the end, and the performance of the result notification and the game state after the big win can be explicitly notified.

In addition, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a at the time of the big win based on the big win type (OP time, IT time, ED time, number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning prizes, number of prize balls and transition game state) are as described above. It is not limited to the embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of opening times (number of rounds) may be changed for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. It can be configured to change Since the number of prize balls that can be paid out differs for each type of jackpot won, it is possible to make a difference in the game value directly given according to the type of jackpot won.

Moreover, it is not necessary to shift to a separate game state for each jackpot type, and it may be configured to shift to a common game state for a plurality of jackpot types. Furthermore, the OP time and the ED time may be configured to be different, or the IT time may be set longer than the OP time and the ED time. Also, the minimum open time for one round may be set to a time shorter than the IT time, the OP time, and the ED time. Furthermore, at least one of OP time, IT time and ED time may be set to be the same time for each jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the opening/closing pattern of the variable probability region 65d will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variable probability area open table 202g. The variable probability area open table 202g in FIG. 17 indicates whether the variable probability area 65d of each round is opened or remains closed for each jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 17, each round from 1R to 3R when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F" , and in 10R, the variable probability area 65d is in a closed state, and even if the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win by continuing the right-handed game in the round, the ball cannot or does not pass through the variable probability area 65d. becomes a difficult situation.

In addition, in each round from 4R to 9R when winning the jackpot type "Variable A", "Variable B", "Variable C", "Variable D", "Variable E" or "Variable F", the big winning mouth In 10 seconds after the open/close plate 65a is opened, the probability variable region 65d becomes an open state, and during this time, a right-handed game is executed and the variable winning device 65 wins, so that the ball can pass through the probability variable region 65d. Become.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, depending on the jackpot type, when the probability variable region 65d is opened, the round that activates the ball detection by the probability variable region switch 65g is configured to be different. (See FIG. 18), even if the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d, if the probability variable region 65d of the round is not set to be valid, it can shift to the "probability variable state" after the end of the jackpot. configured to prevent

Also, if you win the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the probability variable area 65d is " 2 times”, the probability variable area 65d after the round after the round that reached “2 times” is the following rounds (during the jackpot game limited), all the variable probability regions 65d are configured to be invalid (see the remarks column in FIG. 18).

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B", "probability variation C", "probability variation D", "probability variation E" or "probability variation F", that is, the dynamic display of the first special symbol , select 2 rounds out of 6 rounds from 4R to 9R in which the probability variable region 65d is opened, pass the ball through the probability variable region 65d, and pass the ball out of the two rounds, If the probability variable region 65d of any round is set valid, it is configured to shift to the "probability variable state" after the end of the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, for example, when the jackpot is won, the player is allowed to guess which round of the probability variable region 65d is set effectively, A predetermined number of rounds as an effective variable operation (in the first embodiment, when the first special symbol is a jackpot, the effective variable operation is "twice", and when the second special symbol is a jackpot, the effective variable operation is "three times"). When the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d, if the probability variable region 65d of any of the passed rounds is set to be valid, it shifts to a "probability variable state", and the probability variable of all the rounds that are passed If the area 65d is set to be invalid, it is configured to shift to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" without shifting to the "probability fluctuation state".

In the conventional pachinko machine, when a jackpot is won, the main controller 110 draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the "probability fluctuation state", and the lottery result is notified by a pattern display device or the like. The player only confirms the result of the lottery on a symbol display device or the like. That is, when a jackpot is won, the "probability fluctuation state" is predetermined according to the jackpot type by the winning pattern, and even if the probability variable area 65d is provided, it is determined according to the jackpot type. There is a game machine that gives a "probability fluctuation state" without any problem as long as the ball is shot at the given timing.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the player guesses which jackpot round probability variable region 65d is set effectively, and which jackpot round probability variable region 65d is effectively set. It is possible for the player to decide whether or not to let the ball pass through the area 65d by his/her own selection, and to determine whether or not to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" based on the result, thereby creating a new game property and improving interest. can be planned.

In addition, when the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 6 rounds of 4R to 9R where the probability variable region 65d is opened, the right-handed game can be implemented at the same time as the opening of the big winning opening opening and closing plate 65a of the round. On the other hand, if the player guesses that the variable probability area 65d of the round is set to be invalid and does not let the ball pass through the variable probability area 65d, after opening the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the round, 10 Since the variable probability region 65d is open for a second, the ball is not launched during this period. Then, after 10 seconds from the opening of the large winning opening opening and closing plate 65a, the variable probability region 65d is in a closed state. The right-handed game can be resumed to obtain the prize balls of the corresponding round.

Here, if the opening time of the variable probability area 65d is set to be the same as the opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, that is, the opening time of the variable probability area 65d is the maximum opening time of one round "30 Seconds", in a situation where the player guesses that the variable probability area 65d of the round is set to be invalid and does not let the ball pass through the variable probability area 65d, Since the area 65d is open, the right-handed game cannot be executed and won by the variable winning device 65, and the prize balls of the round cannot be obtained. As a result, the player may lose interest in the game due to the feeling of loss of not being able to obtain the prize balls that were originally obtained due to not being able to obtain the balls worth of one round.

Also, if the opening time of the variable probability area 65d is extremely short (for example, "1 second"), a right-handed game is executed while the variable probability area 65d of the round is closed, and the prize balls of the round However, if the player guesses that the probability variable region 65d of the round is set to be valid and wants to pass the ball through the probability variable region 65d, the opening time of the probability variable region 65d is short. Therefore, there is a possibility that the ball cannot be passed through the variable probability area 65d even if the right-handed game is executed. As a result, the player may get excited about the game if the ball cannot pass through the variable probability region 65d and the "probability variable state" cannot be acquired.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening time of the variable probability area 65d in one big winning round is set to "10 seconds", so that the player feels that the variable probability area 65d of the round is set to be effective. If you want to speculate and pass the ball through the variable probability area 65d, you can pass the ball through the variable probability area 65d by executing a right-handed game in "10 seconds" which is the opening time of the variable probability area 65d. Also, if the player guesses that the variable probability area 65d of the round is set to be invalid and does not want the ball to pass through the variable probability area 65d, the opening time of the variable probability area 65d "10 seconds" is set to the right. By executing the right-handed game in the remaining "20 seconds" after closing the probability variable area 65d without executing the hitting game, it is possible to provide an opportunity to win the prize balls of the round, so one round's worth To prevent the dissatisfaction of not being able to acquire the paid-out balls, and to suppress the player's excitement in the game.

In addition, by configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the variable probability region 65d is open, there is a period during which the launch is interrupted when the ball is not passed through the variable probability region 65d. To prevent the number of balls acquired by a player from becoming excessive per time due to a decrease in the speed at which prize balls are paid out to the player due to the occurrence of a period during which the shooting of the balls is interrupted during the jackpot game. be able to. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to play the game appropriately without aggravating the gambling spirit of the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in each round from 4R to 9R in which the probability variable region 65d is opened, the probability variable when the player guesses that the probability variable region 65d of the round is set to be effective The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a suggestive display so as to execute a right-handed game while the area 65d is open (see FIG. 62(a)). Furthermore, including the period during which the suggestive display is performed, the right-handed hitting notification lamp 37c of the special pattern display device 37 and the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for the main display on the third pattern display device 81 are always displayed during the jackpot. It is

Temporarily, during the jackpot, the right-handed game suggestion on the third symbol display device 81 without displaying the right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 and the main display right-handed instruction 89 on the third symbol display device 81 When only the display (for example, 81d in FIG. 62(a)) is displayed, there is no display of the right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 and the main display right-handed instruction 89 in the third symbol display device 81, A player who starts a right-handed game or prepares for a right-handed game based on the display of the right-handed informing lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 can recognize that the variable winning device 65 is in the open state. Otherwise, there is a risk of losing the winning ball. In addition, due to discrepancies between the notification contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the notification contents of the right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37, the player can accurately recognize whether or not to play the right-handed game. There is a risk of causing unnecessary confusion such as hesitating to play right-handed games.

Therefore, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the right-handed hitting notification lamp 37c of the special pattern display device 37 and the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for the main display on the third pattern display device 81 are always displayed during the jackpot. By configuring, the player can recognize that any prize ball can be acquired by executing a right-handed game. In addition, by ensuring the consistency of the notification contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37, it is possible to accurately grasp that the player is playing a right-handed game.

Then, the jackpot type "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "variable O", " In each round from 8R to 10R, the probability variable region 65d is It is in a closed state, and even if the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win by continuing the right-handed game in the corresponding round, the ball cannot or hardly passes through the variable probability region 65d.

In addition, the jackpot type "probable variable G", "probable variable H", "probable variable I", "probable variable J", "probable variable K", "probable variable L", "probable variable M", "probable variable N", "probable variable O", " In each round from 2R to 7R when winning "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" or "variable probability U", the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened In 10 seconds after the time, the variable probability area 65d is opened, and during this time, a right-handed game is executed and the variable winning device 65 wins, so that the ball can pass through the variable probability area 65d.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, depending on the jackpot type, when the probability variable region 65d is opened, the round that activates the ball detection by the probability variable region switch 65g is configured to be different. (See FIG. 19), even if the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d, if the probability variable region 65d of the round is not set to be valid, the "probability variable state" can be transitioned after the end of the jackpot. configured to prevent

In addition, the jackpot type "probable variable G", "probable variable H", "probable variable I", "probable variable J", "probable variable K", "probable variable L", "probable variable M", "probable variable N", "probable variable O", " If you win "Variable P", "Variable Q", "Variable R", "Variable S", "Variable T" or "Variable U", the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the variable region 65d reaches "3 times" Then, the probability variable region 65d after the round after the round that reached "three times" is configured to be all invalid regardless of the setting contents of the special figure 2 probability variable region valid table 202h2 (of FIG. 19 See remarks column).

Therefore, the jackpot type "probability G", "probability H", "probability I", "probability J", "probability variation K", "probability variation L", "probability variation M", "probability variation N", "probability variation O", " If you win ``variable probability P'', ``variable probability Q'', ``variable probability R'', ``variable probability S'', ``variable probability T'' or ``variable probability U'', that is, if you win a jackpot with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, Of the 6 rounds from 2R to 7R in which the probability variable region 65d is opened, 3 rounds are selected and the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d. If the probability variable region 65d is set to be effective, it is configured to shift to the "probability variable state" after the end of the jackpot.

In addition, when the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in 6 rounds of 2R to 7R where the probability variable region 65d is opened, the right-handed game can be implemented at the same time as the opening of the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the round. On the other hand, if the player guesses that the variable probability region 65d of the round is set to be invalid and interrupts the ball launch and does not let the ball pass through the variable probability region 65d, the large winning opening opening and closing plate of the round Since the variable probability area 65d is in an open state for 10 seconds after the opening of 65a, the ball is interrupted during this period. Then, after 10 seconds have passed since the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened, the variable probability area 65d is closed, and after that, a right-handed game can be performed to obtain the prize balls of the round.

Next, with reference to FIG.18 and FIG.19, the effective pattern of the probability variable area|region 65d for every jackpot classification is demonstrated. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 probability variable area valid table 202h1, and FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 probability variable area valid table 202h2. In the probability variable region effective table 202h shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the probability variable region 65d that is set to be effective in each round is shown for each special symbol jackpot type, and the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid in each round. The area 65d is set to be valid, and the variable probability area 65d is set to be invalid in rounds marked with "?".

As shown in FIG. 18, in the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variation A", the probability variation region 65d is set to be valid only in the 4R eye, and other rounds (that is, 1R to 3R and 5R to 10R each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

In addition, when winning the first special symbol jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the number of times of passing probability area counter 203o When the value is "2" or more, it is configured not to turn on the probability variable region valid flag 203m. That is, when winning the jackpot type "Variable probability A", "Variable probability B", "Variable probability C", "Variable probability D", "Variable probability E" or "Variable probability F", the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d is " When it reaches "2 times", the probability variable area 65d after the next round of the round that reaches "2 times" is configured to be all invalid regardless of the setting contents of the special figure 1 probability variable area valid table 202h1. there is

Here, even after the next round after the round in which the number of rounds in which the ball passed through the probability variable region 65d reached "2 times", the probability variable region 65d as set in the special figure 1 probability variable region valid table 202h1 is set to be valid or invalid, the player can open the probability variable region 65d in all rounds (that is, 6 rounds of 4R to 9R in the jackpot types “variable probability A” to “variable probability F”). If the ball is allowed to pass through , it becomes possible to pass the ball in the round in which the probability variable region 65d is effectively set, and the state is shifted to the "probability variable state".

That is, when the jackpot is won, the player is made to guess which round probability variable region 65d is set effectively, and a predetermined number (in the first embodiment, "2" at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol, the second At the time of the special pattern jackpot, when the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d of the round of "3"), if the probability variable area 65d of any of the rounds that is passed is set to be valid, the "probability variable state" , and if the variable probability regions 65d of all the passed rounds are set to be invalid, the game property of shifting to the “general pattern high probability time reduction state” is lost, and the newly created game property will collapse, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will be significantly impaired.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d reaches "twice", the probability variable region after the next round of the round that reaches "twice" By configuring 65d to be all invalid, the player guesses the round in which the probability variable area 65d is set to be valid, and selects 2 rounds out of 6 rounds in which the probability variable area 65d is opened. As a result of allowing the ball to pass through the probability variable region 65d, it is possible to establish a new game property in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the "probability variable state", thereby creating a new game property. Along with this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 4R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variation area 65d is effective 4R At the start of , the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d has never reached "twice". Therefore, in the jackpot type "variable probability A", the variable probability area 65d opened in the 4th R is configured so as not to be invalidated by the game results up to the 3rd R.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variable A" is won, the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 4th round, so that the state shifts to the "probability variable state" after the jackpot ends.

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot type "variable probability B", the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid only in the 5R, and other rounds (that is, each round of 1R ~ 4R and 6R ~ 10R) in the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation B" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 4R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variation area 65d is effective 5R At the start of the roll, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d has never reached "2". Therefore, in the jackpot type "variable probability B", the variable probability area 65d opened at the 5th round is configured so as not to be invalidated by the game results up to the 4th round.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variable B" is won, the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d at the 5Rth time, so that the state shifts to the "probability variable state" after the jackpot ends.

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot type "variable probability C", the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid only in the 6R, and other rounds (that is, each round of 1R ~ 5R and 7R ~ 10R) in the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation C" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 4R (see FIG. 17), and if the probability variation area 65d is provided in the 4Rth and 5Rth When the ball is passed through, both the 4R and 5R probability variable regions 65d are set to be invalid in the special figure 1 probability variable region valid table 202h1. can't

Furthermore, when the probability variable region 65d is passed in the 2 rounds of the 4R and 5R, the value of the probability variable region passage counter 203o becomes "2", and the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on in the 6R and subsequent rounds. become.

Therefore, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation C", by passing the ball through the probability variation area 65d in the 6Rth where the probability variation area 65d is set to be valid, after the jackpot ends "probability variation state" Although it will be transferred, if the probability variable region 65d is passed in the 2nd round of the 4th and 5th rounds, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o is "2" at the start of the 6th round Therefore, at the start of the 6R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the 6R probability variable region 65d remains invalid. It becomes a passage and cannot be moved to "probability change state".

In other words, if the jackpot type "probability variation C" is won, in the 2 rounds of the 4Rth and 5Rth, if the number of rounds passed through the probability variation area 65d is "1 time" or less, the 6Rth Since the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o at the start is "1" or less, the probability variable area valid flag 203m is turned on, the probability variable area 65d is set to be valid, and the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d at the 6Rth. By doing so, it is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variation D", the probability variation area 65d is set to be valid only in the 7Rth, and the other rounds (that is, each round of 1R ~ 6R and 8R ~ 10R) in the probability variation area 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation D" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 4R (see FIG. 17). When the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the round, the probability variable regions 65d of 4R to 6R are all set to be invalid in the special figure 1 probability variable region valid table 202h1. cannot pass.

Furthermore, when the probability variable region 65d is passed in 2 rounds of 4R to 6R, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o becomes "2", and the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on in the 7R and subsequent rounds. become.

Therefore, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation D", by passing the ball through the probability variation area 65d in the 7Rth where the probability variation area 65d is set to be valid, after the jackpot ends "probability variation state". Although it will be transferred, if the probability variable region 65d is passed in two rounds of 4R to 6R, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o is "2" at the start of the 7th R Therefore, at the start of the 7R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the 7R probability variable region 65d remains invalid. It becomes a passage and cannot be moved to "probability change state".

In other words, if the jackpot type "probability D" is won, in the 3 rounds of 4R to 6R, if the number of rounds passed through the probability change area 65d is "1 time" or less, at the start of the 7R Since the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o in the 7R is less than or equal to "1", the probability variable area valid flag 203m is turned on, the probability variable area 65d is set to be valid, and the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d at the 7Rth. It is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variation E", the probability variation area 65d is set to be valid only in the 8Rth, and the other rounds (that is, 1R ~ 7R, 9R and 10R each round) in the probability variation area 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation E" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 4R (see FIG. 17). When the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the round, the probability variable regions 65d of 4R to 7R are all set to be invalid in the special figure 1 probability variable region valid table 202h1, so in the selected 2 rounds, the effective probability variable region cannot pass.

Furthermore, when the probability variable region 65d is passed in 2 rounds of 4R to 7R, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o becomes "2", and the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on in the 8R and subsequent rounds. become.

Therefore, if you win the jackpot type "probability change E", by passing the ball through the probability change area 65d in the 8Rth where the probability change area 65d is set to be valid, after the jackpot ends, the "probability change state". Although it will be shifted, if the probability variable region 65d is passed in two rounds of 4R to 7R, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o is "2" at the start of the 8th round. Therefore, at the start of the 8R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the 8R probability variable region 65d remains invalid. It becomes a passage and cannot be moved to "probability change state".

In other words, if the jackpot type "probability E" is won, in the 4 rounds of 4R to 7R, if the number of rounds that pass through the probability change area 65d is "1 time" or less, at the start of the 8R Since the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o in the 8R is less than or equal to "1", the probability variable area valid flag 203m is turned on, the probability variable area 65d is set to be valid, and the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d at the 8Rth. It is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Then, in the jackpot type "probability variation F" of the first special symbol, the probability variation region 65d is set to be valid only in the 9Rth, and the probability variation region 65d is set in other rounds (that is, each round of 1R to 8R and 10R). Disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation F" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 4R (see FIG. 17), so it is assumed that 2 of 4R to 8R When the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d in the round, the probability variable regions 65d of 4R to 8R are all set to be invalid in the special figure 1 probability variable region valid table 202h1. cannot pass.

Furthermore, when the probability variable region 65d is passed in 2 rounds of 4R to 8R, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o becomes "2", and the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on in the 9R and subsequent rounds. become.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability F", if it is originally, by passing the ball through the variable probability area 65d in the 9R-th time when the probability variable area 65d is set to be valid, after the jackpot ends "probability fluctuation state" Although it will be shifted, if the probability variable region 65d is passed in two rounds of 4R to 8R, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o is "2" at the start of the 9th R Therefore, at the start of the 9R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the 9R probability variable region 65d remains invalid. It becomes a passage and cannot be moved to "probability change state".

In other words, if the jackpot type "variable probability F" is won, in the 5 rounds of 4R to 8R, if the number of rounds passed through the variable probability area 65d is "1 time" or less, at the start of the 9R Since the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o in the 9R is less than or equal to "1", the probability variable area valid flag 203m is turned on, the probability variable area 65d is set to be valid, and the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d at the 9Rth. It is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation G", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 2R and 3R eyes, other rounds (that is, 1R and 4R ~ 10R each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

In addition, the second special symbol jackpot type "Probability G", "Probability H", "Probability I", "Probability J", "Probability K", "Probability L", "Probability M", "Probability N", " If you win "Variable probability O", "Variable probability P", "Variable probability Q", "Variable probability R", "Variable probability S", "Variable probability T" or "Variable probability U", the value of the variable probability area passing number counter 203o is "3" In the above case, it is configured not to turn on the probability variable region valid flag 203m. That is, the jackpot type "probable variable G", "probable variable H", "probable variable I", "probable variable J", "probable variable K", "probable variable L", "probable variable M", "probable variable N", "probable variable O", " If you win "Variable P", "Variable Q", "Variable R", "Variable S", "Variable T" or "Variable U", the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the variable region 65d reaches "3 times" Then, the probability variable area 65d after the next round of the round that reaches "three times" is configured to be all invalid regardless of the setting contents of the special figure 2 probability variable area valid table 202h2.

However, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation G" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variation area 65d is effective 2R And at the start of the 3rd round, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d has never reached "three". Therefore, in the jackpot type “probability variable G”, the 2Rth and 3rdR eyes in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid are not set to be invalid due to the 1Rth game result.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variation G" is won, the 2Rth and 3Rth in which the probability variation region 65d is set to be valid are not set to be invalid depending on the game result, so either the 2Rth or 3Rth By passing the ball through the probability variable region 65d, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation H", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 2R and 4R eyes, and other rounds (that is, 1R, 3R and 5R to 10R each round ), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Also, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation H" is elected, the probability variation region 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variation region 65d is effective 2R And at the start of the 4th R, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d has never reached "3". Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability variation H", the 2Rth and 4Rth in which the probability variation region 65d is set to be valid are configured so as not to be invalidated by the 1Rth or 3Rth game result. there is

Therefore, when the jackpot type ``probability variable H'' is won, the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 2nd or 4th round, thereby shifting to the ``variable probability state'' after the jackpot ends.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation I", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 2R and 5R eyes, and other rounds (that is, 1R, 3R, 4R and 6R to 10R (each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation I" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17). When the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 5R is "3", so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 5R. , the 5R-th probability variable region 65d remains invalid.

However, in this case, since the probability variable region 65d is passed in the 2R-th position where the probability variable region 65d is set to be effective, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the jackpot ends.

Also, if the sphere is not passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 2nd round where the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, and the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 2nd round of the 3rd and 4th rounds, the start of the 5th round The value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o at the time is "2", and has not reached "3", so the 5R probability variable area is set to the special figure 2 probability variable area valid table 202h2. be done. Therefore, also in this case, by passing the ball through the 5Rth probability variable region 65d, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variation I" is elected, the probability variation area 65d is set to be valid 2R to pass the ball, or the ball is not passed through the 2R probability variation area 65d, the 5R probability variation By passing the ball through the area 65d, it is possible to shift to the "probability change state" after the big win.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation J", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 2Rth and 6Rth, and other rounds (that is, 1Rth, 3R ~ 5R and 7R ~ 10R each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "variable probability J" is won, the probability variable region 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variable region 65d is temporarily set to be valid. If the ball does not pass through the probability variable region 65d in the 2nd R, and the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 3 rounds of 3R to 5R in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be invalid, the probability variable region 65d is passed at the start of the 6R Since the value of the passage count counter 203o is "3", the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 6Rth probability variable region 65d remains disabled.

Therefore, in this case, the probability variable region 65d is not allowed to pass through the 2R-th probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, and the 6R-th probability variable region 65d remains invalid, so the probability variable region of 6R Even if the ball is allowed to pass through 65d, it does not pass through the effective variable probability area, and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability J", the ball is passed through the 2Rth probability variable region 65d where the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, or the ball is not passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 2Rth. , In the 3 rounds of 3R to 5R in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be invalid, the number of rounds passed through the probability variable region 65d is "2 times" or less, and the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid. Either by passing the ball through the variable probability area 65d, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation K", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 2Rth and 7Rth, and other rounds (that is, 1Rth, 3R ~ 6R and 8R ~ 10R each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation K" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17). If the ball does not pass through the probability variable area 65d in the 2nd R, and the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d in any 3 rounds of 3R to 6R in which the probability variable area 65d is set to be invalid, the start of the 7th R Since the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o is "3" at the time, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 7Rth probability variable region 65d remains invalid.

Therefore, in this case, the probability variable region 65d is not passed in the 2R-th probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, and the 7R-th probability variable region 65d remains disabled, so the probability variable region of 7R Even if the ball is allowed to pass through 65d, it does not pass through the effective variable probability area, and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "variable probability K" is won, the ball is passed through the 2Rth probability variable region 65d in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, or the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 2Rth. First, in the 4 rounds of 3R to 6R in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be invalid, the number of rounds that pass through the probability variable region 65d is "2 times" or less, and the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid. Either by passing the ball through the probability variable region 65d of , it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation L", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 3R and 4R eyes, and other rounds (that is, 1R, 2R and 5R to 10R each round ), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Also, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation L" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variation area 65d is effective 3R And at the start of the 4th R, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d has never reached "3". Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability variable L", the 3Rth and 4Rth in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid are configured so as not to be set invalid depending on the game result.

Therefore, when the jackpot type ``probability variable L'' is won, the sphere is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 3rd or 4th round, thereby shifting to the ``probability variable state'' after the jackpot ends.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation M", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 3R and 5R eyes, and other rounds (that is, 1R, 2R, 4R and 6R to 10R (each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation M" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so in the 3 rounds of 2R to 4R When the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o is "3" at the start of the 5R, so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 5R. , the 5R-th probability variable region 65d remains invalid.

However, in this case, since the probability variable region 65d is passed in the 3R-th position where the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the jackpot ends.

Also, if the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, the ball is not passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 3R eye, and the probability variable region 65d is set to be invalid. When passed, the value of the probability variable area passing number counter 203o at the start of the 5Rth becomes "2", and since it has not reached "3", the 5Rth probability variable area 65d is the special figure 2 probability variable area valid table 202h2 is set to Enabled.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variation M" is won, the probability variation area 65d is set to be valid, the ball is passed through the 3Rth, or the ball is not passed through the 3Rth probability variation area 65d, and the 5Rth probability variation By passing the ball through the area 65d, it is possible to shift to the "probability change state" after the big win.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation N", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 3R and 6R eyes, and other rounds (i.e., 1R, 2R, 4R, 5R and Each round of 7R ~ 10R), the variable probability region 65d is set to be invalid.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation N" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variation area 65d is temporarily set to be valid. If the ball does not pass through the probability variable region 65d in the 3rd round, and the probability variable region 65d is set to be invalid, the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 3 rounds of the 2nd, 4th and 5th rounds. Since the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start is "3", the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 6R, and the 6R probability variable region 65d remains disabled.

Therefore, in this case, since the probability variable region 65d is not passed in the 3R-th probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, and the 6R-th probability variable region 65d remains invalid, the 6R-th probability variable Even if the ball passes through the region 65d, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region, and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "variable probability N" is won, the ball is passed through the 3Rth probability variable region 65d where the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, or the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 3Rth. First, in the 3 rounds of the 2nd, 4th and 5th rounds in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be disabled, the probability variable region 65d is enabled when the number of rounds passed through the probability variable region 65d is “2 times” or less. Either by passing the ball through the set 6R-th probability variable region 65d, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation O", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 3Rth and 7Rth, and other rounds (that is, 1Rth, 2Rth, 4R ~ 6R and 8R ~ 10R each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation O" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variation area 65d is temporarily set to be valid. If the ball does not pass through the probability variable area 65d in the 3rd round, and the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d in the 2nd round where the probability variable area 65d is set to be invalid and the 3 rounds of 4R to 6R, the 7Rth Since the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o at the start is "3", the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 7R, and the 7R probability variable region 65d remains disabled.

Therefore, in this case, the probability variable region 65d is not passed in the 3R-th probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, and the 7R-th probability variable region 65d remains disabled, so the 7R-th probability variable region Even if the ball is allowed to pass through 65d, it does not pass through the effective variable probability area, and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variation O" is won, the ball is passed through the 3Rth probability variation region 65d where the probability variation region 65d is set to be valid, or the ball is not passed through the probability variation region 65d in the 3Rth. , In the 4th round of 4R to 6R in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be invalid, the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid in the state where the number of rounds passed through the probability variable region 65d is "2 times" or less. Either by passing the ball through the 7R-th probability variable region 65d, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation P", the probability variation area 65d is set to be effective in the 4R and 5R eyes, and in other rounds (that is, 1R to 3R and 6R to 10R each round) The probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation P" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17). When the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o is "3" at the start of the 5R, so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 5R. , the 5R-th probability variable region 65d remains invalid.

However, in this case, since the probability variable region 65d is passed in the 4R-th position in which the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big hit.

Also, let the ball pass through the probability variable region 65d in the 2nd and 3rd rounds where the probability variable region 65d is temporarily set to be invalid, and pass the ball through the probability variable region 65d in the 4Rth where the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid If not, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o at the start of the 5R is "2", and has not reached "3", so the 5R probability variable area 65d is the special figure 2 probability variable area valid table 202h2 is set to Enabled.

Therefore, also in this case, by passing the ball through the 5Rth probability variable region 65d, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability P", the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 4Rth, or the ball is not passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 4Rth, and the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 5Rth. By allowing it to pass, it is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probable variable Q", the probability variable area 65d is set to be effective in the 4R and 6R eyes, and other rounds (that is, 1R to 3R, 5R and 7R to 10R each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "variable probability Q" is won, the probability variable region 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variable region 65d is temporarily set to be valid. If the ball does not pass through the probability variable area 65d in the 4th R, and the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d in the 3 rounds of the 2R, 3R and 5R in which the probability variable area 65d is set to be invalid, the 6R Since the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start is "3", the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 6R, and the 6R probability variable region 65d remains disabled.

Therefore, in this case, the probability variable region 65d is not allowed to pass through the 4R-th probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, and the 6R-th probability variable region 65d remains disabled, so the 6R-th probability variable Even if the ball passes through the region 65d, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region, and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "variable probability Q" is won, the ball is passed through the 4Rth probability variable region 65d where the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, or the ball is not passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 4Rth. , In the 2nd, 3rd and 5th rounds in which the probability varying region 65d is set to be invalid, the probability varying region 65d is set to be valid when the number of rounds passed through the probability varying region 65d is “2 times” or less. Either the ball is passed through the 6R-th probability variable region 65d, or the transition to the "probability variable state" can be made after the big win is completed.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variable R", the probability variable region 65d is set to be effective in the 4R and 7R eyes, and other rounds (that is, 1R to 3R, 5R, 6R and 8R to 10R each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation R" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variation area 65d is temporarily set to be valid. The ball did not pass through the probability variable area 65d in the 4th round, and the ball was allowed to pass through the probability variable area 65d in 3 of the 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 6th rounds in which the probability variable area 65d is set to be invalid. In this case, since the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 7Rth is "3", the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 7Rth, and the 7Rth probability variable region 65d is invalid. remains.

Therefore, in this case, the probability variable region 65d is not passed in the 4R-th probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, and because the 7R-th probability variable region 65d remains invalid, the 7R-th probability variable region Even if the ball is allowed to pass through 65d, it does not pass through the effective variable probability area, and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "variable probability R" is won, the ball is passed through the 4Rth probability variable region 65d where the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, or the ball is not passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 4Rth. , In the 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 6th rounds in which the probability varying region 65d is disabled, the number of rounds passed through the probability varying region 65d is "2 times" or less, and the probability changing region 65d is Either by passing the ball through the 7R-th probability variable region 65d that is set to be valid, or by either, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation S", the probability variation area 65d is set to be effective in the 5R and 6R eyes, and in other rounds (that is, 1R to 4R and 7R to 10R each round) The probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation S" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17). When the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 3 rounds of 2R to 4R, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 5R and 6R is "3", so the 5R and At the start of the 6R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the 5R and 6R probability variable regions 65d remain invalid.

Therefore, in this case, since the 5R-th and 6R-th probability variable regions 65d remain invalid, even if the ball passes through the 5R-th and 6R-th probability variable regions 65d, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability S", in the 3 rounds of 2R to 4R in which the variable probability area 65d is set to be invalid, the number of rounds passed through the variable probability area 65d is "2 times" or less, By passing the ball through either the 5th or 6th probability variable region 65d where the probability variable region 65d is effectively set, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation T", the probability variation region 65d is set to be effective in the 5R and 7R eyes, and other rounds (that is, 1R to 4R, 6R and 8R to 10R each round), the probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation T" is won, the probability variation area 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variation area 65d is set to be invalid. When the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 3 rounds of 2R to 4R, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 5R and 7R is "3", so the 5R and At the start of the 7Rth, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the 5R and 7R probability variable regions 65d remain invalid.

Therefore, in this case, since the 5R-th and 7R-th probability variable regions 65d remain invalid, even if the ball passes through the 5R-th and 7R-th probability variable regions 65d, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Also, if the probability variable region 65d is temporarily set to be invalid in two rounds of 2R to 4R, the probability variable region 65d is passed through the ball, and the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid. Furthermore, when the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 6th round when the probability variable region 65d is set to be invalid, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o at the start of the 7th round is "3". Therefore, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 7R, and the probability variable region 65d of the 7R remains disabled.

Therefore, in this case, the probability variable region 65d is not passed in the 5R-th probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, and the 7R-th probability variable region 65d remains disabled, so the 7R-th probability variable region Even if the ball is allowed to pass through 65d, it does not pass through the effective variable probability area, and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability T", in the 3 rounds of 2R to 4R in which the variable probability area 65d is set to be invalid, the number of rounds passed through the variable probability area 65d is "2 times" or less, Pass the ball through the 5R probability variable region 65d where the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, or do not pass the ball through the 5R probability variable region 65d, and set the probability variable region 65d to be invalid 2R to 4R and 6R eyes In the 4 rounds, the number of rounds passed through the probability variable region 65d is "2 times" or less, and the ball is passed through the 7Rth probability variable region 65d where the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid. Therefore, it is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Then, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation U", the probability variation area 65d is set to be effective in the 6Rth and 7Rth, and in other rounds (that is, 1R ~ 5R and 8R ~ 10R each round) The probability variable region 65d is disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "variable probability U" is won, the probability variable region 65d is opened after 2R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variable region 65d is set to be invalid. When the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d in 3 rounds out of 2R to 5R, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 6R and 7R is "3". At the start of the 7th and 7th rounds, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the 6th and 7th probability variable regions 65d remain disabled.

Therefore, in this case, since the 6R-th and 7R-th probability variable regions 65d remain invalid, even if the ball passes through the 6R-th and 7R-th probability variable regions 65d, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability U", in the 4 rounds of 2R to 5R in which the variable probability area 65d is set to be invalid, the number of rounds passed through the variable probability area 65d is "2 times" or less, By passing the ball through either the 6th or 7th probability variable region 65d where the probability variable region 65d is effectively set, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

In the description of FIGS. 18 and 19, the pattern that can pass through the effective probability variable region for each jackpot type has been described. Since it is difficult to identify whether the winning is won, the player guesses which jackpot round probability variable region 65d is set effectively, It is configured such that the ball is passed through and the game result is confirmed on the third symbol display device 81 .

By configuring in this way, the patterns in which the variable probability area 65d of each jackpot round is set to be valid or invalid can be made different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, the player can play during the big win while guessing which of the big win rounds is set to be effective, thereby creating a new playability and improving interest.

Also, as described above, when the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", that is, the first special symbol When a jackpot is won by dynamic display, the variable probability area 65d is set to be valid only in one round for each jackpot type, and the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d is set to "twice". When it reaches, all probability variable areas 65d of subsequent jackpot rounds are made invalid. Therefore, the probability of passing through the effective variable area is 2/6 (that is, about 33%) when a big win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, jackpot types "Probability G", "Probability H", "Probability I", "Probability J", "Probability variation K", "Probability variation L", "Probability variation M", "Probability variation N", "Probability variation O" , "Variable P", "Variable Q", "Variable R", "Variable S", "Variable T" or "Variable U". In case, in 2 rounds for each jackpot type, the probability variable area 65d is set to be valid, and the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the probability variable area 65d reaches "3 times", the probability variation of the subsequent jackpot rounds All areas 65d are configured to be invalid. Therefore, the probability of passing through the effective variable area is 12/15 (that is, 80%) when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effective probability variable area is higher in the case of winning the jackpot by dynamic display of the second special symbol than in the case of winning the jackpot by dynamic display of the first special symbol. is configured to increase the probability of passing through, and is configured to easily transition to (continue to) the "probability fluctuating state".

Also, if the player guesses that the variable probability area 65d of the round is not set to be effective, the player will stop shooting the balls for 10 seconds after the variable winning device 65 is opened in the round. , the number of balls acquired by the player per time can be prevented from becoming excessive. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to play the game appropriately without aggravating the gambling spirit of the player.

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, based on the probability variable region valid table 202h, the probability variable region 65d for each jackpot round is set to be valid or invalid according to each jackpot type. However, the probability variable region valid table 202h may not be set, and the probability variable regions 65d of all jackpot rounds may be configured to be valid.

In this case, based on the probability variable area open table 202g, it is set whether the probability variable area 65d of each round is opened corresponding to each jackpot type or remains closed, so the probability variable depending on the jackpot type A round in which the area 65d is opened, that is, a valid round is set. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, the probability variable region 65d is open from the round before the big hit round to be effective until the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d of the round. It is configured to notify that it is open. Furthermore, in the state where the variable probability region 65d is open, if the passage of the ball to the variable probability region 65d is not detected, depending on the remaining open time of the variable probability region 65d, the degree of suggesting a right-handed game It will be more preferable if the force is strengthened to encourage the player to pass the ball through the variable probability area 65d. Then, when the passage of the ball to the probability variable region 65d is detected, regardless of the content of the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 at the passage detection timing, so as to perform the effect of notifying that the passage has been detected. Configure.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22, the opening and closing mode of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B" and "variable probability C", the setting mode of the variable probability area effective flag 203m, the variable probability area switch The detection mode of the ball in 65g and the setting mode of the probability variation transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) based on the detection of the ball to the probability variation region switch 65g will be described.

FIG. 20 shows the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid 65b and the variable probability area solenoid 65f in each round when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", the detection timing of the ball in the large winning opening switch 65c and the variable probability area switch 65g, the variable probability area The relationship between the timing of adding the value of the passing number counter 203o, the period during which the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is closed (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), and the setting timing of the variable probability area effective flag 203m and the variable probability transition flag 203k FIG. 21 shows the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid 65b and the variable probability area solenoid 65f in each round when winning the jackpot type "variable probability B", the large winning opening switch 65c and the variable probability area switch The detection timing of the ball in 65g, the timing of adding the value of the probability variable area passing number counter 203o, the period during which the big winning opening opening and closing plate 65a is closed (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), the probability variable area effective flag 203m and the probability variable transition flag 203k is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship with the setting timing, FIG. 22 is the operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid 65b and the probability variable area solenoid 65f in each round when winning the jackpot type "variable probability C", The detection timing of the ball in the big winning opening switch 65c and the probability changing area switch 65g, the timing of adding the value of the probability changing area passage number counter 203o, the period during which the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is closed (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the setting timing of the probability variable area effective flag 203m and the probability variable transition flag 203k.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the jackpot type "Variable Probability A", a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65b is turned on and the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a is opened. . Then, in each round, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either event of "30 seconds" at maximum from the opening, or detection of 10 balls by the big winning opening switch 65c) is established. Then, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned off, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is closed, and one round ends. Then, opening and closing operations are repeated in 10 rounds in one jackpot game, and one jackpot game ends. In addition, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o is cleared to "0" at the timing of winning the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", the probability variation area solenoid 65f is turned on in a certain period of each round of 4R to 9R (in the first embodiment, 10 seconds from the opening of the big winning opening opening and closing plate 65a of each round). , The sphere can be detected by the probability variable area switch 65g provided downstream of the probability variable area solenoid 65f. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is incremented by 1 (added only at the first detection of each round). Also, in each round of 4R to 9R, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "10 seconds" has elapsed since the opening of the variable probability area 65d, or 10 balls are detected by the big winning opening switch 65c, either When one event) is established, the probability variable region solenoid 65f is turned off and the probability variable region 65d is closed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the period in which the variable probability area solenoid 65f is turned on is 10 seconds from the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a in each round of 4R to 9R. Even if you do not want to win the ball to the probability variable area 65d of the round, the firing of the ball is interrupted for 10 seconds when the probability variable area 65d of the round is open, and the probability variable area 65d is closed. Then, by restarting the right-handed game, the prize balls of the round can be acquired.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at the start of each round, a process of determining whether or not to turn on the probability variable area valid flag 203m of the round is performed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 40). In the example of FIG. 20, since the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the 4Rth round is a round in which the probability variation area valid flag 203m can be turned on (see FIG. 18).

In this case, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 4th round is "0" and has not reached "2", so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is turned on. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 4R is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g while the probability variable area solenoid 65f is turned on, that is, the probability variable area effective flag 203m is turned on. When the ball is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g, the probability variable transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) is turned on. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to shift to the "variable probability state" by setting the variable probability shift flag 203k to ON after the end of the jackpot of the "variable probability A" jackpot type. In addition, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is cleared to "0" at the timing when the jackpot game ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot type “probability variation B”, a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the big win opening solenoid 65b is turned on, and the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a opens. be done. Then, in each round, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either event of "30 seconds" at maximum from the opening, or detection of 10 balls by the big winning opening switch 65c) is established. Then, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned off, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is closed, and one round ends. Then, opening and closing operations are repeated in 10 rounds in one jackpot game, and one jackpot game ends. In addition, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o is cleared to "0" at the timing of winning the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "probability variation B", the probability variation area solenoid 65f is turned on in a certain period of each round of 4R to 9R (in the first embodiment, 10 seconds from the opening of the big winning opening opening and closing plate 65a of each round). , The sphere can be detected by the probability variable area switch 65g provided downstream of the probability variable area solenoid 65f. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is incremented by 1 (added only at the first detection of each round). Also, in each round of 4R to 9R, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "10 seconds" has elapsed since the opening of the variable probability area 65d, or 10 balls are detected by the big winning opening switch 65c, either When one event) is established, the probability variable region solenoid 65f is turned off and the probability variable region 65d is closed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at the start of each round, processing is performed to determine whether or not to turn on the variable probability area valid flag 203m of the round (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 40). In the example of FIG. 21, since the jackpot type "probability variation B" is won, the 5R round is a round in which the probability variation area valid flag 203m can be turned on (see FIG. 18).

Therefore, in the 4th R, the probability variable area effective flag 203m remains turned off. If the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in this state is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g while the probability variable region solenoid 65f is turned on, that is, the probability variable with the probability variable region effective flag 203m turned off When the ball is detected by the region switch 65g, the variable probability transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) is not turned on, and the value of the variable probability region passage count counter 203o is incremented by 1 to become "1".

At the start of the 5th round, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o is "1" and has not reached "2", so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is turned on. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 5R is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g while the probability variable area solenoid 65f is turned on, that is, the probability variable area effective flag 203m is turned on. When the ball is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g, the probability variable transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) is turned on. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to shift to the "variable probability state" by setting the variable probability transition flag 203k to ON after the end of the jackpot of the "variable probability B" jackpot type. In addition, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is cleared to "0" at the timing when the jackpot game ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22, in the jackpot type “probability variable C”, a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65b is turned on and the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a is opened. be done. Then, in each round, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either event of "30 seconds" at maximum from the opening, or detection of 10 balls by the big winning opening switch 65c) is established. Then, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned off, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is closed, and one round ends. Then, opening and closing operations are repeated in 10 rounds in one jackpot game, and one jackpot game ends. In addition, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o is cleared to "0" at the timing of winning the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "probability variation C", the probability variation area solenoid 65f is turned on in a certain period of each round of 4R to 9R (in the first embodiment, 10 seconds from the opening of the big winning opening opening and closing plate 65a of each round). , The sphere can be detected by the probability variable area switch 65g provided downstream of the probability variable area solenoid 65f. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is incremented by 1 (added only at the first detection of each round). Also, in each round of 4R to 9R, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "10 seconds" has elapsed since the opening of the variable probability area 65d, or 10 balls are detected by the big winning opening switch 65c, either When one event) is established, the probability variable region solenoid 65f is turned off and the probability variable region 65d is closed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at the start of each round, processing is performed to determine whether or not to turn on the variable probability area valid flag 203m of the round (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 40). In the example of FIG. 22, since the jackpot type "variable probability C" is won, the 6Rth round becomes a round in which the variable probability area valid flag 203m can be turned on (see FIG. 18).

Therefore, in the 4th R, the probability variable area effective flag 203m remains turned off. If the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in this state is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g while the probability variable region solenoid 65f is turned on, that is, the probability variable with the probability variable region effective flag 203m turned off When the ball is detected by the region switch 65g, the variable probability transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) is not turned on, and 1 is added to the value of the variable probability region passage number counter 203o to become "1".

Furthermore, even in the 5th round, the probability variable area valid flag 203m remains turned off. If the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in this state is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g while the probability variable region solenoid 65f is turned on, that is, the probability variable with the probability variable region effective flag 203m turned off When the ball is detected by the region switch 65g, the variable probability transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) is not turned on, and 1 is added to the value of the variable probability region passage number counter 203o to become "2".

At the start of the 6th round, the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o has reached "2", so the probability variable area effective flag 203m is not turned on and remains off. Also, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 6R is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g while the probability variable area solenoid 65f is turned on, that is, the probability variable area effective flag 203m is turned off. When the ball is detected by the probability variable area switch 65g, the probability variable transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) is not turned on.

After that, the probability variation transition flag 203k remains off, and the jackpot ends, so it does not transition to the "probability fluctuation state", but transitions to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state". In addition, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is cleared to "0" at the timing when the jackpot game ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23(a) to 23(c), the details of the normal pattern per random number table 202i, the normal pattern variation table 202j and the normal pattern opening table 202k will be described. First, FIG. 23( a ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202 i per normal pattern stored in the ROM 202 .

As described above, the normal pattern per random number table 202i is a normal pattern low probability state (“probability fluctuation state”) in which the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “normal game state” or the “normal pattern low probability time reduction state”. Or for the "normal pattern low probability state" used in the case of a period (including during the special pattern jackpot) that is not the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "normal pattern Two types of "normal pattern high probability state" used in the case of "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" which is a state with a higher probability of winning normal patterns than "low probability state" divided into Then, the number of random numbers to be hits included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different between the "normal design low probability state" and the "normal design high probability state", the "normal design low probability state" and the "normal design high probability state" , The probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols is changed.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the normal pattern per counter C4 that becomes a hit in the case of the "normal pattern low probability state" is 70, and the value "30 ~ 99" is defined (set) in the random number table 202i per normal pattern. In other words, the normal pattern hit probability in the "normal pattern low probability state" (that is, "normal game state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is 70/100, and the hit is normally derived in the variable display of the pattern. It is set so that it is easy to

On the other hand, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal pattern to be hit in the case of "normal high probability state" is 99, and the value "1 to 99" is defined (set) in the random number table 202i per normal pattern. ing. That is, the normal pattern hit probability in the "normal pattern high probability state" (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state") is 99/100, and the normal pattern variable display is almost hit. set to be derived.

Thus, by changing the success/failure probability of normal symbols according to the game state, it is possible to create a difference between a situation in which the normal electric combination 72 is easy to open and a situation in which it is difficult to open rather than the situation in which it is easy to open. can. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is possible to enter the second starting port 71 because the normal electric terminal 72 is easily opened, or the normal electric terminal 72 is opened more easily. It is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by making the situation in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 71 due to the difficult situation to be different depending on the game state.

In particular, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, it becomes a "normal symbol low probability state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the normal electric role 72 is difficult to open, furthermore, when it is opened. However, since the normal electric combination 72 is opened only for a short period of time, even if a ball is shot in a right-handed game, it is difficult to enter the second starting port 71 from the ``normal pattern high probability state''. In addition, the first starting port 64 is not equipped with a device for assisting prize winning, such as the ordinary electric machine 72, and a through gate 67 is not arranged in the flow-down region of the ball fired in the left-handed game. Therefore, it is not a configuration in which the ball fired by the left-handed game easily enters the first start port 64 by the time saving function. Therefore, in other words, in the "normal game state", even if a right-handed game is played, it is difficult for the right-handed ball to enter the second starting port 71, and a left-handed ball is also shot. , the player must enter the first starting port 64 without using the time saving function, and is configured to enter the first starting port 64 by itself in order to execute the dynamic display of the first special pattern. In addition, in the "normal game state", by providing a plurality of types of variable display time of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the normal electric combination 72, the player can win the second start port 71 in the "normal game state". It is more preferable to make it difficult to comprehend the timing and to make it difficult to win a prize to the second starting port 71 . In addition, in the "normal game state", when a right-handed game is played, an error is notified due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, so that the player and the employee of the game hall By suggesting that the game mode is not encouraged, the player may be restrained from playing right-handed games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23(b), the details of the normal pattern variation table 202j for determining the variable display time of normal patterns will be described. FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal pattern fluctuation table 202j stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

Normal pattern fluctuation table 202j is for "normal game state" referred to in "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" It is divided into two types for reference "normal high probability time reduction state, probability fluctuation state, normal low probability time reduction state". Then, the variable display time of normal symbols set for "normal game state" and "normal pattern high probability time shortening state/probability fluctuation state/normal pattern low probability time shortening state” are set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbols different in each game state, the time for deriving the success/fail result of the normal symbols in each game state is changed.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the normal pattern variable display time set in the case of the "normal game state" is set to "15 seconds". 202j. That is, in the "normal game state", the time from the start of variable display of the normal symbols to the derivation of the stop symbols is set to be "15 seconds" without exception.

In addition, the variable display time of the normal pattern set in the case of "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is set to "0.1 second" It is defined in the normal pattern fluctuation table 202j. In other words, the time from the start of variable display of normal symbols in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" until the stop pattern is derived is without omission It is set to be "0.1 second".

Thus, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 to when the normal electrode 72 is released can be changed. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it hits the variable display caused by passing through the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric circuit 72 is opened based on the hit, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is hit. can flow into the second starting port 71 as it is can be varied depending on the game state. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbols for each game state, it is possible to vary the winning mode of one ball to the through gate 67 and the second starting port 71, and to provide different game characteristics for each game state. can produce.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, the variable display time of normal symbols is short, the winning is easy, and the normal electric Since the opening time of the hand 72 is also long, the normal electric hand 72 is in an open (immersed) state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric hand 72, and the ball is fired by the right-handed game. is configured to enter the second starting port 71 . In other words, a ball hit to the right in the ``variable probability state'' and ``high probability time shortened state'' is configured to easily enter the second starting port 71 and difficultly enter the variable winning device 65. there is

In addition, among the game states in which right-handed games are encouraged, in the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", although it is more difficult to win than the "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", normal Since the variable display time of the symbols is short and the opening time of the normal electric combination 72 is also long, it is configured so that the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter the second starting port 71.例文帳に追加In other words, the ball hit to the right in the "low-probability-shortening state" is configured to easily enter the second starting port 71 and difficultly enter the variable winning device 65.

Next, referring to FIG. 23(c), the ordinary electric service release table 202k will be described. FIG. 23(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an ordinary electric service release table 202k stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The normal electric combination opening table 202k is referred to when a normal symbol win occurs, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of opening times of the normal electric combination 72 are defined based on the game state at the timing when the normal symbol win occurs.

The normal electric role open table 202k is divided into groups based on the game state in which normal symbols are drawn. Specifically, for the "normal game state" referred to in the "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" referred to The open state (open time) of the normal electric 72 is changed for "normal pattern high probability time shortening state/probability fluctuation state/normal pattern low probability time shortening state”.

As shown in FIG. 23(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state", the normal electric combination 72 is set to be opened once when the normal symbol is won. The opening time is defined in the ordinary electric service opening table 202k so as to be "0.1 second". That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state", the normal electric combination 72 is set to be opened for "0.1 seconds"×1 times="0.1 seconds". there is

In addition, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the opening time of the normal electric role 72 set when winning the normal pattern is "5. 8 seconds”, and the number of times of opening is 1 time. In other words, when the normal pattern is elected in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the normal electric role 72 is "5.8 seconds" × 1 configured to be open for times = '5.8 seconds'.

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the normal electric part 72 according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the normal electric part 72 is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the period in which the normal electric terminal 72 is open is long, so that the second start opening 71 is easily won, or the normal electric terminal 72 is open. It is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by making the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 71 due to the short length of the ball depending on the game state.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", it becomes a high probability state of normal patterns, the variable display time is short, normal electric The opening period of the winning combination 72 is lengthened, and the ball launched in the right-handed game is configured to easily enter the second starting port 71.例文帳に追加

In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed game is encouraged, in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", although it is a normal pattern low probability state, the variable display time is short, and the normal electric combination 72 is opened. The period is lengthened, and the balls shot in the right-handed game are configured to easily enter the second starting port 71.例文帳に追加

Therefore, the ball hit to the right in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is easy to enter the second start port 71, and the second special symbol Since the number of pending balls for dynamic display is likely to accumulate, the variation shortening function is likely to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be efficiently executed.

In this way, the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state or low probability state of the normal symbol, and the long or short time of the variable display time and the opening time of the ordinary electric role 72 are combined respectively. By providing each game state, it is possible to change the game property in each game state, provide a game with a wide variety of variations, and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the hit probability of variable display of normal symbols and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is more likely to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state", etc., any ratio may be used. The probability may be set to about 1/100 to make it difficult to win, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or the low probability state of the normal pattern It may be configured so as not to win a prize at the time. Also, if the variable display time is shorter in the "probability fluctuation state" than in the "normal game state", it may be any time, for example, the variable display time of normal symbols in the "normal game state" is "30 seconds" or more. may be a long time (for example, "100 seconds") or a short time (for example, "1 second") less than "10 seconds".

Moreover, the open time and the number of open times of the ordinary electric circuit 72 are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the open time of the normal electric combination 72, any open time may be used as long as it is more advantageous for the player to be in the "variable probability state" than in the "normal game state". The opening time of the normal electric role 72 in the "normal game state" etc. may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, " 3 times”). Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "variable probability state" or the like may be a long time of "5.8 seconds" or more (for example, "10 seconds"), or a short time of less than "5.8 seconds". (eg, “1 second”). Further, the number of opening times of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be set to a number greater than "1 time" (for example, "5 times").

Next, with reference to Drawing 24, time saving end condition table 202m in a 1st embodiment is explained. Drawing 24 is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of time saving end condition table 202m memorized by ROM202 in a 1st embodiment. The time-saving end condition table 202m is referred to when the jackpot state ends or when the number of times the relief condition is met is reached, and the end condition of the "time-saving function" given according to the jackpot type or relief condition establishment. are defined respectively.

As shown in FIG. 24, at the time of passage through the effective probability variable region in the case of winning a jackpot in all game states, a ``probability variable state'' is set so that the high-probability short-time function is effective until the next jackpot. In addition, when the jackpot is won in all game states, when the effective probability variable area is not passed, the high probability time reduction function is set to be effective up to "150 times" as a "general pattern high probability time reduction state". . In addition, when the number of times relief conditions are established ("900 times" in the first embodiment) is reached in the "normal game state", the low probability time reduction function is set to "1000 times" as a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" set to be valid.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes the buffer 203c for the counter shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which values such as Input/Output (hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. . In addition, in the RAM 203, storage means may be provided for storing the presence or absence of winning to the variable probability area 65d at the time of the big hit. In this case, a function may be provided to reflect only the probability variable region switch 65g of a predetermined number of times in the storage means in correspondence with the game state.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 27) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 46) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is provided for detecting the balls that have won prizes in the prize-winning ports 63, 64, 65, and 71, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and the balls that have passed through the out port 66 and are guided to the ball discharge path. switches 208 consisting of a switch group including a switch (for example, the big prize opening switch 65c etc.) and a sensor group, a setting key 501 for setting the start-up mode when the power is turned on, and a setting key 501 that is pressed during the "setting change mode". A setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value and a RAM erasing switch 503 for erasing data stored in the RAM 203 are connected by being operated.

Also, on the output side of the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the special design display device 37, the normal design display device 83, the normal design reservation lamp 84, the variable winning device 65 opening and closing of the big winning opening A large winning opening solenoid 65b for driving opening and closing forward with the lower side of the plate 65a as an axis, a normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric 72, and other solenoids 209 are connected. It is The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, and 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and displays the display contents of the probability display device 504 as one of the execution results of the various processes. set.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 46) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Also, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes effects, It controls the display of "voting effect" and "competition effect", which will be described later, and the setting of the display mode of effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, such as "notice of pending change".

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like. In the first embodiment, commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and commands cannot be transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to exchange commands with each other.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the back image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and displays the third pattern on the display control device 114 based on the depression of the frame button 22. The display device 81 is instructed to display.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, and performs the following operation. It executes display control of "voting effect" and "competition effect" and "holding change notice". Details of the display contents of the "voting effect" and "competition effect" will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 46). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

A detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a variation pattern table 222d are stored as fixed value data. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The sound lamp control device 113 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with the start winning, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type that are transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a fluctuation pattern table 222d, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead process.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, whether it will be a “ready-to-win display”, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect, and the execution of various effects is determined, or the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4) is changed. Executes control to determine the content (and execution time (timing)).

The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b, a sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c, a sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d, a first reserved information storage area 223e, and second reserved information Storage area 223f, execution information storage area 223g, sub-probability variable area passage counter 223h, probability variable area passage flag A223i, probability variable area passage flag B223j, probability variable area passage flag C223k, probability variable area passage flag D223m, probability variable area passage flag E223n, probability variable area At least a passage flag F223o, a sub probability variation transition flag 223p, an effective probability variation region passage round storage area 223q, and a voting completion flag 223r are provided.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance of the first special symbol should be started in the ON state. This special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1235 in FIG. 50) . Then, it is turned off when the setting of the variation effect of the first special symbol is made (see S1302 in FIG. 53).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is triggered by the fact that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, and the waiting first special symbol fluctuation effect exists. When doing so, the first special symbol variation effect setting process (see S1306 to S1308 in FIG. 53) for executing the waiting first special symbol variation effect is performed.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance of the second special symbol should be started in the ON state. This special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1255 in FIG. 51) . Then, it is turned off when the second special symbol variation effect is set (see S1310 in FIG. 53).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is triggered by the fact that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, and the waiting second special symbol fluctuation effect exists. When doing so, the second special symbol variation effect setting process (see S1314 to S1316 in FIG. 53) for executing the waiting second special symbol variation effect is performed.

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a first special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the first special symbol variation effect that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first pending pitch counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of held balls based on the command (the number of held balls command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first held ball number counter 223c It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol by entering the first start port 64, When the first reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the first reserved ball number counter 203a of main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command is added. The subsequent value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved by the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 49).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a special figure 1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110 When receiving the variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command and setting the aspect of the variation production of the first special symbol along with their reception, subtract 1 from the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c (update ) (see S1305 in FIG. 53). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c. While synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, is a second special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command sent from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d. It's becoming

Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of pending balls for the second special symbol variation effect by entering the second start port 71, When the second reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the second reserved ball number counter 203b of main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command is added. The subsequent value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variable effect reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1211 in FIG. 49).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a special figure 2 corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted in the main control device 110 When receiving the variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command and setting the aspect of the variation effect of the second special symbol along with their reception, subtract 1 from the value of the sub second pending ball number counter 223d (update ) (see S1313 in FIG. 53). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d. While synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d can be updated.

The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d is used to display reserved symbols and execution symbols on the third symbol display device 81 in a game state in which variation effects of each special symbol are encouraged. Used. That is, the sound lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, sets the number of reserved balls indicated by the command to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. Stored in the number counter 223d (see S1207 or S1211 in FIG. 49), special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command, or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command In response to receiving At the timing of updating the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1305 or S1313 in FIG. 53), it corresponds to a special symbol that is encouraged according to the game state. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d after storage or updating, the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number for display A number-of-balls command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number command for display, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub-first number of the sound lamp control device 113 The reserved symbols corresponding to the values of the reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d and the execution pattern indicating the variable effect being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 4(b)). control the rendering of the image as it appears in ).

As described above, the sub first reserved ball counter 223c changes its value while synchronizing with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110, and the sub second reserved ball counter 223d The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the first reserved ball number counter 203a or It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the special symbol variation effect encouraged according to the game state is reserved.

The first reserved information storage area 223e is information for performing a variable performance of the reserved first special symbol, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the first reserved ball. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the first special symbol transmitted by the number command.

Voice lamp control device 113, using the values of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223e, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, variation of the first special symbol configured to perform a performance.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is information for performing a variable effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the second reserved ball. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the second different symbol transmitted by the number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223f and each table 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. configured to perform a performance.

The execution information storage area 223g is executed at least by the special symbol display device 37, and information of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main controller 110 is started. A jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the winning and transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command This is an area for storing values.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it executes the setting of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. For this reason, information for performing a variable effect stored in the first pending information storage first area of the first pending information storage area 223e or the second pending information storage first area of the second pending information storage area 223f (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) are shifted to this execution information storage area 223g.

The sub-probability-variable-area passage number counter 223h, like the probability-variable-area passage number counter 203o of the main controller 110, is a counter that counts the number of rounds in which the ball is detected by the probability-variable area switch 65g during the big hit.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variable probability region passing command sent from the main controller 110 when the ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 65g during the jackpot and is the first count of the round. , To be described later, the probability variable region passing flag of the round (one of the probability variable region passing flag A223i ~ probability variable region passing flag F223o) is set to on, and when the probability variable region passing flag of this round is turned on, the 1 is added to the value of the sub-probability-variable-region passage count counter 223h (see S1605 in FIG. 56).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the winning jackpot type and the value of the sub probability variable region passage number counter 223h are determined, and the value of the sub probability variable region passage number counter 223h exceeds a constant value (first In the embodiment, in the case of "2" or more in the case of a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and "3" or more in the case of a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol), a voting completion flag described later 223r on.

It should be noted that the sub-probability-variable-region passage count counter 223h is cleared to "0" at the timing of winning the jackpot (see S1402 in FIG. 54).

Thus, in the voice ramp control device 113, in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the variable probability region number counter 203o, since the value of the sub-variable region passage number counter 223h is updated, the main control device While synchronizing with the 110 probability variable area passage number counter 203o, the value of the sub probability variable area passage number counter 223h can be updated.

The probability variable region passage flag A223i to the probability variable region passage flag F223o are flags for determining whether or not the ball has passed the probability variable region 65d in each round in which the probability variable region 65d is opened during the big hit.

The probability variable region passage flag A223i to the probability variable region passage flag F223o are configured so that the corresponding rounds are different according to the jackpot type that is won.

Specifically, if you win any of the jackpot types "Probability A", "Probability B", "Probability C", "Probability D", "Probability E" and "Probability F", that is, the first special symbol When the jackpot is won in the dynamic display, the probability variable region 65d is opened during the period of 4R to 9R (see FIG. 17), so the probability variable region passing flag A223i is the 4Rth, the probability variable region passing flag B223j is the 5Rth, the probability variable The area passing flag C223k is the 6Rth, the probability changing area passing flag D223m is the 7Rth, the probability changing area passing flag E223n is the 8Rth, and the probability changing area passing flag F223o is the flag corresponding to the 9Rth round. 65d is determined.

In addition, the jackpot type "probable variable G", "probable variable H", "probable variable I", "probable variable J", "probable variable K", "probable variable L", "probable variable M", "probable variable N", "probable variable O", " If you win any of ``variable probability P'', ``variable probability Q'', ``variable probability R'', ``variable probability S'', ``variable probability T'' or ``variable probability U'', that is, you will win a jackpot with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. In the case, since the probability variable region 65d is opened in the period of 2R to 7R (see FIG. 17), the probability variable region passage flag A223i is the 2Rth, the probability variable region passage flag B223j is the 3Rth, the probability variable region passage flag C223k is the 4Rth, The probability variable region passage flag D223m is the 5Rth, the probability variable region passage flag E223n is the 6Rth, and the probability variable region passage flag F223o is the flag corresponding to the 7Rth round. configured to determine.

The probability variable region passage flag A223i to the probability variable region passage flag F223o are set to OFF at the timing when the jackpot is won (see S1403 in FIG. 54). Then, when the probability variable region passing command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received in each round during the big hit, the probability variable region passing flag (probability variable region passing flag A223i to probability variable region passing flag F223o) corresponding to the round is set to ON. (see S1272 in FIG. 52).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the probability variable region passing flag of the round (one of the probability variable region passing flag A223i ~ probability variable region passing flag F223o) is set to ON, the probability variable region 65d of the round has passed, and the display voting execution command for the "voting effect" executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set (see S1610 in FIG. 56). Also, when executing the "competitive effect" performed in the third symbol display device 81, by determining each flag of the probability variable area passage flag A223i to the probability variable area passage flag F223o, the player can determine the probability change in any jackpot round. It is configured to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the area 65d, and to execute a "competition effect" based on the round in which the ball has passed (see S1703 and S1704 in FIG. 58).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d during one jackpot is a predetermined number (jackpot types “variable probability A” to “variable probability F” are “2”, jackpot types “ When the variable probability G” to “variable probability U” reaches “3”), when the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d in the round after the round that reaches the predetermined number, the variable probability area is passed from the main controller 110 It is configured so that commands are not transmitted (S6304: No or S6305: No in FIG. 42).

Therefore, if the player passes the ball through the variable probability area 65d in all the rounds in which the variable probability area 65d in the 1 jackpot is opened, the jackpot based on the jackpot types "variable probability A" to "variable probability F" If so, the probability variable region passage command is transmitted only when passing the probability variable region 65d of the 4th and 5th R, and each flag of the probability variable region passage flag A223i and the probability variable region passage flag B223j is set to ON. Also, if it is a jackpot based on the jackpot types "variable probability G" to "variable probability U", the probability variable region passing command is transmitted only when passing the 2R, 3R and 4R probability variable regions 65d, and the probability variable region passage flag A223i. , probability variable region passage flag B223j and probability variable region passage flag C223k are set to ON.

The sub probability variation transition flag 223p, like the probability variation transition flag 203k of the main controller 110, is a flag for indicating that a high probability state (that is, "probability variation state") of special symbols occurs in the ON state.

This sub probability variation transition flag 223p is set to OFF at the timing of winning the jackpot (see S1405 in FIG. 54). Then, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a probability variation transition flag command transmitted at the timing when the probability variation transition flag 203k is set to ON in the main control device 110, this sub probability variation transition flag 223p is set to ON (Fig. 52, S1274).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the sub-probability variation transition flag 223p is set to ON, it is determined to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot game being executed, and the third symbol is determined during the jackpot game. In the "competition effect" executed by the display device 81, a successful effect is executed.

The effective probability variable region passing round storage area 223q is an area for storing round information that passed through the effective probability variable region during the big win.

This effective probability variable area passing round storage area 223q is initialized at the timing of winning the jackpot (see S1404 in FIG. 54). Then, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the effective variable probability region passing round command transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball passes through the effective variable probability region, the corresponding round information is stored in the effective variable probability region passing round storage area. 223q (see S1276 in FIG. 52).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "competition performance" executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, when the sub probability variable transition flag 223p is set to ON, this effective probability variable region passage Based on the round information stored in the round storage area 223q, it is configured to execute an effect that results in a successful result (see S1702 and S1704 in FIG. 58).

The voting completion flag 223r has a constant value of the sub probability variable area passage count counter 223h. It is a flag for determining that the jackpot time has reached "3" (see FIGS. 18 and 19).

This voting completion flag 223r is set to OFF at the timing of winning the jackpot (see S1405 in FIG. 54). Then, when the probability variable region passage flag (probability variable region passage flag A223i to probability variable region passage flag F223o) of the round is on, the value of the sub probability variable region passage number counter 223h is a constant value (in the first embodiment , when the jackpot time in the dynamic display of the first special symbol reaches "2" and the jackpot time in the dynamic display of the second special symbol reaches "3" (see FIGS. 18 and 19)), this The voting completion flag 223r is set to ON (see S1610 in FIG. 56). That is, when this voting completion flag 223r is set to ON, all the probability variable regions 65d of subsequent jackpot rounds are set to be invalid.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the voting completion flag 223r is set to ON, a display voting completion command is set in the "voting effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 57). S1661 reference), in the jackpot game being executed, the number of rounds that have already passed through the probability variable region 65d has reached a certain value, and the action of passing through the probability variable region 65d has been completed. (see 81d in FIG. 75(b) and 81d in FIG. 76(a)).

Details of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storing area 223f, and the execution information storing area 223g will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing configurations of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storing area 223f, and the execution information storing area 223g.

The first pending information storage area 223e has four areas of first pending information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first to fourth storage areas of the first pending information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Further, the second pending information storage area 223f has four areas of second pending information storage first to fourth areas, like the first pending information storage area 223e. In each of the first to fourth areas for storing second hold information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, in the execution information storage area 223g, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 and a jackpot type counter store the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed. A jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 where the value of C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. 223g4 are provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being executed. Furthermore, the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e corresponds to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily reserved among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is reserved. and the second area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is reserved the third oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended, and is the first suspension. The fourth area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performances of the first special symbol that are held.

In addition, the second reservation information storage first area of the second reservation information storage area 223f corresponds to the variation performance of the second special design that is temporarily reserved first among the variation performance of the second special design that is reserved. and the second area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained third in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is retained, and the second retention. The fourth information storage area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol which is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol which is held.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first pending ball number command from the main control device 110, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are set to the first reserve. Extract from the number of balls command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the holding balls included in the first holding ball number command in the corresponding first holding information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223e4 of the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved number of balls command is X (1≦X≦4), the number of variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved at that time is X. , the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command are the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved in the X-th time among the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command in the first reserved ball X area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the first reservation information storage X area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed to the 2 Extracted from the pending pitch command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the holding balls included in the third holding ball number command in the corresponding third holding information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223f4 of the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball number command is X (1 ≤ Y ≤ 4), the number of variable effects of the second special symbol that is reserved at that time is Y. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command are the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved in Y-th time among the variable effects of the second special symbol that is reserved. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage Y area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command in the second reserved Y area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation Y area of the main controller 110 are stored in the second stop information storage Y area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 1 variation pattern command and a special figure 1 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the first special symbol from the main controller 110, the first reservation information storage area 223e , to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, when there is pending information about the first special symbol, the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily suspended is started, so the first special symbol that is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reservation information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance of the currently executed first special symbol corresponding to the variable performance It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage area 223g are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage first area. 1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the third storage area for pending information are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the second area for storing the first pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the third pending information storage area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 2 variation pattern command and a special figure 2 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the second special symbol from the main control device 110, the second reservation information storage area 223f , to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, when there is pending information about the second special symbol, the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started, so the first suspended second special symbol. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reservation information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol currently being executed correspond to the variable performance. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223g.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area. 2 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third area for storing pending information are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second area for storing the second pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. FIG. Furthermore, in the first holding information storage first to fourth areas and the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 are stored. 4 area and the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and held by the main controller 110 are stored in the execution information storage area. 223g, the first pending information storage area 223e and the second pending information storage area 223f.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when performing a look-ahead process (not shown), the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d Grasp the number of variable effects (number of pending balls). Then, based on the number of pending balls, the first to fourth areas storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas storing the second pending information, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are read in advance, and whether or not a big win will be achieved in the variable performance, the variable time, etc. are determined. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "0", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 1 time and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first area for storing the first reserved information are read ahead and determined. I do. Also, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "4", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 4 times, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation information storage fourth area are read ahead and determined. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first reservation information storage area 223e and the second reservation information storage area 223f, and the fluctuation of the first special design and the second special design reserved by the main control device 110 Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the sound lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first suspension information storage area 223e and the second suspension information storage area 223f , the read-ahead process can be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. That is, when the suspended first special symbol or/and the second special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable production, and execution of various productions can be determined.

It should be noted that the first pending information storage area 223e or second pending information storage area 223f, and the above-described shift processing in the execution information storage area 223g, special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 variation Number of pending balls when pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command are received (update based on reception of special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command Based on the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d before the Data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the suspended variable performance among the four areas.

For example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223e Assume that data is stored in the (first reservation information storage first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first pending information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the first pending information The data in the third storage area is shifted to the second area for storing the first pending information, and the data in the fourth area for storing the first pending information is shifted to the third area for storing the first pending information.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "2", the first area for storing the first reserved information The data is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effect is not reserved, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. , the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, the data in the first to fourth areas for storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information is stored in the area with the area number smaller by 1 (execution information storage area 223g or It may be configured to shift to the first hold information storage first to third areas or the second hold information storage first to third areas. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first reserved information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second reserved information. Therefore, program creation can be facilitated.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description continues. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 49) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs a special pattern fluctuation effect or continuous notice. It controls the performance.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation mode of the variation performance performed by the third symbol display device 81 differs for each game state, and the ball shooting mode encouraged for each game state is shown to the player. is configured as Specifically, for example, in a "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged, a character display of "left-handed", which encourages left-handed games, is displayed in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, and is composed of Arabic numerals. Each fluctuating pattern displayed fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form only one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "normal low probability time reduction state" where right-handed games are encouraged, the main display right-handed instruction 89 that encourages right-handed games is mainly While displayed in the upper right area of the display area Dm, each variable pattern composed of Chinese numerals fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. be. In this way, by clearly differentiating the display mode of the variable symbols in each game state, the player can easily recognize the game state, and at the same time, the game mode (firing mode) necessary for performing the recommended game can be displayed. can be easily recognized.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 27 to 46. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. As shown in FIG. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S101). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, wait processing ("1 second" in this embodiment) (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 5) provided in the main controller 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally. In this case, the process proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203. do.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S156 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off and the setting key 501 is turned on when the power is turned on. In order to start the raise mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability display device 504 starts displaying the probability setting value (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S111), The "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and the process proceeds to S113. do. In the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the processes of S110 to S112 are skipped and the process proceeds to S113 in order to start up in the "normal mode". do.

In the process of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value, set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later.

The set value command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 30) of the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The audio ramp control device 113 is configured to store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a setting value memory (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 upon receiving the setting value command. .

On the other hand, in the process of S104, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the startup mode should be "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode". To make this determination, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

In the process of S115, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 to set the startup mode to "RAM clear mode".

In the processing of S116, initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S116 and S117) is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating, regardless of whether the settings have been changed, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed. be. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S116 and S117) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set (S105: No), or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initialization of the RAM 203 conversion processing (S116 and S117).

In the RAM initialization process (S116 and S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first ball count counter 203a is cleared to "0", etc.) (S117), and the process proceeds to S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), setting change processing is performed to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, referring to FIG. 28, the setting change process (S118) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode". is the processing of

In this setting change process (S118), first, the probability display device 504 is set to start displaying the current probability setting value (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. Display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is started by the setting of starting the display of the probability setting value.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be always fixed to a specific value instead of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. That is, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3") or "2" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. or "3", which is the maximum probability setting value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall staff can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. . Accordingly, the hall staff can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value " 2", and if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is "1", the display starts with the probability setting value set before the power cut off. You may do so. For example, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is as high as "3", there may often be a case where the probability setting value is desired to be slightly smaller (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is started to be displayed as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem will occur. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on. This is done by resetting to 1. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from "3" to "2", it is necessary to repeat turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 so that the probability setting value makes almost one cycle. On the other hand, if the probability set value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting to display the probability set value with "2", the probability setting can be performed while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. Values can be updated.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122). If there is (S122: No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. This initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3"), or may be "2", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. , may be "3", which is the maximum value of the probability setting values. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S122, when it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the process of S123 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

In the updating of the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that point is between "1" and "2", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is changed to "3". , the probability setting value is returned to "1". The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device 504. FIG.

The loop processing of S122→S123→S124: No→S125 (and S126)→S122 continues to be executed until it is determined in the processing of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on by the process of S124 (S124: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the probability display device 504 is set to the probability set value to be used in the game from now on. (S127), and sets the jackpot random number table 202a according to the probability set value (S128).

After the process of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S129). In the process of S129, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has changed to the OFF state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state.

As long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state as a result of the process of S129 (S129: No), the process of S129 is repeatedly executed. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is set (S130), and this setting change is performed. The process (S118) ends.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 27), the process moves to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116 and S117), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). . In this way, in the process of S124, the hall personnel and the like are strongly aware that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased by having the hall personnel and the like turn on the RAM erase switch 503 to fix the probability setting value. can be made

Further, in the process of S124, the probability setting value is determined by detecting the ON state of the RAM erase switch 503, but the probability setting value may be determined by detecting the OFF state of the setting key 501. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and the counter values reach their maximum values ("9999" and "99" in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S153) by the same method as the process of S207 (see FIG. 30) of the timer interrupt process described later, and the process proceeds to S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, a process of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65 is performed, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 controls the display of normal symbols. In the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. come. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal figure per counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, random can be sexualized.

In the process of S151, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S151: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. , in FIG. 46, the NMI interrupt processing, which will be described later, has been executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and the power supply shutdown command indicating that the power supply is shut down is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). ) (S155). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S156), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S151 is executed at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30). As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished, and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, the occurrence information of the power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is finished. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting processing (S101). By setting to the predetermined value (initial value), the process of S151 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In timer interrupt processing and main processing (see FIG. 29), commands or signals to be sent to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. , when a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and the pachinko machine 10 are connected) A signal is output to an external output terminal plate (not shown), etc.). In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission are transmitted to sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices), and the signals are output to various devices.

After the process of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the winning process for executing the process at the time of winning each special symbol is executed ( S203). This winning process (S203) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After S203, next, normal electric power control processing for executing drive control processing for the normal electric power 72 is executed (S204). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbols. ◯ symbol) appears and becomes a winning state, the normal electrode 72 is opened for a predetermined period of time. remains closed. This ordinary electric role control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S204, next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S205). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches 208, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("9999" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Then, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal pattern per counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal pattern counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (first embodiment Then, when they reach "9999", "119", "99", "9", and "99", respectively, they are cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure per counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the general figure per counter C4 is read as an initial value, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal pattern per counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Next, a starting prize winning process associated with winning to the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 is executed (S208). The details of the starting winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a gate passage process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in this gate passage processing (S209), the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 6), and the reserved number of variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol reservation lamp 84. The details of this gate passage processing (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the gate passing process (S209) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying a special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or a process by the third symbol display device 81 based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S208) A special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S209), normal design determination is performed, and normal design variable display based on the determination result is performed in the normal design display device 83. A figure change process is executed (S211). In this normal pattern variation process (S211), the normal pattern hit probability is performed at either a high probability (for example, 99/100) or a low probability (70/100) according to the game state described above. Then, the normal symbols are variably displayed based on the result of success or failure, and the display result corresponding to the result of success or failure is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 . In addition, the detail of normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) is later mentioned with reference to FIG.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation processing (S211), the firing control processing is executed (S212), and further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), and this timer interrupt processing is terminated. .

Note that the firing control process (S212) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to fire the ball on or off. Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output processing (S201) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) is executed periodically to perform processing, and the main processing updates the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. However, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). . For example, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was executed by the timer interrupt processing to read processing (S202), winning processing (S203), normal electric role control processing (S204), and switch reading processing (S205). ) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, the starting winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first start port 64 or the second start port 71. A process of storing (reserving) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the mouths 64 and 71 is executed. Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the starting winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting hole 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the first starting port switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) of the ball into the first starting port 64, read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 30), A ball entering the 1 starting hole 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 30).

As a result of the determination in S301, when it is determined that the ball has won the first start hole 64 (there has been a start win) (S301: Yes), then whether the game state is the "normal game state", that is, It is determined whether or not the game state encourages left-handed games (S302). As a result of the determination, if it is not in the "normal game state" (S302: No), the ball fired by the non-encouraged (prohibited) left-handed game instead of the recommended right-handed game is thrown into the first start port 64. Since it means that the player has won the prize, an alarm sound is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5), and left-handed error processing such as displaying the characters "Please hit right" on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Execute (S303), and the process proceeds to S304.

By configuring in this way, the first start port switch (not shown When the ball is detected in the above), error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed, and the player is discouraged from executing the left-handed game in a game state where the left-handed game is not encouraged (right-handed game Encouragement), the game in a game mode different from the recommended game specifications can be eliminated as much as possible, and the game characteristics assumed in each game state can be realized.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the game state is the "normal game state" (S302: Yes), the game state encourages left-handed games, so the process of S303 is skipped and S303 is skipped. The process proceeds to S304 without performing left-handed error processing.

As a result of the processing of S301, when it is determined that the ball has won the first starting hole 64 (there has been a starting prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (main controller 110 (S304) to determine whether or not the number N1 of active balls (N1) of dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that is reserved is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S304) . Then, even if there is a prize to the first starting port 64, if the number of balls to be activated is not N1<4 (S304: No), this starting prize processing (S208) is terminated, and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) back to

On the other hand, if the number N1 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S304: Yes), the value of the first ball number counter 203a (number of balls held in operation N1) is incremented by 1 (S305). Then, this time, since the winning is to the first starting port 64 corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S306), and processing is performed. to S311.

In the processing of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting port 64 (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second starting port 71 (start winning). (S307). Here, similarly to the first starting port 64, a second starting port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) to the second starting port 71 read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 30) Based on the output signal, the ball entering the second starting port 71 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30).

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting hole 71 (there has been a starting prize) (S307: Yes), the process proceeds to S308.

In addition, in the processing of S307, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting port 71 (S307: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state is the "normal game state". If it is determined to be "state", it is a game state in which left-handed games are encouraged, so it may be configured to perform normal middle-right-handed error processing.

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 71 (there has been a starting prize) (S307: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b) It is determined whether or not the number N2 of activated balls for dynamic display (variation effect) of 2 special symbols is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S308). Then, if there is no winning to the second starting port 71 (S307: No), or even if there is a winning to the second starting port 71, if the number of balls to be activated is not N2<4 (S308: No), this The start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

On the other hand, if the number N2 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S308: Yes), the value of the second ball number counter 203b (number of balls held in operation N2) is incremented by 1 (S309). Then, this time, since the winning is to the second starting port 71 corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S310), and processing is performed. to S311.

Further, in the processing of S301 and S307, when the ball has entered the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 at the same time, the winning processing of the ball to the first starting port 64 is preferentially executed, and the second starting port is executed. Waiting for the winning process of the ball to the opening 71, and in the starting winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30), the winning process of the ball to the waiting second starting opening 71 is executed. can be configured to

In the process of S311, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 5) and stored in each reserved ball storage area. That is, among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d set as the storage destination in S306, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a The random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 and the variation type counter storage area 203d4 are reserved (stored) respectively (S311).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S306 based on the winning of the first starting port 64, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S305 If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved first area. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Similarly, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S310 based on the winning of the second starting port 71, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the processing of S309 is If it is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the second reservation third area, if the value of the second reservation ball number counter 203b after addition is "4", in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3, respectively , CS1 are reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition by the process of S305 (operational reserved ball number N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the process of S306, In order to transmit the first reserved ball number command including the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S312). In addition, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the process of S309 (number of activated ball N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the process of S310, and the jackpot In order to transmit the second reserved ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the second reserved ball number command is stored in the RAM 203. It is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S312). As a result, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 30) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. . When the process of S312 is finished, the start winning process (S208) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command in the process of S312 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S312. However, it is also possible to use the read value stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the process of S312.

Next, the gate passing process (S209), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this gate passage processing (S209). In the gate passage processing (S209), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered the ball), and if the ball has passed through (entered the ball), the value of the normal game per counter C4 is stored in the normal game reserved ball. A process of storing (holding) in the area 203h is executed.

In this gate passage processing (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the passage of the ball into the through gate 67 (see S205 in FIG. 30) read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 30), (ball entry) is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 30).

In the processing of S401, if the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S401: No), this gate passage processing (S209) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) is returned to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered the ball) (S401: Yes), then whether the game state is the "normal game state", that is, the shooting of the left-handed game ball is encouraged. It is determined whether or not the player is in a game state (S402). As a result of the determination, if it is "normal game state" (S402: Yes), the ball fired by the non-encouraged (prohibited) right-handed game instead of the encouraged left-handed game has passed through the through gate 67. Therefore, normal right-handed error processing, such as outputting an alarm sound from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) and displaying the character display "Please return to left-handed hitting" on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S403), and the process proceeds to S404.

By configuring in this way, when a ball is detected at the through gate 67 in the "normal game state" in which right-handed games are not recommended, error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed, thereby preventing right-handed players from being hit. To make a player avoid playing a right-handed game in a game state in which the game is not encouraged, to eliminate as much as possible the game in a game form different from the game specifications to be encouraged, and to realize the game characteristics assumed in each game state. can do.

It should be noted that, in the process of S402, if the game state is not the "normal game state" (S402: No), the "probability fluctuation state", the "general figure high probability time shortening state" or the "normal figure Since it is in a low probability time reduction state, the process of S403 is skipped without performing the normal right hitting error process of S403, and the process proceeds to S404.

In the process of S404, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (normal pattern variable display operation reserved ball number HN reserved in the main controller 110) is the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than (S404). Then, even if there is a ball passing through the through gate 67 (entering the ball), if the number of balls HN < 4 (S404: No), the gate passing process (S209) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (Fig. 30).

On the other hand, if the number of pending balls in operation HN<4 (S404: Yes), the value of the number of pending balls in normal pattern 203g (number of pending balls in operation HN) is incremented by 1 (S405). Then, the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 5), and the read data is stored in the normal pattern reservation first to fourth areas provided in the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203h. It is stored in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (S406).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g after addition by the process of S405 is "1", the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 is reserved in the normal pattern reservation first area. In addition, if the value of the normal figure reservation ball number counter 203g after addition is "2", it will be in the normal figure reservation second area, and if the value of the normal figure reservation ball number counter 203g after addition is "3" If the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g after addition is "4" in the reserved third area, the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 is reserved in the normal pattern reserved fourth area. After the processing of S406 is completed, the gate passage processing (S209) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) is returned to.

In addition, in the first embodiment, it is configured not to transmit the normal pattern pending ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol to the sound lamp control device 113, but the normal pattern pending ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol It may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device 113 and perform an effect (announcement) regarding a reserved symbol or the like relating to variable display of normal symbols. In this case, by transmitting the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 in the normal pattern pending ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute the so-called pre-reading process regarding the normal pattern, and the production of the normal pattern. It may be configured to provide variations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this special figure variation process (S210).

This special symbol variation process (S210) includes dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37, and control of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. It is something to do.

The MPU 201, in this special figure variation process (S210), firstly, determines whether or not one of the first special figure and the second special figure is in the jackpot at the moment (S501). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special pattern display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, during a predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, during the jackpot opening), During a predetermined period of time after the jackpot game ends (that is, jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S501, if one of the special symbols is in the jackpot (S501: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S210) is terminated as it is, and the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 30) is returned to.

In the process of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S501: No), then the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2) moves in the special symbol display device 37. It is determined whether or not the target is being displayed (S502), and if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol (S502: No), then the special symbol display device After the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in 37 is stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (S503). As a result, after the stop of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (S503: No), the special figure fluctuation process (S210) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (figure 30). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (the third symbol display device 81) for a predetermined period of time. Then, the stop symbol can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S503, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S503: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (second special It is determined whether or not the number N2 of active balls with dynamic display (fluctuation performance) related to the pattern is greater than "0" (S504). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S504: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variable effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) (S505). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variation effect) relating to the second special symbol is started by the fluctuation start processing (S510) described later. This is because the number of reserved balls related to special symbols is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e (S506). This data shift process (S506) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 2 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted in the third area, and so on.

On the other hand, in the process of S504, if it is determined that the value of the second ball count counter 203b (the number of balls in operation N2) is "0" (S504: No), then the first ball count counter 203a (actuation suspension ball number N1 of dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol suspended in main controller 110) is greater than "0" (S507). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S507: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) (S508). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of dynamic displays (variation effect) related to the reserved first special symbol is started by the fluctuation start processing (S510) described later, and thus the ball is held. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d (S509). This data shift process (S509) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted in the third area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S506 or S509, the fluctuation start processing for the special design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing. (S510) and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

Here, with reference to FIG. 34, the variation start process (S510), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this fluctuation start process (S510).

In this fluctuation start processing (S510), as described above, whether or not to perform dynamic display of each special symbol, setting processing of the dynamic display in the case of performing dynamic display of each special symbol, and the like are performed.

In this fluctuation start process (S510), dynamic display of special symbols executed in the special symbol display device 37 (third symbol display device 81) is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. In order to perform the setting process, first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203j provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S5101). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203j is not turned on (S5101: No), the game state is "normal game state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "normal low probability time reduction state" , and since the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5104. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203j is turned on (S5101: Yes), the game state is "probability fluctuation state", and the special symbol jackpot probability is a high probability state, so for high probability state is set (S5103), and the process proceeds to S5104.

In the process of S5104, a jackpot lottery (whether or not judgment ) processing is performed (S5104).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the set probability value. and the occasional game state (mode). As described above, the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low probability state ("normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state"). In this case, in the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot random numbers are defined such that the jackpot probability is 32/10000 when the set value is "1" and 36/10000 when the set value is "3". Further, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to 315/10000 with the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value "3" is 319/10000.

In the process of S5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined that As a result of the process of S5104, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S5104: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each special symbol (Fig. 8 or see FIG. 9), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S5105).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 10 rounds, and the effective variable After the jackpot when passing the area, it shifts to the "probability fluctuation state", and after the jackpot when not passing the effective probability variable area, it shifts to the "general high probability time reduction state". "Variable probability C", "Variable probability D", "Variable probability E", "Variable probability F", "Variable probability G", "Variable probability H", "Variable probability I", "Variable probability J", "Variable probability K", "Variable probability L", Any of "variable probability M", "variable probability N", "variable probability O", "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" or "variable probability U" is determined be. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e is determined by the reserved ball execution area 203f. If the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown) of , and the data is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, The jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8). In addition, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 9) in FIG.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5109. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. A dynamic time (variation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from the selected performance mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each effect mode set in the process of S5105, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In the process of S5104, when it is determined that the winning is not a big hit (S5104: No), the result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of loss is set (S5107). In the process of S5107, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the retained ball execution area 203f and the first retained ball number counter are set. Based on the value of 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 include a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, and a "super reach" effect mode. ' effect mode or 'special reach' effect mode is set. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode differs according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing in each game state is determined (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5109.

In the process of S5108, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S5107, it corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f. Select the attached variation pattern. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In the processing of S5109, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processing of S5106 or S5108, the variation to notify the display control device 114 of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the audio ramp control device 113 A pattern command is set (S5109).

Specifically, for example, a jackpot lottery is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot is a jackpot type ``probability variable A'', and further, the ``super reach'' production mode variation of ``60 seconds'' If the pattern is selected, the variation pattern command (i.e., the special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the "super reach" production mode of the first special symbol, jackpot, "probability variation A", "60 seconds". Hereinafter, the second A variation pattern command related to 1 special symbol may be referred to as a "special figure 1 variation pattern command".) is set. Also, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, if the big winning lottery is lost and the variation pattern of the "60 seconds" "super reach" production mode is selected, the second special symbol Loss "60 second” variation pattern command (that is, special figure 2 variation pattern command. Hereinafter, the variation pattern command related to the second special symbol may be referred to as “special figure 2 variation pattern command”. ) is set.

In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting together the propriety of the variable effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 can achieve the effect mode including the propriety. By grasping the contents of and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine a more detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect based on the information.

Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the processing of S5105 or S5107 is set (S5110), and this fluctuation start processing (S510) is executed. It ends and returns to special figure fluctuation processing (FIG. 33).

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. In the process of S507, when it is determined that the value of the first ball number counter 203a (the number of balls in operation and ball N1) is "0" (S507: No), the third symbol display device 81 performs a demonstration effect. In other words, it is determined whether the demonstration is in progress (S511). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the first pending ball number counter 203a or the second pending ball number counter 203b (operation pending ball number N1 or The period until it is determined that any value of the number of held balls N2) is greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S511: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S512), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S511: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30). The demo command set in the process of S512 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 30) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variable effect is not started even after the predetermined time has passed after the stop of the variation, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

If it is determined in the processing of S511 that the demonstration is not being performed (S511: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S512 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is during dynamic display (S502: Yes), whether or not the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol being executed has passed. Or, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed has elapsed, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is determined according to the determination result. To stop the variation stop processing (S513) is performed, this special figure variation processing (S210) is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) is returned to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the variation stop processing (S513), which is one processing of the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this fluctuation stopping process (S513).

In this fluctuation stop processing (S513), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of each special symbol has passed. While displaying on the display device 37 , each confirmation command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, in the case of "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", according to the counting result of the number of times of dynamic display of the special pattern Time saving end condition of "time saving function" is established, and if the time-saving termination condition of the "time-saving function" is established, processing for switching the "time-saving function" from enabled to disabled is performed. Also, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, it is determined whether or not the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed has reached the relief condition establishment count. Perform setting processing of the number of times of time reduction for shifting to "low probability time reduction state".

In the fluctuation stop processing (S513), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the special symbol being executed has passed (S5201). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbols in the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 etc. (special figure 1 variation pattern command or special figure 2 variation pattern command is determined according to), if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of this special design has not passed (S5201: No), the special design display device 37 corresponding to the special design being executed The display of the special LED group 37b is updated (S5202), this fluctuation stop process is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation process (see FIG. 33).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the upper LED group 37b1 lights in a predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display of the first special symbol is started. Alternatively, a display mode to turn off is set, and a display mode in which the lower LED group 37b2 lights up or goes out in a predetermined lighting pattern is set until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display of the second special symbol is started. .

On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of the special symbol in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S5201: Yes), the special symbol display device 37 (S5203). The stop symbol is set in advance by the process of S5105 or S5107 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 34).

In the first embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a loss, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed, and the determination result is a jackpot. In this case, the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the jackpot.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of each special symbol is set in the processing of S5203, the stop symbol of the variable effect of each special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the special symbol display device 37. In order to synchronize with the display of the special LED group 37b in the pattern display device 37 and perform the confirmation display, a confirmation command is set (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205. When the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81, a confirmation command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol (that is, a special figure 1 confirmation command. Hereinafter, The confirmation command related to the first special symbol may be referred to as "special figure 1 confirmation command". Confirmation command for confirming the variation effect of the second special symbol (that is, special figure 2 confirmation command. Hereinafter, the confirmation command related to the second special symbol may be referred to as "special figure 2 confirmation command".) set.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this special figure 1 confirmation command, the display special to the display control device 114 in order to stop the variation effect of the first special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81 When the FIG. 1 confirmation command is transmitted and the special figure 2 confirmation command is received, in order to stop the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 FIG. 2 Sends the confirmation command. The display control device 114 receives the special figure 1 confirmation command for display or the special figure 2 confirmation command for display, so that the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 It is configured to stop the variable performance and to confirm and display the stop pattern.

In the processing of S5205, it is determined whether or not the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state” (S5205: Yes), the determination process of whether or not the time saving end condition in the “normal pattern high probability time reduction state” or “normal pattern low probability time reduction state” is satisfied is executed A time saving counting process is executed (S5206), and then the process proceeds to S5207. Also, as a result of the determination of S5205, if it is determined that it is not "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" (S5205: No), the time saving end condition is not determined. Skip the processing of S5206 and proceed to S5207.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the time reduction number processing (S5206), which is one processing of the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this time reduction number processing (S5206).

In this time-saving counting process (S5206), when the "time-saving function" is set to be valid, the execution number of times of dynamic display of special symbols, which is the termination condition of the "time-saving function" (for example, the fluctuation of the first special symbol The number of times and the number of times of variation of the second special pattern) are counted, it is determined whether or not the result of counting satisfies the time-saving end condition, and the 'time-saving function' is changed from effective to ineffective according to the determination result.

In this time saving number of times processing (S5206), first, since the dynamic display of the special symbol has stopped once, the value of the time saving counter 203r is subtracted by 1 (S5301), and then the subtracted value of the time saving counter 203r is " 0” is determined (S5302). As a result of the determination, if the value of the time saving counter 203r is greater than "0" (S5302: Yes), the end condition of the "time saving function" is not satisfied, so this time saving counting process (S5206) is terminated, Return to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 35).

On the other hand, in the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203r is not greater than "0", that is, if it is determined that it is less than or equal to "0" (S5302: No), "time saving function" Since the end condition of is satisfied, then, in order to determine whether it is "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", it is checked whether the time reduction high probability flag 203q is turned on. Determine (S5303). As a result of determination, if the time saving high accuracy flag 203q is turned on (S5303: Yes), the time saving high accuracy flag 203q is set to OFF in order to terminate the "general figure high accuracy time reduction state" (S5304) , This time saving number of times processing (S5206) ends, and returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 35). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving high probability flag 203q is not set to ON (S5303: No), the time saving low probability flag 203p is set to ON, state”, the time saving low probability flag 203p is set to OFF (S5305), this time saving number of times processing (S5206) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 35) is returned to.

In this way, in the state where the "time saving function" is valid, depending on the termination conditions of the "time saving function", the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" can be terminated. , the "time-saving function" can be appropriately enabled or disabled to enrich game variations and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description is continued. If the time saving counting process of S5206 is over, or if it is determined that it is not "general pattern high probability time shortening state" and "general pattern low probability time shortening state" in the process of S5205 (S5205: No), the special symbol It is determined whether or not the number of times the dynamic display is executed reaches the number of times the relief condition is established, and according to the determination result, the relief arrival counting process is executed in order to shift to the "low probability time shortened state" (S5207). End the fluctuation stop processing (S513), and return to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 33).

Here, referring to FIG. 37, the relief arrival counting process (S5207), which is one process of the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 35) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this relief arrival counting process (S5207).

In this relief arrival counting process (S5207), the number of execution times of the dynamic display of special symbols is counted, and it is determined whether or not the counting result reaches the number of times relief conditions are met. Set the number of times of time reduction based on the transition to "low probability time reduction state".

In this relief arrival counting process (S5207), first, it is determined whether or not the relief setting completion flag 203t is turned on (S5401). Ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state "Since it has already been transferred once, skip the processing of S5402 to S5406, terminate this relief arrival counting process (S5207), and return to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 35).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S5401, if the relief set flag 203t is not turned on (S5401: No), the special symbol has not yet transitioned to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" after becoming a low probability state. Since it is in the state, 1 is added to the value of the relief counter 203s (S5402). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the added value of the relief counter 203s is smaller than "900" (S5403).

As a result of the determination in S5403, if the value of the relief counter 203s added in the processing of S5402 is a value smaller than "900" (S5403: Yes), the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols has reached the number of times relief conditions have been met. Therefore, the processing of S5404 to S5406 is skipped, the relief arrival count processing (S5207) is ended, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 35).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5403, if the value of the relief counter 203s added in the processing of S5402 is not less than "900", that is, if the value of the relief counter 203s is greater than or equal to "900" (S5403: No), Since the conditions are established, first, the value of the time saving counter 203r is set to "1000" (S5404), and the relief setting completed flag 203t is turned on to indicate that it has shifted to the "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state". Set (S5405). Then, in order to shift the game state to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", the time reduction low probability flag 203p is set to ON (S5406), this relief arrival counting process (S5207) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop process (See FIG. 35). As a result, it is possible to generate the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" based on the establishment of the relief condition.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the winning process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S203).

This winning process (S203) sets the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) according to the type of the jackpot when a jackpot of each special symbol occurs, and set the opening time of In addition, based on the jackpot type, to set the probability variable region 65d to be opened or closed for each round, set the probability variable region opening table 202g (see FIG. 17), and enable or disable the probability variable region 65d for each round. 202h (see FIGS. 18 and 19) is set to set the probability variable region effective table 202h.

Also, in this winning process (S203), in the case of a big winning state (game), a big winning opening/closing control process (S612) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed, and at the timing when the big winning state ends, A jackpot end process (S614) for setting the end of the jackpot state is executed.

In the winning process (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a big win has been won in any dynamic display of special symbols (S601). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is won (S601: Yes), in order to perform the jackpot game, first, in order to invalidate the "probability change function" during the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203j and the probability change transition flag 203k are turned off. (S602). Then, the values of the probability variable area open timer 203n and the probability variable area passage count counter 203o are cleared to "0" (S603), and then the "time saving function" is disabled, the time saving low probability flag 203p and the time saving high probability flag 203q are set. It is set to off (S604), and the value of the time saving counter 203r is cleared to "0" (S605). Furthermore, in order to disable the ceiling function, the relief setting completed flag 203t is set to off (S606), and the value of the relief counter 203s is cleared to "0" (S607). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, in order to transmit a jackpot opening command indicating the start of the jackpot to the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S609). An opening time (for example, "30 seconds" or "10 seconds") corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S610), and the process proceeds to S651. Thereby, the jackpot opening command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 30) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

The round counter described above is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), controls the opening of the variable winning device 65 according to the jackpot game, and the round Decrease the value of the counter by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot in progress is terminated.

In the process of S651, the probability variable area open table 202g (see FIG. 17) is set according to the jackpot type (S651), and the process proceeds to S652. Specifically, when the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B", "probability variation C", "probability variation D", "probability variation E" or "probability variation F" is elected, 4R as an open pattern of the probability variation area 65d Set to open in the period of ~ 9R, jackpot types "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", " Probability N", "Probability O", "Probability P", "Probability Q", "Probability R", "Probability S", "Probability T" or "Probability U", open pattern of probability area 65d is set to open in the period from 2R to 7R.

In the process of S652, the probability variable area valid table 202h (see FIGS. 18 and 19) is set according to the jackpot type (S652), and the process proceeds to S611. In this process, the effective pattern of the probability variable area 65d of each round set for each jackpot type is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S601, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols (S601: No), skip the processing of S602 to S610, S651 and S652 and proceed to S611. Transition.

In the processing of S611, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S611). As a result of determination, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S611: Yes), a jackpot opening/closing control process for controlling the opening/closing of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S612).

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65, opening/closing control of the probability variable region 65d, and validity of the probability variable region 65d are performed based on the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened which is set in the winning process (S203). Execute setting processing or invalid setting processing.

In the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), first, the opening time set in S610 of the winning process (S203), or the opening time set in S6215 (see FIG. 41) of the big winning opening opening process (S6007) described later. It is determined whether or not the interval time has passed (S6001). As a result of determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has not passed (S6001: No), it is not the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so that the variable winning device 65 is kept closed, S6002 to S6005 and The processing of S6051 to S6057 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6006.

On the other hand, in the process of S6001, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has passed (S6001: Yes), it is the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6002). , a winning counter (not shown) is set to "10" (S6003). Then, the maximum opening time ("30 seconds" in the first embodiment) of the variable winning device 65 at the time of the big win is set (S6004), and a big winning mouth opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened is issued. It is generated and set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6005), and the process proceeds to S6051. The audio lamp control device 113 that has received the command to open the big winning opening executes the fact that the variable winning device 65 has been opened in the third symbol display device 81, and allows the opened variable winning device 65 to win the ball. is configured to prompt the player to

In the process of S6051, whether or not any of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", that is, the second It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot in the dynamic display of 1 special symbol (S6051), and the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F" (S6051: Yes), then it is determined whether the round is one of 4R to 9R (S6052).

As a result of the determination in S6052, if the round is one of 4R to 9R (S6052: Yes), it is a round in which the probability variable region 65d is opened, so the probability variable region 65d Valid setting processing or invalid setting processing is performed Therefore, the variable probability area control process is executed (S6054), and the process proceeds to S6055. The details of the probability variation area control process (6054) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the processing of S6051, if none of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", that is, Jackpot type "Variable G", "Variable H", "Variable I", "Variable J", "Variable K", "Variable L", "Variable M", "Variable N", "Variable O", "Variable P ”, “Variable Q”, “Variable R”, “Variable S”, “Variable T” or “Variable U”, and if it is a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S6051 : No), then it is determined whether the round is one of 2R to 7R (S6053).

As a result of the determination in S6053, if the round is one of 2R to 7R (S6053: Yes), it is a round in which the probability variable region 65d is opened, so the probability variable region 65d Valid setting processing or invalid setting processing is performed Therefore, the variable probability area control process is executed (S6054), and the process proceeds to S6055.

Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the variable probability area control process (S6054), which is one process of the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this variable probability area control process (S6054).

In this probability variable region control processing (S6054), the probability variable region valid table 202h (see FIGS. 18 and 19) and the probability variable region passing count counter 203o are referred to, and the probability variable region 65d of the round is set to be valid or invalid. Execute.

In this probability variable region control processing (S6054), first, based on the probability variable region effective table 202h set for each jackpot type in S652 of the winning process (see FIG. 38), the probability variable region 65d of the round is set to be valid. It is determined whether or not (S6101), and if the probability variable region 65d of the round is not set to be valid (S6101: No), the processing of S6102 to S6105 is skipped, and the probability variable region control processing (S6054) ends. Then, it returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 39).

On the other hand, in the process of S6101, based on the probability variable region valid table 202h, if it is determined that the probability variable region 65d of the round is set to be valid (S6101: Yes), then the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B", "Variable probability C", "Variable probability D", "Variable probability E" or "Variable probability F", that is, whether it is a big hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Then (S6102), if you have won any of the jackpot types "probable variation A", "probability variation B", "probability variation C", "probability variation D", "probability variation E" or "probability variation F" (S6102: Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability-variable-region passage count counter 203o is smaller than "2" (S6103).

As a result of the determination in S6103, if the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o is a value smaller than "2" (S6103: Yes), the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d in this jackpot game is "2". Since it has not reached and the condition for invalidating the variable probability region 65d is not satisfied (see the remarks column in FIG. 18), the process proceeds to S6105.

Also, in the processing of S6102, it was determined that none of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F" In the case, that is, the jackpot type "probable variable G", "probable variable H", "probable variable I", "probable variable J", "probable variable K", "probable variable L", "probable variable M", "probable variable N", "probable variable O" , "Probability P", "Probability Q", "Probability R", "Probability S", "Probability T" or "Probability U" are elected, and the jackpot in the dynamic display of the second special symbol If there is (S6102: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability area passage count counter 203o is a value smaller than "3" (S6104).

As a result of the determination in S6104, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is a value smaller than "3" (S6104: Yes), the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the probability variable area 65d in this jackpot game is "3". Since it has not reached and the condition for invalidating the variable probability region 65d is not satisfied (see the remarks column in FIG. 19), the process proceeds to S6105.

In the process of S6105, the probability variable area effective flag 203m is set to ON (S6105), this probability variable area control process (S6054) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 39).

On the other hand, in the process of S6103, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is not less than "2", that is, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is "2" or more (S6103: No), this time Since the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d in the jackpot game has reached “2” and the conditions for setting the probability variable region 65d to be invalid (see the remarks column in FIG. 18), the process of S6105 is skipped Then, this variable probability area control process (S6054) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 39).

Also, in the process of S6104, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is not less than "3", that is, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is "3" or more (S6104: No), this time Since the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d in the jackpot game has reached “3” and the conditions for setting the probability variable region 65d to be invalid (see the remarks column in FIG. 19), the process of S6105 is skipped Then, this variable probability area control process (S6054) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 39).

By configuring in this way, the validity or invalidity of the probability variable region 65d can be set for each round. Further, according to the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the variable probability region 65d in one jackpot game, the variable probability region 65d can be set to be invalid.

Returning to FIG. 39, the description is continued. When the probability variable region control processing of S6054 ends, then the probability variable region 65d is set to be opened (S6055), the probability variable region open timer 203n is started (S6056), and the process proceeds to S6057. The value of the probability variable area open timer 203n is incremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) is executed (that is, every 2 milliseconds), and the later-described large winning opening opening process (see FIG. 41). In, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability region open timer 203n has reached a certain value, and the closing process of the variable probability region 65d is performed according to the determination result.

Then, in the process of S6057, set the probability variable area open command (S6057), the process proceeds to S6006. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to perform a probability variable region open effect process, which will be described later, when this probability variable region open command is received (see FIG. 57).

On the other hand, in the processing of S6052, if it is determined that the round is neither 4R to 9R (S6052: No), since it is not a round that opens the probability variable region 65d, skip the processing of S6054 to S6057 and proceed to S6006 Transition. Also, in the processing of S6053, if it is determined that the round is neither 2R to 7R (S6053: No), since this is also not a round that opens the probability variable region 65d, the processing of S6054 to S6057 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S6006.

In the process of S6006, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open (S6006). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device 65 is not open (S6006: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open and is during the opening time or the interval time, so the processing of S6007 is skipped and this The jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, in the process of S6006, when it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open (S6006: Yes), in order to determine the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 that is open, processing during the opening of the big winning opening is performed. Performs (S6007), ends the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), and returns to the winning process (see FIG. 38).

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the process (S6007) during opening of the big winning opening, which is one process of the big win opening/closing control process (S612) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007).

In this process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007), the process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed. In addition, control such as opening and closing control of the variable probability region 65d or detection of passage of the ball to the opened variable probability region 65d is executed.

In this big winning opening opening process (S6007), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S6004 of the big winning opening/closing control process (S612) has passed (S6201). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the variable prize winning device 65 has passed (S6201: Yes), the condition for closing the variable prize winning device 65 is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the variable prize winning device 65 in the round. In order to clear the counter value to "0" (S6202) and close the variable winning device 65, the process proceeds to S6206. The closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6206 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S6201, if it is not the timing when the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has elapsed (S6201: No), then whether or not the big winning opening switch 65c is turned on, that is, the ball to the variable winning device 65 It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (S6203).

In the process of S6203, if the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 65c and the ball has won the variable winning device 65 (S6203: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6204), then the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6205). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6205: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", 10 or more balls enter the variable winning device 65 and variable winning is achieved. Since the conditions for closing the device 65 are satisfied, the process proceeds to S6206 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

In the process of closing the variable winning device 65 from S6206, first, the closing setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6206), and then the large winning device indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been closed is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. A mouth closing command is set (S6207), and the process proceeds to S6208. It should be noted that the large winning opening closing command set in the processing of S6207 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 30). ) to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Next, in the process of S6208, it is determined whether or not the probability variable region 65d is open (S6208), and if the probability variable region 65d is open (S6208: Yes), the probability variable region 65d is set to be closed (S6209), A variable probability area closing command indicating that the variable probability area 65d is closed is set for the sound lamp control device 113 (S6210), and the process proceeds to S6211. It should be noted that the variable probability area close command set in the process of S6210 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 30) , to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Then, in the process of S6211, the probability variable area effective flag 203m is set to OFF (S6211), the value of the probability variable area open timer 203n is cleared to "0" (S6212), and the process proceeds to S6213.

Also, in the processing of S6208, if it is determined that the probability changing region 65d is not open (S6208: No), the closing processing of the probability changing region 65d is not performed, so the processing of S6209 to S6212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6213 .

In the processing of S6213, since one round of the variable winning device 65 has been completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter (S6213), and then whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" is determined. It discriminates (S6214). If the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6214: Yes), the number of rounds (remaining number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened) remains, so the next variable winning device 65 is opened (for example, "1 second") is set (S6215), the process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 39).

On the other hand, in the process of S6214, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S6214: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since the opening operation is all completed, the interval time is not set (that is, S6215 is skipped) in order to end the jackpot state, and this big winning opening opening process (S6007) is finished, and the jackpot opening/closing control is performed. Return to the process (see FIG. 39).

In the processing of S6203, if the ball has not been detected by the big winning opening switch 65c and the ball has not won the variable winning device 65 (S6203: No), then the passage of the ball to the probability variable area 65d is detected. , The probability variation area passage determination process for setting the probability variation transition flag 203k is executed according to the determination result of the passage detection (S6216), and the process proceeds to S6217.

Here, with reference to FIG. 42, the probability variable area passage determination process (S6216), which is one process of the big winning opening open process (S6007) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this probability-variable-region passage determination process (S6216).

In this probability variable area passage determination process (S6216), the passage of the ball to the probability variable area 65d is detected, and the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o is updated according to the determination result. Also, when the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d, it is determined whether or not the probability variable region 65d of the round is set valid, and the probability variable transition flag 203k is set according to the determination result.

In this probability variable area passage determination process (S6216), first, whether or not the probability variable area switch 65g is turned on, that is, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variable area 65d (S6301), and the probability variable area switch 65g is turned on. If not, if the ball does not pass through the probability variable region 65d (S6301: No), the processing of S6302 to S6311 is skipped, this probability variable region passage determination processing (S6216) is terminated, and the big winning opening is opened Return to intermediate processing (FIG. 41).

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if the probability variable region switch 65g is turned on and the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d (S6301: Yes), then the passage of the ball to the probability variable region 65d is 1 in the round. It is determined whether or not the count eye (S6302), and if the passage of the ball to the probability variable region 65d is not the first count in the round (S6302: No), the processing of S6303 to S6311 is skipped, and this probability variable region The passage determination process (S6216) is terminated, and the process returns to the process during opening of the big winning opening (FIG. 41).

In the process of S6302, if it is determined that the passage of the ball to the variable probability area 65d is the first count in the round (S6302: Yes), then the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C ”, “variable probability D”, “variable probability E” or “variable probability F”, that is, it is determined whether it is a big hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S6303), and a big hit Type "probability A", "probability B", "probability C", "probability D", "probability E" or "probability change F" (S6303: Yes), then, probability area It is determined whether the value of the passage number counter 203o is a value smaller than "2" (S6304), and if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is a value smaller than "2" (S6304: Yes), the current At the end of the round one round before the jackpot round being executed, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable area 65d has not reached "2", and the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable area 65d is "1" or less. , and does not satisfy the conditions for invalidating the probability variable area 65d of the currently running jackpot round (see remarks in FIG. 18 and S6103: Yes in FIG. 40), and the process proceeds to S6306.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S6304, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is not less than "2", that is, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is "2" or more (S6304: No), At the end of the round one round before the currently executed jackpot round, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the variable probability region 65d has reached "2", and the variable probability region 65d of the currently executed jackpot round is set invalid. Since the conditions are satisfied (see the remarks column in FIG. 18 and S6103 in FIG. 40: No), the processing of S6306 to S6311 is skipped, and this probability variable area passage determination processing (S6216) ends, and the big prize Return to the open mouth process (FIG. 41).

In addition, in the processing of S6303, it was determined that none of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F" In the case, that is, the jackpot type "probable variable G", "probable variable H", "probable variable I", "probable variable J", "probable variable K", "probable variable L", "probable variable M", "probable variable N", "probable variable O" , "Probability P", "Probability Q", "Probability R", "Probability S", "Probability T" or "Probability U" are elected, and the jackpot in the dynamic display of the second special symbol If there is (S6303: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is a value smaller than "3" (S6305), and the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is a value smaller than "3" If so (S6305: Yes), at the end of the round one round before the currently running jackpot round, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d has not reached “3”, and the probability variable region 65d is The number of rounds passed is "2" or less, and the conditions for invalidating the probability variable area 65d of the currently running jackpot round are not satisfied (see the remarks column in FIG. 18 and S6104 in FIG. 40: Yes ), and the process proceeds to S6306.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S6305, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is not less than "3", that is, if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is "3" or more (S6305: No), At the end of the round one round before the currently executed jackpot round, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the variable probability region 65d reaches 3, and the variable probability region 65d of the currently executed jackpot round is set invalid. Since the conditions are satisfied (see the remarks column in FIG. 19 and S6104 in FIG. 40: No), the processing of S6306 to S6311 is skipped, and this probability variable area passage determination processing (S6216) ends, and the big prize Return to the open mouth process (FIG. 41).

In the process of S6306, 1 is added to the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o (S6306), the probability variable region passage command is set (S6307), and the process proceeds to S6308. The audio ramp control device 113 is configured to set a display voting execution command in the voting effect processing described later (described later in FIG. 56) upon receiving the variable probability area passing command.

In the processing of S6308, it is determined whether or not the probability varying region effective flag 203m is turned on (S6308), and if the probability varying region effective flag 203m is turned on (S6308: Yes), the probability varying region 65d of the round is activated. In the set situation, the ball passes through the variable probability region 65d, so that the probability variable transition flag 203k is set to ON in order to generate a "probability variable state" after the end of the big hit (S6309). A transition flag command is set (S6310), and the process proceeds to S6311.

In the process of S6311, set the effective probability variable area passage round command (S6311), terminate this probability variable area passage determination process (S6216), and return to the large winning opening open process (FIG. 41). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the probability variable transition flag command transmitted in S6310 and the effective probability variable region passing round command transmitted in S6311, in the competition effect processing described later, the effect result is a successful competition deployment scenario. (described later in FIG. 58).

By configuring in this way, the probability variable transition flag 203k is set to ON only when the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d while the probability variable region effective flag 203m is turned on, and the state can be shifted to the "probability variable state". can be made That is, only when the ball passes through the variable probability region 65d in the jackpot round in which the variable probability region 65d is set to be effective, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state".

Also, of the 6 rounds in which the probability variable region 65d is opened, the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d is a constant number (in the first embodiment, when the jackpot in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "2 times", "3 times" at the time of the big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol), all passage of the ball to the probability variable area 65d after that can be invalidated. As a result, the player is made to guess the round in which the variable probability area 65d is effectively set, select a certain number of rounds out of six rounds in which the variable probability area 65d is opened, and place the ball in the variable probability area 65d. It is possible to create a game property in which it is determined whether or not the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d in the fixed number of rounds to be shifted to the "probability variable state", and interest can be improved.

In addition, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region 65d is a certain number (in the first embodiment, "twice" when the big hit is displayed in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and in the dynamic display of the second special symbol "Three times" at the time of the big hit) only when it has not reached, the ball passing information (passing round information) to the probability variable area 65d is held, and based on the round information, in the third symbol display device 81 " "Competition production" can be executed.

For example, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the player passes the ball through the probability variable area 65d in all rounds of 6 rounds from 4R to 9R in which the probability variable area 65d is opened. When the ball is passed through the variable probability region 65d for the 4th and 5th rounds, the passage of the ball through the variable probability region 65d is performed by the variable probability region passing command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. Stored in lamp controller 113 . On the other hand, in the remaining 4 rounds of 6R to 9R, since the number of rounds in which the ball has already passed through the variable probability region 65d has reached a fixed number of "2 times", the command is not transmitted from the main controller 110, It is not stored as a round that passes through the probability variable region 65d. Therefore, in the "competition effect" executed in the third symbol display device 81, in such a case, the 4R-th and 5R-th probability variations, which is a state in which the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the probability variation region 65d, has not reached a certain number. An effect can be executed based on information on the passage of the ball to the area 65d.

Furthermore, regardless of the number of times the effective probability variable area is passed for one big winning game, the probability variable transition flag 203k can be updated to ON only once, and in the big winning game after being updated to ON , the probability variation transition flag 203k cannot be updated until it transitions to the "probability variation state".

Returning to the processing (S6007) during the opening of the big winning opening in FIG. 41, the description is continued. In the process of S6205, if it is determined that the value of the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6205: Yes), or after the probability variable area passage determination process of S6216 is completed, the opening time of the probability variable area 65d is It is determined whether or not 10 seconds have passed (S6217).

More specifically, the value of the variable probability area open timer 203n is set to "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) is executed (that is, every 2 milliseconds) when started in the process of S6056 of FIG. Since it is added, it is determined that 10 seconds have passed when the value of the probability variable area open timer 203n reaches "5000".

In the processing of S6217, if it is determined that the opening time of the variable probability region 65d has passed for 10 seconds (S6217: Yes), the closed setting of the variable probability region 65d is performed (S6218), and the variable probability region 65d for the sound lamp control device 113 is closed (S6219), and the process proceeds to S6220. It should be noted that the probability variable region closing command set in the processing of S6219 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 30) , to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Then, in the process of S6220, set the probability variable area effective flag 203m to OFF (S6220), clear the value of the probability variable area open timer 203n "0" (S6221), during the large winning opening open processing (S6007) It ends and returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 39).

Also, as a result of the determination of S6217, if the opening time of the probability changing region 65d has not passed 10 seconds (S6217: No), the closing process of the probability changing region 65d is not performed. The big winning opening opening process (S6007) is terminated, and the process returns to the big winning opening/closing control process (see FIG. 39).

Returning to the winning process (S203) in FIG. 38, the description is continued. After the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 39) of S612 ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S613). As a result of determination, if the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S613: Yes), in order to continue the big win state, the process of S614, which is the big win end setting process, is skipped, and this winning process (S203) exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S613, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S613: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since all the opening actions have been completed, a jackpot ending process is performed to end the jackpot state (S614), and the winning process (S203) is ended.

Here, the jackpot ending process (S614), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S610).

In this jackpot end processing (S614), based on the probability variable transition flag 203k set depending on whether or not the effective probability variable region is passed during the jackpot game, the probability variable flag 203j, the time short low probability flag 203p, the time short high probability flag 203q and the time short counter 203r. settings, etc.

In this jackpot end processing (S614), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned on (S6401). As a result of the determination, if the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned on (S6401: Yes), the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned off (S6402) in order to make the gaming state after the jackpot end "probability fluctuation state", and the probability variation flag 203j is turned on (S6403), the time saving high accuracy flag 203q is turned on (S6404), and the process proceeds to S6407.

In the processing of S6401, if it is determined that the variable probability transition flag 203k is not turned on (S6401: No), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to "general pattern high probability time reduction state", time saving high probability The flag 203q is turned on (S6405), the time saving counter 203r is set to "150" (S6406), and the process proceeds to S6407.

In the process of S6407, an ending command indicating the start of the ending effect of the jackpot is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S6407). The ending command set in the process of S6407 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 30) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the ending effect of the jackpot while determining the execution status of the “competition effect” being executed in the display control device 114 .

After the end of the process of S6407, the ending time (for example, "10 seconds") is set according to the gaming state (S6408), the value of the probability variable area passing number counter 203o is cleared to "0" (S6409), and the A jackpot end setting process for executing various processes at the end of the jackpot is performed (S6410), the jackpot end process (S614) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 38).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win when the ball passes through the effective probability variable area during the big win game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, normal figure fluctuation processing (S211), which is one processing of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211).

This normal pattern variation process (S211) is for controlling the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 83 due to passage of the ball through the through gate 67. FIG.

In the normal pattern variation process (S211), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric player 72 is currently projecting (operating), that is, whether or not the normal pattern is winning (S701). As a result of the determination, if the normal electrode 72 is protruding (S701: Yes), the normal pattern is in the process of winning, so the normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) ).

On the other hand, if the normal electric combination 72 is not protruding (S701: No), it is not during the winning of the normal symbols. Determine (S702). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the normal design display device 83 is not in the variable display of the normal design (S702: No), then after the variable display in the normal design display device 83 stops, a predetermined time (for example, "1 second ”) It is determined whether or not it has passed (S703). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the variable display (S703: No), the normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) is returned to. As a result, the stopped symbols in the variable display are displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stopped symbols.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S703, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S703: Yes), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (variable It is determined whether or not the displayed number of balls to be activated (HN) is greater than "0" (S704).

As a result of the processing of S704, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (operation reserved ball number HN) is not greater than "0" (S704: No), there is a normal pattern variable display reserved ball number to be executed. Since it does not mean that it does not, this normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) ends and returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (actuated reserved ball number HN) is a value greater than "0" (S704: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the variable display related to the reserved normal pattern. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (operation reserved ball number HN) (S705). This is due to the processing (S706 to S712) to be described later, in accordance with the start of the execution of one variable display of the reserved variable display regarding the normal symbols, the number of reserved balls regarding the normal symbols decreases by one. It's for.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the normal map reserved ball storage area 203h (S706). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203h toward the general pattern reservation ball execution area 203i. Reservation 1st area → Normal drawing reservation ball execution area 203i, Normal drawing reservation 2nd area → Normal drawing reservation 1st area, Normal drawing reservation 3rd area → Normal drawing reservation 2nd area, Normal drawing reservation 4th area → Normal drawing The data in each area is shifted, in a reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S706, the normal design in the normal design display device 83 is variable based on the data (that is, the value of the counter C4 for the normal design) stored in the normal design reservation ball execution area 203i by the data shift processing. In order to perform a display, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving low probability flag 203p or the time saving high probability flag 203q is turned on (S707). As a result of the determination, when the time saving low probability flag 203p and the time saving high probability flag 203q are not turned on (S707: No), it is determined that the "normal game state" in which the "time saving function" is invalidated, and the normal symbol is displayed. The variable display time is set to "15 seconds" (S708), and the process proceeds to S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving low-probability flag 203p or the time-saving high-probability flag 203q is turned on (S707: Yes), the "probability fluctuation state" in which the "time-saving function" is effective, the "general pattern high-probability time reduction state ' or 'normal pattern low probability time shortened state', the variable display time of the normal pattern is set to '0.1 second' (S709), and the process proceeds to S710.

In the process of S710, it is determined whether or not the time-saving high-probability flag 203q is turned on (S710), and if the time-saving high-probability flag 203q is not turned on (S710: No), that is, in the normal design low probability state , By referring to the group for the low probability state in the random number table 202i per normal pattern, the value of the per normal pattern counter C4 stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i is determined, and the stop pattern of the variable display of the normal pattern is determined. (That is, the propriety of the normal design) is determined (S711). Also, if the time saving high probability flag 203q is turned on (S710: Yes), that is, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, refer to the group for the high probability state in the random number table 202i per normal pattern, and hold the normal pattern The value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the ball execution area 203i is determined, and the stop symbol of the variable display of the normal symbol (that is, the propriety of the normal symbol) is determined (S712). After the processing of S711 and S712, this normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) is ended, and it returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30).

As a result, by changing the winning/losing probability of normal symbols according to the game state, it is possible to determine whether or not the normal electric combination 72 is likely to open when the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the player hits to the right. can make a difference. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is in a situation where the normal electric 72 is easy to open (that is, a high probability state of normal symbols) and is easy to flow into the second starting port 71 side. In a situation where it is more difficult to open the electric element 72 than it is easy to open (that is, a state with a low probability of normal symbols), the upper surface of the closed (protruding) normal electric element 72 rolls from the right end to the left end, By varying the situation in which the game can flow into the variable winning device 65 side depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state.

In the processing of S702, when it is determined that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S713). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the processing of S708 or S709, and if this variable display time has not passed (S713: No), the normal symbol display device 83 is displayed. is updated (S714), this normal pattern fluctuation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 has passed (S713: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol preset by S711 or S712 to the normal symbol display device 83 is set (S715), this normal figure fluctuation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the normal design display device 83 is set based on the normal design variation processing (S211), and the variable display is started in the normal design display device 83. until the variable display time elapses, the "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. When the result of the variable display is a win, the symbol "O" is lit, and when the result is a loss, the symbol "x" is lit.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, normal electric control processing (S204), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) executed by MPU 201 in main control unit 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this normal electric duty control process (S204).

In this normal electric role control process (S204), when a normal symbol hit occurs, opening/closing (protrusion and immersion) drive control of the normal electric role 72 is executed according to the game state. That is, the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric part 72 is set according to the game state, and the normal electric part 72 is driven to open based on the set time, and when the set projecting time elapses, it is opened. A control is executed to close (protrude) the ordinary electric terminal 72 during (immersion).

In the normal electric role control process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric role 72 is open (immersed), that is, whether or not the normal symbols are winning (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal electric part 72 is not open (S801: No), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbols are not winning, next, whether the variable display of the normal symbols has ended. It is determined whether or not (S802).

As a result of the determination in S802, if the variable display of normal symbols has not ended (S802: No), the normal electric role control process (S204) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30). If the variable display of the normal symbols has ended (S802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a win has been won in the variable display (S803).

As a result of the determination in S803, if it is determined that the win has not been won in the variable display (S803: No), this normal electric role control processing (S204) is terminated and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) back to On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is won in the variable display (S803: Yes), first, the time-saving low-probability flag 203p or the time-saving high-probability flag 203q is turned on in order to execute the control related to the winning. (S804).

As a result of the determination in S804, if it is determined that the time saving low probability flag 203p and the time saving high probability flag 203q are not turned on (S804: No), the "normal game state" in which the "time saving function" is disabled Then, based on the specified contents of the normal electric role opening table 202k, the opening time of the ordinary electric role 72 in the winning state is set to "0.1 second" (S805), and the number of opening times of the ordinary electric role 72 is set based on the hit. is set to "1" in an electric duty counter (not shown) (S806), and the process proceeds to S809.

On the other hand, in the process of S804, if it is determined that the time saving low probability flag 203p or the time saving high probability flag 203q is turned on (S804: Yes), the "probability fluctuation state" in which the "time saving function" is valid, the "normal It is determined that it is a high probability time shortening state or a low probability time shortening state, and the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric role 72 in the winning state is determined based on the specified contents of the normal electric role opening table 202k. 5.8 seconds” (S807), and in order to open the normal electric circuit 72 once based on the hit, set the value of the electric circuit counter (not shown) to “1” (S808 ), and the process proceeds to S809.

In the process of S809, the normal electric part 72 is opened (immersed) (S809), the normal electric part 72 is driven from the closed (protruding) state to the open state, and the normal electric part control process (S204) is executed. Terminates and returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30).

As a result, when the player hits to the right, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the position where the ordinary electric terminal 72 is arranged, and the state in which the ordinary electric terminal 72 is open is long or short. can make a difference. As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided toward the second starting port 71 side, or rolls over the upper surface of the normal electrode 72 from the right end to the left end in the closed state of the normal electrode 72, By making the state in which the ball can be flowed down to the variable prize winning device 65 side differ depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state.

In the process of S801, if it is determined that the normal electric part 72 is open (S801: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the process of winning, then It is determined whether or not the normal electric circuit 72 has been opened once (S810). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the set opening time of the ordinary electric circuit 72 has not passed (S810: No), S811 to S813 are executed in order to maintain the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72. The process is skipped, the normal electric power control process (S204) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the process of S810, if it is determined that the set opening time of the normal electric terminal 72 has passed (S810: Yes), first, the closing (projection) process of the normal electric terminal 72 is executed. (S811), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the electric duty counter set in the process of S806 or S808 (S812). Then, it is determined whether or not the decremented value of the electric duty counter is greater than "0" (S813). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is greater than "0" (S813: Yes), the number of times the normal electric service 72 is opened remains based on the hit, so the process is executed. The process proceeds to S809, and after a predetermined interval process is performed, the normal electric circuit 72 is opened again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the service counter is not greater than "0" (S813: No), that is, if the value of the service counter is less than or equal to "0", the normal service based on the pertinence is determined. 72 has been completely opened, the ordinary electric circuit 72 is not reopened, the ordinary electric circuit control processing (S204) is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) is returned to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, and stores power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power failure occurrence information settings (S901). ), ending the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 58. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 47) that is activated upon power-on and main processing (see FIG. 47) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 47, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1116 (see FIG. 48) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 48, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110, it executes power-off processing in S1116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), it will transfer to S1004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1116, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 48). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1010), an interrupt Permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The reason why the clearing process of S1009 is skipped is that when the process of S1008 is reached from S1004 via the process of S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when a setting value command is received from the main controller 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in a setting value memory (not shown) (S1013), and the main processing ( 48).

In this manner, in the start-up processing of the audio ramp control device 113, the main processing (see FIG. 48) is started until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 27) is received. By waiting for the transition, the audio lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability set value set by the main controller 110, and the main processing and subsequent processing can be executed based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main controller 110, the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not reached the final stage, and the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not ended normally. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not terminated normally, and the process is not shifted to the main process. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to grasp whether or not the start-up processing of the main control device 110 has been normally executed, and whether the main control device 110 has started up normally. It is possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 from running out of control in a non-existent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the processing of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if "1 millisecond or more" has not passed ( S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the process of S1101, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed because S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed in a short period (within "1 millisecond"), whereas S1110 This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation effect processing of S1111 and the command determination processing of S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

In the process of S1101, when it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 47, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds"). 227. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a winning effect process for executing an effect related to a big win set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106. In the first embodiment, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened or a right-handed notification is given during the opening of the variable winning device 65 related to the jackpot by the first special symbol and the second special symbol) It is configured to execute effects, such as "voting effects" and "competition effects", which will be described later. The details of this winning effect processing (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, in the processing of S1106, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the performance effect, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and during the valid period, the frame button is pressed. This is processing for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the frame button 22 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1106) is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command received from the main controller 110, or the special figure 2 variation pattern command and Variation effect processing corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed based on the special figure 2 stop type command (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111. The details of this variation effect processing (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. The details of this command determination process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1112, counter update processing is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, updating the counter that determines the detailed variation pattern of the variable production, a pending change counter (not shown) that draws a "pending change notice", and a competition development counter (not shown) that draws a competition development scenario during the "competition production" ( (not shown) are updated in this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment) and resetting it to “0” after reaching the maximum value (“99”).

When the process of S1112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off processing is executed (S1116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 determine the command.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main controller 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of determination, if a command has been received from main controller 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, It is determined whether or not a command (that is, a special figure 1 variation pattern command, a special figure 1 stop type command, a special figure 1 confirmation command, etc.) related to dynamic display (variation effect) of 1 special symbol is received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is received (S1202: Yes), special figure 1 command processing for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1203), and this The command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 48).

Here, with reference to Drawing 50, special figure 1 command processing (S1203) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 50 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 1 command processing (S1203).

In this special figure 1 command process (S1203), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1221). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1221: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received special figure 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1222).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation performance process (see FIG. 53) described later, the variation of the first special symbol is displayed for the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 1 variation pattern command for display that notifies the start of production and its variation pattern type. After that, this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 49 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1223). And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command is received (S1223: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command (S1224).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 53) described later, the variable effect of the first special symbol is displayed on the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 1 stop type command for display that notifies the stop type of. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol is started is set to ON (S1225), this special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination process (See FIG. 49).

It should be noted that the special figure 1 stop type command, after the main controller 110 transmits the special figure 1 variation pattern command when starting the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is indicated by the special figure 1 variation pattern command. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main controller 110 as a command indicating the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol. By setting the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1225, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 53) executed later, the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the first reserved ball number command Determination of whether the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted based on and the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command match I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the first pending ball number command, and the first extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variable performance of the special symbol matches. As a result of those determinations, in the variation performance of the first special symbol of 1, if the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command do not match, or the first If the stop type based on the number of pending balls command and the stop type based on the special figure 1 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and an abnormality is detected. It is configured to perform error handling to indicate

As a result of the processing of S1223, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has not been received (S1223: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1226). The special figure 1 determination command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation performance of the first special symbol when the variation performance of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . When it is determined that this special figure 1 confirmation command is received (S1226: Yes), when the variation performance of the first special symbol is executed for the display control device 114, the variation of the first special symbol Set the special figure 1 confirmation command for display to confirm and display the effect (S1227), terminate this special figure 1 command process (S1203), and return to the command determination process (see FIG. 49).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 1 confirmation command from the audio lamp control device 113, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the first special While confirming and displaying the variation performance of the symbol, when the variation performance of the first special symbol is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 confirmation command for display is ignored (the processing based on is not executed) , the display content is not changed based on the

As a result of the processing of S1226, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1226: No), the process related to the variation effect of the other first special symbol is performed (S1228), and this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 49).

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is not received (S1202: No), then the main controller 110 displays the second special symbol dynamic It is determined whether or not a command (that is, a special figure 2 variation pattern command, a special figure 2 stop type command, or a special figure 2 confirmation command, etc.) related to display (variation effect) is received (S1204). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect) is received (S1204: Yes), special figure 2 command processing for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1205), and this The command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 48).

Here, with reference to Drawing 51, special figure 2 command processing (S1205) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 51 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 2 command processing (S1205).

In this special figure 2 command process (S1205), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 2 command process (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1251). As a result of determination, if the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S1251: Yes), the variation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is extracted (S1252).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 53) described later, the variation of the second special symbol is displayed on the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 2 variation pattern command for display that notifies the start of production and its variation pattern type. After that, this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 49 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S1251: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1253). And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S1253: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command (S1254).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 53) described later, the variable effect of the second special symbol is displayed for the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 2 stop type command for display that notifies the stop type of. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol is started is set to ON (S1255), this special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination process (See FIG. 49).

In addition, the special figure 2 stop type command, after the main controller 110 transmits the special figure 2 variation pattern command when starting the variation production of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is indicated by the special figure 2 variation pattern command. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main controller 110 as a command indicating the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol. By setting the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b to ON by the processing of S1255, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 53) to be executed later, the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the second pending ball number command Determination of whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted based on and the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command match I do. In addition, the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the second pending ball number command, and the second extracted from the received special figure 2 stop type command It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variable performance of the special symbol matches. As a result of those determinations, in the variation performance of the second special symbol of 1, if the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 2 variation pattern command do not match, or the second If the stop type based on the number of pending balls command and the stop type based on the special figure 2 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and an abnormality is detected. It is configured to perform error handling to indicate

As a result of the processing of S1253, if it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S1253: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1256). The special figure 2 determination command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation performance of the second special symbol when the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . When it is determined that this special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S1256: Yes), when the second special symbol variation effect is executed for the display control device 114, the second special symbol variation Set the special figure 2 confirmation command for display to confirm and display the effect (S1257), terminate this special figure 2 command processing (S1205), and return to the command determination processing (see FIG. 49).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 2 confirmation command from the audio lamp control device 113, when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the second special While confirming and displaying the variation performance of the symbol, if the variation performance of the second special symbol is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 2 confirmation command for display is ignored (the processing based on is not executed) , the display content is not changed based on the

As a result of the processing of S1256, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S1256: No), the process related to the variation effect of the other second special symbol is performed (S1258), and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 49).

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. In the processing of S1204, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has not been received (S1204: No), then the main controller 110 issues the first reserved ball number command. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S1206). Then, when it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (see FIG. 5) of main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1207). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the first reserved ball number command, is set to the sub-first reserved ball number updated in S1207. Stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first suspension information storage area 223e indicated by the value of the counter 223c (S1208). Then, a display first reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number of the variable effect of the first special symbol is set to the display control device 114 (S1209), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 48).

Here, since the first reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting hole 64 (start winning), the process of S1207 is performed each time there is a starting win. Thus, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the voice The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223 c of the lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203 a of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first reservation information storage area 223e. That is, when the variable performance of the reserved first special symbol is executed, what will be the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) before the execution of the variable performance It is possible to determine the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

As a result of the processing of S1206, if it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has not been received (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the second reserved ball number command has been received from main controller 110. (S1210). Then, when it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (see FIG. 5) of main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect reserved by the main controller 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1211). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the second reserved ball number command, is set to the sub-second reserved ball number updated in S1211. Stored in the second pending information storage first to fourth areas of the second pending information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the counter 223d (S1212). Then, a display second reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number of the second special symbol variation effect is set to the display control device 114 (S1213), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 48).

Here, since the second reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (start winning), the process of S1211 is performed each time there is a starting win. Thus, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223 d of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203 b of the main controller 110 . Therefore, even if the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice The value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223 d of the lamp controller 113 can be corrected to match the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203 b of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the second reservation information storage area 223f. That is, when the suspended second special symbol variable performance is executed, how the result of the variable performance will be (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) before the execution of the variable performance It is possible to determine the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

As a result of the process of S1210, if it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has not been received (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not various commands during the jackpot game have been received from the main controller 110. During the jackpot command reception process is executed (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1215.

Here, with reference to Drawing 52, command receiving processing (S1214) during a big hit performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the command receiving process (S1214) during this jackpot.

In this jackpot middle command reception process (S1214), various setting processes are executed based on each command transmitted from the main controller 110 during the jackpot game.

In the jackpot medium command reception process (S1214), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variable area passing command is received from the main controller 110 (S1271). As a result of the determination, if the probability variable region passage command is received (S1271: Yes), the probability variable region passage flag (any of the probability variable region passage flag A223i to the probability variable region passage flag F223o) of the round is set to ON (S1272 ), this jackpot middle command receiving process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 49).

More specifically, the jackpot this time is one of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", that is, the first special symbol In the case of a jackpot in the dynamic display of, if the round is 4R, the probability variable region passage flag A223i, if the round is 5R, the probability variable region passage flag B223j, if the round is 6R, the probability variable region passage If the round is 7R, the probability variable area passage flag D223m is set to ON. If the round is 8R, the probability variable area passage flag E223n is set. If the round is 9R, the probability variable area passage flag F223o is set to ON. .

In addition, the jackpot this time is the jackpot type "Variable G", "Variable H", "Variable I", "Variable J", "Variable K", "Variable L", "Variable M", "Variable N", "Variable O", "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" or "variable probability U", that is, a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol In case, if the round is 2R, the probability variable region passage flag A223i, if the round is 3R, the probability variable region passage flag B223j, if the round is 4R, the probability variable region passage flag C223k, the round is 5R If so, the probability variable area flag D223m is set to ON, the probability variable area flag E223n is set to ON if the round is 6R, and the probability variable area flag F223o is set to ON if the round is 7R.

By setting in this way, it is possible to determine in which jackpot round the player has passed through the variable probability region 65d. As a result, even if it is not possible to pass through the effective variable probability area in the jackpot game, and even if the production that fails in the "competition production" described later is executed, in the round in which the player passes through the variable probability area 65d The third symbol display device 81 can execute the "competition effect" based on the result, and the result can be notified while suppressing the player's desire to play.

In the process of S1271, if it is determined that the variable probability region passing command has not been received (S1271: No), then it is determined whether or not the variable probability transition flag command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1273). As a result of the determination, if the probability variation transition flag command is received (S1273: Yes), the sub probability variation transition flag 223p is set to ON (S1274), the command reception processing during this jackpot (S1214) is terminated, and the command determination Return to the process (see FIG. 49).

On the other hand, in the process of S1273, if it is determined that the probability variation transition flag command has not been received (S1273: No), then it is determined whether or not the effective probability variation region passing round command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1275). As a result of determination, if the effective probability varying region passing round command is received (S1275: Yes), the information of the effective probability varying region passing round command is stored in the effective probability varying region passing round storage area 223q (S1276), and during this jackpot The command reception process (S1214) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 49).

By configuring in this way, among the rounds in which the ball passes through the probability variable region 65d during the jackpot game, it is possible to determine the round information in which the effective probability variable region is passed. As a result, in the "competition effect" to be described later, it is possible to execute an effect that results in a success of the "competition effect" based on the round in which the player passes through the effective probability change region among the rounds in which the player passes through the probability change region 65d. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S1275, if it is determined that the effective probability variable area passing round command is not received (S1275: No), the command receiving process (S1214) during the jackpot is terminated, and the command determination process (see FIG. 49) return.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. When the command receiving process during the big hit of S1214 is finished, then the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S1215), the command determination process (S1111) is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 48). Here, if the received other command is a command to be used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is to be used in the display control device 114, the command is set to the display control device 114 . For example, the demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1216, temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and then output as a command for the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by processing (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this variation effect processing (S1110).

This variable effect process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 48), and the first special symbol or the first special symbol in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81 is 2 Executes various processes for executing the variation performance of the special symbols. Specifically, when the condition for starting the variation production of the first special symbol is established, the variation production of the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. . Further, when the condition for starting the variation production of the second special symbol is satisfied, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to carry out the variation production of the second special symbol.

In the fluctuation production process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1301). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1301: Yes), both the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, so the first special In order to start the variation effect of the design, the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is turned off (S1302), and then the data contained in the first reservation information storage first area provided in the first reservation information storage area 223e is executed. It shifts to the information storage area 223g (S1303), and further, the data contained in the first pending information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first pending information storage area 223e is transferred to the first pending information storage first to third areas. It shifts to the area (S1304), subtracts 1 from the value of the sub-first ball number counter 223c (S1305), and proceeds to S1306.

That is, in this case, the suspended first special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first special symbol variable effect suspended in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reservation information first area corresponding to the variable performance that has been executed are executed corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the information storage area 223g. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the ball holding execution area 203f of the main controller 110, and the first holding information storage area 223e. In the first holding information storage first to fourth areas, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 will store the same value as

In the process of S1306, the first reserved ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c subtracted in the process of S1305 (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307.

The first pending ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 48). sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the number of reserved balls in the variable effect of the first special symbol indicated by the first reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1307, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is obtained. Based on this, in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a special figure 1 variation pattern command for display is set (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

The display special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 48) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display special figure 1 variation pattern command. Then, display control of the variation effect of the first special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1308, based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now is acquired, and the stop type Based on this, in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the display special figure 1 stop type command is set (S1308), and this variation effect process (S1110) is performed. End and return to the main process (see FIG. 48).

The display special figure 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 48) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, in the case of confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol executed by the display special figure 1 variation pattern command set by the processing of S1309, this display special figure 1 stop type command Set a stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1309 ). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1309: Yes), both the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received, so the second special In order to start the variation effect of the design, turn off the special figure 2 variation start flag 223b (S1310), then execute the data contained in the second reservation information storage first area provided in the second reservation information storage area 223f It shifts to the information storage area 223g (S1311), and further, the data contained in the second pending information storage areas 2 to 4 provided in the second pending information storage area 223f is transferred to the first pending information storage first to third areas. It shifts to the area (S1312), subtracts 1 from the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d (S1313), and proceeds to S1314.

That is, in this case, the suspended second special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the second special symbol variation effect suspended first in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reserved information first area corresponding to the variable performance that has been executed are executed corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the information storage area 223g. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the ball holding execution area 203f of the main controller 110, and the second holding information storage area 223f. In the first holding information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 will store the same value as

In the process of S1314, the second reserved ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d subtracted in the process of S1313 (S1314), and the process proceeds to S1315.

The second reserved ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 48). sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect indicated by the second reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1315, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is obtained. In order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (S1315), and the process proceeds to S1316.

The display special figure 2 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 48) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation pattern indicated by the display special figure 2 variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the variation effect of the second special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1316, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the second special symbol variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired, and the stop type In order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display special figure 2 stop type command is set (S1316), and this variation effect process (S1110) is performed. End and return to the main process (see FIG. 48).

The display special figure 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 48) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, in the case of confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol executed by the display special figure 2 variation pattern command set by the processing of S1317, this display special figure 2 stop type command Set a stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the hit effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the winning effect processing (S1105).

This winning effect processing (S1105) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and executes the processing during the execution of the big winning game of the main control device 110.

More specifically, in each round in which the probability variable region 65d is opened, the third symbol display device 81 performs a “voting effect” to determine whether or not the ball is allowed to pass through the probability variable region 65d. In addition, based on the round information that the player has passed the ball through the probability variable region 65d and whether or not the effective probability variable region has passed, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "competition effect" of whether to shift to the "probability variable state". in

In this hit effect processing (S1105), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won (S1401), and if the jackpot has been won (S1401: Yes), the value of the sub probability variable area passage number counter 223h is cleared to "0". Then (S1402), the probability variable region passage flag (probability variable region passage flag A223i to probability variable region passage flag F223o) of each round is set to off (S1403).

Next, clear the effective probability variable area passing round storage area 223q (S1404), set the sub probability variable transition flag 223p and the voting completion flag 223r to off (S1405), execute other initialization processing (S1406), The process moves to S1407.

In the process of S1407, a process related to the opening of the big win is executed (S1407), then a lottery process related to the introduction effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 after the start of the big win round is executed (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409.

This introductory effect is an effect that is executed before the round in which the variable probability area 65d is opened during the jackpot game. That is, if it is a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, since the probability variable region 65d is opened from the 4R, the introduction effect is executed between 1R to 3R, and the dynamic of the second special symbol If it is a big hit based on the display, the probability variable area 65d is opened from the 2nd R, so the introductory effect is executed at the 1st R. Then, in this introductory effect, a game explanation to the effect that one of the probability variable regions 65d is passed in order to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big hit, and the introduction of the "voting effect" that is performed after the execution of the introductory effect. A different performance is executed. In the lottery process for the introduction effect of S1408, the lottery process for the content of the effect that is the preamble is performed.

The lottery process related to this introduction effect is the content of the winning jackpot type and the probability variable region effective table 202h, that is, whether the probability variable region 65d of any jackpot round is set to be effective. It is configured so that the lottery process is performed at random from the

If this introductory effect is configured to draw a lottery based on the winning jackpot type and the contents of the probability variable area effective table 202h, the probability that the probability variable area 65d for each round is effectively set by the introduced introductory effect. is suggested to the player, and the player decides the round in which the ball is passed through the variable probability region 65d according to the content of the introduction effect that has appeared.

In other words, if a predetermined introductory effect is executed in this big hit, and the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d according to the content of the introductory effect, all are set to be invalid in the probability variable region effective table 202h. When it is a round, the player cannot move to the "probability fluctuation state" after the big win, so the player feels distrust in the contents of the introduction effect (for example, the lottery process may not be performed normally, etc.) and may lose interest in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a player who can know the relationship between the introduction effect and the validity/invalidity of the probability variable region 65d can obtain a significantly superior game result compared to a player who does not know it, and the introduction effect and the probability variable region can be obtained. A player who does not know the relationship between validity and invalidity of the area 65d may suffer a significant disadvantage.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, regardless of the type of winning jackpot or the contents of the probability variable area effective table 202h, the introduction effect is randomly selected, so that the introduction effect and the " It can be irrelevant to the presence or absence of transition to "probability fluctuation state", and only the player's pure speculation (i.e., the result of the player guessing which jackpot round probability change region 65d is set effectively only) will derive whether or not there is a transition to the "probability fluctuation state".

By configuring in this way, even if the transition to the "probability fluctuation state" could not be made, the player did not blame the pachinko machine 10, but because his own guess was wrong. It can be understood that it is, and it is possible to improve interest by new game characteristics while suppressing the excitement of the game. In addition, even a player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 10 for the first time does not need to grasp the relationship between the introduction performance and the validity/invalidity of the variable probability area 65d, and the player can be provided with an equal game. can be done.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won (S1401: No), the processing of S1402 to S1408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1409.

In the process of S1409, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1409), and if the jackpot is in progress (S1409: Yes), during the jackpot, a process relating to the effect contents executed in the third symbol display device 81 is performed during the jackpot game. Effect processing is executed (S1410), the winning effect processing (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 48).

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the effect|presentation process (S1410) during a big hit performed by MPU221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the effect processing (S1410) during the jackpot.

This jackpot middle effect process (S1410) is executed in the win effect process (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. It executes processing related to "voting effect", "competition effect", and the like.

In this jackpot middle production process (S1410), first, this jackpot type "probable variable A", "probable variable B", "probable variable C", "probable variable D", "probable variable E" or "probable variable F" That is, it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S1501), and the jackpot this time is a jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F" (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the round is one of the 1R to 3R (S1502).

As a result of the determination in S1502, if the round is one of the 1st round to the 3rd round, a jackpot for display is determined based on the content of the introduction effect during the jackpot drawn in the processing of S1408 of the winning effect processing (see FIG. 54). A medium introduction effect command is set (S1503) (see FIGS. 59(b) to 61(b)), and the process proceeds to S1512.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, if it is determined that the round is neither the 1st to 3rd rounds (S1502: No), then it is determined whether the round is any of the 4th to 9th rounds. Determined (S1504), if the round is one of the 4Rth ~ 9Rth (S1504: Yes), voting performance to perform "voting performance" executed in the third symbol display device 81 between 4R ~ 9R The process is executed (S1505), and the process moves to S1512.

Here, the voting effect processing (S1505) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this voting effect processing (S1505).

This voting effect processing (S1505) is executed during the big win effect processing (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the big win. "Voting effect" processing is performed.

In this voting effect processing (S1505), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variable region passage flag (probability variable region passage flag A223i to probability variable region passage flag F223o) of the round is turned on (S1601).

More specifically, the jackpot this time is one of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", that is, the first special symbol In the case of a jackpot in the dynamic display of, if the round is 4R, the probability variable region passage flag A223i, if the round is 5R, the probability variable region passage flag B223j, if the round is 6R, the probability variable region passage If the round is 7R, the probability variable area flag D223m is turned on. If the round is 8R, the probability variable area flag E223n. If the round is 9R, the probability variable area flag F223o is turned on. determine whether there is

In addition, the jackpot this time is the jackpot type "Variable G", "Variable H", "Variable I", "Variable J", "Variable K", "Variable L", "Variable M", "Variable N", "Variable O", "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" or "variable probability U", that is, a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol In case, if the round is 2R, the probability variable region passage flag A223i, if the round is 3R, the probability variable region passage flag B223j, if the round is 4R, the probability variable region passage flag C223k, the round is 5R If so, determine whether or not the probability variable region passage flag D223m is turned on, the probability variable region passage flag E223n if the round is 6R, and the probability variable region passage flag F223o if the round is 7R.

As a result of the determination in S1601, if the probability variable region passage flag of the round is not turned on (S1601: No), the passage of the probability variable region 65d of the round has not yet been detected. It is determined whether or not the variable probability region 65d is open (S1602), and if the variable probability region 65d is not open (S1602: No), 10 seconds or more have passed since the round started, and the probability variable region 65d is closed. Since the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, a right-hand hitting notification command during the jackpot for display suggesting a right-hand hitting game during the jackpot is set (S1603) (see FIG. 62(c)), and this voting effect processing (S1505) is ended and it returns to production processing (refer to Drawing 55) during a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, if it is determined that the probability variable region 65d is open (S1602: Yes), the probability variable region 65d is in the state of opening the third symbol display device 81 to perform the effect processing probability variable region open Medium production processing is executed (S1604), this voting production processing (S1505) is terminated, and the process returns to the large winning medium production processing (see FIG. 55).

Here, with reference to FIG. 57, the effect processing (S1604) during opening of the variable probability area executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the effect processing (S1604) while the probability variable area is open.

This probability variable area open production process (S1604) is executed in the voting production process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol in the state in which the probability variable area 65d is open Perform production processing on the display device 81

In this probability variable area open effect processing (S1604), first, it is determined whether or not the voting completion flag 223r is turned on (S1651), and if the voting completion flag 223r is not turned on (S1651: No) The value of the area passage number counter 223h is a constant value (that is, "2" if the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, "3" if the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol) Since it has not reached the state, next, the jackpot this time is one of the jackpot types "probable variable A", "probable variable B", "probable variable C", "probable variable D", "probable variable E" or "probable variable F" It is determined whether or not there is (S1652).

As a result of the determination of S1652, if the jackpot this time is one of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F" (S1652: Yes), since it is a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, it is then determined whether the round is either the 4th round or the 5th round (S1653), and the round is the 4th round or If it is one of the 5Rth (S1653: Yes), set the effect command during display voting acceptance (S1654) (see FIG. 62 (a)), and end the effect processing (S1604) during the opening of the probability variable area Return to the voting effect processing (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1653, if it is determined that the round is neither the 4th R nor the 5th R (S1653: No), then it is determined whether the round is one of the 6R to 9R ( S1655), if the round is one of 6R to 9R (S1655: Yes), two or more rounds out of the 6 rounds of 4R to 9R in which the variable region 65d is opened, Since the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the variable probability region 65d has not reached a certain value (the state in which the voting completion flag is not turned on), the suggestive mode of the right-handed game is changed, and the state is changed to the variable probability region 65d. (S1656), the probability variable area open production process (S1604) is terminated, and the process returns to the voting production process (see FIG. 56).

In the voting warning process of S1656, the degree of suggesting a right-handed game is determined based on the number of remaining rounds in which the ball passes through the probability variable area 65d in this big hit and the number of remaining rounds in which the probability variable area 65d is opened. It is designed to change step by step.

To give three specific examples, the first is the number of rounds in which the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is won, the round is the 5th round, and the probability variable area 65d is passed by the 4th round. is 1 time, in the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, by passing the ball through the probability variable region 65d in any 3 rounds of 6 rounds from 2R to 7R, the "probability variable state , the number of remaining rounds for the ball to pass through the variable probability area 65d is 2 in this big win. Further, since the round concerned is the 5R-th round, the number of remaining rounds in which the probability variable region 65d is opened is 3.

Therefore, out of the remaining 3 rounds in which the probability variable region 65d is opened, any two rounds should pass through the probability variable region 65d. It is configured to display the contents (see FIG. 74(b) 81g).

In addition, the second specific example is winning a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the round is the 6th round, and the number of rounds passed through the probability variable area 65d by 5R is 2 times. , in the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, by passing the ball through the probability variable region 65d in any 3 rounds of the 6 rounds of 2R to 7R, the transition to the "probability variable state" Therefore, the number of remaining rounds for passing the ball through the variable probability area 65d is 1 in this big win. Further, since the round concerned is the 6R-th round, the number of remaining rounds in which the probability variable region 65d is opened is two.

Therefore, among the remaining 2 rounds in which the probability variable region 65d is opened, it is a state where it is sufficient to pass the probability variable region 65d in one of the rounds. It is configured to display the contents (see FIG. 74(d) 81g).

Furthermore, the third specific example is winning a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the relevant round is the 9th round, and the number of rounds passed through the probability variable region 65d by 8R is 1 time. , in the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, by passing the ball through the probability variable region 65d in any two rounds of the six rounds of 4R to 9R, the transition to the "probability variable state" Therefore, the number of remaining rounds for passing the ball through the variable probability area 65d is 1 in this big win. In addition, since the round concerned is the ninth R, the number of remaining rounds in which the variable probability region 65d is opened is one.

Therefore, the round in which the probability variable region 65d is opened is only the 9th round that is currently being executed, and if the 9th probability variable region 65d is not passed, it is one of the two opportunities to pass the ball through the probability variable region 65d. Therefore, it is configured to display the strongest suggestive contents among those suggesting a right-handed game (see 81d and 81g in FIG. 63(d)).

By configuring in this way, the manner of suggesting ball entry into the variable probability region 65d is changed according to the state of ball entry into the variable probability region 65d in each round, and the player is notified step by step with emphasis. can be done. As a result, the player does not let the ball pass through the variable probability area 65d, and the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d becomes smaller than the game specification, thereby suppressing the possibility of obtaining less balls than expected. At the same time, it is possible to ensure that the player enjoys the newly created amusement, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the process of S1655, if it is determined that the round is neither 6R to 9R (S1655: No), the process of S1656 is skipped, the effect process during the probability variable area opening (S1604) is ended, and the vote Return to the effect processing (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1652, it was determined that the jackpot this time is none of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" and "variable probability F". In the case (S1652: No), the jackpot this time is a type of jackpot "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "Probability O", "Probability P", "Probability Q", "Probability R", "Probability S", "Probability T" or "Probability U", the movement of the second special symbol Since it is a jackpot based on the target display, it is then determined whether the round is either the 2nd round or the 3rd round (S1657), and if the round is either the 2nd round or the 3rd round ( S1657: Yes), set the effect command during voting reception for display (S1658) (see FIG. 73 (a)), and end the probability variable area open effect processing (S1604) to vote effect processing (see FIG. 56) return.

Also, in the process of S1657, if it is determined that the round is neither the 2nd R nor the 3rd R (S1657: No), then it is determined whether the round is one of the 4R to 7R ( S1659), if the round is one of 4R to 7R (S1659: Yes), two or more of the six rounds of 4R to 9R in which the variable region 65d is opened, while two or more rounds have passed, Since the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the variable probability area 65d has not reached a certain value, the voting warning process that changes the suggestive mode of the right-handed game and recommends the passage of the ball through the variable probability area 65d is performed. Execute (S1660), terminate the effect processing (S1604) during opening of the probability variable area, and return to the voting effect processing (see FIG. 56).

In the processing of S1659, if it is determined that the round is neither 4R to 7R (S1659: No), the processing of S1660 is skipped, and the effect processing during the probability variable region opening (S1604) is ended, and the vote Return to the effect processing (see FIG. 56).

Also, in the process of S1651, if it is determined that the voting completion flag 223r is turned on (S1651: Yes), the value of the sub probability variable area passage count counter 223h is a constant value (that is, the first special symbol dynamic If it is a jackpot based on the display, it reaches "2", and if it is a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, it reaches "3"), and the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the probability variable area 65d reaches a constant value. Since it is not necessary to pass the ball through the probability variable region 65d in the round, the display vote completion command is set (S1661) (see FIG. 76 (a)), and this probability variable region opening effect processing (S1604) and returns to the voting effect processing (see FIG. 56).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the manner of suggesting ball entry into the probability variable region 65d according to the state of ball entry into the probability variable region 65d, and to emphasize and notify the player step by step.

Returning to the voting effect processing (S1505) in FIG. 56, the description is continued. In the processing of S1601, if it is determined that the probability variable region passage flag of the round is turned on (S1601: Yes), the passage of the probability variable region 65d of the round is detected, so the sub probability variable region passage count counter 1 is added to the value of 223h (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606.

In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether the current jackpot is one of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F". (S1606), if the jackpot this time is one of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F" (S1606: Yes ), and then, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-probability-variable-region passage count counter 223h is smaller than "2" (S1607).

As a result of the determination, if the value of the sub-probability variable area passage number counter 223h is a value smaller than "2" (S1607: Yes), the value of the sub-probability variable area passage number counter 223h is a constant value (that is, the first special symbol If it is a big hit based on the dynamic display, it is in a state of not reaching "2"), so the process of S1609 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1610.

On the other hand, in the process of S1607, if the value of the sub-probability-variable-area passage number counter 223h is not less than "2", that is, if the value of the sub-probability-variable-area passage number counter 223h is a value of "2" or more (S1607: No ), and the value of the sub-probability-variable-region passage count counter 223h has reached a certain value, so the process proceeds to S1609.

In addition, in the processing of S1606, it was determined that the jackpot this time is not one of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" and "variable probability F". In the case (S1606: No), the jackpot this time is a type of jackpot "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "Probability O", "Probability P", "Probability Q", "Probability R", "Probability S", "Probability T" or "Probability U", the movement of the second special symbol Since it is a big hit based on the target display, it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the sub-probability-variable-area passage count counter 223h is a value smaller than "3" (S1608).

As a result of determination, if the value of the sub-probability-variable-area passage number counter 223h is a value smaller than "3" (S1608: Yes), the value of the sub-probability-variable-area passage number counter 223h is a constant value (that is, the second special symbol If it is a big hit based on the dynamic display, it has not reached "3"), so the process of S1609 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1610.

On the other hand, in the process of S1608, if the value of the sub-probability-variable-region passage number counter 223h is not less than "3", that is, if the value of the sub-probability-variable-region passage number counter 223h is a value of "3" or more (S1608: No ), and the value of the sub-probability-variable-region passage count counter 223h has reached a certain value, so the process proceeds to S1609.

In the processing of S1609, the voting completion flag 223r is set to ON (S1609), the display voting execution command is set (S1610) (see FIG. 62B), and the voting effect processing (S1505) is terminated. , returns to the jackpot mid-effect processing (see FIG. 55).

Returning to the effect processing (S1410) during the jackpot in FIG. 55, the description is continued. In the processing of S1504, if it is determined that the round is neither the 4th to 9th rounds (S1504: No), then it is determined whether or not the round is the 10th round (S1506), and the round is the 10th round. If it is the eye (S1506: Yes), the 10R-th competition effect processing for performing the "competition effect" executed in the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1512. It should be noted that, when winning a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the "competition effect" is configured to be executed from the 10th R to the jackpot ending (Fig. 65(a) - See FIG. 68(a)).

Now, with reference to FIG. 58, the competition presentation process (S1507) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this competition presentation process (S1507).

This competition production process (S1507) is executed in the production process (see FIG. 55) during the jackpot executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot. Processing related to “competition performance” is performed.

In this competition effect processing (S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the sub probability variation transition flag 223p is turned on (S1701), and if the sub probability variation transition flag 223p is turned on (S1701: Yes), the effective probability variation region , and after the jackpot is completed, it is in a state of transitioning to the "probability fluctuation state", so that the third symbol display device 81 executes the effect of the success of the "competition effect", the effective probability variable area passing round storage area 223q The round information stored in the . Thus, based on the round information in which the player has passed the ball through the variable effective probability area, it is possible to execute the "competition effect" that results in success (see FIG. 67(b)).

Also, in the process of S1701, if it is determined that the sub probability variation transition flag 223p is not turned on (S1701: No), it does not pass through the effective probability variation region, and after the end of the jackpot, the "general figure high probability time reduction state ”, so that the third symbol display device 81 executes the production that results in the failure of the “competition production”, the probability variable area passage flag (probability variable area passage flag A223i to probability variable area passage flag F223o) of each round , a losing competition development scenario is drawn (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704.

To explain in more detail, for example, the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol is won, and the probability variable area passage flag A223i and the probability variable area passage flag F223o are set to ON. , Other probability variable region passage flags (that is, probability variable region passage flag B223j, probability variable region passage flag C223k, probability variable region passage flag D223m and probability variable region passage flag E223n) are set to off, probability variable region passage flag A223i and probability variation Since the 2 probability variable region passage flags of the region passage flag F223o are set to ON, the player passes the ball through the 4th and 9th probability variable regions 65d. Also, since the sub-variable probability transition flag 223p is not turned on, the effective variable probability region is not passed, and the 4th and 9th probability variable regions 65d are not set to be valid.

Here, assuming that each probability variable region passage flag (probability variable region passage flag A223i to probability variable region passage flag F223o) is not referred to when drawing a lottery for the defeat competition deployment scenario, and a failure effect is configured at random, "competition The content of the performance” is a failure performance that is unrelated to the round information that the player has passed through the variable probability area 65d (that is, the character voted by the player among the boats No. 1 to No. 6 in the “voting performance” In the early stage of the "competition performance", the player may be able to understand that the result will be a failure, and the player may lose interest. . In addition, by directly displaying the results according to the intention of the player, it is possible to prevent the distrust of the game due to the fact that the direct result of the content selected according to the intention of the player does not appear. It is possible to suppress it and improve the interest of the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each probability variable region passage flag (probability variable region passage flag A223i to probability variable region passage flag F223o) is referred to, and the 4Rth and 9Rth voting effects (FIG. 62 (b) and FIG. 64 (a)) by drawing lots for the losing competition development scenario based on), the player passes the 4th and 9th round voting effects through the variable probability area 65d. , in which the 1st and 6th boats regrettably fail to finish in 1st or 2nd place) can be executed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 68(a)).

By configuring in this way, even if a failure effect result is notified, the round in which the player passes the ball through the probability variable region 65d, that is, the player's selection is regrettably lost. As described above, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play and improve the interest in the game.

In the process of S1704, the display competition development scenario command extracted in S1702 or S1703 is set (S1704), the competition effect process (S1507) is ended, and the process returns to the big hit middle effect process (see FIG. 55).

Returning to the effect processing (S1410) during the jackpot in FIG. 55, the description is continued. In the process of S1506, when it is determined that the round is not the 10th round (S1506: No), the competition effect process of S1507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1512.

In addition, in the processing at S1501, it was determined that the jackpot this time is not one of the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" and "variable probability F". In the case (S1501: No), the jackpot this time is a type of jackpot "variable probability G", "variable probability H", "variable probability I", "variable probability J", "variable probability K", "variable probability L", "variable probability M", "variable probability N", "Probability O", "Probability P", "Probability Q", "Probability R", "Probability S", "Probability T" or "Probability U", the movement of the second special symbol Since the jackpot is based on the target display, it is then determined whether or not the round is the 1st round (S1508).

As a result of the determination, if the round is the 1st round (S1508: Yes), based on the contents of the introduction effect during the jackpot drawn in the processing of S1408 of the winning effect processing (see FIG. 54), the introduction effect during the big win for display. A command is set (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1512.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1508 that the round is not the 1st round (S1508: No), then it is determined whether the round is the 2nd to 7th rounds (S1510). , If the round is one of the 2Rth to 7Rth (S1510: Yes), the voting effect processing for performing the "voting effect" executed in the third symbol display device 81 between 2R to 7R is executed ( S1505), and the process proceeds to S1512.

In addition, in the processing of S1510, if it is determined that the round is neither the 2nd to 7th rounds (S1510: No), then it is determined whether the round is any of the 8th to 10th rounds. Determined (S1511), if the round is one of the 8Rth ~ 10Rth (S1511: Yes), the competition performance that performs the "competition performance" executed in the third symbol display device 81 between 8R ~ 10R The process is executed (S1507), and the process moves to S1512. It should be noted that, when winning a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the "competitive effect" is configured to be executed between 8R and 10R (FIGS. 76(b) to 79). (b)).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol is won, the "competition effect" performed by the third symbol display device 81 is performed from the 10th round. It is executed using the time up to the jackpot ending, and when the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is won, the "competition effect" is executed using the time from the 8th round to the 10th round. is configured to

By configuring in this way, the game state (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low In the certain time reduction state”), the ED time can be shortened (that is, “10 seconds”) by completing the “competition production” by the 10th round, and the overall jackpot during the “renso” state It is possible to shorten the digestion time of , and shorten the time to reach the next big win in the "Renso" state. As a result, the time until the next big win occurs in the "continuous" state can be shortened, and the time until the next big win arrives in spite of the "continuous" state is prolonged, thereby improving the game of the player. By generating a series of big wins at an early stage while suppressing the excitement of the game, the player can feel refreshed and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Next, in the processing of S1512, other processing related to the jackpot is executed (S1512), the jackpot middle production processing (S1410) is terminated, and the winning production processing (see FIG. 54) is returned to.

Returning to the hit effect processing (S1105) in FIG. 54, the description is continued. In the process of S1409, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S1409: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot has ended (S1411), and if the jackpot has ended (S1411: Yes), the jackpot A voting result notification process for notifying the game result in the middle is executed (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413.

In this voting result notification process, it is determined whether the effective probability variable area is passed during the jackpot game and the transition is made to the "probability variable state" after the jackpot, or the effective probability variable area is not passed and after the jackpot 68(b) and 69(a)).

Next, in the process of S1413, other processes at the end of the jackpot are performed (S1413), the winning effect process (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 48).

By configuring in this way, a certain number of the six rounds in which the variable probability area 65d is opened during the jackpot game (in the first embodiment, in the case of a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, "2 times", in the case of a big hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, "three times"), the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d, and then the third symbol display device 81 performs a "competition effect". , it is possible to notify the result of whether or not the effective probability variable region has been passed.

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the result notification is not performed immediately at the timing when the ball passes through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game. Although it is configured to perform the result notification by the "competition effect", it may be configured to perform the result notification immediately at the timing when the ball passes through the effective probability variable area.

When configured in this way, regardless of the contents of the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, it is configured to preferentially notify that the player has passed through the effective probability variable area.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 80, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. FIGS. 59 to 81 are diagrams showing transitions of effects on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game.

More specifically, FIGS. 59 to 69 show transitions of effects during the jackpot game when winning a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and FIGS. It shows the transition of the performance during the jackpot game when winning the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the special symbols.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in order to convey to the players in an easy-to-understand manner the new game features corresponding to the present invention, the performance is executed with the motif of a boat race, which is one of the publicly managed sports in Japan. is configured as In the first embodiment, the game specifications are applied to the rules of the boat race, and the new game specifications, which are the game features, are configured so that the players can easily recognize them. It is possible to make it easier for players to recognize the game characteristics of the new game specifications by incorporating the rules of the publicly managed gaming into the game specifications, or to incorporate the rules of other sports such as baseball and soccer into the game specifications and create new It may also be possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the playability, which is a game specification.

Here, the details of the competition in boat racing will be described. As mentioned above, boat racing is one of the public competitions held in Japan, and 6 boats per race (1 boat: white, 2 boat: black, 3 boat: Red, No. 4 boat: blue, No. 5 boat: yellow, No. 6 boat: green) are purchased as a boat ticket before the race, and if the purchased boat ticket and the race result match , It is a motor boat competition in which odds are calculated according to the popularity of spectators (the number of units purchased in the total number of units purchased) and dividends are obtained according to the number of units purchased by spectators.

There are two types of boat tickets that can be purchased in the actual boat race: the win-win type (so-called win-rate: 1/6) and the one-boat that will finish 1st or 2nd, regardless of the order. A double-win formula (so-called double-match, hit rate: 1/3) and a double-win single-win formula (so-called double win, hit rate: 1) that hits the combination of the first and second places in the order of finish. /30.), a two-game winning streak in which the first and second-placed boats are matched regardless of the order (so-called two-game winning streak. Accuracy rate: 1/15), and a combination of 1st, 2nd and 3rd. 3 consecutive wins (so-called 3 consecutive wins. Accuracy rate: 1/120.), and 3 consecutive wins doubles (so-called 3 Accuracy rate: 1/20.), and an extended double winning combination system in which two boats from 1st to 3rd place are matched regardless of their ranking (so-called extended doubles. Accuracy rate: 3/15.), Spectators can choose and purchase seven types of boat tickets.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the action of allowing the player to select a round through the variable probability area 65d is executed as an effect following the action of purchasing a boat ticket. Specifically, when the first special pattern is a big hit, an effect that imitates the double-win double voting method is executed, and when the second special pattern is a big hit, an expanded double-win double vote with a higher hit rate than the double-win double. It is configured to execute a production that mimics the method.

Next, in one race in boat racing, the boat is allowed to reach the finish line first after turning two turn marks (so-called 1 mark and 2 mark) provided on the surface of the competition water a predetermined number of times (specifically, 3 laps). A competition is held. In addition, in boat racing, unlike horse racing, bicycle racing, auto racing, etc., which start from a stationary state, the runners start running before the race start point (race start time), and all of them reach the start line at the predetermined time. A crossing start method (so-called flying start method) is adopted, and a boat that crosses the starting line before the scheduled time is flying (illegal departure), and a boat that crosses the starting line one second after the scheduled time is late (delayed). It is treated as such, and it is a rule that you can not participate in the race after that. In other words, in a boat racing competition, it is important to be positioned in front of the start line at the timing when it reaches the scheduled time. course), the length of the straight line of each boat and the undercarriage (so-called boat foot) in the turn, etc. An "exhibition cruise" will be held.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the act of the player guessing the effectiveness of the variable probability region 65d is regarded as purchase of a boat ticket, and the probability variable region 65d is set to be effective as actual game control. If the ball can win (pass) the area 65d, it is possible to give a "probability variable state", so as a race effect, accidents such as flying, late refunds, and falling into the water that can occur in actual boat racing At least the boat corresponding to the round in which the player passed the ball through the variable probability region 65d (for example, boat No. 1 in the case of 4 rounds) is configured not to be displayed. On the other hand, when the ball is not awarded (passed) to the validly set probability variable region 65d, in the "competition effect" (that is, the 10th round boat race effect), the player enters the probability variable region 65d The boat corresponding to the round in which the ball is passed may be configured so that the above-mentioned effects such as flying and falling into the water occur. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance the affinity with the actual boat race while enriching the variation of the presentation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the jackpot game, the production (introduction production) that imitates the above-mentioned "exhibition cruise" is executed in the first to third rounds, and the round in which the variable probability area 65d is effective is performed. It is configured to execute a production that makes you guess. Then, in the 4th to 9th rounds, when the player fires a ball in a round in which the probability variable area 65d is assumed to be valid, and the ball is passed regardless of whether the probability variable area 65d is valid or invalid, The boat corresponding to the round (boat 1 in the 4th round, boat 2 in the 5th round, boat 3 in the 6th round, boat 4 in the 7th round, boat 5 in the 8th round, and round 9) In the eyes, the performance (boat ticket purchase performance) as if you purchased a boat ticket related to boat No. Then, in the 10th round, the boat ticket purchased by the player, that is, the round in which the player guesses that the variable probability area 65d is valid, is valid or invalid. ) is constructed as suggested by

In this way, a new game such as making the player predict whether or not the probability variable region 65d is effective, showing the predicted round with a production such as boat ticket purchase, and notifying the result with a race production (competition production) By executing a production that harmonizes sex with the world view of boat racing, players who know boat racing can easily understand the game specifications that match the world view of boat racing, and players who do not know boat racing can do so. Also, it is possible to add interest by a new production method.

In particular, in the current pachinko machine 10, the maximum number of rounds to win is 10 rounds. , the affinity with the game specifications of the present invention is high, and an effect that is easily accepted by the player can be executed. In an auto race with 8 cars or a bicycle race with 9 cars, the maximum number of rounds (that is, 10) is such that a round in which players anticipate their votes and a race performance in which the results of the votes are announced are performed. While the number of rounds is restricted, in a boat race with six boats, in 10 rounds, it is possible to properly distribute prediction rounds, voting rounds, and racing rounds, and within the jackpot game. It is possible to execute a complete production with.

FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which the jackpot is won based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the jackpot opening is being executed, and FIG. 59(b) shows the state from the state of FIG. 59(a). , is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot opening is finished and the 1Rth start is started.

Also, FIG. 60(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state which progressed to the 2nd round from the state of (a) after the 1st round was completed.

Furthermore, FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state which progressed to the 3rd round after the 2nd round was completed from the state of (a).

Also, FIG. 62(a) shows a state in which the 3rd round has ended and the 4th round has progressed from the state in FIG. 61(b), and FIG. 62(b) shows the state in FIG. , the 4th round is continuously executed, the player executes the right-handed game, wins the variable winning device 65, and shows the state in which the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d. From the state of FIG. 62(b), the 4Rth is continuously executed, the variable probability area 65d is closed, and the variable winning device 65 continues to be open, and FIG. FIG. 62C is a diagram showing a state in which the 4th round has ended and the 5th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 62(c).

Furthermore, FIG. 63(a) shows a state in which the sphere has progressed from the state of FIG. From the state of FIG. 63(a), it shows the state of progressing to the 7th R without passing the ball through the 6th probability variable region 65d, and FIG. 63(c) is from the state of FIG. It shows a state in which the ball does not pass through the 7th probability variable region 65d and progresses to the 8th R, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a state that has progressed to the ninth R without passing through.

In addition, in FIG. 64(a), the ninth round is continuously executed from the state of FIG. 64(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. .

Further, FIG. 65(a) shows the state of FIG. 64(b) after the 9th R is finished and progresses to the 10th R. FIG. 65(b) shows the state of FIG. 65(a). , , and 10R-th are continuously executed.

Also, FIG. 66(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of (a), and the 10th R-th is being executed.

Furthermore, FIG. 67(a) shows a state in which the 10R eye has ended from the state in FIG. 66(b) and progressed to the jackpot ending, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which a period (about several seconds) has passed, the jackpot ending is being continued, and the result of the success of the "competition effect" is being displayed.

In addition, FIG. 68(a) shows that a certain period of time (about several seconds) has elapsed from the state of FIG. 67(a), the jackpot ending is still being executed, and the result of failure of the "competition effect" is displayed. FIG. 68(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 67(b) and the jackpot ending is being executed.

Further, FIG. 69(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 68(a) and the jackpot ending is being executed.

Also, FIG. 70(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot is won based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the jackpot opening is being executed. ) in which the jackpot opening is finished and the 1Rth start is started.

Furthermore, FIG. 71(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. FIG. 71B is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG.

Also, FIG. 72(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. FIG. 72B is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG.

Further, FIG. 73(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the 1st round has been completed and the 2nd round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 72(b), and FIG. 73(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable winning device 65 is still open although the variable probability region 65d is closed, and the 2Rth is continuously executed from the state. From the state of (b), it is a diagram showing a state in which the 2nd R is completed and progressed to the 3rd R, and FIG. 73(d) is from the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state which progressed to 4R-th without passing a ball|ball.

In addition, in FIG. 74(a), the 4th round is continuously executed from the state of FIG. FIG. 74(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the 4th R is completed and progressed to the 5th R from the state of FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 74 ( c) is a state in which the 5th round is continuously executed from the state of FIG. 74(b), the player executes a right-handed game, wins the variable winning device 65, and passes the ball through the probability variable area 65d. FIG. 74(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the 5th round has ended and the 6th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 74(c).

Furthermore, in FIG. 75(a), the 6th round is continuously executed from the state of FIG. FIG. 75(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. is.

Also, FIG. 76(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the 6th round is completed and progressed to the 7th round from the state shown in FIG. 75(b), and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state which progressed from the state to the 8th round after finishing the 7th round.

Further, FIG. 77(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the 8th R is continuously executed from the state of FIG. 76(b), and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state which finished the 8th R and progressed to the 9th R. FIG.

Also, FIG. 78(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a state in which the 9th round has ended and the 10th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 78(a).

Further, in FIG. 79(a), a certain period of time (about several seconds) has elapsed from the state of FIG. 78(b), the 10th round is continuously executed, and the result of winning the "competition effect" is displayed. FIG. 79B is a diagram showing the state, and FIG. 79B shows that a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 78B. It is a figure showing the state where the result is displayed.

Also, FIG. 80(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the 10R eye is completed from the state of FIG. 79(a) and progressed to the jackpot ending, and FIG. 80(b) is a state of FIG. 79(b). It is the figure which showed the state which progressed to the jackpot ending after the 10th R-th is complete|finished.

Now, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 69, the "competition effect" executed when the jackpot in the "normal game state", that is, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is won, will be described. FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which a jackpot is won based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and a jackpot opening is being executed. FIG. 59(a) shows the state immediately after winning the big win based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol. A character message 81a for notification is displayed. In addition, during the jackpot, a right-handed game is played to enter the ball into the variable prize winning device 65, and a large amount of prize balls are paid out. A character message 81b suggesting a right-handed game is also displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, FIG. 59(b) shows a state in which the jackpot opening is finished and the 1Rth start is started from the state of FIG. 59(a). In FIG. 59(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 1Rth is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, a character message 81d regarding a game explanation during the jackpot game is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, an introductory effect (start display effect) 81e relating to the "competition effect" to be performed in the 10th R when the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol is won is displayed. there is Here, an effect is being executed as if 6 boats are out of the pits and heading for the second turn mark. It should be noted that, as described above, this introduction effect 81e, the content of the winning jackpot type and probability variable region valid table 202h, that is, whether the probability variable region 65d of any jackpot round is valid, regardless of the introduction of a certain number It is configured to be randomly selected from the effects and executed (see S1408 in FIG. 54).

Next, FIG. 60(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 60(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 1Rth is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Further, in the upper portion of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d following the explanation of the game during the jackpot game displayed in FIG. 59(b) is displayed. This character message 81d displays "Twice voting", indicating that the upper limit of the number of rounds in which the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d is two times (that is, double wins in a row) in this jackpot game. suggesting. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as an introductory effect 81e following the introductory effect displayed in FIG. ing. Here, the entry is according to the frame number, boats No. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 have a normal start, while boat 5 is shown to be flying. there is

Next, FIG. 60(b) shows a state in which the 1st round has ended and the 2nd round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). In FIG. 60(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 2nd R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an introductory effect 81e following the introductory effect displayed in FIG. 60(a) is displayed. Here, the start timing, etc. are displayed, and a schematic display that makes it easier to understand the start exhibition photograph is executed, and the detailed time of the start timing of each boat ("ST" part in the figure) is displayed.

Next, FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 61(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 2nd R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Further, in the upper portion of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d following the explanation of the game during the jackpot game displayed in FIG. 60(b) is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an introductory effect 81e following the introductory effect displayed in FIG. 60(b) is displayed. According to the character message 81d and the introduction effect 81e, which of the displayed 6 characters will come first or second in the "competition effect" performed on the 10th round, that is, in a two-game winning streak system. It suggests that you expect a winning ticket for . In addition, here, advance information of each boat (name and photo of the racer, weight, adjustment weight, exhibition time, tilt (angle to attach the motor to the boat), propeller replacement, parts (gearbox, piston ring, etc.) A race table indicating whether or not the car has been replaced is displayed. In actual boat races, the amount of body weight and adjusted weight is used to measure the physical condition of the racer and the speed of the boat, and the display time is used to measure the speed of the boat. It is possible to estimate the matching and adjustment condition between the boat and the motor based on whether or not the propeller has been replaced or parts have been replaced.

Next, FIG. 61(b) shows a state in which the 2nd round has ended and the 3rd round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). In FIG. 61(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 3rd R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d following the explanation of the game during the jackpot game displayed in FIG. It suggests that the game of whether or not to pass the ball to 65d will start. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an introductory effect 81e following the introductory effect displayed in FIG. 61(a) is displayed. Explanation is given. Here, information on the surface of the competition water and water surface weather information indicating the weather, etc. are displayed. Weather, air temperature and water temperature that affect the number of revolutions of the motor, and water temperature that affects the speed and / or speed of the boat Wind speed and direction are displayed, as well as wave heights suggestive of stormy conditions in the competing waters.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured to display a highly realistic introductory effect. Wind, water surface conditions, etc.) are selected regardless of the actual effective round of the probability variable region 65d, so it is possible that the content of the introduction effect suggests the actual effective round of the probability variable region 65d. and may not be suggested at all. These are also similar to actual boat races, and are connected to improving the interest in the game of guessing.

Next, FIG. 62(a) shows a state in which the 3rd round has ended and the 4th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 61(b). In addition, FIG. 62(a) shows the effect contents of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the 4Rth probability variable region 65d is open. In FIG. 62(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 4th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the first character (Boat No. 1) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 61(a) is displayed in the voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ), when the first character among the six characters displayed on the screen is expected to come first or second in the ``competition performance'', a right-handed game is executed to win a prize in the variable prize winning device 65, It suggests passing the sphere through region 65d. In addition, in the second half of the character message 81d "(0 times/2 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d in this jackpot game is "2 times", of which "0 times". is being executed (that is, the ball has never passed through the variable probability region 65d in the jackpot game).

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but it is said that the variable winning device 65 is open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 62(b), the 4th round is continuously executed from the state of FIG. It shows the state in which the In FIG. 62(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 4th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d for explaining the game is displayed as "Voting for No. 1 boat completed". Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a voting effect 81f is displayed on a mark sheet-like display, suggesting that the first character (Boat No. 1) is expected to finish first or second. , which indicates that the player executes a right-handed game on the 4th R to win the variable winning device 65 and pass the ball through the probability variable region 65d.

Next, FIG. 62(c) shows a state in which the 4Rth is continuously executed from the state of FIG. 62(b), and although the probability variable region 65d is closed, the variable winning device 65 is still open. showing. In FIG. 62(c), a character message 81c indicating that the 4th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "attacker is open, keep hitting right". is still open, suggesting that the right-handed game should be continued because the maximum winning number (ie, "10") in one round has not been reached.

In addition, in FIG. 62(c), the ball is passed through the variable probability region 65d. It is configured to perform the same effect as 62(c).

Next, FIG. 62(d) shows a state in which the 4th round has ended and the 5th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 62(c). In addition, FIG.62(d) has become the content of the production|presentation in the 3rd design display device 81 in the state in which the 5Rth probability variable area|region 65d is open|released. In FIG. 62(d), a character message 81c indicating that the 5th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the second character (Boat No. 2) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 61(a) is displayed in the voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ), when the second character out of the six characters displayed on the screen is expected to come first or second in the ``competition effect'', a right-handed game is executed to win a variable winning device 65, It suggests passing the sphere through region 65d. In addition, in the second half of the character message 81d "(1 time/2 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds to pass the ball through the variable probability area 65d in this jackpot game is "2 times", of which "1 time". suggests that is running.

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but it is said that the variable winning device 65 is open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, FIG. 63(a) shows a state in which the sphere has progressed from the state of FIG. 62(d) to the 6th round without passing the ball through the probability variable region 65d of the 5th round. In addition, FIG. 63(a) shows the effect contents of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the 6Rth probability variable area 65d is opened. In FIG. 63(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 6th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the third character (Boat No. 3) among the six characters introduced in FIG.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ) of the 6 characters displayed in ), when it is expected that the third character (Boat No. 3) will come in first or second in the "race presentation", a right-handed game is executed and the variable winning device 65 , and the ball is allowed to pass through the probability variable area 65d. In addition, in the second half of the character message 81d "(1 time/2 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds to pass the ball through the variable probability area 65d in this jackpot game is "2 times", of which "1 time". suggests that is running.

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but it is said that the variable winning device 65 is open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, FIG. 63(b) shows a state in which the sphere has progressed from the state of FIG. 63(a) to the 7th round without passing through the 6th round probability variable region 65d. In addition, FIG.63(b) has become the content of the production|presentation in the 3rd design display device 81 in the state in which the 7th probability variable area|region 65d is open|released. In FIG. 63(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 7th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the fourth character (Boat No. 4) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 61(a) is displayed in the voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ) out of the 6 characters displayed in ), when it is predicted that the fourth character (Boat No. 4) will come first or second in the "race presentation", a right-handed game is executed and the variable winning device 65 , and the ball is allowed to pass through the probability variable area 65d. In addition, in the second half of the character message 81d "(1 time/2 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds to pass the ball through the variable probability area 65d in this jackpot game is "2 times", of which "1 time". suggests that is running.

In addition, in the right part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81g "You can vote one more time" is displayed, and in FIG. It is a round, and since it is necessary to pass through the variable probability area 65d in one of these rounds, a message suggesting a right-handed game is additionally displayed.

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but the variable winning device 65 remains open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, FIG. 63(c) shows a state in which the sphere has progressed from the state of FIG. 63(b) to the 8th R without passing through the 7th probability variable region 65d. In addition, FIG.63(c) has become the content of the production|presentation in the 3rd design display device 81 in the state in which the 8Rth probability variable area|region 65d is open|released. In FIG. 63(c), a character message 81c indicating that the 8th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the fifth character (Boat No. 5) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 61(a) is displayed in the voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ) out of the 6 characters displayed in ), when it is predicted that the fifth character (Boat No. 5) will come first or second in the "race presentation", a right-handed game is executed and the variable winning device 65 , and the ball is allowed to pass through the probability variable area 65d. In addition, in the second half of the character message 81d "(1 time/2 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds to pass the ball through the variable probability area 65d in this jackpot game is "2 times", of which "1 time". suggests that is running.

In addition, in the right part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81g displays the characters "Voting Deadline 1R Before", and in FIG. Since it is necessary to pass through the variable probability region 65d in one of these rounds, a message suggesting a right-handed game is additionally displayed.

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but the variable winning device 65 remains open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, FIG.63(d) has shown the state which progressed to the 9th R from the state of FIG.63(c) without making a ball pass through the 8th probability variable area|region 65d. In addition, FIG.63(d) has become the content of the production|presentation in the 3rd design display device 81 in the state in which the probability variable area|region 65d of 9R is open|released. In FIG. 63(d), a character message 81c indicating that the 9th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the sixth character (Boat No. 6) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 61(a) is displayed in the voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d for explaining the game is displayed as "Aim for the attacker". In addition, in the right part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81g displays the characters "Voting closes soon", and in FIG. Since it is only the 9th R, and it is necessary to pass through the variable probability region 65d in the round, a message suggesting a right-handed game is additionally displayed.

Next, in FIG. 64(a), the ninth round is continuously executed from the state of FIG. It shows the state in which the In FIG. 64(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 9th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81d explaining the game is displayed as "Voting for boat No. 6 completed". Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a voting-in-progress effect 81f imitating a mark sheet suggesting that the sixth character (Boat No. 6) is expected to finish first or second is displayed. It shows that the player executed the right-handed game on the 9th R to win the variable prize winning device 65 and passed the ball to the probability variable region 65d.

Next, FIG. 64(b) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 64(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 9th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "Voting completed", and in this jackpot game, the number of rounds to pass the ball through the probability variable area 65d is a constant value ( That is, it indicates that the number of times has reached “twice”). Furthermore, a voting effect 81f is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and of the six characters introduced in FIG. boat) (that is, the ball passed through the 4th and 9th probability variable areas 65d).

Next, FIG. 65(a) shows a state in which the 9th round has ended and the 10th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64(b). In FIG. 65(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 10th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d for explaining the game is displayed as "race start", indicating that the "race presentation" has started when each boat crosses the start line from the starting dash. suggesting. Further, at the bottom of the text message 81d, a text message 81h indicating the voting result is displayed as "1◇6 voting". No. 1 boat) and the 6th person (No. 6 boat) voted (that is, the ball passed through the 4th and 9th probability variable areas 65d).

Also, a competition effect 81i is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and a character message 81j is displayed in the lower portion of the main display area Dm, suggesting the execution status of the "competition effect".

Next, FIG. 65(b) shows a state in which the 10Rth is being executed continuously from the state of FIG. 65(a). In FIG. 65(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 10th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a competition effect 81i of a scene in which each boat turns the first turn mark of the first lap is displayed, and a text message 81j is displayed in the lower portion of the main display area Dm. This suggests the implementation status of “competitive production”. Here, when No. 1 boat was so-called leading and running away, No. 2 boats, No. 3 boats and No. 4 boats turned around, and No. 5 boat launched a so-called Tsukemai from the outside at full speed. , The scene where the No. 6 boat goes around after crossing 5 undertows is displayed.

Next, FIG. 66(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 66(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 10th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a competition effect 81i showing each boat running on the back straight is displayed, and in the lower part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81j is displayed, respectively. ” suggesting the execution status.

Next, FIG. 66(b) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 66(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 10th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a competition effect 81i of a scene in which each boat turns at the second turn mark of the first lap is displayed, and a text message 81j is displayed in the lower part of the main display area Dm. This suggests the implementation status of “competitive production”. Here, a scene is shown in which boat No. 1 has swollen out and boat No. 3 has turned around, and boat No. 6 is pointing inside.

Next, FIG. 67(a) shows a state in which the 10R-th game has been completed from the state of FIG. 66(b) and progressed to the jackpot ending. In FIG. 67(a), a character message 81c indicating that the jackpot ending is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a competition effect 81i showing each boat running on the home straight is displayed, and in the lower part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81j is displayed. ” suggesting the execution status. Here, a scene is displayed in which boats No. 6, No. 3, and No. 1 are running side by side in order from the inside.

Next, in FIG. 67(b), a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 67(a), the jackpot ending is still being executed, and the result of winning the "competition effect" is displayed. state. In FIG. 67(b), a character message 81c indicating that the jackpot ending is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, a competition effect 81i is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and a character message 81j is displayed in the lower portion of the main display area Dm. Out of the 6 characters that were in the race, the 6th character (boat No. 6) finished 1st, the 1st character (boat No. 1) finished 2nd, and the 3rd character (boat No. 3) finished 3rd. It suggests.

Therefore, in the right part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81k is displayed to notify that the result was a winning result from the content of the "competition effect", and the player puts the ball in the variable probability area 65d. This suggests that either the 4th round (corresponding to boat No. 1) or the 9th round (corresponding to boat No. 6) of the passing probability variable region 65d was set effectively.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "competition effect" that is executed when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed and the jackpot is won, the effect that becomes a success result based on passing through the effective probability variable area is performed. When executed, one of the two characters selected by the player in the "voting effect" is configured to execute an effect in which one of the characters finishes first and the other character finishes second (so-called , double winning streak (double double)).

However, there is a risk that some players will perceive the result as a failure because the order of first and second finishes is different (see FIG. 67(b)). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even when the content of the "competition effect" is executed, the character message 81k such as "Hit!" (See FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b)), and by passing through the effective probability variable region in the round selected by the player, to notify that the occurrence of the "probability variable state" has been acquired is configured to

By configuring in this way, even if the player's understanding of game specifications and voting methods and knowledge of boat racing are insufficient, by clearly displaying the success result in the "competition production", It is possible to make the player recognize that the area will be passed through and the transition to the "probability change state" will occur.

Next, in FIG. 68(a), a certain period of time (about several seconds) has elapsed from the state of FIG. 67(a), the jackpot ending is still being executed, and the result of losing the "competition effect" is displayed. state. In FIG. 68(a), a character message 81c indicating that the jackpot ending is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, a competition effect 81i is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and a character message 81j is displayed in the lower portion of the main display area Dm. Out of the 6 characters that were in the race, the 3rd character (Boat No. 3) finished 1st, the 1st character (Boat 1) finished 2nd, and the 6th character (Boat No. 6) finished 3rd. It suggests.

Therefore, in the right part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81k is displayed to notify that the result was a failure from the content of the "competition effect", and the player can shoot the ball in the variable probability area 65d. While neither of the 4th R (corresponding to the 1st boat) and the 9th R (corresponding to the 6th boat) which passed through the variable area 65d was set effectively, the other round (5R (corresponding to the 2nd boat) , 6R (corresponding to boat No. 3), 7R (corresponding to boat No. 4), 8R (corresponding to boat No. 5)) In either 2 rounds, the variable probability area 65d is set effectively, and the effective variable area is passed suggesting that they were not allowed to do so.

Next, FIG. 68(b) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 67(b) and the jackpot ending is being executed. In FIG. 68(b), a character message 81c indicating that the jackpot ending is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the text message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "Stunning hit!"

Furthermore, a character message 81m of "probability change state entering" is displayed in the right part of the main display area Dm, and when the player passes the ball through the effective probability change area, "probability change state ” indicates that the

Next, FIG. 69(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has elapsed from the state of FIG. 68(a), and the jackpot ending is being continued. In FIG. 69(a), a character message 81c indicating that the jackpot ending is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper portion of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game description displays "Unfortunately lost!", suggesting that the result of the "competitive effect" was a loss.

Furthermore, in the right part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81m of "time saving 150 times" is displayed. This indicates that the state will be changed to "high probability time shortening state".

In the first embodiment, the "competition effect" is executed regardless of the boat corresponding to the round through which the player passes through the variable probability region 65d. However, in the "competition effect", the effect may be such that the player competes to the end. By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the "competition effect" to the end, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 80, a description will be given of the "competition effect" executed when the jackpot is won in the "probability fluctuating state", that is, the dynamic display of the second special symbols. FIG. 70(a) shows a state in which a big win is won based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the jackpot opening is being executed. In FIG. 70(a), since it is a state immediately after winning the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the upper part of the main display area Dm in the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the jackpot has been won. A character message 81a for notification is displayed. In addition, during the jackpot, a right-handed game is played to enter the ball into the variable prize winning device 65, and a large amount of prize balls are paid out. A character message 81b suggesting a right-handed game is also displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, FIG. 70(b) shows a state in which the jackpot opening is finished and the 1Rth start is started from the state of FIG. 70(a). In FIG. 70(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 1Rth is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, a character message 81d regarding a game explanation during the jackpot game is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, there is an introduction effect (start display effect) related to the "competitive effect" that is performed during the period of the 8th to 10th rounds when the jackpot is won based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol. 81e is displayed. Here, an effect is being executed as if 6 boats are out of the pits and heading for the second turn mark. It should be noted that, as described above, this introduction effect 81e, the content of the winning jackpot type and probability variable region valid table 202h, that is, whether the probability variable region 65d of any jackpot round is valid, regardless of the introduction of a certain number It is configured to be randomly selected from the effects and executed (see S1408 in FIG. 54).

Next, FIG. 71(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 71(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 1Rth is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Further, in the upper portion of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d following the explanation of the game during the big winning game displayed in FIG. 70(b) is displayed. The character message 81d displays "Vote 3 times", suggesting that the upper limit of the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d is 3 times in this jackpot game. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as an introductory effect 81e following the introductory effect displayed in FIG. ing. Here, the entry is according to the frame number, boats No. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 have a normal start, while boat 5 is shown to be flying. there is

Next, FIG. 71(b) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 71(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 1Rth is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an introductory effect 81e following the introductory effect displayed in FIG. 71(a) is displayed. Here, the start timing, etc. are displayed, and a schematic display that makes it easier to understand the start exhibition photograph is executed, and the detailed time of the start timing of each boat ("ST" part in the figure) is displayed.

Next, FIG. 72(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (approximately several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 72(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 1Rth is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Further, in the upper portion of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d following the explanation of the game during the jackpot game displayed in FIG. 71(b) is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an introductory effect 81e following the introductory effect displayed in FIG. 71(b) is displayed. According to the text message 81d and the introduction effect 81e, any two characters out of the displayed six characters are between the first and third finishers in the "competition effect" performed during the period of the eighth to tenth rounds. It suggests that it will enter, that is, to predict the winning ticket in the extended two-game winning streak. Here, as in the case of the first special symbol, a race table showing advance information of each boat is displayed.

Next, FIG. 72(b) shows a state in which a certain period of time (approximately several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 72(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 1Rth is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d following the explanation of the game during the jackpot game displayed in FIG. It suggests that the game of whether or not to let the ball pass through is started. Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an introductory effect 81e following the introductory effect displayed in FIG. 72(a) is displayed. A description of the circumstances under which it is implemented is provided. Here, as in the case of the first special symbol, water surface weather information indicating competition water surface information and weather is displayed, and weather, air temperature, water temperature, wind speed, wind direction, and wave height are displayed.

Next, FIG. 73(a) shows a state in which the 1st round has ended and the 2nd round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 72(b). In addition, FIG. 73(a) shows the effect contents of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the 2Rth probability variable area 65d is open. In FIG. 73(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 2nd R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the first character (Boat No. 1) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 72(a) is displayed in the voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ), the first character (Boat No. 1) is expected to finish between 1st and 3rd in the ``race presentation'', and a right-handed game is executed to change the character. It is suggested that the winning device 65 wins a prize and the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d. In addition, in the second half of the text message 81d "(0 times/3 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d in this jackpot game is "3 times", of which "0 times". is being executed (that is, the ball has never passed through the variable probability region 65d in the jackpot game).

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but it is said that the variable winning device 65 is open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, FIG. 73(b) shows a state in which the variable winning device 65 continues to be open although the 2Rth is continuously executed from the state of FIG. 73(a) and the probability variable region 65d is closed. showing. In FIG. 73(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 2nd R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "attacker is open, keep hitting right". is still open, suggesting that the right-handed game should be continued because the maximum winning number (ie, "10") in one round has not been reached.

Next, FIG. 73(c) shows a state in which the 2nd round has ended and the 3rd round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 73(b). In addition, FIG.73(c) has become the content of the production|presentation in the 3rd design display device 81 in the state in which the 3Rth probability variable area|region 65d is open|released. In FIG. 73(c), a character message 81c indicating that the 3rd R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the second character (Boat No. 2) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 72(a) is displayed in the during-voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ) of the 6 characters displayed in ), when it is expected that the second character (boat No. 2) will be between 1st and 3rd in the “race presentation”, a right-handed game is executed to change It is suggested that the winning device 65 wins a prize and the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d. In addition, in the second half of the text message 81d "(0 times/3 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d in this jackpot game is "3 times", of which "0 times". is being executed (that is, the ball has never passed through the variable probability region 65d in the jackpot game).

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but it is said that the variable winning device 65 is open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, FIG. 73(d) shows a state in which from the state of FIG. 73(c), the ball does not pass through the probability variable region 65d of the 3rd round and progresses to the 4th round. In addition, FIG.73(d) has become the content of the production|presentation in the 3rd design display device 81 in the state in which the 4th probability variable area|region 65d is open|released. In FIG. 73(d), a character message 81c indicating that the 4th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the third character (Boat No. 3) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 72(a) is displayed in the voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ) of the 6 characters displayed in ), when it is expected that the third character (Boat No. 3) will be between the 1st and 3rd finishers in the “race production”, a right-handed game is executed to change the It is suggested that the winning device 65 wins a prize and the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d. In addition, in the second half of the text message 81d "(0 times/3 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d in this jackpot game is "3 times", of which "0 times". is being executed (that is, the ball has never passed through the variable probability region 65d in the jackpot game).

Furthermore, in the right part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81g is displayed with the characters "You can vote 3 more times", and in FIG. It is a round, and since it is necessary to pass through the variable probability area 65d in any one of three rounds, a message suggesting a right-handed game is additionally displayed.

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but it is said that the variable winning device 65 is open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 74(a), the 4th round is being executed continuously from the state of FIG. is passed through. In FIG. 74(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 4th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d for explaining the game is displayed as "Voting for Boat No. 3 completed". Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, there is a voting effect 81f suggesting that the third character (Boat No. 3) is predicted to finish between the 1st and 3rd places on the mark sheet-like display. is displayed, indicating that the player executes a right-handed game on the 4th R to win the variable winning device 65 and pass the ball through the probability variable region 65d.

Next, FIG. 74(b) shows a state in which the 4th round has ended and the 5th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 74(a). In addition, FIG. 74(b) shows the effect contents of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the 5R-th probability variable region 65d is open. In FIG. 74(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 5th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the fourth character (Boat No. 4) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 72(a) is displayed in the during-voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ) of the 6 characters displayed in ), when it is expected that the 4th character (Boat No. 4) will be between the 1st and 3rd finishers in the “race presentation”, a right-handed game is executed to change It is suggested that the winning device 65 wins a prize and the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d. In addition, in the second half of the text message 81d "(1 time/3 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds to pass the ball through the variable probability area 65d in this jackpot game is "3 times", of which "1 time". suggests that is running.

Furthermore, in the right part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81g is displayed with the characters "You can vote two more times", and in FIG. It is a round, and since it is necessary to pass through the variable probability area 65d in any two rounds of these, a message suggesting a right-handed game is additionally displayed.

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but it is said that the variable winning device 65 is open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 74(c), the 5th round is continuously executed from the state of FIG. is passed through. In FIG. 74(c), a character message 81c indicating that the 5th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d for explaining the game is displayed as "voting for Boat No. 4 completed". Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, there is a voting effect 81f suggesting that the fourth character (Boat No. 4) is predicted to finish between the first and third places on the mark sheet-like display. is displayed, indicating that the player executes a right-handed game on the 5th R to win the variable winning device 65 and pass the ball through the probability variable area 65d.

Next, FIG. 74(d) shows a state in which the 5th round has ended and the 6th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 74(c). In addition, FIG.74(d) has become the content of the production|presentation in the 3rd design display device 81 in the state in which the probability variable area|region 65d of 6R is open|released. In FIG. 74(d), a character message 81c indicating that the 6th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the fifth character (Boat No. 5) among the six characters introduced in FIG. 72(a) is displayed in the voting effect 81f.

Furthermore, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d explaining the game is displayed. ) of the 6 characters displayed in ), when it is expected that the 5th character (Boat No. 5) will be between 1st and 3rd in the “race production”, a right-handed game is executed to change It is suggested that the winning device 65 wins a prize and the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d. In addition, in the second half of the character message 81d "(2 times/3 times)", the upper limit of the number of rounds for passing the ball through the probability changing area 65d in the current jackpot game is "3 times", of which "2 times". suggests that is running.

Furthermore, in the right part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81g displays the characters "Before voting deadline 1R", and in FIG. Since it is necessary to pass through the variable probability region 65d in one of these rounds, a message suggesting a right-handed game is additionally displayed.

The game description in the character message 81d suggests that the user selects whether or not to execute the right-handed game, but it is said that the variable winning device 65 is open even while the character message 81d is being displayed. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 75(a), the 6th round is being executed continuously from the state of FIG. is passed through. In FIG. 75(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 6th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81d for explaining the game is displayed as "voting for Boat No. 5 completed". Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, there is a voting effect 81f that suggests that the fifth character (Boat No. 5) is expected to finish between the 1st and 3rd places on a mark sheet-like display. is displayed, indicating that the player executes a right-handed game on the 6th R, wins the variable prize winning device 65, and passes the ball through the probability variable region 65d.

Next, FIG. 75(b) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed since the state of FIG. In FIG. 75(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 6th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "Voting completed", and in this jackpot game, the number of rounds to pass the ball through the probability variable area 65d is a constant value ( That is, it indicates that it has reached "three times"). Furthermore, a voting effect 81f is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the player can see the third (Boat No. 3) and fourth out of the six characters introduced in FIG. 72(a). (Boat No. 4) and the fifth player (Boat No. 5) voted (that is, the ball passed through the 4th, 5th and 6th probability variable regions 65d).

Next, FIG. 76(a) shows a state in which the 6th round has ended and the 7th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 75(b). In addition, FIG. 76(a) shows a state in which the 7Rth probability variable region 65d is open, and a state in which the 7Rth probability variable region 65d is closed and the variable winning device 65 is opened (that is, the 7Rth It is the content of the effect on the third symbol display device 81 during all periods). In FIG. 76(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 7th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "Voting completed", and in this jackpot game, the number of rounds to pass the ball through the variable probability area 65d is a constant value ( That is, it indicates that it has reached "three times"). In the stage of 7R, if the number of times the ball has passed through the variable probability region 65d has not yet reached three times, the sixth character among the six characters displayed in FIG. No. 6 boat) is expected to come in between 1st and 3rd place in the ``competition effect'', executing a right-handed game to win a prize in the variable prize winning device 65, and passing the ball to the probability variable area 65d. configured to suggest

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the variable probability region 65d reaches a certain value in the jackpot game, the variable probability region 65d is opened. Even in this state, the effect and text message suggesting that the ball is passed through the variable probability region 65d are not displayed.

Next, FIG. 76(b) shows a state in which the 7th round has ended and the 8th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 76(a). In FIG. 76(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 8th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "race start", suggesting that the "competition effect" has started. Further, at the bottom of the character message 81d, the character message 81h of the voting result is displayed as "3 4 5 voting", and the player can select one of the six characters introduced in FIG. It indicates that the 3rd person (No. 3 boat), 4th person (No. 4 boat) and 5th person (No. 5 boat) voted (that is, the ball passed through the 4th, 5th and 6th probability variable areas 65d). ing.

Also, a competition effect 81i is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and a character message 81j is displayed in the lower portion of the main display area Dm, suggesting the execution status of the "competition effect".

Next, FIG. 77(a) shows a state in which the 8R-th is continuously executed from the state of FIG. 76(b). In FIG. 77(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 8th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a competition effect 81i of a scene in which each boat turns the first turn mark of the first lap is displayed, and a text message 81j is displayed in the lower part of the main display area Dm. This suggests the implementation status of “competitive production”. Here, when the 3rd boat made a so-called "first mai" and a so-called makuri, the 1st, 2nd and 5th boats turned around, and the 4th boat set a so-called "tsukemai" at full speed from the out. A scene is shown in which boat No. 6 turns to the lead after overcoming five undertows.

Next, FIG. 77(b) shows a state in which the 8th round has ended and the 9th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 77(a). In FIG. 77(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 9th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a competition effect 81i showing each boat running on the back straight is displayed, and in the lower part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81j is displayed, respectively. ” suggesting the execution status.

Next, FIG. 78(a) shows a state in which a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 77(b), and the 9th R is being executed. In FIG. 78(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 9th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a competition effect 81i of a scene in which each boat turns at the second turn mark of the first lap is displayed, and a text message 81j is displayed in the lower part of the main display area Dm. This suggests the implementation status of “competitive production”. Here, a scene is shown in which boat No. 1 runs first and makes a turn, followed by boat No. 3, and boat No. 4 pointing in the middle.

Next, FIG. 78(b) shows a state in which the 9th round has ended and the 10th round has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 78(a). In FIG. 78(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 10th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a competition effect 81i showing each boat running on the home straight is displayed, and in the lower part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81j is displayed. ” suggesting the execution status. Here, a scene is displayed in which boats No. 4, No. 3, and No. 1 are running side by side in order from the inside.

Next, in FIG. 79(a), a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 78(b), the 10th round is continuously executed, and the result of winning the "competition effect" is displayed. state. In FIG. 79(a), a character message 81c indicating that the 10th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, a competition effect 81i is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and a character message 81j is displayed in the lower portion of the main display area Dm. Out of the 6 characters that were in the race, the first character (boat No. 1) finished 1st, the third character (boat No. 3) finished 2nd, and the fourth character (boat No. 4) finished 3rd. It suggests.

Therefore, in the right part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81k is displayed to notify that the result was a winning result from the content of the "competition effect", and the player puts the ball in the variable probability area 65d. This suggests that either the 4th, 5th, or 6th probability variable region 65d passed through was effectively set.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "competition effect" that is executed when the second special symbol is dynamically displayed and the jackpot is won, the effect that becomes a success result based on passing through the effective probability variable area is performed. When executed, an effect is executed in which any two characters out of the three characters selected by the player in the "voting effect" finish first to third regardless of the order. In the case of Figure 75(b), any combination of "Boats 3 and 4", "Boats 3 and 5", and "Boats 4 and 5" will finish 1st and 2nd. , 1st and 3rd, or 2nd and 3rd will result in a successful result (that is, an extended double win system (extended double win double win system)).

However, some players may not understand the game specifications or the voting method, and may perceive the result as a failure. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even when the content of the "competition effect" is executed, the character message 81k such as "Hit!" (see FIGS. 79(a) and 80(a)), and by passing through the effective probability variable region in the round selected by the player, to notify that the occurrence of the "probability variable state" has been acquired is configured to

By configuring in this way, even if the player's understanding of game specifications and voting methods and knowledge of boat racing are insufficient, by clearly displaying the success result in the "competition production", It is possible to make the player recognize that the area will be passed through and the transition to the "probability change state" will occur.

Next, in FIG. 79(b), a certain period of time (about several seconds) has passed from the state of FIG. 78(b), the 10th round is continuously executed, and the result of losing the "competition effect" is displayed. state. In FIG. 79(b), a character message 81c indicating that the 10th R is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "racing", suggesting that the "competition effect" is still being executed. Furthermore, a competition effect 81i is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and a character message 81j is displayed in the lower portion of the main display area Dm. Of the 6 characters in the race, the 1st character (Boat No. 1) finished 1st, the 3rd character (Boat 3) finished 2nd, and the 6th character (Boat No. 6) finished 3rd. It suggests.

Therefore, in the right part of the main display area Dm, a character message 81k is displayed to notify that the result was a failure from the content of the "competition effect", and the player can shoot the ball in the variable probability area 65d. While none of the 4R (No. 3 boat), 5R (No. 4 boat) and 6R (No. 3R (corresponding to boat No. 2), 7R (corresponding to boat No. 6)), the variable probability area 65d was set effectively and the effective variable area was not passed. It suggests.

Next, FIG. 80(a) shows a state in which the 10R-th game has been completed from the state of FIG. 79(a) and progressed to the jackpot ending. In FIG. 80(a), a character message 81c indicating that the jackpot ending is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper part of the main display area Dm, the text message 81d of the game explanation is displayed as "Stunning hit!"

Furthermore, a character message 81m of "probability change state entering" is displayed in the right part of the main display area Dm, and when the player passes the ball through the effective probability change area, "probability change state ” indicates that the

Next, FIG. 80(b) shows a state in which the 10R-th game ends from the state of FIG. 79(b) and progresses to the jackpot ending. In FIG. 80(b), a character message 81c indicating that the jackpot ending is being executed is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. Also, in the upper portion of the main display area Dm, the character message 81d of the game description displays "Unfortunately lost!", suggesting that the result of the "competitive effect" was a loss.

Furthermore, in the right part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81m of "time saving 150 times" is displayed. This indicates that the state will be changed to "high probability time shortening state".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, since the number of rounds in which the variable probability region 65d is opened in one jackpot game is six times, the "competition" executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game In "Production", an arbitrary character is selected from 6 characters to guess the competition result, but another number (for example, 9 or 16) is used to execute the competition production. It may be configured as Also, although it is configured to select two or three characters out of six characters, it may be configured to select only one character, or to select any other number of characters. may

Furthermore, in the "competition presentation", a boat is used as a motif. It may be configured to be executed in a spectator presentation (eg, playing cards, lottery, etc.).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the round in which the detection of the entering ball by the variable probability area switch 65g when the variable probability area 65d is opened differs depending on the jackpot type. Also, if the number of rounds in which the ball is detected by the probability variable region switch 65g is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, regardless of whether the probability variable region 65d for each jackpot round is valid or invalid according to each jackpot type, the probability variable in subsequent rounds Region 65d is configured to be disabled. By configuring in this way, in one jackpot, out of the 6 rounds in which the probability variable area 65d is opened, a predetermined number of rounds are selected to pass the ball through the probability variable area 65d, and as a result, the effective probability variable area It is possible to make it a game property whether to pass and shift to "probability variable state" or not to pass through the effective probability variable area and shift to "general pattern high probability time shortening state".

Also, during the big hit, in the introduction effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 before the probability variable region 65d is opened, regardless of which jackpot round probability variable region 65d is set to be valid, a constant It is constituted so that lottery processing is performed at random from the number of introduction performances. By configuring in this way, the introduction effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the jackpot round in which the variable probability area 65d is effectively set can be made irrelevant.

As a result, unlike a conventional pachinko machine, the main controller 110 selects whether or not to shift to the "probability fluctuation state", and informs the result of the selection by a symbol display device or the like. The player guesses whether the probability variable region 65d of is set to be valid, and determines by the player's own selection whether to pass the ball through the probability variable region 65d of any jackpot round, and the result is "probability variable state , it is possible to create new amusement and improve interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability variable region 65d is opened in the round during the big win, the probability variable region 65d is opened simultaneously with the opening of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, and the probability variable region in one jackpot round The maximum opening time of 65d is "10 seconds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is "30 seconds". By configuring in this way, when the player guesses that the probability variable region 65d of the round is not set to be valid, in the round, the player can, for 10 seconds from the opening of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, By interrupting the shooting of the ball and restarting the right-handed game after closing the probability variable area 65d after 10 seconds have passed, the prize ball of the round can be acquired.

As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can prevent the number of balls acquired by the player per time from becoming excessive, and allows the player to properly play the game without excessively fueling the gambling spirit of the player. can provide.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, based on the number of remaining rounds in which the ball passes through the variable probability area 65d and the number of remaining rounds in which the variable probability area 65d is opened, The degree of suggesting a right-handed game on the 3-symbol display device 81 is changed stepwise. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the ball will pass through the variable probability region 65d in a stepwise emphasized manner. As a result, the player does not let the ball pass through the variable probability area 65d, and the number of rounds in which the ball is passed through the variable probability area 65d becomes smaller than the game specification, thereby suppressing the possibility of obtaining less balls than expected. can be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the result of winning the jackpot and allowing the ball to pass through the variable probability region 65d of any round is reported in the "competition effect" on the third symbol display device 81. In the case of notifying the result of success, even if the contents of any "competitive production" are executed, it is possible to pass through the effective probability variable area and move to the "probability variable state" configured to notify. By constructing in this way, even if the player's understanding of the game specifications is insufficient, the ``competition performance'' becomes a successful result, and the effective probability variation area is passed through to shift to the ``probability variation state''. can be recognized.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the right-handed hitting notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 and the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for the main display on the third symbol display device 81 are always displayed during the jackpot. . By configuring in this way, the player can display a special pattern even when an effect according to the game specifications suggesting interruption of the right-handed game, such as "voting effect" during the big win, is executed. It is possible to confirm the display of the right-hand hitting notification lamp 37c of the device 37 and the display of the right-hand hitting instruction 89 for the main display on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can recognize that any prize ball can be acquired by executing a right-handed game during the jackpot.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the passage of the ball to the effective probability variable area is detected during the jackpot, the corresponding round information is stored in the effective probability variable area passing round storage area 223q, When executing the "competition effect" that notifies the third symbol display device 81 whether or not the pass is possible, the winning competition development scenario is drawn by referring to the information in the effective probability variable region passing round storage area 223q, and the success result and It is configured to execute a "competition production" that becomes By configuring in this way, even if there are a plurality of rounds in which the variable probability region 65d is set to be effective, the success result and the It is possible to execute a “competition production” that will become

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 95. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, one probability variable area 65d is arranged inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability variable area 65d is opened depending on the winning jackpot type, and is set to be valid. The rounds played are configured differently.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, six probability variable areas from the first probability variable area 65d1 to the sixth probability variable area 65d6 are arranged inside the variable winning device 65, and depending on the jackpot type won , the probability variable region that is opened and the probability variable region that is effectively set are configured to be different for each round.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, a specific configuration of the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 of the second embodiment and the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment is mainly that the variable winning device 65 has a plurality of variable probability areas (first variable probability area 65d1 to sixth The point is that the variable probability region 65d6) is provided.

Inside the variable winning device 65 in the second embodiment, there are a large winning opening switch 65c for detecting a ball that has won the variable winning device 65, and 6 variable areas provided downstream of the large winning opening switch 65c. (First variable probability region 65d1 to sixth variable probability region 65d6 (see FIG. 82)) and a discharge passage 65h (see FIG. 82) provided on the downstream side (right side in front view) of the sixth variable probability region 65d6 are provided. there is

Now, with reference to FIG. 82, the details of the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 82 is an enlarged front view schematically showing the front view of the variable winning device in the second embodiment. A first variable probability region 65d1 is arranged downstream of the big winning opening switch 65c, and the first variable probability region 65d1 is a first variable probability region opening/closing plate 65e1, and the first variable probability region opening/closing plate 65e1 is driven to open and close. Possible first variable probability area solenoid 65f1 (see FIG. 87), and the first variable probability area switch 65g1 capable of detecting the ball that has flowed down to the downstream side of the first variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e1. In addition, only in the state in which the first variable probability area solenoid 65f1 is opened, the ball can be detected by the first variable probability area switch 65g1.

Next, the second variable probability region 65d2 is arranged downstream of the first variable probability region 65d1 (right side in front view), and the second variable probability region 65d2 includes the second variable probability region opening and closing plate 65e2 and the second variable probability region 65d2. A second probability variable area solenoid 65f2 (see FIG. 87) capable of opening and closing the area opening/closing plate 65e2, and a second probability variable area switch 65g2 capable of detecting the ball that has flowed downstream of the second probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e2. It is configured. In addition, only in the state in which the second variable probability area solenoid 65f2 is opened, the ball can be detected by the second variable probability area switch 65g2.

Next, the third variable probability region 65d3 is arranged downstream of the second variable probability region 65d2 (right side in front view), and the third variable probability region 65d3 includes the third variable probability region opening and closing plate 65e3 and the third variable probability region. A third probability variable area solenoid 65f3 (see FIG. 87) capable of opening and closing the area opening/closing plate 65e3, and a third probability variable area switch 65g3 capable of detecting the ball that has flowed downstream of the third probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e3. It is configured. It should be noted that only in the state in which the third variable probability region solenoid 65f3 is open, detection of the ball in the third variable probability region switch 65g3 is configured to be possible.

Next, the fourth variable probability region 65d4 is arranged downstream (right side in front view) of the third variable probability region 65d3, and the fourth variable probability region 65d4 includes the fourth variable probability region opening/closing plate 65e4 and the fourth variable probability region 65d4. A fourth probability variable area solenoid 65f4 (see FIG. 87) capable of opening and closing the area opening/closing plate 65e4, and a fourth probability variable area switch 65g4 capable of detecting the ball that has flowed downstream of the fourth probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e4. It is configured. In addition, only in the state in which the fourth probability variable region solenoid 65f4 is opened, the ball can be detected by the fourth probability variable region switch 65g4.

Next, a fifth variable probability region 65d5 is arranged downstream of the fourth variable probability region 65d4 (right side in front view), and the fifth variable probability region 65d5 includes a fifth variable probability region opening and closing plate 65e5 and the fifth variable probability region 65d5. A fifth probability variable region solenoid 65f5 (see FIG. 87) capable of opening and closing the region opening and closing plate 65e5, and a fifth probability variable region switch 65g5 capable of detecting the ball that has flowed downstream of the fifth probability variable region opening and closing plate 65e5. It is configured. It should be noted that only in the state in which the fifth probability variable region solenoid 65f5 is open, it is possible to detect the ball in the fifth probability variable region switch 65g5.

Next, a sixth variable probability region 65d6 is arranged downstream of the fifth variable probability region 65d5 (right side in front view), and the sixth variable probability region 65d6 includes a sixth variable probability region opening and closing plate 65e6 and the sixth variable probability region 65e6. A sixth probability variable area solenoid 65f6 (see FIG. 87) capable of opening and closing the area opening/closing plate 65e6, and a sixth probability variable area switch 65g6 capable of detecting the ball that has flowed downstream of the sixth probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e6. It is configured. It should be noted that only in the state in which the sixth variable probability region solenoid 65f6 is open, detection of the ball in the sixth variable probability region switch 65g6 is configured to be possible.

In addition, the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 to the sixth probability variable region solenoid 65f6 are configured so that the rounds that are driven to open are different depending on the jackpot type (see FIG. 88).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, each probability variable area (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) for each jackpot round is set to be valid or invalid according to the type of jackpot won. configured differently (see Figures 89 and 90). Therefore, for example, when the ball is detected by the first probability variable region switch 65g1, only when the first probability variable region 65d1 of the round is set to be valid, to the "probability variable state" after the end of the jackpot configured to migrate with Details of the driving mode of each probability variable area solenoid 65f1 to 65f6 and the probability variable area effective table 202h will be described later in FIGS. 89 to 93.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86, the inflow pattern of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 83(a) shows that the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1 is in an open state (immersion state), and the five probability variable area opening/closing plates of the second variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e2 to the sixth variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e6 are It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when both are in the closed state (protruding state), and FIG. The probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e2 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e1 and the third probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e3 to the sixth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e6 are any of the five probability variable region opening/closing plates is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when both are in a closed state (protruding state).

In addition, FIG. 84(a) shows that the third probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e3 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e1, the second probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e2, and the fourth probability variable region opening/closing plate A variable winning device for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when the 5 probability variable region opening/closing plates of the plate 65e4 to the sixth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e6 are all in a closed state (protruding state) 65, FIG. 84(b) shows that the fourth variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e4 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1 to the third variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e3, 5th probability variable area opening and closing plate 65e5 and 6th probability variable area opening and closing plate 65e6 When all the 5 probability variable area opening and closing plates are closed (protruding state), the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explanation.

In addition, FIG. 85(a) shows that the fifth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e5 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e1 to the fourth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e4 and the sixth probability variable region opening/closing FIG. 10 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when all the five variable probability area opening/closing plates of the plate 65e6 are in the closed state (protruding state); , FIG. 85(b) shows that the sixth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e6 is in an open state (immersed state), and five probability variable region opening/closing plates of the first to fifth probability variable region opening/closing plates 65e1 to 65e5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 when both are in a closed state (protruding state).

In addition, FIG. 86(a) shows that when the 6 probability variable area opening/closing plates of the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1 to the sixth probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e6 are all in a closed state (protruding state), in the variable winning device 65 FIG. 10 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the .

As shown in FIG. 83(a), when a big win is won and a special game state occurs, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened so that balls can flow into the variable winning device 65. Become. Then, the first variable probability region opening and closing plate 65e1 is in the open state (immersion state), and the second variable probability region opening and closing plate 65e2 ~ sixth probability variable region opening and closing plate 65e6 of the five probability variable region opening and closing plates are all closed state ( In the projecting state), the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is first detected by the big winning opening switch 65c. After that, since the first variable probability region opening/closing plate 65e1 is opened (immersed) by the first variable probability region solenoid 65f1 (see FIG. 87), the ball flows into the first variable probability region 65d1, and the first variable probability region switch Detected by 65g1. In addition, the ball detected by the first variable probability area switch 65g1 is ejected to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (the back side of the game board 13) through an ejection path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the second variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e2 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1 and the third variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e3 to the sixth When the 5 variable probability area opening/closing plates 65e6 are all in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is first detected by the large winning opening switch 65c. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1 in the closed state (projecting state), and the second variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e2 provided on the downstream side (right side in front view) of the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1. is opened (immersed) by the second variable probability area solenoid 65f2 (see FIG. 87), the ball flows into the second variable probability area 65d2 and is detected by the second variable probability area switch 65g2. In addition, the ball detected by the second variable probability area switch 65g2 is ejected to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (the back side of the game board 13) through an ejection path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(a), the third probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e3 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e1, the second probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e2 and the fourth When the 5 probability variable area opening/closing plates of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e4 to the 6th probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e6 are all in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is first, the big winning opening Detected by switch 65c. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the first variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e1 and the second variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e2 in the closed state (protruding state), and is provided on the downstream side (right side in front view) of the second variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e2. Since the third probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e3 is opened (immersed) by the third probability variable area solenoid 65f3 (see FIG. 87), the ball flows into the third probability variable area 65d3, and the third probability variable area switch 65g3 detected by In addition, the ball detected by the third variable probability area switch 65g3 is ejected to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (the back side of the game board 13) through an ejection path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the fourth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e4 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first to third probability variable region opening/closing plates 65e1 to 65e3, the fifth When the probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e5 and the probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e6 and the probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e6 are both in a closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 first enters the big winning opening. Detected by switch 65c. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1 to the third variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e3 in the closed state (protruding state), and is provided on the downstream side (right side in front view) of the third variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e3. Since the fourth probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e4 is opened (immersed) by the fourth probability variable area solenoid 65f4 (see FIG. 87), the ball flows into the fourth probability variable area 65d4, and the fourth probability variable area switch 65g4 detected by In addition, the ball detected by the fourth variable probability area switch 65g4 is ejected to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (the back side of the game board 13) through an ejection path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the fifth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e5 is in an open state (immersion state), and the first to fourth probability variable region opening/closing plates 65e1 to the fourth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e4 and the sixth When the 5 variable probability area opening/closing plates 65e6 are all in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is first detected by the large winning opening switch 65c. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the first variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e1 to the fourth variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e4 in the closed state (protruding state), and is provided on the downstream side (right side in front view) of the fourth variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e4. Since the fifth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e5 is opened (immersed) by the fifth probability variable region solenoid 65f5 (see FIG. 87), the ball flows into the fifth probability variable region 65d5, and the fifth probability variable region switch 65g5 detected by In addition, the ball detected by the fifth variable probability area switch 65g5 is ejected to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (the back side of the game board 13) through an ejection path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the sixth probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e6 is in the open state (immersion state), and the five probability variable region opening/closing plates 65e1 to 5th probability variable region opening/closing plate 65e5 When all the variable probability area opening/closing plates are in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is first detected by the big winning opening switch 65c. After that, it rolls on the upper surfaces of the first to fifth variable probability area opening and closing plates 65e1 to 65e5 in the closed state (protruding state), and is provided on the downstream side (right side in front view) of the fifth variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e5. Since the sixth probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e6 is opened (immersed) by the sixth probability variable area solenoid 65f6 (see FIG. 87), the ball flows into the sixth probability variable area 65d6, and the sixth probability variable area switch 65g6 detected by In addition, the ball detected by the sixth variable probability area switch 65g6 is ejected to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (the back side of the game board 13) through an ejection path (not shown).

Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the probability variable area opening/closing plate 6 of the first probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e1 to the sixth probability variable area opening/closing plate 65e6 are all in a closed state (protruding state), the variable winning prize A ball that has flowed into the device 65 is first detected by the big winning opening switch 65c. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the first variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e1 to the sixth variable probability area opening and closing plate 65e6 in the closed state (protruding state), and in any of the first variable probability area 65d1 to the sixth variable probability area 65d6 It does not flow in, and is discharged out of the variable winning device 65 (back side of the game board 13) from the discharge passage 65h provided on the downstream side (right side in front view) of the sixth variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e6.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, if any one probability variable area (one of the first probability variable area 65d1 to the sixth probability variable area 65d6) is open, the other Since the probability variable area is configured to be closed (see FIG. 88), the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is configured to have one of the inflow patterns shown in FIGS. 83 to 86. ing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The difference between the block diagram of the second embodiment and the block diagram of the first embodiment is that the probability variable area effective flag 203m in the RAM 203 is deleted, the first probability variable area effective flag 203u, the second probability variable area effective flag 203v, 3rd probability variable region effective flag 203w, 4th probability variable region effective flag 203x, 5th probability variable region effective flag 203y and 6th probability variable region effective flag 203z are added, probability variable region solenoid 65f in variable winning device 65 and The point is that the probability variable region switches 65g are deleted, respectively, and the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 to the sixth probability variable region solenoid 65f6 and the first probability variable region switch 65g1 to the sixth probability variable region switch 65g6 are added.

The first probability variable region valid flag 203u is a flag for indicating that the first probability variable region 65d1 is set to be valid in the ON state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ball is detected by the first probability variable region switch 65g1 in a situation where the first probability variable region effective flag 203u is set to ON, the probability variable transition flag 203k is set to ON. It is configured so that a “probability fluctuation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot.

The first probability variable area valid flag 203u is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the probability variable area effective table 202h (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is set based on the jackpot type (see S652 in FIG. 38), and each round starts during the jackpot. Every time, based on the probability variable area effective table 202h set for the big hit, the first probability variable area effective flag 203u is set to ON (see S6151 in FIG. 94). After that, when the first probability variable region 65d1 is closed in the big winning opening open process (see FIG. 95), the first probability variable region effective flag 203u is set to OFF (see S6251 and S6252 in FIG. 95). .

The second probability variable region valid flag 203v is a flag for indicating that the second probability variable region 65d2 is set to be valid in the ON state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ball is detected by the second probability variable region switch 65g2 in a situation where the second probability variable region effective flag 203v is set to ON, the probability variable transition flag 203k is set to ON. It is configured so that a “probability fluctuation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot.

This second probability variable area valid flag 203v is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the probability variable area effective table 202h (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is set based on the jackpot type (see S652 in FIG. 38), and each round starts during the jackpot. Every time, based on the probability variable area effective table 202h set for the big hit, the second probability variable area effective flag 203v is set to ON (see S6151 in FIG. 94). After that, when the second probability variable region 65d2 is closed in the big winning opening opening process (see FIG. 95), the second probability variable region effective flag 203v is set to OFF (see S6251 and S6252 in FIG. 95). .

The third probability variable region valid flag 203w is a flag for indicating that the third probability variable region 65d3 is set to be valid in the ON state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ball is detected by the third probability variable region switch 65g3 in a situation where the third probability variable region effective flag 203w is set to ON, the probability variable transition flag 203k is set to ON. It is configured so that a “probability fluctuation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot.

This third probability variable region valid flag 203w is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the probability variable area effective table 202h (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is set based on the jackpot type (see S652 in FIG. 38), and each round starts during the jackpot. Every time, based on the probability variable area effective table 202h set for the big hit, the third probability variable area effective flag 203w is set to ON (see S6151 in FIG. 94). After that, when the third probability variable region 65d3 is closed in the big winning opening opening process (see FIG. 95), the third probability variable region effective flag 203w is set to OFF (see S6251 and S6252 in FIG. 95). .

The fourth probability variable region valid flag 203x is a flag for indicating that the fourth probability variable region 65d4 is set to be valid in the ON state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ball is detected by the fourth probability variable region switch 65g4 in a situation where the fourth probability variable region effective flag 203x is set to ON, the probability variable transition flag 203k is set to ON. It is configured so that a “probability fluctuation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot.

This fourth probability variable region valid flag 203x is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the probability variable area effective table 202h (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is set based on the jackpot type (see S652 in FIG. 38), and each round starts during the jackpot. Every time, based on the probability variable area effective table 202h set for the big hit, the fourth probability variable area effective flag 203x is set to ON (see S6151 in FIG. 94). After that, when the fourth probability variable region 65d4 is closed in the big winning opening opening process (see FIG. 95), the fourth probability variable region effective flag 203x is set to OFF (see S6251 and S6252 in FIG. 95). .

The fifth probability variable region valid flag 203y is a flag for indicating that the fifth probability variable region 65d5 is set to be valid in the ON state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ball is detected by the fifth probability variable region switch 65g5 in a situation where the fifth probability variable region effective flag 203y is set to ON, the probability variable transition flag 203k is set to ON. It is configured so that a “probability fluctuation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot.

The fifth probability variable area valid flag 203y is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the probability variable area effective table 202h (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is set based on the jackpot type (see S652 in FIG. 38), and each round starts during the jackpot. Every time, based on the probability variable area effective table 202h set for the big hit, the fifth probability variable area effective flag 203y is set to ON (see S6151 in FIG. 94). After that, when the fifth probability variable region 65d5 is closed in the big winning opening opening process (see FIG. 95), the fifth probability variable region effective flag 203y is set to OFF (see S6251 and S6252 in FIG. 95). .

The sixth probability variable region valid flag 203z is a flag for indicating that the sixth probability variable region 65d6 is set to be valid in the ON state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ball is detected by the sixth probability variable region switch 65g6 in a situation where the sixth probability variable region effective flag 203z is set to ON, the probability variable transition flag 203k is set to ON It is configured so that a “probability fluctuation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot.

The sixth probability variable area valid flag 203z is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the probability variable area effective table 202h (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is set based on the jackpot type (see S652 in FIG. 38), and each round starts during the jackpot. Every time, based on the probability variable region effective table 202h set for the big hit, the sixth probability variable region effective flag 203z is set to ON (see S6151 in FIG. 94). After that, when the 6th probability variable region 65d6 is closed in the big winning opening open process (see FIG. 95), the 6th probability variable region effective flag 203z is set to OFF (see S6251 and S6252 in FIG. 95). .

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the opening/closing pattern of each probability variable region (first variable probability region 65d1 to sixth variable probability region 65d6) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variable probability area open table 202g of the second embodiment. The difference between the probability variable area open table 202g of the second embodiment and the probability variable area open table 202g of the first embodiment is mainly that the probability variable area opened in each jackpot round is different.

In the probability variable region open table 202g shown in FIG. 88, the probability variable region (first probability variable region 65d1 to sixth probability variable region 65d6) to be opened in each jackpot round is shown for each jackpot type, and the first probability variable region for each round "First" when 65d1 is opened, "second" when the second probability variable area 65d2 is opened, "third" when the third probability variable area 65d3 is opened, When the fourth probability variable region 65d4 is opened "fourth", when the fifth probability variable region 65d5 is opened "fifth", when the sixth probability variable region 65d6 is opened "fourth 6”, respectively. In addition, when none of the probability variable areas are opened, it is expressed as "-".

In the second embodiment, if any one probability variable region (one of the first probability variable region 65d1 to the sixth probability variable region 65d6) is open, the other probability variable regions are configured to be closed It is For example, when the first variable probability region 65d1 is open, the other variable probability regions (second variable probability region 65d2 to sixth variable probability region 65d6) are configured to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 88, when the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B", "probability variation C", "probability variation D", "probability variation E" or "probability variation F" is elected, that is, the first special symbol In each round from 1R to 3R when a jackpot based on dynamic display is won, all probability variable areas (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) are in a closed state. Even if the hitting game is continued and the variable winning device 65 is made to win, the ball cannot or hardly passes through all the probability variable areas of the first probability variable area 65d1 to the sixth probability variable area 65d6 (see FIG. 86) ).

Next, in the 4th R when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened. In 10 seconds after being played, the first variable probability region 65d1 becomes an open state, and during this time, the right-handed game is continued and the variable winning device 65 is made to win, so that the ball can pass through the first variable probability region 65d1. becomes (see FIG. 83(a)).

Next, in the 5th R when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened. In 10 seconds after the second variable probability region 65d2 is opened, and during this time the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win by continuing the right-handed game, so that the ball can pass through the second variable probability region 65d2. becomes (see FIG. 83(b)).

Next, in the 6th R when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened. In 10 seconds after the third probability variable region 65d3 is opened, and during this time, the right-handed game is continued and the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win, so that the ball can pass through the third probability variable region 65d3. becomes (see FIG. 84(a)).

Next, in the 7th R when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened. In 10 seconds after that, the fourth probability variable region 65d4 becomes an open state, and during this time, the right-handed game is continued and the variable winning device 65 is made to win, so that the ball can pass through the fourth probability variable region 65d4. becomes (see FIG. 84(b)).

Next, in the 8th R when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened. In 10 seconds after that, the fifth probability variable region 65d5 becomes an open state, and during this time, the right-handed game is continued and the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win, so that the ball can pass through the fifth probability variable region 65d5. becomes (see FIG. 85(a)).

Next, in the 9th R when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened. In 10 seconds after that, the sixth probability variable region 65d6 becomes an open state, and during this time, the right-handed game is continued and the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win, so that the ball can pass through the sixth probability variable region 65d6. becomes (see FIG. 85(b)).

Then, in the 10th R when winning the jackpot type "variable A", "variable B", "variable C", "variable D", "variable E" or "variable F", all the variable areas (first variable The area 65d1 to the sixth probability variable area 65d6) is in a closed state, and even if the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win by continuing the right-handed game in the corresponding round, the first probability variable area 65d1 to the sixth probability variable area 65d6 It becomes impossible or difficult for the sphere to pass through all probability variable areas (see FIG. 86).

By constructing in this way, the probability variable area opened for each big winning round is different, each big winning round can be associated with the probability variable area opened in the corresponding big winning round, and the configuration is easy for the player to understand. can be

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, each probability variable area (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) for each jackpot round is set to be valid or invalid depending on each jackpot type. (See FIGS. 89 and 90), and even if the ball passes through each probability variable area, if the probability variable area that the ball passed in the round is not set effectively, after the jackpot ends, the "probability It is configured so as not to be able to shift to "fluctuation state".

Also, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B", "probability variation C", "probability variation D", "probability variation E" or "probability variation F", the first probability variation area 65d1 to the sixth probability variation area 65d6 When the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through one of the variable probability areas reaches "twice", all the variable probability areas of subsequent jackpot rounds are invalidated.

Therefore, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B", "probability variation C", "probability variation D", "probability variation E" or "probability variation F", one of the probability variation areas will be opened 4R to 9R Of the 6 rounds, select 2 rounds to pass the ball through the probability variable area, and if the probability variable area of any one of the selected 2 rounds is set to be valid, after the jackpot ends It is configured to transition to the "probability fluctuation state".

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the player is made to guess which round of the probability variable region is set effectively, and the probability variable region is set in the guessed round. Passing through the area creates a new amusement feature such as whether or not the player can be shifted to the "probability change state", thereby increasing interest.

In addition, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", each probability variable area (first variable area 65d1 to 6th When the ball is passed through one of the 6 rounds from 4R to 9R in which the probability variable region 65d6) is opened, the right-handed game can be performed at the same time as the opening and closing plate 65a of the round. , On the other hand, if the ball is not passed through each probability variable area, after the opening of the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the round, one of the probability variable areas is in an open state for 10 seconds, so during this period the ball It will interrupt the launch. Then, after 10 seconds have passed since the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, the variable probability area that was in the open state becomes a closed state, so from the closing of the variable probability area until the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is closed. 20 seconds, the right-handed game can be resumed to obtain the prize balls of the corresponding round.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B", "probability variation C", "probability variation D", "probability variation E" or "probability variation F" is elected, probability variation area In each round from 4R to 9R when is opened, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a suggestive display so as to continue the right-handed game when the ball is passed through the variable probability area (Fig. 62 ( a) see). Furthermore, including the period during which the suggestive display is performed, during the jackpot, the lighting of the right hitting notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 and the display of the main display right hitting instruction 89 on the third symbol display device 81 are performed. is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, even if each probability variable area (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) is open, the period in which the ball is not passed through the probability variable area In this way, the number of balls acquired by the player per time can be prevented from becoming excessive. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to play the game appropriately without aggravating the gambling spirit of the player.

Then, the jackpot types "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "variable O", " If you win "Variable probability P", "Variable probability Q", "Variable probability R", "Variable probability S", "Variable probability T" or "Variable probability U", that is, if you win a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol In the 1R eye, all probability variable regions (first probability variable region 65d1 to sixth probability variable region 65d6) are in a closed state, and assuming that the variable winning device 65 is awarded by continuing the right-handed game in the corresponding round Also, the ball cannot or hardly passes through all of the first probability variable region 65d1 to the sixth probability variable region 65d6 (see FIG. 86).

Then, the jackpot types "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "variable O", " In the 2Rth when winning "Variable P", "Variable Q", "Variable R", "Variable S", "Variable T" or "Variable U", 10 after the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened second, the first variable probability region 65d1 is open, and during this time, the right-handed game is continued and the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win, so that the ball can pass through the first variable probability region 65d1 (Fig. 83 ( a) see).

Then, the jackpot types "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "variable O", " In the 3rd R when winning "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" or "variable probability U", 10 after the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened second, the second variable probability region 65d2 is open, during this time the right-handed game is continued and the variable winning device 65 wins, so that the ball can pass through the second variable probability region 65d2 (Fig. 83 ( b) see).

Then, the jackpot types "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "variable O", " In the 4th R when winning "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" or "variable probability U", 10 after the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened second, the third probability variable region 65d3 is open, and during this time, the right-handed game is continued and the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win, so that the ball can pass through the third probability variable region 65d3 (Fig. 84 ( a) see).

Then, the jackpot types "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "variable O", " In the 5th R when winning "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" or "variable probability U", 10 after the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened second, the fourth probability variable region 65d4 is open, and by continuing the right-handed game during this time and causing the variable winning device 65 to win, the ball can pass through the fourth probability variable region 65d4 (Fig. 84 ( b) see).

Then, the jackpot types "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "variable O", " In the 6th R when winning "Variable P", "Variable Q", "Variable R", "Variable S", "Variable T" or "Variable U", 10 after the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened Seconds, the fifth variable probability region 65d5 is in an open state, and by continuing the right-handed game during this time and winning the variable winning device 65, the ball can pass through the fifth variable probability region 65d5 (Fig. 85 ( a) see).

Then, the jackpot types "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "variable O", " In the 7th R when winning "variable probability P", "variable probability Q", "variable probability R", "variable probability S", "variable probability T" or "variable probability U", 10 after the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened second, the sixth probability variable region 65d6 is open, and during this time, the right-handed game is continued and the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win, so that the ball can pass through the sixth probability variable region 65d6 (Fig. 85 ( b) see).

Then, the jackpot types "variable G", "variable H", "variable I", "variable J", "variable K", "variable L", "variable M", "variable N", "variable O", " In 8R to 10R when winning ``Variable P'', ``Variable Q'', ``Variable R'', ``Variable S'', ``Variable T'' or ``Variable U'', all 6 probability variable area 65d6) is in a closed state, and even if the right-handed game is continued in the corresponding round and the variable winning device 65 is allowed to win, all the probability variables of the first probability variable area 65d1 to the sixth probability variable area 65d6 The ball cannot or hardly passes through the area (see FIG. 86).

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, each probability variable area (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) for each jackpot round is set to be valid or invalid depending on each jackpot type. (See FIGS. 89 and 90), and even if the ball passes through each probability variable area, if the probability variable area that the ball passed in the round is not set effectively, after the jackpot ends, the "probability It is configured so as not to be able to shift to "fluctuation state".

In addition, the jackpot type "probable variable G", "probable variable H", "probable variable I", "probable variable J", "probable variable K", "probable variable L", "probable variable M", "probable variable N", "probable variable O", " Probability P”, “Probability Q”, “Probability R”, “Probability S”, “Probability T” or “Probability U”, each probability area (1st probability area 65d1 ~ 6th probability area 65d6) When the number of rounds passed by the ball reaches "three times", all the probability variable areas of subsequent big winning rounds are invalidated.

Therefore, the jackpot type "probability G", "probability H", "probability I", "probability J", "probability variation K", "probability variation L", "probability variation M", "probability variation N", "probability variation O", " If you win ``Variable P'', ``Variable Q'', ``Variable R'', ``Variable S'', ``Variable T'' or ``Variable U'', one of the 6 rounds of 2R to 7R will be opened. Among them, 3 rounds are selected and the ball is passed through the probability variable region, and if the probability variable region of one of the selected 3 rounds is set to be valid, the “probability variable state” after the jackpot ends. configured to move to

In addition, the jackpot type "Probability G", "Probability H", "Probability I", "Probability J", "Probability variation K", "Probability variation L", "Probability variation M", "Probability variation N", "Probability variation O", " Probability P”, “Probability Q”, “Probability R”, “Probability S”, “Probability T” or “Probability U”, each probability variable area (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) When the ball is passed through one of the probability variable regions in the 6 rounds of 2R to 7R that are opened, it is possible to perform a right-handed game at the same time as the opening and closing plate 65a of the big winning opening opening and closing plate 65a in the round. When the ball is not passed through the open probability variable area, the probability variable area is in an open state for 10 seconds after the opening of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the round. become. Then, after 10 seconds have passed since the opening/closing plate 65a of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a has passed, the variable probability area is in a closed state, and a right-handed game can be performed to obtain the prize balls of the corresponding round.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the jackpot types "variable probability G", "variable probability H", "variable probability I", "variable probability J", "variable probability K", "variable probability L", "variable probability M", " If you win ``Variable N'', ``Variable O'', ``Variable P'', ``Variable Q'', ``Variable R'', ``Variable S'', ``Variable T'' or ``Variable U'', the 2R area will be opened. In each round from 7R, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a suggestive display so as to continue the right-handed game when the ball is passed through the variable probability area (see FIG. 73(a)). In addition, including the period during which the suggestive display is performed, during the jackpot, the lighting of the right hitting notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 and the display of the main display right hitting instruction 89 on the third symbol display device 81 are performed. is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, even if each probability variable area (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) is open, the period in which the ball is not passed through the probability variable area In this way, the number of balls acquired by the player per time can be prevented from becoming excessive. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to play the game appropriately without aggravating the gambling spirit of the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, effective patterns of each probability variable area (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) for each jackpot type will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 probability variable area valid table 202h1, and FIG. 90 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 probability variable area valid table 202h2. In the probability variable area valid table 202h shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, for each jackpot type in each special pattern, the probability variable area (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) set to be effective for each round is shown. When the first probability variable region 65d1 is set to be valid, it is written as "first", and when the second probability variable region 65d2 is set to be valid, it is written as "second", and the third probability variable region When 65d3 is set to be valid, it is written as "third", when the fourth probability variable area 65d4 is set to be valid, it is written as "fourth", and the fifth probability variable area 65d5 is set to be valid. When the sixth probability variable region 65d6 is set to be valid, it is written as “sixth”.

It should be noted that, in each round, if none of the probability variable regions (first probability variable region 65d1 to sixth probability variable region 65d6) is set to be valid, that is, the six probability variable regions of the first probability variable region 65d1 to sixth probability variable region 65d6 are any is also set to be disabled, "-" is indicated. Also, in the second embodiment, if any one of the 6 probability variable regions of the first probability variable region 65d1 to the sixth probability variable region 65d6 is set to be valid, the other probability variable regions are disabled Configured as configured. For example, when the first probability variable region 65d1 is set to be valid, the five probability variable regions of the second probability variable region 65d2 to the sixth probability variable region 65d6 are configured to be set to be invalid.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variation A", the first probability variation region 65d1 is set to be valid only in the 4R, and other rounds (that is, 1R to 3R and 5R to 10R In each round), all probability variable areas are disabled.

In addition, when winning the first special symbol jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the number of times of passing probability area counter 203o When the value is "2" or more, it is configured not to turn on the probability variable region valid flag 203m. That is, if you win the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B", "variable probability C", "variable probability D", "variable probability E" or "variable probability F", the number of rounds in which the ball passed through any of the probability variable areas reaches "twice", all of the probability variable areas of the subsequent jackpot rounds are invalidated.

However, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, since it is after 4R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), the first probability variation area 65d1 is valid At the start of the 4th R, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable area has not reached "2 times". Therefore, in the jackpot type “variable probability A”, the first variable probability region 65d1 opened in the 4th R is configured so as not to be set invalid depending on the game result.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "probability variable A", the ball is passed through the first probability variable area 65d1 in the 4th R, so that the state shifts to "probability variable state" after the jackpot ends.

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variation B", the second probability variation area 65d2 is set to be valid only in the 5R, and in other rounds (that is, 1R to 4R and 6R to 10R each round) All stochastic areas are disabled.

In addition, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation B" is elected, since it is after 4R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), the second probability variation area 65d2 is valid At the start of the 5th R, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable area has not reached "2 times". Therefore, in the jackpot type “variable probability B”, the second variable probability area 65d2 opened in the 5R is configured so as not to be invalidated by the game result.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variable B" is won, the ball is passed through the second probability variable area 65d2 at the 5Rth time, thereby shifting to the "probability variable state" after the jackpot ends.

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variable C", the third probability variable area 65d3 is set to be valid only in the 6R, and in other rounds (that is, 1R to 5R and 7R to 10R each round) All stochastic areas are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation C", since it is after 4R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), provisionally in the 4R and 5R , When the ball is passed through each probability variable region in a state where the first probability variable region 65d1 and the second probability variable region 65d2 are open, the first probability variable region 65d1 opened to the 4th R and the second Since both of the 2 probability variable regions 65d2 are set to be invalid, it is not possible to pass through the valid probability variable regions in these 2 rounds.

Furthermore, when each probability variable area is passed in the 2 rounds of the 4Rth and 5Rth, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o becomes "2", and the probability variable area effective flag 203m is not turned on in subsequent rounds. Become.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability C", the third probability variable area 65d3 is set to be valid. However, if the probability variable region is passed in the 2 rounds of the 4th and 5th rounds, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 6th round will be “2 ”, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 6R, and the third probability variable region 65d3 of the 6R remains invalid, and in this state, the third probability variable region 65d3 is passed through the 6R. Even if it does, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region, so it cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state".

In other words, if you win the jackpot type "Probability C", in the 2nd round of the 4th and 5th R, if the number of rounds passed through the probability change area is "1 time" or less, the 6th R start Since the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at time is "1" or less, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is turned on, the third probability variable region 65d3 is set to be valid, and the ball is placed in the third probability variable region 65d3 at the 6Rth time. By passing through, it is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variation D", the fourth probability variation region 65d4 is set to be valid only in the 7Rth, and in other rounds (that is, 1R to 6R and 8R to 10R each round) All stochastic areas are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation D", since it is after 4R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), provisionally 4R to 6R out of When the ball is passed through each probability variable region in the second round, the probability variable regions (first probability variable region 65d1 to third probability variable region 65d3) that are opened in 4R to 6R are all set to invalid, so it was selected. In round 2, it is not possible to pass through the effective variable area.

Furthermore, if the probability variable area is passed in two rounds out of 4R to 6R, the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o becomes "2", and the probability variable area valid flag 203m is not turned on in subsequent rounds.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability D", the ball is passed through the fourth variable probability area 65d4 at the 7Rth time when the fourth probability variable area 65d4 is set to be valid. However, if the variable probability area is passed in 2 rounds of 4R to 6R, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o will be "2" at the start of the 7th round. Therefore, at the start of the 7R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the fourth probability variable region 65d4 opened at the 7R remains invalid, and in this state, the fourth probability variable region 65d4 is opened at the 7R. Even if it is allowed to pass through, it cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" because it does not pass through the effective probability variable region.

In other words, if you win the jackpot type "probability D", in the 3 rounds of 4R to 6R, if the number of rounds that passed through the probability area is "1 time" or less, at the start of the 7R Since the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o is "1" or less, the probability variable area valid flag 203m is turned on, the fourth probability variable area 65d4 is set to be valid, and the ball passes through the fourth probability variable area 65d4 at the 7Rth By doing so, it is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variation E", the 5th probability variation area 65d5 is set to be valid only in the 8R, and in other rounds (that is, 1R to 7R, 9R and 10R each round) All stochastic areas are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation E", since it is after 4R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), provisionally 4R to 7R out of When the ball is passed through each probability variable region in round 2, the probability variable regions (first probability variable region 65d1 to fourth probability variable region 65d4) opened in 4R to 7R are all set to invalid, so it was selected. In round 2, it is not possible to pass through the effective variable area.

Furthermore, when the probability variable area is passed in two rounds out of 4R to 7R, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o becomes "2", and the probability variable area valid flag 203m is not turned on in subsequent rounds.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "variable probability E", if it is originally, the fifth probability variable area 65d5 is set to be valid. However, if the variable probability area is passed in 2 rounds out of 4R to 7R, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o will be "2" at the start of the 8th round. Therefore, at the start of the 8R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the fifth probability variable region 65d5 opened at the 8R remains invalid, and in this state, the fifth probability variable region 65d5 is opened at the 8R. Even if it is allowed to pass through, it cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" because it does not pass through the effective probability variable region.

In other words, if you win the jackpot type "Probability E", in the 4 rounds of 4R to 7R, if the number of rounds that pass through each probability area is "1 time" or less, at the start of the 8R Since the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o in the 8R is less than or equal to "1", the probability variable area valid flag 203m is turned on, the fifth probability variable area 65d5 is set to be valid, and the ball is placed in the fifth probability variable area 65d5 at the 8Rth. By letting it pass, you can shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variation F", the 6th probability variation area 65d6 is set to be valid only in the 9R, and in other rounds (that is, each round of 1R to 8R and 10R), all The variable area is disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation F", it is after 4R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), so if 4R to 8R When the ball is passed through each probability variable region in round 2, the probability variable regions (first probability variable region 65d1 to fifth probability variable region 65d5) opened in 4R to 8R are all set to invalid, so it was selected. In round 2, it is not possible to pass through the effective variable area.

Furthermore, when the probability variable area is passed in two rounds out of 4R to 8R, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o becomes "2", and the probability variable area valid flag 203m is not turned on in subsequent rounds.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variation F" is won, the ball is passed through the sixth probability variation area 65d6 at the 9Rth time when the sixth probability variation area 65d6 is set to be valid. However, if the variable probability area is passed in 2 rounds out of 4R to 8R, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o will be "2" at the start of the 9th round. Therefore, at the start of the 9R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the sixth probability variable region 65d6, which is opened to the 9R, remains invalid. Even if it is allowed to pass through, it cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" because it does not pass through the effective probability variable region.

In other words, if you win the jackpot type "variable probability F", if the number of rounds that passed through the variable area in the 5 rounds of 4R to 8R is "1 time" or less, the probability change at the start of the 9R Since the value of the area passage count counter 203o is "1" or less, the probability variable area valid flag 203m is turned on, the sixth probability variable area 65d6 is set to be valid, and the ball is passed through the sixth probability variable area 65d6 in the 9Rth. By doing so, it is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Then, as shown in FIG. 90, in the second special symbol jackpot type "variable probability G", the first variable probability region 65d1 in the 2Rth, the second probability variable region 65d2 in the 3Rth is set to be effective respectively, In the other rounds (that is, rounds 1R and 4R to 10R), all variable regions are disabled.

In addition, the second special symbol jackpot type "Probability G", "Probability H", "Probability I", "Probability J", "Probability K", "Probability L", "Probability M", "Probability N", " If you win "Variable probability O", "Variable probability P", "Variable probability Q", "Variable probability R", "Variable probability S", "Variable probability T" or "Variable probability U", the value of the variable probability area passing number counter 203o is "3" In the above case, it is configured not to turn on the probability variable region valid flag 203m. That is, the jackpot type "probable variable G", "probable variable H", "probable variable I", "probable variable J", "probable variable K", "probable variable L", "probable variable M", "probable variable N", "probable variable O", " If you win "Variable P", "Variable Q", "Variable R", "Variable S", "Variable T" or "Variable U", the number of rounds in which the ball passes through any of the variable areas is "3 times". , all subsequent jackpot rounds are configured to be invalid.

However, as described above, when winning the jackpot type "probability variation G", since it is after 2R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), the first probability variation area 65d1 is valid At the start of the 2nd R and the 3rd R when the second variable probability region 65d2 becomes effective, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the variable probability region has not reached "three times". Therefore, in the jackpot type "variable probability G", the first variable probability region 65d1 opened in the 2nd round and the second variable probability region 65d2 opened in the 3rd round are not invalidated by the game result. It is configured.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "variable probability G" is won, the first variable probability region 65d1 opened in the 2nd round and the second variable probability region 65d2 opened in the 3rd round are not invalidated by the game result. , By passing the ball through either the first probability variable region 65d1 opened on the 2nd R or the second probability variable region 65d2 opened on the 3rd R, the ball is shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win is completed. be able to.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type “variable probability H”, the first variable probability region 65d1 in the 2Rth and the third probability variable region 65d3 in the 4Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R , 3R and each round from 5R to 10R), all the variable regions are disabled.

In addition, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation H" is elected, since it is after 2R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), the first probability variation area 65d1 is valid At the start of the 2nd R and the 4th R when the third probability variable region 65d3 becomes effective, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region has not reached "three times". Therefore, in the jackpot type "variable probability H", the first variable probability region 65d1 opened in the 2nd R and the third variable probability region 65d3 opened in the 4th R are not invalidated by the game result. It is configured.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "variable probability H" is won, the ball is passed through the first variable probability area 65d1 in the 2R, or the ball is passed through the third probability variable area 65d3 in the 4R. It is configured to transition to a "fluctuation state".

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type “variable probability I”, the first variable probability region 65d1 in the 2Rth and the fourth probability variable region 65d4 in the 5Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R , 3R, 4R, and 6R to 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation I", it is after 2R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), so if 2R to 4R 3 When the ball passes through each probability variable region in the round, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o at the start of the 5th round is "3", so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is turned on at the start of the 5th round. not, and the fourth probability variable region 65d4 opened at the 5R remains invalid.

However, in this case, since the first probability variable region 65d1 is passed in the 2R-th time when the first probability variable region 65d1 is set to be valid, it can be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Also, if the ball is not passed through the first probability variable region 65d1 in the 2nd round when the first probability variable region 65d1 is set to be valid, the ball is passed through each probability variable region in the 3rd and 4th rounds. When passed, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o at the start of the 5R is "2", and has not reached "3", so the 5R probability variable area is a special figure 2 probability variable area valid table 202h2 Enabled as configured. Therefore, also in this case, by passing the ball through the fourth probability variable region 65d4 of the 5Rth, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability variable I", the probability variable region 65d is set to be valid 2R is not set to be invalid due to the game result, and the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d in the 2R. If not, the 5Rth set to enable the variable probability region 65d is not set to be disabled depending on the game result.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variable I" is won, the ball is passed through the 2Rth where the first probability variable area 65d1 is set to be valid, or the ball is not passed through the 2Rth first probability variable area 65d1, By passing the ball through the 5Rth fourth probability variable region 65d4, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type “variable probability J”, the first variable probability region 65d1 in the 2Rth and the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in the 6Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R , 3R to 5R and 7R to 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "variable probability J", it is after 2R that any of the variable probability regions are released (see FIG. 88), so if the first probability variable region 65d1 The sphere is not passed through the first probability variable region 65d1 in the 2R set to be valid, and the ball is passed through each probability variable region in 3 rounds of 3R to 5R in which all probability variable regions are set to be invalid. At the start of the 6Rth, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o is "3", so the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 6R, and the 5th probability variable region is opened at the 6R. 65d5 remains invalid.

Therefore, in this case, the first probability variable region 65d1 is not passed in the 2Rth set to be valid, and the fifth probability variable region 65d5 opened to the 6Rth remains invalid. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in 6R, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variable J" is won, the ball is passed through the 2nd probability variable area 65d1 in which the first probability variable area 65d1 is set to be valid, or the first probability variable area 65d1 is set in the 2Rth. In the 3 rounds of 3R to 5R in which the ball is not passed through and all the probability variable areas are set to be invalid, the number of rounds passed through each probability variable area is "2 times" or less, and the fifth probability variable area 65d5 Either the ball passes through the fifth probability variable region 65d5 of the 6Rth set to be valid, or the transition to the "probability variable state" can be made after the big win is completed.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation K", the first probability variation area 65d1 in the 2Rth and the 6th probability variation area 65d6 in the 7Rth are set to be effective, respectively, Other rounds (i.e., 1R , 3R to 6R and 8R to 10R rounds), all variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation K" is won, it is after 2R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), so if the first probability variation area 65d1 Do not let the ball pass through the first probability variable region 65d1 in the 2nd R set to be valid, and pass the ball through each probability variable region in any 3 rounds of 3R to 6R in which all probability variable regions are set to be invalid , the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o is "3" at the start of the 7R, so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 7R, and is opened at the 7R. The sixth probability variable area 65d6 remains disabled.

Therefore, in this case, the first probability variable region 65d1 is not passed in the 2Rth set to be valid, and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 opened to the 7Rth remains invalid. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the sixth probability variable region 65d6 on the 7th R, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variation K" is won, the ball is passed through the 2Rth first probability variation region 65d1 in which the first probability variation region 65d1 is set to be valid, or the 2Rth is the first probability variation region In the 4 rounds from 3R to 6R in which the ball is not passed through 65d1 and all the probability variable areas are set to be invalid, the number of rounds passed through each probability variable area is "2 times" or less, and the 6th probability variable area Either by passing the ball through the 7R-th sixth probability variable region 65d6 in which 65d6 is effectively set, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type “variable probability L”, the second variable probability region 65d2 in the 3Rth and the third probability variable region 65d3 in the 4Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R , 2R and each round from 5R to 10R), all the variable regions are disabled.

In addition, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation L" is elected, since it is after 2R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), the second probability variation area 65d2 is valid At the start of the 3rd R and the 4th R when the third probability variable region 65d3 becomes effective, the number of rounds in which the ball has passed through the probability variable region has not reached "three times". Therefore, in the jackpot type "variable probability L", the second variable probability region 65d2 opened in the 3rd round and the third variable probability region 65d3 opened in the 4th round are not invalidated by the game result. It is configured.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variable L" is won, the ball is passed through the second probability variable area 65d2 in the 3R eye, or the ball is passed through the third probability variable area 65d3 in the 4R eye. It is configured to transition to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variable M", the second probability variable area 65d2 in the 3Rth and the fourth probability variable area 65d4 in the 5Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R , 2R, 4R and 6R to 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probable variable M", since it is after 2R that one of the probability variable areas is released (see FIG. 88), it is assumed that 3 of 2R to 4R When the ball passes through each probability variable region in the round, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o is "3" at the start of the 5th round, so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is turned on at the start of the 5th round. , and the 5R-th probability variable region 65d remains invalid.

However, in this case, since the second probability variable region 65d2 is passed in the 3Rth time when the second probability variable region 65d2 is set to be valid, it can be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Also, if the ball does not pass through the second probability variable region 65d2 in the 3rd round when the second probability variable region 65d2 is set to be valid, and all the probability variable regions are set to be invalid In the 2nd round and the 4th round When the ball is passed through the probability variable region, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 5R is "2", and has not reached "3", so the fourth probability variable region opened in the 5R 65d4 is set to be valid as set in the special figure 2 probability variable area valid table 202h2.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variable M" is won, the ball is passed through the second probability variable area 65d2 in the 3R eye, or the ball is not passed through the second probability variable area 65d2 in the 3R eye, and the 4th in the 5R eye. Either the ball is passed through the probability variable region 65d4 or the transition to the "probability variable state" can be made after the big win is completed.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation N", the second probability variation area 65d2 in the 3Rth and the 5th probability variation area 65d5 in the 6Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R , 2R, 4R, 5R, and 7R to 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation N", it is after 2R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), so if the second probability variation area 65d2 The ball is not passed through the second probability variable area 65d2 in the 3rd round set to be valid, and the ball is passed through each probability variable area in three rounds of 2R, 4R and 5R in which all the probability variable areas are set to be invalid. In this case, since the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 6R is "3", the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 6R, and the fifth opened to the 6R The probability variable area 65d5 remains invalid.

Therefore, in this case, the second probability varying region 65d2 is not passed in the 3Rth where the second probability varying region 65d2 is set to be valid, and the fifth probability varying region 65d5 opened in the 6Rth remains invalid. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the fifth probability variable region 65d5 on the 6th R, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variation N" is won, the ball is passed through the second probability variation area 65d2 in the 3Rth, or the ball is not passed through the second probability variation area 65d2 in the 3Rth, and all the probability variation areas In the 3 rounds of 2R, 4R and 5R in which is set to be invalid, the number of rounds passed through the probability variable region is "2 times" or less, and the ball is passed through the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in the 6th round, or By either, it is possible to shift to "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "probability variation O", the second probability variation area 65d2 in the 3Rth and the 6th probability variation area 65d6 in the 7Rth are set to be effective, respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R , 2R, 4R to 6R, and 8R to 10R), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, when the jackpot type "probability variation O" is won, it is after 2R that one of the probability variation areas is opened (see FIG. 88), so if the second probability variation area 65d2 is Do not let the ball pass through the second probability variable region 65d2 in the 3rd round set to be valid, and pass the ball through each probability variable region in 3 rounds of 2R and 4R to 6R in which all probability variable regions are set to be invalid In this case, since the value of the variable probability region passing number counter 203o at the start of the 7th R is "3", the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 7th R, and is opened at the 7th R. The sixth probability variable area 65d6 remains disabled.

Therefore, in this case, the second probability variable region 65d2 is not passed in the 3Rth set to be valid, and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 opened in the 7Rth remains invalid. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the sixth variable probability area 65d6 on the 7th R, it does not pass through the effective variable probability area and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "probability variation O" is won, the ball is passed through the second probability variation area 65d2 in the 3R eye, or the ball is not passed through the second probability variation area 65d2 in the 3R eye, and all the probability variation areas is set to invalid, in the 4 rounds of 2R, 4R to 6R, the number of rounds passed through the probability variable region is "2 times" or less, and the ball is passed through the sixth probability variable region 65d6 at the 7th R, By either, it is possible to shift to "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "variable probability P", the third variable probability region 65d3 in the 4Rth and the fourth probability variable region 65d4 in the 5Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R 3R and 6R to 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "Probability P", it is after 2R that one of the probability variation areas is released (see FIG. 88). When the ball passes through each probability variable region in the round, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o is "3" at the start of the 5th round, so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is turned on at the start of the 5th round. not, and the fourth probability variable region 65d4 opened at the 5R remains invalid.

However, in this case, since the third probability variable region 65d3 is passed at the 4Rth position where the third probability variable region 65d3 is set to be valid, it can be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Also, if all the probability variable regions are set to be invalid in the 2Rth and 3Rth two rounds, the ball is passed through the probability variable regions, and in the 4Rth in which the third probability variable region 65d3 is set to be valid, the third probability variable region When the ball is not passed through 65d3, the value of the probability variable area passing number counter 203o at the start of the 5R is "2", and since it has not reached "3", the fourth probability variable area opened in the 5R 65d4 is set to be valid as set in the special figure 2 probability variable area valid table 202h2.

Therefore, also in this case, by passing the ball through the fourth probability variable region 65d4 opened on the 5th R, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "variable probability P" is won, the ball is passed through the third probability variable region 65d3 in the 4Rth, or the ball is not passed through the third probability variable region 65d3 in the 4Rth, and the fourth in the 5Rth. By passing the ball through the probability variable region 65d4, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "variable probability Q", the third probability variable region 65d3 in the 4Rth and the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in the 6Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R ~ 3R, 5R and 7R ~ 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "variable probability Q", it is after 2R that any of the variable probability areas are released (see FIG. 88), so if the third probability variable area 65d3 is The ball was not passed through the third probability variable area 65d3 in the 4th round set to be valid, and the ball was allowed to pass through each probability variable area in three rounds of 2R, 3R and 5R in which all the probability variable areas were set to be invalid. In this case, since the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 6R is "3", the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 6R, and the fifth opened to the 6R The probability variable area 65d5 remains invalid.

Therefore, in this case, the third probability varying region 65d3 is not passed in the 4Rth set to be valid, and the fifth probability varying region 65d5 opened to the 6Rth remains invalid. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the third probability variable region 65d3 on the 6th R, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region, and it cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when the jackpot type "variable probability Q" is won, the ball is passed through the third probability variable region 65d3 in the 4Rth, or the ball is not passed through the third probability variable region 65d3 in the 4Rth, and all the probability variable regions In the 3 rounds of 2R, 3R and 5R set to be invalid, the number of rounds passed through the probability variable region is "2 times" or less, and the ball is passed through the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in the 6th round, or By either, it is possible to shift to "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type “variable probability R”, the third probability variable region 65d3 in the 4th R and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 in the 7th R are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R ~ 3R, 5R, 6R and 8R ~ 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probability variable R", it is after 2R that one of the probability variable regions is released (see FIG. 88), so if the third probability variable region 65d3 is The ball does not pass through the third probability variable region 65d3 in the 4th round set to be valid, and the ball is passed through each probability variable region in three rounds of 2R, 3R, 5R and 6R in which all probability variable regions are set to be invalid. , the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 7R is "3", so the probability variable region effective flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 7R, and is opened at the 7R The sixth probability variable region 65d6 remains invalid.

Therefore, in this case, the 3rd probability variable region 65d3 is not allowed to pass through the 4Rth set to be effective, and the 6th probability variable region 65d6 opened to the 7Rth remains invalid. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the sixth probability variable region 65d6 on the 7th R, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, when winning the jackpot type "probability variable R", the ball is passed through the third probability variable area 65d3 in the 4R eye, or the ball is not passed through the third probability variable area 65d3 in the 4R eye, and all the probability variable areas In 4 rounds of 2R, 3R, 5R and 6R in which is set to invalid, the number of rounds passed through the probability variable area is "2 times" or less, and in the 7th round the ball is passed through the sixth probability variable area 65d6. Either or, it is possible to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type “variable probability S”, the fourth probability variable region 65d4 in the 5Rth and the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in the 6Rth are set to be effective, respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R 4R and 7R to 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation S", it is after 2R that any probability variation area is released (see FIG. 88), so if all probability variation areas are invalid When the ball passes through each probability variable region in the 3 rounds of 2R to 4R set to , the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o at the start of the 5R and 6R is "3". At the start of the 5R and 6R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the fourth probability variable region 65d4 opened at the 5R and the fifth probability variable region 65d5 opened at the 6R remain invalid.

Therefore, in this case, since the fourth probability variable region 65d4 opened to the 5R and the fifth probability variable region 65d5 to be opened to the 6R remain invalid, the fourth probability variable region 65d4 to the 5R, the 6R Even if the balls pass through the fifth probability variable region 65d5, they do not pass through the effective probability variable region, and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win.

Therefore, if you win the jackpot type "probable variable S", in the 3 rounds of 2R to 4R in which all the probability variable areas are set to be invalid, the number of rounds that pass through the probability variable area is "2 times" or less, By passing the ball through the fourth probability variable region 65d4 at the 5th round or passing the ball through the fifth probability variable region 65d5 at the 6th round, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type "variable probability T", the fourth probability variable region 65d4 in the 5Rth and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 in the 7Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R 4R, 6R and 8R to 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "probability variable T", it is after 2R that one of the probability variable regions 65d is opened (see FIG. 88), so if all probability variable regions are When the ball passes through each probability variable region in the 3 rounds of 2R to 4R that are set to be disabled, the value of the probability variable region passage count counter 203o at the start of the 5th and 7th rounds is "3". , At the start of the 5R and 7R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the fourth probability variable region 65d4 opened at the 5R and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 opened at the 7R remain invalid.

Therefore, in this case, even if the ball passes through the fourth probability variable region 65d4 in the 5th R and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 in the 7th R, neither of them passes through the effective probability variable region, and after the big hit ends " It cannot be shifted to "probability fluctuation state".

Also, if all the probability variable regions are set to be invalid in two rounds of 2R to 4R, the ball is passed through each probability variable region, and the fourth probability variable region 65d4 is set to be valid. If the ball does not pass through the region 65d4 and the ball passes through the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in the 6th round when all the probability variable regions are set to be invalid, the probability variable region passage count counter 203o at the start of the 7th round Since the value is "3", the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on at the start of the 7R, and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 opened at the 7R remains disabled.

Therefore, in this case, the 4th probability variable region 65d4 is not passed in the 5Rth set to be valid, and the 6th probability variable region 65d6 opened to the 7Rth remains invalid. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the sixth variable probability area 65d6 on the 7th R, it does not pass through the effective variable probability area and cannot be shifted to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

Therefore, if you win the jackpot type "Variable T", in the 3 rounds of 2R to 4R in which all the variable regions are set to be invalid, the number of rounds that pass through the variable regions is "2 times" or less. In the 4 rounds of 2R to 4R and 6R in which the ball is passed through the fourth probability variable region 65d4 in the 5R, or the ball is not passed through the fourth probability variable region 65d4 in the 5R, and all the probability variable regions are set to be invalid. , In the state where the number of rounds passed through the probability variable region is ``2 times'' or less, the ball is passed through the sixth probability variable region 65d6 at the 7th R, or the transition to the "probability variable state" after the big win is completed. be able to.

Next, in the second special symbol jackpot type “variable probability U”, the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in the 6Rth and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 in the 7Rth are set to be effective respectively, and other rounds (i.e., 1R 5R and 8R to 10R rounds), all the variable regions are disabled.

Here, as described above, if you win the jackpot type "Probability U", it is after 2R that one of the probability variation areas is released (see FIG. 88), so if all probability variation areas are invalid When the ball passes through each probability variable area in 3 rounds out of 2R to 5R set to , the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o at the start of the 6th and 7th rounds is "3" Therefore, at the start of the 6R and 7R, the probability variable region valid flag 203m is not turned on, and the fifth probability variable region 65d5 opened in the 6R and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 opened in the 7R remain invalid. becomes.

Therefore, in this case, even if the ball passes through the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in the 6th R and the sixth probability variable region 65d6 in the 7th R, it does not pass through the effective probability variable region, and after the jackpot ends " It cannot be shifted to "probability fluctuation state".

Therefore, if you win the jackpot type "Variable U", in the 4 rounds of 2R to 5R in which all the variable regions are set to be invalid, the number of rounds that pass through the variable regions is "2 times" or less. By passing the ball through the fifth probability variable region 65d5 in the 6th round or passing the ball through the sixth probability variable region 65d6 in the 7th round, it is possible to shift to the "probability variable state" after the big win.

In the description of FIGS. 89 and 90, the pattern that can pass through the effective probability variable region for each jackpot type has been described. Since it is difficult to identify whether the player has won the , the player guesses which jackpot round probability variable area is set effectively and throws the ball in one of the probability variable areas. It is configured to allow the player to pass through and confirm the game result on the third symbol display device 81 .

Here, referring to FIGS. 91 to 93, in the second embodiment, the opening and closing mode of the variable winning device 65 when winning the jackpot types "variable probability A", "variable probability B" and "variable probability C", the first variable probability Area effective flag 203u ~ sixth probability variable area effective flag 203z setting mode, first probability variable area switch 65g1 ~ ball detection mode in sixth probability variable area switch 65g6, and first probability variable area switch 65g1 ~ sixth probability variable area switch 65g6 The setting mode of the variable probability shift flag 203k (see FIG. 87) based on the detection of the ball to the right will be described.

FIG. 91 shows the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid 65b and the first probability varying area solenoid 65f1 to the sixth probability varying area solenoid 65f6 in each round when the jackpot type "variable probability A" is won in the second embodiment, and the large winning opening switch 65c and the detection timing of the ball in the first probability variable area switch 65g1 to the sixth probability variable area switch 65g6, the addition timing of the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o, the period during which the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is closed (hereinafter, "interval ”), the first to sixth probability variable region effective flag 203u~6th probability variable region effective flag 203z and the timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the setting timing of the probability variable transition flag 203k.

In addition, FIG. 92 shows the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid 65b and the first probability variable area solenoid 65f1 to the sixth probability variable area solenoid 65f6 in each round when the jackpot type "variable probability B" is won in the second embodiment, the big prize Ball detection timing in mouth switch 65c and first probability variable area switch 65g1 to sixth probability variable area switch 65g6, addition timing of value of probability variable area passage number counter 203o, period during which big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is closed (hereinafter, (referred to as "interval"), the first to sixth probability variable region effective flags 203u ~ 6th probability variable region effective flag 203z and the timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the setting timing of the probability variable transition flag 203k.

Furthermore, FIG. 93 shows the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid 65b and the first probability variable area solenoid 65f1 to the sixth probability variable area solenoid 65f6 in each round when the jackpot type "variable probability C" is won in the second embodiment, the big prize Ball detection timing in mouth switch 65c and first probability variable area switch 65g1 to sixth probability variable area switch 65g6, addition timing of value of probability variable area passage number counter 203o, period during which big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is closed (hereinafter, (referred to as "interval"), the first to sixth probability variable region effective flags 203u ~ 6th probability variable region effective flag 203z and the timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the setting timing of the probability variable transition flag 203k.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the jackpot type "probability variation A" of the second embodiment, a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned on, and the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened. Then, in each round, when a predetermined condition (in the second embodiment, either event of "30 seconds" at maximum from the opening, or detection of 10 balls by the big winning opening switch 65c) is established. Then, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned off, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is closed, and one round ends. Then, opening and closing operations are repeated in 10 rounds in one jackpot game, and one jackpot game ends. In addition, the probability variable area passage count counter 203o is cleared to "0" at the timing of winning the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", the probability variation set for each round in a certain period of each round of 4R to 9R (in the second embodiment, 10 seconds from the opening of the big winning opening opening and closing plate 65a of each round) The region solenoids (first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 to sixth probability variable region solenoid 65f6) are turned on.

Specifically, the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 is turned on at the 4Rth, and the ball can be detected by the first probability variable region switch 65g1 provided downstream of the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 4th R is detected by the first variable probability area switch 65g1, 1 is added to the value of the variable probability area passage number counter 203o (the first detection of each round added only when

Similarly, the second probability variable region solenoid 65f2 ~ sixth probability variable region solenoid 65f6 is turned on respectively in the 5R ~ 9R, probability variable region switch provided downstream of each probability variable region solenoid (second probability variable region switch 65g2 ~ A ball can be detected by the sixth probability variable area switch 65g6). Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 5Rth to 9Rth is detected by the second probability variable area switch 65g2 to the sixth probability variable area switch 65g6, 1 is added to the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o. (Added only at the first detection in each round).

Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the period during which each probability variable area solenoid (first probability variable area solenoid 65f1 to sixth probability variable area solenoid 65f6) is turned on is from the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a in each round Since it is 10 seconds, even if the player does not want the ball to enter the probability variable area of the round, the ball will not be shot for 10 seconds when the probability variable area of the round is open. By restarting the right-handed game after the probability variable area is closed, the prize balls of the round can be acquired.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the processing of whether to turn on the probability variable area effective flag (first probability variable area effective flag 203u to sixth probability variable area effective flag 203z) of the round at the start of each round (See FIGS. 89 and 90). In the example of FIG. 91, since the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the first probability variation area valid flag 203u can be turned on in the 4Rth.

In this case, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o at the start of the 4th round is "0" and has not reached "2", so the first probability variable area valid flag 203u is turned on. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 4R eye is detected by the first probability variable region switch 65g1 while the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 is turned on, that is, the first probability variable region effective flag 203u is turned on, when the ball is detected by the first variable probability area switch 65g1, the variable probability transition flag 203k (see FIG. 87) is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a variable probability shift flag 203k is set to ON at the end of the jackpot of the jackpot type ``variable probability A'', so that a high probability state of special symbols is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92, in the jackpot type "probability variable B", a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65b is turned on and the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a is opened. be done. Then, in each round, when a predetermined condition (in the second embodiment, either event of "30 seconds" at maximum from the opening, or detection of 10 balls by the big winning opening switch 65c) is established. Then, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned off, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is closed, and one round ends. Then, opening and closing operations are repeated in 10 rounds in one jackpot game, and one jackpot game ends. In addition, the probability variable area passage count counter 203o is cleared to "0" at the timing of winning the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "probability variation B", the probability variation set for each round in a certain period of each round of 4R to 9R (in the second embodiment, 10 seconds from the opening of the big winning opening opening and closing plate 65a of each round) The region solenoids (first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 to sixth probability variable region solenoid 65f6) are turned on.

Specifically, the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 is turned on at the 4Rth, and the ball can be detected by the first probability variable region switch 65g1 provided downstream of the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 4th R is detected by the first variable probability area switch 65g1, 1 is added to the value of the variable probability area passage number counter 203o (the first detection of each round added only when

Similarly, the second probability variable region solenoid 65f2 ~ sixth probability variable region solenoid 65f6 is turned on respectively in the 5R ~ 9R, probability variable region switch provided downstream of each probability variable region solenoid (second probability variable region switch 65g2 ~ A ball can be detected by the sixth probability variable area switch 65g6). Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 5Rth to 9Rth is detected by the second probability variable area switch 65g2 to the sixth probability variable area switch 65g6, 1 is added to the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o. (Added only at the first detection in each round).

Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the period during which each probability variable area solenoid (first probability variable area solenoid 65f1 to sixth probability variable area solenoid 65f6) is turned on is from the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a in each round Since it is 10 seconds, even if the player does not want the ball to enter the probability variable area of the round, the ball will not be shot for 10 seconds when the probability variable area of the round is open. By restarting the right-handed game after the probability variable area is closed, the prize balls of the round can be acquired.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the processing of whether to turn on the probability variable area effective flag (first probability variable area effective flag 203u to sixth probability variable area effective flag 203z) of the round at the start of each round (See FIGS. 89 and 90). In the example of FIG. 92, since the jackpot type "probability variation B" is won, the second probability variation area valid flag 203v can be turned on in the 5R.

Therefore, in the 4Rth, all probability variable area effective flags remain turned off. When the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in this state is detected by the first probability variable region switch 65g1 while the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 is turned on, that is, the first probability variable region effective flag 203u is turned off. When the ball is detected by the first variable probability area switch 65g1 in the state of being set, the variable probability transition flag 203k (see FIG. 87) is not turned on, and 1 is added to the value of the variable probability area passage count counter 203o, resulting in "1". becomes.

Then, at the start of the 5th round, the value of the probability variable region passage number counter 203o is "1" and has not reached "2", so the second probability variable region valid flag 203v is turned on. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 5R is detected by the second probability variable region switch 65g2 while the second probability variable region solenoid 65f2 is turned on, that is, the second probability variable region effective flag 203v is turned on, the variable probability transition flag 203k (see FIG. 87) is turned on when the ball is detected by the second variable probability region switch 65g2. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a variable probability transition flag 203k is set to ON at the end of the jackpot of the jackpot type ``variable probability B'', so that a high probability state of special symbols is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93, in the jackpot type "probability variable C", a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65b is turned on and the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a is opened. be done. Then, in each round, when a predetermined condition (in the second embodiment, either event of "30 seconds" at maximum from the opening, or detection of 10 balls by the big winning opening switch 65c) is established. Then, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned off, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is closed, and one round ends. Then, opening and closing operations are repeated in 10 rounds in one jackpot game, and one jackpot game ends. In addition, the probability variable area passage count counter 203o is cleared to "0" at the timing of winning the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "probability variation C", the probability variation set for each round in a certain period of each round of 4R to 9R (in the second embodiment, 10 seconds from the opening of the big winning opening opening and closing plate 65a of each round) The region solenoids (first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 to sixth probability variable region solenoid 65f6) are turned on.

Specifically, the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 is turned on at the 4Rth, and the ball can be detected by the first probability variable region switch 65g1 provided downstream of the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 4th R is detected by the first variable probability area switch 65g1, 1 is added to the value of the variable probability area passage number counter 203o (the first detection of each round added only when

Similarly, the second probability variable region solenoid 65f2 ~ sixth probability variable region solenoid 65f6 is turned on respectively in the 5R ~ 9R, probability variable region switch provided downstream of each probability variable region solenoid (second probability variable region switch 65g2 ~ A ball can be detected by the sixth probability variable area switch 65g6). Then, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 5Rth to 9Rth is detected by the second probability variable area switch 65g2 to the sixth probability variable area switch 65g6, 1 is added to the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o. (Added only at the first detection in each round).

Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the period during which each probability variable area solenoid (first probability variable area solenoid 65f1 to sixth probability variable area solenoid 65f6) is turned on is from the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a in each round Since it is 10 seconds, even if the player does not want the ball to enter the probability variable area of the round, the ball will not be shot for 10 seconds when the probability variable area of the round is open. By restarting the right-handed game after the probability variable area is closed, the prize balls of the round can be acquired.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the processing of whether to turn on the probability variable area effective flag (first probability variable area effective flag 203u to sixth probability variable area effective flag 203z) of the round at the start of each round (See FIGS. 89 and 90). In the example of FIG. 93, since the jackpot type "probability variation C" is won, the third probability variation area valid flag 203w can be turned on in the 6R.

Therefore, in the 4Rth, all probability variable area effective flags remain turned off. When the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in this state is detected by the first probability variable region switch 65g1 while the first probability variable region solenoid 65f1 is turned on, that is, the first probability variable region effective flag 203u is turned off. When the ball is detected by the first variable probability area switch 65g1 in the state of being set, the variable probability transition flag 203k (see FIG. 87) is not turned on, and 1 is added to the value of the variable probability area passage count counter 203o, resulting in "1". becomes.

Furthermore, all probability variable area valid flags remain off even in the 5Rth. If the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in this state is detected by the second probability variable region switch 65g2 while the second probability variable region solenoid 65f2 is turned on, that is, the second probability variable region effective flag 203v is turned off. When the ball is detected by the second probability variable area switch 65g2 in the state of being set, the probability variable transition flag 203k (see FIG. 87) is not turned on, and the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o is incremented by 1, resulting in "2". becomes.

At the start of the 6th round, the value of the probability variable area passage count counter 203o has reached "2", so the probability variable area effective flag 203m is not turned on and remains off. Also, when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 in the 6R is detected by the third probability variable region switch 65g3 while the third probability variable region solenoid 65f3 is turned on, that is, the third probability variable region effective flag 203w is turned off and the ball is detected by the third variable probability area switch 65g3, the variable probability transition flag 203k (see FIG. 87) is not turned on.

After that, the probability variation transition flag 203k remains off, and the jackpot ends, so it does not transition to the "probability fluctuation state", but transitions to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state".

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. FIG. The difference between each control process in the second embodiment and each control process in the first embodiment is mainly that the probability variable area (first probability variable area 65d1 to sixth probability variable area 65d6) that is opened for each jackpot round And the validly set probability variable regions (first probability variable region 65d1 to sixth probability variable region 65d6) are different.

First, with reference to FIG. 94, the probability variable area control process (S6054), which is one process of the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the variable probability area control process (S6054) of the second embodiment. The difference between the probability variable region control processing (S6054) of the second embodiment and the probability variable region control processing (S6054) of the first embodiment is mainly that the probability variable region that is effectively set for each jackpot round is different. is.

In the probability changing region control processing (S6054) of the second embodiment, in the processing of S6103, the value of the probability changing region passage number counter 203o is a value smaller than "2" (S6103: Yes), or in the processing of S6104, the probability changing If the value of the area passing number counter 203o is less than "3" (S6104: Yes), the probability variable area valid flag (any of the first probability variable area valid flag 203u to the sixth probability variable area valid flag 203z) of the round Set to ON (S6151), terminate this probability variable region control process (S6054), and return to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 38).

More specifically, when winning the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, if the round is the 4th round, the 1st probability variable area valid flag 203u is set, and if the round is the 5th round, the 2nd The probability variable area effective flag 203v, the third probability variable area effective flag 203w if the round is the sixth round, the fourth probability variable area effective flag 203x if the round is the seventh round, the eighth round If so, the fifth probability variable region validity flag 203y is set to ON, and if the relevant round is the ninth round, the sixth probability variable region validity flag 203z is set to ON.

Also, when winning a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, if the round is the second round, the first probability variable area valid flag 203u is set, and if the round is the third round, the second probability variable area is valid. If the round is the 4th round, the flag 203v, the 3rd probability variable region effective flag 203w, the 4th probability variable region effective flag 203x if the round is the 5th round, and the 4th probability variable region effective flag 203x if the round is the 6th round. The 5th probability variable region valid flag 203y is set to ON, and if the round is the 7th round, the 6th probability variable region validity flag 203z is set to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the process (S6007) during the opening of the big winning opening, which is one process of the big win opening/closing control process (S612) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. do. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the process (S6007) during the opening of the big winning opening of the second embodiment. The main difference between the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the second embodiment (S6007) and the processing during opening of the large winning opening of the first embodiment (S6007) is that it is set to be effective for each jackpot round. The difference is the variable area.

In the second embodiment of the large winning opening open processing (S6007), when the processing of S6210 is finished, then any of the probability variable region effective flags (first probability variable region effective flag 203u to sixth probability variable region effective flag 203z ) is turned off (S6251), and the process proceeds to S6212.

Also, when the processing of S6219 is finished, then the probability variable region valid flag (any of the first probability variable region valid flag 203u to the sixth probability variable region valid flag 203z) of the round is set to OFF (S6252), and the processing is S6221 transition to

More specifically, when winning the jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, if the round is the 4th round, the 1st probability variable area valid flag 203u is set, and if the round is the 5th round, the 2nd The probability variable area effective flag 203v, the third probability variable area effective flag 203w if the round is the sixth round, the fourth probability variable area effective flag 203x if the round is the seventh round, the eighth round If there is, the fifth probability variable region valid flag 203y is set to off, and if the round is the ninth round, the sixth probability variable region valid flag 203z is set to off.

Also, when winning a jackpot based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, if the round is the second round, the first probability variable area valid flag 203u is set, and if the round is the third round, the second probability variable area is valid. If the round is the 4th round, the flag 203v, the 3rd probability variable region effective flag 203w, the 4th probability variable region effective flag 203x if the round is the 5th round, and the 4th probability variable region effective flag 203x if the round is the 6th round. The 5th probability variable region valid flag 203y is set to OFF, and if the round is the 7th round, the 6th probability variable region validity flag 203z is set to OFF.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured such that the variable probability area opened and the variable probability area effectively set for each round are different depending on the winning jackpot type. By configuring in this way, the probability variable area that is opened for each jackpot round is different, and each jackpot round and the probability variable area that is opened in the corresponding jackpot round can be in a one-to-one relationship, The configuration can be easily understood by the player.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effects as the first embodiment due to the same configuration.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are only examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described embodiment, the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view as the winning openings in which the ball fired in the right-handed game can win. On the other hand, in a game state in which a right-handed game is played by arranging a general prize-winning port 63 on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 as viewed from the front as a prize-winning port into which a ball fired in a right-handed game can be won. It is constructed so that a certain amount of balls (for example, 10 balls out of 100) can be won in the general winning hole 63, and prize balls are given to the player other than the second starting hole 71 or the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game. It is configured so that it can be paid out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while suppressing the consumption of the player's own balls during a right-handed game.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, when passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game and shifting to the "probability variable state", the "probability variable state" is maintained until the next big win. there is On the other hand, it is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" ends depending on the number of times dynamic display of special symbols is executed (so-called ST type), or a predetermined lottery result other than a big hit is derived in dynamic display of special symbols. A pachinko machine (so-called falling type) may be used in which the "probability fluctuation state" ends (so-called falling function) when the game is played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, by passing through the effective probability variable area during the jackpot game, the "probability variable function" is provided after the jackpot ends, and a high probability state of the special symbol is generated. On the other hand, it may be configured to provide a so-called probability limiter function in which a jackpot type that does not generate a "variable probability function" is selected for each given number of times of a predetermined "variable probability function". Also, it may be configured to provide a so-called time-saving limiter function in which a jackpot type that does not generate a high-probability state of normal symbols is selected for each predetermined number of jackpots. Furthermore, when the variable probability limiter function is provided, it may be configured to provide a plurality of variable probability limit times, and when the time saving limiter function is provided, it may be configured to provide a plurality of time saving limit times. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described embodiment, the normal electronic part 72 and the variable winning device 65 are configured to be opened based on the winning of the normal symbol or the special symbol. On the other hand, a pachinko machine equipped with a passage opening for opening a movable accessory (so-called non-motorized accessory) blocking other winning openings when a ball passes through the pachinko machine may be used.

<Modification 5>
In the above-described embodiment, when the effective probability variable region is not passed during the jackpot game, a game state in which the "time saving function" is provided after the jackpot ends is generated. On the other hand, when a predetermined pattern (for example, a time-saving pattern) other than a jackpot (small hit) is derived in the dynamic display of special patterns, the transition to a state in which the "time-saving function" is given without going through the jackpot It may be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation to which the "time-saving function" is given and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without winning the jackpot. It is configured such that when the game is played, a "time-saving function" is given without going through the jackpot (so-called ceiling function). On the other hand, the predetermined number of times may be counted separately for the number of cumulative executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of cumulative executions of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Also, the predetermined number of times may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification 7>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). On the other hand, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel (so-called special figure 12 simultaneous fluctuation), and each dynamic display is controlled. Alternatively, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the second special symbol (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation), and each dynamic display is controlled. Alternatively, dynamic display may be performed in order of winning (so-called winning order variation), and each dynamic display may be controlled.

<Modification 8>
In the above-described embodiment, as the end condition of the "time saving function", it is configured to end based on a predetermined number of times of dynamic display of special symbols or winning a jackpot. On the other hand, the "time saving function" may be terminated based on the winning of the small winning game or the derivation of the time saving end pattern different from the big winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the end condition of the prize assisting state, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game. Also, when the "time saving function" is effective, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is a predetermined number (for example, a reserved full tank (i.e., 4 pieces), or a fixed number of reserved balls for a reserved full tank (for example, 2 pieces) ) It may be configured to end the “time saving function” when it is stored, or to end the “time saving function” when the number of times the normal electric role reaches a certain number of times You may

<Modification 9>
In the above-described embodiment, it is constructed so that the winning is 70/100 in the low-probability state of the normal symbol, and the normal electric combination 72 can be moved. On the other hand, it may be constructed so that winning is not won in the low-probability state of normal symbols, but winning is only in the high-probability state of normal symbols (for example, 100% winning). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 71 due to the movement of the normal electric combination 72 in the low probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to reliably realize the playability according to the game specifications.

<Modification 10>
In the above embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is opened in the jackpot game. On the other hand, a plurality of winning openings that can be opened in the big winning game may be provided, and the plurality of winning openings may be opened according to the type of big winning or the type of small winning.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, one type of variable display time of normal symbols is provided according to the game state. On the other hand, the variable display time of normal symbols may be selected by lottery from among a plurality of types of variable display times according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the variable display time of normal symbols is determined by lottery from "1 second", "3 seconds", "5 seconds", "10 seconds" or "30 seconds". do. By configuring in this way, in the "normal game state" in which the right-handed game is not encouraged, the right-handed game is played and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to perform variable display of the normal symbol, and according to the derivation timing. Even if the ball is shot toward the ordinary electric terminal 72 that can be opened by pressing, the opening timing of the second starting port 71 becomes plural, so that the winning of the second starting port 71 can be suppressed.

<Modification 12>
In the above embodiment, the winning combination is selected from the jackpot or loss in the lottery for the first special symbol, and the winning combination is selected from the jackpot or loss in the lottery for the second special symbol. . On the other hand, a small win may be provided only in the lottery of the first special symbol, and a winning combination may be selected from among the big win, the small win or the loss, or only in the lottery of the second special symbol. may be provided, and a winning combination may be selected from a big hit, a small win, or a loss, or a winning combination may be selected from a big win or a loss without providing a small win in any special pattern lottery. Alternatively, a small win may be provided in any special symbol lottery, and a winning combination may be selected from among a big win, a small win, or a loss.

<Modification 13>
In the above embodiment, the game state is changed according to the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed (for example, from "general figure high probability time reduction state" to "normal game state") It is configured as follows. On the other hand, it is possible to change the game state according to the number of executions of a predetermined effect other than the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, "ready-to-win display" or a specific effect based on winning a specific role). may be configured.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, the number of reserved balls is counted for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time and reach probability of each special symbol are changed for each number of reserved balls. On the other hand, it may be configured to change the variation time and the reach probability of each special symbol according to the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the probability variable region 65d is effectively set in any one of the 10 jackpot rounds, and the second special symbol is dynamically displayed. When a big win is won in the display, the variable probability area 65d is set to be effective in any two of the 10 big win rounds. On the other hand, the number of rounds in which the variable probability region 65d is effectively set may be configured to differ depending on the jackpot type won. For example, if the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the probability variation area 65d is set to be effective in any one of the 10 jackpot rounds, and the first special symbol is If the jackpot type "probability variation B" is won in the dynamic display, the probability variation area 65d is set to be valid in any two jackpot rounds out of the 10 jackpot rounds, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the jackpot type " In the case of winning "variable probability C", the variable probability area 65d may be set to be valid in any 3 of the 10 jackpot rounds, or the maximum round set according to the jackpot type. As long as it is equal to or less than the number, the number of rounds in which the probability variable region 65d is effectively set may be any number. By configuring in this way, the number of rounds in which the variable probability area 65d is effectively set varies depending on the jackpot type won, and the variation of the effective pattern of the variable probability area 65d is enriched, thereby improving the amusement of the game. .

<Modification 16>
In the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is "2" or more, the probability variable area effective flag 203m is set not to be turned on. When a big hit is won in the dynamic display of 2 special symbols, when the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is "3" or more, the probability variable area effective flag 203m is configured not to be turned on. On the other hand, depending on the winning jackpot type, the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o that does not turn on the probability variable area effective flag 203m may be configured to be different. For example, when winning the jackpot type "probability variable A", if the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is "1" or more, the probability variable area valid flag 203m is set not to be turned on, and the jackpot type "variable probability B" is won. If the value of the probability variable area passage number counter 203o is "2" or more, it is set so that the probability variable area effective flag 203m is not turned on, and when the jackpot type "probability variation C" is won, the probability variable area passage number counter 203o If the value is "3" or more, it may be configured not to turn on the probability variable region valid flag 203m. By configuring in this way, the number of rounds in which the ball is allowed to pass through the variable probability area 65d during the jackpot game differs depending on the jackpot type won, and the probability of shifting to the "probability variable state" differs for each jackpot type. It is possible to enrich the variation of the jackpot type and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 17>
In the above embodiment, the maximum number of rounds for all jackpot types is set to 10 rounds. On the other hand, the maximum number of rounds may be different for each jackpot type. For example, when winning the jackpot type “variable A”, the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, and when winning the jackpot type “variable B”, the maximum number of rounds is 7 rounds, and the jackpot type “variable C”. , the maximum number of rounds may be a jackpot of 10 rounds. By configuring in this way, together with the settings of the probability variable area open table 202g and the probability variable area effective table 202h, the maximum number of rounds for each jackpot type, the number of rounds in which the probability variable area 65d is opened, and the probability variable area 65d are valid. The ratio of each of the number of rounds set to and is different, and the probability of shifting to the ``probability fluctuation state'' for each jackpot type can be configured to be different, and the variation of the jackpot type is rich and the interest of the game is increased. can be improved.

<Modification 18>
In the above embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is the same for all the jackpot types. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a may be different for each big win type. For example, in one jackpot round, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a may be configured to perform opening/closing operations a plurality of times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of rounds currently being executed, and it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 19>
In the above-described embodiment, in the case of a jackpot round in which the variable probability area 65d is opened, the variable probability area 65d is opened at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65a for the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot round in which the variable probability area 65d is opened, the variable probability area 65d may be opened when the winning number of balls to the variable winning device 65 reaches a certain value.

<Modification 20>
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the "probability fluctuation state" can occur by using the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, a variable winning device for a small winning is provided so that a small winning can be won in the first special pattern and the second special pattern in addition to the big winning, and is opened based on the winning of the small winning game. Then, a pachinko machine (so-called 1 type 2 types mixed Machine) is used, and it is configured to vary whether or not the "time saving function" is given according to the number of times the "time saving function" is given. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game to which the "time saving function" is provided, and improve the interest of the game. In this case, as the variable ball entry means, a large prize winning opening corresponding to the special prize jackpot and a small winning prize opening corresponding to the special prize small prize correspond to each other, and as the specific area, a V winning prize provided in the small winning prize opening is provided. A so-called V-valve device that opens and closes a V prize opening may correspond to the distribution means, and a "time reduction state" may correspond to the specific profit state.

In the above embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number for winning the small hit game is not set in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Instead of this, it is configured to provide a plurality of types of small winning types of small winning games in dynamic display of the first special symbol and / and small winning types of small winning games in dynamic display of the second special symbol. You may Furthermore, it may be configured to vary whether or not to end the "time saving function" according to the small hit type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

In the above-described embodiment, the variation effect of the special symbols that are encouraged for each game state is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation effect of the special symbols that are not encouraged is executed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm. Instead of this, it may be constructed such that the non-recommended special symbol variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in a predetermined manner. Specifically, for example, to make the variation effect of the encouraged special symbols stand out in the main display area Dm (the central part, most, the area larger than the variation effect of the special symbols that are not encouraged, and the pattern display mode to be darkened Execution, etc.), while executing the fluctuation production of the special pattern that is not encouraged in the main display area Dm, so as not to stand out from the fluctuation production of the special pattern that is encouraged (corner, small part, special pattern that is encouraged) A smaller area than the variable effect, the pattern display mode is thin, etc.) is configured to be executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to grasp the execution mode of the variable effect of a plurality of special symbols by the third symbol display device 81 .

In the above-described embodiment, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of balls for which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is configured so that the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol changes according to the number of balls. In other words, the number of pending balls for dynamic display of the first special symbol affects only the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the number of pending balls for dynamic display of the second special symbol affects the dynamic display of the second special symbol. configured to affect only Instead of this, the number of pending balls dynamically displayed for one special symbol may be configured to affect the fluctuation time for dynamic display of the other special symbol. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to the total number of pending balls of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of pending balls of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. configured to change accordingly. By configuring in this way, in a state in which the number of reserved balls dynamically displayed in the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls dynamically displayed in the second special symbol are mixed, a unique variation time can be selected. By configuring, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in three stages from "1" to "3", and the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. is not limited to three stages, and may be changed to any stage.

In the above embodiment, the case of changing the big hit probability by changing the probability set value has been described, but the normal symbol winning probability and the small winning winning probability may be changed.

Also, if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the start-up process, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") is set from the range of "1" to "3". The value may be forcibly set. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during timer interrupt processing), it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the setting change process is forcibly executed. to change the probability set value to the person concerned with the hall, urge the person concerned with the hall etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, or set a specific probability within the normal range as the probability set value. The setting value may be set compulsorily.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As described above, this may be performed using the setting key 501 . Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the ON state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the OFF side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the ON state is automatically set. The setting key 501 is configured to be energized to return. Each time the setting key 501 is turned from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, It may be possible to operate it by hall personnel or the like without opening the board box 100 . This also facilitates determination of the set probability value.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the startup mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 . Further, it may be configured such that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be set so that the hole can be selected as a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 was mounted on the main controller 110 . On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and the like. On the other hand, the setting key 501 can be used to drive the number of prize balls to be paid out when one wins a prize (for example, change from 3 to 5), or to drive a movable accessory that assists the winning of a prize in a prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), driving width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or members that affect the flow of the ball (for example, a stage or a crane on which the ball can roll) Settings relating to the degree of advantage to the player can be changed in a plurality of stages, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the tilt state of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). may be configured.

In each of the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the horizontal direction (left or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. may

In the above embodiment, the big hit random numbers, the small hit random numbers, and the losing random numbers are set to continuous values, and whether it is a big hit or a small hit is determined by a range (for example, "0" or more "49" or less), and the control load of the main controller 110 is reduced. On the other hand, the random numbers (that is, the big winning random numbers and the small winning random numbers) that give the game value may be arranged not in a continuous manner but in a dispersed (dissipated) manner. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated by "0 to 999", "7,341,555,777,831" as the jackpot random number and "77,175" as the small hit random number , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845".

Here, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value (for example, in the low probability state and the high probability state, if it is "0 to 50", the jackpot) exists continuously, It is possible that the value could be predicted externally, increasing the likelihood of fraudulently being awarded a jackpot. Therefore, by configuring as in the above modified example, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random number to which a game value is assigned from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 .

Also, in the modified example described above, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state do not overlap each other. You may set a jackpot random value. By configuring in this way, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that will be the jackpot, the value of the random number that will be the jackpot. can be made difficult to predict, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc. by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (so-called soft random numbers). On the other hand, the random number generation IC whose update period is faster than the soft random numbers may be configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1 and the like (so-called hard random numbers). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the random value being updated from the outside, and to improve the security performance.

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot random number value increases evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, the big hit random number value (or the small hit random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, from setting values ``1'' to ``2'', the jackpot random number is increased by ``2'', while from setting values ``2'' to ``3'', the jackpot random number is increased by ``5''. increase. By configuring in this way, the game value that can be imparted by the setting difference can be greatly changed, and it is possible to provide a game with modulation due to the setting difference, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the above embodiment, it is configured to change the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small hit type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the small hit is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the small hit type is changed. It may be configured such that a setting difference is caused by the change.

In the above embodiment, along with the setting change, the random number that gives the game value (that is, the jackpot random number) is changed, and the changed amount is compensated for by the random number that does not give the game value (that is, the random number that does not give the game value). It was configured as On the other hand, when the random number that gives the game value (for example, the random number for the big win) is changed due to the change of the setting, the changed amount is ) may be configured to be compensated from. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game value that can be imparted with a difference for each setting, provide a game with a sharpness for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot random number range")", " Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be arranged in a row of "the range of the random number values that fail." Here, as the "re-jackpot random number range", the increase in the jackpot random number value associated with the setting change is configured to correspond. By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increment of the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number value), and according to the setting change It is possible to fix the range of the random numbers that are not changed (that is, the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers that do not change even when the settings are changed). As a result, for example, in the success/failure determination control program, the basic success/failure determination of fixed random numbers is made common to all set values, and the increment of the jackpot random value accompanying the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. can be determined, the design of the control program can be facilitated, and the number of man-hours for development can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, each random number may be defined (set) in descending order (or ascending order) of the number of random numbers.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, the "range of random numbers for big hits" that increases with the change of settings is set so that it is adjacent to the random number that decreases with changes of settings (i.e., the "range of random numbers that lose"). It may be configured to be defined (set) in the table 202a. Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range", and "losing random number range". . By configuring in this way, the random number that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number) is adjacent to the random number that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number). The range of random numbers that are not changed (that is, small winning random numbers) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for judging whether or not the small hit is correct, while making the judgment of the small hit random value common to all set values, the increment of the big hit random value accompanying the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value This facilitates control program design and reduces development man-hours.

In the above-described embodiment, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the probability of winning a special symbol is improved (doubled or more). On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", it may be configured to improve the small winning probability of the special symbol. Also, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase in the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 2 times or more (for example, 10 times). Furthermore, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", even if both the jackpot probability and the small win probability are set to improve (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times and the small win probability is also 5 times) good.

In the above embodiment, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol and the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol are configured to be equal. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol, or the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured. The probability may be configured to be lower than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol.

In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability state and high-probability state of the special symbol, it is configured such that the setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in any state. On the other hand, the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated, and the setting difference is provided in the jackpot probability in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state). You may

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated for by the losing random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increment of the jackpot random number value may be compensated for by the small hit random number and the losing random number value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of big hit random numbers based on the setting change from each of the small hit random numbers and the losing random numbers, and the change in the big hit random numbers is fixed. It is no longer necessary to fill from the predetermined random value of 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from 1 for the amount of change in the jackpot random number value, there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specifications, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the normal electric element 72 that displaces between the protruding state and the immersed state is used, and the immersion timing and immersion time of the normal electric element 72 are changed in each game state, thereby realizing the game characteristics of the present invention. is configured to On the other hand, the playability of the present invention may be realized by using rotary blade members and changing the operation timing and operation time of the blade members for each game state. Specifically, for example, the blade members are arranged on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 71, and when the blade members are in a non-operating state (for example, an upright state), the ball collides with the outside (non-rolling side) of the blade members. It is configured so that it flows downstream as it is. On the other hand, in the operating state in which the blade member rotates (from the upright state to the rightward tilted state of 120 degrees), the ball collides with the inner side (rolling side) of the blade member, and moves the inner side of the blade member toward the second start port 71. configured to roll toward With this configuration, it is easier to recognize whether or not the region in which the blade member itself operates has been largely driven in the rotating mode of the blade member compared to the driving mode in which the normal electric element 72 appears and disappears. It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize whether or not the prize has been won by the variable display.

The display mode and display position of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2 are changed to the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is produced in the main display area Dm. It may be configured to change accordingly. Specifically, for example, corresponding to the special symbol being executed in the main display area Dm, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 that are being executed are positioned above, displayed in Arabic numerals, or displayed in red. , and the fourth pattern display areas 88 and 87 that are not executed are positioned on the lower side, displayed in a notation different from the above Arabic numerals (for example, Chinese numerals or Roman numerals), or displayed in a color different from red ( For example, it is configured to be displayed in blue). By constructing in this way, while distinguishing and displaying the variable performance being executed, it is constituted so that it is difficult to recognize which special symbol is being executed, and the player recognizes the game state in which he is currently staying. By constructing the game machine so that it is difficult to do so, it is possible to create a game feature of guessing the game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the alarm sound, it is configured to output an alarm sound not only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in a game state in which a left-handed game is recommended, but also when a specific condition is satisfied. good too. Specifically, for example, by configuring in this way, an alarm sound is output only for actions of a malicious player who intentionally tries to obtain more balls than the game specification, and an inexperienced player can By not outputting an alarm sound for a right-handed game with good intentions due to an operation mistake, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's willingness to play while suppressing the fraudulent game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The winning probability of normal symbols may be configured to be about the same in any game state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" where the special symbol jackpot probability is low, the normal symbol hit probability is set to 50/100, and the special symbol jackpot probability is In the high "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 50/100 or 51/100, etc., so that it is the same or equivalent to the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the "normal game state" etc. configured to By configuring in this way, regarding the opening of the normal electric combination 72 based on the winning of the normal design, the variable display time of the normal design and the opening time of the normal construction 72 are considered, and the probability of winning the normal design is not considered. Since it is possible to calculate the ball payout rate, etc., it is possible to simplify the design of the game specifications in each game state.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbols to be selected after the big win may be different for each big win symbol. Specifically, for example, if one of the jackpot symbols 1, 3, 5, and 7 that can generate the "probability fluctuation state" is selected, the first symbol is selected in the "probability fluctuation state". Both the special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to shift to a "both long variation probability variation state" in which relatively long variation time is likely to be selected. Also, when winning with 3 symbols, while the first special symbol tends to be selected for a relatively long variation time in the "probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively short variation time. 1 long special 2 short fluctuation probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, when winning with 5 symbols, in the "probability fluctuation state", both the first special pattern and the second special pattern are shifted to a "both short fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which relatively short fluctuation times are likely to be selected. configured to In addition, when winning with 7 symbols, while the first special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively short variation time in the "probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively long variation time. special 1 short special 2 long fluctuation probability fluctuation state". By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate the special symbols that can be derived first in the game state after the big win depending on the type of the big win symbols, for example, which special symbol will stop first or not. Thus, it is possible to vary the probability that the big win appears first for each game state. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol may be configured to be different based on the number of variations of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation performance of the special symbols for the 1st to 10th times after the end of the big win is configured so that a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected, and the 11th and subsequent times. As for the variation performance of the special symbol, it is configured so that a relatively short variation time is easily selected. By constructing in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game while providing sharpness to the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

A plurality of types of winning types of normal symbols may be provided. Specifically, for example, a one-time opening hit in which the normal electric terminal 72 is opened once, a three-time opening hit in which the hive plate 72a is opened three times, and an ordinary electric terminal 72 that is opened three times for a long time. 3 long open hits are provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" and improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the game states are advantageous to the player in the order of "normal game state" → "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" → "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" → "probability fluctuation state". On the other hand, the game specifications are set so that the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability change state", and "probability change state" are positioned as game states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the "normal game state". You may Specifically, for example, the starting port of the first special symbol is provided upstream of the starting port of the second special symbol to which the normal electric symbol 72 is attached, and the normal electric symbol 72 is activated in the "normal game state". Because it is difficult, it is easier for the player to receive the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than the second special symbol. It is constituted so as to make it easier for the player to receive the lottery opportunity of the second special pattern which is more disadvantageous to the player than the special pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

The display positions of the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 may be changed when a right-handed suggesting display suggesting a right-handed game appears. Specifically, in the "normal game state" where the left-handed game is encouraged, while the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, the right-handed game is encouraged. In the "probability fluctuation state" and the like, while the indication of hitting to the right is displayed in the right small area Ds3, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the left small area Ds1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game specifications corresponding to the game state.

In the above embodiment, regarding the dynamic display of a plurality of special symbols that can be executed at the same time, the variation effect of the special symbols that are encouraged according to the game state is performed in the main display area Dm, and the variation effect of the non-encouragement special symbols is mainly performed. It is configured so that it is not performed in the display area Dm. On the other hand, regarding the effects of a plurality of symbols (for example, special symbols and normal symbols) that can be executed at the same time, the priority order of the effects to be executed depends on the game state, game specifications, the game value to be given, or the execution frequency. is provided in advance, and the performance corresponding to the priority order is preferentially executed, and for the performance with the low priority, the scale of the performance is reduced, or the performance itself is not executed. It may be configured to be difficult to recognize. Specifically, when the variable effect of the first special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the effect related to the variable display of the normal symbol, which has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special symbol, is displayed as the first special symbol. If the 3-symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 is not executed or the scale of the performance is reduced and displayed, or if the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the game is played from the second special symbol. The effect related to the variable display of normal symbols with low game value that can be given to the player may not be executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226, or may be displayed with a reduced scale of effect. By configuring in this way, the player does not feel annoyed by preferentially executing an effect that the player wants to recognize when playing the game, and by reducing (eliminating) the scale of the effect with a low priority. can perform the performance.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. A command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S1111) executed by the sound ramp control device 113, when any stop type command is received, the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b are always set to ON. However, the fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON when each fluctuation pattern command is received and then the corresponding stop type command is received. As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when any of the stop type commands is received without receiving each variation pattern command.

Further, each variation start flag 223a, 223b may be set to ON at the timing of receiving each variation pattern command. In this case, in the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by each variation pattern command is displayed on the display control device based on the fact that each variation start flag 223a, 223b is turned on. Each display variation pattern command to be notified to 114 may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of each stop type command by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is provided with each variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on each display variation pattern command. can be executed. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving each stop type command. , may be transmitted to the display control device 114 . Further, the number of rounds in which the variable probability area 65d is effectively set may be one, a plurality, or all rounds as long as it is equal to or less than the maximum number of rounds set according to the jackpot type. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may stop and display the third symbols consisting of the main symbols with no numerals "0" to "9". Also, a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed may execute the continuous advance notice effect, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided to display the third symbol. By displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device together with the variable effect executed by the display device 81, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a role that operates according to various effects, and the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by activating the role in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10 A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Also, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is performed, and the effect different from the usual effect is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 is made to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the time of fluctuation start, the voice lamp control device 113 is made to perform continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 is made to perform variation performance, so that the pachinko machine 10 continues When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 or a combination thereof) may be changed to prepare a plurality of continuous advance notice effect modes selected according to the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is performed when the variable effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbols, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114 determines that the continuous notice command has been received, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and the other stop symbol determination flags are turned off. may be set to In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the variation is stopped. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable effect, the player can be made to expect to finally get a big win.

In the above embodiment, the main controller 110, when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, the number of pending balls incremented by "1" The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included as it is and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball number command to be notified has been described. The types of counters included in the number-of-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113 . As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension. It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss In this case, some or all of the outlier types, etc. are determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with some or all of the values of the counters, It may be stored in the RAM 223 .

In the above embodiment, winning to the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, for the winning of the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4 ” may be any number other than . Also, the maximum number of held balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on the winning of the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or can be divided into four areas. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is controlled by the light-emitting member. may be configured to notify the

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in such a reduced size that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays the identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

In a slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out as a bonus (accessory) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the role ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main controller instead of the prize ball number table, and functions equivalent to the role ratio management chip or the role ratio management chip. , the number of wins (symbols aligned on the activated line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of wins during the bonus game period, and the AT period. The number of wins may be counted to manage the role ratio and the continuous role ratio.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, it is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol row after displaying a row of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is equipped with a handle for hitting a ball. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown. It should be noted that each of the various inventive concepts shown below may add a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another inventive concept to the inventive concept, or add a part or a plurality of the configurations of the other inventive concept. The concept of the invention may be modified and configured by exchanging parts or the like.

<Group A: Determine whether the probability variable area is valid or invalid for each jackpot round by jackpot type>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

There is still room for improvement in this regard, as it is necessary to improve the interest in games in the gaming machines and the like as exemplified above.

The inventions of group A have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in games.

A shooting means capable of shooting game balls (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a);
A starting ball entry area (for example, the first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
display means (e.g., special symbol display device 37) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and for stop-displaying a particular symbol at the end of the variable display;
a variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) provided in the game area and executing a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed; prepared,
The variable ball entry means is
Opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area (for example, a large winning opening opening and closing plate 65a);
A specific area (for example, probability variable area 65d) where the game ball can enter,
A first detection means (for example, a probability variable area switch 65g) for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area;
a second detection means (for example, a discharge passage 65h) for detecting game balls that have not entered the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a distribution means (for example, a variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e) that distributes a game ball to the specific area into a state in which it is possible to flow down and a state in which it is not possible,
The first detection means is
A predetermined number of effective variable operation times (for example, probability variable area effective table 202h) in the plurality of variable operations, in which the detection of the game ball is effective at least corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, is set in advance,
The sorting means is
In the variable operation times in which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means, the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area (for example, the probability variable area open table 202g),
The game machine is
In relation to the execution of a predetermined variable motion among the plurality of variable motions, a specific notification display prompting a predetermined player to enter a game ball into the specific area (for example, a command for displaying a vote-accepting production command) Display control means (e.g., display control device 114) that causes display means (e.g., third pattern display device 81) to execute at a specific timing;
Determination information storage means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203k) for storing determination information capable of determining whether or not detection is performed by the first detection means;
Storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means (for example, probability variable region passage determination processing);
When the determination information indicating the detection of a game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the valid variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, the player is notified of the special game state. A granting means (eg, probability variation flag 203j) that grants a specific profit state (eg, "probability fluctuation state") different from
One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and an executing means for executing (for example, an introduction effect command during a big win for display).

According to the gaming machine A1, a launching means capable of shooting a game ball, a start ball entry area provided in a game area where the game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the start ball entry area determining means for executing a predetermined determination; display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and stopping and displaying the particular symbol at the end of the variable display; and the game area. and a variable ball entry means for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means is an opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area. a specific area into which a game ball can enter; first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area; and second detection means for detecting a game ball that has not entered the specific area. and a sorting means for sorting a game ball into a state in which the game ball can flow down to the specific area and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down, wherein the first detection means corresponds at least to the type of the specific symbol. A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions is set in advance at which the detection of the game ball becomes effective, and the sorting means determines the number of variable motion times at which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means. , the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific region, and the gaming machine provides a predetermined player with the specific display control means for causing the display means to execute a specific notification display prompting entry of a game ball into the area at a specific timing; means, storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means for a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means, and setting corresponding to the type of the specific symbol. giving means for giving the player a special profit state different from the special game state when the discrimination information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the discrimination information storage means in the valid variable action times in which the game is played; One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and execution means for executing. Thereby, the pattern in which the specific area is set to be valid or invalid in each variable operation can be made different depending on the type of the specific symbol. As a result, it is possible to play the special game state while guessing which specific region is effectively set in which variable action round, create new game characteristics, and improve the amusement of the game. has the effect of

A shooting means capable of shooting game balls (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a);
A starting ball entry area (for example, the first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
display means (e.g., special symbol display device 37) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and for stop-displaying a particular symbol at the end of the variable display;
a variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) provided in the game area and executing a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed; prepared,
The variable ball entry means
Opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area (for example, a large winning opening opening and closing plate 65a);
A specific area (for example, probability variable area 65d) where the game ball can enter,
A first detection means (for example, a probability variable area switch 65g) for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area;
a second detection means (for example, a discharge passage 65h) for detecting game balls that have not entered the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a distribution means (for example, a variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e) that distributes a game ball to the specific area into a state in which it is possible to flow down and a state in which it is not possible,
The first detection means is
A predetermined number of effective variable operation times (for example, probability variable area effective table 202h) in the plurality of variable operations, in which the detection of the game ball is effective at least corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, is set in advance,
The sorting means is
In the variable operation times in which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means, the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area (for example, the probability variable area open table 202g),
The game machine is
In relation to the execution of a predetermined variable motion among the plurality of variable motions, a specific notification display prompting a predetermined player to enter a game ball into the specific area (for example, a command for displaying a vote-accepting production command) Display control means (e.g., display control device 114) that causes display means (e.g., third pattern display device 81) to execute at a specific timing;
Determination information storage means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203k) for storing determination information capable of determining whether or not detection is performed by the first detection means;
Storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means (for example, probability variable region passage determination processing);
When the determination information indicating the detection of a game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the valid variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, the player is notified of the special game state. A granting means (eg, probability variation flag 203j) that grants a specific profit state (eg, "probability fluctuation state") different from
One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. Execution means to be executed (for example, an introduction effect command during the display jackpot),
The display control means is
When there is no detection by the first detection means for the predetermined number of times during the predetermined period of the special game state, the specific notification display is switched to a special notification display (for example, voting warning processing), and the game ball is sent to the specific area. A gaming machine B1 characterized by prompting the player to enter a ball.

According to the game machine B1, a launching means capable of shooting a game ball, a start ball entry area provided in a game area where the game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the start ball entry area determining means for executing a predetermined determination; display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and stopping and displaying the particular symbol at the end of the variable display; and the game area. and a variable ball entry means for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means is an opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area. a specific area into which a game ball can enter; first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area; and second detection means for detecting a game ball that has not entered the specific area. and a sorting means for sorting a game ball into a state in which the game ball can flow down to the specific area and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down, wherein the first detection means corresponds at least to the type of the specific symbol. A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions is set in advance at which the detection of the game ball becomes effective, and the sorting means determines the number of variable motion times at which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means. , the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific region, and the gaming machine provides a predetermined player with the specific display control means for causing the display means to execute a specific notification display prompting entry of a game ball into the area at a specific timing; means, storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means for a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means, and setting corresponding to the type of the specific symbol. giving means for giving the player a special profit state different from the special game state when the discrimination information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the discrimination information storage means in the valid variable action times in which the game is played; One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and execution means for executing, wherein the display control means switches the specific notification display to the special notification display when there is no detection by the first detection means for the predetermined number of times during the predetermined period of the special game state. Encourage the game ball to enter the specific area. As a result, when the game ball is not detected by the first detection means for a predetermined period under the condition that the specific area is open, the display mode for prompting the entry of the game ball into the specific area can be changed. As a result, when the game ball is not detected by the first detection means for a predetermined period in a situation where the specific area is open, the player can be encouraged to enter the game ball into the specific area. Then, it is possible to play the special game state while guessing which specific region is effectively set in which variable action round, create new game characteristics, and improve the interest of the game. effective.

A shooting means capable of shooting game balls (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a);
A starting ball entry area (for example, the first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
display means (e.g., special symbol display device 37) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and for stop-displaying a particular symbol at the end of the variable display;
a variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) provided in the game area and executing a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed; prepared,
The variable ball entry means
Opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area (for example, a large winning opening opening and closing plate 65a);
A specific area (for example, probability variable area 65d) where the game ball can enter,
A first detection means (for example, a probability variable area switch 65g) for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area;
a second detection means (for example, a discharge passage 65h) for detecting game balls that have not entered the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a distribution means (for example, a variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e) that distributes a game ball to the specific area into a state in which it is possible to flow down and a state in which it is not possible,
The first detection means is
A predetermined number of effective variable operation times (for example, probability variable area effective table 202h) in the plurality of variable operations, in which the detection of the game ball is effective at least corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, is set in advance,
The sorting means is
In the variable operation times in which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means, the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area (for example, the probability variable area open table 202g),
The game machine is
In relation to the execution of a predetermined variable motion among the plurality of variable motions, a specific notification display prompting a predetermined player to enter a game ball into the specific area (for example, a command for displaying a vote-accepting production command) Display control means (e.g., display control device 114) that causes display means (e.g., third pattern display device 81) to execute at a specific timing;
Determination information storage means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203k) for storing determination information capable of determining whether or not detection is performed by the first detection means;
Storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means (for example, probability variable region passage determination processing);
When the determination information indicating the detection of a game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the valid variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, the player is notified of the special game state. A granting means (eg, probability variation flag 203j) that grants a specific profit state (eg, "probability fluctuation state") different from
One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. Execution means to be executed (for example, an introduction effect command during the display jackpot),
The display control means is
In the effective variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, when the discrimination information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the discrimination information storage means, the special game state must be established. A gaming machine C1 characterized by executing a notification effect (for example, winning competition development scenario command) for notifying that the first detection means has detected the predetermined number of times in a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine C1, a launching means capable of shooting a game ball, a start ball entry area provided in a game area where the game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the start ball entry area determining means for executing a predetermined determination; display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and stopping and displaying the particular symbol at the end of the variable display; and the game area. and a variable ball entry means for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means is an opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area. a specific area into which a game ball can enter; first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area; and second detection means for detecting a game ball that has not entered the specific area. and a sorting means for sorting a game ball into a state in which the game ball can flow down to the specific area and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down, wherein the first detection means corresponds at least to the type of the specific symbol. A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions is set in advance at which the detection of the game ball becomes effective, and the sorting means determines the number of variable motion times at which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means. , the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific region, and the gaming machine provides a predetermined player with the specific display control means for causing the display means to execute a specific notification display prompting entry of a game ball into the area at a specific timing; means, storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means for a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means, and setting corresponding to the type of the specific symbol. giving means for giving the player a special profit state different from the special game state when the discrimination information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the discrimination information storage means in the valid variable action times in which the game is played; One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and execution means for executing the determination, wherein the display control means indicates detection of a game ball in the determination information storage means in the effective variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol. When the information is stored, a notification effect is executed to notify that the first detection means has detected the predetermined number of times during the predetermined period of the special game state. As a result, when the game ball is detected by the first detection means in a state where the specific area is set valid, the notification performance of the detection result is executed regardless of the performance contents being executed by the display means. be able to. Then, it is possible to play the special game state while guessing which specific region is effectively set in which variable action round, create new game characteristics, and improve the interest of the game. effective.

A shooting means capable of shooting game balls (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a);
A starting ball entry area (for example, the first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
display means (e.g., special symbol display device 37) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and for stop-displaying a particular symbol at the end of the variable display;
a variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) provided in the game area and executing a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed; prepared,
The variable ball entry means
Opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area (for example, a large winning opening opening and closing plate 65a);
A specific area (for example, probability variable area 65d) where the game ball can enter,
A first detection means (for example, a probability variable area switch 65g) for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area;
a second detection means (for example, a discharge passage 65h) for detecting game balls that have not entered the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a distribution means (for example, a variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e) that distributes a game ball to the specific area into a state in which it is possible to flow down and a state in which it is not possible,
The first detection means is
A predetermined number of effective variable operation times (for example, probability variable area effective table 202h) in the plurality of variable operations, in which the detection of the game ball is effective at least corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, is set in advance,
The sorting means is
In the variable operation times in which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means, the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area (for example, the probability variable area open table 202g),
The game machine is
In relation to the execution of a predetermined variable motion among the plurality of variable motions, a specific notification display prompting a predetermined player to enter a game ball into the specific area (for example, a command for displaying a vote-accepting production command) Display control means (e.g., display control device 114) that causes display means (e.g., third pattern display device 81) to execute at a specific timing;
Determination information storage means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203k) for storing determination information capable of determining whether or not detection is performed by the first detection means;
Storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means (for example, probability variable region passage determination processing);
When the determination information indicating the detection of a game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the valid variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, the player is notified of the special game state. A granting means (eg, probability variation flag 203j) that grants a specific profit state (eg, "probability fluctuation state") different from
One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. Execution means for execution (for example, an introduction effect command during a display jackpot),
In a variable operation cycle in which the distribution means is operated so as to cause the game balls to flow down to the specific area, a predetermined period is always provided in which the distribution means operates so that the game balls do not flow down to the specific area. Characterized game machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D1, a launching means capable of shooting a game ball, a start ball entry area provided in a game area where the game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the start ball entry area determining means for executing a predetermined determination; display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and stopping and displaying the particular symbol at the end of the variable display; and the game area. and a variable ball entry means for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means is an opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area. a specific area into which a game ball can enter; first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area; and second detection means for detecting a game ball that has not entered the specific area. and a sorting means for sorting a game ball into a state in which the game ball can flow down to the specific area and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down, wherein the first detection means corresponds at least to the type of the specific symbol. A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions is set in advance at which the detection of the game ball becomes effective, and the sorting means determines the number of variable motion times at which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means. , the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific region, and the gaming machine provides a predetermined player with the specific display control means for causing the display means to execute a specific notification display prompting entry of a game ball into the area at a specific timing; means, storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means for a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means, and setting corresponding to the type of the specific symbol. giving means for giving the player a special profit state different from the special game state when the discrimination information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the discrimination information storage means in the valid variable action times in which the game is played; One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and an executing means for executing, and in a variable operation cycle in which the allocating means is operated so that the game ball flows down to the specific area, the allocating means operates so that the game ball does not flow down to the specific area. Always set a predetermined period for Thereby, in the variable action times in which the specific area can be opened, since the specific area has a period in which the specific area is not opened, the game ball can not be detected by the first detection means in the variable action times. A game ball can be entered into the means. As a result, the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means without entering the game ball into the specific area in the variable operation times in which the specific area can be opened. Then, it is possible to play the special game state while guessing which specific region is effectively set in which variable action round, create new game characteristics, and improve the interest of the game. effective.

A shooting means capable of shooting game balls (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a);
A starting ball entry area (for example, the first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
display means (e.g., special symbol display device 37) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and for stop-displaying a particular symbol at the end of the variable display;
a variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) provided in the game area and executing a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed; prepared,
The variable ball entry means is
Opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area (for example, a large winning opening opening and closing plate 65a);
A specific area (for example, probability variable area 65d) where the game ball can enter,
A first detection means (for example, a probability variable area switch 65g) for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area;
a second detection means (for example, a discharge passage 65h) for detecting game balls that have not entered the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a distribution means (for example, a variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e) that distributes a game ball to the specific area into a state in which it is possible to flow down and a state in which it is not possible,
The first detection means is
A predetermined number of effective variable operation times (for example, probability variable area effective table 202h) in the plurality of variable operations, in which the detection of the game ball is effective at least corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, is set in advance,
The sorting means is
In the variable operation times in which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means, the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area (for example, the probability variable area open table 202g),
The game machine is
In relation to the execution of a predetermined variable motion among the plurality of variable motions, a specific notification display prompting a predetermined player to enter a game ball into the specific area (for example, a command for displaying a vote-accepting production command) Display control means (e.g., display control device 114) that causes display means (e.g., third pattern display device 81) to execute at a specific timing;
Determination information storage means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203k) for storing determination information capable of determining whether or not detection is performed by the first detection means;
Storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means (for example, probability variable region passage determination processing);
When the determination information indicating the detection of a game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the effective variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, the player is notified of the special game state. A granting means (eg, probability variation flag 203j) that grants a specific profit state (eg, "probability fluctuation state") different from
One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific pattern as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. Execution means to be executed (for example, an introduction effect command during the display jackpot),
The display control means is
In the special game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined notification display (for example, a main display right-handing instruction 89) different from the specific notification display prompting the player to play a game in a predetermined game method, and the specific symbol. The game machine E1 is characterized in that the predetermined notification display is also executed in variable operation times other than the effective variable operation times set corresponding to the types of the game machines E1.

According to the gaming machine E1, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a start ball entry area provided in a game area where the game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the start ball entry area determining means for executing a predetermined determination; display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and stopping and displaying the particular symbol at the end of the variable display; and the game area. and a variable ball entry means for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means is an opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area. a specific area into which a game ball can enter; first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area; and second detection means for detecting a game ball that has not entered the specific area. and a sorting means for sorting a game ball into a state in which the game ball can flow down to the specific area and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down, wherein the first detection means corresponds at least to the type of the specific symbol. A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions is set in advance at which the detection of the game ball becomes effective, and the sorting means determines the number of variable motion times at which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means. , the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific region, and the gaming machine provides a predetermined player with the specific display control means for causing the display means to execute a specific notification display prompting entry of a game ball into the area at a specific timing; means, storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means for a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means, and setting corresponding to the type of the specific symbol. giving means for giving the player a special profit state different from the special game state when the discrimination information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the discrimination information storage means in the valid variable action times in which the game is played; One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and execution means for executing, wherein the display control means is capable of executing a predetermined notification display different from the specific notification display for prompting the player to play a game in a predetermined game method in the special game state, The predetermined notification display is also performed in variable operation times other than the effective variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol. As a result, the player can be urged to play the game by the predetermined game method even in the variable action times other than the effective variable action times. As a result, it is possible to play the special game state while guessing which specific region is effectively set in which variable action round, create new game characteristics, and improve the amusement of the game. has the effect of

A shooting means capable of shooting game balls (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a);
A starting ball entry area (for example, the first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
display means (e.g., special symbol display device 37) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and for stop-displaying a particular symbol at the end of the variable display;
a variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) provided in the game area and executing a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed; prepared,
The variable ball entry means is
Opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area (for example, a large winning opening opening and closing plate 65a);
A specific area (for example, probability variable area 65d) where the game ball can enter,
A first detection means (for example, a probability variable area switch 65g) for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area;
a second detection means (for example, a discharge passage 65h) for detecting game balls that have not entered the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a distribution means (for example, a variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e) that distributes a game ball to the specific area into a state in which it is possible to flow down and a state in which it is not possible,
The first detection means is
A predetermined number of effective variable operation times (for example, probability variable area effective table 202h) in the plurality of variable operations, in which the detection of the game ball is effective at least corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, is set in advance,
The sorting means is
In the variable operation times in which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means, the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area (for example, the probability variable area open table 202g),
The game machine is
In relation to the execution of a predetermined variable motion among the plurality of variable motions, a specific notification display prompting a predetermined player to enter a game ball into the specific area (for example, a command for displaying a vote-accepting production command) Display control means (e.g., display control device 114) that causes display means (e.g., third pattern display device 81) to execute at a specific timing;
Determination information storage means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203k) for storing determination information capable of determining whether or not detection is performed by the first detection means;
Storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means (for example, probability variable region passage determination processing);
When the determination information indicating the detection of a game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the valid variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, the player is notified of the special game state. A granting means (eg, probability variation flag 203j) that grants a specific profit state (eg, "probability fluctuation state") different from
One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. Execution means to be executed (for example, an introduction effect command during the display jackpot),
The display control means is
A game machine F1 characterized by setting an effect display (for example, a display competition development scenario command) to be displayed in the special game state after that based on the detection of the first detection means for the predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine F1, a launching means capable of shooting a game ball, a start ball entry area provided in a game area where the game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the start ball entry area determining means for executing a predetermined determination; display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and stopping and displaying the particular symbol at the end of the variable display; and the game area. and a variable ball entry means for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means is an opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area. a specific area into which a game ball can enter; first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area; and second detection means for detecting a game ball that has not entered the specific area. and a sorting means for sorting a game ball into a state in which the game ball can flow down to the specific area and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down, wherein the first detection means corresponds at least to the type of the specific symbol. A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions is set in advance at which the detection of the game ball becomes effective, and the sorting means determines the number of variable motion times at which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means. , the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific region, and the gaming machine provides a predetermined player with the specific display control means for causing the display means to execute a specific notification display prompting entry of a game ball into the area at a specific timing; means, storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means for a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means, and setting corresponding to the type of the specific symbol. giving means for giving the player a special profit state different from the special game state when the discrimination information indicating the detection of the game ball is stored in the discrimination information storage means in the valid variable action times in which the game is played; One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and execution means for executing, wherein the display control means sets an effect display to be displayed in the special game state after that based on the detection of the first detection means for the predetermined number of times. As a result, when the player enters the game ball into the specific area, in the special game state after opening the specific area, it is possible to set the effect display based on the ball entry information. As a result, it is possible to execute the effect display based on the variable action times in which the game ball is entered into the specific area by the player. Then, it is possible to play the special game state while guessing which specific region is effectively set in which variable action round, create new game characteristics, and improve the interest of the game. effective.

<G group: When the number of rounds passed through the variable area during the jackpot reaches a certain value, the subsequent variable area is invalidated>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

It is necessary to reduce the processing load on the game machines and the like as exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group G was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a game machine capable of reducing the processing load.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
By using the determination result by the determination means, a predetermined effect executing means (for example, display control device) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, variation effect of special symbols) in the display device (for example, third symbol display device 81) 114) and
a game value imparting means (e.g., payout control device 111) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player when a specific result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) appears in the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means; , in a gaming machine with
The game value imparting means is
A special area (for example, probability variable area 65d) through which the game ball can pass is provided,
A special area passage number counting means (for example, probability variable area passage number counter 203o) capable of counting the number of times the game ball passes through the special area,
The special area passing number counting means,
When the counting result by the special area passage number counting means reaches the first number, passage number measurement interruption means that does not measure the number of subsequent passages (for example, jackpot type "variable probability A" to "variable probability F" , 1 is not added when the value of the probability variable area passing number counter 203o is not smaller than "2").

According to the gaming machine G1, by using information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and determination results by the determination means, the display Predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in the device; and game value imparting means capable of providing a predetermined game value to a player when a specific result appears in the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. , wherein the game value imparting means comprises a special area through which a game ball can pass, and a special area passing number counting means capable of counting the number of times the game ball passes through the special area, The special area passage number counting means includes passage number measurement interrupting means that does not measure the number of subsequent passages when the result of counting by the special area passage number counting means reaches a first number. As a result, the opportunity for measuring the number of times the game ball passes through the special area can be limited to the first number, and as a result, there is an effect that the control load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. .

<Group H: Boats corresponding to rounds in which V wins are not given unfavorable effects>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

There is a need to improve the interest in games with respect to the above-described gaming machines, etc., and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group H have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in games.

A shooting means capable of shooting game balls (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a);
A starting ball entry area (for example, the first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
Determination means (for example, MPU 201) for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
display means (e.g., special symbol display device 37) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and for stop-displaying a particular symbol at the end of the variable display;
a variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) provided in the game area and executing a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed; prepared,
The variable ball entry means is
Opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area (for example, a large winning opening opening and closing plate 65a);
A specific area (for example, probability variable area 65d) where the game ball can enter,
A first detection means (for example, a probability variable area switch 65g) for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area;
a second detection means (for example, a discharge passage 65h) for detecting game balls that have not entered the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a distribution means (for example, a variable probability area opening/closing plate 65e) that distributes a game ball to the specific area into a state in which it is possible to flow down and a state in which it is not possible,
The first detection means is
A predetermined number of effective variable operation times (for example, probability variable area effective table 202h) in the plurality of variable operations, in which the detection of the game ball is effective at least corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, is set in advance,
The sorting means is
In the variable operation times in which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means, the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area (for example, the probability variable area open table 202g),
The game machine is
In relation to the execution of a predetermined variable motion among the plurality of variable motions, a specific notification display prompting a predetermined player to enter a game ball into the specific area (for example, a command for displaying a vote-accepting production command) Display control means (e.g., display control device 114) that causes display means (e.g., third pattern display device 81) to execute at a specific timing;
Determination information storage means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203k) for storing determination information capable of determining whether or not detection is performed by the first detection means;
Storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means (for example, probability variable region passage determination processing);
When the determination information indicating the detection of a game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the valid variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, the player is notified of the special game state. A granting means (eg, probability variation flag 203j) that grants a specific profit state (eg, "probability fluctuation state") different from
One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific symbols, as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. Execution means to be executed (for example, an introduction effect command during the display jackpot),
The game machine is
When the specific notification display is executed in relation to the execution of the predetermined variable operation out of the plurality of variable operations, when the first detection means detects the entry of a game ball, the first detection In the production for a predetermined period of time (e.g., "competition production") that notifies whether or not the specific profit state is granted by the detection of the means, there is a specific effect that can be selected when the detection by the first detection means does not occur. (e.g., unfavorable effects such as flying, late, falling overboard, etc. in the boat corresponding to the winning round) are not displayed.

According to the game machine H1, a launching means capable of shooting a game ball, a start ball entry area provided in a game area where the game ball can flow down, and a game ball entering the start ball entry area determining means for executing a predetermined determination; display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and stopping and displaying the particular symbol at the end of the variable display; and the game area. and variable ball entry means for executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable motions after the specific pattern is displayed, wherein the variable ball entry means is opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area. a specific area into which a game ball can enter; first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area; and second detection means for detecting a game ball that has not entered the specific area. and a sorting means for sorting a game ball into a state in which the game ball can flow down to the specific area and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down, wherein the first detection means corresponds at least to the type of the specific symbol. A predetermined number of effective variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions is set in advance at which the detection of the game ball becomes effective, and the sorting means determines the number of variable motion times at which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means. , the game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific region, and the gaming machine provides a predetermined player with the specific Display control means for causing the display means to perform a specific notification display prompting entry of a game ball into the area at a specific timing; and discrimination information storage means for storing discrimination information capable of discriminating whether or not the first detection means has detected. and storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times corresponding to the game state in the storage state of the discrimination information storage means; granting means for granting a player a specific profit state different from the special game state when the discrimination information indicating detection of a game ball is stored in the discrimination information storage means in the valid variable action times; One common performance is selected and executed from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific pattern as a performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at a specific timing. and said gaming machine, when said specific notification display is being executed in relation to execution of a predetermined variable motion among said plurality of variable motions, said first detecting means detects the entry of a game ball. When a sphere is detected, the predetermined period effect for notifying whether or not the specific profit state is granted by the detection of the first detection means is selected when the detection by the first detection means does not occur. It is configured so that the specific effects to be obtained are not displayed. As a result, the patterns in which the specific areas are set to be valid or invalid in each variable operation cycle can be made different depending on the type of the specific symbol, and the player makes the ball enter the specific area and the first detection means. In the production of a predetermined period for informing whether or not the specific profit state is given by the detection of, the specific profit state is given until the player finishes the specific production by configuring so that the specific production is not displayed. You can enjoy whether or not you will be satisfied. As a result, it is possible to play the special game state while guessing which specific region is effectively set in which variable action round, create new game characteristics, and improve the amusement of the game. has the effect of

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, and H1 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines A1.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines A1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1 and H1 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines B1.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, G1 and H1 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines C1.

A configuration limited to any one of the game machines A1, B1, C1, E1, F1, G1, and H1 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the game machine D1.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, F1, G1, and H1 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines E1.

It should be noted that any one of the game machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, G1, and H1 may be applied to any one of the game machines F1.

It should be noted that any one of the game machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1 and H1 may be applied to any one of the game machines G1.

It should be noted that any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, and G1 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines H1.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

A gaming machine X1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1 and H1. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine X2, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine in any of the game machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1 and H1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is opened. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine X3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1 and H1, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Third Embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 143, a third embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 96 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, FIG. 97 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 96). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 98) having a large number of nails and prize-winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 64, 71, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 100) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 96). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 96), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 100). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is, for example, a button pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 98) described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content of the advance notice display executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as "variable effect"). Also used as

Also, the variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later. For example, it is executed when a prize is won in a first starting port 64 or a second starting port 71 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later. The result of the lottery (whether it is a big win or not) for the winning prize is presented to the player according to the combination of the symbols.

Further, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 98) to be described later are unified. Stage” and “Island Stage” are provided. Various effects such as the variable effects described above and the "ready-to-reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

In addition, the "ready-to-win display" means a display one step before the "big win display" indicating that a big win will occur in the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 98) described later. . Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 99) to be described later stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 99) continues to fluctuate without stopping. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "ready-to-win display" is roughly divided into one unit of elements that constitute the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit of elements that constitute the effect is referred to as a "fluctuation element"), Developed and executed from the "normal reach" variable element, "super reach" variable element with a higher expected jackpot than the "normal reach" variable element, and similarly "normal reach" variable element Developed and executed, A variable element of "special reach" having a higher expectation for a big hit than a variable element of "super reach" is prepared.

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the variable effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the variable element of "high-speed change" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed in the variable effect so that the player cannot see it. This is performed when the player presses the frame button 22 . Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is changed repeatedly in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

In addition, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 98) described later, from the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach" or When it develops into the variable element of "special reach", the selection screen of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of "normal reach". It may be configured as

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as variable elements of "Super Reach" or variable elements of "Special Reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach". , according to the determination, the variable element of "super reach" and the variable element of "special reach" are executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In the third embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. It may be constituted by an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined.

In addition, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the side, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it is a position where the player can press it. For example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper tray 17, or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower tray 50, which will be described later. Furthermore, in the present invention, the number of executions of the variation effect, which is an event for the ball entering the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, is configured to be countable, but the first start port 64 or the second start port It may be possible to count all the number of times of ball entry, which is an event for a ball entering 71, or a variable effect, which is an event for a ball entering the first start port 64 or second start port 71, may be executed The number of valid ball entries (that is, the number of held balls) may be countable.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light-emitting means change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined "ready-to-win display" is performed, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps. lights up or blinks to notify that the big win is in progress or that the "ready-to-win display" just before the big win is in progress. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 98). ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more brilliance, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") is applied to the areas around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 with chrome plating. .) A plating member 36 made of resin is attached.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium). be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51 is a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 100). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of , a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the period of pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the player, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stopping switch 51b are turned off.

In addition, when the touch sensor 51a is turned on from off while the demonstration effect is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, a sound such as "Let's do our best" is output, or the pachinko machine 10 It may be configured to output a sound that matches the worldview of the game, move a movable accessory, or light a lamp.

Also, when the game state in which the game value is easily given to the player by winning the ball of the present invention is shifted to the game state in which it is difficult to give the game value to the player because the ball is difficult to win, the ball As a suggestive display capable of suggesting to the player the suggestive information regarding the transition of the game state in the effect executed after the effect executed only in the game state in which the game value is easily given to the player by winning, A rescue counter display 89 displaying the number of executions of the variable performance of the special symbols and the number of times the ceiling is reached will be described as an example. The number of times of reaching the ceiling may be displayed, or the number of times of big wins and the number of times of limiter are displayed when the game state to be shifted based on the number of times of big wins changes (that is, the limiter function). Alternatively, when the game state shifts based on the occurrence of a big win, a series of pending endings during the big win (jackpot ending) that suggests to the player that a big win will occur due to a special symbol variation effect that is suspended during the big win ending effect Confirmation, for example, "V acquisition!", etc.) may be displayed.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 97, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer responsible for each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery A random number generator used for the system, a clock pulse generator circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 100). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120 , the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121 , and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 503 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 100) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 98, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and a large number of nails, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62 for guiding the balls, and a winning ball. , a variable prize winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit of the third pattern occurs, and a first special prize that is one of the third patterns (so-called special patterns). A first start port 64 that triggers the lottery of symbols, a second start port 71 that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, and a through that triggers the lottery of the second symbol (so-called normal symbol). A variable display device unit 80 having a gate 67, an ordinary electronic device 72 that allows a ball to enter the second starting port 71 by being in an open state, a third pattern display device 81, a second pattern display device 83, etc. and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 .

The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting opening 71, the ordinary electric terminal 72, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Also, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 96) of the front frame 14. FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 98, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 96). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 100) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 98) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 98) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the central part (hereinafter, the act of shooting a ball with momentum hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as a "right-handed game". On the other hand, the act of causing the shot ball to pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is called a “left-handed game”). In the third embodiment, in a left-handed game, the ball can enter or is likely to enter the first starting port 64, while the ball enters the second starting port 71, the variable winning device 65, and the through gate 67. It is configured so that it is difficult or does not enter the ball. Also, in a right-handed game, the ball can or easily enter the second starting port 71, the variable winning device 65, and the through gate 67, while the ball is difficult or likely to enter the first starting port 64. configured not to.

Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, an arc member 70 made of resin is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

On the upper right side of the game area in the front view (upper right side in FIG. 98), a special pattern provided with a state LED group 37a, a special LED group 37b, and a right-handed notification lamp 37c, which are composed of a plurality of LEDs that are light emitting means. A display device 37 is provided. The special symbol display device 37 displays each variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 100) described later (hereinafter, variable display of both special symbols is referred to as " "dynamic display") is performed, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The status LED group 37a indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variable display has not been performed among the balls that have won (entered) the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, which will be described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds (hereinafter, a round may be simply referred to as “R”) and an error display are indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors indicates various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot refers to the period from opening to closing of the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a that opens and closes the variable prize winning device 65, which will be described later, to divide the number of prize balls in the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when "30 seconds" elapses after the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is started, or 10 balls win during the opening of the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, It is configured to run one "round".

In addition, in the round in the jackpot game state (small win game state), one opening of the variable winning device 65 is described as one round, but the variable winning device 65 may be opened multiple times in one round. good.

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 composed of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game executed based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 64. FIG. In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 71. FIG.

Specifically, in the upper LED group 37b1, a dynamic After displaying (in the third embodiment, the LEDs from the uppermost LED in the upper LED group 37b1 to the lower LED are sequentially lit one by one, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a design indicating the determination result (the third embodiment , any one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns is stopped and displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 displays dynamic display ( In the third embodiment, the lower LEDs of the lower LED group 37b2 are sequentially lit one by one from the uppermost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed. Any one of a total of 64 kinds of stop patterns is stopped and displayed by combining each lighting pattern of the 6 LEDs.

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a jackpot, the type (type) of the jackpot is displayed. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, a win/loss determination (jack lottery) is performed to determine whether or not a ball entered into the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 is a big hit, and if it is determined to be a big hit in each win/fail determination, , the jackpot type is also determined according to the winning prize openings 64 and 71, and the variable prize winning device 65 is opened and closed according to each jackpot type.

As the jackpot type determined in the third embodiment, based on the winning to the first start port 64, "4 rounds time saving jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as jackpot type "time saving A")", "6 rounds Time-saving jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as jackpot type “time-saving B”)”, “10 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as jackpot type “probability variable A”)” are prepared (Fig. 103 (a )reference). In addition, based on the winning of the second start port 71, "variable probability A", "4 rounds variable probability jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as jackpot type "variable probability B")", "6 rounds probability variable jackpot (hereinafter, jackpot The type "probability variation C" may be called)" is prepared (see FIG. 103(b)).

Here, "normal game state" refers to a game state that is not "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", jackpot probability of each special symbol , and a state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is normal (that is, a low probability state) and the opening of the normal electrode 72 is short. That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of each special pattern is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the normal pattern hits than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "general pattern high probability time reduction state". It is configured so that the probability is low (equivalent to the “normal pattern low probability time shortening state”) and the opening time of the normal electric 72 is also short.

Although details will be described later, in the "normal game state", when a so-called right-handed game is played, the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 71 (hereinafter referred to as the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 71). This is sometimes referred to as a "wining assist state"), but is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. It should be noted that, in the "normal game state", if a ball fired in a right-handed game is detected (for example, detection of a ball passing through the through gate 67, etc.), it means that a game that is not encouraged is being executed. In order to suggest to the player and the people involved in the hall, a predetermined warning (for example, voice output of "Please return to the left-handed game" or display of "Please return to the left-handed game" on the third symbol display device 81 etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the non-recommended right-handed game in the "normal game state", and to realize the game performance according to the game specifications. As an effect to be executed after the variable effect is executed only in a game state where it is easy to give a game value to the player by winning the ball of the present invention, it is performed only in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state". The background, character design, production pattern, etc., which are performed in the "normal game state" that is executed after the special design variation effect that is executed will be described as an example. It may be a variable effect of special symbols such as the background, character pattern, effect pattern, etc. performed in the "normal game state" that is performed after the variable effect of the special symbol that is performed only is performed. It may be the background, character design, effect pattern, etc., which are performed in the "normal game state" after the special symbol variation effect is performed only in the "state", or in the jackpot game state. The background, character design, performance pattern, etc. performed in the jackpot ending performed after the jackpot round performance performed only is performed, or the jackpot ending performance performed only in the small winning game state. A small winning ending production such as a background, a character design, a production pattern, etc. performed only in the small winning ending executed after the winning may be used.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the winning probability of the special symbols is low, a predetermined number of times ("250 times" in the third embodiment) are continuously won in the dynamic display. If not, as a relief measure for the player, although the probability of winning the jackpot of the special symbols and the probability of winning the normal symbols are in a low probability state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened and the normal electric combination 72 is opened. Equipped with a function (so-called ceiling function) that generates a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" that lengthens the time (hereinafter, when the probability of winning a special symbol is low probability, in the dynamic display 250 times” to enter the “normal low probability time reduction state” without winning the jackpot continuously is called “relief condition fulfillment”, and when the probability of winning a special symbol is low probability. The number of times “relief conditions are satisfied” may be referred to as “relief condition satisfaction times”). If the relief condition is met, a special effect that indicates that the game will move to a "normal low probability time reduction state" (for example, a character display such as "reach the ceiling!", It is possible to suggest that the game state will shift. special effects, etc.) can be displayed.

In addition, the second start opening 71 accompanied by the normal electric part 72 will be described as an example of the winning opening in which the ball is easily won by the movement of the movable object of the present invention, but the movement of the movable object will win the prize. Examples of easily accessible winning slots include a small winning slot (not shown) with a small winning slot opening and closing plate that operates based on winning a small prize, and other winning slots that are activated due to winning a prize. A general prize winning port 63 or starting port with a non-electric accessory (not shown), or a variable winning device 65 with a big winning port opening/closing plate 65a that operates when a big win is won may be used.

Then, the "general figure high probability time shortening state" is a low probability state similar to the "normal game state" and the "general figure low probability time shortening state" described later, but the jackpot probability of each special symbol is a normal symbol As the probability of winning increases, the time of variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter, variable display of normal symbols is referred to as "variable display") is shortened, and the opening time of normal electric role 72 is increased (hereinafter, normal symbols As the probability of winning increases, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is extended. In this “normal figure high probability time shortening state”, the normal electric 72 provided above the second starting port 71 in the front view becomes easy to be in an open state, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is the second starting port 71 It becomes a state where it is easy to enter the ball.

That is, in the "general figure high probability time shortening state", although the jackpot probability of the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit by the normal symbol is easily derived in a short time than the "normal game state", This is a state in which the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72 is prolonged. Therefore, in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", it is easy to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the second start port 71, so the prize ball based on the win to the second start port 71 (for example, 1 It is possible to play the game while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in possession by obtaining pieces/winning prizes.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is a predetermined number of times after the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is started (in the third embodiment, " 50 times”), the winning probability of normal symbols is in a high probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times, the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" is changed to the "normal game state". As a variable effect performed only in a game state where it is easy to give a game value to a player by winning the ball of the present invention, the background, character design, effect pattern, etc. I will explain the variable effect of the special pattern as an example, but it may be the variable effect of the special pattern such as the background, character pattern, production pattern, etc. that is performed only in the "probability variable state", or only in the "low probability time shortened state". It may be a variable performance of a special pattern such as a background, a character pattern, a performance pattern, etc., or a big hit performance such as a background, a character pattern, a performance pattern, etc. performed only in the big win game state, or performed only in the small win game state. A small winning effect such as a background, a character design, or a performance pattern may be used.

In addition, when it is detected that the ball is shot by a left-handed game in the "ordinary figure high probability time shortening state", "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state" or "probability fluctuation state" described later (for example, the second 1 detection of a winning ball into the starting hole 64, etc.), and a predetermined warning (e.g., "Please hit right") to suggest to players and hall officials that a game that is not encouraged is being executed. ”, a display of “Please hit right”, etc.). By configuring in this way, it is suppressed that the non-encouraged left-handed game is continuously executed in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or "probability fluctuation state" As a result, it is possible to realize the playability according to the game specifications. In addition, as a game state in which the game value is easily given to the player by winning the ball of the present invention, a "normal figure high probability time shortening state" in which the ball easily wins in the second start port 71 accompanied by the normal electric combination 72 is provided. However, for example, the normal electric 72 may be associated with the first starting port 64 to provide a "normal figure high probability time shortening state" in which the ball is likely to win the first starting port 64 However, a small winning game state in which the ball is likely to enter the small winning opening/closing plate attached thereto, or a big winning game state in which the ball is likely to enter the variable winning device 65 attached to the large winning opening/closing plate 65a may be used. .

Then, the "general pattern low probability time reduction state" is a low probability state similar to the "normal game state" and the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" described later, and the jackpot probability of each special pattern is normal. While the probability of winning is in a state as low as the "normal game state", the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is "variable probability state" and "shortened high probability time state of normal patterns". (Hereinafter, while the probability of hitting the normal pattern is low, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is increased. In addition, the "high-precision time-saving function" and "low-precision time-saving function" may be collectively referred to as "time-saving function"). The ball will enter the second starting port 71 easily.

That is, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", although the jackpot probability of the special pattern and the probability of the normal pattern are equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit due to the variable display of the normal pattern is higher than the "normal game state" This is a state in which it is easy to be drawn out in a short time, and the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72 is long. Therefore, in the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", it is easy to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the second start port 71, so the prize ball based on the win to the second start port 71 (for example, 1 It is possible to play the game while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in possession by obtaining pieces/winning prizes.

This "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is when the jackpot is not won continuously "250 times" in the low probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot, that is, in the low probability state of the special pattern "250 times ” is performed, when the losing continues to be extracted, it is configured to shift to the “normal pattern low probability time shortening state”.

In addition, the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" is a predetermined specified number of times ("379 times" in the third embodiment) of special symbols after the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" is started. Until the dynamic display is executed, the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened, and the open time of the normal electric part 72 is extended. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times, the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" is changed to the "normal game state".

In addition, when it shifts from the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state", it is configured so as not to be able to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" again. On the other hand, based on the fulfillment of the relief condition, a "general pattern low probability time reduction state" occurs, and in the "general pattern low probability time reduction state", the time reduction end condition based on the number of times of dynamic display of special symbols is established. In the case of shifting to the "normal game state", if the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols reaches the number of relief condition establishment times, it is configured to be able to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state". may When the end condition of the game state in which game value is easily given to the player by winning the ball of the present invention is established, the game state is shifted to the game state in which it is difficult to give game value to the player because the ball is difficult to win. As an example, the case of transitioning to the "normal game state" when the end condition of the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" is satisfied has been described, for example, when the end condition of the "probability fluctuation state" is satisfied Normal game state” or “time reduction state” may be transferred, or when the end condition of the jackpot game state is satisfied, “normal game state”, “probability fluctuation state” or “general figure high probability time reduction state” , or when the end condition of the small winning game state is established, it may be shifted to "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state" or "general figure high probability time shortening state".

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state", as an added value after the end of the jackpot, it is a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special pattern is increased, and the probability of winning of the normal pattern is increased, and the high-accuracy time-saving function is activated. state.

That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which a big winning result by special symbols is easily derived, a winning result by normal symbols is easily derived, and further, the open state of the normal electric combination 72 is prolonged. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", since the ball fired by the right-handed game easily enters the second starting port 71, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed, and the second starting A prize ball (for example, 1 ball/winning prize) is obtained based on the winning to the mouth 71, and the game can be played while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in the player's possession. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", it is possible to play a game in a state in which a big winning game (special game state) based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is likely to occur.

In addition, as an advantageous state advantageous to the player of the present invention, the high probability state of the normal pattern, that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" will be described as an example. A high-probability state, that is, a "probability fluctuation state" or a "latency probability fluctuation state" may be used, or a big win state or a small win state may be used. Also, as a disadvantageous state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state, the low probability state of the normal pattern, that is, the "normal game state" will be described as an example. It may be a high probability time shortening state, a latent probability fluctuation state, or a small winning game state.

Here, each jackpot type will be described. The jackpot type "time reduction A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four, and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the fourth round. In the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, this jackpot type "short time A" can be selected, and after the jackpot of the jackpot type "short time A" It is configured to shift to "definite time reduction state".

Next, the jackpot type "time reduction B" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the sixth round. In the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, this jackpot type "short time B" can be selected, and after the jackpot of the jackpot type "short time B" It is configured to shift to "definite time reduction state".

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the third embodiment, this jackpot type "variable probability A" can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and after the jackpot of the jackpot type "variable probability A", the "probability fluctuation state ” is configured to move to

Next, the jackpot type "Variable Probability B" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4, and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the fourth round. In the third embodiment, the "probability variation B" jackpot type can be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and after the jackpot type "probability variation B" is completed, the state shifts to the "probability fluctuation state". is configured to

Next, the jackpot type "probability variable C" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 6th round. In the third embodiment, this jackpot type "probability variable C" can be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and after the jackpot of the jackpot type "probability variable C" is completed, the state shifts to "probability fluctuation state". is configured as

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction A", and the jackpot type "time reduction B". There are 21 display patterns corresponding to , and 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A", for a total of 64 display patterns. Each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type, and is associated with a random display pattern in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, while the stop display of losing can be recognized, any stop of the jackpot types "time reduction A", "time reduction B" and "variable probability A" It is configured so that it is difficult to identify whether it is a display.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to losing, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability A", and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability There are 21 types of display patterns corresponding to "B" and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "variable probability C", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. And each display pattern does not have specific regularity for every jackpot type similarly to the upper LED group 37b1, and the random display pattern is beforehand matched. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, while the stop display of losing can be recognized, any stop of the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B" or "variable probability C" It is configured so that it is difficult to identify whether it is a display.

By configuring in this way, even when each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped, It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish which kind of jackpot only by the display result of the variable presentation, and a game property is created that makes the player guess which kind of jackpot it is, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is a lamp for suggesting a game state in which the ball is encouraged to be shot in a right-handed game. This right-handed notification lamp 37c is in a non-lighting state in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged and right-handed games are not encouraged, while in the "probability fluctuation state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, " Ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state” or “normal pattern low probability time shortening state”, or lighted state during jackpot game. The player can recognize whether or not a right-handed game should be played by checking the right-handed informing lamp 37c and the right-handed game suggestion display on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加As a state that can be shifted when a predetermined condition is established in the state that can be shifted by deriving the hit result of the present invention, the variable production of special symbols is executed a specified number of times in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state". "Normal game state" that is transferred by the following will be described as an example, but for example, "normal game state" or "normal It may be a "high probability time reduction state", or a "normal game state" that is shifted by performing a specified number of special symbol fluctuation effects in the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", or in the jackpot standby state It may be a big winning game state shifted by the ball passing through the through gate, or a small winning game state shifted by the ball passing through the through gate in the small winning waiting state.

A game area of the game board 13 is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 3 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display unit 80, the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 (hereinafter referred to as "starting ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71") Triggered by "win"), while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the special pattern display device 37, the liquid crystal display that performs the variation effect of the third pattern according to the game state. (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device"), and a second symbol display composed of LEDs capable of executing variable display of normal symbols using the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. A device 83 (hereinafter, the second symbol display device 83 may be referred to as a "normal symbol display device 83" for convenience of explanation) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 100), which will be described later. , are displayed.

Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 99) is composed of a plurality of patterns, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the third pattern is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the third embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is controlled by the main controller 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed by the special pattern display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special pattern display device 37 is performed using the third pattern of the third pattern display device 81. It is. In place of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels, LEDs, or the like.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when both the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are suspended, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed ( So-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation) is configured to be possible. That is, during execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the start winning to the first starting port 64, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is suspended based on the starting winning to the first starting port 64. In this state, furthermore, when the second starting port 71 is started and won, the dynamic display of the second special symbol that has won later is executed before the dynamic display of the first special symbol that has won first. configured to obtain

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 99(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 99(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a back pattern made of a wooden box and a number from "0" to "9". The main design with "9") has a large number on the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) have characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. almost all over the front of the wooden box. An imitation accessory pattern is added, and an even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern so as to be displayed in green and small and on the front side of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the lottery result of any of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 100) described later is a big win, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is constructed so that a jackpot is generated after the variable performance is completed. For example, in the "normal game state", if the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, mainly the main patterns with the numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are aligned. is done. In addition, if you win the jackpot type “short time B”, which has a larger number of rounds than the jackpot type “short time A”, the main numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “9” are attached. A variable production in which the patterns are aligned is performed. In addition, when winning the jackpot type “probability variable A”, mainly, a variation performance is performed in which the main symbols with the number “7” are aligned.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that all the main symbols can appear when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won. Specifically, for example, even when the jackpot type “probability variable A” is won, there is a case where a variation performance is performed in which the same main symbols with the numbers “2” and “8” are aligned. By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the variable performance is stopped, the content of the game value that can be given cannot be determined, and by performing the promotion performance during the big win, etc., the game variation is rich. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a game state in which it is difficult to give a game value to a player because the ball of the present invention is difficult to win, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first start hole 64, which is not accompanied by a movable object or the like that facilitates ball entry. In addition, the ordinary electric combination 72 is difficult to operate or does not operate to the second starting port 71 associated with the ordinary electric combination 72, so that it is difficult to give the game value to the player from the "normal high-precision game state". A "normal game state", which is a game state, will be described as an example. A game state after a small hit game state that makes it more difficult to give a game value to a player "Variation state", "normal game state", etc.), and the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a to the variable winning device 65 accompanied by the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is difficult to operate or does not operate, so that the jackpot game The game state after the jackpot game state in which it is difficult to give the game value to the player from the state Fluctuation state”, or “normal game state”, etc.) may be used.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds is the main display region Dm in which the third pattern is variably produced and reserved. A cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of balls and the like, and the other upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main patterns are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform a variable performance. It should be noted that the arrangement of numbers may be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, the left symbol row Z1 may be arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, while the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and when performing a variable effect corresponding to the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state, the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3. →The third symbols are stop-displayed on the activated line L1 in the order of the middle symbol row Z2. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning special symbol set (displayed) for each game state. be done.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm.

In the cockpit display area Db, the variation display (variation effect) of the balls entered in the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 corresponding to the special symbol set for each game state is not executed. This is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls).

In the small area Ds1 on the left side of the sub-display area Ds, in the "normal game state", the number of times the relief condition is established, and the dynamic display of the special symbols in the low probability state of the special symbols from the previous big win or the initial state is executed. A relief counter display 89 indicating the number of times is configured to be displayable. The relief counter display 89 includes a display relief counter denominator 89a indicating the number of times relief conditions are met ("250 times" in the third embodiment), and a low number of special symbols executed from the initial state or after the special symbol jackpot to the present. and a relief counter numerator 89b for display indicating the number of executions ("58 times" in the example of FIG. 99) in the probability state.

In the example shown in FIG. 99, the number of relief conditions established is "250 times", and the number of executions in the low-probability state of the special symbols executed from the initial state or after the special symbol jackpot to the present is "58 times". Since it is, by executing the dynamic display of the special symbol "192 times" remaining, it shows that the relief condition is satisfied and it is in a state of shifting to "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state" .

By displaying the relief counter display 89, the player can grasp the remaining number of executions of the special symbols until the relief condition is satisfied. Regardless, even if a situation (so-called addiction) in which a big win is not won continues, the game can be continued with peace of mind by confirming the relief counter display 89 .

It should be noted that, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, after the relief condition is met and the state shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the specified number of times ("379 times" in the third embodiment) of special symbols When the dynamic display is executed without winning the jackpot, and when it shifts to the "normal game state" again, it is not possible to shift from the "normal game state" to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" again. is configured to Therefore, when the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" is shifted to the "normal game state", the relief counter display 89 is configured not to be displayed.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during the "probability fluctuation state" that shifts after the special symbol jackpot, or due to the occurrence of a power failure during the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" Even when the power is cut off, the relief counter display 89 can be displayed from the start of the "normal game state" that shifts after the "probability fluctuation state" or the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" ends. ing.

In the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds, there are a dynamic display of the first special symbol and a fourth symbol display area 87 for the special symbol 1 that can change in synchronization with the number of held balls, and a dynamic display area of the second special symbol. A fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 that can be changed in synchronization with the target display and the number of reserved balls is configured to be displayable.

The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 includes a reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 that displays the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in numbers, and a dynamic display of the first special symbol (variation effect) It is composed of a special figure 1 variable area 87b that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 is configured to be able to display the reservation number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the range of "0" to "4" in numerical designs. Specifically, when the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved dynamic display of the first special symbol is 0, and reserved for special figure 1 When the number display 87a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 1, and the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "2". If it is, it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 2, and if the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "3", the number of the first special symbol It shows that the number of pending dynamic display is 3, and if the number of pending display 87a for special figure 1 displays "4", the number of pending dynamic display of the first special symbol is 4. indicates that there is

That is, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 is the content of the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. , and in all game states in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, so as to match the content of the number of pending balls in the pending symbol display area Db1 described later. to be displayed. In addition, almost all game states (big hit game state and small hit game state It may be configured not to be displayed in) and displayed in the same manner, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", or "probability fluctuation state”, it is displayed in a mode smaller in size than the pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db.

The special figure 1 variable area 87b is a display area for showing the execution and result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and is configured such that the display color of the square symbol can be changed. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special figure 1 variation area 87b is white→red→orange→yellow→green→light blue→blue→ It is configured to change at a high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, change again from white to red to . . . during execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Then, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the special figure 1 variable area 87b is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square pattern of the variation area 87b for special figure 1 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was lost, and the square pattern of the variation area 87b for special figure 1 is stopped in red, the dynamic display of the first special symbol indicates a big win. That is, the square pattern of the special figure 1 variable area 87b is displayed so as to correspond to the display contents of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the main display. All game states displayed in the area Dm are configured to be synchronized with the display contents of the main display area Dm.

The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 includes a reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 that displays the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in numbers, and a dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect) It is composed of a special figure 2 variable area 88b that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 is configured so that the number of reserved numbers for dynamic display of the second special symbol can be displayed in the range of "0" to "4". Specifically, when the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0, and reserved for special figure 2 When the number display 88a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1, and the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "2". If it is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 2, and when the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "3", the second special symbol It shows that the number of pending dynamic display is 3, and if the special figure 2 pending number display 88a displays "4", the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol is 4. indicates that there is

That is, the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 is the contents of the number of reserved balls of dynamic display of the second special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. , and in all game states in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, so as to match the content of the number of pending balls in the pending symbol display area Db2 described later. to be displayed.

Special figure 2 variation area 88b is a display area for showing the execution and result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, similar to special figure 1 variation area 87b, the display color of the square symbol is configured to be changeable. It is Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special figure 2 variation area 88b is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It is configured to change at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, repeat the change from white to red to . . . during dynamic display of the second special symbol. Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the special figure 2 variable area 88b is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square pattern of the special figure 2 variation area 88b is stopped in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special figure was lost, and the square figure of the special figure 2 variation area 88b is stopped in red, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to indicate that it was a big hit. That is, the square pattern of the special figure 2 variable area 88b is displayed so as to correspond to the display contents of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the main display. All game states displayed in the area Dm are configured to be synchronized with the display contents of the main display area Dm.

On the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 99(b), for example, in the "normal game state", a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. . In the sub-display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, indicating that it is easier than usual to transition to a big win, and a shooting mode that is encouraged according to the game state. etc. are suggested to the player. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair, the color of the usually white headband, and the appearance of another character.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one aspect of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 accompanying the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the variation of 1 It is constructed so that a so-called "pseudo run", in which the pseudo fluctuation of the third symbol is continuously carried out a plurality of times in the display, can be carried out. “Pseudo-run” is a type of advance notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big win as a result of the variable display in which the “pseudo-run” is executed. and the variable elements of "pseudo-variation" are performed one or more times.

In "pseudo continuation", the number of repetitions of the variable elements of "pseudo stop" and "pseudo variation" performed during this one variation display (that is, the number of times the variation elements of "pseudo variation" are performed continuously) is large. As a matter of fact, the number of repetitions is determined so as to increase the expectation that a big win will be awarded after the variable display. As a result, the more the "pseudo-variation" variable element is repeated during the variable display of 1, the more the player can feel that the possibility of winning a big win increases. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the game by performing the variable performance by the "pseudo-continuation".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the "pseudo run" is executed, the number of times this "pseudo" variable element is performed is "x 3 ("pseudo change") on the third symbol display device 81. is performed three times)”, so that the player can easily recognize the degree of expectation.

The sound ramp control device 113 draws lots or discriminates (for example, game state determination means) whether or not to execute the "pseudo-continuation" based on the variation pattern command, which will be described later, transmitted from the main control device 110, and determines the "pseudo-continuation". ” will be executed. In addition, in one variation display in which the "pseudo-run" can be executed (for example, a specific game state) in which the "pseudo-run" can be executed, each time the variable element of the "pseudo-run" is executed, The number of fluctuation elements of the “pseudo fluctuation” is added (for example, predetermined effect number counting means), and the result of this addition is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Then, when a confirmation command (for example, a specific command) to be described later is received from the main control device 110, the number of pseudo fluctuations is cleared to "0", and the "pseudo fluctuation" displayed on the third pattern display device 81 Eliminate the number of variable elements of .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variable effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol When the ball enters the first starting port 64, or the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) changes the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (dynamic display). When a ball enters the second starting port 71 while being held, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of held balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 or the number for special figure 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 It is also displayed in the reserved number display 88a, and further, the variation effect of the special symbol corresponding to the game state is also displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the reserved symbol display area Db1 of the cockpit display area Db. be

In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved ball (number of reserved balls 1 time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed according to the game state. Designs ("○" design (white circle design) in the normal display mode) are displayed respectively, and according to the number of displayed reserved designs displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, depending on the game state The number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed (prioritized display) is displayed.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved design is displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1a, the first special design that is set to be displayed according to the gaming state Or it shows that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed one each in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, the game state Indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed and set according to is two times, and three in total, one each in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c When the reserved pattern is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern set to be displayed according to the game state is three times, and the first to fourth reserved patterns are displayed. When a total of four reserved symbols are displayed one each in the areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is four times. indicates that In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special design or the second special design set to be displayed according to the game state is 0. This indicates that there is no pending variable effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, only one of the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol can be executed, and the second special symbol can be executed. Although it is configured to be able to execute the lottery game preferentially, it may be configured to execute the lottery game of special symbols according to the order of winning (so-called winning order fluctuation), and the first special symbol The first lottery game and the second special symbol lottery game may be configured to be executable at the same time. Further, the third symbol display device 81 may simultaneously display (execute) the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol.

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the first reservation symbol display area Db1a, and execution symbols larger than the reservation symbols displayed in the reservation symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d are provided. configured to be displayed. Further, in this execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a are moved (shifted) and displayed as executed symbols.

The executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 are erased when the variable effect being executed in the main display area Dm is completed, and the displayed suspended symbols are shifted to the lower reserved symbols as the executed symbols are erased. It moves and is displayed as a pattern. Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol in the "normal game state", it was displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol. When the executed symbols are erased, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a are moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved design displayed in the second reserved design display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the first reserved design display area Db1a. Further, the reserved design displayed in the third reserved design display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the second reserved design display area Db1b. Further, the reserved design displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the third reserved design display area Db1c.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the number of suspended balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is configured to be suspended up to four times at maximum. The number of balls is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the holding balls are displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. A number may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 98, the description is continued. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which the ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 performs a normal symbol winning lottery due to the turn-on. This through gate 67 is only used as a lottery trigger for variable display of normal symbols, and is constructed so that prize balls or the like are not paid out even when a ball passes through. In addition, a normal prize winning opening capable of acquiring a normal symbol lottery opportunity may be provided, and a normal symbol lottery opportunity may be obtained, and a predetermined prize ball may be paid out.

Further, when the dynamic display of the special pattern wins a big win, the big win game may be started by passing the ball through the through gate 67 after the dynamic display of the big win is finished.

When configured in this way, in the dynamic display of the big win in all game states (for example, the first game state), the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect to notify that the big win has been won, and the big win is performed. After the dynamic display ends, a message such as "Please aim at the through gate" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, first effect), and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a big hit state ( For example, it shifts to a second game state), and a jackpot effect (for example, a specific effect) is started.

With this configuration, after the dynamic display of the big win is over, the state does not shift to the big win state until the ball is passed through the through gate 67, and the opening of the variable winning device 65 is not started, so that the player can win the big win. After the end of the dynamic display, the shooting of the game ball can be stopped before the ball is passed through the through gate 67, and the game can be temporarily paused (for example, restroom break).

On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, an ordinary electric terminal 72 is arranged. The normal electric element 72 is mainly composed of a retractable plate 72a and a normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the retractable plate 72a.

The main controller 110 (see FIG. 100) of the third embodiment normally maintains the protruding/retracting plate 72a of the ordinary electric member 72 in a projecting state, and covers the upper side of the second starting port 71 when viewed from the front. It prevents the ball from flowing into the second starting port 71 . Then, when winning is won by the variable display of the normal symbols, the normal electric solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the hive plate 72a of the normal electric 72 protrudes for the predetermined time. It is driven from the state to the immersed state in which the ball is immersed in the game board 13, and the ball is configured to be able to flow into the second start port 71, and the ball is played to the right and flows down the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. It is configured to be in a state in which the ball can easily enter the second starting port 71, that is, in a prize assisting state.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a win in the variable display of normal symbols changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" and "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", the winning probability of the normal pattern is set to a low probability state (for example, 70/100), and in the variable display of the normal pattern, the "probability fluctuation state ”and “General pattern high probability time shortening state”, making it difficult to enter the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 into the immersive state (open state), “Probability fluctuation state” and “General pattern It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the second starting port 71 from the high probability time shortening state. On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state", the winning probability of normal symbols is set to a high probability state (for example, 99/100), and in the variable display of normal symbols "normal game state" and " By making it easier to win a win than the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", the haunting plate 72a of the ordinary electric worker 72 is made easier to enter (open state), and the second start port 71 can be easily won. Configure. It should be noted that, in the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" and "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", it was explained that the probability of winning the normal pattern is different, but the number of times the normal electric role 72 is opened, the opening time, etc. It may be configured to have different patterns. Specifically, for example, in the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state", the number of times of opening based on one winning may be configured to be greater than the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", or once The opening time may be configured to be longer than the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". On the other hand, "Normal low probability time reduction state" has a lower winning probability than "Normal high probability time reduction state", so "Normal low probability time reduction state" and "Normal high probability time reduction state" In order to make the winning ratio to the second start port 71 about the same, in the "normal figure low probability time reduction state", the number of times of opening based on one winning is more than "normal figure high probability time reduction state" It may be configured to do, or may be configured to make one opening time longer than the "general pattern high probability time shortening state".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the high-probability state of the normal symbols, the variable display derives a hit with a high probability (that is, 99%), so the "probability fluctuation state" in which the normal symbols are in a high-probability state; In the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", most of the balls fired in the right-handed game are configured to be able to win the second start port 71. On the other hand, among the low-probability states of the normal symbols, in the "normal game state", although the variable display can lead to a win with a low probability (that is, 70%), the opening time of the normal electrode 72 is short, It is configured such that a ball shot in a right-handed game is unlikely to enter the second starting port 71.例文帳に追加In addition, among the low probability states of normal symbols, in the "normal low probability time reduction state", the variable display is in a state in which a win can be derived with a low probability (that is, 70%), and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is a long time like the "probability fluctuation state" and "ordinary figure high probability time shortening state", so that the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the second start port 71.

As a result, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the ball fired in the right-handed game is entered into the second start port 71 while playing the game. By making it possible to perform the above, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of own balls from the "normal game state" by paying out the prize balls based on the winning to the second start port 71. .

In addition, as in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", instead of changing the probability of winning the normal symbol from the "normal game state", according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal electric It is also possible to change the time for which the haunting board 72a of the role 72 is immersed (opened) or the number of times the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 is immersed (opened) per time. Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary figure high probability time reduction state", the time for the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 to be immersed is made longer than the "normal game state", or one hit , the number of times that the haunting board 72a of the normal electric combination 72 is immersed may be increased more than in the "normal game state". In addition, in the “probability fluctuation state” or “normal pattern high probability time shortening state”, the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased, the immersion time of the haunt board 72a of the normal electric role 72 is increased, and the normal electric role 72 At least two of increasing the number of retractions of the protruding/retracting plate 72a may be performed at the same time.

The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the third embodiment), a normal electric machine 72 provided above the second start port 71 in front view is activated for a predetermined period of time, and when it stops at a symbol other than a predetermined symbol (“x” symbol in the third embodiment), the normal electric part 72 is deactivated (the closed state is maintained). It is

The number of reserved balls of the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the above-described second symbol reservation lamp 84 (hereinafter referred to as the second symbol reservation lamp 84, for convenience of explanation, "normal symbol reservation lamp 84" ) is also illuminated. Four normal design reserve lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of reserves, and arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81 . Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed according to the number of lighted normal symbol reserved lamps 84. - 特許庁

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83, as in the third embodiment, as well as the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. A part of 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting hole 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. A game nail or the like is planted around the first starting port 64 so that about 6 balls (so-called S1=6) fired in a left-handed game win a prize per minute. When the ball enters the first starting port 64, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by turning on the first starting port switch. (Refer to FIG. 100). Then, the dynamic display according to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the first special symbol according to the game state. A variation effect based on is executed. The first starting hole 64 is also one of the prize winning holes from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game.

On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, there is provided a second starting port 71 through which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric circuit 72 is in the open state. A game nail is planted in the periphery of the second start port 71 so that about 90 balls fired in a right-handed game win a prize per minute when the normal electric part 72 is in an open state. . When the ball enters the second starting port 71, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second starting port switch. (See FIG. 100), a lottery for the second special symbol jackpot is made. Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation based on the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. A performance is performed. The second starting hole 71 is also one of the prize winning holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters the game.

A horizontally long rectangular big prize winning opening is provided in the substantially central portion of the variable prize winning device 65 on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 100) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so that the stop symbol of the big win is displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, three identical symbols ("777 etc.)) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot game. After that, according to the type of jackpot, a jackpot opening/closing plate 65a provided in the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and the game state is shifted to a special game state (jackpot game) in which the ball easily enters the jackpot. In this special game state, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, which is normally closed, is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses, or until 10 balls are won). .

When the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened, it is closed when a predetermined time elapses after opening or when a predetermined number of winnings is detected, and after the closure, the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened again. be. The opening/closing operation of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is configured to be repeatable up to, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player. As a value (game value) is given, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

Affixing spaces K1 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be viewed through window 35 (see FIG. 96).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65 and 71 are guided through an out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. The winning balls of the winning holes 63 , 64 , 65 and 71 are guided to the ball discharging path and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as the balls passing through the out hole 66 .

Next, referring to FIG. 100, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing a program, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 sets the dynamic display and variable performance of each special symbol in the jackpot lottery, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

In addition, the ROM 202 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reservation number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a fluctuation pattern table 202e, a jackpot release table 202f, a normal pattern random number table 202g, a normal pattern fluctuation table 202h, a normal electronic At least a combination release table 202i and a time saving end condition table 202j are stored. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 . In addition, as an example of moving to another game state when the game state transition condition of the present invention is satisfied, in the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" based on the establishment of the time saving end condition About the case of moving to the "normal game state" I will explain, for example, based on the establishment of probability variable end conditions (for example, limiters and the number of fluctuations) in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal game state", "general figure high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" , or may shift to the left-handed game state based on the establishment of the end condition in the right-handed game state (for example, the establishment of the time-saving end condition).

Here, with reference to FIG. 101, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. perform lottery for big hits, setting of dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, setting of variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of variable display in the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. Therefore, it is used in MPU 201 of main controller 110 . In the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, various control timings, game state transitions, etc. will also be described with reference to FIGS.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third pattern display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot pattern. A jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting a variable performance mode, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and variation pattern selection. A variation type counter CS1 used for . As a state that can be shifted by deriving the winning result of the present invention, a "probability fluctuation state" or a "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" through a jackpot game by deriving a jackpot pattern in a special pattern fluctuation effect ”, for example, it may be “latent probability fluctuation state” or “normal game state” through the jackpot game by the appearance of the jackpot pattern in the special pattern fluctuation effect, or the special pattern By deriving the jackpot pattern in the fluctuation effect of the above, it may be a jackpot waiting state waiting for the start of the jackpot game until a predetermined condition (for example, the ball passes through the through gate, etc.) is established. A small winning game state may be established by deriving a winning symbol.

In addition, for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 83, the normal pattern per counter C4 is used, and for the initial value setting of the normal pattern per counter C4, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used.

Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of "4 milliseconds", which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119). , and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 as appropriate. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved balls related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, "0 to 9999"), and reaches the maximum value (eg, "9999" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999"). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter of a range of "0 to 9999". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 118).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the third embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64 (start win), the first reserve first to It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reservation areas in the fourth area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (starting winning), the second reserve first to It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation area in one of the fourth areas.

The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a big hit. Also, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a big hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be described. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

The jackpot random number table 202a of the third embodiment has a low probability state used when the game state is a special symbol low probability state, and a game state is a special symbol low probability state for a big hit for each set value. It is divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the high probability state of the special pattern with a high probability of becoming.

Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently for each set value. In addition, an increase in the number of large-hit random numbers necessary for shifting from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers corresponding to the losing. That is, when increasing the number of big-hit random numbers in order to shift from a low-probability state to a high-probability state, the number of losing random numbers is reduced, and the decrement is assigned as the number of big-hit random numbers. Thus, by varying the number of big win random numbers according to the game state, the probability of winning a big win is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the jackpot random number table 202a of the third embodiment, when the set value is "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 101, and its value "0 to 100" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of each special symbol with the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is 101 /10000=1.01/100 (that is, 1.01%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 313, and the values "0 to 312" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of the special design of the set value "1" is 313/10000 = 3.13/100 (that is, 3.13%), the special design The high-probability state is set so that the jackpot is about three times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9899 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "101". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9687 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "313 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). In other words, the set value "1" special symbol low probability state (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") loss probability of each special symbol Is set to be 9899/10000 = 98.99/100 (that is, 98.99%), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the special symbol high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is It is set so that 9687/10000=96.87/100 (that is, 96.87%).

That is, at the set value "1", the increase in the number of random numbers for big hits in the high probability state of special symbols is reduced by decreasing the number of random numbers for losing in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. While compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers increased from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" (that is, 9899 or less). is configured to

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 103, and the values "0 to 102" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is 103/ It is set so that 10000=1.03/100 (that is, 1.03%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 315, and the values "0 to 314" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of the special design of the set value "2" is 315/10000 = 3.15/100 (that is, 3.15%), the special design The high-probability state is set so that the jackpot is about three times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9897 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value is "103". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9685 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "315 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the set value "2" special symbol low probability state (that is, "normal game state", "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state") loss probability of each special symbol Is set to be 9897/10000 = 98.97/100 (that is, 98.97%), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the high probability state of special symbols (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is It is set so that 9685/10000=96.85/100 (that is, 96.85%).

That is, at the set value "2", the increase in the number of random numbers for big hits in the high probability state of the special symbols is reduced by decreasing the number of random numbers for losing in the "normal game state" where the staying rate is the highest in the game. While compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers increased from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase accompanying the change of the set value is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the ``normal game state''. (that is, 9897 or less).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "1" (low probability state: 1.01% → 1.03%, high probability state: 3.13%→3.15%), it can be said that this is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "1".

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 105, and the values "0 to 104" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is 105/ It is set so that 10000=1.05/100 (that is, 1.05%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 317, and the values "0 to 316" are the jackpot random numbers. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of the special design of the set value "3" is 317/10000 = 3.17/100 (that is, 3.17%), the special design The high-probability state is set so that the jackpot is about three times easier than the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9895 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value "105". ~9999” is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 9683 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values "317 to 9999" are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( set). That is, the set value "3" special symbol low probability state (that is, "normal game state", "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state") loss probability of each special symbol Is set to be 9895/10000 = 98.95/100 (that is, 98.95%), and the probability of losing each special symbol in the special symbol high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") is It is set so that 9683/10000=96.83/100 (that is, 96.83%).

That is, at the set value "3", the increase in the number of random numbers for big hits in the high-probability state of the special symbols is reduced by decreasing the number of random numbers for losing in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. While compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers increased from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase accompanying the change of the set value is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the ``normal game state''. (that is, 9895 or less).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "2" (low probability state: 1.03% → 1.05%, high probability state: 3.15%→3.17%), it can be said that this is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "2".

In this way, by changing the odds of winning a big win for each set probability value and changing the likelihood of winning a big win, it is possible to change the rate of winning balls for each probability set value, which is given to the player. You can change the amount of game value you get. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of game characteristics of the game played in the pachinko machine 10 and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description continues. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot. in the case of a counter that can take the value of ", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in the third embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, the jackpot is selected from the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area as the first reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71, the jackpot is selected from the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 71. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area as the second reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number (jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot, That is, if it is a random number that becomes a loss (loss random number value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (jackpot random value) that will result in a jackpot, a variable effect The fluctuation pattern and stop type in will be those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. This jackpot type table 202b includes a special-figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a special-figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. and are provided.

Here, with reference to FIG. 103, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described. FIG. 103(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 103(b) is also stored in the ROM 202. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), the jackpot type table 202b is divided into the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a table in which the value of C2 is associated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as the jackpot type, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four rounds, although the jackpot probability of special symbols is in a low probability state, dynamic display of special symbols is performed a specified number of times (third implementation In the form, "50 times"), the jackpot type "short time A" corresponding to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" in which the probability of normal patterns is high until it is executed, and the maximum number of rounds is 6 After the round jackpot, although the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, until the special symbol dynamic display is performed a specified number of times ("50 times" in the third embodiment), the normal symbol winning probability is a high probability state, and the jackpot type "time reduction B" corresponding to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" and the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, dynamic display of special patterns is specified number of times (third embodiment Then, "50 times"), the special symbol win probability is in a high probability state, and the normal symbol win probability is also the dynamic display of the special symbol for a specified number of times ("50 times" in the third embodiment). times”) until it is executed, the “probability fluctuation state” (so-called special time “50 times”), which is a state with a higher probability than the “normal game state”. Sometimes referred to as "ST".) And the jackpot type "probability variation A" corresponding to the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 4 rounds, the dynamic display of the special pattern is the specified number of times (in the third embodiment, "50 times ”) Until the execution, the special symbol win probability is in a high probability state, and the normal symbol win probability is also dynamic display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times (“50 times” in the third embodiment). Until then, the jackpot type "probability variation B" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state", which is a higher probability state than the "normal game state", and the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 6 rounds, the dynamic display of special symbols Until the specified number of times ("50 times" in the third embodiment) is executed, the special symbol win probability becomes a high probability state, and the normal symbol win probability is also the special symbol dynamic display. In the third embodiment, there is a jackpot type "probability variation C" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" which is a higher probability state than the "normal game state" until it is executed ("50 times").

In the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 103(a), the value "0 to 43" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "time saving A", and the jackpot type "time saving B" The value "44-96" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with it, and the value "97-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "probability variable A".

Therefore, in the winning lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d is the value that becomes the jackpot. In this case, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area can be selected from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. If the value of the type counter C2 is '7', the jackpot type 'short time A' can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is '98', the jackpot type 'probability variable A' can be selected.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot type "time reduction A" is 44%, the jackpot type "time reduction B" is 53%, and the jackpot type "probability variable A" is 3%. will be elected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the left-handed game, the first starting port 64 can be won and the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed, but it is difficult to win the second starting port 71. Since the dynamic display of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is mainly executed in the game state of the left-handed game (that is, the "normal game state"). is configured as follows.

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 103(b), when the second special symbol jackpot occurs in all gaming states, the jackpot type "probability variation B" jackpot type counter C2 The value of "0 to 38" is associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "39 to 77" is associated with the jackpot type "variable probability C", and the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "variable probability A". are associated with the values of "78 to 99".

That is, in the lottery for the second special symbols in all game states, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a big hit. , the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area can be selected from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "variable probability B" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "variable probability A". can be selected.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot type "variable probability B" is 39%, the jackpot type "variable probability C" is 39%, and the jackpot type "variable probability A" is 22%. will be elected.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105, the game mode in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, and the game state transition conditions and transition destinations in each game state will be described. FIG. 104 shows, in each game state, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the second It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of 2 special symbols and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right. Also, FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the shooting mode in each game state and the shift destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type and the like. Although FIG. 105 also shows the transition of the game state when the game is played in the non-recommended shooting mode, the description thereof will be omitted here for convenience of description.

As shown in FIG. 104, the trigger for transition to the "normal game state" is the initial state at the time of shipment from the factory, the RAM clear state, and the dynamic display of the special symbols in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is "50 times". When executed (so-called electric support end. See FIG. 105.), When the dynamic display of the special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" is executed "50 times" (so-called ST end. See FIG. 105.), Or, when the dynamic display of the special symbol in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" is executed "379 times" (so-called electric support end. See FIG. 105), it becomes.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when shifting from the "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state", the number of times of execution of dynamic display of special symbols after the big win is "50 times” is fixed. In addition, since "Normal high probability time reduction state" is a low probability state of special symbols, the low probability state of special symbols at the time of transition from "Normal high probability time reduction state" to "Normal game state" , the number of dynamic display executions is fixed at 50 times. Therefore, when the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" is shifted to the "normal game state", if the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed "200 times" more in the "normal game state", the relief condition is satisfied. It will be established and will shift to "normal figure low probability time reduction state".

That is, the value of the rescue counter display 89 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is fixed at "50/250" at the time when the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is shifted to the "normal game state". Therefore, even if a power failure or the like occurs during the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" and the power is cut off, the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 is reset (initialized) Even if the audio lamp In the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the control device 113, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display to be executed this time is the fluctuation display immediately after shifting from the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state", If it is immediately after the transition from the ``normal pattern high probability time shortening state'' to the ``normal game state'', ``50/250'' is displayed on the relief counter display 89 to display during the ``normal game state''. The value of the counter display 89 can be displayed correctly.

Furthermore, even when shifting from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state", the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols after the big win is fixed to "50 times", and the "probability fluctuation state" is a special Since the symbol is in the high-probability state, the number of executions of dynamic display in the low-probability state of the special symbol is fixed to "0" at the time of transition from the "variable probability state" to the "normal game state". Therefore, in the case of transition from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state", if the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed "250 more times" in the "normal game state", the relief condition is satisfied and " It will shift to "normal figure low probability time shortening state".

That is, the value of the relief counter display 89 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is fixed at "0/250" when the "probability fluctuation state" is shifted to the "normal game state". Therefore, even if a power failure or the like occurs during the "probability fluctuation state" and the power supply is cut off and the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 is reset (initialized), the audio lamp control device 113 In the control process executed by the MPU 221, it is determined whether or not the variable display to be executed this time is the variable display immediately after shifting from the "probability variable state" to the "normal game state", and the "probability variable state" is changed to the "normal Immediately after shifting to the "game state", by displaying "0/250" on the relief counter display 89, the value of the relief counter display 89 displayed during the "normal game state" can be displayed correctly. . Details of the processing for setting the value of the relief counter display 89 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104, in the "normal game state", as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol winning probability is also in a low probability state. Furthermore, in the "normal game state", the left-handed game is encouraged, and the ball shot in the left-handed game mainly wins the first starting port 64. - 特許庁Then, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "5 seconds to 190 seconds", and the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 is "5 seconds to 190 seconds". (See FIGS. 106 to 110, which will be described later). In addition, in this "normal game state", when a right-handed game is performed, the firing mode is detected by the through gate 67 or the like, and based on the detection, a voice is generated in order to suppress the shooting in the right-handed game. The output device 226 (see FIG. 100) or the like is configured to execute the prohibition of hitting to the right. As a state in which a game in a shooting mode advantageous to the player of the present invention is encouraged, a "general pattern high probability time reduction state" will be described as an example. It may be a variable state, a "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", a big hit game state, a small hit game state, or simply a right-handed game state.

Then, the opportunity to shift to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is the winning of the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" (see FIG. 105).

In this "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", as described above, while the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is a high probability state. Furthermore, in the "normal figure high probability time reduction state", as in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is the second You can win a prize at the starting port 71 . Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is "15 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 106 to 110 to be described later). It should be noted that, in this "normal figure high probability time shortening state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" is the winning of the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B" or "probability variation C" (see FIG. 105).

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is in a high probability state, and the normal symbol winning probability is also in a high probability state. Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the second start port 71 in which the high-accuracy time-saving function is operating. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is "15 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 106 to 110 to be described later). In this "variable probability state", right-handed games are encouraged, so even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is when the jackpot is not won continuously "250 times" in the low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, that is, the low probability of the special pattern This is the case where the failure continues to be extracted while the dynamic display is performed “250 times” in the state (see FIG. 105).

In addition, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is also a low probability state, but the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is long (see FIG. 112). Furthermore, in the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter the second start port 71 in which the low probability time reduction function is operating. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is "15 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 106 to 110 to be described later). In addition, in this "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within a range of, for example, "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the third embodiment, depending on the pending number of suspended variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the rough effect mode of the variable effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and at the time of losing is determined. selected. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a long pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "long") in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected for each effect mode, and a variation time shorter than the long pattern. and a short pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "short") in which a shorter fluctuation time than the middle pattern is likely to be selected. It is

Specifically, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, and "normal reach" as "reach display" "Normal reach" effect mode in which only the variable element is executed, "Super reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and the same "normal reach" change Any one of six performance modes can be selected, including a "Special Reach" performance mode in which variable elements of "Special Reach" are executed by developing from the element.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, there are a "non-reach (long)" production mode, a "non-reach (middle)" production mode, and a "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (long)" production mode, The "reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode may be collectively referred to as "the "non-reach" production mode". In the third symbol display device 81 in which . This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop and "ready-to-win display" does not occur.

In addition, the variable element of "high-speed variation" is, for example, in the variable performance of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 99) is , a variable element that is rapidly scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third pattern is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third pattern cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the previously stop-displayed variable production is irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, specific production modes ("non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode) are excluded. It is configured so that the variable element of "low speed variation" is performed at the

The "low speed variation" variable element means that, in the third symbol variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the "high speed variation" variable element, the third symbol is displayed at a speed that is visible to the player. A moving element that scrolls to In this "low-speed variation" variable element, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in order while allowing the player to recognize the display contents of the third symbol. When the same third symbol is stopped in the two symbol rows (for example, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 99)) which are stopped and displayed first, the "normal reach display" is assumed to occur. While it develops into a variable element, when a different third pattern stops in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 which are stopped and displayed first, the remaining pattern row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is finished. is configured to Details of each variable element including the variable element of "high-speed variation" or the variable element of "low-speed variation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "low speed variation" variation element is performed after the "high speed variation" variation element is performed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stop in order, A different third pattern is stopped in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped first, the remaining one pattern row Z2 is stopped, and one variation effect is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the "low-speed variation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed variation" is performed, and the "high-speed variation" variation is performed. After the completion of the elements, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped at the same time, and the third symbol different from the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (for example, the two symbol rows that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode). is stopped, the other symbol row Z2 is also stopped, and the variation effect of 1 is completed.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode means that the same third pattern is stopped in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped and displayed first in the variation production of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81. Immediately after that, the "normal reach" variable element is executed, and another "reach display", that is, one of the production modes of "reach display" that does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" be.

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "super reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

Among the presentation modes, the "special reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "special reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the third embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting port 64 It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first storage area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second start opening 71, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting opening 71 It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second storage area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the stop pattern selection counter C3 according to the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of variable performances of both special symbols currently on hold (number of pending balls) The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the values is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) of both special symbols in standby.

Also, in the third embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number table 202c of the reservation provided in the ROM202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode, which is a rough mode of the variable effect, is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the acquired third symbol variation effect, In order to change the selection ratio of the production mode according to whether it is a low probability time shortening state or a normal game state, and (3) how many pending ball numbers of the variable production are held. is.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the stop patterns, that is, the "non-reach" performance mode, the "normal reach" performance mode, the "super reach" performance mode, and the "special reach" performance, are used when the jackpot lottery is won and when the jackpot lottery is lost. The degree of expectation for a big win is changed for each performance mode by configuring the mode selection ratio to be different. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the ``non-reach'' performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected.

By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode in which it is easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big win, the stop pattern table 202d makes it easy to select an effect that makes it easy to win a big win and makes it difficult to select an effect that makes it difficult to win a big win. Based on, it is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) which is a rough content of the variable performance. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and a performance mode (stop pattern) of a variable performance is selected based on a stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that makes it difficult to win a big win. Configure to select. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third pattern in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win in the variable performance and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. In the case of the variable performance, it is difficult for the big win to occur, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode (stop pattern), the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, as the second reason, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol is the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible the useless ball (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) based on the ball entering the second start port 71 in the state of reaching.

Specifically, the number of standby times for the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and since the variation production is executed for at least a certain period of time, the "probability In the game state where the ball is likely to enter the second start port 71 in the "variation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol easy to reach. In these game states, if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected, the ball entering the second start port 71 in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached occurs frequently, and the second start port In spite of entering 71, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached, if a variable performance with a long variation time is selected, the first special symbol is suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first start port 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player judges that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the first start hole 64, and the variable effect is terminated and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. Until then, the game is interrupted by stopping the shooting of the balls. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special pattern or second special symbol) is easily reached, and the maximum number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) The number of held balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variable time is likely to be selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball entering the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. can.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), the ball is newly inserted into either the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variable effect cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demonstration screen or the like. When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Instead, they lose interest in the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first start port 64 and the second start port 71 because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will be judged to be a machine with which it is difficult to obtain a game value, and the game will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the number of pending balls of the variable effect is small, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variable time is likely to be selected. there is As a result, a situation in which the third pattern display device 81 is not subjected to the variable performance can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

In addition, as a fourth reason, in the gaming state in which the right-handed game is executed, by setting the execution time of the variable display of the first special symbol long, the number of times of execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is reduced. (that is, to increase the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a right-handed game is recommended in the "probability fluctuation state", the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". When the normal electric combination 72 is in the open state by the right-handed game, the ball can be entered into the second starting port 71, so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be easily executed. However, in spite of the continuation of the right-handed game, the ball does not pass through the through gate 67 that will activate the normal electrode 72, or the ball enters the open normal electrode 72. If the ball is not played, all the reserved balls of the second special pattern that have been stored so far are digested, and there is a possibility that the dynamic display of the second special pattern that becomes executable will be lost. In this way, when there is no executable second special symbol reserved ball, and there is an executable first special symbol reserved ball, dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. Become.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot type that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" is " 3%”, while the ratio of the jackpot type that will shift to the “probability fluctuation state” when winning the jackpot in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is “100%”. (See FIG. 103). Therefore, it is configured to facilitate the continuation of the ``Renso'' when winning the jackpot through the dynamic display of the second special symbol rather than winning the jackpot through the dynamic display of the first special symbol. .

Therefore, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed in spite of the continuation of the right-handed game, and if the dynamic display of the executed first special symbol wins the jackpot, the jackpot is won. There is a high possibility of winning the type ``Time saving A'' or ``Time saving B'', and the possibility of moving to ``High probability time reduction state'' after the big hit becomes high, and the dynamic display of the second special pattern makes a big hit. The possibility that "Renso" will end is higher than in the case.

In order to avoid such an event that the game value obtained by the player is lower than expected, the game state ("probability fluctuation state", "normal figure high probability time reduction state" and In the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state"), by setting the execution time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol long, the number of times of dynamic display of the first special symbol can be reduced as much as possible. In addition, as a special display by the means for counting a specific event of the present invention, only the number of times of special symbol fluctuation effects in the "general pattern high probability time shortening state" may be displayed, but for example, "probability Only the number of times of variable performance of special symbols in "fluctuation state" may be displayed, only the number of times of variable performance of special symbols in "normal game state" may be displayed, or jackpot game Only the number of occurrences of the big win (the number of consecutive games) during the game may be displayed, or only the total number of balls obtained during the big win game may be displayed.

Here, the details of the pending number table 202c will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram schematically showing a special figure 1 reserved number table 202c1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and FIG. 107 schematically shows a special figure 2 reserved number table 202c2 corresponding to the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the first starting port 64, whether the variation effect is appropriate and Based on the game state at the time point and the total number of reservations of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol at the same time point, refer to the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1 to select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 It is configured. Further, when performing the variation performance of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second start port 71, the propriety of the variation performance, the game state at that time, and the second special at that time Based on the total number of reservations of the variable effect of the design, reference is made to the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2, and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 is selected. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c1 for special figure 1 in FIG. 106, at the time of extraction of "normal game state", the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1 to 3". , the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 108(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Also, when extracting a loss in the "normal game state", when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "4", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 108(b)) is selected. On the other hand, when extracting the jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 108(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. Variation of special symbols in a ``normal game state'' as a means for selecting one performance pattern from a plurality of performance patterns in a game state in which it is difficult to give a game value to a player because the balls of the present invention are difficult to win. A case will be described where the production is selected from among a plurality of production patterns. may be selected from among a plurality of performance patterns in the ``latency probability variable state'' in which it is difficult to provide a special pattern, or a jackpot ending in which the variable prize winning device 65 is closed and it is difficult to provide a game value to the player. A performance, a jackpot opening performance or an interval performance may be selected from a plurality of performance patterns, or a small winning ending performance, a small winning opening performance or an interval in which the small prize winning opening is closed and it is difficult to give a game value to the player. An effect may be selected from a plurality of effect patterns. In this case, for example, the jackpot ending effect is a change pending during the jackpot ending effect, regardless of which jackpot round effect is selected and which jackpot ending effect is executed. It is configured to be able to execute a so-called holding continuous effect that can suggest to the player that a big win will occur in the effect.

Next, at the time of extracting the loss of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", A table 202d1 of stop pattern table 202d regardless of the number of pending balls (see FIG. 108(a)) is selected. Also, at the time of jackpot extraction of "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", C table 202d3 of stop pattern table 202d regardless of the number of pending balls (see FIG. 108(c)) is selected.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2 in FIG. 107, when extracting a loss in the "normal game state", when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "1 to 3" , the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 108(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Also, at the time of extracting a loss in the "normal game state", when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "4", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 108(b)) is selected. On the other hand, when extracting the jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 108(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Next, when extracting the loss of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "1" , the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 108(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. In addition, at the time of extracting the loss of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the number of pending balls of the second special pattern is "2 to 4 , the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 108(d)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. On the other hand, at the time of jackpot extraction of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", C table 202d3 of stop pattern table 202d regardless of the number of pending balls (see FIG. 108(c)) is selected. As a means for selecting one effect pattern from a plurality of effect patterns in a game state in which the ball of the present invention is likely to give a game value to the player, a special effect in the ``normal figure high probability time shortening state'' is provided. A case will be described where the pattern variation effect is selected from among a plurality of effect patterns. The special symbol variable performance in the "low probability time shortening state" may be selected from a plurality of performance patterns, and the jackpot round performance in the jackpot game state may be selected from a plurality of performance patterns. The small winning round production in the small winning game state may be selected from a plurality of production patterns.

In addition, when extracting a jackpot in the dynamic display of any special design, the first special design is lost in "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" Also at the time of extraction, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ according to the number of reserved balls. For example, when a big win is won and the number of held balls is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured so that a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected.

In this case, for example, in each rendering mode in which "ready-to-reach display" is executed, a rendering mode in which only the time of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. . By configuring in this way, for example, when the variation production is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four times, even if the variation element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 5 seconds, At the time when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" ends (when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" is recognized), the "ready-to-win display" may occur in the variation performance. Therefore, even if the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the rendering mode in which the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" rendering mode is executed is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variable performance will result in a big hit or a loss at the time of execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds.

In addition, when extracting the first rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", or when extracting the first rotation of the "probability fluctuation state", a short variation pattern (for example, "1 second" variation time The stop pattern table 202d may be configured so that only the variation pattern that becomes ) can be selected.

By configuring in this way, when the first rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or the first rotation of the "probability fluctuation state" is elected to the jackpot (for example, predetermined conditions), the jackpot state ( For example, from the end of the first production), the dynamic display of special symbols that will be a big hit in the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" or "probability fluctuation state" (for example, the second production) After execution, the second time Since the time until the jackpot state is about "1 second", the first jackpot state and the second jackpot state are changed to a continuous one jackpot effect (for example, a specific effect). An effect can be produced on the display device 81 .

That is, by producing two jackpot states as one jackpot state, it is produced as if the number of rounds exceeding the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in one jackpot is being executed, or the number of rounds is executed as if the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in one jackpot is executed. It can be produced as if the number of prize balls that exceeds the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot can be obtained.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108(a) schematically shows an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 108(b) schematically shows an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 108(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. Also, FIG. 108(d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 108(a), in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(b), in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In addition, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

That is, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected on the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode on the B table 202d2. is configured as On the other hand, in the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2, each "reach display" is configured to be selected at the same rate.

Therefore, the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are selected so that the long effect mode and the middle effect mode are different only in the "non-reach" effect mode, so the A table 202d1 is selected in comparison with the B table 202d2. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance tends to be relatively long. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to shorten the variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the A table 202d1.

In this way, in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the pending variable production. configured to For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in which the variable effect time is relatively short is selected. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved. As a state in which a game in a firing mode that is disadvantageous to the player is encouraged from the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" of the present invention, the "normal game state" will be described as an example. It may be "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", it may be a small winning game state, or it may be simply a left-handed game state.

Further, for example, when the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is small, in order to ensure the ball entry time to the first start port 64 (second start port 71), the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode A "non-reach (long)" performance mode with a longer variable performance time is selected. As a result, the ``non-reach (long)'' performance mode with a longer variable presentation time than when the ``non-reach (middle)'' presentation mode is selected can be performed, so that the ball enters the first starting port 64. - 特許庁It becomes easy to secure the time, and by increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is executed can be maintained. .

In addition, in the third embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the first start port 64 Alternatively, the determination of the variable performance based on when the ball enters the second starting port 71 and the determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the entering are made so that substantially the same performance mode is selected. is configured to

Specifically, for example, in the case of a losing variable effect, either one of the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, but the A The table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 have a "non-reach (long)" effect mode, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, or a "special reach" effect mode. are set to the same value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 allocated to .

That is, based on the number of pending balls of the variable production, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the "non-reach" production mode is selected or the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is selected. , and substantially the same effect mode is selected, with the only difference being the time of the variable elements of the "high-speed variation". Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same (similar) even if the game state changes (for example, the number of held balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice" is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of starting winning, the contents of the variable presentation to be executed are substantially the same (similar), and the pre-reading In the variable performance that is the target of the notice, it is possible to execute the performance that does not cause any inconsistency with the contents of the pre-reading notice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”.

Note that the C table 202d3 is a stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of a big win, and since "ready-to-win display" always occurs, the "non-ready-to-win" effect mode is set so as not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(d), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in the D table 202d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

Therefore, as shown in the C table 202d3, in the variable effect at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the "special reach" effect mode>"super reach" effect mode>"normal reach" effect mode, and the A table 202d1, B As shown in the table 202d2 and the D table 202d4, in the variable effect at the time of losing, the selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "normal reach" effect mode > "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. there is Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player according to the performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

From the above, the type of special symbol, the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of pending balls of the variable effect at that time By determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, the game By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on the situation in which is performed, a performance mode for enhancing the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be selected.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened A table 202d may be provided. Also, it may be configured to select the effect mode based on the total reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Furthermore, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d having completely different selection rates for each effect mode may be provided according to the number of pending balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, in performing a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice", the number of pending balls at the time of deciding the pre-reading notice execution The number of pending balls at the time of execution of the variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. In such a case, it is necessary to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the processing complicated.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 118). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting hole 64, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first reservation first to fourth areas. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting hole 71, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 71. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation time (rough variation pattern) of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determine the time of variation. The audio ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the fine pattern variation mode based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1. Also, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as the variation pattern table 202e, a special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 used when the first special symbol is lost, and a special figure 1 big winning variation pattern table 202e2 used when the first special symbol is a big winning. And, a special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 used when the second special symbol is lost, and a special figure 2 big winning variation pattern table 202e4 used when the second special symbol is big winning are prepared.

FIG. 109(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation pattern table 202e2. In addition, FIG. 110 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 stored in the ROM202, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e4 for big hits. As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, each variation pattern table 202e1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of losing, "E0: non-reach (long)" which is referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, and "non-reach (middle)" production mode "E1: non-reach/middle" referred to when is determined, "E2: non-reach/short" referred to when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is determined, and " For "E3: Normal Reach" referred to when the "Normal Reach" production mode is determined, "E4: Super Reach" for reference when the "Super Reach" rendition mode is determined, and "Special Reach" rendition It is divided into "E5: Special Reach" for reference when the mode is determined.

In addition, as the effect mode at the time of the big hit, "E3: Normal reach" referred when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E4: Super reach" referred when the "super reach" effect mode is determined For "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined.

A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the third embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area with the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random value), that is, If the value is lost, refer to the reserved number table 202c1 for special figure 1, and select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time. , the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area was reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the first special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach long" includes "high speed variation (long)" with a total variation time of "15 seconds". variable element + variable element of "low-speed variation"" (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time").

In the example shown in FIG. 109(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach/long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for "Variation element of", and only "Variation element of "High speed variation (long)" + Variation element of "Low speed variation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol, "high-speed change (long)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

Here, each variable element constituting the variation pattern will be described. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of "high speed variation", the variable element of "low speed variation", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" A variable element, a "revariation" variable element, is provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. When the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the like is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the variable production (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). ), and when the “non-reach (middle)” production mode is selected, “5 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the variable production (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “high-speed fluctuation (medium)”), When the "non-reach (short)" effect mode or the like is selected, the variable effect is performed for "2 seconds" at the beginning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed change (short)"). It should be noted that when the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the later-described "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" is started after the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "10 seconds" is executed, and it is determined whether or not the third symbol is visibly scrolled and varied to generate "ready-to-win display". It is a variable element to show. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode are selected, and the "non-reach (long)" production mode, " When the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode is selected, it is performed for "5 seconds" after the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation".

That is, in the "non-reach (middle)" production mode or the "non-reach (short)" production mode, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, each pattern row of the third pattern display device 81 is changed to "low-speed fluctuation is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop) without going through the variable elements of . In addition, when the variable element of this "low-speed variation" ends, the variable effect may end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" rendering mode includes the variable element of "high speed variation" of "10 seconds" and the variable element of "low speed variation" of "5 seconds". A variation production is configured with a variation pattern including. In addition, in the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the variable elements of "high-speed variation" of "5 seconds". Furthermore, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the "high-speed variation" variable element of "2 seconds".

The variation element of "normal reach" is the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "reach formation symbol") in the two symbol rows that stop first in the variation element of "low speed variation". It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur depending on the result of the variation of the symbol row. This "normal reach" variable element is performed for "5 seconds" after the "low speed change" variable element when the "normal reach" effect mode or the like is selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying the "jackpot display", and the pattern of "super reach". A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" variable element, and a pattern that once displays a temporary "loss display" and then executes a "re-fluctuation" variable element are prepared. It is

The variation element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variation element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "battle effect"). This "super reach" variable is performed "40 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "missing display" appears.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variable element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a special effect (for example, "competition effect") different from the predetermined effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "160 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-fluctuation" after the "failure display" appears is prepared.

In addition, it is configured to develop into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" after executing the variable element of "normal reach", but instead of this configuration, reach formation after "low speed change" It may be configured such that when the symbols stop, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" develops directly without going through the variable element of "Normal Reach". Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display", and the "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "big win display" appears after execution of the variable element of "re-variation".

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of the "missing display", the variable elements of the "re-variation" are not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-fluctuation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "loss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot If you go to , there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the variation element of this "re-variation" is selected only in the big hit variation pattern tables 202e2 and 202e4 (see FIGS. 109(b) and 110(b)), and the loss variation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e3 (see FIG. 109 (a) and FIG. 110(a)) is configured not to be selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E1: non-reach middle" has one of "only "high-speed variation (medium)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "5 seconds" Variation patterns are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 109(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of "fast fluctuation (medium)"" It is "0 to 9" and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (medium)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (medium)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E3: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" + One variation pattern of “Normal reach” variation element” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 109(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed variation” + variation element of “normal reach””. In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "variation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 109(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 9" for "element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 9”) is associated with “variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'”. In other words, in the case of the "super reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: Special Reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 109(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach' is '0 to 9', and the variable element of 'high speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low speed fluctuation' + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element” is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 9”) is associated with “a variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “special reach””. In other words, in the case of the "special reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "Variable element of 'special reach'" is selected.

In addition, since the variation pattern at the time of losing the first special symbol is determined as the variation pattern as it is, the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. In addition, although selection is performed using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used together for selection (selection of presence/absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 109(b), the variation pattern table 202e2 for the special figure 1 jackpot, which is referred to when the first special symbol is hit, will be described. In the third embodiment, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the first reservation ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit, the reservation number for special figure 1 By referring to the table 202c1, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area A rendering mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E3: normal reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Revariation" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Two variation patterns are selectably prepared as "variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 109(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed Variation pattern of "variation element + variation element of "normal reach"" is 30%, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation" + variation element of "normal reach" + "re-variation It is set so that the variation pattern of "variable element of" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element" is easily selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring so that the fluctuation pattern of ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is also selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 109(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" fluctuation factor + “re-fluctuation” fluctuation factor” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured so that a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'" is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 109(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 50%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Special Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "variation element" variation pattern and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation The fluctuation patterns of the elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be equally expected in any variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110(a), the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss referred to when the second special symbol is lost will be described. If the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding area with the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a big hit value (jackpot random value), that is, it is a losing value. In this case, referring to the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and stored in the same reserved area. An effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area was reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the second special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach long" includes "high speed variation (long)" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds". variable element + variable element of "low-speed variation"" (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time").

In the example shown in FIG. 110(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach/long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for "Variation element of", and only "Variation element of "High speed variation (long)" + Variation element of "Low speed variation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "high-speed change (long)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E1: non-reach middle" includes one of "only "high-speed variation (medium)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "5 seconds" Variation patterns are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 110 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of "fast fluctuation (medium)"" It is "0 to 9" and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (medium)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (medium)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E2: non-reach short" includes one of "only "high-speed variation (short)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "2 seconds" Variation patterns are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 110(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach/short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" It is "0 to 9", and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) is associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (short)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E3: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" + One variation pattern of “Normal reach” variation element” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 110(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed variation” + variation element of “normal reach””. In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "variation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E4: Super Reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 110 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 9" for "element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 9”) is associated with “variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'”. In other words, in the case of the "Super Lee" production mode in the variable production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" One variation pattern of "element + variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach"" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 110(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach' is '0 to 9', and the variable element of 'high speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low speed fluctuation' + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element” is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 9”) is associated with “a variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “special reach””. In other words, in the case of the "special reach (middle)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" variable element + variable element of “special reach”” is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110(b), the variation pattern table 202e4 for the special figure 2 to be referred to when the second special symbol is hit will be described. In the third embodiment, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the second reservation ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit, the reservation number for special figure 2 By referring to the table 202c2, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area A rendering mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E3: normal reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Revariation" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Two variation patterns are selectably prepared as "variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 110(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed Variation pattern of "variation element + variation element of "normal reach"" is 30%, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation" + variation element of "normal reach" + "re-variation It is set so that the variation pattern of "variable element of" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of “variation factor of” is likely to be selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring so that the fluctuation pattern of ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is also selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 110(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variable element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" ” variable element + “re-fluctuation” variable element” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured so that a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'" is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 110(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 50%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Special Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "variation element" variation pattern and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation The fluctuation patterns of the elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be equally expected in any variation pattern.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description continues. The normal figure per counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). In addition, when the counter C4 per normal pattern makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the counter per normal pattern C4.

In addition, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119) 1 for each It is updated twice and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 118).

The value of the counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the third embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119)), and the timing at which it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 In, it is stored in one of the general pattern reservation first to fourth areas provided in the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i in the order stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h, and the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 stored in the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i hit judgment.

The value of the random number that is the winning pattern is set by the random number table 202g per normal pattern stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state (for example, 70/100 in the low probability state, 99/99 in the high probability state). 100 etc.), and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern retention ball execution area 203i of the RAM 203 matches the random number value set by the random number table 202g per normal pattern. , it is judged as a hit. Then, the normal pattern variation table 202h is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal pattern is set (for example, "15 seconds" when the time saving function is not activated, "0.1 seconds" when the time saving function is activated) etc.), and after the lapse of the variable display time on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "O" is lighted and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, the normal electric role opening table 202i is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is set (for example, when the time saving function is not activated, "0.1 second" x 1 time, when the time saving function is activated is “5.8 seconds”×1 time, etc.), and during the opening time, the hive plate 72a of the ordinary electric member 72 operates to open, and during this time, the ball can enter the second starting port 71.

On the other hand, when the value of the counter C4 per general pattern stored in the general pattern reservation area does not match the value of the random number set by the random number table 202g per general pattern, it is determined to be lost. Then, the variable display time is set by referring to the normal symbol variation table 202h according to the game state, and after the variable display time has elapsed in the normal symbol display device 83, the "x" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol (normal symbol). Lights up. In addition, the random number table 202g per normal pattern, the normal pattern variation table 202h and the normal electric role release table 202i will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 100, the description continues. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, input/output It also has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output, hereinafter abbreviated as “I/O”) are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 116) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 134) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, although details will be described later, the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is not equipped with a backup function, and the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure (except for an instantaneous power failure). Then, the data in the RAM 223 are not restored to the state before the power is turned off, and are cleared. Therefore, the values of the data held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp controller 113 (for example, the relief counter 203p and the sub relief counter 223k, which will be described later) are consistent immediately after the power is turned off. It is configured so that it can be in a state where it is not sexual.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, and a normal figure reserved ball number counter 203g. , Normal figure reservation ball storage area 203h, Normal figure reservation ball execution area 203i, probability variation flag 203j, ST counter 203k, time saving low accuracy flag 203m, time saving high accuracy flag 203n, time saving counter 203o, relief counter 203p and relief set flag 203q have at least

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed on the display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) is up to four times. A counter that counts up to

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 116). Then, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64 is detected and the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 120 (see S305 of ). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S508 in FIG. 122).

The second pending ball number counter 203b, like the first pending ball number counter 203a, is the second starting port 71 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Suspension of dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (fluctuation performance of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the start winning It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting times) up to four times.

As with the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initialization processing of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 116). Then, every time the start winning to the second start port 71 is detected and the number of pending balls for the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 120 (see S309 of ). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 122).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the first reserved ball. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the number command or the second reserved ball number command (see S312 in FIG. 120). The first reserved ball number command is sent to the second start port 71 every time the start winning to the first starting port 64 is detected and the first reserved ball counter 203a is incremented by 1. This is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 dynamically displays the first special symbol or second special symbol reserved by the main controller 110 by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of suspensions of dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. In addition, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 is detected, the main controller 110 transmits the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113 By doing so, the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol managed by the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual dynamic display (variation Even if the number of reserved balls is deviated from the number of reserved balls in the performance), the deviation can be corrected by the first received number of reserved balls command or the second received number of reserved balls command.

Furthermore, even if the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like and the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 is initialized, the main control It is possible to restore to a state consistent with the data held in the RAM 203 of the device 110 .

Further, in the third embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command In the number of balls command, not only the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b incremented by 1, but also the trigger for adding the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b Along with the above starting winning, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 101) are also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 is the first The number of pending pitches command or the second number of pending pitches command is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 .

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is Before the variable performance based on each value is executed, it is read ahead, and how the variable performance becomes (whether it becomes a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed. Then, based on the result of determination by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the contents and execution timing (timing) of the "holding change notice".

It should be noted that the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number of the variable effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be separately transmitted. As a command that indicates the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, the first Generating a command for the number of 1 held balls or a command for the number of 2 held balls, and generating commands similar to the variation pattern command and the stop type command (preliminary variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) based on the incoming ball, and controlling the voice lamp. It may be configured to transmit to device 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance fluctuation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the first start port 64. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores (holds) data corresponding to one starting prize in the first special symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for up to four times. It has areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 101).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the second start port 71. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the second starting port 71 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores (holds) data corresponding to one starting prize in the second special symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 101).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f starts execution, or the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 dynamic It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display and variable effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device In order to execute the dynamic display of 81 and the setting of variable effect, etc., the data (counter C1 to C3, CS1), the data corresponding to the oldest start winning is shifted to this holding ball execution area 203f. Note that the shift in the third embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 101 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the first special symbol or second special symbol jackpot lottery, the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set target display and variable effect.

As described above, the setting of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect include the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery. C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first starting port 64 (start winning), The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the second starting port 71 (start winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reservation areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first reservation ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. It is

In the third embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to 1. Although each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e is collectively provided, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64 (start winning) is stored. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the empty areas of the 4 reservation areas (1st reservation 1st to 4th areas). remembered. In other words, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the first starting port 64 that is older in terms of time is stored, and the first reserve first area stores the data to the first starting port 64 that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 71 (start winning) is stored. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reservation areas (2nd reservation 1st to 4th areas). be. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the second starting port 71 that is older in terms of time is stored, and the second reserve first area stores the data to the second starting port 71 that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing a value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. there is

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect of the special symbol, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If so, the data stored in the second reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when the execution start timing of the variable effect comes, the MPU 201 stores no data in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the first reserved area, the data stored in the first reserved first area are shifted to areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 123), and a big win lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result. and determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Moreover, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81, based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, the special symbol A variable performance is performed.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, it determines whether or not data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is changed to the jackpot random number of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the second holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the second holding ball storage area 203e stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is 1 smaller. In the third embodiment, data is shifted only for the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Suppose that In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, the data in the second reserved fourth area to the second reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variable effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the third embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the second reservation areas (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

On the other hand, when the MPU 201 determines that the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when it is time to start executing the variable effect, then the first reserved ball storage area 203e It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reservation first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reservation first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reservation ball execution area 203f. shift to Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the first holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the first holding ball storage area 203d stores (holds ) is shifted to an area (first to third) whose area number is 1 smaller. In the third embodiment, data is shifted only for the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Suppose it is In this state, the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to areas (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, the data in the first reserved fourth area to the first reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first reserved second area to the first reserved second area. After shifting to area 1, data shift ends. As described above, in the third embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with an area number smaller by one. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the first reservation area (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

In this way, the data related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are stored separately. When the data is stored, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and when the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not stored, the first special symbol is displayed. When the dynamic display is stored, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and by performing the dynamic display based on each data, the first special A dynamic display of the symbol and a dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 100, the description continues. The normal pattern holding ball number counter 203g displays the normal pattern based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. It is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of variable display of normal symbols performed by the device 83 up to four times.

As with the reserved ball number counters 203a and 203b, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203g is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 116) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected and the number of held balls for variable display relating to normal symbols increases, 1 is added to the maximum value "4" (see S405 in FIG. 121). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal pattern is executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

The normal pattern holding ball storage area 203h is a memory for storing the normal pattern per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of passage of the ball to the through gate 67. FIG. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern from the counter buffer 203c, and stores the normal pattern reserved ball. Store in area 203h. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h has four reserved areas (normal pattern holding first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 101).

The normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i is a memory for storing data (normal pattern winning counter C4 value) to be referred to in the process of starting execution or winning lottery and variable display of normal symbols during execution. be.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal design, in order to execute the processing such as the setting of the normal design winning lottery and the setting of the variable display of the normal design display device 83, the above-mentioned normal design reservation ball Of the data stored in the storage area 203h (the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern), one data is shifted to this normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the third embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 101 again, the details of the normal map reserved ball storage area 203h and the normal map reserved ball execution area 203i will be described. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h and the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to perform processing such as normal symbol winning lottery and setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. be.

As described above, the normal symbol winning lottery and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83 use the normal symbol winning counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery. The normal pattern holding ball storage area 203h stores the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the through gate 67 .

The normal map holding ball storage area 203h is composed of four holding areas (normal map holding 1st to 4th areas). Each of the four reservation areas (normal pattern reservation 1st to 4th area) is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern that stores the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern.

In this general pattern holding ball storage area 203h, data acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (value of counter C4 per general pattern) is stored up to 4 times, but in that case, 4 holding Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant areas (1st to 4th areas for normal map reservation). In other words, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored, and the data of the ball passing through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored in the first area of the normal map reservation area. Data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is composed of only one area. Similar to the general-pattern holding ball storage area 203h, the general-pattern holding ball execution area 203i is provided with a general-pattern random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the general-pattern counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, the data stored in the first normal pattern reservation area of the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203h is transferred to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203i. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i is referred to in the normal pattern variation process (see FIG. 132), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed, and the contents of the variable display to decide. In the normal symbol display device 83, under the control of the main controller 110, variable display is performed based on the determined contents.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing variable display of normal symbols, the random value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern in the first area of the normal pattern retention ball storage area 203h. is shifted to a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern of the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i.

Then, when the shift of the data to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i is completed, the normal pattern holding first area becomes empty, so it is stored in each area (2nd to 4th) of the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203h. Shift processing is performed to move the (suspended) data to areas (first to third) with area numbers one smaller. In addition, in the third embodiment, data is shifted only for the general pattern reservation areas (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (reserved) in the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203h.

Here, the data shift performed with respect to each reservation area in the normal figure reservation ball storage area 203h is demonstrated. For example, when it is determined to start variable display of normal symbols, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g is "4", and all areas (first to fourth) of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h Suppose data is stored. In this state, the data of the normal pattern reservation first area is shifted to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203i, and when the normal pattern reservation first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 is the other area (2nd to 4th) , are shifted to areas (1st to 3rd) whose area number is 1 smaller. In other words, the data of the 2nd area of the reservation of the general pattern is shifted to the 1st area of reservation of the general pattern, the data of the 3rd area of the reservation of the general pattern is shifted to the 2nd area of the reservation of the general pattern, and the data of the 4th area of the reservation of the general pattern. is shifted to the 3rd area for general map reservation.

Further, for example, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g when the start determination of the variable display of the normal pattern is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the normal pattern reserved second area to the normal pattern. Shift to the drawing reservation first area to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the third embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the general pattern reservation area (third to fourth) where data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the general map reservation area (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (reserved) in the general pattern reservation area (second to fourth), it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

Returning to FIG. 100, the description continues. The probability variation flag 203j is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. The variable probability flag 203j is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, in the case of the jackpot type “variable probability A”, “variable probability B” or “variable probability C”, the variable probability flag 203j is set to ON (see S6102 in FIG. 131). Then, when the jackpot is won, it is set to OFF (see S602 in FIG. 128). In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the probability variable flag 203j is turned on, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state as the special symbol high probability state. .

The ST counter 203k is a counter for counting the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols, which is a condition for ending the high probability state, in a special symbol high probability state. The ST counter 203k is set to "0" as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM is cleared (see S116 in FIG. 116). Then, at the end of the jackpot game, in the case of the jackpot type “variable probability A”, “variable probability B” or “variable probability C”, “50” is set (see S6104 in FIG. 131). Thereafter, in the state where the variable probability flag 203j is turned on (that is, "probability variable state"), 1 is subtracted each time the dynamic display of the special symbol stops (see S5301 in FIG. 125). Then, when the value of the ST counter 203k is no longer greater than "0", that is, when the value of the ST counter 203k becomes "0" or less (see S5302 of FIG. 125: No), the "probability fluctuation state ” is completed, the variable probability flag 203j is set to OFF (see S5303 in FIG. 125). It should be noted that the ST counter 203k is cleared to "0" at the beginning of the winning process when a big win is won (see S603 in FIG. 128).

The time reduction low probability flag 203m is in the ON state and is in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", and while it is in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the normal electric role 72 is open for a long time. This is a flag to indicate that the The time-saving low-probability flag 203m is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM is cleared (see S116 in FIG. 116). Then, in the third embodiment, when the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed more than a total of "249 times" (that is, "250 times" or more) in the low probability state of the special symbol and the number of relief condition establishment times is reached. In order to shift to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the time reduction low probability flag 203m is set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 127). After that, when the value of the time saving counter 203o described later is no longer greater than "0" in the time saving counting process executed in the fluctuation stopping process executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol is stopped, and the time saving When the low probability flag 203m is set to ON (see S5405 in FIG. 126), or is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S604 in FIG. 128).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the time saving low probability flag 203m is turned on, the special symbol is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol is also in a low probability state, and the random number table 202g per normal symbol is referred to. However, the normal symbol variable display time is set by referring to the normal symbol variation table 202h as the normal symbol shortened state, and the normal symbol open state is set as the open extended state of the normal symbol 72. The table 202i is referred to and the ordinary electric circuit 72 is driven to open. As a means for determining the arrival condition of the present invention, the time reduction low probability flag 203m for determining the “normal low probability time shortening state” will be used. Probable time reduction state” will be described using a display (e.g., “Ceiling reached!”, etc.), but for example, determination of the time reduction high probability flag 203n for determining the “general figure high probability time reduction state” Depending on the result, it may be a display indicating the occurrence of the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" (for example, "time saving rush!"), or depending on the determination result of the probability variation flag 203j for determining the "probability variation state" It may be a display indicating the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" (for example, "occurrence of probability fluctuation!" A display emphasizing the number of consecutive games (for example, "Congratulations on 10 consecutive games!") may be used. A display emphasizing the number (for example, "Over 1000 shots!", etc.) may be used. An emphatic display (for example, "Get 10 consecutive!") may be used.

The time saving high probability flag 203n is in the on state "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "probability fluctuation state", which is a high probability state of normal symbols, and a shortening state of variable display time of normal symbols, This is a flag for indicating that the ordinary electric circuit 72 is in an extended open state. The time-saving high-accuracy flag 203n is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM is cleared (see S116 in FIG. 116). Then, in the third embodiment, at the end of the jackpot, the time saving high accuracy flag 203n is set to ON regardless of the jackpot type (see S6103 or S6105 in FIG. 131). After that, when the value of the time saving counter 203o, which will be described later, is no longer greater than "0", and the If the time saving high accuracy flag 203n is set to ON (see S5404 in FIG. 126), or is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S604 in FIG. 128).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the time-saving high-probability flag 203n is turned on, as a normal symbol high probability state, a normal symbol per random number table 202g is referred to, and a normal symbol winning lottery is performed. , the normal symbol variation table 202h is referred to as the shortened state of the normal symbol to set the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol opening table 202i is referred to as the extended open state of the normal symbol 72 to set the normal symbol 72. is opened. As a means for determining the state transition of the present invention, the time reduction high probability flag 203n for determining the "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state" will be described. It may be a time-saving low probability flag 203m for doing, a probability variation flag 203j for determining "probability fluctuation state", a big hit state flag for determining a big hit state, or a small hit state to determine may be a small hit state flag.

Next, the time-saving counter 203o is a counter for discriminating the end condition 1 of the "time-saving function", and counts the number of execution times of dynamic display of each special pattern after the big win and when the relief condition is established, and ends the time-saving. This is a counter for determining conditions. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, time-saving end conditions are set differently depending on the number of executions of the special symbols at the time of the big win and at the time of the relief condition being established, and the dynamic display of the set special symbols is executed. When the number of times is performed, the ``time saving function'' being executed is terminated, and the ``normal pattern high probability time reduction state'' or ``normal pattern low probability time reduction state'' is configured to shift to the ``normal game state''. It is

This time-saving counter 203o is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 116) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Also in the winning process (see S203 in FIG. 119), the value of the time saving counter 203o is cleared to "0" as the initialization process at the time of the big win (see S605 in FIG. 128). After the end of the jackpot when winning the jackpot type “time saving A” or “time saving B”, the value of the time saving counter 203o is set to “50” (see S6106 in FIG. 131). Also, in the low-probability state of the special symbols, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display becomes more than "249 times", that is, when the value of the relief counter 203p described later becomes a value greater than "249". And, similarly, when the relief setting completion flag 203q described later is not set to ON, "379" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203o (see S5504 in FIG. 127). On the other hand, the value of the time reduction counter 203o is subtracted by 1 each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed once in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" ( See S5401 in FIG. 126).

Then, when the value of the time saving counter 203o becomes "0" (see S5402 of FIG. 126: No), it is determined that the time saving end condition based on the number of executions of each special symbol is established, and the time saving high which is turned on is determined. It is configured to set the definite flag 203n or the time saving low definite flag 203m to OFF (see S5404 or S5405 in FIG. 126) and end the "time saving function".

The relief counter 203p is a counter for counting whether or not to shift to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" based on the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when dynamic display of special symbols is executed "250 times" in the low probability state of special symbols, that is, when the value of the relief counter 203p reaches "250", , It is configured to shift the game state to "normal figure low probability time shortening state". As means for counting the specific event of the present invention, the number of special symbol fluctuation effects in the special symbol low probability state will be described as an example, but for example, the number of special symbol fluctuation effects in the special symbol high probability state Alternatively, it may be the number of times of variable display of normal symbols, the number of occurrences of big winning games (number of consecutive games), or the number of occurrences of small winning games.

This rescue counter 203p is set to "0" as an initial value after the RAM is cleared in the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S172 in FIG. 116). Then, in the low probability state of special symbols, that is, in the "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", dynamic display of special symbols is executed once. 1 is added every time (see S5502 in FIG. 127). In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the value of the relief counter 203p reaches "250", if the relief set flag 203q described later is not set to ON (that is, if it is OFF), time saving Along with setting "379" to the value of the counter 203o, the time saving low probability flag 203m is set to ON (see S5504 and S5506 in Fig. 127), and the state shifts to "general figure low probability time reduction state".

It should be noted that this relief counter 203p is cleared to "0" at the beginning of winning processing when winning a jackpot (see S607 in FIG. 128). Thus, every time a big win occurs, the number of relief condition fulfillment times is set again, and when the period during which the special symbols are not won in the dynamic display of the special symbols after the big win game reaches a predetermined period, relief measures are taken for the player. As a result, it is possible to generate a "normal figure low probability time reduction state". In addition, as an event related to the special symbol variation effect in a game state in which the ball is likely to win or can enter the ball to easily give a game value to the player, the ball is likely to enter the second start hole 71 and the player wins. The number of executions of the special symbol variation effect in the "general figure high probability time shortening state" that is easy to give balls etc. will be described. It may be the number of times of starting the variable performance of the special symbol in the ``normal pattern high probability time shortening state'' in which the ball is easy to win in 64 and the player is easy to give prize balls, etc., or the variable winning device 65 is easy to win the ball in the game. It may be the number of reserved balls of the special symbol variation effect based on the ball entering the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 in the jackpot game state in which prize balls etc. are easily given to the player. In addition, as an event related to the special symbol variation effect in a game state in which it is difficult to give a game value to a player by making it difficult for a ball to win or not to enter, a ball enters the second start port 71 (or the first start port 64). The number of executions of the special symbol variation effect in the "normal game state" in which it is difficult to win and it is difficult to give prize balls etc. to the player will be described. It may be the number of start times of the variable performance of the special symbol in the "normal game state" in which it is difficult to win a prize and it is difficult to give a prize ball etc. to the player, or it is possible to give a prize ball etc. to the player who is hard to win a prize in the variable prize winning device 65. Hard non-jackpot game state (that is, the game state after the jackpot game state, "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "normal game state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" Or, it may be the number of reserved balls of the special symbol variation effect based on the entry to the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 in the "latent probability change state", small winning game state, etc.).

The relief setting completion flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the special symbol has reached the number of relief condition establishment times after the jackpot game. This relief setting completion flag 203q is set to OFF as an initial value in the startup processing of the pachinko machine 10 (see S171 in FIG. 116). Then, in the low-probability state of the special symbols, when the dynamic display of the special symbols does not win the jackpot "250 times" in succession, that is, when the value of the relief counter 203p reaches "250", the jackpot wins. After the game, the ceiling function is set to ON assuming that it has been activated once (see S5505 in FIG. 127). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S606 in FIG. 128).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the relief setting completion flag 203q is set to ON, that is, when the ceiling function is activated even once after the jackpot game, the subsequent "normal game state" , and by referring to the relief set flag 203q, the ceiling function to be activated after the jackpot game can be limited to once.

In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, when a big win is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a jackpot referred to for opening control of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is stored. A release table 202f is stored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 111, the jackpot release table 202f will be described. FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot release table 202f stored in the ROM202. The jackpot opening table 202f is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type that generated the jackpot of each special symbol, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, etc. (the number of rounds, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of prizes won, number of prize balls) and the game state to be shifted after the end of the big win are defined.

First, the jackpot opening table 202f includes the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 (hereinafter, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 are collectively referred to as the “starting port 64 , 71”) are selected based on the type of the jackpot won, and the opening modes and the like are classified.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", the "normal game state" referred to when winning the jackpot type "time saving A", "probability change B", "time saving B", "probability change C" or "probability change A" ”, and in the “normal high probability time reduction state”, “probability fluctuation state” or “normal low probability time reduction state”, the jackpot type “short time A”, “probable variable B”, “short time B”, “probable variable C" or "probability variation A" to be referred to when elected "normal pattern high probability time shortening state/probability fluctuation state/normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the opening mode of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a etc. is stipulated.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot open table 202f, when the jackpot type "time saving A" or "probability variable B" is won, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 ( Hereinafter, the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 may be referred to as a "large winning opening") is repeatedly opened and closed over four rounds. The opening time of the jackpot (the opening time may be hereinafter referred to as "OP time") is set to "30 seconds", and the interval is the closing time between one round of the jackpot and the next round. The time (hereinafter, the interval time may be referred to as "IT time") is set to "1 second", and the jackpot ending time (hereinafter, the ending time may be referred to as "ED time"). It is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot type "time reduction A" is won, it shifts to the "general figure high probability time reduction state", and when the jackpot type "variable probability B" is won After the end of the jackpot game, it is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "short time B" or "variable probability C" is won, the big prize opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened over 6 rounds. is opened and closed repeatedly. Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot type "time reduction B" is won, it shifts to the "general pattern high probability time reduction state", and when the jackpot type "variable probability C" is won After the end of the jackpot game, it is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability variable A" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. . Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the state is shifted to the "probability fluctuation state".

In addition, it is the dynamic display of the second special design that can be elected to the jackpot type "probability variation B" or "probability variation C" in the "normal game state", and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the "normal game It is configured to be difficult to execute in the left-handed game recommended in "state".

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal pattern high probability time reduction state/probability fluctuation state/normal pattern low probability time reduction state", when winning the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "probability variable B", variable The big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over four rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", after the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "time reduction A", "normal pattern high After the jackpot game is completed in the case of winning the jackpot type "probability variable B", the game machine shifts to the "probability fluctuation state".

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal pattern high probability time reduction state/probability fluctuation state/normal pattern low probability time reduction state", when winning the jackpot type "time reduction B" or "probability variable C", variable The big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over six rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", after the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "time reduction B", "normal pattern high After the jackpot game is completed in the case of winning the jackpot type "probability variable C", the game machine shifts to the "probability fluctuation state".

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal high probability time reduction state/probability fluctuation state/normal low probability time reduction state", when the jackpot type "probability variable A" is won, the variable winning device 65 The winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", after the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability fluctuation state ” is configured to transition to

In addition, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" can be elected in the first special pattern It is a dynamic display, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a right-handed game recommended in "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is configured to be difficult to execute.

In this way, in the "continuous" state in which the right-handed game is maintained and the special symbol jackpots occur frequently, the OP time, IT time, and ED at the time of the jackpot when one of the jackpot types is won. By configuring the time to be shorter than the OP time, IT time and ED time of the initial jackpot in the ``normal game state'', the time to complete the entire jackpot during the ``continuous game'' state is shortened and the ``continuous game'' state is achieved. , it is possible to shorten the arrival time to the next jackpot. As a result, the time until the next big win occurs in the "continuous" state can be shortened, and the time until the next big win arrives in spite of the "continuous" state is prolonged, thereby improving the game of the player. By generating a series of big wins at an early stage while suppressing the excitement of the game, the player can feel refreshed and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by making the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the initial jackpot in the "normal game state" longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "Consecutive" state, It becomes possible to execute various kinds of productions. By configuring in this way, for example, explanation of the game method in the pachinko machine 10 at the OP time and ED time of the first big win (for example, suggestion of shooting mode, suggestion of prevention of forgetting to remove the card inserted in the card sand, future (explanation of the game state, etc.), and a performance to congratulate the first big win from the "normal game state" can be executed, making it easier for the player to understand the game method of the pachinko machine 10, and finally winning the big win. It is possible to perform a performance that contributes to improving the interest of the player by making the player feel.

In addition, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a at the time of the big win based on the big win type (OP time, IT time, ED time, number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning prizes, number of prize balls and transition game state) are as described above. It is not limited to the embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of opening times (number of rounds) may be changed for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. It can be configured to change Since the number of prize balls that can be paid out differs for each type of jackpot won, it is possible to make a difference in the game value directly given according to the type of jackpot won.

Moreover, it is not necessary to shift to a separate game state for each jackpot type, and it may be configured to shift to a common game state for a plurality of jackpot types. Furthermore, the OP time and the ED time may be configured to be different, or the IT time may be set longer than the OP time and the ED time. Also, the minimum open time for one round may be set to a time shorter than the IT time, the OP time, and the ED time. Furthermore, at least one of OP time, IT time and ED time may be set to be the same time for each jackpot type. In addition, the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "latency probability fluctuation state" are changed to the OP time of the jackpot in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", Although the IT time and the ED time were configured to be shorter than each other, any one or more of the OP time, the IT time, or the ED time is configured to be shortened, and the other one or more of the OP time is configured to be shorter. , IT time, or ED time may be equal or longer.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112(a) to 112(c), the details of the normal pattern per random number table 202g, the normal pattern variation table 202h and the normal pattern opening table 202i will be described. First, FIG. 112( a ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202 g per general pattern stored in the ROM 202 .

As described above, the normal pattern per random number table 202g is a normal pattern low probability state (“probability fluctuation state”) in which the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “normal game state” or the “normal pattern low probability time reduction state”. Or for the "normal pattern low probability state" used in the case of a period (including during the special pattern jackpot) that is not the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "normal pattern Two types of "normal pattern high probability state" used in the case of "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" which is a state with a higher probability of winning normal patterns than "low probability state" divided into Then, the number of random numbers to be hits included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different between the "normal design low probability state" and the "normal design high probability state", the "normal design low probability state" and the "normal design high probability state" , The probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols is changed.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the number of values of the normal pattern per counter C4 that becomes a win in the case of the "normal pattern low probability state" is "70", and the value "30 to 99" is specified (set) in the random number table 202g per normal figure. In other words, the normal pattern hit probability in the "normal pattern low probability state" (that is, "normal game state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortened state") is 70/100, and the hit is normally derived in the variable display of the pattern. It is set so that it is easy to

On the other hand, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal pattern that will be hit in the case of the "normal pattern high probability state" is "99", and the value "1 to 99" is defined in the random number table 202g per normal pattern (set ). That is, the normal pattern hit probability in the "normal pattern high probability state" (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state") is 99/100, and the normal pattern variable display is almost hit. set to be derived.

Thus, by changing the winning/losing probability of normal symbols according to the game state, it is possible to create a difference between a situation in which the normal electric combination 72 is easy to open and a situation in which it is difficult to open rather than the situation in which it is easy to open. can. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is possible to enter the second starting port 71 because the normal electric terminal 72 is likely to open, or the normal electric terminal 72 is opened more easily. It is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by making it difficult for the ball to enter the second start hole 71 due to the difficult situation, depending on the game state.

In particular, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, it becomes a "normal symbol low probability state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the normal electric role 72 is difficult to open, furthermore, when it is opened. However, since the normal electric combination 72 is opened only for a short period of time, even if a ball is shot in a right-handed game, it is difficult to enter the second starting port 71 from the ``normal pattern high probability state''. In addition, the first starting port 64 is not equipped with a device for assisting prize winning, such as the ordinary electric machine 72, and a through gate 67 is not arranged in the flow-down region of the ball fired in the left-handed game. Therefore, it is not a configuration in which the ball fired by the left-handed game easily enters the first start port 64 by the time saving function. Therefore, in other words, in the "normal game state", even if a right-handed game is played, it is difficult for the right-handed ball to enter the second starting port 71, and a left-handed ball is also shot. , the player must enter the first starting port 64 without using the time saving function, and is configured to enter the first starting port 64 by itself in order to execute the dynamic display of the first special pattern. In addition, in the "normal game state", by providing a plurality of types of variable display time of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the normal electric combination 72, the player can win the second start port 71 in the "normal game state". It is more preferable to make it difficult to grasp the timing and to make it difficult to win a prize to the second starting port 71 . In addition, in the "normal game state", when a right-handed game is played, an error is notified due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, so that the player and the employee of the game hall By suggesting that the game mode is not encouraged, the player may be restrained from playing right-handed games. As a shooting mode suggestion that suggests that the state of the present invention has changed, a shooting suggestion display of a left-handed game in the case of shifting from the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state" will be described as an example. For example, when the "probability fluctuation state" is shifted to the "normal game state", the left-handed game launch suggestion display may be used. From the emphasized (enlarged) launch suggestion display, the ball passes through a through gate, etc. to display that the jackpot game has started and the jackpot game state has changed, and to continue the right-handed game. A sober (smaller) shot suggestion display than the emphasized (enlarged) shot suggestion display suggested to the player may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112(b), the details of the normal pattern variation table 202h for determining the variable display time of normal patterns will be described. FIG. 112(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal pattern variation table 202h stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

Normal pattern fluctuation table 202h is for "normal game state" referred to in "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" It is divided into two types for reference "normal high probability time reduction state, probability fluctuation state, normal low probability time reduction state". Then, the variable display time of normal symbols set for "normal game state" and "normal pattern high probability time shortening state/probability fluctuation state/normal pattern low probability time shortening state” are set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbols different in each game state, the time for deriving the success/fail result of the normal symbols in each game state is changed.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the normal pattern variable display time set in the case of the "normal game state" is set to "15 seconds". 202h. That is, in the "normal game state", the time from the start of variable display of the normal symbols to the derivation of the stop symbols is set to be "15 seconds" without exception.

In addition, the variable display time of the normal pattern set in the case of "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is set to "0.1 second" It is defined in the normal figure fluctuation table 202h. In other words, the time from the start of variable display of normal symbols in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" until the stop pattern is derived is without omission It is set to be "0.1 second".

Thus, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 until the normal electrode 72 is released can be changed. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it hits the variable display caused by passing through the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric circuit 72 is opened based on the hit, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow into the second starting port 71 as it is can be varied depending on the game state. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbols for each game state, it is possible to vary the winning mode of one ball to the through gate 67 and the second starting port 71, and to provide different game characteristics for each game state. can produce.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, the variable display time of normal symbols is short, the winning is easy, and the normal electric Since the opening time of the hand 72 is also long, the normal electric hand 72 is in an open (immersed) state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric hand 72, and the ball is fired by the right-handed game. is configured to enter the second starting port 71 . In other words, a ball hit to the right in the ``variable probability state'' and ``high probability time shortened state'' is configured to easily enter the second starting port 71 and difficultly enter the variable winning device 65. there is

In addition, among the gaming states in which right-handed games are encouraged, in the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", although it is more difficult to win than the "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", it is normal Since the variable display time of the symbols is short and the opening time of the normal electric combination 72 is also long, the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter the second starting port 71.例文帳に追加In other words, the ball hit to the right in the "low-probability-shortening-time state" is configured to easily enter the second starting port 71 and difficultly enter the variable winning device 65 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 112(c), the normal electric service release table 202i will be described. FIG. 112(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal electric power release table 202i stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The normal electric combination opening table 202i is referred to when a normal symbol win occurs, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of opening times of the normal electric combination 72 are defined based on the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol win occurs.

The normal electric role open table 202i is divided into groups based on the game state in which normal symbols are drawn. Specifically, for the "normal game state" referred to in the "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" referred to The open state (open time) of the normal electric 72 is changed for "normal pattern high probability time shortening state/probability fluctuation state/normal pattern low probability time shortening state”.

As shown in FIG. 112(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the "normal game state", the normal electric combination 72 is set to be opened once when the normal symbol is won. The open time is defined in the ordinary electric open table 202i to be "0.1 second". That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state", the normal electric combination 72 is set to be opened for "0.1 seconds"×1 times="0.1 seconds". there is

In addition, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the opening time of the normal electric role 72 set when winning the normal pattern is "5. 8 seconds” and the number of times of opening is set to 1 in the normal electric service opening table 202i. In other words, if the normal pattern is elected in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the normal electric role 72 is "5.8 seconds" × 1 configured to be open for times=“5.8 seconds”.

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the normal electric part 72 according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the normal electric part 72 is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the period in which the normal electric terminal 72 is open is long, so that the second start opening 71 is easily won, or the normal electric terminal 72 is open. It is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by making the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 71 due to the short length of the ball depending on the game state.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", it becomes a high probability state of normal patterns, the variable display time is short, normal electric The opening period of the winning combination 72 is lengthened, and the ball launched in the right-handed game is configured to easily enter the second start hole 71.例文帳に追加

In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed game is encouraged, in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", although it is a normal pattern low probability state, the variable display time is short, and the normal electric role 72 is opened. It is configured such that the period is lengthened and the ball shot in the right-handed game easily enters the second starting port 71.例文帳に追加

Therefore, the ball hit to the right in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is easy to enter the second start port 71, and the second special symbol Since the number of pending balls for dynamic display is likely to accumulate, the variation shortening function is likely to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be efficiently executed.

In this way, the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state or low probability state of the normal symbol, and the long or short time of the variable display time and the opening time of the ordinary electric role 72 are combined respectively. By providing each game state, it is possible to change the game property in each game state, provide a game with a wide variety of variations, and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the hit probability of variable display of normal symbols and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is more likely to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state", etc., any ratio may be used. The probability may be set to about 1/100 to make it difficult to win, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or the low probability state of the normal pattern It may be configured so as not to win a prize at the time. Also, if the variable display time is shorter in the "probability fluctuation state" than in the "normal game state", it may be any time, for example, the variable display time of normal symbols in the "normal game state" is "30 seconds" or more. may be a long time (for example, "100 seconds") or a short time (for example, "1 second") less than "10 seconds".

Moreover, the open time and the number of open times of the ordinary electric circuit 72 are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the open time of the normal electric combination 72, any open time may be used as long as it is more advantageous for the player to be in the "variable probability state" than in the "normal game state". The opening time of the normal electric role 72 in the "normal game state" etc. may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, " 3 times”). Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "variable probability state" or the like may be a long time of "5.8 seconds" or more (for example, "10 seconds"), or a short time of less than "5.8 seconds". (eg, “1 second”). Further, the number of opening times of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be set to a number greater than "1 time" (for example, "5 times").

Next, with reference to Drawing 113, time saving end condition table 202j in a 3rd embodiment is explained. Drawing 113 is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of time saving end condition table 202j memorized by ROM202 in a 3rd embodiment. The time-saving end condition table 202j is referred to when the jackpot state ends or when the number of times the relief condition is met is reached, and the end condition of the "time-saving function" given according to the jackpot type or relief condition establishment are defined respectively.

As shown in FIG. 113, when the jackpot is won in all game states, as "probability fluctuation state" or "general pattern high probability time reduction state", the high probability time reduction function is effective up to "50 times" is set to In addition, when the relief condition establishment number of times ("250 times" in the third embodiment) is reached in the low probability state of special symbols (substantially, "normal game state"), "normal pattern low probability time shortening state ”, the low-probability short-time function is set to be effective up to “379 times”.

Returning to FIG. 100, the description continues. The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, in addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which values such as Input/Output (hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 116) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 134) is immediately executed as power failure processing. As the voltage non-dropping state of the present invention, the time when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on will be described as an example. Further, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned off and then restored as an example of the state after the voltage drop of the present invention, it may be after the power saving mode of the third symbol display device 81 is restored, for example.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is provided for detecting the balls that have won prizes in the prize-winning ports 63, 64, 65, and 71, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and the balls that have passed through the out port 66 and are guided to the ball discharge path. switches 208 consisting of a switch group including a switch (for example, the big prize opening switch 65c etc.) and a sensor group, a setting key 501 for setting the start-up mode when the power is turned on, and a setting key 501 that is pressed during the "setting change mode". A setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value and a RAM erasing switch 503 for erasing data stored in the RAM 203 are connected by being operated.

Also, on the output side of the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the special design display device 37, the normal design display device 83, the normal design reservation lamp 84, the variable winning device 65 opening and closing of the big winning opening A large winning opening solenoid 65b for driving opening and closing forward with the lower side of the plate 65a as an axis, a normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric 72, and other solenoids 209 are connected. It is The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, and 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and displays the display contents of the probability display device 504 as one of the execution results of the various processes. set.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 134) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Also, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes effects, It controls the display of the relief counter display 89 in the "normal game state", the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as "suspension change notice", and the like. In addition, in the present invention, the number of events related to the variable performance is displayed by the number of events related to the current variable performance and the predetermined number of arrivals of the event related to the variable performance. Display the number of times the execution of the variable production starts, and display the number of arrivals (ceiling number) that can cause the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" in the denominator, but for example, the number of events related to the variable production As a notification mode, the numerator displays the number of executions of the variable performance in the low probability state of the special pattern (fixed number of times), and the denominator is the number of arrivals (ceiling number of times) that the "normal low probability time reduction state" can occur. may be displayed, a display frame in which the number of reserved balls for variable effect of special symbols is displayed is provided in a predetermined display area for the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls for variable effect of special symbols is Each occurrence may be configured to display reserved symbols in a predetermined order (for example, from the left side in front view) so as to fit within the display frame.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like. In the third embodiment, commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and commands cannot be transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to exchange commands with each other.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the back image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and displays the third pattern on the display control device 114 based on the depression of the frame button 22. The display device 81 is instructed to display.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 and " It executes the display control of the relief counter display 89 in the "normal game state" and the display control of the "suspended change notice". Details of the display contents of the relief counter display 89 will be described later with reference to FIG. As a result display of the means for counting the specific event of the present invention, an example of displaying the number of special symbol fluctuations in the special symbol low probability state in the relief counter display 89 will be described. The result of the number of variations of the special symbols may be displayed, the count result of the variable display of the normal symbols may be displayed, or the result of the number of occurrences of the jackpot game (the number of consecutive games) may be displayed. , the result of counting the number of winning balls may be displayed, or the result of the number of occurrences of small winning games may be displayed.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages. In addition, in the present invention, when the power is cut off, the number of times relating to the variation effect of the special symbols, which has been counted up to the time of the power cut, is counted up to the time of the power cut as a means for backing up and storing even after the power is restored. The number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation effects that had been running has been described as being backed up and stored even after the power is restored. Backup storage may be performed even after power is restored, and when the power is turned off, the number of pending balls relating to the variation performance of the special symbols counted until the power is turned off may be backed up and stored after the power is restored, or the power may be turned off. Sometimes, the execution time of the variation performance of the special symbols which has been counted up to the time of the power failure may be backed up and stored even after the power is restored.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 134). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the RAM 203 built in the main controller 110 is equipped with a backup function, but the RAM 223 built in the sound lamp control device 113 is equipped with a backup function. not. Therefore, when the power supply is interrupted (except for a momentary power failure) due to a power failure or the like, the data in the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 equipped with a backup function is restored to the state before the power interruption. All the data in the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 not equipped with the function are cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, in the voice lamp control device 113, the command (for example, the number of pending balls command, the variation pattern command, game state command, etc.), the consistency between the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 can be maintained. In this way, by configuring the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 without having a backup function, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Also, the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 may be provided with a backup function so that even if power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the data in the RAM 223 is restored to the state before the power cut-off.

A detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp controller 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a variation pattern table 222d are stored as fixed value data. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. In addition, in the present invention, only the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are provided with a backup function, and other control devices (for example, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the firing control device 112, etc.) are backed up Since the function is not provided, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the control contents of the other control devices are cleared.

The sound lamp control device 113 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with the start winning, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type that are transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a fluctuation pattern table 222d, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead process.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, whether it will be a “ready-to-win display”, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect, and the execution of various effects is determined, or the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 99) is changed. Executes control to determine the content (and execution time (timing)).

The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b, a sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c, a sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d, a first reserved information storage area 223e, and second reserved information At least a storage area 223f, an execution information storage area 223g, a previous variable game state storage area 223h, a current variable game state storage area 223i, a sub-relief counter display flag 223j, and a sub-relief counter 223k are provided.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance of the first special symbol should be started in the ON state. This special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1225 in FIG. 138) . Then, it is turned off when the setting of the variation effect of the first special symbol is made (see S1302 in FIG. 140).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is triggered by the fact that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, and the waiting first special symbol fluctuation effect exists. When doing so, the first special symbol variation effect setting process (see S1306 to S1308 in FIG. 140) for executing the variation effect of the first special symbol in the waiting state is performed.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance of the second special symbol should be started in the ON state. This special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when receiving a special figure 2 stop type command output from the main controller 110 (see S1255 in FIG. 139) . Then, it is turned off when the second special symbol variation effect is set (see S1310 in FIG. 140).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is triggered by the fact that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, and the waiting second special symbol fluctuation effect exists. When doing so, the second special symbol variation effect setting process (see S1314 to S1316 in FIG. 140) for executing the waiting second special symbol variation effect is performed.

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a first special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the first special symbol variation effect that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first pending pitch counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of held balls based on the command (the number of held balls command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first held ball number counter 223c It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol by entering the first start port 64, When the first reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the first reserved ball number counter 203a of main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command is added. The subsequent value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved by the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 137).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a special figure 1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110 When receiving the variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command and setting the aspect of the variation production of the first special symbol along with their reception, subtract 1 from the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c (update ) (see S1305 in FIG. 140). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c. While synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, is a second special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command sent from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d. It's becoming

Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of pending balls for the second special symbol variation effect by entering the second start port 71, When the second reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the second reserved ball number counter 203b of main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command is added. The subsequent value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variable effect reserved by the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1211 in FIG. 137).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a special figure 2 corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted in the main control device 110 When receiving the variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command and setting the aspect of the variation effect of the second special symbol along with their reception, subtract 1 from the value of the sub second pending ball number counter 223d (update ) (see S1313 in FIG. 140). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d. While synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d can be updated.

The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d is used to display reserved symbols and execution symbols on the third symbol display device 81 in a game state in which variation effects of each special symbol are encouraged. Used. That is, the sound lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, sets the number of reserved balls indicated by the command to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. Stored in the number counter 223d (see S1207 or S1211 in FIG. 137), special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command, or, in response to reception of special figure 2 variation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command Then, at the timing of updating the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1305 or S1313 in FIG. 140), it corresponds to the special symbol that is encouraged according to the game state. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d after storage or updating, the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number for display A number-of-balls command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number command for display, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub-first number of the sound lamp control device 113 The reserved symbols corresponding to the values of the reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d and the execution pattern indicating the variable effect being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 99(b)). control the rendering of the image as it appears in ).

As described above, the sub first reserved ball counter 223c changes its value while synchronizing with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110, and the sub second reserved ball counter 223d The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 99(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 or It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the special symbol variation effect encouraged according to the game state is reserved.

The first reserved information storage area 223e is information for performing a variable performance of the reserved first special symbol, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the first reserved ball. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the first special symbol transmitted by the number command.

Voice lamp control device 113, using the values of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223e, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, variation of the first special symbol configured to perform a performance.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is information for performing a variable effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the second reserved ball. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the second different symbol transmitted by the number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223f and each table 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. configured to perform a performance.

The execution information storage area 223g is executed at least by the special symbol display device 37, and information of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main controller 110 is started. A jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the winning and transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command This is an area for storing values.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it executes the setting of the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. For this reason, information for performing a variable effect stored in the first pending information storage first area of the first pending information storage area 223e or the second pending information storage first area of the second pending information storage area 223f (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) are shifted to this execution information storage area 223g.

The previous variable game state storage area 223h is an area for storing the game state at the time of execution of the variable performance executed one variation before the variable performance to be executed from now on. When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 game state command or the special figure 2 game state command transmitted from the main control device 110, the information in the later-described current variable game state storage area 223i is changed to the previous variable game state. It shifts to the storage area 223h, and sets the information of the game state based on the received special figure 1 game state command or special figure 2 game state command to the current variable game state storage area 223i. Then, whether or not there is a difference in the game state at the time of execution of each variation performance of the previous variation and the current variation by the two information of this previous variation game state storage area 223h and this time variation game state storage area 223i which will be described later. A sub-relief counter display flag 223j, which will be described later, is set to ON or OFF depending on the determination result.

The current variable game state storage area 223i is an area for storing the game state at the time of execution of the variable performance to be started from now on. The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 determines the game at the time of execution of each of the previous fluctuation and the current fluctuation according to the two information of the previous fluctuation game state storage area 223h and the current fluctuation game state storage area 223i. It is determined whether or not there is a difference in state, and a sub-relief counter display flag 223j, which will be described later, is set to ON or OFF according to the determination result.

The sub relief counter display flag 223j is a flag for determining whether or not to display the relief counter display 89 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the "normal game state". This sub-relief counter display flag 223j is set to OFF as an initial value in the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1051 in FIG. 135). Then, the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is the "probability change state" or the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is In the case of the "normal game state", that is, immediately after shifting from the "probability fluctuation state" or the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state", the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is set to ON. (see S1406 in FIG. 141). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when any of the jackpots occurs (see S1502 in FIG. 142). In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the relief counter display 89 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the sub relief counter display flag 223j is set to ON.

The sub-relief counter 223k is a counter displayed on the relief counter display 89 in the third symbol display device 81 during the "normal game state", and is a counter for counting the number of executions of special symbols in the low-probability state of special symbols. be. By displaying the value of the sub-relief counter 223k in the display relief counter numerator 89b of the relief counter display 89 (see FIG. 99), the player can see the number of executions in the low-probability state of the special symbol and the number of times the relief condition is met. It is possible to grasp the number of executions of the remaining special symbols.

This sub-relief counter 223k is set to "0" as an initial value in the start-up process of the audio ramp control device 113 (see S1052 in FIG. 135). Then, at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is the "probability variable state", and the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is In the case of the "normal game state", ie, immediately after the transition from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state", the sub relief counter 223k is set to "0" (see S1403 in FIG. 141). In addition, the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is the "general figure high probability time reduction state", and the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is the "normal game state". In this case, that is, immediately after shifting from the "normal game high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state", "50" is set to the sub-relief counter 223k (see S1405 in FIG. 141). Further, when the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is the "normal game state", 1 is added (see S1408 in FIG. 141).

By configuring in this way, the sub-relief counter 223k is the timing of shifting from the "probability fluctuation state" or the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state", that is, the third symbol display device 81 is remedied. A value is set at the timing of starting the display of the counter display 89, and after that, 1 is added each time the variable display is executed in the "normal game state", so that the relief counter display 89 is displayed with an accurate value. be able to.

As a result, even if the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 does not have a backup function, the relief counter display 89 can be displayed with an accurate value. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, by configuring in this way, it becomes unnecessary to send a command to the sound lamp controller 113 for the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, so that the main controller 110 can be controlled. can be mitigated. As information related to the transition of the game state of the present invention, information on the number of fluctuations and the number of ceilings will be described, but for example, information on the end of the big win, information on the end of the small win, or "probability fluctuation state" It may be information about the end of , may be information about the end of "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state", or may be information about the end of "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". In this case, as an output mode of the information related to the transition of the game state, when the big win ends, a dedicated big win end screen may be output and displayed, and when the small win ends, a dedicated small win end screen may be output and displayed. Alternatively, at the end of the "probability fluctuation state", a dedicated variable probability end screen may be output and displayed, and at the end of the "general pattern high probability time reduction state", a dedicated time reduction end screen is output and displayed. Alternatively, at the end of the "normal figure low probability time reduction state", a dedicated time reduction end screen may be output and displayed. Also, as an update display related to the output mode of information related to the transition of the game state, an example will be described in which only the number of times of special symbol fluctuation effects is displayed in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state". Probability fluctuation state", "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" may be displayed.

Also, this sub-relief counter 223k is cleared to "0" when any of the jackpots occurs (see S1503 in FIG. 142).

The value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is transmitted as a command to the audio ramp controller 113, and the audio ramp controller 113 shifts the received value of the relief counter 203p to the sub relief counter 223k. It may be configured to be held by

Details of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storing area 223f, and the execution information storing area 223g will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram schematically showing configurations of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storing area 223f, and the execution information storing area 223g.

The first pending information storage area 223e has four areas of first pending information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first to fourth storage areas of the first pending information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Further, the second pending information storage area 223f has four areas of second pending information storage first to fourth areas, like the first pending information storage area 223e. In each of the first to fourth areas for storing second hold information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, in the execution information storage area 223g, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 and a jackpot type counter store the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed. A jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 where the value of C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. 223g4 are provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being executed. Furthermore, the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e corresponds to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily reserved among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is reserved. and the second area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is reserved the third oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended, and is the first suspension. The fourth area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performances of the first special symbol that are held.

In addition, the second reservation information storage first area of the second reservation information storage area 223f corresponds to the variation performance of the second special design that is temporarily reserved first among the variation performance of the second special design that is reserved. and the second area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained third in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is retained, and the second retention. The fourth information storage area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol which is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol which is held.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first pending ball number command from the main control device 110, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are set to the first reserve. Extract from the number of balls command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the holding balls included in the first holding ball number command in the corresponding first holding information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223e4 of the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved number of balls command is X (1≦X≦4), the number of variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved at that time is X. , the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command are the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved in the X-th time among the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command in the first reserved ball X area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the first reservation information storage X area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed to the 2 Extracted from the pending pitch command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the holding balls included in the third holding ball number command in the corresponding third holding information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223f4 of the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball number command is X (1 ≤ Y ≤ 4), the number of variable effects of the second special symbol that is reserved at that time is Y. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command are the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved in Y-th time among the variable effects of the second special symbol that is reserved. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage Y area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command in the second reserved Y area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation Y area of the main controller 110 are stored in the second stop information storage Y area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 1 variation pattern command and a special figure 1 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the first special symbol from the main controller 110, the first reservation information storage area 223e , to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, when there is pending information about the first special symbol, the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily suspended is started, so the first special symbol that is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reservation information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance of the currently executed first special symbol corresponding to the variable performance It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage area 223g are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage first area. 1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the third storage area for pending information are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the second area for storing the first pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the third pending information storage area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 2 variation pattern command and a special figure 2 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the second special symbol from the main control device 110, the second reservation information storage area 223f , to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, when there is pending information about the second special symbol, the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started, so the first suspended second special symbol. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reservation information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol currently being executed correspond to the variable performance. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223g.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area. 2 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third area for storing pending information are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second area for storing the second pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110. FIG. Furthermore, in the first holding information storage first to fourth areas and the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 are stored. 4 area, and the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and held by the main controller 110 are stored in the execution information storage area. 223g, the first pending information storage area 223e and the second pending information storage area 223f.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when performing a look-ahead process (not shown), the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d Grasp the number of variable effects (number of pending balls). Then, based on the number of pending balls, the first to fourth areas storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas storing the second pending information, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are read in advance, and whether or not a big win will be achieved in the variable performance, the variable time, etc. are determined. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "0", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 1 time and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first area for storing the first reserved information are read ahead and determined. I do. Also, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "4", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 4 times, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation information storage fourth area are read ahead and determined. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first reservation information storage area 223e and the second reservation information storage area 223f, and the fluctuation of the first special design and the second special design reserved by the main control device 110 Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the sound lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first suspension information storage area 223e and the second suspension information storage area 223f , the read-ahead process can be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. That is, when the suspended first special symbol or/and the second special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable production, and execution of various productions can be determined.

It should be noted that the first pending information storage area 223e or second pending information storage area 223f, and the above-described shift processing in the execution information storage area 223g, special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 variation Number of pending balls when pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command are received (update based on reception of special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command Based on the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d before the Data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the suspended variable performance among the four areas.

For example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223e Assume that data is stored in the (first reservation information storage first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first pending information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the first pending information The data in the third storage area is shifted to the second area for storing the first pending information, and the data in the fourth area for storing the first pending information is shifted to the third area for storing the first pending information.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "2", the first area for storing the first reserved information The data is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effect is not reserved, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. , the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, the data in the first to fourth areas for storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information is stored in the area with the area number smaller by 1 (execution information storage area 223g or It may be configured to shift to the first hold information storage first to third areas or the second hold information storage first to third areas. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first reserved information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second reserved information. Therefore, program creation can be facilitated.

Returning to FIG. 100, the description continues. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 137) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs a special pattern fluctuation effect or continuous notice. It controls the performance.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variation mode of the variation performance performed by the third symbol display device 81 differs for each game state, and the ball shooting mode encouraged for each game state is shown to the player. is configured as Specifically, for example, in a "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged, a character display of "left-handed", which encourages left-handed games, is displayed in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, and is composed of Arabic numerals. Each fluctuating pattern displayed fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form only one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" where right-handed games are encouraged, the character display "right-handed" that encourages right-handed games is mainly displayed. While displayed in the upper right area of the display area Dm, each variable pattern composed of Chinese numerals fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. be. In this way, by clearly differentiating the display mode of the variable symbols in each game state, the player can easily recognize the game state, and at the same time, the game mode (firing mode) necessary for performing the recommended game can be displayed. can be easily recognized. Regarding the shooting mode suggestion that is advantageous to the player of the present invention, the shooting suggestion display of the right-handed game will be described as an example. For example, even in the right-handed game, emphasis ( Enlargement) It may be a shooting suggestion display, or a shooting suggestion display for a left-handed game when the game state is advantageous for the player in the left-handed game.

Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 116 to 134. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S101). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, wait processing ("1 second" in this embodiment) (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 100) provided in the main controller 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally. In this case, the process proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203. do.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S156 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109). As means for maintaining the contents of control up to that point even when the supply voltage of the present invention drops, an example will be described in which a backup function is provided in the main controller 110 to retain the contents of control up to that point when power is cut off. A backup function may be provided in the sound lamp control device 113 so that the content of control up to that point can be retained at the time of power failure, or a backup function may be provided in the launch control device 112 to retain the content of control up to that time at the time of power failure. Alternatively, the display control device 114 may be provided with a backup function so that the contents of control up to that point can be retained when power is cut off, or the third symbol display device 81 and the sound lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the display control device 114 may be provided with a power saving function so that power consumption can be suppressed and control details up to that point can be retained during power saving.

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off and the setting key 501 is turned on when the power is turned on. In order to start the raise mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability display device 504 starts displaying the probability setting value (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S111), The "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and the process proceeds to S113. do. In the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the processes of S110 to S112 are skipped and the process proceeds to S113 in order to start up in the "normal mode". do.

In the process of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value, set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 118), which will be described later.

The setting value command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 119) of the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The audio ramp control device 113 is configured to store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a setting value memory (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 upon receiving the setting value command. .

On the other hand, in the process of S104, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the startup mode should be "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode". To make this determination, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

In the process of S115, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 to set the startup mode to "RAM clear mode".

In the processing of S116, initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S116, S117, S171 and S172) is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating, regardless of whether the settings have been changed, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed. be. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is pressed during startup processing, RAM initialization processing (S116, S117, S171 and S172) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set (S105: No), or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initialization of the RAM 203 conversion processing (S116, S117, S171 and S172).

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117, S171 and S172), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first reserve "0" clearing of the ball number counter 203a, etc.) are set (S117). Further, the relief setting completion flag 203q is set to off (S171), and the value of the relief counter 203p is cleared to "0" (S172). Next, a RAM initialization command is set and set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S173), and the process proceeds to S113.

The RAM initialization command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 119) of the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. When the voice lamp controller 113 receives this RAM initialization command, it determines that the start-up process has been executed in the "RAM clear mode", and the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the voice Both of the values of the sub-relief counter 223k held in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113 are initialized (that is, cleared to "0") and are in a state of consistency. It is turned on (see S1272 in FIG. 137).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), setting change processing is performed to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, referring to FIG. 117, the setting change process (S118) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode". is the processing of

In this setting change process (S118), first, the probability display device 504 is set to start displaying the current probability setting value (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. Display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is started by the setting of starting the display of the probability setting value.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be always fixed to a specific value instead of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. That is, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3") or "2" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. or "3", which is the maximum probability setting value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall staff can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. . Accordingly, the hall staff can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value " 2", and if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is "1", the display starts with the probability setting value set before the power cut off. You may do so. For example, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is as high as "3", there may often be a case where the probability setting value is desired to be slightly smaller (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is started to be displayed as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem will occur. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on. This is done by resetting to 1. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from "3" to "2", it is necessary to repeat turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 so that the probability setting value makes almost one cycle. On the other hand, if the probability set value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting to display the probability set value with "2", the probability setting can be performed while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. Values can be updated.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122). If there is (S122: No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. This initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3"), or may be "2", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. , may be "3", which is the maximum value of the probability setting values. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S122, when it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the process of S123 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

In the updating of the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that point is between "1" and "2", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is changed to "3". , the probability setting value is returned to "1". The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device 504. FIG.

The loop processing of S122→S123→S124: No→S125 (and S126)→S122 continues to be executed until it is determined in the processing of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on by the process of S124 (S124: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the probability display device 504 is set to the probability set value to be used in the game from now on. (S127), and sets the jackpot random number table 202a according to the probability set value (S128).

After the process of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S129). In the process of S129, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has changed to the OFF state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state.

As long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state as a result of the process of S129 (S129: No), the process of S129 is repeatedly executed. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is set (S130), and this setting change is performed. The process (S118) ends.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 116), the process moves to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117, S171 and S172), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased. (clear. In this way, in the process of S124, the hall personnel and the like are strongly aware that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased by having the hall personnel and the like turn on the RAM erase switch 503 to fix the probability setting value. can be made

Further, in the process of S124, the probability setting value is determined by detecting the ON state of the RAM erase switch 503, but the probability setting value may be determined by detecting the OFF state of the setting key 501. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and the counter values reach their maximum values ("9999" and "99" in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S153) by the same method as the processing of S207 (see FIG. 119) of the timer interrupt processing to be described later, and the process proceeds to S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119), which will be described later, is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, a process of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65 is performed, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 controls the display of normal symbols. In the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. come. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal figure per counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, random can be sexualized.

In the process of S151, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S151: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. , in FIG. 134, the NMI interrupt process, which will be described later, has been executed, so the power-off process from S154 onward is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and the power supply shutdown command indicating that the power supply is shut down is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). ) (S155). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S156), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished, and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, the occurrence information of the power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is finished. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting processing (S101). By setting to the predetermined value (initial value), the process of S151 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing according to the third embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In timer interrupt processing and main processing (see FIG. 118), commands or signals to be sent to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processing. , when a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and the pachinko machine 10 are connected) A signal is output to an external output terminal plate (not shown), etc.). In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission are transmitted to sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices), and the signals are output to various devices.

After the process of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the winning process for executing the process at the time of winning each special symbol is executed ( S203). This winning process (S203) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After S203, next, normal electric power control processing for executing drive control processing for the normal electric power 72 is executed (S204). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbols. ◯ symbol) appears and becomes a winning state, the normal electrode 72 is opened for a predetermined period of time. remains closed. This normal electric role control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S204, next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S205). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches 208, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("9999" in the third embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the third embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Then, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal pattern per counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal pattern counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (third embodiment Then, when they reach "9999", "99", "99", "9", and "99") respectively, they are cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure per counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the general figure per counter C4 is read as an initial value, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal pattern per counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Next, a starting prize winning process associated with winning to the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 is executed (S208). The details of this starting winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a gate passage process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in this gate passage processing (S209), the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained. While stored in the reserved ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 101), the number of reserved variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol reserved lamp 84, and the like. Details of this gate passage processing (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the gate passing process (S209) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying a special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or a process by the third symbol display device 81 based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S208) A special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S209), normal design determination is performed, and normal design variable display based on the determination result is performed in the normal design display device 83. A figure change process is executed (S211). In this normal pattern variation process (S211), the normal pattern hit probability is performed at either a high probability (for example, 99/100) or a low probability (70/100) according to the game state described above. Then, the normal symbols are variably displayed based on the result of success or failure, and the display result corresponding to the result of success or failure is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 . In addition, the detail of normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) is mentioned later with reference to FIG.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation processing (S211), the firing control processing is executed (S212), and further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), and this timer interrupt processing is terminated. .

Note that the firing control process (S212) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to fire the ball on or off. Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output processing (S201) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, processing to be executed periodically is executed by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119), and in the main processing, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. However, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). . For example, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was executed by the timer interrupt processing to read processing (S202), winning processing (S203), normal electric role control processing (S204), and switch reading processing (S205). ) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, the starting winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first start port 64 or the second start port 71. A process of storing (reserving) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the mouths 64 and 71 is executed. Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the starting winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting hole 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the first starting port switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) of the ball into the first starting port 64, which is read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 119), the first A ball entering the 1 starting port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 119).

As a result of the determination in S301, when it is determined that the ball has won the first start hole 64 (there has been a start win) (S301: Yes), then whether the game state is the "normal game state", that is, It is determined whether or not the game state encourages left-handed games (S302). As a result of the determination, if it is not in the "normal game state" (S302: No), the ball fired by the non-encouraged (prohibited) left-handed game instead of the recommended right-handed game is thrown into the first start port 64. Since it means that the player has won the prize, an alarm sound is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 100), and left-handed error processing such as displaying a character display of "Please hit right" on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Execute (S303), and the process proceeds to S304.

By configuring in this way, the first start port switch (not shown When the ball is detected in the above), error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed, and the player is discouraged from executing the left-handed game in a game state where the left-handed game is not encouraged (right-handed game Encouragement), the game in a game mode different from the recommended game specifications can be eliminated as much as possible, and the game characteristics assumed in each game state can be realized.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the game state is the "normal game state" (S302: Yes), the game state encourages left-handed games, so the process of S303 is skipped and S303 is skipped. The process proceeds to S304 without performing left-handed error processing.

As a result of the processing of S301, when it is determined that the ball has won the first starting hole 64 (there has been a starting prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (main controller 110 (S304) determines whether or not the number N1 of active balls (N1) of dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that is reserved is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the third embodiment) (S304) . Then, even if there is a winning to the first starting port 64, if the number of balls N1 < 4 (S304: No), this starting winning process (S208) is terminated, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119) back to

On the other hand, if the number N1 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S304: Yes), the value of the first ball number counter 203a (number of balls held in operation N1) is incremented by 1 (S305). Then, this time, since the winning is to the first starting port 64 corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S306), and processing is performed. to S311.

In the processing of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting port 64 (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second starting port 71 (start winning). (S307). Here, similarly to the first starting port 64, a second starting port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) of the ball into the second starting port 71, read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 119). Based on the output signal of , the ball entering the second starting port 71 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119).

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting hole 71 (there has been a starting prize) (S307: Yes), the process proceeds to S308.

In addition, in the processing of S307, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting port 71 (S307: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state is the "normal game state". If it is determined to be "state", it is a game state in which left-handed games are encouraged, so it may be configured to perform normal middle-right-handed error processing.

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 71 (there has been a starting prize) (S307: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b) It is determined whether or not the number N2 of activated balls for dynamic display (variation effect) of 2 special symbols is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the third embodiment) (S308). Then, if there is no winning to the second starting port 71 (S307: No), or even if there is a winning to the second starting port 71, if the number of balls to be activated is not N2<4 (S308: No), this The start winning process (S208) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119).

On the other hand, if the number N2 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S308: Yes), the value of the second ball number counter 203b (number of balls held in operation N2) is incremented by 1 (S309). Then, this time, since the winning is to the second starting port 71 corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S310), and processing is performed. to S311.

Further, in the processing of S301 and S307, when the ball has entered the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 at the same time, the winning processing of the ball to the first starting port 64 is preferentially executed, and the second starting port is executed. Waiting for the winning process of the ball to the opening 71, and in the start winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119), the waiting process of winning the ball to the second starting opening 71 is executed. can be configured to

In the process of S311, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 100) and stored in each reserved ball storage area. That is, among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d set as the storage destination in S306, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a The random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 and the variation type counter storage area 203d4 are reserved (stored) respectively (S311).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S306 based on the winning of the first starting port 64, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S305 If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved first area. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Similarly, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S310 based on the winning of the second starting port 71, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the processing of S309 is If it is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the second reservation third area, if the value of the second reservation ball number counter 203b after addition is "4", in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3, respectively , CS1 are reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition by the process of S305 (operational reserved ball number N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the process of S306, In order to transmit the first reserved ball number command including the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S312). In addition, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the process of S309 (number of activated ball N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the process of S310, and the jackpot In order to transmit the second reserved ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the second reserved ball number command is stored in the RAM 203. It is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S312). As a result, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 119) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. . When the process of S312 is finished, the start winning process (S208) is finished and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command in the process of S312 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S312. However, it is also possible to use the read value stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the process of S312.

Next, the gate passing process (S209), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing this gate passage processing (S209). In the gate passage processing (S209), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered the ball), and if the ball has passed through (entered the ball), the value of the normal game per counter C4 is stored in the normal game reserved ball. A process of storing (holding) in the area 203h is executed.

In this gate passage processing (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the passage of the ball into the through gate 67 (see S205 in FIG. 119) read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 119), (ball entry) is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119).

In the process of S401, if the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S401: No), this gate passing process (S209) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119). On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered the ball) (S401: Yes), then whether the game state is the "normal game state", that is, the shooting of the left-handed game ball is encouraged. It is determined whether or not the player is in a game state (S402). As a result of the determination, if it is "normal game state" (S402: Yes), the ball fired by the non-encouraged (prohibited) right-handed game instead of the encouraged left-handed game has passed through the through gate 67. Therefore, normal right-handed error processing such as outputting an alarm sound from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 100) and displaying the character display "Please return to left-handed hitting" on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S403), and the process proceeds to S404. In addition, as a related notification related to the notification means capable of informing the player of the game situation of the present invention, the display of the number of fluctuations during the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" will be described as an example. , or a telop display of ``Please return to left-handed'' in the ``normal game state''.

By configuring in this way, when a ball is detected at the through gate 67 in the "normal game state" in which right-handed games are not recommended, error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed, thereby preventing right-handed players from being hit. To make a player avoid playing a right-handed game in a game state in which the game is not encouraged, to eliminate as much as possible the game in a game form different from the game specifications to be encouraged, and to realize the game characteristics assumed in each game state. can do.

It should be noted that, in the process of S402, if the game state is not the "normal game state" (S402: No), the "probability fluctuation state", the "general figure high probability time shortening state" or the "normal figure Since it is in a low probability time reduction state, the process of S403 is skipped without performing the normal right hitting error process of S403, and the process proceeds to S404.

In the process of S404, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (normal pattern variable display operation reserved ball number HN reserved in the main controller 110) is the upper limit value ("4" in the third embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than (S404). Then, even if there is a ball passing through the through gate 67 (entering the ball), if the number of balls HN < 4 (S404: No), the gate passing process (S209) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (Fig. 119).

On the other hand, if the number of pending balls in operation HN<4 (S404: Yes), the value of the number of pending balls in normal pattern 203g (number of pending balls in operation HN) is incremented by 1 (S405). Then, the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 100), and the read data is stored in the normal pattern reservation first to fourth areas provided in the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203h. It is stored in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (S406).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g after addition by the process of S405 is "1", the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 is reserved in the normal pattern reservation first area. In addition, if the value of the normal figure reservation ball number counter 203g after addition is "2", it will be in the normal figure reservation second area, and if the value of the normal figure reservation ball number counter 203g after addition is "3" If the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g after addition is "4" in the reserved third area, the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 is reserved in the normal pattern reserved fourth area. After the process of S406 ends, this gate passage process (S209) ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119).

In addition, in the third embodiment, it is configured not to transmit the normal pattern pending ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol to the sound lamp control device 113, but the normal pattern pending ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol It may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device 113 and perform an effect (announcement) regarding a reserved symbol or the like relating to variable display of normal symbols. In this case, by transmitting the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 in the normal pattern pending ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute the so-called pre-reading process regarding the normal pattern, and the production of the normal pattern. It may be configured to provide variations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing this special figure variation process (S210).

This special symbol variation process (S210) includes dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37, and control of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. It is something to do.

The MPU 201, in this special figure variation process (S210), firstly, determines whether or not one of the first special figure and the second special figure is in the jackpot at the moment (S501). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special pattern display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, during a predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, during the jackpot opening), During a predetermined period of time after the jackpot game ends (that is, jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S501, if any special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (S501: Yes), the special figure variation process (S210) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) is returned to.

In the process of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S501: No), then the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2) moves in the special symbol display device 37. It is determined whether or not the target is being displayed (S502), and if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol (S502: No), then the special symbol display device After the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in 37 is stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (S503). As a result, after the stop of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (S503: No), the special figure fluctuation process (S210) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (figure 119). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (the third symbol display device 81) for a predetermined period of time. Then, the stop symbol can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S503, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S503: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (second special It is determined whether or not the number N2 of active balls with dynamic display (fluctuation performance) related to the pattern is greater than "0" (S504). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S504: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variable effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) (S505). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variation effect) relating to the second special symbol is started by the fluctuation start processing (S510) described later. This is because the number of reserved balls related to special symbols is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e (S506). This data shift process (S506) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 2 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted in the third area, and so on.

On the other hand, in the process of S504, if it is determined that the value of the second ball count counter 203b (the number of balls in operation N2) is "0" (S504: No), then the first ball count counter 203a (actuation suspension ball number N1 of dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol suspended in main controller 110) is greater than "0" (S507). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S507: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) (S508). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of dynamic displays (variation effect) related to the reserved first special symbol is started by the fluctuation start processing (S510) described later, and thus the ball is held. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d (S509). This data shift process (S509) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted in the third area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S506 or S509, the fluctuation start processing for the special design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing. (S510), and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119).

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, the variation start process (S510), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing this fluctuation start process (S510).

In this fluctuation start processing (S510), as described above, whether or not to perform dynamic display of each special symbol, setting processing of the dynamic display in the case of performing dynamic display of each special symbol, and the like are performed.

In this fluctuation start process (S510), dynamic display of special symbols executed in the special symbol display device 37 (third symbol display device 81) is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. In order to perform the setting process, first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203j provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S5101). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203j is not turned on (S5101: No), the game state is "normal game state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "normal low probability time reduction state" , and since the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5104. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203j is turned on (S5101: Yes), the game state is "probability fluctuation state", and the special symbol jackpot probability is a high probability state, so for high probability state is set (S5103), and the process proceeds to S5104.

In the process of S5104, a jackpot lottery (whether or not judgment ) processing is performed (S5104).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the set probability value. and the occasional game state (mode). As described above, the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low probability state ("normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state"). In this case, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot random numbers are defined such that the jackpot probability is 101/10000 when the set value is "1" and 105/10000 when the set value is "3". Further, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to 313/10000 with the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value "3" is 317/10000.

In the process of S5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined that As a result of the process of S5104, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S5104: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each special symbol (Fig. 103(a) or FIG. 103(b)), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S5105).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds. The jackpot type "time reduction A" that shifts to "time reduction state", or the jackpot type "time reduction B" that shifts to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds, or the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds The jackpot type "probability change A" that shifts to the "probability change state" after the jackpot, the jackpot type "probability change B" that shifts to the "probability change state" after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, or the maximum number of rounds is 6 rounds It is determined whether the jackpot type "probability variation C" that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e is determined by the reserved ball execution area 203f. If the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown) of , and the data is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, The jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 103(a)). In addition, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 in FIG. 2 (see FIG. 103(b)).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5109. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. A dynamic time (variation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from the selected performance mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each effect mode set in the process of S5105, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In the process of S5104, when it is determined that the winning is not a big hit (S5104: No), the result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of loss is set (S5107). In the process of S5107, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the retained ball execution area 203f and the first retained ball number counter are set. Based on the value of 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 include a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, and a "super reach" effect mode. ' effect mode or 'special reach' effect mode is set. In the third embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode differs according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing in each game state is determined (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5109.

In the process of S5108, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S5107, it corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f. Select the attached variation pattern. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In the processing of S5109, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processing of S5106 or S5108, the variation to notify the display control device 114 of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the audio ramp control device 113 A pattern command is set (S5109). The variation pattern command set in the process of S5109 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 119). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Specifically, for example, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is the jackpot type "time saving A", and further, the "super reach" production mode variation of "60 seconds" If the pattern is selected, the variation pattern command (i.e., the special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the "super reach" production mode of the first special symbol, jackpot, "time saving A", "60 seconds", hereinafter, the second A variation pattern command related to 1 special symbol may be referred to as a "special figure 1 variation pattern command".) is set. Also, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, if the big winning lottery is lost and the variation pattern of the "60 seconds" "super reach" production mode is selected, the second special symbol Loss "60 second” variation pattern command (that is, special figure 2 variation pattern command. Hereinafter, the variation pattern command related to the second special symbol may be referred to as “special figure 2 variation pattern command”. ) is set.

In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting together the propriety of the variable effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 can achieve the effect mode including the propriety. By grasping the contents of and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine a more detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect based on the information.

Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S5105 or S5107 via the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S5110), and the stop type set in the processing of S5106 or S5108 is set. A game state command indicating a game state in which the variation pattern is executed is set (S5111), and this variation start process (S510) is terminated to return to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 122). The stop type command set in the process of S5110 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 119) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . In addition, the gaming state command set in the process of S5111 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 119) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Inside, it is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Details will be described later, but in the audio ramp control device 113, by the game state command transmitted from the main control device 110 in the processing of S5111, by comparing the game state in the previous variable effect and the game state in the current variable effect It is determined whether or not the game state has changed, and whether or not to display the relief counter display 89 is determined according to the determination result (see FIG. 141). As a display that the state changes by establishing the predetermined condition of the present invention, an example of displaying only the number of executions of the special symbol variation effect in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" will be described. In the "normal game state", only the number of executions of the special symbol variation performance may be displayed, in the "probability variation state", only the number of executions of the special symbol variation performance may be displayed, or in the jackpot waiting state. A display to the effect that the gaming state will start (for example, "If you pass through the gate, the jackpot will start!") may be used.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description is continued. In the process of S507, when it is determined that the value of the first ball number counter 203a (the number of balls in operation and ball N1) is "0" (S507: No), the third symbol display device 81 performs a demonstration effect. In other words, it is determined whether the demonstration is in progress (S511). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the first pending ball number counter 203a or the second pending ball number counter 203b (operation pending ball number N1 or The period until it is determined that any value of the number of held balls N2) is greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S511: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 is set (S512), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S511: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119). The demo command set in the process of S512 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 119) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variable effect is not started even after the predetermined time has passed after the stop of the variation, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

If it is determined in the processing of S511 that the demonstration is not being performed (S511: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S512 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is during dynamic display (S502: Yes), whether or not the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol being executed has passed. Or, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed has elapsed, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is determined according to the determination result. To stop the variation stop processing (S513) is performed, this special figure variation processing (S210) is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119) is returned to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124, the variation stop processing (S513), which is one processing of the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 122) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing this fluctuation stopping process (S513).

In this fluctuation stop processing (S513), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of each special symbol has passed. While displaying on the display device 37 , each confirmation command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, in the case of the "probability fluctuation state", it is determined whether or not the end condition of the "probability fluctuation state" is satisfied according to the counting result of the number of times of dynamic display of the special symbol, and the "probability fluctuation state , the process of terminating the "probability change state" is performed. Furthermore, if the "time saving function" is in a valid gaming state, that is, if it is a "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the dynamic display fluctuation of the special symbol Determining whether or not the time-saving end condition of the “time-saving function” is satisfied according to the counting result of the number of times, and if the time-saving end condition of the “time-saving function” is satisfied, the process of switching the “time-saving function” from enabled to disabled. etc. Also, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, it is determined whether or not the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed has reached the relief condition establishment count. Perform setting processing of the number of times of time reduction for shifting to "low probability time reduction state". From the state in which the game in the shooting mode that is advantageous for the player of the present invention is encouraged, as the start time of the state in which the game in the shooting mode that is disadvantageous to the player is encouraged. The case of shifting to the "normal game state" will be described as an example, but for example, it may be the case of shifting from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state", or the case of shifting from the jackpot game state to the "normal game state". It may be the case of shifting from the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state", or it may be the case of shifting from the right-handed game state to the left-handed game state.

In the fluctuation stop processing (S513), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the special symbol being executed has passed (S5201). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbols in the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 etc. (special figure 1 variation pattern command or special figure 2 variation pattern command is determined according to), if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of this special design has not passed (S5201: No), the special design display device 37 corresponding to the special design being executed The display of the special LED group 37b is updated (S5202), this fluctuation stop process is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation process (see FIG. 122).

In the third embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the upper LED group 37b1 lights in a predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display of the first special symbol is started. Alternatively, a display mode to turn off is set, and a display mode in which the lower LED group 37b2 lights up or goes out in a predetermined lighting pattern is set until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display of the second special symbol is started. .

On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of the special symbol in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S5201: Yes), the special symbol display device 37 (S5203). The stop symbol is set in advance by the process of S5105 or S5107 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 123).

In the third embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a loss, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed, and the determination result is a jackpot. In this case, the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the jackpot.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of each special symbol is set in the processing of S5203, the stop symbol of the variable effect of each special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the special symbol display device 37. In order to synchronize with the display of the special LED group 37b in the pattern display device 37 and perform the confirmation display, a confirmation command is set (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205. When the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81, a confirmation command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol (that is, a special figure 1 confirmation command. Hereinafter, The confirmation command related to the first special symbol may be referred to as "special figure 1 confirmation command". Confirmation command for confirming the variation effect of the second special symbol (that is, special figure 2 confirmation command. Hereinafter, the confirmation command related to the second special symbol may be referred to as "special figure 2 confirmation command".) set.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this special figure 1 confirmation command, the display special to the display control device 114 in order to stop the variation effect of the first special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81 When the FIG. 1 confirmation command is transmitted and the special figure 2 confirmation command is received, in order to stop the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 FIG. 2 Sends the confirmation command. The display control device 114 receives the special figure 1 confirmation command for display or the special figure 2 confirmation command for display, so that the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 It is configured to stop the variable performance and to confirm and display the stop pattern.

In the process of S5205, it is determined whether or not it is "probability fluctuation state" (S5205), and if it is "probability fluctuation state" (S5205: Yes), the end condition of the high probability state has been established by stopping the special symbol (S5206) to execute the ST counting process to determine whether or not (S5206), to end this fluctuation stop process, return to the special figure fluctuation process (see Figure 122).

Here, referring to FIG. 125, the ST counting process (S5206), which is one process of the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 124) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing this ST counting process (S5206).

In this ST counting process (S5206), the special symbol high probability state, ie, when the probability variation flag 203j is turned on, counts the number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol, and the counting result is the high probability of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the termination condition of the probability state is satisfied, and the 'probability fluctuation state' is shifted to the 'normal game state' according to the determination result.

In this ST counting process (S5206), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ST counter 203k (S5301), and then it is determined whether or not the subtracted value of the ST counter 203k is greater than "0" ( S5302). As a result of determination, if the value of the ST counter 203k subtracted in the process of S5301 is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the ST counter 203k is equal to or less than "0" (S5302: No), "probability fluctuation Since the end condition of "state" is satisfied, the probability variable flag 203j is set to OFF (S5303), the time saving high probability flag 203n is set to OFF (S5304), and this ST counting process is terminated to change stop processing (Fig. 124).

On the other hand, in the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the ST counter 203k is greater than "0" (S5302: Yes), the termination condition of the "probability fluctuation state" is not satisfied. The process of S5304 is skipped, this ST count process is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (FIG. 124).

Returning to FIG. 124, the description is continued. As a result of the determination of S5205, if it is not a "probability fluctuation state" (S5205: No), then it is determined whether it is a "high probability time reduction state" or "low probability time reduction state". Normal pattern high probability time shortened state” or “normal pattern low probability time shortened state” (S5207: Yes), “normal pattern high probability time shortened state” or “normal pattern low probability time shortened state” A time saving counting process for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied is executed (S5208), and then the process proceeds to S5209. Also, as a result of the determination of S5207, if it is determined that it is not "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" (S5207: No), the time saving end condition is not determined, The process of S5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5209.

Here, with reference to FIG. 126, the time reduction number processing (S5208), which is one processing of the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 124) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing this time reduction number processing (S5208).

In this time-saving counting process (S5208), when the "time-saving function" is set to be valid, the execution number of times of dynamic display of special symbols, which is the termination condition of the "time-saving function" (for example, the fluctuation of the first special symbol The number of times and the number of times of variation of the second special pattern) are counted, it is determined whether or not the result of counting satisfies the time-saving end condition, and the 'time-saving function' is changed from effective to ineffective according to the determination result.

In this time saving number of times processing (S5208), first, since the dynamic display of the special symbol has stopped once, the value of the time saving counter 203o is subtracted by 1 (S5401), and then the subtracted value of the time saving counter 203o is " 0” is determined (S5402). As a result of the determination, if the value of the time saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5402: Yes), the end condition of the "time saving function" is not satisfied, so this time saving counting process (S5208) is terminated, Return to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 124).

On the other hand, in the process of S5402, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203o is not greater than "0", that is, if it is determined that it is less than or equal to "0" (S5402: No), "time saving function" Since the end condition of is satisfied, then, in order to determine whether it is a "time saving shortened state" or a "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state", it is determined whether the time saving high accuracy flag 203n is turned on (S5403 ). As a result of the determination, if the time saving high accuracy flag 203n is turned on (S5403: Yes), in order to end the "general figure high accuracy time shortening state", the time saving high accuracy flag 203n is set to off (S5404) , This time saving number of times processing (S5208) ends, and returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 124). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving high probability flag 203n is not set to on (S5403: No), the time saving low probability flag 203m is set to on, state”, the time saving low probability flag 203m is set to OFF (S5405), this time saving number of times processing (S5208) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 124) is returned to.

In this way, in the state where the "time saving function" is valid, depending on the termination conditions of the "time saving function", the "normal figure high probability time saving state" or "normal figure low probability time shortening state" can be terminated. , the "time-saving function" can be appropriately enabled or disabled to enrich game variations and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 124, the description is continued. When the time saving counting process of S5208 is over, or when it is determined that it is not "general pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" in the process of S5207 (S5207: No), the special symbol It is determined whether or not the number of dynamic display executions reaches the relief condition establishment count, and according to the determination result, a relief arrival counting process is executed in order to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" (S5209), and this End the fluctuation stop processing (S513), and return to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 122).

Here, referring to FIG. 127, the relief arrival counting process (S5209), which is one process of the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 124) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing this relief arrival counting process (S5209).

In this relief arrival counting process (S5209), the number of execution times of dynamic display of special symbols is counted, and it is determined whether or not the counting result reaches the number of times relief conditions are met. Set the number of times of time reduction based on the transition to "low probability time reduction state".

In this relief arrival counting process (S5209), first, it is determined whether or not the relief setting completion flag 203q is turned on (S5501). Ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state "Since it has already been transferred once, skip the processing of S5502 to S5506, terminate this relief arrival counting process (S5209), and return to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 124).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S5501, if the relief setting completed flag 203q is not turned on (S5501: No), it has not yet shifted to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" after the special symbol has become a low probability state. Since it is in the state, 1 is added to the value of the relief counter 203p (S5502). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the added value of the relief counter 203p is smaller than "250" (S5503).

As a result of the determination in S5503, if the value of the relief counter 203p added in the processing of S5502 is smaller than "250" (S5503: Yes), the processing of S5504 to S5506 is skipped, and the relief arrival count processing (S5209) is skipped. Terminates and returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 124).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5503, if the value of the relief counter 203p added in the processing of S5502 is not less than "250", that is, if the value of the relief counter 203p is greater than or equal to "250" (S5503: No), Since the conditions are established, first, set "379" to the value of the time saving counter 203o (S5504), and turn on the relief setting completion flag 203q to indicate that it has shifted to the "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state" Set (S5505). Then, in order to shift the game state to the "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state", the time reduction low probability flag 203m is set to ON (S5506), this relief arrival counting process (S5209) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop process (See FIG. 124). As a result, it is possible to generate the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" based on the establishment of the relief condition. In addition, when the value of the relief counter 203p reaches "250", the relief counter display 89 displays an achievement indication (for example, "Ceiling time reduction acquisition!") indicating that the relief condition is satisfied. By changing the suggestive display of the present invention to a special suggestive display, a relief counter is provided as a display that suggests to the player that the game state will shift to a game state in which the game value is easily given to the player by the winning of the ball. A case has been described in which the display 89 displays an achievement display indicating that the relief condition has been established. It may be configured to display a special pending display (for example, a "V" character display in the pending symbol) to suggest to the player that the event has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the winning process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S203).

This winning process (S203) sets the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) according to the type of the jackpot when a jackpot of each special symbol occurs, and set the opening time of Then, in the case of the jackpot state (game), a jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed, and the jackpot setting the end of the jackpot state at the timing when the jackpot state ends. End processing (S614) is executed.

In the winning process (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a big win has been won in any dynamic display of special symbols (S601). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is won (S601: Yes), in order to perform the jackpot game, first, in order to invalidate the "probability change function" during the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203j is set to OFF (S602 ), and the value of the ST counter 203k is cleared to "0" (S603). Then, in order to invalidate the "time saving function", the time saving low probability flag 203m and the time saving high probability flag 203n are set to OFF (S604), and the value of the time saving counter 203o is cleared to "0" (S605). Furthermore, in order to disable the ceiling function, the relief setting completion flag 203q is set to off (S606), and the value of the relief counter 203p is cleared to "0" (S607). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, in order to transmit a jackpot opening command indicating the start of the jackpot to the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S609). An opening time (for example, "30 seconds" or "10 seconds") corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S610), and the process proceeds to S611. Thereby, the jackpot opening command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 119) of the timer interrupt processing executed next. In addition, although the relief counter 203p was used and demonstrated as a means to count the frequency|count of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of this invention, you may use a time-saving frequency counter, for example.

The round counter described above is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), controls the opening of the variable winning device 65 according to the jackpot game, and the round Decrease the value of the counter by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot in progress is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S601, when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the dynamic display of any special symbol (S601: No), the processing of S602 to S610 is skipped and the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S611, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S611). As a result of determination, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S611: Yes), a jackpot opening/closing control process for controlling the opening/closing of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S612).

Here, with reference to FIG. 129, the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed based on the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 set in the winning process (S203).

In the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), first, the opening time set in S610 of the winning process (S203), or the opening time set in S6020 (see FIG. 130) of the big winning opening opening process (S6007) described later. It is determined whether or not the interval time has passed (S6001). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has not passed (S6001: No), it is not the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so that the variable winning device 65 is kept closed. Skip the process and proceed to S6006.

On the other hand, in the process of S6001, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has passed (S6001: Yes), it is the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6002). , a winning counter (not shown) is set to "10" (S6003). Then, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 at the time of the big win ("30 seconds" in the third embodiment) is set (S6004), and a large winning opening opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened is issued. It is generated and set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6005), and the process proceeds to S6006. The sound lamp control device 113 that has received the command to open the big winning opening executes the information that the variable winning device 65 has been opened in the third symbol display device 81, and informs the player that the variable winning device 65 has been opened. It is configured to prompt the player to win the ball to the variable winning device 65 which is open to the player.

In the process of S6006, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open (S6006). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device 65 is not open (S6006: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open and is during the opening time or the interval time, so the processing of S6007 is skipped and this The jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) is ended, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 128). On the other hand, in the process of S6006, when it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open (S6006: Yes), in order to determine the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 that is open, processing during the opening of the big winning opening is performed. Performs (S6007), ends this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), and returns to the winning process (see FIG. 128).

Here, with reference to FIG. 130, the process (S6007) during opening of the big winning opening, which is one process of the big win opening/closing control process (S612) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007).

In this process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007), the process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In this big winning opening opening process (S6007), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S6004 of the big winning opening/closing control process (S612) has passed (S6011). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed (S6011: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is established, and the closing timing of the variable winning device 65 in the round is reached. In order to clear the counter value to "0" (S6012) and close the variable winning device 65, the process proceeds to S6016. The closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6016 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S6011, if it is not the time when the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed (S6011: No), then whether or not the big winning opening switch 65c is turned on, that is, whether the ball enters the variable winning device 65 It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (S6013).

In the process of S6013, if the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 65c and the ball has won the variable winning device 65 (S6013: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6014), then the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6015). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6015: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", 10 or more balls enter the variable winning device 65 and variable winning is achieved. Since the conditions for closing the device 65 are satisfied, the process proceeds to S6016 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

In the processing of S6015, if it is determined that the value of the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6015: Yes), the conditions for closing the variable winning device 65 are not established, and the variable winning device 65 is opened. , the processing of S6016 to S6020 is skipped, and the processing during opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is ended. After the process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is completed, the process returns to the big win opening/closing control process (see FIG. 129).

Next, in the process of closing the variable winning device 65 from S6016, first, the variable winning device 65 is set to be closed (S6016), and then the audio lamp control device 113 is notified that the variable winning device 65 has been closed. A large winning opening closing command is set (S6017), and the process proceeds to S6018. It should be noted that the large winning opening closing command set in the process of S6017 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 119). ) to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Next, in the process of S6018, since one round of the variable winning device 65 has been completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter (S6018), and then whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6019). If the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6019: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (number of times the variable winning device 65 remains open) remains, so the next variable winning device 65 is opened (for example, "1 second") is set (S6020), the process during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 129).

On the other hand, in the process of S6019, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S6019: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since all the opening operations have been completed, the interval time is not set (that is, S6020 is skipped) in order to end the jackpot state, and the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is finished, and the jackpot opening/closing control is performed. Return to the process (see FIG. 129).

Returning to the winning process (S203) in FIG. 128, the description is continued. After the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 129) of S612 ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S613). As a result of determination, if the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S613: Yes), in order to continue the big win state, the process of S614, which is the big win end setting process, is skipped, and this winning process (S203) exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S613, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S613: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since all the opening actions have been completed, a jackpot ending process is performed to end the jackpot state (S614), and the winning process (S203) is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 131, the jackpot ending process (S614), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S610).

In this jackpot end processing (S614), the probability variable flag 203j, the ST counter 203k, the time-saving high-probability flag 203n and the time-saving counter 203o are set based on the winning jackpot type.

In this jackpot end processing (S614), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of this time is the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B" or "probability variation C" (S6101). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B" or "probability variation C" (S6101: Yes), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to "probability fluctuation state" , turns on the variable probability flag 203j (S6102), turns on the time saving high probability flag 203n (S6103), then sets "50" to the ST counter 203k (S6104), and shifts the process to S6107.

In the processing of S6101, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B" and "variable probability C" (S6101: No), the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "time saving A or "time saving B", turns on the time saving high accuracy flag 203n (S6105), sets "50" to the time saving counter 203o (S6106), and shifts the process to S6107.

In the processing of S6107, an ending command indicating the start of the ending effect of the jackpot is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S6107). The ending command set in the process of S6107 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 119) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the ending effect of a big win.

After the end of the process of S6107, an ending time (for example, "10 seconds") is set according to the gaming state (S6108), and a jackpot end setting process for executing various processes at the end of the jackpot is performed (S6109). , ends the jackpot end processing (S614) and returns to the winning processing (see FIG. 128).

In addition, although the "probability fluctuation state" will be described as an example of the high state of the game value of the present invention, it may be, for example, a jackpot state with a large number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds). Also, as a low state in which the game value is lower than the high state, the "general figure high probability time reduction state" will be described as an example, but for example, a jackpot state with a small number of rounds (eg, 5 rounds) may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the normal chart fluctuation process (S211), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing this normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211).

This normal pattern variation process (S211) is for controlling the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 83 due to passage of the ball through the through gate 67. FIG.

In the normal pattern variation process (S211), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric player 72 is currently projecting (operating), that is, whether or not the normal pattern is winning (S701). As a result of the determination, if the normal electrode 72 is protruding (S701: Yes), the normal symbol is in the process of winning, so the normal pattern variation process (S211) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) ).

On the other hand, if the normal electric combination 72 is not protruding (S701: No), it is not during the winning of the normal symbols. Determine (S702). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the normal design display device 83 is not in the variable display of the normal design (S702: No), then after the variable display in the normal design display device 83 stops, a predetermined time (for example, "1 second ”) It is determined whether or not it has passed (S703). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the variable display (S703: No), the normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119) is returned to. As a result, the stopped symbols in the variable display are displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stopped symbols.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S703, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S703: Yes), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (variable It is determined whether or not the displayed number of balls to be activated (HN) is greater than "0" (S704).

As a result of the processing of S704, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (operation reserved ball number HN) is not greater than "0" (S704: No), there is a normal pattern variable display reserved ball number to be executed. Since it does not mean that it does not, this normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) is terminated, and it returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119). On the other hand, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (actuated reserved ball number HN) is a value greater than "0" (S704: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the variable display related to the reserved normal pattern. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203g (operation reserved ball number HN) (S705). This is due to the processing (S706 to S712) to be described later, in accordance with the start of the execution of one variable display of the reserved variable display regarding the normal symbols, the number of reserved balls regarding the normal symbols decreases by one. Because.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the normal map reserved ball storage area 203h (S706). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203h toward the general pattern reservation ball execution area 203i. Reservation 1st area → Normal drawing reservation ball execution area 203i, Normal drawing reservation 2nd area → Normal drawing reservation 1st area, Normal drawing reservation 3rd area → Normal drawing reservation 2nd area, Normal drawing reservation 4th area → Normal drawing The data in each area is shifted, in a reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S706, the normal design in the normal design display device 83 is variable based on the data (that is, the value of the counter C4 for the normal design) stored in the normal design reservation ball execution area 203i by the data shift processing. In order to perform a display, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving low probability flag 203m or the time saving high probability flag 203n is turned on (S707). As a result of determination, when the time saving low probability flag 203m and the time saving high probability flag 203n are not turned on (S707: No), it is determined that the "normal game state" in which the "time saving function" is invalidated, and the normal symbol is displayed. The variable display time is set to "15 seconds" (S708), and the process proceeds to S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving low-probability flag 203m or the time-saving high-probability flag 203n is turned on (S707: Yes), the "probability fluctuation state" in which the "time-saving function" is effective, the "general pattern high-probability time reduction state ' or 'normal pattern low probability time shortened state', the variable display time of the normal pattern is set to '0.1 second' (S709), and the process proceeds to S710.

In the process of S710, it is determined whether or not the time-saving high-probability flag 203n is turned on (S710), and if the time-saving high-probability flag 203n is not turned on (S710: No), that is, in the normal design low probability state , By referring to the group for the low probability state in the random number table 202g per normal pattern, the value of the per normal pattern counter C4 stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203i is determined, and the stop pattern of variable display of the normal pattern is determined. (That is, the propriety of the normal design) is determined (S711). Also, if the time saving high probability flag 203n is turned on (S710: Yes), that is, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, refer to the group for the high probability state in the random number table 202g per normal pattern, and hold the normal pattern The value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the ball execution area 203i is determined, and the stop symbol of the variable display of the normal symbol (that is, the propriety of the normal symbol) is determined (S712). After the processing of S711 and S712, this normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) is ended, and it returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119).

As a result, by changing the winning/losing probability of normal symbols according to the game state, it is possible to determine whether or not the normal electric combination 72 is likely to open when the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the player hits to the right. can make a difference. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is in a situation where the normal electric 72 is easy to open (that is, a high probability state of normal symbols) and is easy to flow into the second starting port 71 side. In a situation where it is more difficult to open the electric element 72 than it is easy to open (that is, a state with a low probability of normal symbols), the upper surface of the closed (protruding) normal electric element 72 rolls from the right end to the left end, By varying the situation in which the game can flow into the variable winning device 65 side depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state.

In the processing of S702, when it is determined that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S713). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the processing of S708 or S709, and if this variable display time has not passed (S713: No), the normal symbol display device 83 is displayed. is updated (S714), this normal pattern fluctuation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119).

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 has passed (S713: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol preset by S711 or S712 to the normal symbol display device 83 is set (S715), this normal pattern fluctuation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119).

As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the normal design display device 83 is set based on the normal design variation processing (S211), and the variable display is started in the normal design display device 83. until the variable display time elapses, the "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. When the result of the variable display is a win, the symbol "O" is lit, and when the result is a loss, the symbol "x" is lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, normal electric control processing (S204), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this normal electric duty control process (S204).

In this normal electric role control process (S204), when a normal symbol hit occurs, opening/closing (protrusion and immersion) drive control of the normal electric role 72 is executed according to the game state. That is, the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric part 72 is set according to the game state, and the normal electric part 72 is driven to open based on the set time, and when the set projecting time elapses, it is opened. A control is executed to close (protrude) the ordinary electric terminal 72 during (immersion).

In the normal electric role control process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric role 72 is open (immersed), that is, whether or not the normal symbols are winning (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal electric part 72 is not open (S801: No), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbols are not winning, next, whether the variable display of the normal symbols has ended. It is determined whether or not (S802).

As a result of determination in S802, if variable display of normal symbols has not ended (S802: No), this normal electric role control process (S204) ends and returns to timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119). If the variable display of the normal symbols has ended (S802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a win has been won in the variable display (S803).

As a result of the determination in S803, if it is determined that the win has not been won in the variable display (S803: No), this normal electric role control processing (S204) is terminated and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119) back to On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is won in the variable display (S803: Yes), in order to execute the control related to winning, first, the time saving low probability flag 203m or the time saving high probability flag 203n is turned on. (S804).

As a result of the determination in S804, if it is determined that the time saving low probability flag 203m and the time saving high probability flag 203n are not turned on (S804: No), the "normal game state" in which the "time saving function" is disabled Then, based on the specified contents of the ordinary electric role opening table 202i, the opening time of the ordinary electric role 72 in the winning state is set to "0.1 second" (S805), and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric role 72 is set based on the hit. is set to "1" in an electric duty counter (not shown) (S806), and the process proceeds to S809.

On the other hand, in the process of S804, if it is determined that the time saving low probability flag 203m or the time saving high probability flag 203n is turned on (S804: Yes), the "time saving function" is effective "probability fluctuation state", "normal It is determined that it is a high probability time shortening state or a low probability time shortening state, and the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric role 72 in the winning state is determined based on the specified contents of the normal electric role opening table 202i. 5.8 seconds” (S807), and in order to open the normal electric circuit 72 once based on the hit, set the value of the electric circuit counter (not shown) to “1” (S808 ), and the process proceeds to S809.

In the process of S809, the normal electric part 72 is opened (immersed) (S809), the normal electric part 72 is driven from the closed (protruding) state to the open state, and the normal electric part control process (S204) is executed. When finished, return to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119).

As a result, when the player hits to the right, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the position where the ordinary electric terminal 72 is arranged, and the state in which the ordinary electric terminal 72 is open is long or short. can make a difference. As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided toward the second starting port 71 side, or rolls over the upper surface of the normal electrode 72 from the right end to the left end in the closed state of the normal electrode 72, By making the state in which the ball can be flowed down to the variable prize winning device 65 side differ depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state.

In the process of S801, if it is determined that the normal electric part 72 is open (S801: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the process of winning, then It is determined whether or not the normal electric circuit 72 has been opened once (S810). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the set opening time of the ordinary electric circuit 72 has not passed (S810: No), S811 to S813 are executed in order to maintain the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72. The process is skipped, the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 119) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the process of S810, if it is determined that the set opening time of the normal electric terminal 72 has passed (S810: Yes), first, the closing (projection) process of the normal electric terminal 72 is executed. (S811), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the electric duty counter set in the process of S806 or S808 (S812). Then, it is determined whether or not the decremented value of the electric duty counter is greater than "0" (S813). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is greater than "0" (S813: Yes), the number of times the normal electric service 72 is opened remains based on the hit, so the process is executed. The process proceeds to S809, and after a predetermined interval process is performed, the normal electric circuit 72 is opened again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the service counter is not greater than "0" (S813: No), that is, if the value of the service counter is less than or equal to "0", the normal service based on the pertinence is determined. 72 has been completely opened, the ordinary electric circuit 72 is not reopened, the ordinary electric circuit control processing (S204) is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 119) is returned to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. 134 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, and stores power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power failure occurrence information settings (S901). ), ending the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 135 to 142, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 135) that is activated upon power-on and main processing (see FIG. 136) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 135, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1116 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 136, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110, it executes power-off processing in S1116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), it will transfer to S1004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1116, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 136). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1010), the sub The relief counter display flag 223j is set to off (S1051), and the value of the sub relief counter 223k is cleared to "0" (S1052). Next, interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the processing for clearing the working area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), the sub-relief counter is displayed. The flag 223j is set to OFF (S1051), and the value of the sub relief counter 223k is cleared to "0" (S1052). Next, interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The reason why the clearing process of S1009 is skipped is that when the process of S1008 is reached from S1004 via the process of S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the RAM 203 built in the main controller 110 has a backup function. does not have a backup function. Therefore, when the power supply is interrupted (except for a momentary power failure) due to a power failure or the like, the data in the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 equipped with a backup function is restored to the state before the power interruption. All the data in the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 which does not have the function is cleared. Therefore, immediately after the start-up processing of the audio ramp control device 113 is executed, the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the sub relief counter 223k held in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 The value is inconsistent. Therefore, if the relief counter display 89 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the state immediately after execution of the start-up process, an incorrect value of the relief counter display 89 will be notified to the player.

Therefore, in this start-up process, the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is set to OFF, and the relief counter display 89 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is hidden immediately after the power is cut off. By setting the sub-relief counter display flag 223j to ON at the timing of receiving the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in the command determination processing (see FIG. 137) and the relief counter display processing (see FIG. 141), which will be described later. , the correct rescue counter display 89 value can be displayed.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when a setting value command is received from the main controller 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in a setting value memory (not shown) (S1013), and the main processing ( 136).

In this manner, in the start-up processing of the audio ramp control device 113, the process to the main processing (see FIG. 136) is executed until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 116) is received. By waiting for the transition, the audio lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability set value set by the main controller 110, and the main processing and subsequent processing can be executed based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main controller 110, the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not reached the final stage, and the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not ended normally. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not terminated normally, and the process is not shifted to the main process. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to grasp whether or not the start-up processing of the main control device 110 has been normally executed, and whether the main control device 110 has started up normally. It is possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 from running out of control in a non-existent state.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the processing of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if "1 millisecond or more" has not passed ( S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the process of S1101, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed because S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed in a short period (within "1 millisecond"), whereas S1110 This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation effect processing of S1111 and the command determination processing of S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

In the process of S1101, when it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 135, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds"). 227. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a winning effect process for executing an effect related to a big win set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106. In addition, in the third embodiment, during the opening of the variable winning device 65 related to the jackpot by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened or a right-handed notification performance). The details of this winning effect processing (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIG. As the firing mode suggestion that suggests that the state of the present invention has changed, an example will be described in which the launch suggestion display prompting the right-handed game and the launch suggestion display prompting the left-handed game are displayed with different displays. Emphasized (enlarged) launch suggestion display that strongly encourages right-handed play during a game state in which a hitting game is performed, and the above-mentioned emphasized (enlarged) launch suggestion display and display area, size, color, etc., although encouraging the continuation of right-handed play It may be configured to perform a display with a difference between a plain (reduced) launch suggestion display and a different display.

Next, in the processing of S1106, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the performance effect, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and during the valid period, the frame button is pressed. This is processing for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the frame button 22 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1106) is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command received from the main controller 110, or the special figure 2 variation pattern command and Variation effect processing corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed based on the special figure 2 stop type command (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111. The details of this variation effect processing (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of this command determination process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1112, counter update processing is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, the update of a counter that determines the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, and the update of a pending change counter (not shown) that draws a lottery for "pending change notice" are performed in this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment) and resetting it to “0” after reaching the maximum value (“99”).

When the process of S1112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off processing is executed (S1116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 determine the command.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main controller 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of determination, if a command has been received from main controller 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, Whether a command (that is, a special figure 1 variation pattern command, a special figure 1 stop type command, a special figure 1 game state command or a special figure 1 confirmation command, etc.) related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of 1 special symbol is received is determined (S1202). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is received (S1202: Yes), special figure 1 command processing for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1203), and this The command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 136).

Here, with reference to Drawing 138, special figure 1 command processing (S1203) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 138 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 1 command processing (S1203).

In this special figure 1 command process (S1203), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1221). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1221: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received special figure 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1222).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 140) described later, the variation of the first special symbol is displayed for the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 1 variation pattern command for display that notifies the start of production and its variation pattern type. After that, this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 137 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1223). And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command is received (S1223: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command (S1224).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 140) described later, the variable effect of the first special symbol is applied to the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 1 stop type command for display that notifies the stop type of. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol is started is set to ON (S1225), this special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination process (See FIG. 137).

It should be noted that the special figure 1 stop type command, after the main controller 110 transmits the special figure 1 variation pattern command when starting the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is indicated by the special figure 1 variation pattern command. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main controller 110 as a command indicating the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol. By setting the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1225, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 140) to be executed later, the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the first reserved ball number command Determination of whether the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted based on and the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command match I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the first pending ball number command, and the first extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variable performance of the special symbol matches. As a result of those determinations, in the variation performance of the first special symbol of 1, if the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command do not match, or the first If the stop type based on the number of pending balls command and the stop type based on the special figure 1 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and an abnormality is detected. It is configured to perform error handling to indicate

As a result of the processing of S1223, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has not been received (S1223: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1226). Special figure 1 game state command is the command which shows the game state when the fluctuation production of the 1st special design is started. If it is determined that this special figure 1 gaming state command has been received (S1226: Yes), first, the information in the current varying gaming state storage area 223i is shifted to the previous varying gaming state storage area 223h (S1227), and then The gaming state based on the received special figure 1 gaming state command is set to the current variable gaming state storage area 223i (S1228), this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and command determination processing (see FIG. 137) back to

The previous varying gaming state storage area 223h and the current varying gaming state storage area 223i stored in the processing of S1227 and S1228 are used to determine whether or not the relief counter display 89 is displayed in the relief counter display processing (see FIG. 141) described later. used as information for A rescue counter is displayed in a low probability state of special symbols as a display of the result of a player playing a game in a state that can be shifted to when a predetermined condition is established in a state that can be shifted by deriving the winning result of the present invention. 89 will be described with an example of displaying the number of executions of the special symbol variation performance. Cumulative display of the acquired balls obtained in the state of manor may be used. In this case, when the result display of the game played by the player reaches a predetermined achievement value (for example, "1000 shots"), the achievement value may be emphasized and displayed as the achievement value display. good.

As a result of the processing of S1226, if it is determined that the special figure 1 game state command has not been received (S1226: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1229). The special figure 1 determination command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation performance of the first special symbol when the variation performance of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . When it is determined that this special figure 1 confirmation command is received (S1229: Yes), when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed for the display control device 114, the variation of the first special symbol Set the special figure 1 confirmation command for display to confirm and display the effect (S1230), terminate this special figure 1 command process (S1203), and return to the command determination process (see FIG. 137).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 1 confirmation command from the audio lamp control device 113, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the first special While confirming and displaying the variation performance of the symbol, when the variation performance of the first special symbol is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 confirmation command for display is ignored (the processing based on is not executed) , the display content is not changed based on the

As a result of the processing of S1229, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1229: No), the process related to the variation effect of the other first special symbol is performed (S1231), and this special figure 1 command process (S1203) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 137).

Returning to FIG. 137, the description is continued. In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is not received (S1202: No), then the main controller 110 displays the second special symbol dynamic It is determined whether a command (that is, a special figure 2 variation pattern command, a special figure 2 stop type command, a special figure 2 game state command or a special figure 2 confirmation command, etc.) related to display (variation effect) is received (S1204) . Then, when it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect) is received (S1204: Yes), special figure 2 command processing for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1205), and this The command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 136).

Here, with reference to Drawing 139, special figure 2 command processing (S1205) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 139 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 2 command processing (S1205).

In this special figure 2 command process (S1205), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 2 command process (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1251). As a result of determination, if the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S1251: Yes), the variation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is extracted (S1252).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 140) described later, the variation of the second special symbol is displayed on the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 2 variation pattern command for display that notifies the start of production and its variation pattern type. After that, this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 147 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S1251: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1253). And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S1253: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command (S1254).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 140) described later, the variable effect of the second special symbol is applied to the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 2 stop type command for display that notifies the stop type of. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol is started is set to ON (S1255), this special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination process (See FIG. 137).

In addition, the special figure 2 stop type command, after the main controller 110 transmits the special figure 2 variation pattern command when starting the variation production of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is indicated by the special figure 2 variation pattern command. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main controller 110 as a command indicating the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol. By setting the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b to ON by the processing of S1255, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 140) to be executed later, the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the second pending ball number command Determination of whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted based on and the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command match I do. In addition, the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the second pending ball number command, and the second extracted from the received special figure 2 stop type command It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variable performance of the special symbol matches. As a result of those determinations, in the variation performance of the second special symbol of 1, if the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 2 variation pattern command do not match, or the second If the stop type based on the number of pending balls command and the stop type based on the special figure 2 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and an abnormality is detected. It is configured to perform error handling to indicate

As a result of the process of S1253, when it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command is not received (S1253: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game state command is received from the main controller 110 (S1256). The special figure 2 game state command is a command indicating the game state when the variation production of the second special symbol is started. If it is determined that this special figure 2 gaming state command has been received (S1256: Yes), first, the information in the current varying gaming state storage area 223i is shifted to the previous varying gaming state storage area 223h (S1257), and then The gaming state based on the received special figure 2 gaming state command is set to the current variable gaming state storage area 223i (S1258), this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and command determination processing (see FIG. 137) back to

The previous varying gaming state storage area 223h and the current varying gaming state storage area 223i stored in the processing of S1257 and S1258 are used to determine whether or not the relief counter display 89 is displayed in the relief counter display processing (see FIG. 141) described later. used as information for

As a result of the processing of S1256, if it is determined that the special figure 2 game state command has not been received (S1256: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1259). The special figure 2 determination command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation performance of the second special symbol when the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . When it is determined that this special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S1259: Yes), when the second special symbol variation effect is executed for the display control device 114, the second special symbol variation Set the special figure 2 confirmation command for display to confirm and display the effect (S1260), terminate this special figure 2 command processing (S1205), and return to the command determination processing (see FIG. 137).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 2 confirmation command from the audio lamp control device 113, when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the second special While confirming and displaying the variation performance of the symbol, if the variation performance of the second special symbol is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 2 confirmation command for display is ignored (the processing based on is not executed) , the display content is not changed based on the

As a result of the processing of S1259, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command is not received (S1259: No), the process related to the variation performance of the other second special symbol is performed (S1261), and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 137).

Returning to FIG. 137, the description continues. In the processing of S1204, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has not been received (S1204: No), then the main controller 110 issues the first reserved ball number command. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S1206). Then, when it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (see FIG. 100) of main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1207). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the first reserved ball number command, is set to the sub-first reserved ball number updated in S1207. Stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first suspension information storage area 223e indicated by the value of the counter 223c (S1208). Then, a display first reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number of the variable effect of the first special symbol is set to the display control device 114 (S1209), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , returns to the main processing (see FIG. 136).

Here, since the first reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting hole 64 (start winning), the process of S1207 is performed each time there is a starting win. Thus, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the voice The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223 c of the lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203 a of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first reservation information storage area 223e. That is, when the variable performance of the reserved first special symbol is executed, what will be the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) before the execution of the variable performance It is possible to determine the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

As a result of the processing of S1206, if it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has not been received (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the second reserved ball number command has been received from main controller 110. (S1210). Then, when it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (see FIG. 100) of main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect reserved by the main controller 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1211). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the second reserved ball number command, is set to the sub-second reserved ball number updated in S1211. Stored in the second pending information storage first to fourth areas of the second pending information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the counter 223d (S1212). Then, a display second reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number of the second special symbol variation effect is set to the display control device 114 (S1213), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , returns to the main processing (see FIG. 136).

Here, since the second reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (start winning), the process of S1211 is performed each time there is a starting win. Thus, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223 d of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203 b of the main controller 110 . Therefore, even if the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice The value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223 d of the lamp controller 113 can be corrected to match the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203 b of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the second reservation information storage area 223f. That is, when the suspended second special symbol variable performance is executed, how the result of the variable performance will be (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) before the execution of the variable performance It is possible to determine the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

As a result of the process of S1210, if it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has not been received (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1271). When it is determined that the RAM initialization command has been received (S1271: Yes), the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is set to ON (S1272), the display command for the sub-relief counter 223k is set (S1273), This command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 136).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the RAM 203 built in the main controller 110 is equipped with a backup function. Doesn't have functionality. Therefore, when the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the data in the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 equipped with a backup function is restored to the state before the power cutoff. All data in RAM 223 in audio ramp controller 113 is configured to be cleared. Therefore, immediately after the start-up processing of the audio ramp control device 113 is executed, the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the sub relief counter 223k held in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 Values may not be consistent.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 503 turned on, the RAM data of the main controller 110 is also initialized. , the values of the sub-relief counter 223k held in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are both initialized (that is, cleared to "0"), and are consistent. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 503 turned on, the relief counter display 89 can be displayed immediately. The counter display flag 223j is set to ON. Although the relief counter display 89 will be described as an example of informing means capable of informing the player of the game situation of the present invention, for example, output by voice, output by display means such as an LED, etc., or right-handed shooting may be used. A suggestive display (voice) may be used, or a left-hand shot suggestive display (voice) may be used.

As a result of the processing of S1271, if it is determined that the RAM initialization command has not been received (S1271: No), then processing according to other commands is executed (S1214), and this command determination processing (S1111) and return to the main process (see FIG. 136). Here, if the received other command is a command to be used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is to be used in the display control device 114, the command is set to the display control device 114 . For example, the demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1216, temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and then output as a command for the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by processing (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing this variation effect processing (S1110).

This variable effect process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and depending on the game state, the first special symbol or the first special symbol in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 2 Executes various processes for executing the variation performance of the special symbols. Specifically, when the condition for starting the variation production of the first special symbol is established, the variation production of the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. . Further, when the condition for starting the variation production of the second special symbol is satisfied, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to carry out the variation production of the second special symbol.

In the fluctuation production process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1301). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1301: Yes), both the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, so the first special In order to start the variation effect of the design, the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is turned off (S1302), and then the data contained in the first reservation information storage first area provided in the first reservation information storage area 223e is executed. It shifts to the information storage area 223g (S1303), and further, the data contained in the first pending information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first pending information storage area 223e is transferred to the first pending information storage first to third areas. It shifts to the area (S1304), subtracts 1 from the value of the sub-first ball number counter 223c (S1305), and proceeds to S1306.

That is, in this case, the suspended first special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first special symbol variable effect suspended in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reservation information first area corresponding to the variable performance that has been executed are executed corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the information storage area 223g. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the ball holding execution area 203f of the main controller 110, and the first holding information storage area 223e. In the first holding information storage first to fourth areas, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 will store the same value as

In the process of S1306, the first reserved ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c subtracted in the process of S1305 (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307.

The first reserved ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 136). sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the number of reserved balls in the variable effect of the first special symbol indicated by the first reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1307, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is obtained. Based on this, in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a special figure 1 variation pattern command for display is set (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

The display special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 136) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display special figure 1 variation pattern command. Then, display control of the variation effect of the first special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1308, based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now is acquired, and the stop type Based on this, in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the display special figure 1 stop type command is set (S1308), and the process proceeds to S1317.

The display special figure 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 136) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, in the case of confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol executed by the display special figure 1 variation pattern command set by the processing of S1309, this display special figure 1 stop type command Set a stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1309 ). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1309: Yes), both the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received, so the second special In order to start the variation effect of the design, turn off the special figure 2 variation start flag 223b (S1310), then execute the data contained in the second reservation information storage first area provided in the second reservation information storage area 223f It shifts to the information storage area 223g (S1311), and further, the data contained in the second pending information storage areas 2 to 4 provided in the second pending information storage area 223f is transferred to the first pending information storage first to third areas. It shifts to the area (S1312), subtracts 1 from the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d (S1313), and proceeds to S1314.

That is, in this case, the suspended second special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the second special symbol variation effect suspended first in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reserved information first area corresponding to the variable performance that has been executed are executed corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the information storage area 223g. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the ball holding execution area 203f of the main controller 110, and the second holding information storage area 223f. In the first holding information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 will store the same value as

In the process of S1314, the second reserved ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d subtracted in the process of S1313 (S1314), and the process proceeds to S1315.

The second reserved ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 136). sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect indicated by the second reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1315, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is obtained. In order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (S1315), and the process proceeds to S1316.

The display special figure 2 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 136) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation pattern indicated by the display special figure 2 variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the variation effect of the second special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1316, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the second special symbol variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired, and the stop type In order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on , the special figure 2 stop type command for display is set (S1316), and the process proceeds to S1316.

The display special figure 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 136) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, in the case of confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol executed by the display special figure 2 variation pattern command set by the processing of S1317, this display special figure 2 stop type command Set a stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

Next, in the process of S1317, the game state at the time of executing the variable effect executed last time and the game state at the time of executing the variable effect to be executed this time are discriminated, and the relief counter for performing the display processing of the relief counter display 89 according to the determination result. The display process is executed (S1317), the variation effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 136).

Here, the relief counter display processing (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this relief counter display processing (S1317).

In this rescue counter display process (S1317), the game state during the previous execution of the variable effect and the game state during the current variable effect execution are determined, and the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is turned on according to the determination result. set to Further, addition processing to the sub-relief counter 223k is performed, and then a display command for the sub-relief counter 223k is set.

In the rescue counter display process (S1317), first, it is determined whether or not the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is the "normal game state" (S1401), and the current variable game state storage area 223i is determined. If the game state stored in is "normal game state" (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is "probability change state". (S1402). In addition, regarding the output limit of the notification means capable of informing the player of the game situation in the state where the game in the shooting mode that is advantageous for the player of the present invention is encouraged, the "normal pattern high probability time shortened state" and "probability fluctuation An example in which the relief counter display 89 is not displayed in the "state" will be described.

As a result of the determination in S1402, if the gaming state stored in the previous variable gaming state storage area 223h is "probability variable state" (S1402: Yes), the variable effect to be executed this time is changed from "probability variable state" to "normal Since the variable performance immediately after shifting to the game state”, that is, the number of executions of the variable performance in the low probability state of the special symbol from the previous big win is “0 times”, the value of the sub relief counter 223k is set to “0”. ' is set (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1406.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1402, if the gaming state stored in the previous variable gaming state storage area 223h is not the "probability variable state" (S1402: No), then the gaming state stored in the previous variable gaming state storage area 223h It is determined whether or not is the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" (S1404). As a result of the determination, if the gaming state stored in the previous variable gaming state storage area 223h is the "general figure high probability time shortening state" (S1404: Yes), the variable effect to be executed this time is "normal figure high probability time Since the number of executions of the variable performance in the low probability state of the special symbol from the previous jackpot is ``50 times'', the sub-relief counter. The value of 223k is set to "50" (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1406.

In the process of S1406, the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is set to display the relief counter display 89 because it is immediately after the transition from the "probability fluctuation state" or the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state". It is set to ON (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1407. Also, in the processing of S1404, if the gaming state stored in the previous variable gaming state storage area 223h is not the "general figure high probability time reduction state" (S1404: No), the processing of S1405 and S1406 is skipped and the processing is performed. to S1407.

In the process of S1407, 1 is added to the value of the sub-relief counter 223k (S1407), and then it is determined whether or not the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is turned on (S1408). As a result of determination, if the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is turned on (S1408: Yes), a display command for the relief counter display 89 is set to display the relief counter display 89 on the third symbol display device 81 (S1409 ), this relief counter display process (S1317) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 140).

Also, in the processing of S1408, if it is determined that the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is not turned on (S1408: No), it is not the timing to display the relief counter display 89 on the third symbol display device 81, so S1409 skip the process of , terminate the relief counter display process (S1317), and return to the variable effect process (see FIG. 140).

On the other hand, as a result of determination in S1401, if the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is not the "normal game state" (S1401: No), then the game stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i It is determined whether or not the state is "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" (S1410). In the processing of S1410, if the gaming state stored in the variable gaming state storage area 223i this time is not the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" (S1410: No), the processing of S1411 to S1413 is skipped, and this relief counter The display process (S1317) is ended, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 140).

As a result of the determination in S1410, if the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is "normal pattern low probability time shortened state" (S1410: Yes), then it is stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h. If the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is not the "normal game state" (S1411: No), S1412. And the process of S1413 is skipped, this relief counter display process (S1317) is ended, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 140).

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, if the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is "normal game state" (S1411: Yes), the variable effect executed this time is changed from "normal game state" to " Since the display of the relief counter display 89 is unnecessary because it is a variable effect immediately after shifting to the normal pattern low probability time shortening state, the sub relief counter display flag 223j is set to off (S1412), and the relief counter display 89 is displayed. An erasing command is set (S1413), the relief counter display process (S1317) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 140).

Each command set in S1409 and S1413 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 136). . The display control device 114 performs display control or non-display (erase) control of the relief counter display 89 according to the display command or erase command for the relief counter display 89 set here.

By configuring in this way, at the timing of shifting from the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state", a value is set to the sub-relief counter 223k, and the "normal game state" ”, the relief counter display 89 can be displayed. As a result, even if the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the power is turned off in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the command sent from the main controller 110 is determined. As a result, the data in the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 can be held correctly, and the relief counter display 89 can be displayed immediately after shifting to the "normal game state". In addition, since the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 does not have a backup function, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to send a command to the sound lamp control device 113 for the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, when setting a value to the sub-relief counter 223k at the timing of shifting from "probability fluctuation state" or "general pattern high probability time reduction state" to "normal game state", in the low probability state of special symbols after the end of the big hit The value of the sub-relief counter 223k may be incremented by 1 at the start of execution of the variable display, and the value of the sub-relief counter 223k may be displayed on the relief counter display 89 at the timing of shifting to the "normal game state". With this configuration, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the "normal game high probability time reduction state", the value of the sub-relief counter 223k is cleared to "0", and the "normal game state". The value of the sub-relief counter 223k at the timing of transition to , becomes the value after the power failure, and the relief counter display 89 may not be able to display the correct value.

In addition, the RAM 223 of the display control device 114 is provided with an area for storing the type of the jackpot at the time of the previous jackpot, and the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is shifted to the "normal game state". When setting a value in the sub-relief counter 223k at the timing, the information on the last big win type may be determined to set a value in the sub-relief counter 223k. That is, at the timing of shifting from "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" to "normal game state", if the previous jackpot type is the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", sub-relief "50" is set to the value of the counter 223k, and "0" is set to the value of the sub-relief counter 223k if the previous jackpot type is the jackpot type "variable probability A", "variable probability B" or "variable probability C". can be configured to However, even when configured in this way, when the power supply is cut off due to a power failure during the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the information on the previous jackpot type provided in the RAM 223 Since it is cleared, it becomes impossible to determine based on the information of the type of the previous big win as described above at the timing of shifting to the "normal game state", the value cannot be set to the sub-relief counter 223k, and the relief counter display 89 is displayed correctly. The value may not be displayed.

Therefore, when the backup function is not installed in the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113, the previous variable game state storage area 223h and the current variable game state storage area 223i are provided like the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. It can be said that it is more appropriate to set a value in the sub-relief counter 223k by distinguishing between the two pieces of information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the hit effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the winning effect processing (S1105).

This winning effect processing (S1105) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113, and executes the processing during the execution of the big winning game of the main control device 110.

In the hit effect process (S1105), first, the previous variable game state storage area 223h and the current variable game state storage area 223i are cleared (S1501), and the sub relief counter display flag 223j is set to OFF (S1502). Next, the value of the sub-relief counter 223k is cleared to "0" (S1503), other winning effect processing is performed (S1504), this winning effect processing (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 136).

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 at the time of transition from the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state" will be described. Figure 143 shows the third symbol display device 81 that is performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the time of transition from the "general figure high probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state". It is a diagram showing the transition of the variation production in .

More specifically, FIG. 143(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state has shifted to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and FIG. 143(b) is FIG. 143(a). From the state, the variable display of the special symbol in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is executed "50 times", and the last fluctuation display in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is stopped. and FIG. 143(c) is a diagram showing the state immediately after the state of FIG. FIG. 143(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 143(c), has stopped from the state of FIG. 143(c).

FIG. 143(a) shows a state in which the jackpot game is finished and the state has shifted to the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state". In FIG. 143(a), since it is immediately after shifting to the "general figure high probability time shortening state", the upper left part of the main display area Dm in the third symbol display device 81 shows "chance time 50 times left". character message 81a is displayed, indicating that the remaining number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" is "50 times". In addition, in FIG. 143 (a), it is immediately after shifting from the jackpot state to the "general figure high probability time reduction state", and since neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed, the main The lower left part of the display area Dm, the special figure 1 mini reel 81b, the lower right part of the main display area Dm, and the special figure 2 mini reel 81c are both unexecuted (stopped). Furthermore, "2" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the 2 special symbols is "2" and "1". In addition, in FIG. 143(a), a character message (in FIG. 143(a), a band telop display of "Right-handed →") is displayed in the upper display area to prompt the player to play a right-handed game.

Next, in FIG. 143(b), from the state of FIG. 143(a), the variable display of the special symbol in the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" is executed "50 times", and the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" ” shows the state where the last fluctuation display has stopped. In FIG. 143(b), since the variable display of the special symbols in the "general figure high probability time reduction state" is executed "50 times", the character message 81a displays "0 more chance time". , indicating that the last variable display in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" has been executed. In addition, "2" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the 2 special symbols is "2" and "4".

Next, FIG. 143(c) shows the state immediately after the state of FIG. 143(b) ends after the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" and transitions to the "normal game state". In FIG. 143(c), the right-handed game is recommended "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state" to the left-handed game is recommended "normal game state", so the central portion of the main display area Dm 81d is displayed as a text message 81d prompting a left-handed game, ".rarw.left-handed." In addition, in FIG. 143(c), it is immediately after shifting from the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state", and the second special symbol stored during the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" Since the reserved ball remained, the variable display of the second special symbol has started to be executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81c in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. is being executed. And, since the variable display of the second special symbol has started execution, "3" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, and the state in which 1 is subtracted from the state of Fig. 143 (b) It has become. Furthermore, since the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is the first variable display after shifting to the "normal game state", the relief counter display 89 in the upper left part of the main display area Dm shows " "Relief counter 51/250" is displayed, and "50 times", which is the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol in the "normal figure high probability time reduction state", and the execution started in this Fig. 143 (c) It is shown that it is the "51st" variable display which is the addition of "1 time" which is the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Next, FIG. 143(d) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol that has been executed in FIG. 143(c) is stopped from the state of FIG. 143(c). Since the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 143(c) has stopped, the variable display of the second special symbol ends and stops in the central part of the main display area Dm and the special figure 2 mini reel 81c. "871" is displayed to indicate that it has been done.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the dynamic display of each special symbol starts to be executed, the game state command received from the main controller 110 in the voice lamp controller 113 By comparing the game state in the previous variable performance with the game state in the current variable performance, it is determined whether or not the game state has changed, and whether or not the relief counter display 89 is displayed is determined according to the determination result. Configure. By configuring in this way, even when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power being turned off in the "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state", the command received from the main controller 110 , the sub-relief counter 223k of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 can be held correctly, and the relief counter display 89 can be displayed immediately after shifting to the "normal game state". As a result, even if the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 does not have a backup function, the data in the RAM 223 can be retained correctly, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to send a command to the sound lamp control device 113 for the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 156. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the number of time reductions that can be given based on the winning of the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" that will shift to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" is constant ( That is, it is configured to be "50 times"). Therefore, when shifting from the "general figure high probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state", the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set "50" to the sub-relief counter 223k fixedly.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, there are multiple types of time saving times that can be given based on the jackpot that will shift to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" (that is, "30 times" or " 70 times”). Therefore, when shifting from "general pattern high probability time shortening state" to "normal game state", in the sound lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display of the last special symbol in the "general pattern high probability time shortening state" By discriminating the pattern, the number of times of time saving is discriminated, and a value is set to the sub-relief counter 223k according to the discrimination result.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals as in the third embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 144, a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 144(b) Similarly, in the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM202. The difference between the jackpot type table of the fourth embodiment and the jackpot type table of the third embodiment is mainly that there are multiple types of times of reduction in time that can be granted by the jackpot type corresponding to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state". It is the point that

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, although the jackpot probability of the special symbols is in a low probability state, the dynamic display of the special symbols is performed a specified number of times (fourth embodiment). In the form, "30 times"), the hit probability of the normal pattern is high probability, and the jackpot type "short time A" corresponding to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and the maximum number of rounds is 4 After the round jackpot, although the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, until the special symbol dynamic display is performed a specified number of times ("70 times" in the fourth embodiment), the normal symbol win probability is a high probability state, and the jackpot type “short time B” corresponding to the “normal figure high probability time reduction state”, and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds, the special pattern jackpot probability is a low probability state, but special A jackpot corresponding to a ``normal pattern high probability time shortening state'' in which the probability of winning a normal pattern is high until the dynamic display of the pattern is executed a specified number of times ("30 times" in the fourth embodiment). After the jackpot with the type “time saving C” and the maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds, the special pattern jackpot probability is in a low probability state, but the dynamic display of the special pattern is the specified number of times (“70 times” in the fourth embodiment). ) Until the execution, the hit probability of the normal pattern is high probability, and the jackpot type "short time D" corresponding to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 10 rounds, special patterns until the dynamic display is executed a specified number of times ("50 times" in the fourth embodiment), the probability of winning the special symbols becomes high, and the probability of winning the normal symbols is also dynamic display of the special symbols. is executed a specified number of times ("50 times" in the fourth embodiment), the jackpot type "probability variation A" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" which is a higher probability state than the "normal game state", After the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, until the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed a specified number of times ("50 times" in the fourth embodiment), the winning probability of the special symbols is in a high probability state, and Until the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed a specified number of times ("50 times" in the fourth embodiment), the winning probability of the normal symbols is a "probability fluctuation state" that is a high probability state compared to the "normal game state". ”, and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds, the dynamic display of special symbols is performed a specified number of times (“50 times” in the fourth embodiment). "Normal game state" until the winning probability of the symbol becomes a high probability state and the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times ("50 times" in the fourth embodiment) for the winning probability of the normal symbol. There is a jackpot type "probability variation C" corresponding to "probability variation state" which is a high probability state compared to.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 144(a), the value "0 to 21" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "time saving A", and the jackpot type "time saving B" On the other hand, the value "22 to 43" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated, and the value "44 to 69" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "time saving C", and the jackpot type "time saving D". The value "70-96" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with it, and the value "97-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "probability variable A".

Therefore, in the winning lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d is the value that becomes the jackpot. In this case, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area can be selected from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. If the value of the type counter C2 is '7', the jackpot type 'short time A' can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is '98', the jackpot type 'probability variable A' can be selected.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot type "time reduction A" is 22%, the jackpot type "time reduction B" is 22%, the jackpot type "time reduction C" is 26%, and the jackpot type. "Time saving D" will be elected at a rate of 27% and the jackpot type "Probability A" will be 3%.

Note that the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 144(b) is the same as the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 of the third embodiment shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, the game mode in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment and the game state transition conditions and transition destinations in each game state will be described. FIG. 145 shows, in each game state of the fourth embodiment, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special symbol It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of , the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the right hitting propriety. Also, FIG. 146 is a diagram showing the launch mode in each game state of the fourth embodiment and the shift destination of the game state based on the type of jackpot won. The difference between the game mode of the fourth embodiment and the game mode of the third embodiment is mainly that the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is "normal pattern high probability time shortening state A" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A". Time reduction state B” (Hereinafter, “General pattern high probability time reduction state A” and “General pattern high probability time reduction state B” are collectively referred to as “General pattern high probability time reduction state” Depending on the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type "time reduction A", "time reduction B", "time reduction C" or "time reduction D") , The point is that it is configured to shift to one of the "normal map high probability time reduction state".

As shown in FIG. 145, the transition to the "normal game state" is triggered by the dynamic display of special symbols in the factory default state, RAM clear state, and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A" 30 times. (So-called, end of power supply. See FIG. 146.) When the dynamic display of the special symbol in the "general figure high probability time reduction state B" is executed 70 times (so-called end of power supply. See FIG. 146 ), When the dynamic display of the special design in the "probability fluctuation state" is executed 50 times (so-called ST end. See Fig. 146.), When target display is executed 379 times (so-called electric support end, see FIG. 146), it becomes.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when shifting from the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state", if the transition from the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A" , The execution frequency of the dynamic display of the special symbols after the big win is "30 times", and if it is a transition from the "normal figure high probability time reduction state B", the execution of the dynamic display of the special symbols after the big win. The number of times is configured to be "70 times". In addition, since the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is a low probability state of special symbols, the low probability of special patterns at the time of transition from "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A" to "normal game state" The number of dynamic display executions in the state is "30 times", and execution of dynamic display in the low probability state of special symbols at the time of transition from "normal pattern high probability time reduction state B" to "normal game state" The number of times is "70 times". Therefore, when the transition from "general figure high probability time shortening state A" to "normal game state", in the "normal game state", if the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed "220 more times", relief conditions is established and it will shift to "normal figure low probability time reduction state". In addition, when the transition from the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state B" to the "normal game state", in the "normal game state", if the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed "180 times", relief conditions is established and it will shift to "normal figure low probability time reduction state". "50 times" in the case where there is a "50 times" normal game state and an advantageous game state in which the movable object of the present invention can easily give a game value to the player. "Normal figure high probability time reduction state" and "30 times" "Normal figure high probability time reduction state" will be described as an example, but for example, if there is a "probability fluctuation state" of "50 times" "50 times" "probability change state" and "30 times" "probability change state" may be used, or "50 times" "latency change state" when "50 times" "latency probability change state" exists "probability fluctuation state" and "latent probability fluctuation state" of "30 times", or a 10-round jackpot game state and a 5-round jackpot game state when there is a 10-round jackpot game state, When there is a small winning game state with 10 opening times, it may be a small winning game state with 10 opening times and a small winning game state with 5 opening times.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the value of the relief counter display 89 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is , It was fixed to "50/250", but in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type "time reduction A", which will shift to the "general figure high probability time reduction state" Depending on "time saving B", "time saving C" or "time saving D"), the value of the relief counter display 89 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is either "30/250" or "70/250".

For this reason, the RAM 223 of the display control device 114 is provided with an area for storing the type of jackpot at the time of the previous jackpot. When a value is set in 223k, information on the type of the previous big win is discriminated, and a value is set in the sub-relief counter 223k. The value can now display either "30/250" or "70/250".

However, if a power failure occurs during the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and the power is cut off, and the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 is reset, the information on the previous jackpot type will be cleared. As the value of the relief counter display 89 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of transition from the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state", "30/250" or "70/250" ” should be displayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern of the dynamic display of the last special symbol in the "general pattern high probability time shortening state" is set for each game state, and the sound ramp control device 113 sets the last By discerning the fluctuation pattern of the dynamic display of the special symbol, the number of times of time saving is discriminated, and a value is set in the sub-relief counter 223k according to the discrimination result. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 147-151 and 153-156.

In addition, when shifting from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state", it is possible to set the value of the relief counter display 89 by the same determination method as the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment.

Next, the opportunity to shift to "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A" is the winning of the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction C", and the transition to "normal pattern high probability time reduction state B" is It becomes an election to the jackpot type “time saving B” or “time saving D” (see FIG. 146).

In addition, the special pattern jackpot probability in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the normal pattern hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special pattern fluctuation time, the second special pattern fluctuation Since the time and whether or not the game can be played to the right are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the transition timing of the "probability fluctuation state" and the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" and other items are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, details of the pending number table 202c in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. FIG. FIG. 147 is a diagram schematically showing the reservation number table 202c1 for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 148 is the second special symbol in the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing a corresponding reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2. The difference between the pending number table 202c of the fourth embodiment and the pending number table 202c of the third embodiment is mainly the stop pattern table of the dynamic display of the last special symbol in the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" 202d is individually set.

As shown in the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1 in the fourth embodiment of FIG. 147, the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "normal game state" is selected in the "normal game state" of the third embodiment Since it is the same as the obtained stop pattern table 202d, the explanation is omitted.

Then, the 1st to 29th rotation in "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A", 1st to 69th rotation in "normal pattern high probability time reduction state B", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state ”, the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the “normal pattern high probability time reduction state”, “probability fluctuation state” or “normal pattern low probability time reduction state” of the third embodiment 202d. Therefore, the game state not defined here, that is, the 30th rotation in the "normal high probability time reduction state A" and the 70th rotation in the "normal high probability time reduction state B" (that is, each "normal high probability The stop pattern table 202d is individually set only in the dynamic display of the last special symbol in the "probable time reduction state".

That is, when extracting the 30th rotation of the "normal figure high probability time shortening state A", the E table 202d5 (see FIG. 149 (a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. be. Also, when extracting the 30th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state A", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. be.

Next, when extracting the 70th rotation of the "normal figure high probability time shortening state B", the F table 202d6 (see FIG. 149 (b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. be. Also, when extracting the 70th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state B", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. be.

Next, as shown in the special figure 2 reserved number table 202c2 in the fourth embodiment of FIG. 148, the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "normal game state" is the "normal game state" of the third embodiment. Since it is the same as the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in , the description is omitted.

Then, the 1st to 29th rotation in "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A", 1st to 69th rotation in "normal pattern high probability time reduction state B", "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state ”, the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the “normal pattern high probability time reduction state”, “probability fluctuation state” or “normal pattern low probability time reduction state” of the third embodiment is the same as Therefore, the game state not defined here, that is, the 30th rotation in the "normal high probability time reduction state A" and the 70th rotation in the "normal high probability time reduction state B" (that is, each "normal high probability The stop pattern table 202d is individually set only in the dynamic display of the last special symbol in the "probable time reduction state".

Therefore, when extracting the 30th rotation of the "normal figure high probability time shortening state A", the E table 202d5 (see FIG. 149 (a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. be. Also, when extracting the 30th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state A", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. be.

Next, when extracting the 70th rotation of the "normal figure high probability time shortening state B", the F table 202d6 (see FIG. 149 (b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. be. Also, when extracting the 70th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state B", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. be.

By configuring in this way, in the audio lamp control device 113, by determining the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the number of times of execution of the variation display of the special symbol in the "general figure high probability time reduction state" (Specific number of revolutions) can be grasped.

That is, if the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is a "special variation 1" presentation mode that can be executed when the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d is selected (Fig. 149 later), the "special variation 1" production mode is a variation pattern that can be selected only when extracting the 30th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state A", so the sound lamp control device 113 Then, it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol executed when receiving the variation pattern command corresponding to the "special variation 1" production mode is the variation display of the 30th rotation in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A". can do.

Furthermore, since the variable display that can be executed next to the variable display of the "special variation 1" effect mode is the variable display of the first rotation in the "normal game state", a variation pattern command for the next variable display is received. When the game state is discriminated at the time, and if it is shifted to the "normal game state", the fluctuation display will be the 31st round fluctuation display in the low probability state of the special symbol after the big win, so the third symbol display "31/250" can be set and displayed on the relief counter display 89 displayed by the device 81. FIG.

Also, if the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is a "special variation 2" presentation mode that can be executed when the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d is selected (Fig. 149 later), the "special variation 2" effect mode is a variation pattern that can be selected only at the time of extraction of the 70th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state B", so the sound lamp control device 113 Then, it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol executed when the variation pattern command corresponding to the "special variation 2" effect mode is received is the variation display of the 70th rotation in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A". can do.

Furthermore, since the variable display that can be executed next to the "special variation 2" effect mode is the variable display for the first rotation in the "normal game state", the game is executed when the variation pattern command for the next variable display is received. If the state is discriminated and it is shifted to the "normal game state", the variation display will be the 71st round variation display in the low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, so the third symbol display device 81 "71/250" can be set and displayed in the relief counter display 89 to be displayed.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149(a) schematically shows an example of the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 149(b) schematically shows an example of the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 149(a), in the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation 1" effect mode ("0" to "99"), and " Stop pattern selection counter for non-reach (long) production mode, non-reach (middle) production mode, non-reach (short) production mode, each "reach display" production mode and special variation 2 production mode No value for C3 has been assigned. Therefore, in the 30th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A", the stop type of the dynamic display that causes the loss of each special symbol is always set to be the "special variation 1" production mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(b), in the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation 2" effect mode ("0" to "99"). , "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode, each "reach display" production mode and "special variation 1" production mode have a stop pattern The value of selection counter C3 is not assigned. Therefore, in the 70th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state B", the stop type of the dynamic display that causes the loss of each special symbol is always set to be the "special variation 2" production mode.

In this way, a specific stop type such as the "special variation 1" effect mode and the "special variation 2" effect mode can be selected only at a specific number of rotations in a specific game state. The ramp control device 113 can recognize the current game state and the number of revolutions by receiving the command corresponding to the specific stop type.

Next, details of the variation pattern table 202e in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151. FIG. Figure 150 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 loss stored in the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment, Figure 150 (b) of the fourth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e2 for special figures 1 jackpot memorize|stored in ROM202. In addition, FIG. 151(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 stored in the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 jackpots memorize|stored in ROM202 of a form. The difference between the variation pattern table 202e of the fourth embodiment and the variation pattern table 202e of the third embodiment is mainly that the "special variation 1" presentation mode and the "special variation 2. The point is that a production mode is added.

As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, each variation pattern table 202e1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode. Specifically, as the production mode at the time of losing, "E0: non-reach (long)" which is referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, and "non-reach (middle)" production mode "E1: non-reach/middle" referred to when is determined, "E2: non-reach/short" referred to when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is determined, and " For "E3: Normal Reach" referred to when the "Normal Reach" production mode is determined, "E4: Super Reach" for reference when the "Super Reach" rendition mode is determined, and "Special Reach" rendition For "E5: Special Reach" referred to when the mode is determined, "Special Variation 1" for "E6: Special Variation 1" referred to when the production mode is determined, and "Special Variation 2" It is divided into one for "E7: special variation 2" which is referred to when the presentation mode is determined.

Also, the effect mode at the time of the big win in the fourth embodiment is the same as in the third embodiment, so the description is omitted.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 150(a), the variation patterns from "E0: non-reach/long" to "E5: special reach" are the same as those in the third embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E6: special variation 1" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds" One variation pattern of "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 150(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: special fluctuation 1" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 1" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (" 0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 1" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E7: special variation 2" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds" One variation pattern of "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 150(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: special fluctuation 2" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 2" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (" 0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 2" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Here, the variable elements that can be selected in the "special variation 1" rendering mode and the "special variation 2" rendering mode, ""high speed variation (long)" variable element + "low speed variation" variable element" are It is the same as the variable element that can be selected in the non-reach (long) production mode.

As described above, the “special variation 1” production mode is the dynamic display of the last special symbol in the “normal pattern high probability time reduction state A” (that is, the 30th rotation in the “normal pattern high probability time reduction state A” Dynamic display of) is a variation pattern that can be selected only at the time of execution, and the “special variation 2” production mode is the dynamic display of the last special symbol in “normal pattern high probability time reduction state B” (that is, “normal This is a variation pattern that can be selected only at the time of execution of the 70th rotation dynamic display in the high probability time shortening state B”.

That is, in the dynamic display of the 70th rotation in the dynamic display of the 30th rotation in the "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state A" and the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state B", the "non-reach (long)" Variation elements similar to those in the production mode are executed. Therefore, when executing the dynamic display of the 30th rotation in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state A" and the dynamic display of the 70th rotation in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state B", the third symbol display device 81 The variation effect to be executed is the other number of rotations in the "universal pattern high probability time reduction state" (that is, the 30th rotation in "universal pattern high probability time reduction state A" and "universal pattern high probability time reduction state B" A variation effect similar to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, which is a variation pattern that can be selected at the number of rotations other than the 70th rotation, is executed.

Therefore, the game can be executed without making the player aware that the variation performance is executed in the "special variation 1" performance mode or the "special variation 2" performance mode, and the sound lamp control device 113 Then, it is possible to determine that it is a variable performance at a specific number of rotations (that is, the last variable performance in "normal pattern high probability time shortening state A" or "normal pattern high probability time shortening state B").

It should be noted that the variation production executed by this "special variation 1" production mode or "special variation 2" production mode is the final Since it is a variable performance, it may be configured to perform a special variable performance that suggests that the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" ends with this variable performance.

Next, the variation pattern table 202e2 for the special figure 1 jackpot to be referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in FIG. 150(b) is the same as in the third embodiment, so the description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151(a), the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss referred to when the second special symbol in the fourth embodiment is lost will be described.

In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), the variation patterns from "E0: non-reach/long" to "E5: special reach" are the same as those in the third embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E6: special variation 1" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds" One variation pattern of "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: special fluctuation 1" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 1" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (" 0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 1" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E7: special variation 2" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds" One variation pattern of "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: special fluctuation 2" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 2" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (" 0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 2" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, the variation pattern table 202e4 for the special figure 2 to be referred to when the second special symbol shown in FIG. 151(b) is the same as in the third embodiment, so the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to Drawing 152, time saving end condition table 202j in a 4th embodiment is explained. Drawing 152 is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of time saving end condition table 202j memorized by ROM202 in a 4th embodiment. The difference between the time saving end condition table 202j of the fourth embodiment and the time saving end condition table 202j of the third embodiment is that the time saving that can be given by the jackpot type that will shift to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" The only difference is the number of times.

As shown in FIG. 152, when the jackpot type "time saving A" or "time saving C" is won in all game states, the high-probability time-saving function is valid up to "30 times" as "general pattern high-probability time reduction state" is set to be In addition, if you win the jackpot type "time reduction B" or "time reduction D" in all game states, set it so that the high probability time reduction function is valid up to "70 times" as a "high probability time reduction state". be done. Furthermore, if you win the jackpot type "probability variation A", "probability variation B" or "probability variation C" in all game states, as "probability variation state", the high probability time saving function will be effective up to "50 times" set. In addition, when the number of relief condition establishment is reached in the "normal game state", the low probability time saving function is set to be effective up to "379 times" as the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state".

As described above, the "ordinary figure high probability time shortening state" is provided with a plurality of types of "30 times" and "70 times". For this reason, at the time when the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" ends, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern in the low probability state of the special pattern is configured to be different between "30 times" and "70 times" respectively. there is That is, depending on the type of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", the number of fluctuations of special symbols to "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" corresponding to the number of fluctuations in "normal game state" is configured to be different respectively. ing. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, by selecting the E table 202d5 or the F table 202d6 at the time when the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" ends, the "special variation 1" production mode or the "special variation 2 'The production mode is always selected, and the time saving state end screen etc. is displayed in the 'special variation 1' production mode or 'special variation 2' production mode, and the 'normal figure high probability time reduction state' ends. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 recognizes the variation pattern of the "special variation 1" effect mode or the "special variation 2" effect mode, so that at that time It is configured to be able to recognize the number of fluctuations in the low probability state of the special symbol. As the frequency display related to the frequency information of the predetermined event in the game state where it is easy to give the game value to the player by winning the ball of the present invention, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the "general pattern high probability time shortening state" will be described as an example. However, for example, it may be a number display related to the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols in "normal low probability time reduction state", a number display related to the number of fluctuations of normal symbols in "normal high probability time reduction state", "probability It may be a display of the number of times related to the number of fluctuations of special symbols in "fluctuation state", or a game state after the end of the jackpot game state (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state", or "latency probability fluctuation state ”, etc.), may display the number of winning balls in the game state after the jackpot game state, may display the winning ball display regarding the series of winning balls in the game state after the jackpot game state, or may be the game state after the small win game ends ( That is, "probability fluctuation state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state", or "latency probability fluctuation state", "normal game state" etc.) may be a display of the number of occurrences related to the number of occurrences of small hits, or a small hit It may also be a display of acquired and released balls relating to a series of acquired and released balls in the game state after the game state is ended. In addition, as an effect to be executed including the game situation of a plurality of game states of the present invention, the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation effect counted in the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" is counted in the "normal game state". The number of fluctuations of the special symbols to be added will be summed up and displayed in the relief counter display 89. For example, the character used in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or jackpot game state The symbols and the like may be constructed so that the character symbols and the like can appear even in the "normal game state" or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, a detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 153 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. The main difference between the block diagram of the fourth embodiment and the block diagram of the third embodiment is that the RAM 223 is additionally provided with a previous variable presentation mode storage area 223m.

The previous variable performance mode storage area 223m is an area for storing the performance mode of the variable performance executed one variation before the variable performance to be executed from now on. The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113, when the game state before one variation is the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" and the game state of this time variation is the "normal game state", the last time variation effect mode storage area 223m is determined, and a value is set in the sub-relief counter 223k according to the stored variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the jackpot ending process (S614), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S610) of the fourth embodiment. The difference between the jackpot end processing (S610) of the fourth embodiment and the jackpot end processing (S610) of the third embodiment is that the type of jackpot type that will shift to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is determined. The point is that a process for changing the number of time reductions to be set is added.

In the jackpot end processing (S614) of the fourth embodiment, when the processing of S6105 is finished, then the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "time saving A" or "time saving C" It is determined whether it is (S6151), If the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "time saving A" or "time saving C" (S6151: Yes), the time saving counter 203o is set to "30" (S6152), and the process proceeds to S6107.

On the other hand, in the process of S6151, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot type "time saving A" and "time saving C" (S6151: No), the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "time saving B" or "time saving D , sets "70" to the time saving counter 203o (S6153), and proceeds to S6107.

Next, referring to FIG. 155, the relief counter display process (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing the relief counter display process (S1317) of the fourth embodiment. The difference between the relief counter display processing (S1317) of the fourth embodiment and the relief counter display processing (S1317) of the third embodiment is the timing of shifting from the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state" The point is that a process for discriminating the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed this time before one variation is added.

In the rescue counter display process (S1317) of the fourth embodiment, in the process of S1404, if the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is determined to be "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" ( S1404: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern stored in the previous variation presentation mode storage area 223m is the "special variation 1" presentation mode (S1431), and the pattern stored in the previous variation presentation mode storage area 223m is determined. If the variation pattern is a "special variation 1" production mode (S1431: Yes), the "special variation 1" production mode is only when extracting the 30th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A" Since it is a selectable variation pattern, the value of the sub-relief counter 223k is set to "30" (S1432), and the process proceeds to S1406.

On the other hand, in the process of S1431, if it is determined that the variation pattern stored in the previous variation presentation mode storage area 223m is not the "special variation 1" presentation mode (S1431: No), it is stored in the previous variation presentation mode storage area 223m. The variation pattern is determined to be a "special variation 2" production mode, and the "special variation 2" production mode can be selected only at the time of extraction of the 70th rotation of the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state A". Since it is a fluctuation pattern, the value of the sub relief counter 223k is set to "70" (S1433), and the process proceeds to S1406.

By configuring in this way, even if there are multiple types of time-saving times that can be given at the time of the jackpot, if a power failure occurs or the power is turned off in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high-probability time reduction state" Even if the is interrupted, by determining the command sent from the main controller 110, the data of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 can be retained correctly, and immediately after shifting to the "normal game state" A relief counter display 89 can be displayed. In addition, since the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 does not have a backup function, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to send a command to the sound lamp control device 113 for the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the hit effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing the winning effect processing (S1105) of the fourth embodiment. The difference between the winning effect processing (S1105) of the fourth embodiment and the winning effect processing (S1105) of the third embodiment is mainly that the processing for clearing the previous variable effect mode storage area 223m is added. .

In the winning effect process (S1105) of the fourth embodiment, the previous variable game state storage area 223h, the current variable game state storage area 223i, and the previous variable effect mode storage area 223m are cleared (S1551), and the process proceeds to S1502.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the dynamic display of each special symbol starts to be executed, the game state command received from the main controller 110 in the voice lamp controller 113 By comparing the game state in the previous variable performance with the game state in the current variable performance, it is determined whether or not the game state has changed, and whether or not the relief counter display 89 is displayed is determined according to the determination result. Configure. In addition, when the game state in the previous fluctuation production is "normal figure high probability time shortening state", and the game state in this fluctuation production is "normal game state", the fluctuation pattern in the previous fluctuation production is determined. , the value to be set in the sub-relief counter 223k is changed according to the determination result. By configuring in this way, when there are multiple types of time saving times that can be given by the jackpot type, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "general pattern high probability time reduction state", the power supply is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off Even if it is cut off, by determining the command sent from the main controller 110, the data of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 can be correctly held, and the recovery can be performed immediately after the transition to the "normal game state". A counter display 89 can be displayed. As a result, the data in the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 can be correctly held without having a backup function, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since there is no need to send a command for the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same effects as the third embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 164. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, at the time of extracting a loss in the dynamic display of special symbols in the "normal game state", the stop pattern table 202d is based on the setting of the same holding number table 202c regardless of the number of rotations. is configured to be selected.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the dynamic display of special symbols in the "normal game state" is extracted, a specific number of reserved numbers table 202c is set for a specific number of rotations, A specific stop pattern table 202d is configured to be selectable in the dynamic display of the specific number of revolutions.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the third embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the game mode in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment and the game state transition conditions and transition destinations in each game state will be described. FIG. 157 shows, in each game state of the fifth embodiment, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special symbol It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of , the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the right hitting propriety. Also, FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the launch mode in each game state of the fifth embodiment, and the shift destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type or the like. The difference between the game specifications of the fifth embodiment and the game specifications of the third embodiment is mainly that the "normal game state" is "normal game state A", "normal game state B" and "normal game state C". (hereinafter, "normal game state A", "normal game state B" and "normal game state C" may be collectively referred to as "normal game state").

As shown in FIG. 157, the trigger for transition to the "normal game state A" is when the dynamic display of special symbols is executed 50 times in the factory default state, the RAM clear state, and the "probability fluctuation state" ( This is the so-called ST end (see FIG. 158).

Since the data in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is initialized when shifting from the factory default state and the RAM clear state to the "normal game state A", execution of dynamic display in the low probability state of special symbols. The number of times becomes "0 times". In addition, when the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed 50 times in the "probability fluctuation state", it is a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed 50 times in the high probability state of the special symbols. The number of executions of dynamic display in the low probability state of the special symbol is "0 times". That is, at the time of transition to the "normal game state A", the number of executions of dynamic display in the low probability state of special symbols is always "0". An example of "normal game state A" and "normal game state B" will be described as the state in which the jackpot probability of the present invention is the same and different. ”and “Probability variation state B (for example, ST50 times)”, or “Time reduction state A (for example, 50 times as a predetermined number of times)” and “Time reduction state B (for example, as a specific number of times Short time 100 times)" may be used.

Next, the trigger for the shift to the "normal game state B" is when the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 50 times in the "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state" (so-called power supply end, see Fig. 158). Become.

When the dynamic display of special symbols is executed 50 times in the "normal high probability time reduction state", it is a state in which the dynamic display of special symbols is executed 50 times in the low probability state of special symbols, and the previous jackpot The number of executions of dynamic display in the low-probability state of special symbols from "50 times" is the state. That is, at the time of transition to the "normal game state B", the number of executions of dynamic display in the low probability state of special symbols from the previous big win is always "50 times".

Next, the trigger for shifting to the "normal game state C" is when the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 379 times in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" (so-called power supply end. See Fig. 158.), becomes.

When the dynamic display of special symbols is performed 379 times in the "normal low probability time reduction state", the dynamic display of special symbols is performed 379 times in the low probability state of special symbols. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "250 times", which is the number of relief establishments, has been executed before shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state". That is, the number of times of execution of dynamic display in the low probability state of special symbols at the time of shifting to "normal game state C" is the low probability state of special symbols before shifting to "normal low probability time reduction state". It becomes "629 times" which added "250 times" and "379 times" executed in the "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state" which was performed.

In this way, at the time of shifting to each "normal game state", by configuring so that the number of dynamic display execution times in the low probability state of the special symbol is constant, in the pending number table 202c described later, each It is possible to select a specific stop pattern table 202d at a specific number of rotations in the "normal game state", and as a result, no matter what game state transitions have been made, the last time It is possible to configure so that a specific stop pattern table 202d can be selected at a specific number of rotations in a low probability state of special symbols from a big hit (details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 159 to 163). An example in which the number of times to reach the ceiling can be displayed in the "normal game state A" and "normal game state B" of the present invention will be described. It may be configured to display the number of fluctuations or the number of remaining time reductions in each state.

In addition, the probability of winning a special symbol in the "normal game state", the probability of winning a normal symbol, the shooting mode of the ball to be encouraged, the main winning destination, the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol, and As for whether or not the player can hit right, the description is omitted because it is the same as in the third embodiment.

Then, for "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", description is omitted because it is the same as in the third embodiment.

Next, details of the pending number table 202c in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160. FIG. Figure 159 is a diagram schematically showing a special figure 1 reserved number table 202c1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the fifth embodiment, Figure 160 corresponds to the second special symbol of the fifth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the reservation number table 202c2 for special figures 2. FIG. The difference between the number-of-holds table 202c of the fifth embodiment and the number-of-holds table 202c of the third embodiment is mainly that the stop pattern table 202d at a specific number of rotations during the "normal game state" is set individually. This is the point.

As shown in the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1 in the fifth embodiment of FIG. 1st to 49th rotations, 51st to 149th rotations and 151st to 200th rotations in B", and the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "normal game state C", the "normal game state" of the third embodiment is the same as the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in . Therefore, the game states not defined here, that is, the 100th and 200th rotations in the "normal game state A", and the 50th and 150th rotations in the "normal game state B" are individually stopped. A pattern table 202d is set.

That is, when extracting the 100th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 50th spin of the "normal game state B", the G table 202d7 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 161 ( a) see) is selected. Also, when the 100th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 50th spin of the "normal game state B" are extracted, regardless of the number of held balls, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 13 ( c) see) is selected.

Next, when the 200th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 150th spin of the "normal game state B" are extracted, the H table 202d8 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 161 ( b) see) is selected. In addition, when extracting the jackpot at the 200th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 150th spin of the "normal game state B", regardless of the number of held balls, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 13 ( c) see) is selected.

Next, for the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the "normal pattern high probability time reduction Since it is the same as the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "state", "probability fluctuation state" and "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", the description is omitted.

With this configuration, it is possible to select a specific stop pattern table 202d at a specific number of rotations in the low probability state of special symbols from the previous big win. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the power is cut off during the "normal game state", the data in the RAM 223 is initialized, and the value of the sub-relief counter 223k that was counting until the power was cut off is also restored. It is cleared to 0, and the number of executions in the low probability state of the special symbol that has been executed so far becomes unknown, but the specific variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 ("special variation 3" production mode and By determining the "special variation 4" effect mode (see FIG. 161), it is possible to grasp the number of execution times (specific number of rotations) of the variation display of the special symbols in the "normal game state".

That is, if the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is a "special variation 3" rendering mode that can be executed when the G table 202d7 of the stop pattern table 202d is selected (Fig. 161 later), the "special variation 3" effect mode is the 100th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 50th spin of the "normal game state B", that is, the low probability of special symbols from the previous jackpot. Since it is an effect mode that can be selected only when extracting the 100th dynamic display failure in the state, the sound lamp control device 113 executes when a variation pattern command corresponding to the "special variation 3" effect mode is received. It can be determined that the variation display of the special symbol in the previous jackpot is the 100th rotation variation display in the low probability state of the special symbol.

As a result, even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like during the "normal game state", by receiving the variation pattern command corresponding to the "special variation 3" effect mode, the previous It is possible to recognize the number of executions of the special symbol in the low probability state from the jackpot, and display the relief counter display 89 again ("100/250" in this example). As a means for determining that the player of the present invention is playing a game, an example of determining that a specified number of special symbol fluctuation effects are executed will be described. It may be determined that a prescribed number of balls have been shot, or it may be determined that the player operates (contacts, rotates, etc.) the operation handle 51. good too.

Also, if the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is a "special variation 4" presentation mode that can be executed when the H table 202d8 of the stop pattern table 202d is selected (Fig. 161 later), the "special variation 4" effect mode is the 200th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 150th spin of the "normal game state B", that is, the low probability of special symbols from the previous jackpot. Since it is an effect mode that can be selected only when extracting a failure in the dynamic display of the 200th rotation in the state, the sound lamp control device 113 is executed when a variation pattern command corresponding to the "special variation 4" effect mode is received. It can be determined that the variation display of the special symbol is the 200th rotation variation display in the low probability state of the special symbol since the last big win.

As a result, even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the "normal game state", by receiving the variation pattern command corresponding to the "special variation 4" effect mode, the previous It is possible to recognize the number of executions of the special symbol in the low-probability state from the jackpot, and to display the relief counter display 89 again ("200/250" in this example).

In addition, by configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 staying in the "normal game state" is turned off when the game hall closes the business, and the power is turned on on the next business day without performing RAM initialization processing. When launched, although the relief counter display 89 is not displayed in the "normal game state" immediately after execution of the launch process, by executing the dynamic display of the special symbol for a certain number of rotations, the above-mentioned specific fluctuation pattern can be selected, the rescue counter display 89 can be displayed normally.

As a result, when the player plays the pachinko machine 10 at the start of business of the game hall, even if the relief counter display 89 is not displayed during the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the special symbols is performed for a fixed number of rotations. is executed, the relief counter display 89 is displayed, and the number of rotations remaining until the relief condition is satisfied can be recognized. Then, when the game hall starts operating, the player who grasps this specification causes the pachinko machine 10 to run a fixed number of revolutions, displays the relief counter display 89, and displays the remaining number of revolutions until the relief condition is satisfied. If it is confirmed and the remaining number of rotations is small, the game can be continued until the relief condition is satisfied, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted. A specific variation pattern command based on execution of a certain number of revolutions in a "normal game state" will be described as an example of the establishment of a predetermined condition in a state in which a game in a shooting mode that is disadvantageous to the player of the present invention is encouraged. For example, it may be a command that is output when a predetermined time has elapsed in the "normal game state", a command that is output based on winning to the general winning port 63 in the "normal game state", or a command that is output in the "normal game state" It may be a command when the ball passes through the through gate 67 .

Then, as shown in the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2 in the fifth embodiment of FIG. 1st to 49th rotations, 51st to 149th rotations and 151st to 200th rotations in the game state B”, and the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the “normal game state C”, the “normal game This is the same as the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in "state". Therefore, the game states not defined here, that is, the 100th and 200th rotations in the "normal game state A", and the 50th and 150th rotations in the "normal game state B" are individually stopped. A pattern table 202d is set.

That is, when extracting the 100th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 50th spin of the "normal game state B", the G table 202d7 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 161 ( a) see) is selected. Also, when the 100th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 50th spin of the "normal game state B" are extracted, regardless of the number of held balls, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 13 ( c) see) is selected.

Next, when the 200th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 150th spin of the "normal game state B" are extracted, the H table 202d8 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 161 ( b) see) is selected. In addition, when extracting the jackpot at the 200th spin of the "normal game state A" and the 150th spin of the "normal game state B", regardless of the number of held balls, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 13 ( c) see) is selected.

Next, for the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the "normal pattern high probability time reduction Since it is the same as the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "state", "probability fluctuation state" and "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", the description is omitted.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161(a) schematically shows an example of the G table 202d7 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 161(b) schematically shows an example of the H table 202d8 of the stop pattern table 202d. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 161(a), in the G table 202d7 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation 3" effect mode ("0" to "99"), and " Stop pattern selection counter for non-reach (long) production mode, non-reach (middle) production mode, non-reach (short) production mode, each "reach display" production mode and special variation 4 production mode No value for C3 has been assigned. Therefore, in the 100th rotation of the "normal game state A" and the 50th rotation of the "normal game state B", the production mode of the dynamic display in which each special symbol is lost is always the "special variation 3" production mode. is set to

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(b), in the H table 202d8 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation 4" effect mode ("0" to "99"). , "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode, each "reach display" production mode and "special variation 3" production mode have a stop pattern The value of selection counter C3 is not assigned. Therefore, in the 200th rotation of the "normal game state A" and the 150th rotation of the "normal game state B", the production mode of the dynamic display in which each special symbol is lost is always the "special variation 4" production mode. is set to

In this way, a specific stop type such as the "special variation 3" effect mode and the "special variation 4" effect mode can be selected only at a specific number of rotations in a specific game state. The ramp control device 113 can recognize the current game state and the number of rotations by receiving the specific stop type. As a command output from the main controller 110 after the power supply of the present invention is lowered, an example of a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 when the number of times of execution of the variation effect reaches the specified number after the power is turned off. As explained above, for example, it may be a stop type command or a confirmation command output from the main control device 110 when the number of times of execution of the variable effect reaches the specified number after the power is turned off. It may be a reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110, a reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the start winning occurs after power saving, or touching the operation handle 51 after power saving. It may be a handle touch command output by .

Next, details of the variation pattern table 202e in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. Figure 162 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e1 for the special figure 1 loss stored in the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment, Figure 162 (b) is of the fifth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e2 for special figures 1 jackpot memorize|stored in ROM202. In addition, FIG. 163(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 stored in the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 jackpots memorize|stored in ROM202 of a form. The difference between the variation pattern table 202e of the fifth embodiment and the variation pattern table 202e of the third embodiment is mainly that the "special variation 3" presentation mode and the "special variation 4. The point is that a production mode is added.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, each variation pattern table 202e1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode. Specifically, as the production mode at the time of losing, "E0: non-reach (long)" which is referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, and "non-reach (middle)" production mode "E1: non-reach/middle" referred to when is determined, "E2: non-reach/short" referred to when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is determined, and " For "E3: Normal Reach" referred to when the "Normal Reach" production mode is determined, "E4: Super Reach" for reference when the "Super Reach" rendition mode is determined, and "Special Reach" rendition "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the mode is determined, "E8: Special Variation 3" which is referred to when the "Special Variation 3" production mode is determined, and "Special Variation 4" It is divided into one for "E9: special variation 4" which is referred to when the effect mode is determined.

Also, since the effect mode at the time of the big win in the fifth embodiment is the same as in the third embodiment, the description is omitted.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 162(a), the variation patterns from "E0: non-reach/long" to "E5: special reach" are the same as in the third embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E8: special variation 3" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds" One variation pattern of "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 162(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special fluctuation 3" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 3" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (" 0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 3" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E9: special variation 4" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds" One variation pattern of "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 162(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: special fluctuation 4" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 4" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (" 0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 4" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Here, the variable element that can be selected in the "special variation 3" rendering mode and the "special variation 4" rendering mode, ""high speed variation (long)" variable element + "low speed variation" variable element" is " It is the same as the variable element that can be selected in the non-reach (long) production mode.

As described above, the "special variation 3" effect mode is a variation pattern that can be selected only when dynamic display is executed for the 100th rotation in the "normal game state A" and the 50th rotation in the "normal game state B". , "Special Variation 4" effect mode is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the dynamic display is executed on the 200th rotation in the "normal game state A" and the 150th rotation in the "normal game state B".

That is, dynamic display of the 100th rotation in the "normal game state A" and the 50th rotation in the "normal game state B", and the 200th rotation in the "normal game state A" and the 150th rotation in the "normal game state B" The dynamic display of the eyes will perform the same variables as in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode. Therefore, dynamic display of the 100th rotation in the "normal game state A" and the 50th rotation in the "normal game state B", and the 200th rotation in the "normal game state A" and the 150th rotation in the "normal game state B" When executing the dynamic display of eyes, the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is the other number of rotations in the "normal game state" (that is, the 100th rotation in the "normal game state A" and the "normal game 50th rotation in state B”, and the number of rotations other than the 200th rotation in “normal game state A” and the 150th rotation in “normal game state B”). ', a variable effect similar to the effect mode is executed.

Therefore, the game can be executed without making the player aware that the variation performance is executed in the "special variation 3" performance mode or the "special variation 4" performance mode, and the sound lamp control device 113 , it is possible to determine that it is a variable effect at a specific number of revolutions.

It should be noted that the variation performances executed in the "special variation 3" performance mode and the "special variation 4" performance mode are the variation performances executed in the 100th and 200th rotations in the low probability state of the special symbol, A special effect may be executed to inform the player of the remaining number of rotations until the relief condition is satisfied. For example, the "special variation 4" production mode is a variation production executed on the 200th rotation in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the remaining number of rotations until the relief condition is satisfied is 50 rotations. The symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a message such as "Fifty spins remaining until relief conditions are met".

Next, the variation pattern table 202e2 for the special figure 1 jackpot to be referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in FIG. 162(b) is the same as in the third embodiment, so the description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163(a), the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss referred to when the second special symbol in the fifth embodiment is lost will be described.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 163(a), the variation patterns from "E0: non-reach/long" to "E5: special reach" are the same as those in the third embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E8: special variation 3" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds" One variation pattern of "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 163(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special fluctuation 3" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 3" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (" 0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 3" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3, "E9: special variation 4" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds" One variation pattern of "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 163(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: special fluctuation 4" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 4" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 losing variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (" 0 to 9”) is associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 4" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, the variation pattern table 202e4 for the special figure 2 to be referred to when the second special symbol of FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 164, the relief counter display processing (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing the relief counter display process (S1317) of the fifth embodiment. The difference between the relief counter display processing (S1317) of the fifth embodiment and the relief counter display processing (S1317) of the third embodiment is that when the game state of the variable effect executed this time is the "normal game state", , a process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect is added.

In the relief counter display process (S1317) of the fifth embodiment, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is not the "general figure high probability time reduction state" ( S1404: No), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed this time is the “special variation 3” performance mode (S1452), and the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed this time is the “special variation 3” performance mode. If there is (S1452: Yes), it is determined that it is the 100th rotation variation effect in the low probability state of the special symbol, the sub relief counter 223k is set to "100" (S1453), and the process proceeds to S1406.

In the process of S1452, if it is determined that the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed this time is not the “special variation 3” performance mode (S1452: No), then the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed this time is “special variation 4 production mode (S1454), and if the variation pattern of the variation production executed this time is the "special variation 4" production mode (S1454: Yes), the 200th rotation in the low probability state of the special symbol It is determined that it is a variable effect, "200" is set in the sub-relief counter 223k (S1455), and the process proceeds to S1406. As a suggestion effect executed based on the command output from the main controller 110 after the supply power of the present invention is lowered, a relief counter display 89 is displayed based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110 after the power is turned off. will be described as an example of displaying, for example, the relief counter display 89 may be displayed based on the reception of the variation type command or the confirmation command from the main controller 110 after the power is turned off, or the main controller after the power is turned off. Relief counter display 89 may be displayed based on the reception of the pending ball number command from 110, or a specific effect (for example, a specific character voice output, display of a specific character pattern, etc.) may be executed. Further, as a related suggestive effect related to the suggestive effect executed based on the command output from the main controller 110 after the power supply is lowered, an example in which the relief counter display 89 is displayed only with the number of fluctuations will be described. For example, by receiving a specific command from the main controller 110 after the power is turned off, the relief counter display 89 may be displayed only with the ceiling count, or by receiving a steering wheel contact command from the main controller 110 after power saving. Character telop display, additional character appearance, etc., which complement the production (for example, specific character voice output, specific character pattern display, etc.) may be used.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1454, if the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed this time is not the "special variation 4" effect mode (S1454: No), the process skips S1455 and S1406 and proceeds to S1407.

By configuring in this way, even if the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power being turned off in the "normal game state", by determining the command sent from the main controller 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the data of the RAM 223 in the 113 can be held correctly, and in the "normal game state" after the power is restored, the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed at a constant number of rotations, and the specific variation pattern is executed. The relief counter display 89 can be displayed from the dynamic display executing the variation pattern of .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the dynamic display of each special symbol starts execution, in the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 determines whether or not there is a particular variation pattern, sets a value in the sub-relief counter 223k according to the determination result, and sets the sub-relief counter display flag 223j to ON. By configuring in this way, even if the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power being turned off in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the special symbols is constant in the "normal game state" after the power is restored. By executing the number of rotations and executing a specific variation pattern, the relief counter display 89 can be displayed from the dynamic display in which the specific variation pattern is performed. As a result, the data in the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 can be correctly held without having a backup function, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to send a command to the sound lamp control device 113 for the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 staying in the "normal game state" is turned off at the end of the business hours of the game hall and turned on on the next business day without executing the RAM initialization processing, the power is turned on. Although the relief counter display 89 is not displayed in the "normal game state" immediately after the execution of the process, the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed for a certain number of rotations, and the number of rotations at which a specific variation pattern can be selected is reached. , the rescue counter display 89 can be displayed normally. As a result, when the player plays the pachinko machine 10 at the start of business of the game hall, even if the relief counter display 89 is not displayed during the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the special symbols is performed for a fixed number of rotations. is executed, the relief counter display 89 is displayed, and the number of rotations remaining until the relief condition is satisfied can be recognized. Then, when the game hall starts operating, the player who grasps this specification causes the pachinko machine 10 to run a fixed number of revolutions, displays the relief counter display 89, and displays the remaining number of revolutions until the relief condition is satisfied. If it is confirmed and the remaining number of rotations is small, the game can be continued until the relief condition is satisfied, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted. In addition, after grasping the number of rotations of the previous day, when the variable display of the fixed number of rotations is executed, whether or not the relief counter display 89 is displayed determines whether the RAM of the pachinko machine 10 has been cleared. It becomes possible to recognize. As a result, there is an effect of promoting the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at the start of business in order to grasp whether or not the benefit of RAM clearing (for example, setting change, ceiling over reset, etc.) can be received.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment has the same effects as those of the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 197. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the number of time reductions that can be granted based on the winning of the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" that will shift to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" is constant ( That is, it is configured to be "50 times"). Therefore, when shifting from the "general figure high probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state", the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set "50" to the sub-relief counter 223k fixedly.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the number of execution times of dynamic display of special symbols, as a time saving end condition when shifting to the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" The number of wins is set. For this reason, the number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the end of the "general figure high probability time shortening state" is an unspecified number of times.

The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that differ from the pachinko machine 10 of the third to fifth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the third to fifth embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, a specific configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The main difference between the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment and the game board 13 of the third embodiment is that a specific area is arranged inside the variable winning device 65 .

In the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment, a variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the downstream side of the ball of the normal electric combination 72 in the flowing direction. The variable winning device 65 includes a large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a configured to be retractable from the board surface of the game board 13, and a large winning opening solenoid 65b (see FIG. 166) capable of opening and closing the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a. , a large winning opening switch 65c provided in the variable winning device 65, and a specific area opening/closing plate disposed on the downstream side of the large winning opening switch 65c in the ball flow direction and configured to be able to appear and disappear from the board surface of the game board 13. 65d, a specific area solenoid 65e (see FIG. 166) capable of opening and closing the specific area opening/closing plate 65d, a specific area switch 65f capable of detecting a ball passing through the specific area, and a ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65. A discharge port 65g for discharging is provided.

The big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and can be changed between a protruded state and a retracted state, so that the downflow direction of the ball can be changed. That is, in the normal state, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a maintains a state of protruding from the board surface of the game board 13 (that is, a closed state), and is upstream of the variable winning device 65 (on the right side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front). By rolling the upper surface of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a and letting it flow down to the downstream side of the variable winning device 65 (the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front), the ball into the variable winning device 65 is configured to block the inflow of Then, when a big win is won in each special symbol or a small win is won in the second special symbol, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is operated by the big winning opening solenoid 65b (see FIG. 166) for a predetermined time. 13 It is driven to be immersed in the board surface, and the ball can flow into the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

A ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is detected by a large winning opening switch 65c provided in the variable winning device 65, and then flows down to a specific area side provided in the variable winning device 65 as well. 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are detected by the big winning opening switch 65c.

The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is configured such that the opening mode of the variable winning device 65 differs depending on the type of special symbol won as a small win. Details will be described later, but when winning the small winning type "small winning A", the number of opening times of the variable winning device 65 in one round is set to 1 time, and the opening time is set to "0.1 second". (See FIGS. 170 and 177). That is, the total time of the opening time of the variable winning device 65 by the small winning type "small winning A" is set to "0.1 second". On the other hand, when the small winning type "small winning B" is won, the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened in one round is set to 9 times, and the opening time is " 0.1 seconds", and the interval time until the next opening after the variable winning device 65 is closed is set to "1.2 seconds" (see FIGS. 170 and 177). That is, the total time of the opening time of the variable winning device 65 by the small winning type "small winning B" is set to "0.9 second". It should be noted that the maximum number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 in one round is set to "10" for any of the small wins (see FIG. 177).

Inside the variable winning device 65, a specific area opening/closing plate 65d is arranged downstream of the big winning opening switch 65c. The specific area opening/closing plate 65d is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is configured to be able to change the flowing direction of the ball by being able to change between a projected state and a retracted state. That is, the specific area opening/closing plate 65d maintains a state of protruding from the board surface of the game board 13 (that is, a closed state) in a normal state, and flows down from the upstream side of the specific area (the left side of the specific area opening/closing plate 65d when viewed from the front). By rolling the ball on the upper surface of the specific area opening/closing plate 65d and flowing down to the discharge port 65g side (the right side of the specific area opening/closing plate 65d in front view) in the variable winning device 65, it flows into the variable winning device 65 It is configured to block the inflow of the ball that has been pulled into a specific area. Then, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in the sixth embodiment, 4 seconds after the opening of the first large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a based on the winning of the small winning type "small winning A" or "small winning B") Then, the specific area opening/closing plate 65d is immersed into the board surface of the game board 13 by the specific area solenoid 65e (see FIG. 166), and the ball can flow into the specific area (specific area switch 65f side).

That is, when the small win type "small win A" is won, the timing at which the specific area opening/closing plate 65d is opened is after the total "0.1 second" of the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed. Furthermore, after "3.9 seconds" have passed, it is the timing when the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 due to the opening of the big winning port opening/closing plate 65a has finished flowing down to the discharge port 65g, and the variable winning device 65 The specific area remains closed until the ball that has flowed into the outlet 65g is guided to the discharge port 65g. On the other hand, when the small win type "small win B" is won, the timing at which the specific area opening/closing plate 65d is opened is the state in which the number of opening times of the big winning opening/closing plate 65a remains, and the variable winning device 65 The specific area is open in a state where the ball can flow in. Therefore, when winning the small winning type "small winning A", it is difficult or impossible for the ball fired in the right-handed game to flow into the specific area, while winning the small winning type "small winning B". , a ball fired in a right-handed game can flow into a specific area.

A sphere that has flowed into the specific area is detected by the specific area switch 65f provided in the specific area, and then flows down toward an outlet (not shown) provided downstream. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65f, a jackpot game is started in the same manner as when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. (so-called 1 type 2 type mixer). The content of the big hit that occurs when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 65f is determined according to the value of the small hit type counter CK (see FIG. 170), which will be described later. In addition, it is configured so that there is no payout of prize balls by the specific area switch 65f.

By configuring in this way, in the small win based on the small win type "small win A", it is possible to make it difficult or impossible to cause a big win by passing through the specific area after the small win game ends. In the small winning based on the winning type "small winning B", it is possible to generate a big winning by passing through the specific area after the small winning game is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 166 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. The difference between the block diagram of the sixth embodiment and the block diagram of the third embodiment is mainly that a small hit type table 202k and a small hit release table 202m are added to the ROM 202, and a small hit time reduction in the RAM 203. The point is that a counter 203r and a jackpot flag 203s are added.

Here, with reference to FIG. 167, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. The difference between the various counters of the sixth embodiment and the various counters of the third embodiment is mainly that a counter used for a small winning lottery is added.

For setting the big winning lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, the big winning random number counter C1 used for the big winning or small winning lottery and the big winning symbol A jackpot type counter C2 used to select the stop type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the effect mode of the variable effect, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, A variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection and a small winning type counter CK used for selecting a stop type of a small winning symbol are used.

Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of "4 milliseconds", which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 181). , and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 has a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved areas (second reserved first area) related to the second special symbol. to the fourth area) are provided, and in each of these areas, a jackpot random number Each value of the counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the small hit type counter CK is stored.

Of these various counters, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are updated in the same manner as in the third embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot or a small hit is set by a jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the random number value, it is determined as a big win, and if it matches the random number value that is a small win, it is determined as a small win.

Here, with reference to FIG. 168, details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be described. FIG. 168(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a1 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1") corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202. , FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a2 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2") corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202. be.

In the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the sixth embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set differently for each set value. In addition, an increase in the number of large-hit random numbers required for displacing each setting is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers corresponding to the losing. That is, when increasing the number of random number values for big wins in order to change each setting, the number of random number numbers for losing is decreased, and the decrease is allocated as the number of random number values for big wins. In this way, by varying the number of big win random numbers according to the game state, the probability of winning a big win is changed for each setting.

On the other hand, in the second special symbol, the number of small hit random numbers is set to be the same for each set value. That is, the number of small winning random numbers in the second special symbol is configured to be the same number for each set value. In this way, by setting the number of small winning random numbers to be the same for each set value in each special symbol, the rate of giving the game value considering only the small winning game at all the set values in each special symbol can be increased. be equivalent.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers for each setting of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers for all set values. configured to Also, the number of small hit random numbers of the second special symbol is configured so as not to be changed for each setting. That is, the increase in the number of random numbers for big hits due to the setting change is compensated for by decreasing the number of random numbers for failure and allocating the reduced amount to random numbers for big hits, and the number of random numbers for second special symbol small hits is compensated. The number is the same for each set value of the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate the ball payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, thereby reducing an increase in man-hours when designing game specifications. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the increased amount of the number of jackpot random numbers associated with the setting change is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 that can be obtained when it is easiest to stay in the game. Compensation is performed from the combination of the most random numbers (that is, a losing random number) other than . By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to make setting determination difficult from the number of appearances of the losing combination, which is the most frequently occurring combination in the variation effect of the first special symbol. Therefore, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 can be made difficult to be detected by setting only the appearance rate of the big win having a lower appearance probability than the losing combination as the determining element set by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (that is, setting value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player see through the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers associated with the setting change is compensated by the number of the jackpot random number counter C1, which corresponds to a losing combination that does not give a game value to the player. Compensate from the number.

A losing combination is a combination that does not give a game value, unlike a big winning combination or a small winning combination. It is a role that is not clearly (extremely) displayed. Here, if both the number of large winning random numbers corresponding to the big winning game and the number of small winning random numbers corresponding to the small winning game, which are likely to be clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp, are changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rate of the two elements of the big winning game and the small winning game with the data lamp, it becomes easy to guess the setting discrimination of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, for example, when the player sees through the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to a low setting (for example, set value "1"), the player does not play a game with the pachinko machine 10 and pachinko. There is a possibility that the operation of the machine 10 will be lowered.

Therefore, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values associated with the setting change of the probability setting value is not given to the player in the jackpot random number counter C1, and is not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp. By configuring to compensate from the number of losing random numbers corresponding to , the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is hardly seen through from the appearance rate of the small wins, with only the appearance rate of the big wins set by the player as the determining element. be able to. Therefore, the discriminating element of the probability setting value is limited to the appearance rate of a combination based on one random number, and for example, even if the setting is low (i.e., setting value "1", etc.), it is set to the player. The game can be continued without being detected, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

As shown in FIG. 168 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the sixth embodiment, when the setting value is "1", when the setting value is "1", in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 The number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number) to be a jackpot is 101, and the value "0 to 100" is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability in the first special symbol with the set value "1" is set to 101/10000=1.01/100 (that is, 1.01%).

In addition, when the set value is "1", the random number value (small hit random value) to be the small hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is not set.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) to be lost in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9899 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value "101 ~ 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the first special symbol with the set value "1" is set to 9899/10000=98.99/100 (that is, 98.99%).

That is, at the set value "1", the increase in the number of the jackpot random numbers in the special figure 1 is compensated for by decreasing the number of the losing random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. there is

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 103, and the value "0 to 102" It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol with the set value "2" is set to 103/10000=1.03/100 (that is, 1.03%).

In addition, when the set value is "2", the value of the random number (small hit random value) to be the small hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is not set in the same way as the set value "1".

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) to be lost in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9897 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value "103 ~ 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the first special symbol with the setting value "2" is set to 9897/10000=98.97/100 (that is, 98.97%).

That is, at the setting value "2", the increase in the number of the jackpot random numbers in the special figure 1 is compensated for by decreasing the number of the losing random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. there is

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the set value "1" (1.01% → 1.03%), and the set value "1 , it can be said that this is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of .

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 105, and the value "0 to 104" is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol with the setting value "3" is set to 105/10000=1.05/100 (that is, 1.05%).

In addition, when the set value is "3", the random number value (small hit random value) to be the small hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is not set as in the case of the set value "1".

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) to be lost in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9895 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value "105 ~ 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the first special symbol with the set value "3" is set to 9895/10000=98.95/100 (that is, 98.95%).

That is, at the setting value "3", the increase in the number of the big hit random numbers in the special figure 1 is compensated for by decreasing the number of the losing random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. there is

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the set value "2" (1.03% → 1.05%), and the set value "2 , it can be said that this is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of .

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(b), in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the sixth embodiment, when the set value is "1", the jackpot random number counter that becomes a big hit in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 The number of C1 values (jackpot random number) is 101 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and the value "0 to 100" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 101/10000=1.01/100 (that is, 1.01%) like the first special symbol. is set.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) to be small hits in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 1579, and the value "101 to 1679" is It is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small winning probability in the second special symbol with the set value "1" is set to 1579/10000=15.79/100 (that is, 15.79%).

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) to be lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 8320 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. The value "1680 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol with the set value "1" is set to 8320/10000=83.20/100 (that is, 83.20%).

That is, at the set value "1", the increase in the number of the jackpot random numbers in the special figure 2 is compensated for by decreasing the number of the losing random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. there is

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 103 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , Its value "0 to 102" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol with the setting value "2" is 103/10000=1.03/100 (that is, 1.03%) as in the first special symbol. is set.

Here, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) to be a small hit in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 1579, as in the case of the set value "1". , Its value "103 to 1681" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small winning probability in the second special symbol with the set value "2" is set to 1579/10000=15.79/100 (that is, 15.79%).

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) to be lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 8318 numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. The value "1682 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol with the set value "2" is set to 8318/10000=83.18/100 (that is, 83.18%).

That is, at the setting value "2", the increase in the number of the big hit random numbers in the special figure 2 is compensated for by decreasing the number of the losing random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. there is

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "1" (both 15.79%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (1.01%→1.03%), it can be said that this setting makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "1".

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 105 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , Its value "0 to 104" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol with the setting value "3" is 105/10000=1.05/100 (that is, 1.05%) like the first special symbol. is set.

Here, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random number) to be a small hit in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as in the case of the set values "1" and "2" , 1579, and the value "105 to 1683" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small winning probability in the second special symbol with the set value "3" is set to 1579/10000=15.79/100 (that is, 15.79%).

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) to be lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 8316 pieces other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. The value "1684 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the probability of losing the second special symbol with the set value "3" is set to 8316/10000=83.16/100 (that is, 83.16%).

That is, at the set value "3", the increase in the number of the big hit random numbers in the special figure 2 is compensated for by decreasing the number of the losing random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. there is

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "2" (both 15.79%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (1.03%→1.05%), it can be said that this is a setting that makes it easier for a big winning game to occur than in the case of the set value "2".

Here, with reference to FIG. 169, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described. FIG. 169(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the special figure 2 jackpot classification table 202b2 corresponding to the 2nd special design similarly memorize|stored in ROM202 of 6th Embodiment. The difference between the jackpot type table 202b of the sixth embodiment and the jackpot type table 202b of the third embodiment is mainly that all the jackpot types that can be won shift to the "general pattern high probability time reduction state". It is a jackpot type, and the point that the jackpot type that will shift to the "probability fluctuation state" is deleted, and the number of time reductions that can be given when shifting to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" are different. It is a point.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four rounds, although the jackpot probability of special symbols is in a low probability state, dynamic display of special symbols is performed a specified number of times (sixth embodiment). In the form, "99 times") until it is executed, or until the specified number of times (in the sixth embodiment, "1 time") is won in the small winning game, the probability of winning the normal symbol is high probability. After the jackpot type "time reduction A" corresponding to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and the maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds, the special pattern jackpot probability is in a low probability state, but the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed a specified number of times ("99 times" in the sixth embodiment), or until the small winning game is elected a specified number of times ("1 time" in the sixth embodiment), the normal symbol After the jackpot type "time reduction B" corresponding to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" in which the probability of winning is high, and the maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the dynamic display of the special pattern will be displayed the specified number of times (6th In the embodiment, "99 times") is executed, or until the small winning game is elected a specified number of times ("1 time" in the sixth embodiment), the probability of winning the normal symbol is a high probability state. There is a jackpot type "time reduction C" corresponding to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state".

In the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 169(a), the value "0 to 43" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "time saving A", and the jackpot type "time saving B" The value "44-96" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with it, and the value "97-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot type "probability variable A".

Therefore, in the winning lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d is the value that becomes the jackpot. In this case, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area can be selected from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. If the value of the type counter C2 is '7', the jackpot type 'time saving A' can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is '98', the jackpot type 'time saving C' can be selected.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot type "time reduction A" is 44%, the jackpot type "time reduction B" is 53%, and the jackpot type "time reduction C" is 3%. will be elected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in a left-handed game, it is possible to win the first starting port 64 and dynamically display the first special symbol, but it is difficult to win the second starting port 71. Since the dynamic display of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is mainly executed in the game state of the left-handed game (that is, the "normal game state"). is configured as follows.

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 169(b), when the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in all game states, the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type "time reduction A" The value of "0 to 38" is associated, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "39 to 77" is associated with the jackpot type "time saving B", and the jackpot type "time saving C" is associated with the jackpot type counter C2. are associated with the values of "78 to 99".

That is, in the lottery for the second special symbols in all game states, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a big hit. , the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area can be selected from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "time saving A" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "time saving C" can be selected.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot type "time reduction A" is 39%, the jackpot type "time reduction B" is 39%, and the jackpot type "time reduction C" is 22%. will be elected.

Returning to FIG. 167, the description is continued. The small hit type counter CK determines the small hit type (big hit content) given when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game after winning the small hit, and is within a predetermined range (for example , "0 to 99"), and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99"). ing. The value of the small hit type counter CK, for example, is periodically updated (in the sixth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 181)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 71, the jackpot is selected from the second reserve first to fourth areas of the second reserve ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second start port 71. It is stored in the small hit type counter storage area 203e5 of the same second reservation area as the second reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (jackpot random value) or a small hit. If it is not a random number (small hit random number), that is, if it is a random number that will be lost (losing random number), the variation pattern in the variation production and the type of stop pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as "stop type" ) is the one at the time of loss. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot, then in the variable effect Variation patterns and types of stop symbols (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "stop types") are those at the time of the big hit. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (small hit random value) that becomes a small hit, the variation pattern and stop type in the variation effect will be the one at the time of the small hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the small hit are determined corresponding to the small hit type indicated by the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the small hit type counter CK in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the small hit type counter CK and the small hit type table 202k stored in the ROM 202 And based on, the small hit type is determined.

Here, with reference to FIG. 170, the special figure 2 small hit type table 202k will be described. FIG. 170 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 small hit type table 202k corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM202.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, as described above, when a small win is won in the lottery game of the second special symbol, the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 165) is driven to open, and the type of special symbol A specific area in the variable prize winning device 65 is opened at a timing corresponding to . Then, when the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, the big winning game corresponding to the value of the small winning type counter CK is started.

As shown in FIG. 170, the small hit type table 202k is a small hit type according to the type of the special symbol and the value of the small hit type counter CK depending on whether or not the specific area is passed during the small hit. is a table in which . In addition, it may be configured such that the types of small hits that can be selected are different depending on the game state in which the player stays.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the ball does not pass through the specific area, the maximum number of rounds is 1 round as the small winning types "small winning A" and "small winning B". On the other hand, when the ball passes through the specific area, the maximum number of rounds is 1 (for small hits) + 3 rounds (for big hits), and the number of time reductions of “99 times” is given. ” and “Time saving E”, the maximum number of rounds is 1 (small hit) + 5 rounds (jackpot), and “99 times” time saving number is given “Time saving F”, and the maximum number of rounds is 1 (Minor hit) + 9 rounds (big hit) and "time reduction G" is provided in which the number of times of time reduction of "99 times" is given.

In addition, as effects that are executed only when the general game state and the advantageous game state of the present invention end, "30 times" "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "50 times" "normal pattern high probability Time reduction state" and common time saving end only variation will be described as an example, for example, common probability variation end only variation in "probability variation state" of "30 times" and "probability variation state" of "50 times" may be provided, a common jackpot ending effect may be provided for the jackpot game of 5 rounds and the jackpot game of 10 rounds, or it is common to the small win game opened 5 times and the small win game opened 10 times. A small winning ending effect may be provided.

In the special figure 2 small hit type table 202k, each small hit type is associated with a possible value of the small hit type counter CK that determines the small hit type.

In the example of the special figure 2 small hit type table 202k shown in FIG. 170, when the small hit of the second special symbol occurs, when the ball does not pass through the specific area, On the other hand, the value "0 to 19" of the small hit type counter CK is associated, and the value "20 to 99" of the small hit type counter CK is associated with the small hit type "small hit B". On the other hand, when the ball passes through the specific area, the value of the small hit type counter CK "0 to 19" is associated with "time saving D", and the value of the small hit type counter CK with respect to "time saving E" “20 to 50” is associated, the value of the small hit type counter CK “51 to 81” is associated with “time saving F”, and the value of the small hit type counter CK “82” is associated with “time saving G” to 99” are associated.

That is, in the winning lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of the first reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a value that becomes a small hit. If there is, the small hit type associated with the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the small hit type counter storage area 203e5 of the same first reservation area is determined from the special figure 2 small hit type table 202k, For example, depending on the presence or absence of passage through the specific area, if the value of the small hit type counter CK is "7", "time saving D" is determined as the small hit type, and the value of the small hit type counter CK is "95" In the case of , "time saving G" is determined as the small hit type.

Therefore, when a small win is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the ball does not pass through the specific area, the small win type "small win A" is 20% and the small win type "small win" is 20%. Hit B" will be elected at a rate of 80%.

Therefore, when a small win is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the small win type "small win B" is easily won.

Here, as described above, in the small win based on the small win type "small win A", the big win due to passing through the specific area after the small win game is finished is difficult or impossible to occur. In the small win based on the win type "small win B", it is configured so that a big win can occur by passing through the specific area after the small win game ends.

Therefore, when a small win is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the small win type "small win B" is likely to be won, so that the big win by passing through the specific area is likely to occur after the small win game ends. It is configured.

In addition, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, when the ball passes through the specific area, the small hit type "time saving D" is 20%, and the small hit type "time saving E" is 20%. 31%, 31% of the small hit type "shortening of working hours F", and 18% of the small hitting type "shortening of working hours G" will be elected.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, the game mode in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, and the game state transition conditions and transition destinations in each game state will be described. Figure 171 shows, in each game state, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the second It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of 2 special symbols and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right. Also, FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the launch mode in each game state and the shift destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type and the like. The difference between the game specifications of the sixth embodiment and the game specifications of the third embodiment is mainly that the "probability fluctuation state" is deleted as a game state, and the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" The point is that the jackpot type and the small hit type that will be transferred are added.

As shown in FIG. 171, the opportunity to shift to the "normal game state" is the initial state at the time of shipment from the factory and the RAM clear state. Support end. See Figure 172.) Or, when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the "normal figure low probability time reduction state" (so-called electric support end. See Figure 172.).

Here, the details will be described later, but the time saving end condition in the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" is that the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed "99 times" or the small winning game is won "once". or (see FIG. 178), but if the game is played according to the game specifications, it is easier to establish the time-saving end condition by winning "once" in the small winning game. is configured to

Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol wins the small winning game, in the small winning based on the small winning type "small winning B", the big winning by passing through the specific area after the small winning game ends Since it is configured so that can occur, substantially, in the small hit based on the small hit type "small hit B", the time saving end condition is satisfied and the big hit is higher than the transition to the "normal game state" It is designed to occur easily.

On the other hand, among the cases where the dynamic display of the second special symbol is won in the small winning game, in the small winning based on the small winning type "small winning A", the big winning due to passing through the specific area is unlikely to occur after the small winning game ends. Or, since it is configured so that it cannot occur, in the small win based on the small win type "small win A", the time saving end condition is established and it is configured to facilitate the transition to the "normal game state". .

That is, the condition of winning "once" in the small winning game, which is the time saving end condition in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", can be substantially satisfied by winning the small winning type "small winning A" If

Also, as described above, in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 15.79% (see FIG. 168(b)). Furthermore, when a small win is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the small win type "small win A" is 20% and the small win type "small win B" is 80% in the special figure 2 small win type table 202k. It is set to win at a rate of % (see FIG. 170). Therefore, the winning probability of the small hit type "small hit A" is about 3.16%, which is 20% of the 15.79% that is the small hit probability in the second special symbol, and the average is about 32 rotations. , it is possible to win the small win type "small win A" once.

Therefore, when the game is played according to the game specifications in the "normal figure high probability time reduction state", the dynamic display of the special symbol, which is one of the time saving end conditions, is performed "99 times". The event of winning the winning type "small winning A" is more likely to occur.

That is, the time-saving end condition in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is the time-saving end condition by winning "once" in the small winning game rather than the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed "99 times". It is structured so that it is easier to establish.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the transition from the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state" is substantially when the small winning type "small winning A" is won. Therefore, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the number of dynamic display of special symbols at the time of transition from the "general figure high probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state" is not fixed, An unspecified number of times.

As a result, since the value of the rescue counter display 89 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when shifting to the "normal game state" also becomes an unspecified number of times, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 Then, the value of the sub-relief counter 223k is configured to count the number of times of variable display executed after the previous big win (in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, all game states are special symbols with a low probability state), the value of the sub-relief counter 223k is displayed on the relief counter display 89. FIG.

By configuring in this way, like the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the number of times dynamic display of special symbols is executed at the time of transition from the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" to the "normal game state" Even when the unspecified number of times is reached, the correct value can be displayed on the relief counter display 89 .

In addition, the probability of winning a special symbol in the "normal game state", the probability of winning a normal symbol, the shooting mode of the ball to be encouraged, the main winning destination, the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol, and As for whether or not the game can be played to the right, it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, so the explanation is omitted.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" is when the jackpot type "time reduction A", "time reduction B" or "time reduction C" is elected, or the small hit type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time saving F" or "time saving G" (see FIG. 172).

In addition, the special pattern jackpot probability in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the normal pattern hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special pattern fluctuation time, the second special pattern fluctuation Since the time and whether or not the game can be played to the right are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the opportunity to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the special pattern jackpot probability, the normal pattern hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special pattern fluctuation time, the second Since the variation time of the special symbol and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the pending number table 202c will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. Figure 173 is a diagram schematically showing a special figure 1 reserved number table 202c1 corresponding to the first special symbol, Figure 174 schematically shows a special figure 2 reserved number table 202c2 corresponding to the second special symbol It is a schematic diagram. The difference between the number-of-holds table 202c of the sixth embodiment and the number-of-holds table 202c of the third embodiment is mainly that a separate stop pattern table 202d is set at a specific number of rotations in the "normal game state". is.

It should be noted that the number of rotations in each game state defined in the holding number table 202c of FIGS. 173 and 174 are all the number of rotations after the factory shipment initial state, the RAM clear state, or after the jackpot game. . That is, the number of rotations in the low probability state of the special symbol is the number of rotations from the state of "0 times".

As shown in the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1 in the sixth embodiment of FIG. The stop pattern table 202d that can be selected is the same as the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "normal game state" of the third embodiment.

Also, when extracting the 100th spin in the "normal game state", the G table 202d7 (see FIG. 161(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. Also, when extracting the 100th jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Next, when extracting the 200th spin in the "normal game state", the H table 202d8 (see FIG. 161(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. Also, when extracting the 200th jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Next, for the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and "normal pattern Description is omitted because it is similar to the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "low probability time reduction state".

By configuring in this way, even if the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols at the time of transition from "general figure high probability time shortening state" to "normal game state" is an unspecified number of times, special symbols A specific variation pattern can be selected at a specific number of revolutions in a low probability state. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the power is cut off, the data in the RAM 223 is initialized, and the value of the sub-relief counter 223k, which had been counting until the power was cut off, is cleared to zero. Although the number of executions in the low probability state of the special symbol that was being executed becomes unknown, the specific variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 (that is, the "special variation 3" effect mode and the "special variation 4" effect mode (See FIG. 161)), it is possible to grasp the number of execution times (specific number of rotations) of the variable display of special symbols in the "normal game state".

That is, for example, if the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is a "special variation 3" presentation mode that can be executed when the G table 202d7 of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. (See FIG. 161), the "special variation 3" presentation mode is a variation pattern that can be selected only in the initial state, in the RAM clear state, or at the 100th rotation after the jackpot game, when the dynamic display is lost. In the lamp control device 113, the variation display of the special symbol executed when the variation pattern command corresponding to the "special variation 3" effect mode is received is the variation of the 100th rotation in the low probability state of the special symbol from the previous big win. It can be determined that it is a display.

As a result, even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like during the "normal game state", by receiving the variation pattern command corresponding to the "special variation 3" effect mode, the previous It is possible to recognize the number of executions of the special symbol from the jackpot in the low probability state, and display the relief counter display 89 again (in this example, "100/250" is displayed).

In addition, by configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 staying in the "normal game state" is turned off when the game hall closes the business, and the power is turned on on the next business day without performing RAM initialization processing. When launched, although the relief counter display 89 is not displayed in the "normal game state" immediately after execution of the launching process, by executing the dynamic display of the special symbol for a certain number of rotations, the above-mentioned specific fluctuation pattern can be obtained. can be selected, the rescue counter display 89 can be displayed normally.

As a result, when the player plays the pachinko machine 10 at the start of business of the game hall, even if the relief counter display 89 is not displayed during the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the special symbols is performed for a fixed number of rotations. is executed, the relief counter display 89 is displayed, and the number of rotations remaining until the relief condition is satisfied can be recognized. Then, when the game hall starts operating, the player who grasps this specification causes the pachinko machine 10 to run a fixed number of revolutions, displays the relief counter display 89, and displays the remaining number of revolutions until the relief condition is satisfied. If it is confirmed and the remaining number of rotations is small, the game can be continued until the relief condition is satisfied, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174, in the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2 in the sixth embodiment, the 1st to 99th rotations, 101st to 199th rotations, 201st to 250th rotations and 350th rotations in the "normal game state" The stop pattern table 202d that can be selected after the first is the same as the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "normal game state" of the third embodiment.

Also, when extracting the 100th spin in the "normal game state", the G table 202d7 (see FIG. 161(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. Also, when extracting the 100th jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Next, when extracting the 200th spin in the "normal game state", the H table 202d8 (see FIG. 161(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. Also, when extracting the 200th jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 13(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Next, for the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and "normal pattern Description is omitted because it is similar to the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the "low probability time reduction state".

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, details of the variation pattern table 202e in the sixth embodiment will be described. Figure 177 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss/small hit A stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment, and Figure 177 (b) shows the It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 big hit/small hit B stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the variation pattern table 202e of the sixth embodiment and the variation pattern table 202e of the third embodiment is mainly that when the second special symbol is lost or when the small hit type "small hit A" is extracted, , "special variation 3" effect mode and "special variation 4" effect mode are added.

Regarding the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 and the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202e2 in the sixth embodiment, the special figure 1 losing variation pattern table 202e1 and the special figure 1 big winning variation in the fifth embodiment Since it is the same as the pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 162), the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 177, each variation pattern table 202e3 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode. Specifically, for "E0: non-reach long" that is referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined as the production mode at the time of losing or extracting the small hit type "small hit A" , "E1: non-reach/middle" that is referred to when the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is determined, and " E2: for non-reach/short, "E3: normal reach" that is referred to when the "normal reach" production mode is determined, and "E4: for normal reach" that is referred to when the "super reach" performance mode is determined For "Super Reach", "E8: Special It is divided into "Variation 3" and "E9: Special Variation 4" which is referred to when the "Special Variation 4" effect mode is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot of each special symbol or when extracting the small hit type "small hit B" of the second special symbol, as the production mode when the "normal reach" production mode is determined, "E3: normal reach" is used. , for "E4: Super Reach" which is referred to when the "Super Reach" effect mode is determined, and for "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined; are separated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177(a), the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss referred to at the time of the second special symbol loss/small hit A in the sixth embodiment will be described.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 163(a), the variation patterns from "E0: non-reach/long" to "E5: special reach" are the same as those in the third embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit A variation pattern table 202e3, "E8: special variation 3" includes ""fast variation (long)" variation element +" One variation pattern of "variation element of low speed variation" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 177(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special fluctuation 3" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 3" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit A variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 3" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit A variation pattern table 202e3, "E9: special variation 4" includes ""fast variation (long)" variation element +" One variation pattern of "variation element of low speed variation" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 177(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: special fluctuation 4" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for the "variable element", and only the ""high-speed variation (long)" variable element + "low-speed variation" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special variation 4" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit A variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all that the variation type counter CS1 can take (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "special variation 4" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation"" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, for the special figure 2 big hit/small hit B variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the second special symbol jackpot or small hit type "small hit B" extraction of FIG. Since it is similar to the variation pattern table 202e4 for the special figure 2 jackpot, the description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the jackpot open table 202f of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot open table 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the jackpot opening table 202f of the sixth embodiment and the jackpot opening table 202f of the third embodiment is mainly that the "probability fluctuation state" of the game state is deleted, and the "probability fluctuation state" The point is that the jackpot type that will shift to is deleted, and the type of jackpot type that will shift to the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" is added.

First, the jackpot release table 202f is classified according to the type of jackpot won, which is selected based on the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 that is likely to win for each game state.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", the jackpot type "time reduction A", "time reduction B" or "time reduction C", or the small hit type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction F" or " In the "normal game state" that is referred to when winning "Time saving G", and the "normal high probability time reduction state" or "normal low probability time reduction state", the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "time reduction B ”Or “Short time C”, or “Short time D”, “Short time E”, “Short time F” or “Short time G” The opening state of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is stipulated for "low probability time shortening state".

As shown in FIG. 176, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened over four rounds. is opened and closed repeatedly. The opening time of the jackpot is set to ``30 seconds'', the interval time between the first round of the jackpot and the next round is set to ``1 second'', and the ending time of the jackpot is set to ``1 second''. 10 seconds”. In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, it is configured to shift to the "general pattern high probability time reduction state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot open table 202f, when the jackpot type "time saving B" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over six rounds. . Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "time saving B" is won, it is configured to shift to the "general figure high probability time reduction state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "time saving C" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. . Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "time saving C" is won, it is configured to shift to the "general pattern high probability time reduction state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot open table 202f, when the small winning type "time saving D" or "time saving E" is won, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is set to 3 rounds. It is opened and closed repeatedly. Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the ``normal game state'', after the jackpot game is completed when the small winning type ``time saving D'' or ``time saving E'' is won, it is configured to shift to the ``normal figure high probability time shortening state''. .

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot open table 202f, when the jackpot type "time saving F" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over five rounds. . Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "time saving G" is won, it is configured to shift to the "general figure high probability time reduction state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "time saving G" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over nine rounds. . Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "time saving G" is won, it is configured to shift to the "general figure high probability time reduction state".

In the "normal game state", it is the dynamic display of the second special symbol that can win the small hit type "time saving D", "time saving E", "time saving F" or "time saving G". The dynamic display of the special symbols is configured to be difficult to execute in the left-handed game recommended in the "normal game state".

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal figure high probability time shortening state / general figure low probability time shortening state", when winning the jackpot type "time saving A", the variable winning device 65 large winning mouth opening / closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed for four rounds. Then, the opening time of the jackpot is set to "10 seconds", the interval time that is the closing time between one round of the jackpot and the next round is set to "1 second", and the ending time of the jackpot is set to "1 second". 10 seconds”. In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", after the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "time reduction A", it will be in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" configured to migrate.

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal figure high probability time shortening state / general figure low probability time shortening state", when winning the jackpot type "short time B", the large winning opening opening and closing plate of the variable winning device 65 65a is repeatedly opened and closed for 6 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", after the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "time reduction B", to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" configured to migrate.

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal figure high probability time shortening state / general figure low probability time shortening state", when winning the jackpot type "time saving C", the variable winning device 65 large winning mouth opening / closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed for 10 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", after the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "time reduction C", to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" configured to migrate.

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal figure high probability time shortening state / general figure low probability time shortening state", when winning the small hit type "short time D" or "short time E", the variable winning device 65 The big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed over three rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", after the jackpot game when winning the small hit type "time reduction D" or "time reduction E", "normal pattern high It is configured to shift to a "probable time reduction state".

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal figure high probability time reduction state / general figure low probability time reduction state", when winning the jackpot type "time reduction F", the variable winning device 65 large winning mouth opening / closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed for 5 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", after the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "time reduction G", to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" configured to migrate.

Next, in the jackpot open table 202f for "normal figure high probability time shortening state / general figure low probability time shortening state", when winning the jackpot type "time saving G", the variable winning device 65 large winning mouth opening / closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed for 9 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", after the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "time reduction G", to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" configured to migrate.

In this way, in the "continuous" state in which the right-handed game is maintained and the special symbol jackpots occur frequently, the OP time, IT time, and ED at the time of the jackpot when one of the jackpot types is won. By configuring the time to be shorter than the OP time, IT time and ED time of the initial jackpot in the ``normal game state'', the time to complete the entire jackpot during the ``continuous game'' state is shortened and the ``continuous game'' state is achieved. , it is possible to shorten the arrival time to the next jackpot. As a result, the time until the next big win occurs in the "continuous" state can be shortened, and the time until the next big win arrives in spite of the "continuous" state is prolonged, thereby improving the game of the player. By generating a series of big wins at an early stage while suppressing the excitement of the game, the player can feel refreshed and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by making the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the initial jackpot in the "normal game state" longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "continuous game state", It becomes possible to execute various productions. By configuring in this way, for example, explanation of the game method in the pachinko machine 10 at the OP time and ED time of the first big win (for example, suggestion of shooting mode, suggestion of prevention of forgetting to remove the card inserted in the card sand, future (explanation of the game state, etc.), and a performance to congratulate the first big win from the "normal game state" can be executed, making it easier for the player to understand the game method of the pachinko machine 10, and finally winning the big win. It is possible to perform a performance that contributes to improving the interest of the player by making the player feel.

In addition, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a at the time of the big winning based on the big winning type or the small winning type (OP time, IT time, ED time, number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings, number of prize balls and transition game state ) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, it may be configured to vary the number of times of opening (number of rounds) for each jackpot type, or may be configured to change the maximum opening time for each jackpot type or each small win type. , the maximum winning number may be changed. Since the number of prize balls that can be paid out differs for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make a difference in the game value that is directly given according to the jackpot type or the minor win type that is won.

In addition, it is not necessary to shift to a separate game state for each jackpot type or each small hit type, and it may be configured to shift to a common game state for a plurality of jackpot types or small hit types. Furthermore, the OP time and the ED time may be configured to be different, or the IT time may be set longer than the OP time and the ED time. Also, the minimum open time for one round may be set to a time shorter than the IT time, the OP time, and the ED time. Furthermore, at least one or more of OP time, IT time or ED time may be set to be the same time for each jackpot type or each small hit type. In addition, the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "latency probability fluctuation state" are changed to the OP time of the jackpot in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", Although the IT time and the ED time were configured to be shorter than each other, any one or more of the OP time, the IT time, or the ED time is configured to be shortened, and the other one or more of the OP time is configured to be shorter. , IT time, or ED time may be equal or longer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the small winning open table 202m of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the small winning open table 202m stored in the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment. The small winning opening table 202m is referred to at the time of the small winning of the second special symbol, and based on the small winning type at the time of occurrence of the small winning, the opening mode of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 (in one round number of times of opening, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning prizes, number of winning balls) are defined.

As described above, in this small winning opening table 202m, the opening mode and the like are classified based on the winning small winning type. The game state etc. to be shifted after the end of the jackpot associated with is stipulated.

As shown in FIG. 177, in the small winning opening table 202m, when winning the small winning type "small winning A", the variable winning device 65 is opened once during one round, and the maximum opening of one opening The number of seconds is set to "0.1 second", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "10". Then, after the small winning game of the small winning type "small winning A" is finished, the ball does not pass through the specific area, so that the state shifts to the "normal game state".

Next, when the small win type "small win B" is won, the variable prize winning device 65 is opened nine times during one round, and the maximum opening seconds for one opening is set to "0.1 second". Also, the closing time between one opening and the next opening (that is, the interval time) is set to "1.2 seconds", the maximum number of prizes won in one round is set to "10", and one prize is won. The number of prize balls to be paid out is set to "10". Then, after the small winning game of the small winning type "small winning B" is completed, the ball does not pass through the specific area, so that the state shifts to the "normal game state".

Next, when winning the small winning type "time saving D", the variable winning device 65 is opened once during one round, and the maximum opening seconds of opening one is set to "0.1 second", The maximum winning number in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "10". And, after the end of the small winning game of the small winning type "time reduction D", it shifts to the big winning game (3 rounds) based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area. In addition, the small hit type "time saving D" is substantially generated because the ball is configured to be difficult or impossible to pass through the specific area due to the opening mode of the large winning opening opening and closing plate 65a and the specific area opening and closing plate 65d. It is a small hit type that cannot be obtained.

Next, when winning the small winning type "time saving E", the variable winning device 65 is opened nine times during one round, and the maximum opening seconds for opening one is set to "0.1 second", In addition, the closing time between one opening and the next opening (that is, the interval time) is set to "1.2 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", Based on this, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set to "10". Then, after the end of the small winning game of the small winning type "time saving E", it shifts to the big winning game (3 rounds) based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area.

Next, when winning the small winning type "time saving F", the variable winning device 65 is opened nine times during one round, and the maximum opening seconds of opening one is set to "0.1 second", In addition, the closing time between one opening and the next opening (that is, the interval time) is set to "1.2 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", Based on this, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set to "10". Then, after the end of the small winning game of the small winning type "time reduction F", it shifts to the big winning game (5 rounds) based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area.

Next, when winning the small winning type "time saving G", the variable winning device 65 is opened 9 times during one round, and the maximum opening seconds of opening 1 is set to "0.1 second", In addition, the closing time between one opening and the next opening (that is, the interval time) is set to "1.2 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", Based on this, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set to "10". Then, after the small winning game of the small winning type "time saving G" is completed, it shifts to the big winning game (9 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the time saving end condition table 202j in 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the time saving end condition table 202j stored in the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment. With the time saving end condition table 202j of the sixth embodiment. The difference from the time-saving end condition table 202j of the sixth embodiment is mainly that the small winning type is added as a time-saving occurrence condition, and the time-saving end condition is a variable winning device based on winning a small winning game. The point is that the number of times of small hit operation indicating the number of times of operation (opening) of 65 is added.

The "time saving function" of the sixth embodiment derives a jackpot lottery result in one of the special symbols, or by satisfying any one of the following time saving end conditions configured to terminate. As specific time-saving end conditions, "time-saving number" indicating the number of times of dynamic display of each special pattern after the end of the jackpot, and winning a small winning game in the dynamic display of the second special pattern after the end of the jackpot "Number of times of small hit operation" indicating the number of times of operation (opening) of the variable winning device 65 based on is defined.

First, as shown in FIG. 178, in all game states, the jackpot type "time reduction A", "time reduction B" or "time reduction C", or the small hit type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction F" Or when "time saving G" is executed, the "number of times of time saving" is set to "99 times", and the "number of times of small hit operation" is set to "one time".

Next, when the relief condition is established, the "time saving frequency" is set to "99 times", and the "small win operation frequency" is set to "99 times".

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the game is played according to the game specifications in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the "time reduction number of times" reaches "99 times". Rather, it is configured to be more likely to be established when the "small hit operation frequency" reaches "1 time".

On the other hand, in the "normal figure low probability time reduction state" that transitions when the relief condition is satisfied, the "small hit operation number" is set to "99 times", and is set equal to the "time reduction number" Therefore, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the “time saving number of times” reaches “99 times”.

In this way, by setting the "small hit operation number of times" when the relief condition is established to be equivalent to the "time reduction number of times", the so-called "normal figure low probability time reduction state" which is a relief function at the time of addiction, right hitting It is possible to prevent a player from losing his willingness to play by winning a small winning type 'small winning A' immediately after starting a game, immediately satisfying a time saving end condition and returning to a left-handed game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The difference between the block diagram of the sixth embodiment and the block diagram of the third embodiment is mainly that a small hit type table 222e is added to the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a consistency flag to the RAM 223 223n is added.

In the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, at least a small hit type table 222e is stored. These tables 222a to 222e are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, fluctuation pattern table 202e, and small hit type table 202k provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. .

The sound lamp control device 113 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with the start winning, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type that are transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, the variation pattern table 222d, and the small hit type table 222e, the prefetching process is configured to be executable.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, whether it will be a “ready-to-win display”, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect, and the execution of various effects is determined, or the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 99) is changed. Executes control to determine the content (and execution time (timing)).

A consistency flag 223n provided in the RAM 223 is a flag indicating whether or not the data in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the data in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 are consistent. The consistency flag 223n is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on (see S1071 in FIG. 194), and when a RAM initialization command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1281 in FIG. 195), the main When a specific variation pattern command output from the control device 110 (that is, variation pattern command of "special variation 3" effect mode or "special variation 4" effect mode) is received (see S1479 in FIG. 196), or a big hit is set to ON (see S1571 in FIG. 197).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the consistency flag 223n is on, the data in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the data in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 are consistent. Since the sub-relief counter 223k has a normal value, the value of the sub-relief counter 223k is displayed on the relief counter display 89 of the third symbol display device 81 in the "normal game state". It is configured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the details of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storing area 223f and the execution information storing area 223g of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storing area 223f, and the execution information storing area 223g of the sixth embodiment.

The first pending information storage area 223e has four areas of first pending information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first to fourth storage areas of the first pending information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Further, the second pending information storage area 223f has four areas of second pending information storage first to fourth areas, like the first pending information storage area 223e. In each of the first to fourth areas for storing second hold information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored, and the value of the small hit type counter CK are stored At least a small hit type counter storage area 223f5 is provided.

Furthermore, in the execution information storage area 223g, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 and a jackpot type counter store the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed. A jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 where the value of C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. 223g4 and a small hit type counter storage area 223g5 in which the value of the small hit type counter CK is stored are provided at least.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being executed. In addition, the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e corresponds to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily suspended among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended. and the second area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is reserved the third oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended, and is the first suspension. The fourth area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performances of the first special symbol that are held.

In addition, the second reservation information storage first area of the second reservation information storage area 223f corresponds to the variation performance of the second special design that is temporarily reserved first among the variation performance of the second special design that is reserved. and the second area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained third in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is retained, and the second retention. The fourth information storage area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol which is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol which is held.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first pending ball number command from the main control device 110, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are set to the first reserve. Extract from the number of balls command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the holding balls included in the first holding ball number command in the corresponding first holding information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223e4 of the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved number of balls command is X (1≦X≦4), the number of variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved at that time is X. , the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command are the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved in the X-th time among the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command in the first reserved ball X area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the first reservation information storage X area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the small hit type counter CK, and the fluctuation type counter CS1. are extracted from the second reserved ball number command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 in the second hold ball number command out of the corresponding second hold information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, the fluctuation type counter storage area 223f4, and the small hit type counter storage area 223f5 in the area corresponding to the number of pending balls.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball number command is X (1 ≤ Y ≤ 4), the number of variable effects of the second special symbol that is reserved at that time is Y. , the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the second hold ball number command are the Y-th time reserved first special symbols among the variable effects of the reserved second special symbols. Since it corresponds to the variable effect, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the first reservation information storage Y area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command in the second reserved Y area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the second reserve Y area of the main controller 110 are stored in the second stop information storage Y area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 1 variation pattern command and a special figure 1 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the first special symbol from the main controller 110, the first reservation information storage area 223e , to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, when there is pending information about the first special symbol, the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily suspended is started, so the first special symbol that is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reservation information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance of the currently executed first special symbol corresponding to the variable performance It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage area 223g are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage first area. 1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the third storage area for pending information are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the second area for storing the first pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the third pending information storage area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 2 variation pattern command and a special figure 2 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the second special symbol from the main control device 110, the second reservation information storage area 223f , to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, when there is pending information about the second special symbol, the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started, so the first suspended second special symbol. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the first storage area for the second hold information corresponding to the variable effect of the second special symbol currently being executed are changed to the variable effect. It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g5 of the corresponding execution information storage area 223g.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g stores the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage area 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage third area are transferred to the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage second area. , and the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the fourth area storing the second pending information are transferred to the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f1 of the third area storing the second pending information. Move to 223f5.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223g. Also, in the first to fourth areas for storing the first reserved information, counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 and The same value will be stored. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, each counter C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol being executed and held by the main control device 110, the execution information storage area 223g and the first hold It is stored in the information storage area 223e.

Furthermore, in the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, the respective counters C1 to C3, CK, The same value as CS1 will be stored. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, each of the counters C1 to C3, CK, CS1 corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect being executed and held by the main control device 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223g and the second 2 is stored in the pending information storage area 223f.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when performing a look-ahead process (not shown), the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d Grasp the number of variable effects (number of pending balls). Then, based on the number of pending balls, the first to fourth areas storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas storing the second pending information, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the stored area are read in advance, and whether or not a big hit will be achieved in the variable performance, the variable time, and the like are determined. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "0", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 1 time and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first area for storing the first reserved information are read ahead and determined. I do. Also, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "4", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the second special symbol is 4 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3, CK, CS1 are read ahead for the second reservation information storage fourth area. , make a decision.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first reservation information storage area 223e and the second reservation information storage area 223f, and the fluctuation of the first special design and the second special design reserved by the main control device 110 Since each counter C1-C3, CK, CS1 corresponding to the effect is also stored in the sound lamp control device 113, each counter C1-C3 stored in the first suspension information storage area 223e and the second suspension information storage area 223f , CK, and CS1, the pre-reading process can be executed by the audio ramp controller 113. FIG. That is, when the suspended first special symbol or/and the second special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable production, and execution of various productions can be determined.

It should be noted that the first pending information storage area 223e or second pending information storage area 223f, and the above-described shift processing in the execution information storage area 223g, special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 variation Number of pending balls when pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command are received (update based on reception of special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command Based on the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d before the Data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the suspended variable performance among the four areas.

For example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223e Assume that data is stored in the (first reservation information storage first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first pending information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the first pending information The data in the third storage area is shifted to the second area for storing the first pending information, and the data in the fourth area for storing the first pending information is shifted to the third area for storing the first pending information.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "2", the first area for storing the first reserved information The data is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effect is not reserved, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. , the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, the data in the first to fourth areas for storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information are stored in areas with an area number smaller by 1 (execution information storage area 223g, Alternatively, it may be configured to shift to the first pending information storage first to third areas or the second pending information storage first to third areas. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first reserved information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second reserved information. Therefore, program creation can be facilitated.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 181 to 193. FIG. The difference between each control process of the sixth embodiment and each control process of the third embodiment is mainly that the control related to the small winning game is added and the processing contents of the time saving counting process are changed. It is a point.

First, with reference to FIG. 181, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment. The difference between the timer interrupt processing of the sixth embodiment and the timer interrupt processing of the third embodiment is mainly that update processing of the small hit type counter CK is added.

In the timer interrupt process of the sixth embodiment, when the process of S206 is finished, then the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, the normal figure per counter C4 and the small hit type The counter CK is updated (S251). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the normal figure per counter C4 and the small hit type counter CK are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When reaching a value ("9999," "99," "99," "9," "99," and "99," respectively in the sixth embodiment), they are cleared to "0." In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure per counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the general figure per counter C4 is read as an initial value, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal pattern per counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 and CK are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203, and the process proceeds to S208.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 182, the starting winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 181) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. do. FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S208) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the starting winning process (S208) of the sixth embodiment and the starting winning process (S208) of the third embodiment is mainly that a process related to the small hit type counter CK is added.

In the starting winning process (S208) of the sixth embodiment, when the process of S306 or S310 is finished, then the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the small hit type counter CK are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 167) and stored in each reserved ball storage area. That is, among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d set as the storage destination in S306, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a The random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 and the variation type counter storage area 203d4 are reserved (stored) (S351).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S306 based on the winning of the first starting port 64, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S305 If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved first area. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Similarly, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S310 based on the winning of the second starting port 71, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the processing of S309 is If it is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and CK are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the second reservation third area, if the value of the second reservation ball number counter 203b after addition is "4", in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3, respectively , CS1, and CK are reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition by the process of S305 (operational reserved ball number N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the process of S306, In order to transmit the first reserved ball number command including the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S352). In addition, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the process of S309 (number of activated ball N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the process of S310, and the jackpot In order to transmit the second pending ball number command including each value of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the small hit type counter CK to the sound lamp control device 113, the second pending ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S352). As a result, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 181) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. . When the process of S352 is finished, the start winning process (S208) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 181).

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the special figure fluctuation processing (S210), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 181) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the special figure variation processing (S210) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the special figure variation processing (S210) of the sixth embodiment and the special figure variation processing (S210) of the third embodiment is mainly that processing related to small winning games is added.

In the special figure variation process (S210) of the sixth embodiment, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S501: No), then whether the dynamic display of the second special symbol is in the small hit It is determined whether or not (S551). During the small hit, during the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the small hit, and a predetermined time before the start of the small hit game (that is, the opening of the small hit) and during a predetermined time after the end of the small winning game (that is, the ending of the small winning).

As a result of the determination in S551, when it is determined that the small winning is not in progress (S551: No), the process proceeds to S502. On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that it is in the middle of a small hit (S551: Yes), the special figure variation process (S210) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 181).

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the variation start process (S510), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S510) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the variation start process (S510) of the sixth embodiment and the variation start process (S510) of the third embodiment is mainly that the process of determining whether the special symbol is in a high probability state is deleted. Another point is that a process for determining whether or not the small winning game is won is added.

In the variation start process (S510) of the sixth embodiment, first, a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot is made based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a. (Acceptance determination) processing is performed (S5151).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the set probability value. is determined based on As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot random numbers are defined such that the jackpot probability is 101/10000 when the set value is "1" and 105/10000 when the set value is "3".

In the process of S5151, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. determine that there is As a result of the process of S5151, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S5151: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 169(a) or FIG. 169(b)), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S5152).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds. "Time reduction A" that shifts to "Time reduction state", "Time reduction B" that shifts to "High probability time reduction state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds, or " It is determined whether it is “time saving C” that shifts to “normal figure high probability time shortening state”. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e is determined by the reserved ball execution area 203f. If the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown) of , and the data is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, The jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 169(a)). In addition, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special The jackpot type is determined based on the FIG. 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 169(b)).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5153), and the process proceeds to S5159. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. A dynamic time (variation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from the selected performance mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 and 161) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each effect mode set in the process of S5152, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

On the other hand, in the process of S5151, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (S5151: No), then the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the big hit random number table 202a A small hit lottery (hit/fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a small hit is performed (S5154).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, whether or not the second special symbols are dynamically displayed is set to be the same for all probability setting values. Specifically, in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2, the small hit random value is defined so that the small hit probability is 1579/10000 in all settings.

In the process of S5154, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the small hit random number values defined in the big hit random number table 202a, and if they match, It is determined that it is a small hit of the second special symbol. As a result of the processing of S5154, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S5154: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the small hit type table 202k (see FIG. 170) Based on, the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S5155).

In this process, according to the small hit type table 202k, the small hit type associated with the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, the "small hit A" or "Small hit B", "Time reduction D" that shifts to "Normal high probability time reduction state" after the maximum number of rounds is 3 rounds, or "Normal high probability time reduction" after the maximum number of rounds is 3 rounds "Time saving E" to shift to "state", "Time saving F" to shift to "Normal figure high probability time reduction state" after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, or "Normal figure" after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 9 rounds It is determined whether it is "time saving G" that shifts to "high probability time shortening state". Then, based on the discriminated small hit type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the small hit in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e is determined by the reserved ball execution area 203f. If the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown), and the data is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, a random value that will be a small hit is set in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. Since the first special symbol cannot win the small prize, the setting process of the display mode at the time of the small prize is not performed. On the other hand, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, The small hit type is determined based on the special figure 2 small hit type table 202k (see FIG. 170).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S5156), and the process proceeds to S5159. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f A dynamic time (variation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from the selected performance mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of this small hit, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 and 161) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the small hit.

Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each effect mode set in the process of S5155, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

On the other hand, in the process of S5154, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (S5154: No), the result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of loss is set (S5157). In the process of S5157, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the retained ball execution area 203f and the first retained ball number counter are set. Based on the value of 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 include a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, and a "super reach" effect mode. ' effect mode, 'special reach' effect mode, or 'special fluctuation' effect mode is set. In the sixth embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode differs according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S5158), and the process proceeds to S5159. In the process of S5158, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S5157, it corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f. Select the attached variation pattern. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In this way, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small win, and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are performed by the same random number value C3, By judging and determining with the same judging program using CS1 and CK, the program can be shared and the number of development man-hours can be reduced at the time of development.

In the processing of S5159, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processing of S5153, S5156 and S5158, the display control device 114 is notified of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the audio ramp control device 113. A variation pattern command is set (S5159).

Specifically, for example, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is the jackpot type "time saving A", and the "60 seconds" "super reach" variation pattern is If it is selected, the variation pattern command (i.e., the special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the "super reach" of the first special symbol, jackpot, "time saving A", "60 seconds", hereinafter, related to the first special symbol The variation pattern command may be referred to as "special figure 1 variation pattern command".) is set. Also, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, if the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are lost, and the "60 seconds" "super reach" fluctuation pattern is selected, the second special symbol, losing, Variation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "60 seconds" (ie, special figure 2 variation pattern command. Hereinafter, the variation pattern command related to the second special symbol may be referred to as "special figure 2 variation pattern command". ) is set.

In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting together the propriety of the variable effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 can achieve the effect mode including the propriety. By grasping the contents of and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect in more detail based on the information.

Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the processing of S5152, S5155 or S5157 is set (S5160), and S5153, S5156 or S5158 A game state command indicating a game state in which the variation pattern set in the process is executed is set (S5161), and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 183).

Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the content of the jackpot is the jackpot type “time saving A”, a specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “7 ” symbol etc.) is not specified, and a stop type command indicating that it is the first special symbol “time saving A” is set. Also, if the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special pattern, and the content of the jackpot is the jackpot type "time saving C", the specific stop mode of the third pattern (for example, "3" pattern, etc.) Without specifying, the stop type command indicating that it is the second special symbol "time saving C" (that is, the special figure 2 stop type command.Hereafter, the stop type command related to the second special symbol is referred to as the "special figure 2 stop type may be referred to as "command").

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the "super reach" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) Without specifying, set a special figure 1 stop type command indicating that it is a "super reach" production mode at the time of losing. In addition, if the big hit is not won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737" etc.) is specified. Instead, set a special figure 2 stop type command indicating that it is a "normal reach" production mode at the time of losing. Furthermore, if the big hit is not won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected, a specific third symbol stop mode (for example, "258" Etc.) is not specified, and sets a special figure 2 stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach (long)" production mode at the time of losing.

Thus, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the propriety, Based on this information, it is possible to determine the result of stopping the variable presentation in more detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S201 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 181) executed next, these commands are It is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the audio ramp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based thereon, and transmits them to the display control device 114 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern corresponding to the "special variation 3" presentation mode or the "special variation 4" presentation mode, and determines whether the "special variation 3" presentation mode or If it is a variation pattern corresponding to the "special variation 4" production mode, it is a variation production of a specific number of rotations (that is, the 100th or 200th rotation) in the low probability state of the special symbol, so the sub relief counter 223k A value setting process is performed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 196).

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the variation stop processing (S513) which is one processing of the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 183) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stopping process (S513) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the fluctuation stop processing (S513) of the sixth embodiment and the fluctuation stop processing (S513) of the third embodiment is mainly that the processing related to the high probability state of the special symbol is deleted.

In the fluctuation stop processing (S513) of the sixth embodiment, when the processing of S5204 is completed, it is then determined whether it is a "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" ( S5251), when it is determined that it is "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" (S5251: Yes), time reduction counting processing is executed (S5208).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5251, if it is determined that it is not "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" (S5251: No) Since the judgment process of the time saving end condition is not performed, S5208 Skip the process and move to S5209.

Here, with reference to FIG. 186, the time saving counting process (S5208), which is one process of the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 185) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the time saving counting process (S5208) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the time saving counting process (S5208) of the sixth embodiment and the time saving counting process (S5208) of the third embodiment is mainly that a process related to a small winning game is added.

In the time saving counting process (S5208) of the sixth embodiment, in the process of S5402, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203o is a value greater than "0" (S5402: Yes), then the special symbol that has stopped It is determined whether or not the dynamic display has won the small winning game (S5451). As a result of the determination, if the small winning game is won (S5451: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small winning time saving counter 203r (S5452), and then the subtracted value of the small winning time saving counter 203r is from "0". It is determined whether or not the value is large (S5453). As a result of the determination, if the value of the small winning time saving counter 203r is a value larger than "0" (S5453: Yes), the end condition of the "time saving function" is not satisfied, so this time saving counting process (S5208) ends and returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 185). In this way, when the time-saving end condition can be satisfied when one of the plurality of conditions of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the number of small hits that can appear in the fluctuation display of the special symbol is satisfied, the method that can occur frequently. By determining the time-saving end condition (here, the number of fluctuations in special symbols) first, it is possible to avoid complicated processing such as first executing the time-saving end condition that is difficult to appear frequently, and reduce the processing burden. Since it becomes unnecessary to combine and judge each time-saving end conditions even if it is a case where each time-saving end conditions are materialized simultaneously, it can control with consistency. In addition, you may comprise so that the time-saving end condition of the direction which is easy to be satisfied may be determined first instead of the time-saving end condition of the direction which can appear frequently.

On the other hand, in the process of S5453, if it is determined that the value of the small winning time saving counter 203r is not greater than "0", that is, if it is determined that it is less than "0" (S5453: No), "time saving Since the end condition of "function" is satisfied, the process proceeds to S5403.

Here, referring to FIG. 187, the relief arrival counting process (S5209), which is one process of the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 185) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the relief arrival counting process (S5209) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the relief arrival counting process (S5209) of the sixth embodiment and the relief arrival counting process (S5209) of the third embodiment is mainly that the process of setting the value of the small winning time saving counter 203r is added. It is a point.

In the relief arrival count process (S5209) of the sixth embodiment, in the process of S5503, if the value of the relief counter 203p added in the process of S5502 is not less than "250", that is, the value of the relief counter 203p is "250". "If it is more than (S5503: No), since the relief condition is established, set "99" to the value of the time saving counter 203o (S5551), set "99" to the value of the small winning time saving counter 203r (S5552), the process proceeds to S5505. In this way, in the "ordinary low probability time reduction state" that shifts when the relief condition is satisfied, like the "normal high probability time reduction state", the number of small hits is one and the "normal high probability In order not to end the ``time shortening state'', the ``normal pattern high probability time shortening state'' is maintained even when a small winning game is performed a plurality of times in the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state''. It is As a result, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" which is a remedy for players who have not won a jackpot for a long time, an event (for example, Even when the player leaves the seat due to ball clogging, poor physical condition, etc., the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' can be maintained, and generous relief can be provided to the player. In addition, two or more small hit types may be provided, and the end condition of the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" may be changed depending on the number of winning times of each small hit type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the winning process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 181) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the winning process (S203) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the winning process (S203) of the sixth embodiment and the winning process (S203) of the third embodiment is mainly that a process related to a small winning game is added.

This winning process (S203) sets the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) according to the type of the jackpot when a jackpot of each special symbol occurs, and set the opening time of Then, in the case of the jackpot state (game), a jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed, and the jackpot setting the end of the jackpot state at the timing when the jackpot state ends. End processing (S614) is executed.

Also, in this winning process (S203), when a small win of the second special symbol occurs, the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened (the number of rounds) is set according to the small winning, and the variable winning device 65 is opened. set the time. Then, in the case of the small winning state (game), a small winning opening/closing control process (S665) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed, and the small winning state ends at the timing when the small winning state ends. A small hit end process (S667) for setting is executed.

Furthermore, in this winning process (S203), when the ball passes through a specific area that can be opened during a small winning game, the variable winning device 65 (large winning opening) is selected according to the type of big winning that occurs along with the passage of the ball. The number of opening times (number of rounds) is set, and the opening time of the variable winning device 65 is set. Then, in the case of the jackpot state (game) based on passing through the specific area, the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) for opening or closing the variable prize winning device 65 is executed as in the case of the jackpot with the special symbol, and the jackpot state is reached. is completed, a jackpot end process (S614) for setting the end of the jackpot state is executed.

In the winning process (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a big win has been won in any dynamic display of special symbols (S651). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is won (S651: Yes), in order to perform the jackpot game, first, the "time saving function" during the jackpot game is disabled, and the time saving high is cleared to clear whether the relief condition is satisfied. The definite flag 203n, the time saving low definite flag 203m and the relief set flag 203q are set to OFF (S652), and then the values of the time saving counter 203o and the relief counter 203p are cleared to "0" (S653). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type (or small hit type) is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S654).

Then, in order to transmit a jackpot opening command indicating the start of the jackpot to the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S655). Next, the opening time (for example, "30 seconds" or "10 seconds") corresponding to the big hit type (or small hit type) is set (S656), and the process proceeds to S664. Thereby, the jackpot opening command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 181) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

The round counter described above is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), controls the opening of the variable winning device 65 according to the jackpot game, and the round Decrease the value of the counter by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot in progress is terminated.

In the process of S651, if it is determined that the big win has not been won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols (S651: No), then it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area in the variable winning device 65. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203s is turned on (S657). As a result of the determination, if the big hit flag 203s is turned on (S657: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the specific area in the variable prize winning device 65 during the small win game, so first, the big hit flag 203s is set to off. Then (S658), the process proceeds to S652, and the same process as in the case of a big hit with a special symbol is performed. In this case, processing (S654) etc. of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the small hit type to the round counter is performed.

By configuring in this way, in addition to winning a big win in the dynamic display of special symbols, a small win is won and the ball is placed in a specific area with different release timings according to the type of small win during the small win game. , a jackpot game equivalent to the dynamic display of special symbols can be performed. Further, by making it different whether or not the ball can pass through the specific area depending on the kind of small win, it is possible to make different whether or not a big win can occur depending on the kind of small win. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variations in which the jackpot game is awarded and improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S657, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203s is not turned on (S657: No), then it is determined whether or not a small win is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S659). . As a result of the determination, if a small win is won (S659: Yes), a winning opening (that is, the variable winning device 65) that is opened according to the special symbol that wins the small win is set in order to perform a small win game. At the same time, the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 corresponding to the type of small win is set in an opening counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S660).

Then, in order to transmit a small winning opening command indicating that a small winning is started to the sound lamp control device 113, the small winning opening command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S661), Next, the opening time (for example, "0.1 second") for the small win is set (S662). Then, a winning counter (not shown) is set to "10" (S663), and the process proceeds to S664. Thereby, a small hit opening command is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 181) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

It should be noted that the above-described open counter is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the open counter, and when the value is set in the open counter (that is, "1" or more), while controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65 according to the small winning game, Decrease the value of the open counter by 1. Then, when the value of the open counter becomes "0", the small prize being executed is terminated.

Further, the winning counter described above is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the winning counter, and when the value of the winning counter is set (that is, "1" or more), opens and controls the variable winning device 65 according to the big win game or the small win game. At the same time, every time a ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 65c, the value of the winning counter is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the winning counter becomes "0", one round of the big winning game or the small winning game being executed is ended.

In the process of S664, it is determined whether or not the small winning is in progress (S664). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small winning is in progress (S664: Yes), a small winning opening/closing control process for controlling opening/closing of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S665).

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the small win opening/closing control process (S665), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the small winning opening/closing control process (S665) of the sixth embodiment.

In the small winning opening/closing control process (S665) of the sixth embodiment, the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed based on the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened (that is, the opening counter) set in the winning processing (S203). do.

In this small hit opening/closing control process (S665), first, it is determined whether or not the value of an open counter (not shown) is greater than "0" (S6201). As a result of determination, if the value of the open counter is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the open counter is less than or equal to "0" (S6201: No), the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened during the small winning game is Since it does not remain, this small hit opening/closing control process (S665) is ended, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 188).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S6201, if the value of the open counter is greater than "0" (S6201: Yes), then the opening time set in S662 of the winning process (S203), or the small winning open It is determined whether or not the interval time set based on the table 202m has passed (S6202). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small hit has not passed (S6202: No), it is not the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so the processing of S6203 to S6205 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6206. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small hit has passed (S6202: Yes), it is the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so first, the variable winning device according to the special symbol that hit the small 65 open setting is performed (S6203). Then, it sets the opening time of 1 in the variable winning device 65 (S6204), then generates a large winning opening opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened, A ring buffer is set (S6205), and the process proceeds to S6206.

In the processing of S6206, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small hit (S6206). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device 65 is not open at the time of the small win (S6206: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open at the time of the small win, but during the opening time or the interval time. By skipping the processing of S6207 and S6208, this small winning opening/closing control processing (S665) is terminated, and the processing returns to the winning processing (see FIG. 188). On the other hand, in the process of S6206, when it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small hit (S6206: Yes), first, the specific area device opening/closing control process for executing the opening/closing control of the specific area is performed. (S6207).

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, a specific area device opening/closing control process (S6207), which is one process of the small winning opening/closing control process (S6014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. do. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the specific area device open/close control process (S6207) of the sixth embodiment.

In the specific area device opening/closing control process (S6207) of the sixth embodiment, the opening/closing control of the specific area during the small hit game is performed.

In this specific area device opening/closing control process (S6207), first, it is determined whether or not the specific area is open, that is, whether or not the specific area solenoid 65e is turned on (S6301). As a result of the determination, if the specific area is not opened, that is, if the specific area solenoid 65e is turned off (S6301: No), then it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the specific area is satisfied. It is determined whether or not "four seconds" have passed since the winning device 65 was first opened (S6302). As a result of determination, when the conditions for opening the specific area are established, that is, at the timing when "4 seconds" have passed since the variable winning device 65 was first opened (S6302: Yes), the specific area solenoid 65e is turned on from off. Then, the specific area is set to be released (S6303), and the process proceeds to S6304.

In the process of S6301, if it is determined that the specific area is open, that is, if the specific area solenoid 65e is turned on (S6301: Yes), the processes of S6302 and S6303 are skipped and the process is performed. to S6304. In addition, in the process of S6302, if the specific area open condition is not satisfied (S6302: No), the processes of S6303 to S6305 are skipped, the specific area device open/close control process (S6207) is terminated, and the Returning to the hit opening/closing control process (see FIG. 189).

In the process of S6304, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific area is satisfied, that is, when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 65f, or when the specific area is opened (for example, "5 seconds" from the opening of the specific area). has passed (S6304: Yes), it is determined that the closing condition for the specific area is satisfied, and the specific area solenoid 65e is set from on to off to close the specific area. (S6305), to end the specific area device opening and closing control processing (S6207), and return to the small hit opening and closing control processing (see FIG. 189).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S6304, if the closing condition for the specific area is not satisfied, that is, if the opening time for the specific area (for example, "5 seconds" after opening the specific area) has not elapsed (S6304: No ), skipping the processing of S6305, ending this specific area device opening and closing control processing (S6207), returning to the small winning opening and closing control processing (see FIG. 189).

In this way, the opening and closing control processing of the specific area is performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition during the small winning game, and the specific area is opened during the small winning game so that the ball can pass through, thereby achieving a big winning based on the small winning game. A game can be generated.

Returning to FIG. 189, the description continues. After the specific area device opening/closing control processing of S6207, in order to determine the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 that is open, small winning large winning opening opening processing is performed (S6308), and this small winning opening/closing control processing (S665 ) and return to the winning process (see FIG. 188).

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, in the sixth embodiment, the process during the opening of the big winning opening at the time of the small winning which is one process of the small winning opening/closing control process (S665) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 ( S6208) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the processing during opening of the big winning opening at the time of small winning (S6208) of the sixth embodiment.

In the processing (S6208) during the opening of the small winning opening at the time of the sixth embodiment, a processing for determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In this small winning big winning opening open process (S6208), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S6204 of the small winning opening/closing control process (S665) has passed. (S6401). As a result of determination, if it is not the timing when the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed (S6401: No), then whether the big winning opening switch 65c is turned on, that is, whether the ball enters the variable winning device 65 It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (S6402).

In the processing of S6402, if the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 65c and the ball has entered the variable winning device 65 (S6402: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6403), then 1 It is determined whether or not the subtracted winning counter value is greater than "0" (S6404). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6404: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", 10 or more balls enter the variable winning device 65 and a small win is achieved. Since the game end condition (condition for closing the variable winning device 65) is met, the process proceeds to S6405 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

In the closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6405, first, the closing setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6405), and then a big winning indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been closed to the sound lamp control device 113. A mouth closing command is set (S6406), and the process proceeds to S6407. It should be noted that the large winning opening closing command set in the process of S6406 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 181). ) to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Next, in the processing of S6407, since the end condition of the small winning game is established, the value of the opening counter is cleared to "0" (S6407), and the processing during opening of the large winning opening during the small winning (S6208) is terminated. , Returns to the small hit opening and closing control process (see FIG. 189).

In the processing of S6402, if it is determined that the big winning opening switch 65c is not turned on (S6402: No), then it is determined whether or not the specific area switch 65f is turned on (S6408). As a result of the determination, if the specific area switch 65f is turned on (S6408: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the specific area while the specific area is open during the small winning game, so the big winning game is generated after the small winning game. Therefore, the big hit flag 203s is set to ON (S6409), and this small win time big winning opening opening process (S6208) is ended, and the process returns to the small win opening/closing control process (see FIG. 189). On the other hand, in the process of S6408, if it is determined that the specific area switch 65f is not turned on (S6408: No), the process of S6409 is skipped, and the process during opening of the big winning opening during the small hit (S6408) is executed. It ends and returns to the small hit opening/closing control process (see FIG. 189).

Thus, during the small winning game, based on the ball passing through the specific area at the timing when the specific area is opened, the big winning game can be generated after the small winning game, and the big winning game is awarded. can be enriched and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the process of S6401, when it is determined that the opening time of the variable winning device 65 1 has elapsed (S6401: Yes), the closing condition for opening the variable winning device 65 1 is established, and the variable winning in the opening Since it is time to close the device 65, the process proceeds to S6410 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

In the process of S6410, in order to close the open variable winning device 65, the large winning opening solenoid 65b is turned off from on to set the closing of the variable winning device 65 (S6410). On the other hand, a large winning opening closing command indicating the end of opening one of the variable winning devices 65 is set (S6411). The large winning opening closing command set in the process of S6411 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 181) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Inside, it is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the large winning opening closing command, it executes an effect indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been closed. In addition, since the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65 in the small winning game is a short time (opening "0.1 seconds" and closing "1.2 seconds"), the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a large winning opening closing command may be configured not to execute the effect associated with the opening and closing of one of the variable prize winning devices 65, even when is received.

After the processing of S6411, since the opening of 1 of the variable winning device 65 has been completed, the value of the open counter is subtracted by 1 (S6412), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening at the time of small winning (S6208) is completed. Then, it returns to the small hit opening/closing control process (see FIG. 189). As a result, during the small winning game, the variable winning device 65 can be opened by the number of opening times set to the value of the opening counter during one round.

Returning to the winning process (S203) in FIG. 188, the description is continued. After the end of the small hit opening/closing control process (see FIG. 189) of S665, it is then determined whether or not the value of the open counter is greater than "0" (S666). As a result of determination, if the value of the open counter is greater than "0" (S666: Yes), in order to continue the small winning, the processing of S667, which is the end setting processing of the small winning, is skipped, and this winning processing (S203 ).

On the other hand, in the process of S666, if the value of the open counter is not greater than "0" (S666: No), that is, if the value of the open counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since all the opening operations have been completed, a small winning ending process is performed to end the small winning state (S667), and this winning process (S203) ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 192, small winning end processing (S667), which is one processing of winning processing (S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing small winning end processing (S667) of the sixth embodiment.

In this small winning end processing (S667), first, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S6501), and then, when the specific area is opened, the closing process of the specific area is set (S6502). Then, a small winning end setting process for executing various processes at the end of the small winning is performed (S6503), this small winning ending process (S667) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 188).

Returning to FIG. 188, the description continues. In the processing of S664, if it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (S664: No), then it is determined whether or not the big winning is in progress (S668). As a result of determination, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S668: Yes), a jackpot opening/closing control process for controlling the opening/closing of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S612), and the process proceeds to S669.

Note that the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) of the sixth embodiment is the same as the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) of the third embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S669, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S669), and if the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S669: Yes), the jackpot state continues. Therefore, the process of S614, which is the big hit end setting process, is skipped, and this winning process (S203) ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S669, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S669: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 in this jackpot Since all the opening actions have been completed, a jackpot ending process is performed to end the jackpot state (S614), and the winning process (S203) is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 193, the jackpot ending process (S614), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (S614) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the jackpot end processing (S614) of the sixth embodiment and the jackpot end processing (S614) of the third embodiment is mainly that the processing for determining the jackpot type is deleted, and the time saving counter 203o It is the point that the value to set is changed, and the process of setting a value to the small winning time saving counter 203r is added.

In the jackpot end processing (S614) of the sixth embodiment, first, the time saving high accuracy flag 203n is turned on (S6103), "99" is set to the time saving counter 203o (S6151), and "1" is set to the small winning time saving counter 203r. ' is set (S6152), and the process proceeds to S6107.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 194 to 197, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. The main difference between each control process in the audio ramp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment and each control process in the audio ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment is that a process for updating the consistency flag 223n is added. and the addition of a process of discriminating the consistency flag 223n and updating the sub-relief counter display flag 223j.

First, with reference to FIG. 194, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing startup processing of the sixth embodiment. The main difference between the startup process of the sixth embodiment and the startup process of the third embodiment is that a process of updating the consistency flag 223n is added.

In the startup process of the sixth embodiment, after the process of S1052 is completed, the consistency flag 223n is set to OFF (S1071), and the process proceeds to S1011.

By configuring in this way, the sound lamp control device 113, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device It is possible to determine whether or not the value of the sub-relief counter 223k held in the RAM 223 of 113 is inconsistent with the value of the sub-relief counter 223k. (See FIG. 196 to be described later).

Next, referring to FIG. 195, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing command determination processing (S1111) of the sixth embodiment. The main difference between the command determination processing (S1111) of the sixth embodiment and the command determination processing (S1111) of the third embodiment is that processing for updating the consistency flag 223n is added.

In the command determination process (S1111) of the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1271 that the RAM initialization command has been received (S1271: Yes), the data in the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, the consistency flag 223n is set to ON (S1281), and the process proceeds to S1272.

With this configuration, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is on, the consistency flag 223n is set to on, and the relief counter display 89 can be displayed immediately.

Next, referring to FIG. 196, the relief counter display process (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing the relief counter display process (S1317) of the sixth embodiment. The main differences between the relief counter display processing (S1317) of the sixth embodiment and the relief counter display processing (S1317) of the third embodiment are that processing for determining the consistency flag 223n is added, The difference is that processing for determining the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 is added.

In the relief counter display process (S1317) of the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the sub relief counter display flag 223j is turned on (S1471), and if the sub relief counter display flag 223j is not turned on (S1471 : No), then it is determined whether or not the consistency flag 223n is turned on (S1472).

As a result of the determination in S1472, if the consistency flag 223n is turned on (S1472: Yes), the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 are held. Since the state is consistent with the value of the sub relief counter 223k, next, it is determined whether or not the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is the "normal game state" (S1473), If the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is the "normal game state" (S1473: Yes), then the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is "normal game high probability". It is determined whether or not it is in the "time reduction state" (S1474).

In the process of S1474, when it is determined that the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" (S1474: Yes), the variable effect to be executed this time is " Since it is a variable effect immediately after shifting from "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" to "normal game state", the process proceeds to S1480 in order to display the relief counter display 89.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1472, if the consistency flag 223n is not turned on (S1472: No), the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the value in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 Since there is no consistency with the value of the retained sub-relief counter 223k, it is then determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variation presentation to be executed this time is the "special variation 3" presentation mode (S1475), and is executed this time. If the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed is the "special variation 3" performance mode (S1475: Yes), the variation performance to be executed this time is the initial state, the RAM clear state, or the 100th rotation variation performance after the jackpot game. That is, since it is the 100th rotation variation effect in the low probability state of the special symbol, the sub-relief counter 223k is set to "100" (S1476), and the process proceeds to S1479.

In the process of S1475, if it is determined that the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed this time is not the “special variation 3” performance mode (S1475: No), then the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed this time is “special variation 4 ' effect mode (S1477), and if the variation pattern of the variable effect to be executed this time is the "special change 4" effect mode (S1477: Yes), the variable effect to be executed this time is the initial state, Since it is the 200th variation performance in the RAM clear state or after the jackpot game, that is, the 200th variation performance in the low probability state of the special symbol, "200" is set to the sub-relief counter 223k (S1478) and processed. to S1479.

In the processing of S1479, the consistency between the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the value of the sub relief counter 223k held in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 is determined by the processing of S1476 or S1478. Since the consistency flag 223n is set to ON (S1479), the process proceeds to S1480.

In the process of S1480, the sub relief counter display flag 223j is set to ON (S1480), and the process proceeds to S1485.

On the other hand, in the process of S1471, if it is determined that the sub relief counter display flag 223j is turned on (S1471: Yes), then the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i (S1481), and if the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" (S1481: Yes), then , determines whether or not the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is the "normal game state" (S1482).

As a result of determination in S1482, if the game state stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h is "normal game state" (S1482: Yes), the variable effect executed this time is changed from "normal game state" to "normal game state". Since it will be a variable effect immediately after shifting to the "low probability time shortening state", the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is set to off (S1483) to hide the relief counter display 89, and the sub-relief counter 223k is set (S1484), and the process proceeds to S1485.

Also, as a result of the determination in S1473, if the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is not the "normal game state" (S1473: No), as a result of the determination in S1474, it is stored in the previous variable game state storage area 223h. If the played game state is not the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" (S1474: No), as a result of the determination of S1477, if the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed this time is not the "special variation 4" performance mode (S1477: No), as a result of the determination of S1481, if the game state stored in the current variable game state storage area 223i is not "normal pattern low probability time shortened state" (S1481: No), or as a result of the determination of S1482, the previous change Even if the game state stored in the game state storage area 223h is not the "normal game state" (S1482: No), the process proceeds to S1485.

In the processing of S1485, 1 is added to the value of the sub-relief counter 223k (S1485), then it is determined whether or not the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is turned on (S1486), and the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is turned on. If so (S1486: Yes), a display command for the sub-relief counter 223k is set (S1487), the relief counter display processing (S1317) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect processing (FIG. 140).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1486, if the sub-relief counter display flag 223j is not turned on (S1486: No), the relief counter display 89 is not displayed. (S1317) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (FIG. 140).

By configuring in this way, if a power failure or the like occurs during the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and the power is cut off, and the consistency flag 223n is not set to off, the "normal pattern high probability time A relief counter display 89 can be displayed at the timing of shifting from the "shortened state" to the "normal game state". In addition, if a power failure or the like occurs during the "normal game high probability time reduction state" or during the "normal game state" and the power is cut off, and the consistency flag 223n is set to off, after the power is restored The relief counter display 89 is hidden, and the variation pattern command of the ``special variation 3'' presentation mode of the 100th rotation from the jackpot game or the ``special variation 4'' presentation mode of the 200th rotation from the jackpot game is controlled by voice lamp. Upon receipt by device 113, relief counter display 89 can be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the hit effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing the winning effect processing (S1105) of the sixth embodiment. The main difference between the winning effect processing (S1105) of the sixth embodiment and the winning effect processing (S1105) of the third embodiment is that update processing of the consistency flag 223n is added.

In the hit effect process (S1105) of the sixth embodiment, after the process of S1503 is completed, the consistency flag 223n is set to ON (S1571), and the process proceeds to S1504.

By configuring in this way, a power failure or the like occurs and the power supply is cut off, the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 is reset, and the relief counter 203p in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 Even if the sub-relief counter 223k in the RAM 223 is not consistent with the sub-relief counter 223k in the RAM 223 and the relief counter display 89 cannot be displayed, the relief counter 203p and the sub-relief counter 203p and the sub-relief counter 203p can be obtained by winning one of the jackpots. All the values of the counter 223k are cleared to "0" (see S653 in FIG. 188 and S1503 in FIG. 197), and the relief counter 203p and the sub relief counter 223k are matched. A relief counter display 89 can be displayed from the timing of shifting to the "normal game state" after the jackpot game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the consistency flag 223n determines whether the relief counter 203p in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the sub relief counter 223k in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 By holding the consistency information, it is possible to determine whether or not the relief counter display 89 can be displayed when the "ordinary figure high probability time reduction state" shifts to the "normal game state". In addition, a power failure or the like occurs and the power supply is cut off, and the relief counter 203p in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the sub-relief counter 223k in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 do not match. Even in the state where the consistency flag 223n is turned off, the values of the relief counter 203p and the sub-relief counter 223k are both cleared to "0" by winning one of the jackpots, Since the rescue counter 203p and the sub rescue counter 223k are matched, the rescue counter display 89 can be displayed from the timing of shifting to the "normal game state" after the jackpot game. Furthermore, a power failure or the like occurs and the power supply is cut off, and the relief counter 203p in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the sub-relief counter 223k in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 do not match. Even if the consistency flag 223n is turned off, the 100th or 200th variation pattern command in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, "special variation 3" production mode or "special variation 4" When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the effect mode), the relief counter display 89 can be displayed from the number of rotations above.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the number of times dynamic display of special symbols is executed is an unspecified number when the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" ends. If the power supply is not interrupted due to occurrence of the like, the relief counter display 89 can be displayed from the timing of shifting to the "normal game state". Also, even if the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, it is possible to win one of the jackpots or a specific number of rotations (in the sixth embodiment, the 100th rotation in a low probability state of special symbols or The relief counter display 89 can be displayed when either the 200th rotation is reached or the occurrence of either occurs. As a result, the data in the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 can be retained correctly without providing a backup function to the RAM 223, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since there is no need to send a command for the value of the relief counter 203p held in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, when the pachinko machine 10 staying in the ``normal game state'' is turned off at the end of the business hours of the game hall, and the power is turned on on the next business day without executing the RAM initialization process, the power is turned on. Although the relief counter display 89 is not displayed in the "normal game state" immediately after the execution of the process, the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed for a certain number of rotations, and the number of rotations at which a specific variation pattern can be selected is reached. , the rescue counter display 89 can be displayed normally. As a result, when the player plays the pachinko machine 10 at the start of business of the game hall, even if the relief counter display 89 is not displayed during the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the special symbols is performed for a fixed number of rotations. is executed to display the relief counter display 89, so that the number of rotations remaining until the relief condition is satisfied can be recognized. Then, when the game hall starts operating, the player who grasps this specification causes the pachinko machine 10 to run a fixed number of revolutions, displays the relief counter display 89, and displays the remaining number of revolutions until the relief condition is satisfied. If it is confirmed and the remaining number of rotations is small, the game can be continued until the relief condition is satisfied, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment has the same effects as those of the third to fifth embodiments due to the same configuration.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are only examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described embodiment, the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 as viewed from the front as the winning openings in which the ball fired in the right-handed game can win. On the other hand, in a game state in which a right-handed game is played by arranging a general prize-winning port 63 on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 as viewed from the front as a prize-winning port into which a ball fired in a right-handed game can win. It is configured so that a certain amount of balls (for example, 10 balls out of 100) can be won in the general prize winning port 63, and prize balls are given to the player other than the second start port 71 or the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game. It is configured so that it can be paid out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while suppressing the consumption of the player's own balls during a right-handed game.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, the termination condition of the "probability fluctuation state" is configured to be terminated by the number of execution times of dynamic display of special symbols (so-called ST type). On the other hand, when the next big win is won depending on the big win type (so-called loop type), or when a predetermined lottery result other than the big win is derived in the dynamic display of special symbols, the "probability fluctuation state" A pachinko machine (so-called falling type) that ends (so-called falling function) may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol is generated by selecting the jackpot type to which the "probability variation function" is provided. On the other hand, it may be configured to provide a so-called probability limiter function in which a jackpot type that does not generate a "variable probability function" is selected for each given number of times of a predetermined "variable probability function". Also, it may be configured to provide a so-called time-saving limiter function in which a jackpot type that does not generate a high-probability state of normal symbols is selected for each predetermined number of jackpots. Furthermore, when the variable probability limiter function is provided, it may be configured to provide a plurality of variable probability limit times, and when the time saving limiter function is provided, it may be configured to provide a plurality of time saving limit times. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described embodiment, the normal electronic part 72 and the variable winning device 65 are configured to be opened based on the winning of the normal symbol or the special symbol. On the other hand, a pachinko machine equipped with a passage opening for opening a movable accessory (so-called non-motorized accessory) blocking another winning opening by passing a ball may be used.

<Modification 5>
In the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a game state in which the "time saving function" is provided after the jackpot ends is generated. On the other hand, when a predetermined pattern (for example, a time-saving pattern) other than a jackpot (small hit) is derived in the dynamic display of special patterns, the transition to a state in which the "time-saving function" is given without going through the jackpot It may be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation to which the "time-saving function" is given and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) without winning the jackpot. It is configured such that when the game is played, a "time-saving function" is given without going through the jackpot (so-called ceiling function). On the other hand, the predetermined number of times may be counted separately for the number of cumulative executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of cumulative executions of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Also, the predetermined number of times may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification 7>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). On the other hand, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel (so-called special figure 12 simultaneous fluctuation), and each dynamic display is controlled. Alternatively, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the second special symbol (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation), and each dynamic display is controlled. Alternatively, dynamic display may be performed in order of winning (so-called winning order variation), and each dynamic display may be controlled.

<Modification 8>
In the above-described embodiment, as the termination condition of the "time saving function", it is configured to terminate based on the predetermined execution number of times of dynamic display of special symbols, the number of small hits, and the winning of a big hit. On the other hand, the "time saving function" may be terminated based on the derivation of the time saving end pattern different from the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the end condition of the prize assisting state, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the "time saving function" is enabled, the number of reserved balls (number of prizes) of special symbols is a predetermined number (for example, full reserve (i.e., 4), or a certain number of reserved reserves for full reserve (for example, , 2)) It may be configured to end the “time saving function” when it is stored, or when the number of times the normal electric role reaches a certain number of times, the “time saving function” ends It may be configured to Furthermore, a type may be provided for a small hit, and the "time saving state" may be terminated based on the number of times of a predetermined small hit type. Specifically, when the first number of times (for example, 5 times) is won in a predetermined small hit type, the "time saving state" ends, while the second number of times different from the first number in a specific small hit type (for example , 10 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a game property in which whether or not the ``time saving state'' ends depends on the number of winning times of each type of small win, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game. can be achieved.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiment, the value of the rescue counter display 89 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated at the start of dynamic display of each special symbol in the "normal game state". . On the other hand, it may be configured to be updated at the end of execution of the dynamic display of each special symbol or during variation.

<Modification 10>
In the above-described embodiment, it is constructed so that the winning is 70/100 in the low-probability state of the normal symbol, and the normal electric combination 72 can be moved. On the other hand, it may be constructed so that winning is not won in the low-probability state of normal symbols, but winning is only in the high-probability state of normal symbols (for example, 100% winning). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 71 due to the movement of the normal electric combination 72 in the low probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to reliably realize the game performance according to the game specifications.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is opened in the jackpot game. On the other hand, a plurality of winning openings that can be opened in the big winning game or the small winning game may be provided, and the plurality of winning openings may be opened according to the big winning type or the small winning type.

<Modification 12>
In the above embodiment, one type of variable display time of normal symbols is provided according to the game state. On the other hand, the variable display time of normal symbols may be selected by lottery from among a plurality of types of variable display times according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the variable display time of normal symbols is determined by lottery from "1 second", "3 seconds", "5 seconds", "10 seconds" or "30 seconds". do. By configuring in this way, in the "normal game state" in which the right-handed game is not encouraged, the right-handed game is played and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to perform variable display of the normal symbol, and according to the derivation timing. Even if the ball is shot toward the ordinary electric terminal 72 that can be opened by pressing, the opening timing of the second starting port 71 becomes plural, so that the winning of the second starting port 71 can be suppressed.

<Modification 13>
In the above embodiment, in the lottery for the first special symbol, the winning combination is selected from among the big wins and losses, and also in the lottery for the second special symbols, the winning combination is selected from among the big wins (, small wins) and the losses. It consists of On the other hand, a small win may be provided only in the lottery of the first special symbol, and a winning combination may be selected from among the big win, the small win or the loss, or only in the lottery of the second special symbol. may be provided, and a winning combination may be selected from a big hit, a small win, or a loss, or a winning combination may be selected from a big win or a loss without providing a small win in any special pattern lottery. Alternatively, a small win may be provided in any special symbol lottery, and a winning combination may be selected from among a big win, a small win, or a loss.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, the game state is changed (for example, from "probability fluctuation state" to "normal game state") according to the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. ing. On the other hand, it is possible to change the game state according to the number of executions of a predetermined effect other than the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, "ready-to-win display" or a specific effect based on winning a specific role). may be configured.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, the number of reserved balls is counted for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time and reach probability of each special symbol are changed for each number of reserved balls. On the other hand, it may be configured to change the variation time and the reach probability of each special symbol according to the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification 16>
In the sixth embodiment, the holding number table 202c is configured so that a specific stop pattern table 202d can be selected depending on the factory default state, the RAM clear state, or the number of revolutions after the jackpot game. On the other hand, even if it is configured so that the specific stop pattern table 202d can be selected at the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied (that is, the last dynamic display of the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state") good.

<Modification 17>
In the above embodiment, the relief counter display 89 is hidden in the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" etc. after the jackpot game, and the number of fluctuations of the special pattern that has been counted after the jackpot in the "normal game state" is reduced. configured to display. On the other hand, the relief counter display 89 may be displayed even in the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state"("probability fluctuation state") after the jackpot game. In this case, the relief counter display 89 in the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" or the like may be configured to be displayed in a manner different from the relief counter display 89 in the "normal game state". Specifically, for example, the relief counter display 89 in the "ordinary figure high probability time reduction state" etc. may be configured to be displayed in a display area smaller than the relief counter display 89 in the "normal game state", Only the number of times of change may be displayed without displaying the number of times of arrival, or the number of times of change may be displayed in a different color or character form. As a special display related to the content suggested to the player by the suggestive display capable of suggesting to the player the suggestive information regarding the transition of the game state of the present invention, only the display of the number of fluctuations related to the number of fluctuations/number of reaching the ceiling will be explained. However, for example, it is possible to display only the number of times of reaching the ceiling related to the number of fluctuations/number of times of reaching the ceiling, or the jackpot confirmation production related to the jackpot ending performance held during the jackpot ending production performed in the jackpot ending production may be performed during the jackpot round production. may be configured.

<Modification 18>
In the above-described embodiment, as a tallying means, the relief counter 203p tallies the number of special symbol fluctuation effects in the low probability state of special symbols from one to a maximum of 250 times, and the player can recognize the maximum number of tallies. It is visualized and configured. On the other hand, the rescue counter 203p is configured so that the number of special symbol fluctuation performances in the low probability state of the special symbol can be counted from 1 time to a maximum of 950 times, and the maximum total number of times is visualized so that the player can recognize it. Alternatively, each of the number counters 203a and 203b of each special pattern can count up the number of suspensions of variable performance of each special pattern from one to a maximum of four times, and the player recognizes the maximum number of counts. You can visualize it as you can.

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, it is configured such that the length of execution time of the variable effect can be easily selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Specifically, it is configured such that the closer to the maximum number of held balls, the shorter the variable time is likely to be selected, and the further away from the maximum number of held balls, the longer the variable time is likely to be selected. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the length of the execution time of the variable effect is easily selected according to the degree of attainment of the relief condition. Specifically, for example, it may be configured such that the closer to the number of times the relief condition is reached, the easier it is to select a longer variation time (for example, long variation, pseudo-continuous effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not the relief condition is satisfied, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be configured such that the closer to the number of times the relief condition is reached, the easier it is to select a short variation time (for example, a short variation, a decrease in the selection rate of the ready-to-win effect, etc.). By configuring in this way, as the relief condition approaches, the variable effect can be consumed at an accelerated rate. Interest can be improved.

<Modification 20>
In the above-described embodiment, when the variable performance is not executed for a predetermined period of time, the transition to the demonstration performance is performed, and various demonstration performances by characters or the like are executed on the third pattern display device 81, and liveliness is realized even in the state where the variable performance is not executed. are doing. On the other hand, shift to the demo screen in the right-handed game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state", "normal high probability time reduction state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state", etc.) In this case, the lighting state of the right-handed informing lamp 37c is maintained, but the right-handed suggestion display on the third symbol display device 81 may be reduced or restricted.

<Modification 21>
In the above embodiment, when it is determined that the game is not played by the player for a predetermined period (for example, the touch sensor is turned off), the third symbol display device 81, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 Equipped with a power saving function to reduce power consumption. On the other hand, the power saving function is exhibited in the right-handed game state (for example, "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state", etc.) (i.e., when shifting to the power saving mode), although the lighting state of the right-handed informing lamp 37c is maintained, the right-handed suggestion display in the third symbol display device 81 may be reduced or restricted. good. By configuring in this way, power consumption can be effectively reduced.

<Modification 22>
In the above-described embodiment, in a game state in which left-handed games are encouraged (that is, "normal game state"), when a ball is detected by the through gate 67 arranged on the right side of the game area, the right-handed player is immediately notified of prohibition. configured to run. On the other hand, after returning to the normal game after the power saving mode in which the power saving function is exhibited, until a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of right-handed games are detected (that is, a predetermined number of balls pass through the through gate 67). Until passing), the execution of the right-handed prohibition notification may be restricted, and when the predetermined number of right-handed games are detected after the power saving return, the right-handed prohibition notification may be started. After power saving is restored, it is immediately after the player starts playing a game, and the operation of the shooting handle 51 may be confused. Therefore, a player who is unfamiliar with the handle operation 51 immediately after starting a game may play an unintended right-handed game. There is a risk of losing interest and interrupting the game. Therefore, after the power saving mode in which the power saving function is exhibited, after returning to the normal game, until a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of right-handed games are detected (that is, a predetermined number of balls pass through the through gate 67 By restricting the execution of the right-handed prohibition notification, it is possible to suppress the player from losing interest, and to accurately perform the right-handed prohibition notification when an intentional right-handed game is played. , a suitable game environment can be realized. In addition, after the power saving mode in which the power saving function is exhibited, after returning to the normal game, until a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of right-handed games are detected (that is, a predetermined number of balls pass through the through gate 67 ) does not perform normal right-handed prohibition notification (e.g., loud volume notification, large display on liquid crystal, etc.), but simple right-handed prohibition notification (e.g., low volume notification, small display on liquid crystal, etc.) etc.).

<Modification 23>
In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined that the game is not played by the player for a predetermined period (for example, the touch sensor is turned off), the third symbol display device 81, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 Equipped with a power saving function to reduce power consumption. On the other hand, after the power saving recovery in the right-handed game, the right-handed information lamp 37c managed (controlled) by the main controller 110 starts lighting immediately after the power saving is canceled, while the sub-control device (that is, Sound lamp control device 113, display control device 114, payout control device 111 or firing control device 112) are managed (controlled) until various sensors are detected and commands from the main control device 110 are received It is also possible to limit the notification of hitting to the right and to start the notification of hitting to the right after detection of the various sensors described above and a command from the main controller 110 is received. By configuring in this way, the power saving effect can be maintained for as long as possible, and power consumption can be effectively suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the small winning type of the small winning game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, or the small winning type of the small winning game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are each composed of one type. . Instead of this, it is configured to provide a plurality of types of small winning types of small winning games in dynamic display of the first special symbol and / and small winning types of small winning games in dynamic display of the second special symbol. You may Furthermore, it may be configured to vary whether or not to end the "time saving function" according to the small hit type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

In the above-described embodiment, the variation effect of the special symbols that are encouraged for each game state is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation effect of the special symbols that are not encouraged is executed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm. Instead of this, it may be constructed such that the non-recommended special symbol variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in a predetermined manner. Specifically, for example, to make the variation effect of the encouraged special symbols stand out in the main display area Dm (the central part, most, the area larger than the variation effect of the special symbols that are not encouraged, and the pattern display mode to be darkened Execution, etc.), while executing the fluctuation production of the special pattern that is not encouraged in the main display area Dm, so as not to stand out from the fluctuation production of the special pattern that is encouraged (corner, small part, special pattern that is encouraged) A smaller area than the variable effect, the pattern display mode is thin, etc.) is configured to be executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to grasp the execution mode of the variable effect of a plurality of special symbols by the third symbol display device 81 .

In the above-described embodiment, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of balls for which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is configured so that the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol changes according to the number of balls. In other words, the number of pending balls for dynamic display of the first special symbol affects only the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the number of pending balls for dynamic display of the second special symbol affects the dynamic display of the second special symbol. configured to affect only Instead of this, the number of pending balls dynamically displayed for one special symbol may be configured to affect the fluctuation time for dynamic display of the other special symbol. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to the total number of pending balls of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of pending balls of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. configured to change accordingly. By configuring in this way, in a state in which the number of reserved balls dynamically displayed in the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls dynamically displayed in the second special symbol are mixed, a unique variation time can be selected. By configuring, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. is not limited to six stages, and may be changed to any stage.

In the above embodiment, the case of changing the big hit probability by changing the probability set value has been described, but the normal symbol winning probability and the small winning winning probability may be changed.

In addition, when it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the start-up process, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") is selected from the range of "1" to "6". The value may be forcibly set. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during timer interrupt processing), it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the setting change process is forcibly executed. to change the probability set value to the person concerned with the hall, urge the person concerned with the hall etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, or set a specific probability within the normal range as the probability set value. The setting value may be set compulsorily.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As described above, this may be performed using the setting key 501 . Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the ON state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the OFF side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the ON state is automatically set. The setting key 501 is configured to be energized to return. Each time the setting key 501 is turned from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, It may be possible to operate it by hall personnel or the like without opening the substrate box 100 . This also facilitates determination of the set probability value.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the startup mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 . Further, it may be configured such that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be set so that the hole can be selected as a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 was mounted on the main controller 110 . On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and the like. On the other hand, the setting key 501 can be used to drive the number of prize balls to be paid out when one wins a prize (for example, change from 3 to 5), or to drive a movable accessory that assists the winning of a prize in a prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), driving width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or members that affect the flow of the ball (for example, a stage or a crane on which the ball can roll) Settings relating to the degree of advantage to the player can be changed in a plurality of stages, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the tilt state of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). may be configured.

In each of the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the horizontal direction (left or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. may

In the above embodiment, the big hit random numbers, the small hit random numbers, and the losing random numbers are set to continuous values, and whether it is a big hit or a small hit is determined by a range (for example, "0" or more "49" or less), and the control load of the main controller 110 is reduced. On the other hand, the random numbers (that is, the big winning random numbers and the small winning random numbers) that give the game value may be arranged not in a continuous manner but in a dispersed (dissipated) manner. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated by "0 to 999", "7,341,555,777,831" as the jackpot random number and "77,175" as the small hit random number , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845".

Here, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value (for example, in the low probability state and the high probability state, if it is "0 to 50", the jackpot) exists continuously, It is possible that the value could be predicted externally, increasing the likelihood of fraudulently being awarded a jackpot. Therefore, by configuring as in the above modified example, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random number to which a game value is assigned from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 .

Also, in the modified example described above, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state do not overlap each other. You may set a jackpot random value. By configuring in this way, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that will be the jackpot, the value of the random number that will be the jackpot. can be made difficult to predict, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc. by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (so-called soft random numbers). On the other hand, the random number generation IC whose update period is faster than the soft random numbers may be configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1 and the like (so-called hard random numbers). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the random value being updated from the outside, and to improve the security performance.

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot random number value increases evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, the big hit random number value (or the small hit random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, from setting values ``1'' to ``2'', the jackpot random number is increased by ``2'', while from setting values ``2'' to ``3'', the jackpot random number is increased by ``5''. increase. By configuring in this way, the game value that can be imparted by the setting difference can be greatly changed, and it is possible to provide a game with modulation due to the setting difference, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the above embodiment, it is configured to change the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small hit type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the small hit is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the small hit type is changed. It may be configured such that a setting difference is caused by the change.

In the above embodiment, along with the setting change, the random number that gives the game value (that is, the jackpot random number) is changed, and the changed amount is compensated for by the random number that does not give the game value (that is, the random number that does not give the game value). It was configured as On the other hand, when the random number that gives the game value (for example, the random number for the big win) is changed due to the change of the setting, the changed amount is ) may be configured to be compensated from. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game value that can be imparted with a difference for each setting, provide a game with a sharpness for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot random number range")", " Each random number may be defined (set) so as to be aligned in the "range of the random numbers that fail". Here, as the "re-jackpot random number range", the increment of the jackpot random number value associated with the setting change is configured to correspond. By configuring in this way, the random number that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number) is adjacent to the random number that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number). It is possible to fix the range of the random numbers that are not changed (that is, the big winning random numbers and the small winning random numbers that do not change even when the settings are changed). As a result, for example, in the success/failure determination control program, while making the basic success/failure determination of fixed random numbers common to all set values, the increment of the jackpot random number accompanying the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. can be determined, the design of the control program can be facilitated, and the number of man-hours for development can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, each random number may be defined (set) in descending order (or ascending order) of the number of random numbers.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, the "range of random numbers for big hits" that increases with the change of settings is set so that it is adjacent to the random number that decreases with changes of settings (i.e., the "range of random numbers that lose"). It may be configured to be defined (set) in the table 202a. Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range", and "losing random number range". . By configuring in this way, the random number that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number) is adjacent to the random number that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number). The range of random numbers that are not changed (that is, small winning random numbers) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for judging whether or not the small hit is correct, while making the judgment of the small hit random value common to all set values, the increment of the big hit random value accompanying the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value This facilitates control program design and reduces development man-hours.

In the above-described embodiment, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the probability of winning a special symbol is improved (doubled or more). On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", it may be configured to improve the small winning probability of the special symbol. Also, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase in the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 2 times or more (for example, 10 times). Furthermore, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", even if both the jackpot probability and the small win probability are set to improve (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times and the small win probability is also 5 times) good.

In the above embodiment, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol and the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol are configured to be equal. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol, or the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured. The probability may be configured to be lower than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol.

In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability state and high-probability state of the special symbol, it is configured such that the setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in any state. On the other hand, the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated, and the setting difference is provided in the jackpot probability in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state). You may

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated for by the losing random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increment of the jackpot random number value may be compensated for by the small hit random number and the losing random number value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of big hit random numbers based on the setting change from each of the small hit random numbers and the losing random numbers, and the change in the big hit random numbers is fixed. It is no longer necessary to fill from the predetermined random value of 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from 1 for the amount of change in the jackpot random number value, there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specifications, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the normal electric element 72 that displaces between the protruding state and the immersed state is used, and the immersion timing and immersion time of the normal electric element 72 are changed in each game state, thereby realizing the game characteristics of the present invention. is configured to On the other hand, the playability of the present invention may be realized by using rotary blade members and changing the operation timing and operation time of the blade members for each game state. Specifically, for example, the blade members are arranged on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 71, and when the blade members are in a non-operating state (for example, an upright state), the ball collides with the outside (non-rolling side) of the blade members. It is configured so that it flows downstream as it is. On the other hand, in the operating state in which the blade member rotates (from the upright state to the rightward tilted state of 120 degrees), the ball collides with the inner side (rolling side) of the blade member, and moves the inner side of the blade member toward the second start port 71. configured to roll toward With this configuration, it is easier to recognize whether or not the region in which the blade member itself operates has been largely driven in the rotating mode of the blade member compared to the driving mode in which the normal electric element 72 appears and disappears. It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize whether or not the prize has been won by the variable display.

The display mode and display position of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2 are changed to the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is produced in the main display area Dm. It may be configured to change accordingly. Specifically, for example, corresponding to the special symbol being executed in the main display area Dm, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 that are being executed are positioned above, displayed in Arabic numerals, or displayed in red. , and the fourth pattern display areas 88 and 87 that are not executed are positioned on the lower side, displayed in a notation different from the above Arabic numerals (for example, Chinese numerals or Roman numerals), or displayed in a color different from red ( For example, it is configured to be displayed in blue). By constructing in this way, while distinguishing and displaying the variable performance being executed, it is constituted so that it is difficult to recognize which special symbol is being executed, and the player recognizes the game state in which he is currently staying. By constructing the game machine so that it is difficult to do so, it is possible to create a game feature of guessing the game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the alarm sound, it is configured to output an alarm sound not only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in a game state in which a left-handed game is recommended, but also when a specific condition is satisfied. good too. Specifically, for example, by configuring in this way, an alarm sound is output only for actions of a malicious player who intentionally tries to obtain more balls than the game specification, and an inexperienced player can By not outputting an alarm sound for a right-handed game with good intentions due to an operation mistake, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's willingness to play while suppressing the fraudulent game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The winning probability of normal symbols may be configured to be about the same in any game state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" where the special symbol jackpot probability is low, the normal symbol hit probability is set to 50/100, and the special symbol jackpot probability is In the high "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 50/100 or 51/100, etc., so that it is the same or equivalent to the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the "normal game state" etc. configured to By configuring in this way, regarding the opening of the normal electric combination 72 based on the winning of the normal design, the variable display time of the normal design and the opening time of the normal construction 72 are considered, and the probability of winning the normal design is not considered. Since it is possible to calculate the ball payout rate, etc., it is possible to simplify the design of the game specifications in each game state.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbols to be selected after the big win may be different for each big win symbol. Specifically, for example, if one of the jackpot symbols 1, 3, 5, and 7 that can generate the "probability fluctuation state" is selected, the first symbol is selected in the "probability fluctuation state". Both the special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to shift to a "both long variation probability variation state" in which relatively long variation time is likely to be selected. Also, when winning with 3 symbols, while the first special symbol tends to be selected for a relatively long variation time in the "probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively short variation time. 1 long special 2 short fluctuation probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, when winning with 5 symbols, in the "probability fluctuation state", both the first special pattern and the second special pattern are shifted to a "both short fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which relatively short fluctuation times are likely to be selected. configured to In addition, when winning with 7 symbols, while the first special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively short variation time in the "probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively long variation time. special 1 short special 2 long fluctuation probability fluctuation state". By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate the special symbols that can be derived first in the game state after the big win depending on the type of the big win symbols, for example, which special symbol will stop first or not. Thus, the probability that the big win appears first can be varied for each game state. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol may be configured to be different based on the number of variations of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation performance of the special symbols for the 1st to 10th times after the end of the big win is configured so that a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected, and the 11th and subsequent times. As for the variation performance of the special symbol, it is configured so that a relatively short variation time is easily selected. By constructing in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game while providing sharpness to the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

A plurality of types of winning types of normal symbols may be provided. Specifically, for example, the normal electric terminal 72 is opened once, and the normal electric terminal 72 is opened three times for a long time. 3 long open hits are provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the game states are advantageous to the player in the order of "normal game state" → "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" → "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" → "probability fluctuation state". On the other hand, the game specifications are set so that the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability change state", and "probability change state" are positioned as game states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the "normal game state". You may Specifically, for example, the starting port of the first special symbol is provided upstream of the starting port of the second special symbol to which the normal electric symbol 72 is attached, and the normal electric symbol 72 is activated in the "normal game state". Because it is difficult, it is easier for the player to receive the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than the second special symbol. It is constituted so as to make it easier for the player to receive the lottery opportunity of the second special pattern which is more disadvantageous to the player than the special pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

The display positions of the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 may be changed when a right-handed suggesting display suggesting a right-handed game appears. Specifically, in the "normal game state" where the left-handed game is encouraged, while the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, the right-handed game is encouraged. In the "probability fluctuation state" and the like, while the indication of hitting to the right is displayed in the right small area Ds3, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the left small area Ds1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game specifications corresponding to the game state.

In the above embodiment, regarding the dynamic display of a plurality of special symbols that can be executed at the same time, the variation effect of the special symbols that are encouraged according to the game state is performed in the main display area Dm, and the variation effect of the non-encouragement special symbols is mainly performed. It is configured so that it is not performed in the display area Dm. On the other hand, regarding the effects of a plurality of symbols (for example, special symbols and normal symbols) that can be executed at the same time, the priority order of the effects to be executed depends on the game state, game specifications, the game value to be given, or the execution frequency. is provided in advance, and the performance corresponding to the priority order is preferentially executed, and for the performance with the low priority, the scale of the performance is reduced, or the performance itself is not executed, etc. Compared to the performance with the high priority, the player It may be configured to be difficult to recognize. Specifically, when the variable effect of the first special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the effect related to the variable display of the normal symbol, which has a lower gaming value that can be given to the player than the first special symbol, is displayed as the first special symbol. When the 3-symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 is not executed or the scale of the performance is reduced and displayed, or when the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the game is played from the second special symbol. The effect related to the variable display of normal symbols having a low game value that can be given to the player may be displayed by not executing it on the third symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 or by reducing the scale of the effect. By configuring in this way, the player does not feel annoyed by preferentially executing an effect that the player wants to recognize when playing the game, and by reducing (eliminating) the scale of the effect with a low priority. can perform the performance.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. A command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S1111) executed by the sound ramp control device 113, when any stop type command is received, the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b are always set to ON. However, the fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON when each fluctuation pattern command is received and then the corresponding stop type command is received. As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when any of the stop type commands is received without receiving each variation pattern command.

Further, each variation start flag 223a, 223b may be set to ON at the timing of receiving each variation pattern command. In this case, in the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by each variation pattern command is displayed on the display control device based on the fact that each variation start flag 223a, 223b is turned on. Each display variation pattern command to be notified to 114 may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of each stop type command by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is provided with each variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on each display variation pattern command. can be executed. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving each stop type command. , may be transmitted to the display control device 114 . Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may stop and display the third symbols consisting of the main symbols with no numerals "0" to "9". Also, a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed may execute the continuous advance notice effect, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided to display the third symbol. By displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device together with the variable effect executed by the display device 81, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed. In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, a continuous advance notice performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a role that operates according to various performances and activating the performance in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Also, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is performed, and the effect different from the usual effect is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 is made to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 is made to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 114 is made to perform the change effect, so that the pachinko machine 10 continues When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect in the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect in the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 or a combination thereof) may be changed to prepare a plurality of continuous advance notice effect modes selected according to the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is performed when the variable effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbols, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114 determines that the continuous notice command has been received, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and the other stop symbol determination flags are turned off. may be set to In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable performance, the player can be given an expectation that a big win will finally be obtained.

In the above embodiment, the main controller 110, when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, the number of pending balls incremented by "1" The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included as it is and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball number command to be notified has been described. The types of counters included in the number-of-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113 . As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension. It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss In this case, some or all of the outlier types, etc. are determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with some or all of the values of the counters, You may store in RAM223.

In the above embodiment, winning to the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, for the winning of the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4 ” may be any number other than . Also, the maximum number of held balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on the winning of the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or can be divided into four areas. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is controlled by the light-emitting member. may be configured to notify the

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in such a reduced size that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

In a slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out as a bonus (accessory) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the role ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main controller instead of the prize ball number table, and functions equivalent to the role ratio management chip or the role ratio management chip. number of wins (symbols are aligned on the activated line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), number of wins during the bonus game period, and during the AT period. The number of wins may be counted to manage the role ratio and the continuous role ratio.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown. It should be noted that each of the various inventive concepts described below may add a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another inventive concept to the inventive concept, or add a part or a plurality of the configurations of the other inventive concept. The concept of the invention may be modified and configured by exchanging parts or the like.

<Group A: The number of fluctuations counted in the game state before transition is not displayed in the game state before transition, and the number of fluctuations is added and displayed after the transition to the game state>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a win or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

In some gaming machines, for example, at least a predetermined game state can be shifted to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and different game values can be awarded to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

It is necessary to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of group A have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing effects that are easy for a player to understand.

Display means (for example, third symbol display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
A gaming machine comprising a game value giving means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means,
At least, a predetermined game state (for example, a "normal figure high probability time shortening state") in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entering means or can enter the ball by the operating member being easy to operate or can be operated, and the predetermined game state A game state in which it is possible to shift to a specific game state (for example, a "normal game state") in which a game ball is difficult to enter or does not enter the ball-entering means because the operating member is difficult to operate or does not operate from the game state. Transition means (for example, time saving high accuracy flag 203n),
Predetermined event counting means (e.g., relief counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times based on a predetermined event (e.g., variable effect) for the ball-entering means in either the predetermined game state or the specific game state;
a number display means (for example, a relief counter display 89) capable of displaying the number of the predetermined events counted by the predetermined event counting means on the display means;
The number display means is
In the predetermined game state, when the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means is not displayed in a predetermined manner, and the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, the predetermined event A gaming machine A1, characterized in that the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the counting means can be displayed in the predetermined manner.

According to the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine includes display means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and game value giving means capable of giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the display result of the display means. There is at least a predetermined game state in which the operating member is easy to operate or can be operated so that the game ball can enter the ball entering means easily or can be entered, and the operating member is less likely to operate than the predetermined game state. Alternatively, a game state transition means that can shift to a specific game state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or does not enter the game ball by not operating, and the number of times based on a predetermined event for the ball entering means Predetermined event counting means capable of counting both the state and the specific game state; and frequency display means capable of displaying the number of the predetermined events counted by the predetermined event counting means on the display means, The number display means does not display in a predetermined manner the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means in the predetermined game state, and when the predetermined game state transitions to the specific game state, The number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means can be displayed in the predetermined manner. As a result, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, the number of times based on the predetermined event can be displayed in a predetermined manner. Even when the display opportunity of the number of times based on becomes ambiguous, it is possible to display the number of times based on the predetermined event with the trigger of transition to the specific game state as a trigger. Therefore, even if an irregular event occurs, it becomes possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine A1,
The number display means is
In the predetermined game state, the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means is displayed in a specific mode with a smaller display area than the predetermined mode (for example, only the number of fluctuations is displayed (the number of times the ceiling is reached is not displayed)) A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to display at.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times display means is configured to be able to display the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means in a specific mode having a smaller display area than the predetermined mode in the predetermined game state. As a result, even in a predetermined game state, even if the display area is small, the number of times based on the predetermined event can be displayed in a specific manner. can be accurately recognized by the player, and an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
The number display means is
A gaming machine A3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to display the maximum total number of times of the predetermined events counted by the predetermined event counting means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number display means is configured to be able to display the maximum total number of times of the predetermined events counted by the predetermined event counting means. As a result, in the specific game state (or the predetermined game state), it is possible for the player to recognize the maximum total number of predetermined events, and it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation. There is an effect that an easy-to-understand presentation can be executed.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A3,
At least, a holding means (for example, a backup function of the power supply device 115) capable of holding the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means even after the power is turned off,
The number display means is
The predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means held by the holding means when a predetermined condition (for example, a specified number of fluctuations in a "normal game state") is established after the power is turned on. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is configured to be able to display the number of times based on the predetermined mode.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a holding means capable of holding the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means even after the power is turned off, and the number display means is capable of holding the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means after the power is turned on. is established, the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means held by the holding means can be displayed in the predetermined manner. As a result, even when the gaming machine is powered off, the number of times based on the predetermined event counted by the predetermined event counting means held by the holding means when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. can be displayed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, for example, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off in a predetermined gaming state and the timing for displaying the number of times based on the predetermined event becomes ambiguous, the number of times based on the predetermined event can be displayed using the establishment of the predetermined condition as a trigger. . Therefore, even if the power is cut off, it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The predetermined event counting means is
The first predetermined event in the predetermined game state (e.g., the number of fluctuations in special figure 2) and the second predetermined event in the specific game state (e.g., the number of fluctuations in special figure 1) are each configured to be countable,
The number display means is
When the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, the number of times based on the first predetermined event, including the number of times based on the second predetermined event, can be displayed in the predetermined mode. Gaming machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined event counting means is configured to be capable of counting a first predetermined event in the predetermined game state and a second predetermined event in the specific game state, and the number of times display means counts the number of times from the predetermined game state. When shifting to the specific game state, the number of times based on the first predetermined event, including the number of times based on the second predetermined event, can be displayed in the predetermined mode. As a result, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, the number of times based on the first predetermined event can be displayed in a predetermined manner by including the number of times based on the second predetermined event. Even if the timing for displaying the number of times based on the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event becomes ambiguous due to the power failure of the gaming machine, the number of times based on the first predetermined event is triggered by the timing of transition to the specific game state. can be included in the number of times based on the second predetermined event and displayed. Therefore, even if an irregular event occurs, it becomes possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A5,
The game state transition means is
According to the number of the predetermined events counted by the predetermined event counting means, configured to be able to shift to a special game state different from the predetermined game state and the specific game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") A gaming machine A6, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state transition means is configured to be able to shift to a special game state different from the predetermined game state and the specific game state according to the number of the predetermined events counted by the predetermined event counting means. As a result, when the predetermined game state shifts to the specific game state, the number of times based on the predetermined event that causes the transition to the special game state can be displayed in a predetermined manner. Even if the display trigger of the number of times based on the predetermined event that causes the transition to the special game state becomes ambiguous due to the occurrence of power failure, the transition to the special game state is triggered by the transition to the special game state. It becomes possible to display the number of times based on a predetermined event. Therefore, even if an irregular event occurs, it becomes possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Group B: Relief Counter Display by Comparing Game State of Previous Variation and Game State of Current Variation>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a win or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, a game in which a predetermined game value is given to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition when the winning is won. there is a machine

In some gaming machines, for example, at least a predetermined game state can be shifted to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and different game values can be awarded to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

It is necessary to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group B has been made in view of the above circumstances and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of executing effects that are easy for a player to understand.

Display means (for example, third symbol display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
A gaming machine comprising a game value giving means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means,
At least, a predetermined game state (for example, "normal pattern high probability time shortened state" or "normal pattern low Probable time shortening state"), and a specific game state (for example, "normal game State ”) and game state transition means (for example, time-saving high-accuracy flag 203n or time-saving low-accuracy flag 203m),
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, D table 203d4);
After the predetermined effect is executed, a specific effect execution means (for example, B table 202d2) capable of executing a specific effect different from the predetermined effect (for example, special symbol fluctuation effect in "normal game state");
A specification for displaying a specific display capable of suggesting to the player specific information (e.g., the number of fluctuations and the number of times the ceiling is reached) regarding the transition of the game state in the specific effect when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state. and a display means (for example, a relief counter display 89).

According to the gaming machine B1, the gaming machine comprises display means capable of executing a predetermined effect and game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means. At least, a predetermined game state in which a game ball is easily or can be entered into the ball-entering means due to the fact that the operating member is easily or operable, and the operating member is more difficult or difficult to operate than the predetermined game state. A game state transition means capable of transitioning to a specific game state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or does not enter the ball entering means by not operating, and a predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect performed only in the predetermined game state. execution means, specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the predetermined effect after the predetermined effect is executed, and the specific effect in the case of transition from the predetermined game state to the specific game state. a specific display means for displaying a specific display capable of suggesting to the player specific information regarding the transition of the game state. Thus, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, it is possible to suggest to the player the specific information regarding the transition of the game state in the specific effect by displaying the specific display. Therefore, for example, even if the gaming machine is powered off in the predetermined game state, the specific display is displayed in the specific effect triggered by the transition from the predetermined game state to the specific game state, so that the player can be accurately informed of the game situation. can be recognized. As a result, even if an irregular event occurs, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine B1,
Predetermined effect selection means (for example, D table 202d4 and stop pattern counter C3 value) capable of selecting one of the predetermined effects from a plurality of predetermined effects in the predetermined game state;
A specific effect selection means (for example, B table 202d2 and stop pattern counter C3 value) capable of selecting one specific effect from a plurality of specific effects,
The specific display means is
When the transition from the predetermined game state to the specific game state after the execution of the predetermined effect, in the case where any of the predetermined effect is selected by the predetermined effect selection means, by the specific effect selection means A gaming machine B2 characterized by being configured to be able to display said specific display even when said specific effect of is selected.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the predetermined game state, predetermined effect selection means capable of selecting one of the predetermined effects from a plurality of predetermined effects, specific effect selection means capable of selecting one of the specific effects from a plurality of specific effects, and the specific display means, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state after the predetermined effect is executed, when any of the predetermined effects is selected by the predetermined effect selection means The specific display can be displayed even when any of the specific effects is selected by the specific effect selection means. Thereby, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state after the predetermined performance is executed, the specific display is displayed regardless of which predetermined performance is selected and then which specific performance is selected. It becomes possible to Therefore, for example, when the power supply of the gaming machine occurs in a predetermined game state, in the situation where any of the predetermined effects have been selected, the transition from the predetermined game state to the specific game state triggers the specific display in any of the specific effects is displayed so that the player can accurately recognize the game situation. As a result, even if an irregular event occurs, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The specific display means is
A related specific display (for example, display of only the number of fluctuations (not display of the number of times the ceiling is reached)) related to the contents suggested to the player by the specific display in the predetermined effect can be displayed. Game machine B3 to play.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific display means is configured to be able to display a related specific display (for example, display only the number of fluctuations) related to the content suggested to the player by the specific display in the predetermined effect. Even in the state, it is possible to display a related specific display related to the content suggested to the player by the specific display, so that the player can be made to accurately recognize the game situation, and the player can understand it. There is an effect that an easy production can be executed.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The specific display is configured to be capable of suggesting to the player that the game state will shift to the predetermined game state when the specific display becomes a predetermined specific display (for example, the relief counter display 89 reaches the ceiling number of times). Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific display becomes the predetermined specific display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state will shift to the predetermined game state. As a result, since the specific display becomes the predetermined specific display, the player can be made to recognize that the game state will shift to the predetermined game state, so that the player can be made to accurately recognize the game situation. , it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the operator to understand.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The game state transition means is
The game machine B5 is characterized by being configured to be able to shift to the specific game state when a condition for ending the predetermined game state (for example, reaching a specified number of fluctuations) is established.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state transition means is configured to be capable of transitioning to the specific game state when conditions for ending the predetermined game state are established. As a result, when the end condition of the predetermined game state is established and the state is shifted to the specific game state, it is possible to suggest to the player the specific information regarding the transition to the game state in the specific effect by displaying the specific display. becomes. Therefore, for example, even if the gaming machine is powered off in the predetermined game state, the specific display is displayed in the specific effect triggered by the transition from the predetermined game state to the specific game state, so that the player can be accurately informed of the game situation. can be recognized. As a result, even if an irregular event occurs, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B5,
An execution number counting means (for example, a relief counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
The game state transition means is
When the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) by the execution frequency counting means, the game state can be shifted to the predetermined game state. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, an execution frequency counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the predetermined effect and the specific effect is provided, and the game state transition means counts the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect by the execution frequency counting means. When the number of times is reached, the game state can be shifted to the predetermined game state. Thus, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, it is possible to display the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect, which are factors for shifting to the predetermined game state again. Even if the power failure of the machine occurs and the display trigger of the number of predetermined effects (and specific effects) that causes the transition to the predetermined game state again via the specific game state becomes ambiguous, it will return to the specific game state. Triggered by the shift opportunity, it is possible to display the total number of predetermined effects and specific effects that cause the transition to the predetermined game state again. Therefore, even if an irregular event occurs, it becomes possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Group C: Determine the number of times of time saving by specializing the variation pattern of each time saving final variation when there are multiple types of time saving times>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a win or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

In some gaming machines, for example, at least a predetermined game state can be shifted to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and different game values can be awarded to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

It is necessary to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of group C has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of executing effects that are easy for a player to understand.

Display means (for example, third symbol display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
A gaming machine comprising a game value imparting means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means,
At least, a predetermined game state (for example, a "normal figure high probability time shortening state") in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entering means or can enter the ball by the operating member being easy to operate or can be operated, and the predetermined game state A game state in which it is possible to shift to a specific game state (for example, a "normal game state") in which a game ball is difficult to enter or does not enter the ball-entering means because the operating member is difficult to operate or does not operate from the game state. Transition means (for example, time saving high accuracy flag 203n),
The predetermined game state is at least a general predetermined game state (for example, a "general pattern high probability time shortened state" in which the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is 30 times as an end condition), and an advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the general predetermined game state. Predetermined transition means (for example, time-saving counter 203o) capable of transitioning to a predetermined game state (for example, a "general figure high probability time reduction state" in which the number of fluctuations of special symbols is 50 times as an end condition),
When the general predetermined game state or the advantageous predetermined game state ends, a first effect capable of executing a dedicated predetermined effect (for example, an end screen of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state") on the display means a means of execution;
After the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined game state, the specific information (for example, the number of fluctuations including the number of fluctuations in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state") is played in the specific game state. and a specific display means for displaying a specific display (for example, a relief counter display 89) that can be suggested to a player.

According to the gaming machine C1, it is a gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means. At least, a predetermined game state in which a game ball is easily or can be entered into the ball-entering means due to the fact that the operating member is easily or operable, and the operating member is more difficult or difficult to operate than the predetermined game state. game state transition means capable of transitioning to a specific game state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or does not enter the ball entering means by not operating; Predetermined transition means capable of transitioning from a game state to a predetermined advantageous game state advantageous to the player, and when the general predetermined game state or the predetermined advantageous game state ends, a dedicated predetermined effect is displayed on the display means. a first effect executing means that can be executed; and a specification for displaying a specific display that can suggest at least specific information about the predetermined game state to the player in the specific game state after the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined game state. and a display means. As a result, even if either the general predetermined game state or the advantageous predetermined game state is performed as the predetermined game state, when the general predetermined game state or the advantageous predetermined game state ends, the dedicated predetermined performance is executed, Triggered by the execution of the predetermined effect, a specific display capable of suggesting at least specific information about the predetermined game state to the player can be displayed in the specific game state. Therefore, for example, in the case where the gaming machine is powered off in a predetermined game state, even if the gaming machine is capable of performing different predetermined game states, execution of a predetermined effect at the end of each predetermined game state may cause subsequent To accurately suggest specific information to a player in a specific game state and to allow the player to accurately recognize the game situation. As a result, even if an irregular event occurs, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine C1,
At least, counting means (for example, relief counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times related to the predetermined game state,
The specific display means is
The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that a count display based on the counting result by the counting means (for example, the number of fluctuations of special symbols in a low probability state) can be displayed as the specific display.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least counting means capable of counting the number of times related to the predetermined game state is provided, and the specific display means is configured to be capable of displaying, as the specific display, a count display based on the result of counting by the counting means. As a result, even if either the general predetermined game state or the advantageous predetermined game state is performed as the predetermined game state, when the general predetermined game state or the advantageous predetermined game state ends, the dedicated predetermined performance is executed, Triggered by the execution of the predetermined effect, in the specific game state, as the specific display, a count display based on the result of counting the number of times regarding the predetermined game state can be displayed. Therefore, for example, even if the gaming machine is powered off in a predetermined game state, even if a different predetermined game state is performed, by executing a predetermined effect at the end of each predetermined game state, in the subsequent specific game state The result of counting the number of times relating to the game state can be accurately suggested to the player, and the player can be made to accurately recognize the game state. As a result, even if an irregular event occurs, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine C2,
The specific display means is
The game machine C3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to display related count display by the counting means (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state") in the predetermined game state.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific display means is configured to be able to display the related count display by the counting means in the predetermined game state. As a result, the counting result of the counting means can be displayed even in a predetermined game state, so that the player can be made to accurately recognize the game situation, and an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed. , has the effect of

In gaming machine C2 or C3,
A transition determination means (for example, ON / OFF of the time saving high accuracy flag 203n) that can determine whether or not it has transitioned to the specific game state,
The specific display means is
A gaming machine C4 characterized by being configured to be able to display the count display based on the counting result of the counting means when the transition determining means determines that the game state has shifted to the previous specific game state.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a transition determination means capable of determining whether or not the transition to the specific game state is provided, and the specific display means, when the transition determination means determines that the transition to the specific game state has occurred, the counting The counting display based on the counting result by the means can be displayed. As a result, even if either the general predetermined game state or the advantageous predetermined game state is performed as the predetermined game state, when the general predetermined game state or the advantageous predetermined game state ends, the dedicated predetermined performance is executed, Triggered by the execution of the predetermined effect, when it is determined by the transition determination means that the game state has shifted to the second game state, a count display based on the result of counting the number of times relating to the predetermined game state can be displayed as the specific display. Therefore, for example, even if the gaming machine is powered off in a predetermined game state, even if a different predetermined game state is performed, by executing a predetermined effect at the end of each predetermined game state, in the subsequent specific game state The result of counting the number of times relating to the game state can be accurately suggested to the player, and the player can be made to accurately recognize the game state. As a result, even if an irregular event occurs, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C4,
When the specific display becomes a predetermined specific display (for example, the rescue counter display 89 reaches the ceiling number of times), a special display that can suggest to the player that the game state will be changed (for example, "Reach the ceiling!" and a special display means capable of displaying a special effect that can suggest that the game state will shift.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is provided special display means capable of displaying a special display when the specific display becomes a predetermined specific display. As a result, since the specific display becomes the predetermined specific display, the player can be made to recognize that the game state will change, so that the player can be made to accurately recognize the game situation, thereby making the player aware of the game situation. There is an effect that an easy-to-understand presentation can be executed.

In any of game machines C2 to C5,
The counting means
The predetermined effect in the predetermined game state and the specific effect in the specific game state are configured to be countable,
The game state transition means is
A game characterized in that the game state can be shifted to the predetermined game state when the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) by the counting means. Machine C6.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machines C2 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the counting means is configured to be capable of counting the predetermined effect in the predetermined game state and the specific effect in the specific game state, and the game state transition means causes the predetermined effect and the specific effect to be counted by the counting means. When the total number of times with the performance reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state can be shifted to the predetermined game state. Thus, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, it is possible to display the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect, which are factors for shifting to the predetermined game state again. Even if the power failure of the machine occurs and the display trigger of the number of predetermined effects (and specific effects) that causes the transition to the predetermined game state again via the specific game state becomes ambiguous, it will return to the specific game state. Triggered by the shift opportunity, it is possible to display the total number of predetermined effects and specific effects that cause the transition to the predetermined game state again. Therefore, even if an irregular event occurs, it becomes possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<D group: Relief counter display in an area different from other displays>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a win or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, a game in which a predetermined game value is given to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition when the winning is won. there is a machine

In some gaming machines, for example, at least a predetermined game state can be shifted to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and different game values can be awarded to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

It is necessary to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of group D was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is easy for a player to understand.

a shooting means capable of shooting game media (eg, ball shooting unit 112a);
Display means (for example, third symbol display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
A gaming machine comprising a game value giving means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means,
At least, a predetermined game state that can be shifted by deriving a predetermined display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) on the display means (for example, "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state") And, a specific game state (for example, "normal game state") that is started when the transition condition (for example, execution of the number of times of fluctuation production of a specified special symbol) is established in the predetermined game state, and a game state that can be shifted to Transition means (for example, time saving high accuracy flag 203n or time saving low accuracy flag 203m),
Predetermined suggestive means (e.g., " Right-handed!” band telop display) and
In the case of transition from the predetermined game state to the specific game state, specific suggestion means (for example, , a text message 81d) prompting a left-handed game,
In the case of transition from the predetermined game state to the specific game state, specific information (for example, the number of variations of the special symbol and the number of times the ceiling reaches the ceiling) regarding the transition of the game state is displayed in a display area different from the specific firing mode suggestion display. a specific display means for displaying a specific display (for example, a relief counter display 89) that can be suggested to the game machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D1, there is a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium, a display means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and a game value imparting system capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player based on the display result of the display means. means, at least a predetermined game state to which a predetermined display result is derived by the display means, and a transition condition is established in the predetermined game state. a game state transition means capable of transitioning to a specific game state; a predetermined suggestive means capable of displaying, on the display means, a predetermined firing mode suggestion display capable of suggesting a firing mode by the firing means in the predetermined game state; a specific suggesting means capable of displaying a specific firing mode suggestion display different from the predetermined firing mode suggestion display on the display means when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state; and from the predetermined game state to the specific game state. a specific display means for displaying a specific display capable of suggesting specific information regarding the transition of the game state to the player in a display area different from the specific firing mode suggestive display when the game state shifts to . As a result, when the predetermined game state shifts to the specific game state, the predetermined shooting mode suggestion display is changed to the specific shooting mode suggestion display to clearly suggest to the player that the shooting mode of the game medium will change, A specific display capable of suggesting specific information regarding the transition of the game state to the player is displayed in a display area different from the display of the specific firing mode suggestion, thereby allowing the player to accurately recognize the game situation regarding the transition of the game state. . Therefore, for example, even if the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off in a predetermined game state, it is possible to make the player aware of the change in the shooting mode and to accurately suggest the specific information to the player in the subsequent specific game state. , the player can be made to accurately recognize the game situation. As a result, even if an irregular event occurs, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine D1,
The specific display means is
The gaming machine D2 is configured to be able to display a related specific display (for example, display only the number of variations of special symbols) related to the specific display in the predetermined game state.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific display means is configured to be able to display related specific displays related to the specific displays in the predetermined game state. Thus, by displaying the related specific display related to the specific display even in a predetermined game state, it is possible to allow the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
The specific suggesting means is
A game machine D3, characterized in that the specific shooting mode suggestion display can be displayed in a mode different from the predetermined shooting mode suggestion display.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific suggesting means is configured to be able to display the specific firing mode suggestion display in a mode different from the predetermined firing mode suggestion display. Thus, by displaying the predetermined shooting mode suggestion display and the specific shooting mode suggestion display in different modes that the player can distinguish, the player can be made to accurately recognize the change in the shooting mode of the game medium and the game situation. Therefore, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the operator to understand can be executed.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3,
The specific display means is
The game machine D4 is characterized in that, in the specific display, at least the quantity of a predetermined event (for example, a variable performance of special symbols) in the specific game state can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific display means is configured to be able to display at least the quantity of the predetermined event in the specific game state in the specific display. As a result, when the predetermined game state shifts to the specific game state, the display is changed from the predetermined shooting mode suggestion display to the specific shooting mode suggestion display to clearly suggest to the player that the shooting mode of the game medium will change, In a display area different from the specific firing mode suggestion display, specific information relating to the transition of the game state, which is a specific display capable of suggesting to the player the number of predetermined events in the specific game state, is displayed, and the game related to the transition of the game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player accurately recognize the situation. Therefore, for example, even if the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off in a predetermined game state, the player can accurately read the specific information, which is the quantity of the predetermined event, in the subsequent specific game state while making the player aware of the change in the shooting mode. It is possible to make the player accurately recognize the game situation. As a result, even if an irregular event occurs, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine D4,
It is possible to display a special display (e.g., "Reached the ceiling number!") that can suggest to the player that the game state will shift when the number of the predetermined events reaches a specific number (e.g., "250 times"). A game machine D5 characterized by comprising a special display means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is provided special display means capable of displaying a special display capable of suggesting to the player that the game state will shift when the number of the predetermined events reaches a specific number. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the game state will shift when the quantity of the predetermined event, which is the specific information, becomes the specific quantity, so that the player can be made to accurately recognize the game situation. As a result, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the operator to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine D4 or D5,
A counting means (for example, a relief counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times of the predetermined event in the predetermined game state and the specific game state,
The game state transition means is
The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the game state can be shifted to the predetermined game state when the number of the predetermined events reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, "250 times") by the counting means.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises a counting means capable of counting the number of times of the predetermined event in the predetermined game state and the specific game state, and the game state transition means, when the number of times of the predetermined event reaches the predetermined number of times by the counting means In addition, the game state can be shifted to the predetermined game state. As a result, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, by counting and displaying the number of predetermined events that cause the transition to the predetermined game state again, for example, the game machine is powered off in the predetermined game state. Even if the display trigger for the number of times of the predetermined event that causes the transition to the predetermined game state again via the specific game state becomes ambiguous due to the occurrence of the It is possible to display the number of predetermined events that cause the transition to the game state. Therefore, even if an irregular event occurs, it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Group E: Displays relief counter display triggered by a specific fluctuation pattern when power is cut off in normal times>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a win or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, a game in which a predetermined game value is given to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition when the winning is won. there is a machine

In some gaming machines, for example, at least a predetermined game state can be shifted to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and different game values can be awarded to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

It is necessary to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group E have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing effects that are easy for a player to understand.

In a gaming machine equipped with game value giving means (for example, variable winning device 65) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player,
At least, a predetermined game state (for example, "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state") and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, "normal game state") Game state transition means that can be shifted (for example, time saving high accuracy flag 203n or time saving low accuracy flag 203m),
Predetermined control means (for example, main control device 110) capable of executing game control;
Specific control means (for example, sound lamp) operable by receiving game information (for example, variation pattern command corresponding to the effect mode of "special variation 1" or the effect mode of "special variation 2") from the predetermined control means a controller 113);
A holding means (for example, a backup function of the power supply device 115) capable of holding the storage contents of the predetermined control means even after the power is turned off,
The specific control means is
By receiving the game information from the predetermined control means, at least a specific output means (for example, a relief Counter display processing (S1317)),
The specific output means is
When the specific suggestion is not output until the game information is output from the predetermined control means after the predetermined supply power in the specific game state is reduced, and the game information is output from the predetermined control means. A gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is configured to be able to output the specific suggestion to the above.

According to the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine is provided with a game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player, and at least a predetermined game state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state. Game state transition means capable of transitioning, predetermined control means capable of executing game control, specific control means operable by receiving game information from the predetermined control means, and storage contents of the predetermined control means, holding means capable of holding even after the power is turned off, and the specific control means can suggest to the player at least the game situation in the specific game state by receiving the game information from the predetermined control means. a specific output means for outputting a specific suggestion, wherein the specific output means is configured to output the specific suggestion until the game information is output from the predetermined control means after the predetermined supply power in the specific game state is reduced; is not output, and the specific suggestion can be output when the game information is output from the predetermined control means. Thus, even if the content of the specific suggestion that can suggest the game situation in the specific game state to the player becomes ambiguous after the power supply in the specific game state is reduced, the game information is output from the predetermined control means. Using this as a trigger, it becomes possible to output a specific suggestion. Therefore, even if an event such as a decrease in power supply occurs, the specific suggestion is not output until the game information is output from the predetermined control means, and the specific suggestion is output when the game information is output from the first control means. By outputting , it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game situation, to allow the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. has the effect of

In gaming machine E1,
The predetermined control means is
A game characterized by being configured to be able to output the game information to the specific control means when a predetermined condition (for example, a specified number of fluctuations in a "normal game state") is established when the player plays the game. Machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined control means is configured to be capable of outputting the game information to the specific control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the player plays the game. As a result, by outputting the game information to the specific control means when the predetermined condition for the player to play the game is satisfied, the game situation in the specific game state is changed after the power supply in the specific game state is reduced. Even when the content of the specific suggestion that can be suggested to the player is ambiguous, the specific suggestion is triggered by output of game information from a predetermined control means when a predetermined condition for the player to play the game is established. can be output. Therefore, even if an event such as a decrease in power supply occurs, the predetermined control means does not output game information nor specific suggestions in a situation where the predetermined conditions for the player to play the game are not satisfied. By outputting a specific suggestion when game information is output from a predetermined control means when a predetermined condition for the player to play the game is satisfied, the player is prevented from misunderstanding the game situation, It is possible to allow the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In gaming machine E1 or E2,
The specific control means is
The game machine E3 is characterized in that memory contents are initialized when the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the memory content of the specific control means is initialized when the power is turned off. As a result, after the power supplied in the specific game state is reduced, the memory content of the specific control means is initialized, and the content of the specific suggestion that can suggest the game situation in the specific game state to the player becomes ambiguous. However, it is possible to output the specific suggestion by using the output of the game information from the predetermined control means as a trigger. Therefore, even if an event such as a decrease in power supply occurs and the storage content of the specific control means is initialized, the specific suggestion is not output until the game information is output from the predetermined control means. By outputting the specific suggestion when the game information is output from the control means, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game situation and to allow the player to accurately recognize the game situation. There is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for a person to understand.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3,
The specific output means is
The game machine E4 is configured to be capable of outputting a related specific suggestion (for example, "variation number of special symbols in normal pattern high probability time shortening state") related to the specific suggestion in the predetermined game state.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific output means is configured to be capable of outputting a related specific suggestion related to the specific suggestion in the predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to output the related specific suggestion related to the specific suggestion to the player even in the predetermined game state, so that the player can be made to accurately recognize the game situation, and the player can easily understand the presentation. has the effect of being able to execute

In any of gaming machines E1 to E4,
When shifting from the predetermined game state to the specific game state, a predetermined effect execution means (for example, the final variation of the special symbol variation effect in the "general pattern high probability time reduction state") can be executed. For example, E table 202d5 or F table 202d6),
The specific output means is
The gaming machine E5 is configured to be capable of outputting a specific suggestion including at least the game situation related to the predetermined game state in the specific game state after the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined game state.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when shifting from the predetermined game state to the specific game state, a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a dedicated predetermined effect is provided, and the specific output means performs the predetermined effect in the predetermined game state. After that, in the specific game state, a specific suggestion including at least the game situation related to the predetermined game state can be output. As a result, when the content of the specific suggestion that can suggest the game situation in the specific game state to the player becomes ambiguous after the power supplied in the specific game state decreases after the predetermined effect is performed in the specific game state. However, with the output of game information from the predetermined control means as a trigger, it is possible to output the specific suggestion including at least the game situation related to the predetermined game state in the specific game state. Therefore, even if an event such as a decrease in power supply occurs, the specific suggestion is not output until the game information is output from the predetermined control means, and the specific suggestion is output when the game information is output from the predetermined control means. By outputting, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game situation, and to allow the player to accurately recognize at least the game situation related to the predetermined game state in the specific game state, so that the player can understand. There is an effect that an effect that is easy to perform can be executed.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E5,
A specific effect execution means (for example, variation start processing (S510)) capable of executing a specific effect different from the predetermined effect in the specific game state (for example, a special symbol variation effect in the "normal game state");
An execution number counting means (for example, a relief counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
The game state transition means is
When the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, "250 times") by the execution frequency counting means, the game state can be shifted to the predetermined game state. Characterized game machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the predetermined effect in the specific game state, and execution frequency counting means capable of counting the number of times the predetermined effect and the specific effect are executed, and the game state The transition means is configured to be capable of transitioning the game state to the first game state when the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect reaches a predetermined number of times by the execution count means. As a result, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, by counting and displaying the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect, which are factors for shifting to the predetermined game state again, for example, in the predetermined game state Even when a power failure of the game machine occurs and the display trigger of the predetermined performance and the number of times of the specific performance, which is a factor for shifting to the predetermined game state again via the second game state, becomes ambiguous, the predetermined control means Triggered by the output of the game information, it is possible to display the predetermined effect and the number of times of the specific effect that cause the transition to the predetermined game state again. Therefore, even if an irregular event occurs, it becomes possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Group F: Controlling display timing of relief counter display by ON/OFF of consistency flag>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a win or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, a game in which a predetermined game value is given to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition when the winning is won. there is a machine

In some gaming machines, for example, at least a predetermined game state can be shifted to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and different game values can be awarded to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

It is necessary to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of group F has been made in view of the above circumstances and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is easy for a player to understand.

In a gaming machine equipped with game value giving means (for example, variable winning device 65) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player,
At least, a predetermined game state (for example, "normal high probability time shortening state" or "normal low probability time shortening state") in which a game in a shooting mode advantageous to the player is encouraged, and a game from the predetermined game state A game state transition means (for example, a time-saving high-accuracy flag 203n or a time-saving low-accuracy flag 203m) that can shift to a specific game state (for example, "normal game state") in which a game in a shooting mode that is disadvantageous to a player is encouraged ,
Predetermined control means (for example, main control device 110) capable of executing game control;
A specific control means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) operable by receiving game information (for example, a variation pattern command) from the predetermined control means;
A holding means (for example, a backup function of the power supply device 115) capable of holding the storage contents of the predetermined control means even after the power is turned off,
The specific control means is
By receiving the game information from the predetermined control means, specific output means for outputting a specific suggestion (for example, relief counter display 89) that can suggest the game situation in the predetermined game state and the specific game state to the player ( For example, relief counter display processing (S1317)),
The specific output means is
In a situation where the predetermined supply power is not declining, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, the specific suggestion is output after the specific game state is started,
After the predetermined supply power declines, the specific suggestion can be output by outputting specific information (for example, a variation pattern command corresponding to a specified number of variations) from the predetermined control means in the specific game state. A gaming machine F1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine is provided with a game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player, and the predetermined game encourages at least a game in a shooting mode advantageous to the player. a game state transition means capable of shifting from the predetermined game state to a specific game state in which a game in a firing mode that is disadvantageous to the player is encouraged from the predetermined game state; predetermined control means capable of executing game control; A specific control means operable by receiving game information from the control means, and a holding means capable of holding the contents stored in the predetermined control means even after power is turned off, wherein the specific control means receives the game information. from the predetermined control means, a specific output means for outputting a specific suggestion capable of suggesting the game situation in the predetermined game state and the specific game state to the player, wherein the specific output means is a predetermined In a situation where the supply power is not reduced, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, the specific suggestion is output after the start of the specific game state, and after the predetermined supply power is reduced, the By outputting the specific information from the predetermined control means in the specific game state, the specific suggestion can be output. As a result, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state in a situation where the predetermined supply power is not reduced, while outputting the specific suggestion after the start of the specific game state, after the predetermined supply power is reduced can output a specific suggestion triggered by the output of specific information from a predetermined control means in a specific gaming state. Therefore, even if an event such as a decrease in the predetermined power supply occurs, the specific suggestion is not output until the specific information is output from the predetermined control means, and the specific suggestion is not output until the specific information is output from the predetermined control means. By outputting the suggestion, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game situation, to allow the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. , has the effect of

In the gaming machine F1,
The specific output means is
The game machine F2 is characterized by comprising limiting means for limiting the output of the specific suggestion in the predetermined game state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific output means includes limiting means for limiting the output of the specific suggestion in the predetermined game state. As a result, the output of the specific suggestion is restricted in the predetermined game state to make it easier for the player to concentrate on the game in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined game state is changed to the specific game state in a state where the predetermined supply power is not declining. In the case of shifting to, while outputting a specific suggestion after the start of the specific game state, after the predetermined supply power declines, it is specified that the specific information is output from the predetermined control means in the specific game state as a trigger Suggestions can be output. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to accurately recognize the game situation without impairing the playability of the predetermined game state due to the specific suggestion, and it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. be.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The game machine F3 is characterized by comprising initialization means for initializing the content of the specific control means (for example, the sound lamp control device 113 has no backup function) when the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it comprises initialization means for initializing the contents of the specific control means when the power is turned off. As a result, in the event of a power failure, the memory content of the specific control means is initialized, and even if the content of the specific suggestion that can suggest the game situation to the player becomes ambiguous, the game information cannot be transmitted from the predetermined control means. is output as a trigger to output a specific suggestion. Therefore, even if an event of a decrease in the predetermined power supply occurs and the memory content of the specific control means is initialized, the specific suggestion is not output until the game information is output from the predetermined control means. By outputting the specific suggestion when the game information is output from the predetermined control means, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game situation and to allow the player to accurately recognize the game situation. , there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3,
The specific output means is
A gaming machine F4 characterized by being configured to be able to output a related specific suggestion (for example, displaying only the number of fluctuations in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state") related to the specific suggestion.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific output means is configured to be capable of outputting related specific suggestions related to the specific suggestions. As a result, the related specific suggestion related to the specific suggestion can be output to the player, so that the player can be made to more accurately recognize the game situation, and the performance that is easy for the player to understand can be executed. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines F1 to F4,
The game state transition means is
The game machine F5 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the specific game state when a condition for ending the predetermined game state is established.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state transition means is configured to be capable of transitioning to the specific game state when conditions for ending the predetermined game state are established. As a result, when the condition for ending the predetermined game state is satisfied and the game state shifts to the specific game state in a situation where the predetermined power supply is not declining, the specific suggestion is output after the start of the specific game state, After the predetermined supply power is reduced, it is possible to output the specific suggestion by using the output of the specific information from the predetermined control means in the specific game state as a trigger. Therefore, even if an event such as a decrease in the predetermined power supply occurs, the specific suggestion is not output until the specific information is output from the predetermined control means, and the specific suggestion is not output until the specific information is output from the predetermined control means. By outputting the suggestion, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game situation, to allow the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. , has the effect of

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5,
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, S506 of special figure variation processing (S210)) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, variation effect of the second special symbol) in the predetermined game state,
Specific effect executing means (for example, S509 of special figure variation processing (S210)) capable of executing specific effect (for example, variation effect of the first special symbol) in the specific game state,
An execution number counting means (for example, a relief counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
The game state transition means is
When the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, "250 times") by the execution frequency counting means, the game state can be shifted to the predetermined game state. Characterized game machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in the predetermined game state, a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in the specific game state, and capable of counting the number of executions of the predetermined effect and the specific effect. and execution frequency counting means, wherein the game state transition means changes the game state to the predetermined game state when the total number of times of the predetermined performance and the specific performance reaches a predetermined number of times by the execution frequency counting means. Configured to be migratable. As a result, when the predetermined game state is shifted to the specific game state, by counting and displaying the total number of times of the predetermined effect and the specific effect, which are factors for shifting to the predetermined game state again, for example, in the predetermined game state Even in the case where the power failure of the game machine occurs and the display trigger of the predetermined performance and the number of times of the specific performance, which is a factor for shifting to the predetermined game state again via the specific game state, becomes ambiguous, the game can be played from the predetermined control means. Triggered by the output of information, it is possible to display the number of times of a predetermined effect and a specific effect that cause a transition to a predetermined game state again. Therefore, even if an irregular event occurs, it becomes possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Group G: Shifting to a Different Normal State and Displaying a Remedy Counter Display at Specific Fluctuation Times (Fifth Embodiment)>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a win or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. there is a machine

In some gaming machines, for example, at least a predetermined game state can be shifted to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and different game values can be awarded to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

It is necessary to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of group G was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of executing effects that are easy for a player to understand.

Display means (for example, third symbol display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
A gaming machine comprising game value giving means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means,
At least, it is possible to shift to a predetermined game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a high probability state of normal symbols) and a specific game state that is disadvantageous to the player from the predetermined game state (for example, a low probability state of normal symbols). Game state transition means (for example, time saving high accuracy flag 203n or time saving low accuracy flag 203m),
Predetermined event counting means (for example, a relief counter 203p) capable of counting the number of times based on a predetermined event performed by the display means at least in the specific game state,
The predetermined gaming state is
At least, a general predetermined game state (e.g., "probability fluctuation state") and a specific predetermined game state different from the general predetermined game state (e.g., "general figure high probability time reduction state") are provided,
The specific gaming state is
At least, a general specific game state (for example, "normal game state A") and a specific specific game state different from the general specific game state (for example, "normal game state B") are provided,
The game machine is
When the predetermined event is counted a predetermined number of times (for example, "100 times") by the predetermined event counting means in the general specific game state, or when the predetermined event is counted by the predetermined event counting means in the peculiar specific game state A specific output (for example, relief A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising specific output means (for example, relief counter display processing (S1317)) for outputting a counter display 89).

According to the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine includes display means capable of executing a predetermined effect and game value giving means capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means. , at least a predetermined game state advantageous to the player, a game state transition means capable of transitioning from the predetermined game state to a specific game state disadvantageous to the player, and a predetermined game state performed by the display means at least in the specific game state. a predetermined event counting means capable of counting the number of times based on the event, wherein the predetermined game state includes at least a general predetermined game state and a specific predetermined game state different from the general predetermined game state; The game state includes at least a general specific game state and a specific specific game state different from the general specific game state. When the predetermined number of times is counted, or when the predetermined event counting means counts the predetermined number of times different from the predetermined number of times in the peculiar specific game state, specific information regarding the transition of the game state is suggested to the player. Specific output means for outputting a specific possible output. As a result, even if the transition to a different general specific game state or specific specific game state as the specific game state, when the predetermined number of predetermined events are counted in the general specific game state, and in the specific specific game state different from the predetermined number To allow a player to accurately recognize a game situation regarding the transition of the game state by outputting a specific output capable of suggesting specific information regarding the transition of the game state to the player when a predetermined number of predetermined events are counted. can be done. Therefore, for example, even if the game machine is powered off in a predetermined game state or a specific game state and the display trigger for the number of times based on the predetermined event becomes ambiguous, the number of times of the predetermined event in each specific game state is used as a trigger. A specific output capable of suggesting to the player specific information regarding the transition of the game state can be output. Therefore, even if an irregular event occurs, it becomes possible for the player to accurately recognize the game situation, and there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In gaming machine G1,
The specific output means is
A gaming machine G2 characterized by being configured to be capable of outputting a related specific output (for example, only the number of fluctuations) related to the specific output in the predetermined game state.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific output means is configured to be capable of outputting a related specific output related to the specific output in the predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to output the relevant specific output related to the specific output even in a predetermined game state, so that the player can be made to accurately recognize the game situation, and an effect that is easy for the player to understand is executed. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The general predetermined gaming state is
A game machine G3 characterized in that a game value that can be given to a player is different from the specific predetermined game state.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the general predetermined game state differs from the specific predetermined game state in the game value that can be given to the player. As a result, the game value that can be awarded to the player is made different between the general predetermined game state and the specific predetermined game state, and variations in the game are provided, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G3,
The game state transition means is
By the appearance of specific identification information (for example, a jackpot pattern) on the display means, it is configured to be able to shift to the general predetermined game state or the specific predetermined game state,
By establishing a predetermined condition different from the appearance of the specific identification information on the display means (for example, end condition of "normal pattern high probability time shortening state"), transition to the general specific game state or the specific specific game state configured to allow
The general specific game state and the specific specific game state are
A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the appearance probabilities of the specific identification information are configured to be the same.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state transition means is configured to be able to shift to the general predetermined game state or the specific predetermined game state when the specific identification information appears on the display means. By establishing a predetermined condition different from the appearance, it is configured to be able to shift to the general specific game state or the specific specific game state, and the general specific game state and the specific specific game state are the appearance of the specific identification information The probabilities are configured identically. As a result, by making the appearance probability of the specific identification information the same in the general specific game state and the unique specific game state that can be shifted by the establishment of a predetermined condition different from the appearance of the specific identification information on the display means, the specific identification information Even if the probability of appearance of the .

In any of gaming machines G1 to G4,
The specific output means is
A game machine G5, characterized in that it is configured to be able to display a predetermined event-related display (for example, variable number display) relating to the number of times of the predetermined event in the general specific game state and the specific specific game state.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G4, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific output means is configured to be able to display a predetermined event-related display regarding the number of times of the predetermined event in the general specific game state and the specific specific game state. Thus, even in the general specific game state and the specific specific game state, it is possible to display the predetermined event-related display regarding the number of predetermined events, so that the player can be made to accurately recognize the game situation. There is an effect that an easy-to-understand presentation can be executed.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5,
The predetermined event counting means is
The game machine G6 is characterized in that the predetermined event is not counted in the general predetermined game state, but the predetermined event is counted in the peculiar predetermined game state, the general specific game state and the peculiar specific game state.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined event counting means does not count the predetermined event in the general predetermined game state, but counts the predetermined event in the peculiar predetermined game state, the general specific game state and the peculiar specific game state. Thus, by providing a game state in which the predetermined event is counted and a game state in which the predetermined event is counted, variations are provided in the game specification regarding the predetermined event, for example, the game state is changed according to the number of predetermined events. There is an effect that it is possible to create the game of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

<H group: Normal time reduction once per small time, ceiling time reduction with multiple small times ends>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a win or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and for example, a game in which a predetermined game value is given to a player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition when the winning is won. there is a machine

In some gaming machines, for example, at least a predetermined game state can be shifted to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and different game values can be awarded to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264)).

There is a need to improve the interest in games with respect to the above-described gaming machines, etc., and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group H have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in games.

Display means (for example, third symbol display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
A gaming machine comprising a game value giving means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means,
At least, a game state transition means (for example, time-saving high A certain flag 203n or a short time low certainty flag 203m),
The specific gaming state is
At least, a general specific game state (for example, a "time saving function" enabled state by winning a jackpot) and a specific specific game state different from the general specific game state (for example, a "time saving function" enabled state by reaching the ceiling) are provided. ,
The game state transition means is
Predetermined result transition means capable of transitioning to the general specific game state based on the derivation of a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot) in a predetermined event (for example, a special symbol variation effect) that can be executed by the display means in the predetermined game state (For example, winning process (S203)),
In the predetermined game state, the number of times transition means (for example, , S5551 of relief arrival counting process (S5209);
In the general specific game state, a specific result (for example, a small win) different from the predetermined result in the predetermined event is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, "once"), so that the predetermined game state can be transitioned to Derivation transition means (for example, S6152 of jackpot end processing (S614)),
In the specific specific game state, specific derivation transition means (for example, relief reach count) with different transition conditions (e.g., "five times" winning in a small winning game) that can be transitioned to the predetermined game state with respect to the specific result in the predetermined event A game machine H1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine H1, it is a gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a predetermined effect and game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player according to the display result of the display means. and at least a predetermined game state and a game state transition means capable of transitioning to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and the specific game state includes at least a general specific game state and the general specific game state. wherein the game state transition means can transition to the general specific game state based on derivation of a predetermined result in a predetermined event that can be executed by the display means in the predetermined game state. a predetermined result transition means, a number of times transition means that can transition to the peculiar specific game state by performing the predetermined event a predetermined number of times without deriving the predetermined result in the predetermined event in the predetermined game state; In a general specific game state, a specific result different from the predetermined result in the predetermined event is performed a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined derivation transition means capable of transitioning to the predetermined game state, and the predetermined event in the specific specific game state a specific derivation transition means having different transition conditions for transitioning to the predetermined game state with respect to the specific result in . As a result, in a peculiar specific game state that can be transitioned to by performing a predetermined number of times without deriving a predetermined result in the predetermined event, it is possible to shift to the predetermined game state under a transition condition different from the general specific game state. . Therefore, for example, by setting the transition condition to the predetermined game state in the peculiar specific game state so that the specific result is less likely to occur than the predetermined number of derivations, the predetermined result is derived for the predetermined number of times of the predetermined event. To make relief measures in a peculiar specific game state generous by making it difficult for a player who is not in the peculiar specific game state to shift to a specific game state from a general specific game state and making it difficult to generate a trigger to shift from the general specific game state to a predetermined game state. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value for the player is made different between the general specific game state and the specific specific game state, and the variation of the game is enriched, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In gaming machine H1,
In the general specific game state, a predetermined number of transition means that can shift to the predetermined game state by performing the predetermined event a predetermined number of times (e.g., "100 times") Time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuations) and
In the peculiar specific game state, a specific number of transition means (for example, "general low probability A game machine H2 characterized by comprising a time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuations in the "time saving state".

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the general specific game state, a predetermined number of transition means capable of shifting to the predetermined game state by performing the predetermined event a predetermined number of times, A specific number of transition means capable of transitioning to the predetermined game state by being performed a number of times. As a result, in a peculiar specific game state that can be shifted by performing a predetermined number of times without obtaining a predetermined result in a predetermined event, a general specific game state is shifted to a predetermined game state by performing the predetermined event a predetermined number of times. Unlike the game state, by shifting to the predetermined game state when a predetermined event is performed a specific number of times, the game value that can be given to the player can be differentiated between the general specific game state and the specific specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine H1 or H2,
The specific derivation transfer means is
The game machine H3 is characterized in that the specific result in the predetermined event is configured to be able to shift to the predetermined game state by performing a specific derivation number of times equal to or greater than the predetermined number of derivations (for example, "five times").

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific derivation transition means is configured to be able to transition to the predetermined game state when the specific result in the predetermined event is performed a specific derivation number of times equal to or greater than the predetermined derivation number of times. As a result, in the peculiar specific game state, the transition from the general specific game state to the predetermined game state caused by the number of times of deriving the specific result is suppressed, and the predetermined event occurs the predetermined number of times without obtaining the predetermined result in the predetermined event. By doing so, it becomes possible to make generous relief measures in a unique specific game state that can be transferred. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of game machines H1 to H3,
The specified result is
At least, a general specific result (e.g., small hit type A) and a specific specific result different from the general specific result (e.g., small hit type B) are provided,
The specific derivation transfer means is
The game machine H4 is characterized in that the number of times of transition to the predetermined game state is different between the number of times of derivation of the general specific result and the number of times of derivation of the specific specific result.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific results include at least a general specific result and a specific specific result different from the general specific result, and the specific derivation transition means calculates the number of times the general specific result is derived and the number of the specific specific results. The number of transitions to the predetermined game state differs depending on the number of withdrawals. As a result, as a transition condition from the specific game state to the predetermined game state, the number of times of transition can be made different between the number of times of derivation of the general specific result and the number of times of derivation of the specific specific result. Therefore, by making the meaning of each specific result in the specific game state different, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine H4,
In the specific game state, a specific number of times transition means that can shift to the predetermined game state by performing the general specific result a specific number of times (for example, "1 time") (for example, time saving by winning once in small hit type A satisfaction of the termination condition), and
In the specific game state, the different number of times transition means (for example, small hit type B satisfaction of time-saving termination conditions by winning 5 times), and a gaming machine H5 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the specific game state, a specific number of times transition means capable of shifting to the predetermined game state by performing the general specific result a specific number of times, and in the specific game state, the specific specific result is different than the specific number of times Another different number of times transition means capable of transitioning to the predetermined game state by being performed a number of times is provided. As a result, as a transition condition from the specific game state to the predetermined game state, the number of times of transition can be made different between the number of times of derivation of the general specific result and the number of times of derivation of the specific specific result. Therefore, by making the meaning of each specific result different in the specific game state, there is an effect that it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In any one of game machines H1 to H5,
First predetermined event executing means (for example, first predetermined event execution means capable of executing the first predetermined event (for example, first special symbol variation effect) as the predetermined event by establishment of the first acquisition condition (for example, winning the first start port 64) For example, fluctuation start processing (S510) regarding the first special symbol),
The establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition (for example, winning a prize in the second starting port 71) can execute a second predetermined event (for example, a second special symbol variation effect) as the predetermined event. Second predetermined event execution means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S510) regarding the second special symbol);
a first storage means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for storing first information about the first acquisition condition that is satisfied when the first predetermined event is executed;
a second storage means (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 203e) for storing second information regarding the second acquisition condition that is satisfied when the second predetermined event is executed;
When the first information is stored in the first storage means and the second information is stored in the second storage means, the second predetermined event is executed with priority over the first predetermined event. A game machine H6 characterized by comprising a priority means (for example, S504 of special figure fluctuation processing (S210)).

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first predetermined event executing means capable of executing a first predetermined event as the predetermined event upon establishment of a first acquisition condition, and a second predetermined event executing means capable of executing a first prescribed event as the predetermined event upon establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. second predetermined event execution means capable of executing two predetermined events; first storage means for storing first information relating to the first acquisition condition that is satisfied when the first predetermined event is executed; a second storage means for storing second information relating to the second acquisition condition that is satisfied when a predetermined event is executed; and the first information is stored in the first storage means, and the second storage means priority means for executing the second predetermined event with priority over the first predetermined event when the second information is stored in the device. Thus, by executing the second predetermined event with priority over the first predetermined event in the specific game state, it is possible to make the transition condition based on the first predetermined event less likely to be satisfied than the transition condition based on the second predetermined event. Therefore, in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to suppress the transition to the predetermined game state due to the first predetermined event that is not recommended, so that the player can be prevented from suffering unexpected disadvantages due to unintended game results. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress it and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, for any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E6, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to A configuration limited in any one of H6 may be applied.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A6, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E6, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, and H1 to H6 is used for any one of the game machines B1 to B6. 1 may be applied.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, D1 to D6, E1 to E6, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H6 is used for any one of the game machines C1 to C6. 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, E1 to E6, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, and H1 to H6 is used for any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6. 1 may be applied.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, and H1 to H6 is used for any one of the game machines E1 to E6. 1 may be applied.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E6, G1 to G6, and H1 to H6 is used for any one of the game machines F1 to F6. 1 may be applied.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E6, F1 to F6, H1 to H6 can be used for any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6. 1 may be applied.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E6, F1 to F6, and G1 to G6 is used for any one of the game machines H1 to H6. 1 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E6, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, and H1 to H6, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine X1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E6, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, and H1 to H6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Gaming machine X2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is opened. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E6, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, and H1 to H6, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine X3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

<Seventh Embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 198 to 256, a seventh embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 198 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 199 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 198). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 200) having a large number of nails and winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 64, 71, 71a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 202) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 96). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 198). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 200), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content of the advance notice display executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as "variable effect"). Also used as

Also, the variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 200), which will be described later. For example, it is executed triggered by winning a first starting port 64, an upper second starting port 71, or a lower second starting port 71a (see FIG. 200), and a pattern (third pattern described later) is specified. This is an effect in which the result of the lottery (whether it is a big win or not) for the winning prize is presented to the player according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed after being time-varying.

Furthermore, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 200) to be described later are unified. Stage” and “Island Stage” are provided. Various effects such as the variable effects described above and the "ready-to-reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed according to the themes given to each stage.

Here, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the town stage is selected and executed, a predetermined effect (for example, screen darkening, etc.) indicating that the stage has been switched is executed when switching to the empty stage. , the stage may be shifted to an empty stage after the predetermined effect is completed. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the stage has been switched, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game through an easy-to-understand presentation.

In addition, the "ready-to-win display" refers to a display one step before the "big win display" indicating that a big win will occur in the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 200), which will be described later. . Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 201) to be described later stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 201) continues to fluctuate without stopping. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "ready-to-win display" is roughly divided into one unit of elements that constitute the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit of elements that constitute the effect is referred to as a "fluctuation element"), Developed and executed from the "normal reach" variable element, "super reach" variable element with a higher expected jackpot than the "normal reach" variable element, and similarly "normal reach" variable element Developed and executed, A variable element of "special reach" having a higher expectation for a big hit than a variable element of "super reach" is prepared.

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the variable effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the variable element of "high-speed change" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed in the variable effect so that the player cannot see it. This is performed when the player presses the frame button 22 . Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is changed repeatedly in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

Also, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 200) described later, the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach" or When it develops into the variable element of "special reach", the selection screen of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of "normal reach". It may be configured as

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as variable elements of "Super Reach" or variable elements of "Special Reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach". , according to the determination, the variable element of "super reach" and the variable element of "special reach" are executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In the seventh embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. It may be constituted by an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined.

In addition, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the side, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it is a position where the player can press it. For example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper tray 17 or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower tray 50 to be described later.

Furthermore, in the special symbol variation effect, it may be configured to execute a repeated hitting effect for prompting the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 . In this case, when the execution lottery for the repeated hitting effect is won, the execution period of the repeated hitting effect is set, and the number of pressing times of the frame button 22 is counted within the set execution period of the repeated hitting effect, and the repeated hitting effect is executed. Inside, when the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined number of times, the content of the continuous hitting performance displayed up to that time is changed (finished), and a prescribed development performance capable of winning a jackpot is executed. may be configured. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, or when the button is not pressed for the specified number of times, the continuous hitting effect may be continued or the development effect may not be executed. In this development effect, an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the player will win the jackpot may be executed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light-emitting means change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined "ready-to-win display" is performed, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps. lights up or blinks to notify that the big win is in progress or that the "ready-to-win display" just before the big win is in progress. In addition, a display lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, and has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED, which can indicate that the prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 200). ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") is applied to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 with chrome plating. .) A plating member 36 made of resin is attached.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, ie, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51 is a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 202). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of , a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the period of pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 199, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer responsible for each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery A random number generator used for the system, a clock pulse generator circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 202). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120 , the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121 , and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 503 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 202) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 200, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and a large number of nails, pinwheels, and rails 61 and 62 for guiding the balls, and a winning ball. , a variable prize winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit of the third pattern occurs, and a first special prize that is one of the third patterns (so-called special patterns). The first start port 64 that triggers the lottery of the symbol, the upper second start port 71 and the lower second start port 71a that trigger the lottery of the second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, the second symbol (so-called, A through gate 67 that triggers a lottery for normal symbols), a normal electric gate 72 that allows a ball to enter the lower second starting port 71a by being in an open state, a third symbol display device 81, and a second symbol display device. The variable display device unit 80 and the like having 83 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 .

The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the upper second starting opening 71, the lower second starting opening 71a, the ordinary electric terminal 72, and the variable display device unit 80 are made by router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like. Also, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 198) of the front frame 14. FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 200, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 198). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 202) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 200) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 200) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the central part (hereinafter, the act of shooting a ball with momentum hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as a "right-handed game". On the other hand, the act of causing the shot ball to pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is called a “left-handed game”). In the seventh embodiment, in the left-handed game, while the ball can or is likely to enter the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the lower second It is configured such that a ball is difficult or not to enter the starting port 71a. Also, in the right-handed game, while the ball can enter or is likely to enter the upper second start port 71, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the lower second start port 71a, the first start port 64 It is configured so that the ball is difficult to enter or does not enter.

Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, an arc member 70 made of resin is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

On the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 200), a special pattern provided with a state LED group 37a, a special LED group 37b, and a right-handed notification lamp 37c, which are composed of a plurality of LEDs that are light emitting means. A display device 37 is provided. The special symbol display device 37 displays each variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 202) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols is referred to as " "dynamic display") is performed, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The state LED group 37a displays the balls for which the variation display has not been performed (holding balls ) is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds (hereinafter, a round may be simply referred to as “R”) and an error display are indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors indicates various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot refers to the period from opening to closing of the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a that opens and closes the variable prize winning device 65, which will be described later, in order to divide the number of prize balls in the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, "30 seconds" have passed since the opening of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, or 10 balls have won while the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is open. It is configured to run one "round".

The special LED group 37b consists of a total of 12 LEDs, an upper LED group 37b1 consisting of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 likewise consisting of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game executed based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 64. FIG. In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 has a dynamic second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game executed based on the entry of the ball into the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a. Is displayed.

Specifically, in the upper LED group 37b1, a dynamic After displaying (in the seventh embodiment, the LEDs from the uppermost LED in the upper LED group 37b1 to the lower LED are sequentially lit one by one, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a design indicating the determination result (seventh embodiment , any one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns is stopped and displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

In addition, in the lower LED group 37b2, the upper second start port 71 provided on the right side of the game board 13 or the right side of the game board 13 and the lower side of the upper second start port 71 Dynamic display until the fluctuation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning to the lower second start port 71a elapses (in the seventh embodiment, from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2 After the LEDs are sequentially lit one by one and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a pattern indicating the determination result (in the seventh embodiment, a total of 64 types of stop patterns are displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the six LEDs. either) is displayed.

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big win, the type (type) of the big win is displayed. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) is performed to determine whether or not a ball entered into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a is a big win. When it is judged to be a big win in the judgment, the kind of big win is also judged according to the winning prize openings 64, 71, 71a, and the variable winning device 65 is driven to open and close according to each kind of big win.

As the jackpot type determined in the seventh embodiment, based on the winning to the first start port 64, "5 round time saving jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "time saving A")", "10 round probability variable jackpot (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “probability variation A”)”, and “10-round potential probability jackpot (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probability A”)” (see FIG. 205(a)). Moreover, based on the prize-winning to the upper side 2nd starting opening 71 or the lower side 2nd starting opening 71a, "time saving A" or "probability A" is prepared (refer FIG.205(b)).

Here, "normal game state" refers to a game state that is not "probability change state", "latency probability change state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "normal low probability time reduction state" , a state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol and the probability of winning a normal symbol are in a normal state (that is, a low probability state) and the opening of the normal electrode 72 is short. That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is lower than that in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state", and the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state". The normal pattern hit probability is lower than the time (equivalent to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" and "latency probability fluctuation state"), and the normal electric role 72 is configured to be open for a short time. It is

Although the details will be described later, in the case of the "normal game state", the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the lower second start port 71a when a so-called right-handed game is played A state in which it is easy to win a prize is sometimes referred to as a "wining assist state"), but is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. It should be noted that, in the "normal game state", if a ball fired in a right-handed game is detected (for example, detection of a ball passing through the through gate 67, etc.), it means that a game that is not encouraged is being executed. In order to suggest to the player and the people involved in the hall, a predetermined warning (for example, voice output of "Please return to the left-handed game" or display of "Please return to the left-handed game" on the third symbol display device 81 etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the non-recommended right-handed game in the "normal game state", and to realize the game performance according to the game specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the winning probability of the special symbols is low, a predetermined number of times ("900 times" in the seventh embodiment) are continuously won in the dynamic display. If not, as a relief measure for the player, although the probability of winning the jackpot of the special symbols and the probability of winning the normal symbols are in a low probability state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened and the normal electric combination 72 is opened. Equipped with a function (so-called ceiling function) that generates a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" that lengthens the time (hereinafter, when the probability of winning a special symbol is low probability, in the dynamic display 900 times” to enter the “normal low probability time reduction state” without winning the jackpot continuously is called “ceiling reach”, and when the probability of winning a special symbol is low, “ceiling reach” ” may be referred to as “the number of times the ceiling is reached”).

Then, the "general pattern high probability time shortening state" is a low probability state similar to the "normal game state" and the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" described later, but the jackpot probability of each special pattern is normal. As the probability of winning increases, the time of variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter, variable display of normal symbols is referred to as "variable display") is shortened, and the opening time of normal electric role 72 is increased (hereinafter, normal symbols As the probability of winning increases, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is extended. In this "normal figure high probability time shortening state", the ordinary electric member 72 provided above the lower second start port 71a in front view becomes easy to be in an open state, and the ball fired in the right-handed game A state is created in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting hole 71a.

That is, in the "general figure high probability time shortening state", although the jackpot probability of the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit by the normal symbol is likely to be derived in a short time than the "normal game state", This is a state in which the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72 is prolonged. Therefore, in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", since it is easy to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the lower second start port 71a, the prize ball based on the prize to the lower second start port 71a (For example, 1 ball/winning prize) can be obtained and the game can be played while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in hand.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" is a prescribed number of times (in the seventh embodiment, 100 times), until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the probability of winning the normal symbol is in a high probability state. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times, the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" is changed to the "normal game state".

In addition, in the "normal high probability time shortening state", "normal low probability time shortening state", "probability change state" described later or "latency probability change state" described later, the ball was shot by a left-handed game is detected (for example, detection of winning of a ball into the first starting hole 64), a predetermined alarm is issued to suggest to the player and hall officials that a game that is not encouraged is being executed. (For example, it is configured to output a voice saying "Please hit right" or display "Please hit right"). By configuring in this way, the non-recommended left-handed game continues in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" It is possible to suppress the execution of the game, and realize the game performance according to the game specifications.

Then, the "general pattern low probability time reduction state" is a low probability state similar to the "normal game state" and the "general pattern high probability time reduction state" described later, and the jackpot probability of each special pattern is normal. While the hit probability is in a state as low as the "normal game state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is "probability fluctuation state" and "normal state". High Probability Time Shortening State" (Hereinafter, while the probability of winning the normal pattern is low, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the open time of the normal electric role 72 is lengthened. may be referred to as "low-probability time-saving function".In addition, "high-probability time-saving function" and "low-probability time-saving function" may be collectively referred to as "time-saving function".) Therefore, a ball shot in a right-handed game easily enters the lower second start opening 71a.

That is, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", although the jackpot probability of the special pattern and the probability of the normal pattern are equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit due to the variable display of the normal symbol is higher than the "normal game state" This is a state in which it is easy to be drawn out in a short time, and the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72 is long. Therefore, in the "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state", since it is easy to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the lower second start port 71a, the prize ball based on the prize to the lower second start port 71a (For example, 1 ball/winning prize) can be obtained and the game can be played while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in hand.

This "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is when the jackpot is not won continuously "900 times" in the low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, that is, in the low probability state of the special pattern "900 times "While the dynamic display is performed, if the loser continues to be extracted or won a small winning pattern (hereinafter, the case where the dynamic display of "900 times" is performed in the low probability state of the special pattern is referred to as the "ceiling It is configured to shift to the "ordinary map low probability time reduction state".

In addition, the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" is a predetermined specified number of times ("1140 times" in the seventh embodiment) of special symbols after the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" is started. Until the dynamic display is executed, the variable display time of the normal symbols is shortened, and the open time of the normal electric part 72 is extended. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed for the specified number of times, the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" is changed to the "normal game state".

It should be noted that, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortened state", when the special symbol is executed a specified number of times to move to "normal game state", in the "normal game state" again, "normal pattern low probability time shortened state" It is configured so that it cannot migrate to In addition, based on reaching the ceiling, a "normal low probability time reduction state" occurs, and in the "normal low probability time reduction state", the time reduction end condition based on the number of dynamic display executions of special symbols is established. In the case of shifting to "Normal game state", if the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols reaches the number of times of reaching the ceiling again, it may be configured to be able to shift to "Normal pattern low probability time reduction state" good.

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state", as an added value after the end of the jackpot, it is a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special pattern is increased, and the probability of winning of the normal pattern is increased, and the high-accuracy time-saving function is activated. state.

That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which a big winning result by special symbols is easily derived, a winning result by normal symbols is easily derived, and further, the open state of the normal electric combination 72 is prolonged. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", since the ball fired by the right-handed game is likely to win the lower second start opening 71a, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed, and the lower It is possible to play the game while suppressing the reduction of the balls in hand by obtaining a prize ball (for example, 1 ball/winning prize) based on the prize winning to the side second start port 71a. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, since it is configured (arranged) so that the ball fired by the right-handed game can win the upper second start port 71, the upper second start port 71 and The dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed by winning both of the lower second starting ports 71a. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", it is possible to play a game in a state in which a big winning game (special game state) based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is likely to occur.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the "probability change state" is such that the special symbol jackpot probability is high until the special symbol jackpot result is derived in the "probability change state". And, when the jackpot result by the special pattern is derived, according to the jackpot type, it is configured to shift to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state".

Next, in the "latent probability change state", after the end of the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot of each special pattern is increased as an added value, and the probability of the jackpot is increased. 72 is open for a short period of time.

That is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is a state in which a big win result by special symbols is likely to be derived, while a win by normal symbols is difficult to be derived similarly to the "normal game state", and the normal electric player 72 is in an open state. is a short time.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the "latency probability fluctuation state" is configured (arranged) so that the ball fired by the right-handed game can enter the upper second start port 71, and the upper second start The dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed by the winning to the mouth 71 . Furthermore, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to facilitate the winning of the small winning game (see FIG. 204(b)), and the winning of the small winning game opens the variable winning device 65 for a certain period of time. be. Then, in the "latent probability variable state", the closing period of the normal electric element 72 is long, and the ball fired in the right-handed game rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric element 72 from the right end to the left end, and the normal electric It is possible to flow down to the side of the variable winning device 65 provided on the left side of the winning combination 72 when viewed from the front. Therefore, a small win is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the variable winning device 65 is opened, so that the opened variable winning device 65 can win a ball to win a prize ball. . In the "latency probability variable state", the variable display time of the normal symbols is long (ie, "15 seconds"), and the opening time of the normal electrode 72 is also short (ie, "0.1 seconds"). Although there is, since the normal electric supply 72 can be opened to a certain extent, it is configured to be able to win the lower second starting port 71a.

In addition, in the "latency probability change state", the special symbol jackpot probability becomes a high probability state until the special symbol jackpot result is derived in the "latency probability change state". And, when the jackpot result by the special pattern is derived, according to the jackpot type, it is configured to shift to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state".

Here, each jackpot type will be described. The jackpot type "time reduction A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the fifth round. In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, this jackpot type "time reduction A" can be selected, and after the jackpot ends "normal pattern high probability time It is configured to shift to the "shortened state".

Next, the jackpot type "Variable Probability A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. In the seventh embodiment, the jackpot type "variable probability A" can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and after the jackpot of the jackpot type "variable probability A" is completed, the state changes to "probability fluctuation state". configured to migrate with

Next, the jackpot type "probability A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a jackpot in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round. . In the seventh embodiment, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", a big hit with dynamic display of the first special symbol , or in all game states, when a jackpot is won by dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot type of this jackpot type "probability A" can be selected, and the jackpot type " It is configured to shift to the "latency probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of "latency certainty A" is completed.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 32 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction A", and the jackpot type "probability variation A". Alternatively, 31 types of display patterns corresponding to "probability A", that is, a total of 64 types of display patterns are provided. Each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type, and is associated with a random display pattern in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, while it is possible to recognize the stop display of the losing It is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a stop display.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 32 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A", and the jackpot type "latent". There are 31 types of display patterns corresponding to "OK A", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. And each display pattern does not have specific regularity for each jackpot type similarly to the upper LED group 37b1, and is previously associated with a random display pattern. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, while the player can recognize the stop display of losing, which of the jackpot types "short time A" or "probability A" is the stop display? are configured to be difficult to identify.

By configuring in this way, even when each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped, It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish which kind of jackpot only by the display result of the variable presentation, and a game property is created that makes the player guess which kind of jackpot it is, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is a lamp for suggesting a game state in which the ball is encouraged to be shot in a right-handed game. This right-handed notification lamp 37c is in a non-lighting state in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged and right-handed games are not encouraged, while in the "probability fluctuation state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, " Latency probability fluctuating state”, “Normal pattern high probability time shortening state” or “Normal pattern low probability time shortening state”, or lighted state during jackpot game. The player can recognize whether or not a right-handed game should be played by checking the right-handed informing lamp 37c and the right-handed game suggestion display on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, as a right-handed game suggestion in the third symbol display device 81, a main display right-handed instruction 89 (see FIG. 201) and an effect hitting instruction (See, for example, the right-hand hitting instruction 81d for effect in FIG. 254(d)).

The main display right-handed instruction 89 (see FIG. 201) is always displayed in synchronization with the right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37. It is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the "latency probability fluctuation state", the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", or during the jackpot game.

The effect hitting instruction is not synchronized with the right hitting notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37, and only at a specific timing, a suggestive display of a left hitting game or a right hitting game is performed. When executing the right-handed suggestion display at the timing of switching from the right-handed game to the right-handed game, or when executing the left-handed suggestion display at the timing of switching from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, perform the left-handed game "Normal game state", when a left-handed game is played due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, or when a left-handed game is played in a game state in which a right-handed game is played. Secondly, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when, for example, a hitting to the right suggestion display is executed due to the winning of the ball into the first starting port 64 .

In addition, since the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 and the effect hitting instruction are important display information that suggests the player how to hit, other display contents executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the game are displayed. (For example, the third pattern of each pattern row displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, super ready-to-win effects, etc.) are prioritized and displayed in the foreground (foremost layer).

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel (so-called simultaneous fluctuation). Since it is configured, depending on the execution state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, for example, during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol reaches the ceiling. When the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", while the variation production of the first special symbol is being executed in the third pattern display device 81, the production hitting instruction (right for production) is displayed in front of the fluctuation production There is a risk that a hint) will be displayed.

In such a case, while the left-handed game is being executed, during the execution of the variation performance of the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 during the left-handed game, the right-handed performance suggestion is made. When displayed, part of the variable effect of the first special symbol is hidden by the right-handed suggestion for effect (see FIG. 254(d)), and there is a possibility that the player will be aroused. In addition, the player is puzzled by the appearance of the right-handed suggestion for performance, even though the third symbol display device 81 is executing the variation performance of the first special symbol during the left-handed game. there is a possibility.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in order to prevent mismatching of the display contents performed by the third symbol display device 81, the display timing of the effect hitting instruction is adjusted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming aroused by the game, and to consider whether the game state and the performance execution state should be a left-handed game or a right-handed game. It is possible to accurately suggest to the player whether or not the player should play the beating game, and it is configured so as to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the game due to confusion about the game. More details are described below with reference to FIGS. 216, 253 and 254-59.

A game area of the game board 13 is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 3 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a ball entering the first starting port 64, a ball entering the upper second starting port 71, or a ball entering the lower second starting port 71a (hereinafter referred to as the first starting port 64, the upper The entry of the ball into the second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a may be referred to as "starting winning") as a trigger, the movement of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs a variable effect of the third symbol according to the game state while synchronizing with the target display, and the ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 (hereinafter referred to as the second symbol display device 83, for convenience of explanation, may be referred to as a "normal symbol display device 83") composed of LEDs capable of executing variable display of normal symbols with passage as a trigger. is provided). A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 202), which will be described later. , are displayed.

Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 201) is composed of a plurality of patterns, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 to display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the seventh embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is controlled by the main controller 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed by the special pattern display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special pattern display device 37 is performed using the third pattern of the third pattern display device 81. It is. In place of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels, LEDs, or the like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation). there is That is, during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 64, when starting winning to the upper second starting opening 71 or the lower second starting opening 71a, the first special It is configured so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed even while the dynamic display of the symbols is being executed. Also, during the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, when starting winning to the first starting port 64, the second special It is configured so that the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed even during the execution of the dynamic display of the symbols.

Here, the execution mode of each special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 for each game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 201) are used to display the variable effects corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not performed using the three symbols Z1 to Z3, and the special symbol 2 variation area 88b (see FIG. 201) described later. 2 It is configured to perform an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" where right-handed games are encouraged ”, the variation production corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed using the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3, while the variation production corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the three symbol rows Z1. ~ Z3 is not used, and it is configured to perform an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 variable area 87b (see FIG. 201) described later.

Here, with reference to FIG. 201, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described. FIG. 201 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 201(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 201(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a back pattern made of a wooden box and a number from "0" to "9". The main design with "9") has a large number on the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) have characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. almost all over the front of the wooden box. An imitation accessory pattern is added, and an even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern so as to be displayed in green and small and on the front side of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the lottery result of any of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 202) described later is a big win, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is constructed so that a jackpot is generated after the variable performance is completed. For example, if you win the jackpot type "probable variation A" with a larger number of jackpot rounds than the jackpot type "time saving A", mainly numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", "9" A variable effect is performed in which the main patterns with are aligned. In addition, when winning the jackpot type “time saving A”, there is mainly a variation effect in which even-numbered patterns, that is, main patterns with numbers “2”, “4”, “6” or “8” are aligned. will be

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is configured so that all the main symbols can appear when the jackpot type "probability variable A" is won. Specifically, for example, even when the jackpot type “probability variable A” is won, there is a case where a variation performance is performed in which the same main symbols with the numbers “2” and “8” are aligned. By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the variable performance is stopped, the content of the game value that can be given cannot be determined, and by performing the promotion performance during the big win, etc., the game variation is rich. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 201(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds is the main display region Dm in which the third pattern is variably produced. A cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of balls and the like, and the other upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main patterns are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform a variable performance. It should be noted that the arrangement of numbers may be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, the left symbol row Z1 may be arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, while the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and when performing a variable effect corresponding to the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state, the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3. →The third symbols are stop-displayed on the activated line L1 in the order of the middle symbol row Z2. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning special symbol set (displayed) for each game state. be done.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm.

The cockpit display area Db is a variable display of the balls that have entered the first starting hole 64, the upper second starting hole 71, or the lower second starting hole 71a corresponding to the special symbols set for each game state. This is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which (variable effect) has not been executed.

In the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds, there are a dynamic display of the first special symbol and a fourth symbol display area 87 for the special symbol 1 that can change in synchronization with the number of held balls, and a dynamic display area of the second special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2, which can be changed in synchronization with the target display and the number of held balls, and the above-described main display right hitting instruction 89 are configured to be displayable.

The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 includes a reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 that displays the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in numbers, and a dynamic display of the first special symbol (variation effect) It is composed of a special figure 1 variable area 87b that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 is configured to be able to display the reservation number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the range of "0" to "4" in numerical designs. Specifically, when the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved dynamic display of the first special symbol is 0, and reserved for special figure 1 When the number display 87a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 1, and the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "2". If it is, it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 2, and if the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "3", the number of the first special symbol It shows that the number of pending dynamic display is 3, and if the number of pending display 87a for special figure 1 displays "4", the number of pending dynamic display of the first special symbol is 4. indicates that there is

That is, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 is the content of the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. is displayed.

The special figure 1 variable area 87b is a display area for showing the execution and result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and is configured such that the display color of the square symbol can be changed. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special figure 1 variation area 87b is white→red→orange→yellow→green→light blue→blue→ It is configured to change at a high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, change again from white to red to . . . during execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Then, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the special figure 1 variable area 87b is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square pattern of the variation area 87b for special figure 1 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was lost, and the square pattern of the variation area 87b for special figure 1 is stopped in red, the dynamic display of the first special symbol indicates a big win. That is, the square pattern of the special figure 1 variable area 87b is displayed so as to correspond to the display contents of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the main display. In the "normal game state" displayed in the area Dm, it is configured to synchronize with the display contents of the main display area Dm.

The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 includes a reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 that displays the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in numbers, and a dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect) It is composed of a special figure 2 variable area 88b that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 is configured so that the number of reserved numbers for dynamic display of the second special symbol can be displayed in the range of "0" to "4". Specifically, when the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0, and reserved for special figure 2 When the number display 88a displays "1", it indicates that the number of reservations for dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1, and the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "2". If it is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 2, and when the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "3", the second special symbol It shows that the number of pending dynamic display is 3, and if the special figure 2 pending number display 88a displays "4", the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol is 4. indicates that there is

That is, the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 is the contents of the number of reserved balls of dynamic display of the second special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. And displayed to match, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm "general figure high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" and In the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", it is displayed so as to match the content of the number of reserved balls in the reserved design display area Db2, which will be described later.

Special figure 2 variation area 88b is a display area for showing the execution and result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, similar to special figure 1 variation area 87b, the display color of the square symbol is configured to be changeable. It is Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special figure 2 variation area 88b is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It is configured to change at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, repeat the change from white to red to . . . during dynamic display of the second special symbol. Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the special figure 2 variable area 88b is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square pattern of the special figure 2 variation area 88b is stopped in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special figure was lost, and the square figure of the special figure 2 variation area 88b is stopped in red, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to indicate that it was a big hit. That is, the square pattern of the special figure 2 variable area 88b is displayed so as to correspond to the display contents of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the main display. Synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm in the "normal high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" and "normal low probability time reduction state" displayed in the area Dm is configured as

The right-handed hitting instruction 89 for main display is a display for suggesting to the player a game state in which shooting of a ball in a right-handed game is encouraged. This main display right-handed instruction 89 is not displayed in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged and the right-handed game is not encouraged, while in the "probability change state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged. , "latency probability fluctuation state", "general pattern high probability time shortening state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", or display state during the jackpot game. The player can recognize whether or not a right-handed game should be played by checking the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for main display and the right-handed hitting notification lamp 37c.

On the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 201(b), for example, in the "normal game state", a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. . In the sub-display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, indicating that it is easier than usual to transition to a big win, and a shooting mode that is encouraged according to the game state. etc. are suggested to the player. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair, the color of the usually white headband, and the appearance of another character.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variable effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol When the ball enters the first starting port 64, or the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) changes the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (dynamic display). When a ball enters the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a while the ball is being held, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of retained balls) is retained up to 4 times at maximum. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 or the number for special figure 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 It is also displayed in the reserved number display 88a, and further, the variation effect of the special symbol corresponding to the game state is also displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the reserved symbol display area Db1 of the cockpit display area Db. be

In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved ball (number of reserved balls 1 time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed according to the game state. Designs ("○" design (white circle design) in the normal display mode) are displayed respectively, and according to the number of displayed reserved designs displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, depending on the game state The number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed (prioritized display) is displayed.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved design is displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1a, the first special design that is set to be displayed according to the gaming state Or it shows that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed one each in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, the game state Indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed and set according to is two times, and three in total, one each in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c When the reserved pattern is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern set to be displayed according to the game state is three times, and the first to fourth reserved patterns are displayed. When a total of four reserved symbols are displayed one each in the areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is four times. indicates that In addition, when the reserved design is not displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special design or the second special design set to be displayed according to the game state is 0. This indicates that there is no pending variable effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time, but only one of the lottery games can be configured to run When only one of the lottery games is executed, when one of the lottery games being executed is finished, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are stored respectively. , the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed preferentially over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation), or the first special symbol The first lottery game may be configured to be executed with priority over the second lottery game of the second special symbol (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation), or in the order of winning (so-called winning order fluctuation) A special symbol lottery game may be executed accordingly. Further, the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol may be configured to be displayed simultaneously on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the first reservation symbol display area Db1a, and execution symbols larger than the reservation symbols displayed in the reservation symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d are provided. configured to be displayed. Further, in this execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a are moved (shifted) and displayed as executed symbols.

The executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 are erased when the variable effect being executed in the main display area Dm is completed, and the displayed suspended symbols are shifted to the lower reserved symbols as the executed symbols are erased. It moves and is displayed as a pattern. Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol in the "normal game state", it was displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol. When the executed symbols are erased, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a are moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved design displayed in the second reserved design display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the first reserved design display area Db1a. Further, the reserved design displayed in the third reserved design display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the second reserved design display area Db1b. Further, the reserved design displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the third reserved design display area Db1c.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the number of suspended balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71, or the lower second starting port 71a is up to 4 times. Although configured to be held, the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the holding balls are displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. A number may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 200, the description continues. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which the ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 performs a normal symbol winning lottery due to the turn-on. This through gate 67 is only used as a lottery trigger for variable display of normal symbols, and is constructed so that prize balls or the like are not paid out even when a ball passes through. In addition, a normal prize winning opening capable of acquiring a normal symbol lottery opportunity may be provided, and a normal symbol lottery opportunity may be obtained, and a predetermined prize ball may be paid out.

On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, an ordinary electric terminal 72 is arranged. The normal electric element 72 is mainly composed of a retractable plate 72a and a normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the retractable plate 72a.

The main controller 110 (see FIG. 202) of the seventh embodiment normally maintains the protruding/retracting plate 72a of the normal electric 72 in a projecting state to cover the upper side of the lower second starting port 71a in front view. , to prevent the ball from flowing into the lower second starting port 71a. Then, when winning is won by the variable display of the normal symbols, the normal electric solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the hive plate 72a of the normal electric 72 protrudes for the predetermined time. The game board 13 is driven from the state to the immersed state in which the player is immersed in the game board 13 so that the ball can flow into the lower second starting port 71a, and the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is displayed on the right side in the front view. It is configured to be in a state in which the falling balls are likely to enter the lower second start opening 71a, that is, in a prize assisting state.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a win in the variable display of normal symbols changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the winning probability of the normal pattern is set to a low probability state (eg, 70/100), and the normal pattern In the variable display, by making it more difficult to win than the "probability fluctuation state" and "normal figure high probability time reduction state", it is difficult to put the haunt board 72a of the ordinary electric worker 72 into the immersion state (open state), and the "probability It is configured so that it is difficult to win the lower second start port 71a from the "fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time shortening state". On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state", the winning probability of normal patterns is set to a high probability state (for example, 99/100), and in the variable display of normal patterns, "normal game state", " By making it easier to win a hit than "normal figure low probability time shortening state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the haunting plate 72a of the ordinary electric officer 72 is made easier to enter (open state), and the lower second start port 71a is configured so that it can easily win a prize.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in the high-probability state of the normal symbols, the variable display derives a win with a high probability (that is, 99%), so the "probability fluctuation state" in which the normal symbols are in a high-probability state; In the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", many of the balls fired in the right-handed game are configured to win the lower second start port 71a. On the other hand, among the low probability state of the normal symbol, in the “normal game state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”, although the variable display can derive the hit with a lower probability than the high probability state (that is, 70%), the normal phone Since the opening time of the combination 72 is short, it is difficult for the ball shot in the right-handed game to enter the lower second starting port 71a from the high probability state. In addition, among the low-probability state of the normal pattern, in the "normal low-probability time reduction state", the variable display is in a state that can derive the hit with a lower probability than the high-probability state (that is, 70%), but the normal phone Since the opening time of the role 72 is as long as the "probability fluctuation state" and the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the ball fired in the right-handed game is "normal game state" and "latency probability fluctuation It is configured so as to be able to win the lower second starting port 71a from "state".

As a result, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" (or "latency probability fluctuation state"), the ball fired in the right-handed game is lowered By making it possible to play the game while winning to the second starting port 71a, the player can play his own game from the "normal game state" by paying out the prize balls based on the winning to the lower second starting port 71a. A game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls in hand.

In addition, as in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", instead of changing the probability of winning the normal symbol from the "normal game state", according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal electric It is also possible to change the time for which the haunting board 72a of the role 72 is immersed (opened) or the number of times the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 is immersed (opened) per time. Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary figure high probability time reduction state", the time for the haunting board 72a of the normal electric role 72 to be immersed is made longer than the "normal game state", or one hit In , the number of times that the haunting board 72a of the normal electric combination 72 is immersed may be made larger than the "normal game state" and the "latency probability change state". In addition, in the “probability fluctuation state” or “normal pattern high probability time shortening state”, the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased, the immersion time of the haunt board 72a of the normal electric role 72 is increased, and the normal electric role 72 At least two of increasing the number of retractions of the protruding/retracting plate 72a may be performed at the same time.

The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the seventh embodiment), the normal electric power provided above the lower second start port 71a when viewed from the front. The winning combination 72 is activated for a predetermined period of time, and when it stops with a symbol other than the predetermined symbol ("X" symbol in the seventh embodiment), the normal electric winning combination 72 is deactivated (the closed state is maintained). is configured as follows.

The number of reserved balls of the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the above-described second symbol reservation lamp 84 (hereinafter referred to as the second symbol reservation lamp 84, for convenience of explanation, "normal symbol reservation lamp 84" ) is also illuminated. Four normal design reserve lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of reserves, and arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81 . Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed according to the number of lighted normal symbol reserved lamps 84. - 特許庁

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83, as in the seventh embodiment, as well as the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. A part of 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting hole 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. A game nail or the like is planted around the first starting port 64 so that about 6 balls (so-called S1=6) fired in a left-handed game win a prize per minute. When the ball enters the first starting port 64, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by turning on the first starting port switch. (Refer to FIG. 202), a lottery for the first special symbol is made. Then, the dynamic display according to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the first special symbol according to the game state. A variation effect based on is executed. The first starting hole 64 is also one of the prize winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game.

On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, there is provided a lower second starting port 71a through which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric circuit 72 is in the open state. To this lower second start port 71a, the game state that the normal electric role 72 is easy to open (that is, "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state") , game nails are planted in the periphery so that about 50 to 60 balls fired in a right-handed game win prizes per minute. When the ball enters the lower second start port 71a, the lower second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the lower second start port switch is turned on. Then, main controller 110 (see FIG. 202) draws a jackpot lottery for the second special symbol. Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation based on the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. A performance is performed. The lower second starting hole 71a also serves as one of the prize winning holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

On the downstream side of the through gate 67 and on the upstream side of the retractable plate 72a of the ordinary electric motor 72, an upper second starting port 71 through which a ball can enter is provided. A game nail or the like is planted around the upper second starting port 71 so that about 30 to 40 balls fired in a right-handed game win prizes per minute. In the vicinity of the upper second starting port 71 (directly above the front view), there is no ordinary electric machine 72, etc., and the ball fired in the right-handed game is the upper first starting port 71 in any game state. 2 starting port 71 is configured to be able to win a prize to a certain extent. When the ball enters the upper second start port 71, the upper second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the upper second start port switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is made in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 202). Then, the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the second special symbol is displayed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. A variation effect based on is executed. The upper second starting hole 71 is also one of the prize winning holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters the game.

A horizontally long rectangular big prize winning opening is provided in the substantially central portion of the variable prize winning device 65 on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 202) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so that the stop symbol of the big win is displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, three identical symbols ("777 etc.)) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot game. After that, according to the type of jackpot, a jackpot opening/closing plate 65a provided in the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and the game state is shifted to a special game state (jackpot game) in which the ball easily enters the jackpot. In this special game state, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a, which is normally closed, is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses, or until 10 balls are won). . In addition, when a lottery result that becomes a big hit is derived in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols, the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened due to the passage of the through gate 67, and the game state is changed to the big winning game. It may be configured to transition. In this case, for example, in the "normal game state", when the dynamic display of the first special symbol capable of suggesting whether or not to shift to the jackpot game wins the jackpot and the jackpot pattern appears, the special that becomes the jackpot After the dynamic display of the symbols is completed, a ball shooting effect prompting the player to execute a right-handed game and enter the ball into the through gate 67 (for example, the third symbol display device 81 reads "Right-handed"). Enter the ball into the gate and start the jackpot!", or display a rightward pointing arrow pattern on the upper right part of the screen, etc.), and display a predetermined jackpot waiting screen until the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is configured so as not to start the jackpot performance related to the jackpot game. Then, a ball is shot according to the ball shooting effect, the ball enters the through gate 67, and the ball is detected by a through switch (not shown), thereby starting a big win state and opening and closing the big prize opening. As the board 65a is opened, the big win standby screen is switched to the big win performance of the big win game, and the big win performance is started. The display area for the ball shooting effect is smaller than the display area for the big win effect. Further, even when the big win effect is started, the ball shooting effect may be continuously displayed together with the big win effect.

When the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened, it is closed when a predetermined time elapses after opening or when a predetermined number of winnings is detected, and after the closure, the large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is opened again. be. The opening/closing operation of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is configured to be repeatable up to, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player. As a value (game value) is given, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

Affixing spaces K1 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be viewed through window 35 (see FIG. 96).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65, 71 and 71a are guided through an out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. The winning balls of the winning holes 63, 64, 65, 71 and 71a are guided to the ball discharging path and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as the balls passing through the out hole 66.

Next, referring to FIG. 202, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 202 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing a program, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 sets the dynamic display and variable performance of each special symbol in the jackpot lottery, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

In addition, the ROM 202 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reservation number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a fluctuation pattern table 202e, a jackpot open table 202f, a small hit open table 202g, a normal pattern random number table 202h, and a normal pattern. At least a fluctuation table 202i, an ordinary electric service open table 202j, and a time saving end condition table 202k are stored. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 203, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. perform lottery for big hits, setting of dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, setting of variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of variable display in the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. Therefore, it is used in MPU 201 of main controller 110 . In the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, various control timings, game state transitions, etc. will also be described with reference to FIGS. 204 to 213. FIG.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third pattern display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot pattern. A jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting a variable performance mode, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and variation pattern selection. A variation type counter CS1 used for .

In addition, for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 83, the normal pattern per counter C4 is used, and for the initial value setting of the normal pattern per counter C4, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used.

Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of “4 milliseconds”, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228). , and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 as appropriate. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved balls related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and each of these areas includes a first start port 64, an upper second start port 71 or a lower side Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting port 71a.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, "0 to 9999"), and reaches the maximum value (eg, "9999" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999"). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter of a range of "0 to 9999". This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 227).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the seventh embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64 (start win), the first reserve first to It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reservation areas in the fourth area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (starting winning), it corresponds to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (second special symbol) It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation area in any one of the second reservation first to fourth areas provided in the second reservation ball storage area 203e.

The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a big hit. Also, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the random number value, it is judged as a big hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 204, details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be described. FIG. 204(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a1 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1") corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202. , FIG. 204(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a2 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2") corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202. be.

The special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 random number table 202a2 of the seventh embodiment are respectively for each set value, the low probability state used when the game state is a special symbol low probability state, and the game The state is divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the high probability state of the special design which has a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the low probability state of the special design.

Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently for each set value. In addition, an increase in the number of large-hit random numbers necessary for shifting from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers corresponding to the losing. That is, when increasing the number of big-hit random numbers in order to shift from a low-probability state to a high-probability state, the number of losing random numbers is reduced, and the decrement is assigned as the number of big-hit random numbers. Thus, by varying the number of big win random numbers according to the game state, the probability of winning a big win is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

On the other hand, in each special symbol, the number of small hit random numbers is set to be the same for each set value. That is, the number of small winning random numbers in the first special symbol is configured to be the same number for each set value. Similarly, the number of small winning random numbers in the second special symbol is also configured to be the same number for each set value. In this way, by setting the number of small winning random numbers to be the same for each set value in each special symbol, the rate of giving the game value considering only the small winning game at all the set values in each special symbol can be increased. be equivalent.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers for each setting of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers for all set values. configured to Also, the number of small hit random numbers of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured not to change for each setting. That is, the increased amount of the number of the jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is compensated by decreasing the number of the missing random numbers and allocating the reduced amount to the jackpot random numbers, and the first special pattern and the second special pattern. The number of small hit random numbers is the same for each first special symbol or second special symbol setting. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate the ball payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, thereby reducing an increase in man-hours when designing game specifications. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values associated with the setting change is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 that can be obtained when it is easiest to stay in the game. Compensation is performed from the combination of the most random numbers (that is, a losing random number) other than . By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to make setting determination difficult from the number of appearances of the losing combination, which is the most frequently occurring combination in the variation effect of the first special symbol. Therefore, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 can be made difficult to be detected by setting only the appearance rate of the big win having a lower appearance probability than the losing combination as the determining element set by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (that is, setting value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player see through the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values associated with the setting change is compensated for by increasing the number of the jackpot random number counter C1, which corresponds to a losing combination that gives no game value to the player. Compensate from the number.

A losing combination is a combination that does not give a game value, unlike a big winning combination or a small winning combination. It is a role that is not clearly (extremely) displayed. Here, if both the number of large winning random numbers corresponding to the big winning game and the number of small winning random numbers corresponding to the small winning game, which are likely to be clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp, are changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rate of the two elements of the big winning game and the small winning game with the data lamp, it becomes easy to guess the setting discrimination of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, for example, when the player sees through the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to a low setting (for example, set value "1"), the player does not play a game with the pachinko machine 10 and pachinko. There is a possibility that the operation of the machine 10 will be lowered.

Therefore, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values associated with the setting change of the probability setting value is not given to the player in the jackpot random number counter C1, and is not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp. By configuring to compensate from the number of losing random numbers corresponding to , the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is hardly seen through from the appearance rate of the small wins, with only the appearance rate of the big wins set by the player as the determining element. be able to. Therefore, the discriminating element of the probability setting value is limited to the appearance rate of a combination based on one random number, and for example, even if the setting is low (i.e., setting value "1", etc.), it is set to the player. The game can be continued without being detected, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

As shown in FIG. 204 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the seventh embodiment, when the setting value is "1", the jackpot random number that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 The number of values of the counter C1 (random number value for jackpot) is 32, and the value "0 to 31" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 random number table 202a1 for jackpot. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is It is set so that 32/10000=0.32/100 (that is, 0.32%).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 221, and the value "0 to 220" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the first special symbol with the set value “1” (that is, “probability fluctuation state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 221/10000=2.21/100 (that is, 2 .21%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 7 times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that are small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 are both 5000, The value "32 to 5031" in the case of the low probability state, or the value "221 to 5220" in the case of the high probability state is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 5000/10000=50.00/100 (that is, 50.00%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 4968 pieces, the value "5032 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 4779 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "5221 to 9999" is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 4968/10000 = 49.68/100 (that is, 49.68%), and the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 4779/10000=47.79/100 (that is, 47.79%).

That is, at the setting value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the first special symbol is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. , while compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers increased from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" (that is, 4968 or less). is configured to be

Thus, in the first special symbol, the random number value (small winning random number value) that becomes a small winning number is set to a number that is likely to be selected in the same manner as the losing random number value. That is, in the lottery game in the first special symbol, it is set to be easy to win the losing and the small hit.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 34, and the value "0 to 33 ” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is It is set so that 34/10000=0.34/100 (that is, 0.34%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 223, and the value "0 to 222" is , is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the first special symbol with the set value “2” (that is, “probability fluctuation state” or “latency probability fluctuation state”) is 223/10000=2.23/100 (that is, 2 .23%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so that the jackpot is about seven times easier than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the set value "1" As in the case of , both are 5000, and the value "34 to 5033" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "223 to 5222" in the case of a high probability state are defined in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 (set ). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "2" is 5000/10000=50.00/100 (that is, 50.00%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 4966 pieces, the value "5034 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 4777 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "5223 to 9999" is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 4966/10000=49.66/100 (that is, 49.66%), and the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state”) is set to be 4777/10000=47.77/100 (that is, 47.77%).

That is, at the setting value "2", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the first special symbol is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. , while compensating for the decrement, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are the number of the big hit random numbers that are larger than the number of the losing random numbers in the "normal game state". It is configured to be within the range (that is, 4966 or less).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability as the set value "1" (both 50.00%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.32%→0.34%, High probability state: 2.21%→2.23%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 36, and the value "0 to 35 ” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is It is set so that 36/10000=0.36/100 (that is, 0.36%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random number) that becomes a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 225, and the value "0 to 224" is , It is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the first special symbol with the set value "3" (that is, "latency probability change state" or "probability change state") is 225/10000 = 2.25/100 (that is, 2 .25%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 7 times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the set value "1" And as in the case of "2", both are 5000, the value "36 to 5035" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "225 to 5224" in the case of a high probability state is the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is stipulated (set) in That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "3" is 5000/10000=50.00/100 (that is, 50.00%) in any game state, and the special symbol has a low probability. It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. With 4964 pieces, the value "5036 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 4775 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "5225 to 9999" It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") The probability of losing is set to 4964/10000=49.64/100 (that is, 49.64%), and the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 4775/10000=47.75/100 (that is, 47.75%).

That is, at the set value "3", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the first special symbol is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game. , while compensating for the decrement, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are the number of the big hit random numbers that are larger than the number of the losing random numbers in the "normal game state". It is configured to be within the range (that is, 4964 or less).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a has the same small hit probability as the set value "2" (both 50.00%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 0.34%→0.36%, high-probability state: 2.23%→2.25%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 204(b), in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the seventh embodiment, when the set value is "1", it is a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. The number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number) is 32, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and the value "0 to 31" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 32/10000=0.32/100 (that is, 0.32%), like the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 221, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 220" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the second special symbol jackpot probability in the high probability state of the second special symbol with the set value "1" (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 221, like the first special symbol. /10000=2.21/100 (that is, 2.21%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be about seven times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that are small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 are both 7500, The value "32 to 7531" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "221 to 7720" in the case of a high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 7500/10000=75.00/100 (that is, 75.00%) in any game state, and the low probability of the special symbol It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 2468 pieces, the value "7532 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 2279 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "7721 to 9999" 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "1" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 2468/10000=24.68/100 (that is, 24.68%), and the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state”) is set to be 2279/10000=22.79/100 (that is, 22.79%).

That is, at the setting value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of special figure 2 is reduced by the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers increased from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the ``normal game state'' (that is, 2468 or less). is configured as

Thus, in the same manner as in the first special design, a random number value (small winning random number) is set in the second special design as well, and compared to the losing random number in the second special design, it is very large. The number is set so that it is easy to select. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, it is set to make it easier to win a small win than a big win or a loss.

Although the details will be described later, when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the role at the time of each small hit is different. is configured to

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 opened by winning the small win game is set to be short. (see FIG. 220). Further, the lottery result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is likely to be derived in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, and in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol is small. Even if the ball is switched to the right-handed game at the timing of winning the winning game, it is difficult to win the variable prize-winning device 65 because the opening time of the variable prize-winning device 65 is short, and the ball is shot by performing the right-handed game. As a result, there is a high possibility that the player will end up with a loss. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the right-handed informing lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is turned off, and is used for the main display. The right hitting instruction 89 is also in a non-display state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed at the time when the small winning is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is displayed. It is configured so as to stop the dynamic display at a lost pattern (see FIG. 235). Furthermore, in the "normal game state", the time until the dynamic display result of the second special symbol is derived is longer than the time until the dynamic display result of the first special symbol is derived. Since it is configured to be easily obtained or won (see FIGS. 208 to 213 to be described later), the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" is the small winning in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is easy to be stopped by

That is, the small winning in the dynamic display of the first special symbol does not play the role of winning prize balls, but the role of stopping the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in the "normal game state". have a function. By configuring in this way, a right-handed game is performed in the "normal game state" to win the upper second start port 71, and by the winning, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is won as a small win. Unexpected prize balls in terms of game specifications can be suppressed, in which prize balls are won by winning in the variable prize winning device 65 opened by winning.

On the other hand, when a small win is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the opening time of the variable winning device 65, which is opened by winning the small win game, is configured to be long (Fig. 220). reference). In addition, the lottery results of the dynamic display of the second special symbol are likely to be derived because the right-handed game is performed in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", and "probability fluctuation state". and "latency probability fluctuation state", and among these, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol wins a small hit in the "latency probability fluctuation state", it is possible to easily win a prize to the variable prize winning device 65 (See FIGS. 217 and 218, which will be described later).

That is, the small winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol serves as a role for winning prize balls in the "latency probability fluctuation state".

A specific area may be provided in the variable winning device 65, and a jackpot may be generated by opening the variable winning device 65 and allowing game balls to pass through the specific region. Further, a non-specific area (for example, a loss hole) different from the specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65, and when the variable winning device 65 is opened and the game ball passes through the non-specific region, no big win occurs. It may be configured to end the small winning game. By configuring in this way, the variable winning device 65 is opened when winning the small winning game, the game ball is made to enter the variable winning device 65, and the winning game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big win. Or, the winning game ball passes through the non-specific area and ends without becoming a big hit, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, from the start of the small winning game, the game ball passes through a specific area and becomes a big win, passes through a non-specific area and ends the small winning game without becoming a big win, or the small winning game ends. In the third symbol display device 81, until the small winning game ends without winning the game ball in the variable winning device 65 opened at the start, or until the result of either is derived. It may be configured to direct whether or not a jackpot will be achieved. In this case, for example, in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins a small hit, and the left-handed game is notified to shift to the right-handed game in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65. perform a performance. After that, simultaneously with the start of the small win game, a challenge performance is started to determine whether or not the third pattern display device 81 will win the big win, and the game ball passes through the specified area to become the big win or passes through the non-specified area. Either the small winning game ends without becoming a big win or the small winning game ends without winning the game balls in the variable winning device 65 opened with the start of the small winning game. Triggered by the derivation of the result, the challenge performance is terminated, and the execution of the V win performance suggesting to the player that the game state can be shifted by winning the V prize unlike the challenge performance. may be configured to start In addition, the execution time of the above challenge effect is set in advance, and if the ball does not pass through the V prize or the non-specific area even after the execution period has elapsed, there is a possibility that an error such as a ball clogging has occurred. Therefore, it may be configured to execute error processing (for example, error notification effect) as a winning error.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 34, and the value "0 to 33" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 34/10000=0.34/100 (that is, 0.34%), like the first special symbol.

In addition, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 223, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 222" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol with the set value "2" (that is, the "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 223, like the first special symbol. /10000=2.23/100 (that is, 2.23%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 7 times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low probability state.

Here, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the set value "1" As in the case of , both are 7500, the value "34 to 7533" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "223 to 7722" in the case of a high probability state are specified in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 (set ). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "2" is 7500/10000=75.00/100 (that is, 75.00%) in any gaming state, and the low probability of the special symbol It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 2466 pieces, the value "7534 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 2277 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "7723 to 9999" 2 It is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 2466/10000=24.66/100 (that is, 24.66%), and the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 2277/10000=22.77/100 (that is, 22.77%).

That is, at the set value "2", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of special figure 2 is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the number of jackpot random numbers for the increase due to the change of the set value are within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state". (that is, 2466 or less).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "1" (both 75.00%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.32%→0.34%, High probability state: 2.21%→2.23%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 36, and the value "0 to 35" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 36/10000=0.36/100 (that is, 0.36%), like the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that become a jackpot in a high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 225, similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 224" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol jackpot probability in the second special symbol high probability state (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the set value "3" is 225, like the first special symbol. /10000=2.25/100 (that is, 2.25%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 7 times more likely to hit the jackpot than the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random numbers) that will be small hits in the low probability state and high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the set value "1" And as in the case of "2", both are 7500, the value "36 to 7535" in the case of a low probability state, or the value "225 to 7724" in the case of a high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is stipulated (set) in That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol with the set value "3" is 7500/10000=75.00/100 (that is, 75.00%) in any game state, and the special symbol low probability It is set so that the probability of winning a small prize is the same between the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers. In 2464 pieces, the value "7536 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (losing random numbers) that will be lost in the case of a high probability state is the remaining 2275 numbers other than the big hit random numbers and the small hit random numbers, and the value "7725 to 9999" is a special figure. 2 It is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state") is set to be 2464/10000=24.64/100 (that is, 24.64%), and the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state”) is set to be 2275/10000=22.75/100 (that is, 22.75%).

That is, at the setting value "3", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of special figure 2 is reduced by decreasing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" with the highest staying rate in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the number of jackpot random numbers for the increase due to the change of the set value are within the range of the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state". (that is, 2464 or less).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value "2" (both 75.00%), but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.34%→0.36%, High probability state: 2.23%→2.25%).

As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" is ”, “Normal figure high probability time shortening state” or “Normal figure low probability time shortening state” while compensating from the number of losing random numbers, “Normal game state”, “Normal figure high probability time shortening state” Alternatively, it is configured to be within the range of the number of random numbers that are lost in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the number of small hit random numbers is changed to "normal game state", "normal figure high probability time reduction state" or "normal figure low probability time reduction "state" and "probability change state" or "latent probability change state" are not changed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate the ball payout rate for each set value by considering only the increment of the jackpot random number value, thereby suppressing an increase in the number of man-hours when designing the game specifications. be able to.

It should be noted that the jackpot random number table 202a may be provided with a random number that wins the time-saving symbol that will shift to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" without going through the jackpot state. In this case, the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling and the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" by winning the time saving pattern can occur at the same time. However, in such a case, the configuration is such that priority is given to the state that is more advantageous for the player. For example, if the number of time reductions of "500 times" can be given due to the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state" due to winning the time saving pattern, the ceiling is reached and the transition to "normal low probability time reduction state" Since the number of times of time reduction ("1140 times") that can be given when doing so increases, it is configured to prioritize the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling.

Also, from the start of the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big win, passes through a non-specific area and ends the small winning game without becoming a big win, or starts the small winning game. until the small winning game ends without winning the game ball in the variable winning device 65 opened along with , or until the result of either is derived, the third symbol display device 81 displays the big winning It may be configured to direct whether or not it becomes. In this case, for example, in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins a small hit, and the left-handed game is notified to shift to the right-handed game in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65. perform a performance. After that, simultaneously with the start of the small win game, whether or not the third symbol display device 81 will be a big win, and a shooting suggestion effect (for example, "Aim for V!" etc.) for shooting a ball to win a prize in a specific area are displayed. A performance during V opening to be executed is started, and a game ball passes through a specific area and becomes a big win, passes through a non-specific area and ends a small win game without becoming a big win, or ends a small win game. Triggered by the fact that either the game ball is not allowed to enter the variable winning device 65 opened with the start and the small win game ends or the result is derived, the effect during V opening is switched. Then, it may be configured to start execution of a V acquisition performance suggesting to the player that the game state can be shifted by winning a V prize, unlike the performance during V opening. If V wins during the small winning game, after the small winning game is completed, the game state is shifted to the big winning game, and the game value that is more advantageous to the player than the small winning game is given in the big winning game. can be configured to Furthermore, it may be configured such that when a big win is won, the ball can always enter the specific area.

Returning to FIG. 203, the description continues. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot. in the case of a counter that can take the value of ", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in the seventh embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, the jackpot is selected from the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area as the first reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the upper second starting opening 71 or the lower second starting opening 71a, the second reserve of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the upper second starting opening 71 or the lower second starting opening 71a Of the second holding first to fourth areas of the ball storage area 203e, it is stored in the big hit type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area as the second holding area where the big hit random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number (jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot, That is, if it is a random number that becomes a loss or a small hit (losing random value or a small hit random value), the variation pattern in the fluctuation production and the type of stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are lost or small hit be of the hour. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (jackpot random number value) that will result in a jackpot, a variable effect The fluctuation pattern and stop type in will be those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. This jackpot type table 202b includes a special-figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a special-figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. and are provided.

Here, with reference to FIG. 205, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described. Figure 205 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and Figure 205 (b) is also stored in the ROM 202 It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 205(a) and 205(b), the jackpot type table 202b is divided into the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a table in which the value of C2 is associated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, although the jackpot probability of the special symbols is in a low probability state, the special symbols are the specified number of times (100 in the seventh embodiment). times), the hit probability of the normal pattern is high probability, and the jackpot type "short time A" corresponding to the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 10 rounds, the next jackpot Until then, the jackpot type "probability change A" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" in which both the jackpot probability of the special pattern and the hit probability of the normal pattern are in a high probability state, and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the normal pattern of the pattern There is a jackpot type ``potential probability A'' corresponding to a ``latent probability fluctuation state'' in which the jackpot probability of special symbols is in a high probability state until the next jackpot, although the hit probability is in a low probability state.

The special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 are configured so that the jackpot types that can be selected based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot are different. A value that can be taken by the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the is associated.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 205(a), when the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs in the "normal game state", the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type "short time A" Values "0 to 34" are associated, and values "35 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with the jackpot type "probability variable A". Also, if the first special symbol jackpot occurs in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type " The value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 34" is associated with the time saving A", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "35 to 99" is associated with the jackpot type "probability A".

Therefore, in the lottery for the first special symbol in the "normal game state", the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d is When the value is a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is selected from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "time saving A" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "variable A ” can be selected.

In addition, in the lottery of the first special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the first reserved ball storage area If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reservation areas of 203d is a jackpot value, in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area The jackpot type associated with the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2 can be selected from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "short time A" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "probability A" can be selected.

Therefore, when a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the ``normal game state'', the jackpot type ``short time A'' is 35% and the jackpot type ``variable probability A'' is 65%. becomes. Also, if you win a jackpot with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", The jackpot type "short time A" will be elected at a rate of 35%, and the jackpot type "probability A" will be 65% instead of the jackpot type "variable probability A".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in the left-handed game, the first start port 64 can be won and the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed, while the upper second start port 71 or the lower side Since it is difficult to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol because it is difficult to win the second start port 71a, in the game state of the left-handed game (that is, "normal game state"), the first special symbol is configured so that the dynamic display of

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 205(b), when the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in all game states, the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type "time reduction A" is associated with the value of "0 to 34", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "35 to 99" is associated with the jackpot type "probability A".

That is, in the lottery for the second special symbols in all game states, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a big hit. , the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area can be selected from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type "time saving A" can be selected, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type "potential A" ” can be selected.

Therefore, when a big win is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the big win type ``short time A'' is 35% and the jackpot type ``probability A'' is 65%.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the right-handed game is not encouraged (not recommended or prohibited) in the "normal game state", and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" The time until the result is derived is longer than the time until the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived (see FIGS. 208 to 213 described later), and further , the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is configured to be stopped as a losing symbol by winning the small hit of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol is displayed in the "normal game state". A lottery result by dynamic display of symbols is substantially difficult to derive.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207, the game mode in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, and the game state transition conditions and transition destinations in each game state will be described. Figure 206 shows, in each game state, the timing of transition to the game state, the special symbol jackpot probability, the normal symbol hit probability, the encouraged ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the first special symbol fluctuation time, the second It is a list explaining the variation time of 2 special symbols, and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right. Also, FIG. 207 is a diagram showing the launch mode in each game state and the shift destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type and the like. Although FIG. 207 also shows the transition of the game state when the game is played in the non-recommended shooting mode, the description thereof will be omitted here for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 206, the transition to the "normal game state" is triggered by dynamic display of special symbols in the factory default state, the RAM clear state, and the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" 100 times. If (so-called end of power supply. See Figure 207), or if the dynamic display of special symbols in the "general pattern low probability time reduction state" is executed 1140 times (so-called end of power supply. See Figure 207 ), and

Further, as shown in FIG. 206, in the "normal game state", as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol winning probability is also in a low probability state. Furthermore, in the "normal game state", the left-handed game is encouraged, and the ball shot in the left-handed game mainly wins the first starting port 64. - 特許庁Then, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "5 seconds to 190 seconds", and the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 is "20 seconds to 190 seconds". (see FIGS. 208 to 213 to be described later). In addition, in this "normal game state", when a right-handed game is performed, the firing mode is detected by the through gate 67 or the like, and based on the detection, a voice is generated in order to suppress the shooting in the right-handed game. The output device 226 (see FIG. 202) or the like is configured to execute the prohibition of hitting to the right.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is when the jackpot is not won continuously "900 times" in the low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, that is, the low probability of the special pattern While the dynamic display of "900 times" is performed in the state, it is the case that the winning continues to be extracted or the small win is won (see FIG. 207).

In addition, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol hit probability is also in a low probability state, but the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is long (see FIG. 221). Furthermore, in the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter the upper second start port 71, and the low probability time reduction function is activated. You can enter the lower second starting port 71a. Then, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", and the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 is also "2 seconds to 190 seconds". (see FIGS. 208 to 213 to be described later). In addition, in this "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Then, the opportunity to shift to the "general figure high probability time reduction state" is the winning of the jackpot type "shortening of working hours A" (see Figure 207).

In this "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", as described above, while the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is a high probability state. Furthermore, in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", as in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the upper second start port 71. , It can win the lower side 2nd starting mouth 71a in which the high-precision time saving function is operating. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is "2 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 208 to 213 to be described later). It should be noted that, in this "general figure high probability time shortening state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "probability variation state" is the winning of the jackpot type "probability variation A" (see Fig. 207).

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is in a high probability state, and the normal symbol winning probability is also in a high probability state. Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter the upper second start port 71, and the lower side where the high-accuracy time-saving function is operating You can win the second starting port 71a. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is "2 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 208 to 213 to be described later). In this "variable probability state", right-handed games are encouraged, so even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the opportunity to shift to the "latency probability fluctuation state" is the winning of the jackpot type "latency probability A" (see FIG. 207).

In addition, in the "latency probability change state", as described above, while the jackpot probability of special symbols is in a high probability state, the probability of winning in normal symbols is in a low probability state. Furthermore, in the "latency probability variable state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and although the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the upper second start port 71, the "normal figure high probability time reduction state" and Since the time saving function is not operating like "probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", it is difficult to win a prize to the lower second start port 71a. Then, while the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol 1 is performed in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds", the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol 1 is "2 seconds to 190 seconds" ” (see FIGS. 208 to 213 to be described later). In this "latency probability variable state", since right-handed games are encouraged, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 203, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of, for example, "0 to 99", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the seventh embodiment, depending on the pending number of suspended variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the rough effect mode of the variable effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and at the time of losing is determined. selected. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, a long pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "long") in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected for each effect mode and a variation time shorter than the long pattern and a short pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "short") in which a shorter fluctuation time than the middle pattern is likely to be selected. It is

Specifically, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, and "normal reach" as "reach display" "Normal reach" effect mode in which only the variable element is executed, "Super reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and the same "normal reach" change Any one of six presentation modes can be selected, including a "special reach" presentation mode in which a variable element of "special reach" is executed by developing from the element.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, there are a "non-reach (long)" production mode, a "non-reach (middle)" production mode, and a "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (long)" production mode, The "reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode may be collectively referred to as "the "non-reach" production mode". In the third symbol display device 81 in which . This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop and "ready-to-win display" does not occur.

In addition, the variable element of "high-speed variation" is, for example, in the variable performance of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 201) is , a variable element that is rapidly scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third pattern is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third pattern cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the previously stop-displayed variable production is irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, specific production modes ("non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode) are excluded. It is configured so that the variable element of "low speed variation" is performed at the

The "low speed variation" variable element means that, in the third symbol variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the "high speed variation" variable element, the third symbol is displayed at a speed that is visible to the player. A moving element that scrolls to In this "low-speed variation" variable element, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in order while allowing the player to recognize the display contents of the third symbol. When the same third symbol is stopped in two symbol rows to be stopped and displayed first (for example, left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 201)), it is assumed that "ready-to-win display" occurs and "normal ready-to-win" is displayed. While it develops into a variable element, when a different third pattern stops in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 which are stopped and displayed first, the remaining pattern row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is finished. is configured to Details of each variable element including the variable element of "high-speed variation" or the variable element of "low-speed variation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "low speed variation" variation element is performed after the "high speed variation" variation element is performed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stop in order, A different third pattern is stopped in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped first, the remaining one pattern row Z2 is stopped, and one variation effect is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the "low-speed variation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed variation" is performed, and the "high-speed variation" variation is performed. After the completion of the elements, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped at the same time, and the third symbol different from the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (for example, the two symbol rows that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode). is stopped, the other symbol row Z2 is also stopped, and the variation effect of 1 is completed.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode means that the same third pattern is stopped in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped and displayed first in the variation production of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81. Immediately after that, the "normal reach" variable element is executed, and other "reach display", that is, one of the production modes of "reach display" that does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" be.

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "super reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

Among the presentation modes, the "special reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "special reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the seventh embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, the jackpot random number counter C1 among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting port 64 It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the stop pattern selection counter C3 according to the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of variable performances of both special symbols currently on hold (number of pending balls) The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the values is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) of both special symbols in standby.

Also, in the seventh embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number of reservations table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of pending balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode, which is a rough mode of the variable effect, is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variable presentation is determined based on the selected presentation mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the variation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability variation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency" Depending on whether it is "probability fluctuation state", "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal game state", and (3) how many pending ball numbers of the variable production are held, the production mode This is for changing the selection ratio of .

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the stop patterns, that is, the "non-reach" performance mode, the "normal reach" performance mode, the "super reach" performance mode, and the "special reach" performance, are used when the jackpot lottery is won and when the jackpot lottery is lost. The degree of expectation for a big win is changed for each performance mode by configuring the mode selection ratio to be different. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the ``non-reach'' performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected.

By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode in which it is easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the acquired result of the lottery is a big win, the stop pattern table 202d makes it easy to select an effect that makes it easy to win a big win and makes it difficult to select an effect that makes it difficult to win a big win. Based on, it is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) which is a rough content of the variable performance. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and a performance mode (stop pattern) of a variable performance is selected based on a stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that makes it difficult to win a big win. Configure to select. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third pattern in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win in the variable performance and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. In the case of the variable performance, it is difficult for the big win to occur, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode (stop pattern), the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, as the second reason, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol is the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) based on balls entering the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a in the state of reaching .

Specifically, the number of standby times for the variation production of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and since the variation production is executed for at least a certain period of time, the "probability In the game state where the ball is likely to enter the lower second start port 71a in the "fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the maximum reserved ball of the second special symbol Easy to reach numbers. In these game states, if you select a variable effect with a long variable time, the ball entering the lower second start port 71a in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached occurs frequently, and the lower side The lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be acquired even though the ball is entered into the second starting port 71a. In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached, if a variable performance with a long variation time is selected, the first special symbol is suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first start port 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player judges that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the first start hole 64, and the variable effect is terminated and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. Until then, the game is interrupted by stopping the shooting of the balls. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the game state that is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special pattern or second special symbol), and close to (or match) the maximum number of reserved balls The number of held balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variable time is likely to be selected. As a result, the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is reached It is possible to suppress the entrance to the ball.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start within the fluctuation time of the variable effect being executed If the ball is not entered into any of the openings 71a, the next variable effect cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demonstration screen or the like. When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Without it, I lose interest in the game. In addition, since the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, it is difficult for the player to enter the ball into the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will be recognized as a pachinko machine 10, and that the game machine 10 will be judged to be a machine with which it is difficult to obtain game value, and the game on the pachinko machine 10 will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the number of pending balls of the variable effect is small, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variable time is likely to be selected. there is As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the third symbol display device 81 to be in a situation where the variation performance is not performed, and to maintain the execution state of the variation performance in the third symbol display device 81 for a long time.

Further, as a fourth reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is a so-called simultaneous variation machine capable of simultaneously executing dynamic display of the first special symbol and dynamic display of the second special symbol in parallel. However, the special symbols to be executed (recommended) for each game state are preset (regulated) as game specifications, and in order to actively draw the special symbols to be executed for each game state, it is assumed that , It is configured to give a predetermined penalty (penalty) when a special symbol lottery opportunity that is not desired to be executed in a predetermined game state (unencouragement) is acquired.

Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state", a left-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification, and the left-handed game is performed, and a jackpot game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. While obtaining the game value of the big win game, the game property of whether the big win type ``short time A'' or ``variable probability A'' is realized according to the type of the big win. In addition, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" and "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", the right-handed game is encouraged in advance as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and the time saving function is effective. To realize a game property as to whether or not a jackpot game is won in the dynamic display of special symbols during the period. Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state", a right-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification, and the next big-hit game will be what kind of big-hit type while the right-handed game is performed and the winning assistance state is maintained. Realize the playability of whether or not. In addition, in the "latent probability variable state", a right-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and the small winning game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. To realize a game property as to whether or not the next big win game will be the kind of big win while obtaining a game value by a game.

Therefore, in the "normal game state", the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the left-handed game is encouraged, Execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the right-handed game is encouraged in the "probable time reduction state" and "latency probability fluctuation state". Here, if the game is not executed according to the game specifications described above, in particular, the act of executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol while executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" is performed, a game result different from the ball payout rate based on the game specifications initially set may be derived, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in the "normal game state", when a plurality of dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended (for example, four), the newly started second special The dynamic display of the symbols is performed for a longer time (for example, "20 seconds") than the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed during the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The dynamic display of the second special symbol can be stopped as a lost symbol by winning a small hit in the display. By configuring in this way, when the ball is made to enter the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a that causes the dynamic display of special symbols that are not encouraged as a game specification, the second By lowering the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of special symbols, the efficiency of giving a game value can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to make the player hesitate to execute the dynamic display of the special symbols for which the dynamic display is not encouraged, thereby suppressing the execution of a game different from the assumed game specifications, thereby preventing the player from entering the hall. disadvantage can be reduced.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", left-handed games are not encouraged as game specifications, Even if the non-encouraged game (ie, left-handed game) is played, the game value obtained by the player is set lower than when the recommended game (ie, right-handed game) is played. . For this reason, since it is not a game mode that is disadvantageous to the game hall, no particular penalties are provided.

Here, details of the pending number table 202c will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 and 209. FIG. Figure 208 is a diagram schematically showing a special figure 1 reserved number table 202c1 corresponding to the first special symbol, Figure 209 schematically shows a special figure 2 reserved number table 202c2 corresponding to the second special symbol It is a schematic diagram.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the first starting port 64, whether the variation effect is appropriate and Based on the game state at the time and the total number of reservations of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol at that time as well, refer to the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1, and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d6 It is configured. In addition, when performing the variation performance of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, whether the variation performance is appropriate and the game state at that time And, referring to the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2 based on the total number of reservations of the second special symbol fluctuation effect at that time, it is configured to select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d6. . Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d6 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c1 for special figure 1 in FIG. 3", the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 210(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Also, when the loss or small hit is extracted in the "normal game state", when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "4", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 210(b) ) is selected. On the other hand, when extracting the jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 210(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Then, at the time of losing or small hit extraction of "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", any number of retained balls Also, the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 211(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Also, when extracting the jackpot of "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", stop The C table 202d3 (see FIG. 210(c)) of the pattern table 202d is selected.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2 in FIG. 209, when extracting a loss or a small hit in the "normal game state", the E table of the stop pattern table 202d regardless of the number of reserved balls 202d5 (see FIG. 211(b)) is selected. Also, when extracting a jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 210(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

Then, at the time of losing or small hit extraction of "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time shortening state" or "normal high probability time shortening state", the number of held balls of the second special symbol is "1 piece , the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 210(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. In addition, when extracting a loss or a small hit in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time shortening state" or "normal high probability time shortening state", the number of held balls of the second special symbol is "2 4”, the F table 202d6 (see FIG. 211(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Next, when the "latent probability fluctuation state" is lost or a small hit is extracted, the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 211(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls. Also, when extracting a big hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 210(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of held balls.

In addition, when extracting a jackpot in the dynamic display of any special pattern, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" When the first special symbol is lost or a small hit is extracted, or when the second special symbol is lost or a small hit is extracted in the "normal game state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the stop pattern according to the number of retained balls Table 202d may be configured differently. For example, when a big win is won and the number of held balls is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured so that a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected.

In this case, for example, in each rendering mode in which "ready-to-reach display" is executed, a rendering mode in which only the time of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. . By configuring in this way, for example, when the variation production is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four times, even if the variation element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 5 seconds, At the time when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" ends (when the variable element of the 5-second "high-speed variation" is recognized), the "ready-to-win display" may occur in the variation performance. Therefore, even if the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the rendering mode in which the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" rendering mode is executed is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variable performance will result in a big hit or a loss at the time of execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" for 5 seconds.

In addition, in the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2, at the time of the 100th round loss or small hit extraction of the "normal figure high probability time shortening state", that is, the consecutive game state ends and shifts to the "normal game state" The stop pattern table 202d for the dynamic display (specific state) of the different special symbols is individually set so that the variation time is a fixed time (for example, "20 seconds") regardless of the number of held balls. may be configured. By configuring in this way, while executing the continuous game end effect (for example, the first effect) that informs the player that the continuous game state is over, It is possible to inform the player of the number of big hits (so-called number of consecutive games) and the number of winning balls, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2, when extracting the 1st to 4th rotations of the "normal game state" or the small hit, that is, the "general figure high probability time reduction state" (eg, the first game state) At the timing when the dynamic display of the special symbol that becomes the 100th spin or a small hit ends, and the consecutive game state ends and shifts to the "normal game state" (for example, the second game state), the second special The stop pattern table 202d of the dynamic display (for example, specific conditions) that can remain as the reserved ball of the pattern is set individually, and any number of reserved balls is set for a certain period of time (for example, "0.5 seconds") It may be configured to have a variable time. By configuring in this way, the end timing of the continuous game end effect executed at the time of the 100th round loss or small hit extraction in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" can be set in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state". From the end of the dynamic display of the 100th spin loss or small win (for example, the first time), the dynamic display of the 100th spin loss or small win in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" At the end, extend the last dynamic display of the remaining 2nd special symbol reserved ball until the end (for example, the second time), and the dynamic display of up to 5 rotations as one ending performance It can be shown, and the degree of expectation of winning a big win can be increased in the continuous villa end presentation.

In addition, in the special figure 2 reservation number table 202c2, any lottery result of the "probability fluctuation state" (loss, small hit or jackpot extraction) and any number of reserved balls for a certain period of time (for example, "0 .5 seconds”). By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the time from the jackpot game that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" to the winning of the next jackpot, and as a result, the "probability fluctuation state" can be achieved. From the big winning game to shift to the next big winning game, the third pattern display device 81 can make it look like one big winning game. In this case, during the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot state, the text message "Waiting for the jackpot" will continue to be displayed, and the dynamic display of special symbols will be limited to the mini reel display, and the jackpot will be won and the next It is constituted so as to switch to the jackpot performance again at the timing when the jackpot state starts. That is, the big hit standby production is a production executed based on the execution of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state", and the big hit production is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is an effect in a big win state derived by executing a dynamic display that becomes a big win.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211. FIG. FIG. 210(a) schematically shows an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 210(b) schematically shows an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 210(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 211(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 211(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 211(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, and any of the "non-reach (middle)" presentation modes are not allocated. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(b), in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. In addition, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio.

That is, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected on the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode on the B table 202d2. is configured as On the other hand, in the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2, each "reach display" is configured to be selected at the same rate.

Therefore, the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are selected so that the long effect mode and the middle effect mode are different only in the "non-reach" effect mode, so the A table 202d1 is selected in comparison with the B table 202d2. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance tends to be relatively long. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to shorten the variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the A table 202d1.

In this way, in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the pending variable production. configured to For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in which the variable effect time is relatively short is selected. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved.

Also, for example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small, in order to ensure the ball entry time to the first start port 64 (the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a), A "non-reach (long)" performance mode having a longer variable performance time than the "non-reach (middle)" performance mode is selected. As a result, the ``non-reach (long)'' performance mode with a longer variable presentation time than when the ``non-reach (middle)'' presentation mode is selected can be performed, so that the ball enters the first starting port 64. - 特許庁It becomes easy to secure the time, and by increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is executed can be maintained. .

In the seventh embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the first start port 64 , the determination of the variable performance based on the entry of the ball into the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, and the determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variation performance based on the entry, substantially It is configured such that the same presentation mode is selected.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a losing variable performance, either one of the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable performance. The table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 have a "non-reach (long)" effect mode, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, or a "special reach" effect mode. are set to the same value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 allocated to .

That is, based on the number of pending balls of the variable production, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the "non-reach" production mode is selected or the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is selected. , and substantially the same presentation mode is selected, with only the time of the variable element of the "high-speed variation" being different. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same (similar) even if the game state changes (for example, the number of held balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice" is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of starting winning, the contents of the variable presentation to be executed are substantially the same (similar), and the pre-reading In the variable performance that is the target of the notice, it is possible to execute the performance that does not cause any inconsistency with the contents of the pre-reading notice.

As the look-ahead effect, a so-called look-ahead continuous effect may be performed in which the effect is continuously performed over a plurality of dynamic displays (variable effects). In this case, for example, in the "normal game state" in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the upper second starting port 71 than the winning to the first starting port 64, the variation effect of the second special symbol is given priority over the variation effect of the first special symbol. (So-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation), a plurality of starting winnings that can generate dynamic display of the first special symbol are acquired and the value is stored in the first reserved ball number counter 203a. By being there, the above-mentioned look-ahead continuous effect is performed in response to the dynamic display of the plurality of first special symbols. Here, in the situation where the look-ahead continuous effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, that is, before the execution time of the look-ahead continuous effect elapses, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is generated. When winning a prize, the variable performance of the second special symbol is executed preferentially over the variable performance of the first special symbol, so that the read-ahead continuous performance being executed is terminated, and the game state changes depending on whether the jackpot is won or not. It is configured to execute a variation performance of the second special symbol indicating whether it can be changed. By configuring in this way, for example, when game specifications such as a big win are determined when the look-ahead continuous effect is performed for a predetermined number of times, the variation corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol won on the way By executing the look-ahead continuous performance also in the performance, for example, by continuing the look-ahead continuous notice for a predetermined number of times or more, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in game specifications such as confirmation of a big win, and to prevent the occurrence of inconsistencies in the content of performance. Since it is possible to provide a game in which it is difficult for the game to occur, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4", The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”.

Note that the C table 202d3 is a stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of a big win, and since "ready-to-win display" always occurs, it is set so that the "non-ready-to-win" effect mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 211(a), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode ("0" to " 99"), the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, and each of the "reach display" effect modes are not assigned the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Therefore, "probability fluctuation state", "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" dynamic display that becomes a loss or a small hit of the first special symbol The stop type of is set to always be a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode. In addition, the stop type of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "latency probability fluctuating state", which is a loss or a small hit, is always set to be a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 211(b), in the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "normal reach" effect mode ("0" to "99"). The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the stop type of the dynamic display that becomes a loss or a small hit of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" is set to always be the "normal reach" effect mode.

By configuring in this way, the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" can be executed for a longer time than the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol can be executed. During the execution of the dynamic display, by winning a small hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be stopped as a losing symbol, which is recommended as a game specification. By reducing the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the ball is awarded to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a that causes the dynamic display of the special symbol that does not exist , the efficiency of giving the game value can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make the player hesitate to execute the dynamic display of the special symbols for which the dynamic display is not encouraged, thereby suppressing the execution of a game different from the assumed game specifications, thereby preventing the player from entering the hall. disadvantage can be reduced.

On the other hand, even if a small win is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the motion of the first special symbol is performed based on the small win of the second special symbol. The display is configured not to stop (abort). For example, in the "normal game state", when a relatively long effect (for example, a "special reach" effect mode of a big hit, etc.) is executed in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, a right hit is erroneously executed. It is possible that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed by playing the game. In this case, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is interrupted by deriving a small win in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the big win is won in spite of the great effort. There is a risk that the player will suffer a great loss because the jackpot will not be awarded. Therefore, even if a small hit is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, by continuing the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed, an unexpected disadvantage to the player. can be prevented in advance.

In addition, when a small hit is derived in the dynamic display of any special symbol, the other special symbol may be stopped (discontinued, interrupted). In addition, while the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not stopped (stopped, interrupted) in the derivation of the small winning in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the derivation of the small winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol It may be configured to stop (stop, interrupt) the dynamic display of one special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 211(c), in the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in the F table 202d6, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. )” effect mode and the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode are also set so as not to be selected.

Therefore, as shown in the C table 202d3, in the variable effect at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the "special reach" effect mode>"super reach" effect mode>"normal reach" effect mode, and the A table 202d1, B As shown in the table 202d2 and the F table 202d6, in the variable effect at the time of losing, the selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "normal reach" effect mode > "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. there is Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player by the performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

From the above, the type of special symbol, the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of pending balls of the variable effect at that time By determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, the game By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on the situation in which is performed, a performance mode for enhancing the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be selected.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened A table 202d may be provided. Also, it may be configured to select the effect mode based on the total reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Furthermore, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d having completely different selection rates for each effect mode may be provided according to the number of pending balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, in performing a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice", the number of pending balls at the time of deciding the pre-reading notice execution The number of pending balls at the time of execution of the variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. In such a case, it is necessary to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the processing complicated.

Returning to FIG. 203, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 227). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting hole 64, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first reservation first to fourth areas. Also, at the timing when the ball wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a Of the second reserve first to fourth areas provided in the second reserve ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserve area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored stored in

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation time (rough variation pattern) of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determine the time of variation. The audio ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the fine pattern variation mode based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1. Also, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as the variation pattern table 202e, a variation pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 loss/small hit used when the first special symbol is lost, and a variation pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 big win used when the first special symbol is a big win. A pattern table 202e2, a special figure 2 loss/small winning variation pattern table 202e3 used when the second special symbol is lost, and a special figure 2 big winning variation pattern table 202e4 used when the second special symbol is a big hit are prepared. It is

Figure 212 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e1 for the special figure 1 loss/small hit stored in the ROM202, Figure 212 (b) is a special figure stored in the ROM202 It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table 202e2 for 1 jackpot. In addition, FIG. 213(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss/small hit stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 213(b) is stored in the ROM 202 It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 jackpot. As shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, each variation pattern table 202e1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of losing or small hit, "E0: non-reach / long" referred when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, and "non-reach (middle) 'E1: non-reach/middle' referred to when the production mode is determined, and 'E2: non-reach/short' referred to when the 'non-reach (short)' effect mode is determined , "E3: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, "E4: super reach" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined, and "special It is divided into "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Reach" effect mode is determined.

In addition, as the effect mode at the time of the big hit, "E3: Normal reach" referred when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E4: Super reach" referred when the "super reach" effect mode is determined For "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined.

A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area with the first reserve ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random value), that is, When the value is a loss or a small hit, the stop pattern table 202d is based on the game state at that time and the number of balls held at that time with reference to the special figure 1 reservation number table 202c1. is selected, and an effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the selected effect mode, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 is determined. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is It is determined as a variation pattern in the suspended variation performance.

In the special figure 1 loss/small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when the first special symbol is lost or a small hit, "E0: non-reach/long" has an overall fluctuation time of "15 seconds". One variation pattern (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time") of "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 212(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach/long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for "Variation element of", and only "Variation element of "High speed variation (long)" + Variation element of "Low speed variation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol, "high-speed change (long)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

Here, each variable element constituting the variation pattern will be described. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of "high speed variation", the variable element of "low speed variation", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" A variable element, a "revariation" variable element, is provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. When the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the like is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the variable production (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). ), and when the “non-reach (middle)” production mode is selected, “5 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the variable production (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “high-speed fluctuation (medium)”), When the "non-reach (short)" effect mode or the like is selected, the variable effect is performed for "2 seconds" at the beginning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed change (short)"). It should be noted that when the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the later-described "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" is started after the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "10 seconds" is executed, and it is determined whether or not the third symbol is visibly scrolled and varied to generate "ready-to-win display". It is a variable element to show. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode are selected, and the "non-reach (long)" production mode, " When the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode is selected, it is performed for "5 seconds" after the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation".

That is, in the "non-reach (middle)" production mode or the "non-reach (short)" production mode, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, each pattern row of the third pattern display device 81 is changed to "low-speed fluctuation is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop) without going through the variable elements of . In addition, when the variable element of this "low-speed variation" ends, the variable effect may end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" rendering mode includes the variable element of "high speed variation" of "10 seconds" and the variable element of "low speed variation" of "5 seconds". A variation production is configured with a variation pattern including. In addition, in the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the variable elements of "high-speed variation" of "5 seconds". Furthermore, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable effect is configured with a variation pattern of only the "high-speed variation" variable element of "2 seconds".

The variation element of "normal reach" is the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "reach formation symbol") in the two symbol rows that stop first in the variation element of "low speed variation". It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur depending on the result of the variation of the symbol row. This "normal reach" variable element is performed for "5 seconds" after the "low speed change" variable element when the "normal reach" effect mode or the like is selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying the "jackpot display", and the "super reach" A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" variable element, and a pattern that once displays a temporary "loss display" and then executes a "re-fluctuation" variable element are prepared. It is

The variation element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variation element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "battle effect"). This "super reach" variable is performed "40 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "missing display" appears.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the remaining symbol row continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variable element of "normal reach", and is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing a special effect (for example, "competition effect") different from the predetermined effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "160 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-fluctuation" after the "failure display" appears is prepared.

In addition, it is configured to develop into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" after executing the variable element of "normal reach", but instead of this configuration, reach formation after "low speed change" It may be configured such that when the symbols stop, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" develops directly without going through the variable element of "Normal Reach". Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display", and the "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which "big win display" appears after execution of the variable element of "re-variation".

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of the "missing display", the variable elements of the "re-variation" are not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-fluctuation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "loss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so the "loss display" or " If you go in the case of "small hit display", there will be a discrepancy in the performance. Therefore, the fluctuation element of this "re-fluctuation" is selected only in the big hit fluctuation pattern tables 202e2 and 202e4 (see FIGS. 212(b) and 213(b)), and the loss/small hit fluctuation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e3. (See FIGS. 212(a) and 213(a)) is configured so as not to be selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E1: non-reach/middle" includes "only "high-speed variation (medium)" variation elements" with an overall variation time of "5 seconds" One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 212 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of "fast fluctuation (medium)"" It is "0 to 9" and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (medium)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (medium)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E2: non-reach/short" includes "only "high-speed variation (short)" variation elements" with a total variation time of "2 seconds" One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 212(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach/short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" It is "0 to 9", and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, "only the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E3: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" variation element + variation element of “normal reach”” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 212(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ( "0 to 9") is associated with "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach'". In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "variation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E4: Super Reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" ' variable element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'' is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 212(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 9" for "element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element are associated with ("0 to 9"). there is In other words, in the case of the "super reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: Special Reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" ' variable element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach'' is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 212(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach' is '0 to 9', and the variable element of 'high speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low speed fluctuation' + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element” is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element are associated with ("0 to 9"). there is In other words, in the case of the "special reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "Variable element of 'special reach'" is selected.

In addition, since the variation pattern at the time of losing or small hit of the first special symbol is determined as the variation pattern as it is by the performance mode, the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. . In addition, although selection is performed using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used together for selection (selection of presence/absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 212(b), the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the first special symbol is hit will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the first reservation ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit, the reservation number for special figure 1 By referring to the table 202c1, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area A rendering mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E3: normal reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Revariation" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Two variation patterns are selectably prepared as "variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 212(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed Variation pattern of "variation element + variation element of "normal reach"" is 30%, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation" + variation element of "normal reach" + "re-variation It is set so that the variation pattern of "variable element of" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element" is easily selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring so that the fluctuation pattern of ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is also selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 212(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the special figure 1 jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" fluctuation factor + “re-fluctuation” fluctuation factor” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured so that a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'" is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 212(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 50%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Special Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "variation element" variation pattern and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation The fluctuation patterns of the elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be equally expected in any variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213(a), the variation pattern table 202e3 for special figure 2 loss/small hit referred to when the second special symbol is lost or small hit will be described. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the second reservation ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value (jackpot random value) for a jackpot, that is, a loss or a small hit. If it is a value, refer to the reservation number table 202c2 for special figure 2, select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the number of reservation balls at that time, and the same reservation An effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the selected effect mode, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 is determined. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is It is determined as a variation pattern in the suspended variation performance.

In the special figure 2 loss/small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when the second special symbol is lost or a small hit, "E0: non-reach/long" includes the total fluctuation time "15 seconds" " One variation pattern (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time") of "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 213(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach/long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" "0 to 9" for "Variation element of", and only "Variation element of "High speed variation (long)" + Variation element of "Low speed variation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variation element of “high-speed variation (long)”+variation element of “low-speed variation””. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "high-speed change (long)" variable element + "low-speed change" variable element" is always selected as the variable pattern. be.

In addition, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E1: non-reach middle" cannot be selected as an effect mode, so it is provided in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3. and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E2: non-reach/short" includes "only "high-speed variation (short)" variation elements" with a total variation time of "2 seconds" One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 213(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach/short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" It is "0 to 9", and is set so that only "only 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' fluctuation elements" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 can take. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation elements”. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variable effect of the second special symbol, "only the "high-speed change (short)" variable element" is always selected as the change pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E3: normal reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with an overall variation time of "20 seconds" variation element + variation element of “normal reach”” is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 213(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" variable element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 that is referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ( "0 to 9") is associated with "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach'". In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "variation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E4: Super Reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with total variation time of "60 seconds" ' variable element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'' is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 213 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 9" for "element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'super reach'", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element are associated with ("0 to 9"). there is In other words, in the case of the "Super Lee" production mode in the variable production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + Variable element of "super reach" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E5: Special Reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" ' variable element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach'' is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 213(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation Element + variable element of 'normal reach' + variable element of 'special reach' is '0 to 9', and the variable element of 'high speed fluctuation (long)' + variable element of 'low speed fluctuation' + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element” is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss/small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take "High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element are associated with ("0 to 9"). there is In other words, in the case of the "special reach (middle)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern must be ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" variable element + variable element of “special reach”” is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213(b), the variation pattern table 202e4 for the special figure 2 jackpot, which is referred to when the second special symbol hits the jackpot, will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area with the second reservation ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit, the special figure 2 reservation number By referring to the table 202c2, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area A rendering mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is reserved in the reservation area. It is determined as a variation pattern in the variation production.

In the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E3: normal reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + " "Normal reach" variable element" and ""High speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Revariation" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Two variation patterns are selectably prepared as "variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 213(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "0 to 2" for "Normal reach" fluctuation element", ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation "Element" is "3 to 9".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed Variation pattern of "variation element + variation element of "normal reach"" is 30%, "variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low speed variation" + variation element of "normal reach" + "re-variation It is set so that the variation pattern of "variable element of" is selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of “variation factor of” is likely to be selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring so that the fluctuation pattern of ""high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is also selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E4: Super reach" includes ""high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "60 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns are selectably prepared: "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 213(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 3" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "4 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variable element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Super Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" ” variable element + “re-fluctuation” variable element” is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, it is configured so that a variation pattern of "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation element of 'low-speed variation' + variation element of 'normal reach' + variation element of 'super reach'" is also selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E5: Special Reach" includes ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation with an overall variation time of "180 seconds" Element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" and ""High Speed Variation (Long)" variable element + "Low Speed Variation" variable element + " Two variation patterns of "normal reach" variation element + "special reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation element" are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. It is

In the example shown in FIG. 213(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation "0 to 4" for "element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element", ""high speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" "5 to 9" for the variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 that is referred to when executing the second special symbol variation effect, "high speed variation (long)" variation element + " "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 50%, ""High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + " It is set so that the variation pattern of "Normal Reach" variation element + "Special Reach" variation element + "Re-variation" variation element is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, ""high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "variation element" variation pattern and ""high-speed variation (long)" variation element + "low-speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element + "super reach" variation element + "re-variation" variation The fluctuation patterns of the elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be equally expected in any variation pattern.

Here, referring to FIG. 214 to FIG. 218, in each game state, the winning mode of the ball to the through gate 67, the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, The progress of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display (dynamic display, hereinafter the same) of the first special symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special symbol 1") and the second special symbol (hereinafter, "special The relationship between the progress of the variable display of "symbol 2") and the driving mode of the ordinary electric part 72 and the variable winning device 65 will be described. Also, in FIGS. 215 and 216, the case where the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reach the ceiling in the variable display of each of the special symbols 1 and 2 in the "normal game state" will be described.

Figure 214 shows, in the left-handed game at the time of the "normal game state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate 67, the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, and the normal symbol It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display, the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the driving timing of the normal electric part 72 or the variable winning device 65. Also, FIG. 215 is a timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling due to the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". Furthermore, FIG. 216 is a timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling due to the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state". In addition, FIG. 217 shows that in the right-handed game at the time of "probability fluctuation state" and "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state", through gate 67, first start port 64, upper second start port 71 or lower second start The relationship between the detection timing of the ball in the mouth 71a, the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the special symbol 1, and the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the driving timing of the normal electric part 72 or the variable winning device 65 is schematically shown. It is a timing chart schematically shown. Furthermore, FIG. 218 shows the detection timing of the ball at the through gate 67, the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a in the right-handed game at the time of the "latency probability fluctuation state", It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the driving timing of the normal electric part 72 or the variable winning device 65.

In addition, in the "normal game state", the right-handed game is not encouraged (deprecated, prohibited), and the right-handed game in the game state is substantially difficult to execute, so the game A description of the right-handed game in the state is omitted. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", left-handed games are not encouraged (left-handed games When executed, it is difficult for the player to obtain game value), and the left-handed game in this game state is not encouraged as a game specification, so the explanation regarding the left-handed game in this game state is omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 214, when a ball is shot in a left-handed game in the "normal game state", the ball is not detected in the through gate 67 through which the ball can pass only in a right-handed game. Since the variable display of the symbols is not executed, the normal electric solenoid that is opened based on the result of the variable display of the normal symbols is not driven either. Also, when the ball is shot in the left-handed game in the "normal game state", the ball is not detected at the upper second start port 71 and the lower second start port 71a through which the ball can pass only in the right-handed game. It is configured.

On the other hand, a ball shot in a left-handed game in the “normal game state” can enter the first start port 64 . Then, based on the winning to the first starting port 64, the variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed. The variable display of this special symbol 1 is executed in '5 seconds' at the shortest and '190 seconds' at the longest, and is configured to derive the result of either a big win, a small win or a loss.

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 1, when a loss is derived, the variable winning device 65 is not opened. Also, when a small win is derived, the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, but since the opening time is as short as "0.1 seconds" (see FIG. 220), the small win Even if a right-handed game is played at the time of winning, the ball shot by the right-handed game flows down the right side of the board surface, and the variable prize winning device 65 is in a closed state by the time it reaches the variable prize winning device 65. Therefore, the variable prize winning device 65 is configured so as to make it difficult for balls to win prizes. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won in the variable display of the special symbol 1, the right hitting notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is turned off, and the main display right The hitting instruction 89 is also in a non-display state. Further, as described above, the small hit in the variable display of the special symbol 1 serves to stop the variable display of the special symbol 2 being executed in the "normal game state".

For this reason, the small win of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" is regarded as a role equivalent to a loss for the player, so the right-handed game is not performed when the small win is won, and the left-handed game is continued. is configured to

On the other hand, in the variable display of the special symbol 1, when the jackpot game is won, the jackpot game is played by turning the jackpot solenoid 65b (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the “jackpot opening/closing solenoid”) a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined period of time. (5 rounds or 10 rounds. Maximum "30 seconds" for each round. Interval time "1 second". Opening time "30 seconds". Ending time "10 seconds".) Turns on and the variable winning device 65 is released. . At this time, the player is urged to change the shooting mode from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and a large amount of prize balls can be won by winning the balls to the open variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加In addition, in the jackpot ending, the total number of prize balls won by the player until the transition from the "normal game state" to the jackpot game state and again to the "normal game state" is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured to execute a notification effect (predetermined effect).

In addition, in the "normal game state", if a ball wins in the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed, the special symbol 2 will be lost. The variable display is configured so that the "normal reach" production mode of "20 seconds" is uniformly selected, and the variable display of the "non-reach" production mode of special symbol 1 is executed at maximum "15 seconds". configured to be Furthermore, about half of the variable display of the special symbol 1 is configured so that a small win can be won (see FIG. 204), and the winning of the special symbol 1 to the small win causes the variation of the special symbol 2 being executed. The display is configured to stop as a lost symbol. By configuring in this way, when the ball is made to enter the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, which causes the variable display of the special symbols which are not encouraged as a game specification, the special symbol 2 By lowering the execution efficiency of the variable display, it is possible to lower the efficiency of giving the game value and give priority to the giving of the game value based on the big hit of the variable display of the special symbol 1. - 特許庁

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, in the "normal game state", the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 1, and the case of shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the probability of winning a special symbol is low, a predetermined number of times ("900 times" in the seventh embodiment) is continuously displayed in the dynamic display. When a big win is not won, that is, when either a failure or a small win appears continuously for a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display, as a relief measure for the player, the special symbol big win probability and the normal Although the winning probability of the pattern is in a low probability state, the change time of the normal pattern is shortened and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is lengthened. .

As shown in FIG. 215, the variable display of "899th rotation" and "900th rotation" in the special symbol low probability state is executed by the variation display of the special symbol 1, and the end of the "900th rotation" variation display. At the same time, it reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in the "normal game state", the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol 1. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 215, the variation effect of the special symbol 1 of "899th rotation" and "900th rotation" is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time as the "900th rotation" is completed, the ceiling In order to reach and shift to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", the main display right hitting instruction 89 and production hitting method instruction (main display right hitting instruction 89 and production right hitting instruction 81d. Fig. 254 (d ).) to suggest to the player that he/she should play a right-handed game.

When the right-handed game is started by this suggestive display, the ball is first detected at the through gate 67 arranged at a position through which almost all the balls fired in the right-handed game can pass. Then, based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, variable display of normal symbols is executed. Variable display of this normal pattern, because it is a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", as well as "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", uniformly executed in "0.1 seconds" and is configured to derive a result of either hit or miss. In this "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", although the probability of winning in the variable display of normal patterns is low, it is configured to win with a certain probability (that is, "70%"). In addition, it is configured such that the time for which the ordinary electric player 72 is opened when winning is "5.8 seconds" and the number of times of opening is once. Therefore, by opening the normal electric combination 72, most of the balls fired in the right-handed game can enter the lower second starting port 71a arranged on the lower side of the normal electric combination 72 in the front view. In addition, the ball shot in the right-handed game can also enter the upper second starting port 71, which is always open right above the front view. In addition, when the ball is shot in the right-handed game, the ball is not detected at the first starting port 64, which can win the ball only in the left-handed game.

Then, in the right-handed game in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed based on the winning of the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, this special The fluctuation display of the symbol 2 is executed in 2 seconds at the shortest and 190 seconds at the longest, and is configured to derive the result of either a big win, a small win or a loss.

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a loss is derived, the variable winning device 65 is not opened. Also, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a small win is derived, as a small win game, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (1 round, maximum "1.5 seconds"). and the variable winning device 65 is opened.

Here, as described above, the variable prize winning device 65 is arranged downstream of the normal electric element 72 in the flow direction, and in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the normal electric element 72 is "5 It is configured to provide a .8 second release. In addition, it is configured so that it takes about "2 seconds" to completely roll from the right end to the left end of the retractable plate 72a of the ordinary electric member 72. As shown in FIG. For this reason, the haunting plate 72a is easily opened while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the haunting plate 72a during the closing time of the normal electric ball 72, and most of the balls fired in the right-handed game are the normal electric ball. The configuration is such that the ball enters the inside 72 and is difficult for the ball to reach the variable winning device 65 located downstream of the normal electric element 72 . Therefore, in the small winning in the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "general figure low probability time shortening state", it is difficult to win the variable winning device 65 even if the variable winning device 65 is opened by the small winning. This makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball based on a prize awarded to the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the variable display of the special pattern 2, the jackpot game is performed by turning the jackpot solenoid 65b a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (5 rounds or 10 rounds. Maximum "30 seconds" for each round. Interval time). "1 second", opening time and ending time "10 seconds".) is turned on, and the variable winning device 65 is released. At this time, since the winning probability and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are equivalent to the "normal game state", the closed state of the normal electric combination 72 is longer, so the balls fired in the right-handed game appear and disappear. It rolls over the upper surface of 72a from the right end to the left end, and can enter the open variable prize winning device 65. - 特許庁Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, in the "normal game state", the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the case of shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 216, after execution of the variable display of the "899th rotation" of the special symbol 1, the variable display of the "60 seconds" "super reach" effect mode is executed. Then, during the execution of the variable display of the "super reach" effect mode of the special symbol 1, the player erroneously operates the operation handle 51 for shooting the ball, and the ball is shot into the right-handed game area. A ball shot in a hitting game enters an upper second starting port 71.例文帳に追加Then, the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed based on the winning to the upper second starting port 71, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is uniformly executed in "20 seconds" in the case of a loss or a small hit. be.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state". Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the special symbol 1 is executed, and started during the execution of the variable display of the "super reach" effect mode of the special symbol 1. For the special symbol 2 variation display, it is executed only in the special figure 2 variation area 88b and the special figure 2 mini reel display (the special figure 2 variation area 88b in FIG. 254 (c) and the special figure 2 mini reel 81b). And, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol 2 of "20 seconds", the variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed the variable display of the "super reach" production mode of "60 seconds". Although the variable display of "20 seconds" ended first, and the variable display of special symbol 1 was initially the variable display of "900th rotation", the variable display of "20 seconds" of special symbol 2 was not performed. It becomes the variable display of "the 900th rotation."

Then, it reaches the ceiling at the same time as the end of the variable display of "20 seconds" of the special symbol 2, and shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". That is, during the execution of the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the special symbol 1 in the third symbol display device 81, it will shift from the "normal game state" to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state".

Here, in the case of the display control of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 in the conventional pachinko machine, during the execution of the variable effect of the special symbol 1 "super reach" effect mode "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" , the main display right hitting instruction 89 and the effect hitting instruction are displayed during the execution of the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode. When such an effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the player is most interested in the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode with a high expectation of a big win in the "normal game state". In the meantime, a display suggesting a right-handed game suddenly appears, and there is a risk that the player will be aroused by the game. In addition, during the execution of the first special symbols with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the display suggesting the right-handed game appears, and should the right-handed game be started? No, there is a risk of being confused and confused about the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in order to suppress such arousal of the player and avoid confusion about the game method, the variation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 When the game state is switched during the execution of the performance, it is configured to execute the hitting instruction for performance after the end of the variable performance being executed. By constructing in this way, while maintaining interest in the variable performance being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can execute an appropriate game according to the performance hitting instruction displayed thereafter. can. Incidentally, the method of controlling the display contents of the variable effect in the third pattern display device 81 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 247-253. In addition, for the timing chart after shifting to "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" in Figure 216, since it is the same as the timing chart after shifting to "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" in Figure 215, explanation omitted.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 216, in the "normal game state", the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the case of shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" was described, but in the explanation of FIG. It is naturally possible to replace the relationship between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 217, when the ball is fired in the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal figure high probability time shortened state", first, almost all the balls fired in the right-handed game A ball is detected at a through gate 67 arranged at a passable position. Then, based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, variable display of normal symbols is executed. The variable display of this normal pattern is uniformly executed in "0.1 seconds" in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and is configured to derive the result of either winning or losing. It is In the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the probability of winning in the variable display of normal patterns is high probability ("99%"), and furthermore, the normal electric role 72 in the case of winning It is configured such that the opening time is "5.8 seconds" and the number of times of opening is one. Therefore, the ball fired in the right-handed game enters the lower second starting port 71a arranged on the lower side of the normal electric combination 72 when viewed from the front by the normal electric combination 72 being in an open state. In addition, the ball shot in the right-handed game can also enter the upper second starting port 71, which is always open right above the front view. In addition, when the ball is shot in the right-handed game, it is configured so that the ball is not detected at the first start port 64 that can win the ball only in the left-handed game.

Then, in the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 based on the winning to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a is executed, and the variable display of this special symbol 2 is executed in ``2 seconds'' at the shortest and ``190 seconds'' at the longest, and is configured to derive the result of either a big win, a small win, or a loss. there is

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a loss is derived, the variable winning device 65 is not opened. Also, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a small win is derived, as a small win game, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (1 round, maximum "1.5 seconds"). and the variable winning device 65 is opened.

Here, as described above, the variable winning device 65 is arranged downstream of the normal electric element 72 in the flow direction. is configured to open for "5.8 seconds" with a certain probability, the ball fired in the right-handed game will win the normal electric combination 72 due to the opening of the common electric combination 72. , so that it is difficult to reach the variable winning device 65 located on the downstream side of the ordinary electric circuit 72 . Therefore, it is difficult to win the ball to the variable winning device 65 in the small winning with the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "probability variable state" or the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state". It is configured such that it is difficult to obtain prize balls based on the winning of 65.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the variable display of the special pattern 2, the jackpot game is performed by turning the jackpot solenoid 65b a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (5 rounds or 10 rounds. Maximum "30 seconds" for each round. Interval time). "1 second", opening time and ending time "10 seconds".) is turned on, and the variable winning device 65 is released. At this time, the player is urged to continue the right-handed game, and the ball can be entered into the open variable winning device 65 to win a large amount of prize balls.

Then, as shown in FIG. 218, when a ball is shot in a right-handed game in the "latent probability variable state", first, almost all of the balls shot in a right-handed game are arranged at positions that can pass through. A ball is detected at the through gate 67 . Then, based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, variable display of normal symbols is executed. This variable display of normal symbols is uniformly executed in "15 seconds" in the "latency probability variable state", and is constructed so as to derive the result of either winning or losing. In the "latent probability variable state", the probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols is low ("70%"), and the opening time of the normal electrode 72 when winning is "0.1 second". , and is configured to be opened once. For this reason, in the "latent probability variable state", the closing period of the normal electric combination 72 is long, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can win a prize when the normal electric combination 72 is opened. It becomes difficult to enter the starting port 71a, and while the ordinary electric mechanism 72 is closed, the upper surface of the ordinary electric mechanism 72 rolls from the right end to the left end. It becomes possible to flow down to the device 65 side. In addition, the ball shot in the right-handed game can enter the upper second starting port 71 which is always open right above the front view. In addition, when the ball is shot in the right-handed game, the ball is not detected at the first starting port 64, which can win the ball only in the left-handed game.

Then, in the right-handed game in the "latency probability variable state", the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed based on the winning to the upper second start port 71, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is the shortest "2 Seconds”, the longest being “190 seconds”, and is configured to derive the result of either a big win, a small win or a loss.

Then, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a loss is derived, the variable winning device 65 is not opened. Also, in the variable display of the special symbol 2, when a small win is derived, as a small win game, the big winning opening solenoid 65b is turned on for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (1 round, maximum "1.5 seconds"). and the variable winning device 65 is opened.

As described above, in the "latent probability variable state", the closed period of the normal electric element 72 is long, and the ball fired in the right-handed game rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric element 72 from the right end to the left end, It is possible to flow down to the side of the variable winning device 65 provided on the left side of the normal electric wire 72 when viewed from the front. Therefore, a small hit is derived in the variable display of the special pattern 2, and the variable winning device 65 is opened, so that the ball can be won in the opened variable winning device 65, and a prize ball can be won ( So-called small hit rush state). Here, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", when a small winning game that can occur in the "latency probability fluctuation state" is won, the variable winning device 65 is shifted to a small winning game state in which the variable winning device 65 can be opened. Then, in the probability exclusive production that can be started on the condition that it is in the "latency probability fluctuation state", the production of whether or not to win a big win or a small win is executed, and during the execution of the probability exclusive production, the "latency probability When the game state is changed from "variation state" to the small winning game state, the small winning performance in the small winning game is additionally executed while the latent probability exclusive performance is continued. In this case, in the small win effect, the display of the number of acquired game balls and the display of the number of winning small wins can be executed together in a situation where the probability exclusive effect is being executed. In addition, the display of the number of game balls and the display of the number of small hits are configured to be executed in a display area smaller than the display area in which the probability exclusive effect is displayed. In addition, during execution of the probability-only effect, the display of the number of game balls and the display of the number of small hits are continuously displayed.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in the variable display of the special symbol 2, the jackpot game is performed by turning the jackpot solenoid 65b a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (5 rounds or 10 rounds. Maximum "30 seconds" for each round. Interval time "1 second", opening time and ending time "10 seconds".) is turned on, and the variable winning device 65 is released. At this time, the player is urged to continue the right-handed game, and the ball can be entered into the open variable winning device 65 to win a large amount of prize balls.

Returning to FIG. 203, the description continues. The normal figure per counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). In addition, when the counter C4 per normal pattern makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the counter per normal pattern C4.

In addition, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the counter C4 per normal pattern (value = "0 to 99"), timer interrupt processing (see Figure 228) 1 for each It is updated twice and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 227).

The value of the counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the seventh embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228)), and the timing at which it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 In, it is stored in one of the general pattern reservation first to fourth areas provided in the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203i of the RAM 203 in the general pattern reservation area. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j in the order stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i, and the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 stored in the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j hit judgment.

The value of the random number that is the winning pattern is set by the random number table 202h per normal pattern stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state (for example, 70/100 in the low probability state, 99/99 in the high probability state). 100 etc.), and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern retention ball execution area 203j of the RAM 203 matches the random number value set by the random number table 202h per normal pattern. , it is judged as a hit. Then, the normal pattern variation table 202i is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal pattern is set (for example, "15 seconds" when the time saving function is not activated, "0.1 second" when the time saving function is activated) etc.), and after the lapse of the variable display time on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "O" is lighted and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, the normal electric role opening table 202j is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is set (for example, when the time saving function is not activated, "0.1 second" x 1 time, when the time saving function is activated is "5.8 seconds" x 1 time, etc.), and during the opening time, the landing plate 72a of the ordinary electric 72 is opened, and during that time, the ball can enter the lower second start port 71a. be.

On the other hand, when the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the general pattern reservation area does not match the value of the random number set by the random number table 202h per normal pattern, it is determined to be lost. Then, the variable display time is set by referring to the normal pattern variation table 202i according to the game state, and after the variable display time has elapsed in the normal pattern display device 83, the symbol "x" is displayed as the stop symbol (normal symbol). Lights up. In addition, the random number table 202h per normal pattern, the normal pattern variation table 202i and the normal electric role release table 202j will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 202, the description continues. The RAM 203 includes a counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 203, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, an input/output It also has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output, hereinafter abbreviated as “I/O”) are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 227) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 225) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 246) is immediately executed as power failure processing. In order to wait for the control devices 110, 111, 113 and 114 to start up normally when power is restored, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a restoration screen dedicated to power restoration for a predetermined period of time. It is When the start opportunity of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is acquired during the display of the return screen, the normality of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is maintained while the display state of the return screen is maintained. It is configured to wait for execution of a variable production. On the other hand, the special symbol display device 37 performs dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 does not start the normal variation effect, and the third symbol display device 81 In the predetermined area of , the variable display related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. The predetermined area is a display area that is smaller than the area in which normal variation effects are performed. Then, when the display time of the return screen has passed, the return screen is ended, and the normal variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol acquired during the display of the return screen is executed from the middle. It is configured. In this case, the variable display displayed on the return screen may be continuously executed even while the normal variable effect is being executed.

The RAM 203 further includes a first held ball number counter 203a, a second held ball number counter 203b, a first held ball storage area 203d, a second held ball storage area 203e, a first held ball execution area 203f, and a second held ball execution area. Area 203g, normal figure reservation ball number counter 203h, normal figure reservation ball storage area 203i, normal figure reservation ball execution area 203j, probability variable flag 203k, time reduction high probability flag 203m, time reduction low probability flag 203n, time reduction counter 203o, ceiling reach count It has at least a counter 203p and a ceiling set flag 203q.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed on the display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) is up to four times. A counter that counts up to

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 225). Then, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64 is detected and the number of pending balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 229 (see S306 of ). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 232).

The second reserved ball number counter 203b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, is the upper second starting port detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. 71 or based on the start winning to the lower second start port 71a, dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the third pattern variable effect) up to four times.

As with the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initialization processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 225). Then, every time the start winning prize to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a is detected and the number of pending balls of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, the maximum value "4 ” (see S310 in FIG. 229). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is executed (see S5302 in FIG. 233).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the first reserved ball. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the number command or the second reserved ball number command (see S313 in FIG. 229). The first reserved ball number command is issued every time the start winning to the first start opening 64 is detected and the first reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1, the second reserved ball number command is issued to the upper second start opening 71. Or, it is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the second reserved ball number counter 203b to the lower second start port 71a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 dynamically displays the first special symbol or second special symbol reserved by the main controller 110 by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of suspensions of dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. Also, every time the starting winning to the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is detected, the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 The first reserved ball number command Or by transmitting the second pending ball number command, the pending ball number of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of each special symbol managed by the sound lamp control device 113 is suspended in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual dynamic display (variation performance) deviates from the number of reserved balls, the deviation is corrected by the first command of the number of reserved balls or the second command of the number of reserved balls to be received next. be able to.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command In the number of balls command, not only the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b incremented by 1, but also the trigger for adding the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b Along with the above starting winning, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 203) are also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 is the first The number of pending pitches command or the second number of pending pitches command is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 .

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is Before the variable performance based on each value is executed, it is read ahead, and how the variable performance becomes (whether it becomes a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed. Then, based on the result of determination by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the contents and execution timing (timing) of the "holding change notice".

It should be noted that the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71, or the lower second start port 71a Generates the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command at the timing of the ball entering the ball, and commands similar to the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command based on the ball entry command) and send it to the audio ramp controller 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning to the first start port 64. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores (holds) data corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) up to four times. It has areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 203).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in response to the detection of the start winning to the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, and the jackpot A memory for storing each value of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228), each The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores (holds) data corresponding to one starting prize in the second special symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 203).

As described above, the first reserved ball execution area 203f starts execution, or the first special symbol jackpot lottery that is being executed, the dynamic display and variation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processes such as effect setting.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation performance. In order to execute the processing such as, among the data corresponding to the start winning stored in the above-described first reserved ball storage area 203d (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1), the data corresponding to the oldest start winning Data is shifted into this first hold ball execution area 203f. Note that shift in the seventh embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

As described above, the second reserved ball execution area 203g starts execution, or the second special symbol jackpot lottery or small lottery that is being executed, the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processes such as target display and variable effect setting.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation performance. In order to execute such processing, one of the data corresponding to the start winning stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) is shifted to this second hold ball execution area 203g.

Here, referring to FIG. 203 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g are the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the special symbol display device. 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to set the dynamic display and variable effects.

As described above, the setting of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect include the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery. C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d and the first reserved ball execution area 203f are the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first starting port 64 (start winning). , and the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the second reserved ball execution area 203g are stored when the ball enters the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (start winning). Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 is stored.

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (first reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reservation areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first reservation ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. It is

In the seventh embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to 1. Although each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e is collectively provided, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64 (start winning) is stored. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the empty areas of the 4 reservation areas (1st reservation 1st to 4th areas). remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the first start port 64 that is older in terms of time is stored, and the first reserve first area stores the data to the first start port 64 that is the oldest in terms of time. , the data corresponding to the start winning will be stored.

Also, the first reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the first reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 203f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the first When data is stored in the first reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203d, the data stored in the first reserved first area is stored in each area 203f1 to the first reserved ball execution area 203f. 203f4 respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is referenced in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 232), and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the lottery result Determine the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop category command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, Variation production of the first special symbol is performed.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect of the first special symbol, it determines whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. As a result of the judgment, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area of the first reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved first area becomes empty, so the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Shift processing is performed to move the (suspended) data to areas (first to third) with area numbers one smaller. In the seventh embodiment, data is shifted only for the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect of the first special symbol is "4", and all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d ) is stored with data. In this state, the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to other areas (second to fourth) , are shifted to areas (1st to 3rd) whose area number is 1 smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, the data in the first reserved fourth area to the first reserved third area.

Also, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the first special symbol variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 only stores the data of the first reserved second area. , shift to the first reserved first area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the first reservation area (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

Next, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (counters C1 to C3, CS1 Each value of ) is stored up to four times. Data is stored in order from the smallest area. That is, the area with a smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the start winning to the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a that is older in terms of time, and the second reservation first area stores , the data corresponding to the start winning to the oldest upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is stored.

Also, the second reserved ball execution area 203g is composed of only one area. Like the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the second reserved ball execution area 203g includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203g1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 203g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203g4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, the second When data is stored in the second reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203e, the data stored in the second reserved first area is stored in each area 203g1 to the second reserved ball execution area 203g. 203g4 respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203g is referred to in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 233), and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the lottery result Determine the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect of the second special symbol, it determines whether or not data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203g of the second reservation ball execution area 203g. Shift to area 203g1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203g2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3, and shifts the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation first area to the variation type counter storage area 203g4.

Then, when the data shift to the second reserved ball execution area 203g is completed, the second reserved first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e Shift processing is performed to move the (suspended) data to areas (first to third) with area numbers one smaller. In the seventh embodiment, data is shifted only for the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when it is determined to start the variable effect of the second special symbol is "4", and all areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e ) is stored with data. In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203g, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to other areas (second to fourth) , are shifted to areas (1st to 3rd) whose area number is 1 smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, the data in the second reserved fourth area to the second reserved third area.

Also, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the second special symbol variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 stores only the data of the second reserved second area. , shifts to the second reserved first area to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second reservation areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

It should be noted that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the second reservation areas (second to fourth), so that it is possible to easily create a program.

In this way, data relating to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and data relating to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are separately stored, and dynamic display is performed based on each data. By doing, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time.

Returning to FIG. 202, the description continues. The normal pattern holding ball number counter 203h displays the normal pattern based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. It is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of variable display of normal symbols performed by the device 83 up to a maximum of 4 times.

As with the reserved ball number counters 203a and 203b, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203h is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 225) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected and the number of held balls for variable display relating to normal symbols increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (see S405 in FIG. 230). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal pattern is executed (see S705 in FIG. 244).

The normal-pattern holding ball storage area 203i is a memory for storing the normal-pattern per counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of passage of the ball through the through gate 67. FIG. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern from the counter buffer 203c, and stores the normal pattern reserved ball. Store in area 203i. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i has four reserved areas (normal pattern holding first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 203).

The normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j is a memory for storing data (value of the normal pattern winning counter C4) to be referred to in the normal symbol winning lottery and variable display processing that starts execution or is being executed. be.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal design, in order to execute the processing such as the setting of the normal design winning lottery and the setting of the variable display of the normal design display device 83, the above-mentioned normal design reservation ball Of the data stored in the storage area 203i (the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern), one data is shifted to this normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j. Note that shift in the seventh embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 203 again, the details of the normal map reserved ball storage area 203i and the normal map reserved ball execution area 203j will be described. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i and the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to perform processing such as normal symbol winning lottery and setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. be.

As described above, the normal symbol winning lottery and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83 use the normal symbol winning counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery. The normal pattern holding ball storage area 203i stores the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the through gate 67 .

The general map holding ball storage area 203i is composed of four holding areas (the general map holding first to fourth areas). Each of the four reservation areas (normal pattern reservation 1st to 4th area) is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern that stores the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern.

In this general pattern holding ball storage area 203i, the data acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (the value of the counter C4 per general pattern) is stored up to 4 times, but in that case, 4 holding Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant areas (1st to 4th areas for normal map reservation). In other words, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored, and the data of the ball passing through the through gate 67 which is the oldest in terms of time is stored in the first area of the normal map reservation area. Data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j is composed of only one area. Similar to the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i, the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j is provided with a normal pattern per random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the normal pattern per counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, the data stored in the first normal pattern reservation area of the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203i is transferred to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203j. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203j is referred to in the normal pattern variation process (see FIG. 244), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed, and the contents of the variable display to decide. In the normal symbol display device 83, under the control of the main controller 110, variable display is performed based on the determined contents.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable display of normal symbols, the random value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern in the first area of the normal pattern retention ball storage area 203i. is shifted to a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal pattern of the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j.

Then, when the shift of the data to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j is completed, the normal pattern holding first area becomes empty, so it is stored in each area (2nd to 4th) of the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203i. Shift processing is performed to shift the (suspended) data to areas (first to third) with area numbers one smaller. In the seventh embodiment, the data is shifted only for the general pattern reservation areas (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (reserved) in the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203i.

Here, the data shift performed with respect to each reservation area in the normal map reservation ball storage area 203i will be described. For example, when it is determined to start variable display of normal symbols, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h is "4", and all areas (first to fourth) of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203i Suppose data is stored. In this state, the data of the normal pattern reservation first area is shifted to the normal pattern reservation ball execution area 203j, and when the normal pattern reservation first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 moves to other areas (2nd to 4th) , are shifted to areas (1st to 3rd) whose area number is 1 smaller. In other words, the data of the 2nd area of the reservation of the general pattern is shifted to the 1st area of reservation of the general pattern, the data of the 3rd area of the reservation of the general pattern is shifted to the 2nd area of the reservation of the general pattern, and the data of the 4th area of the reservation of the general pattern. is shifted to the 3rd area for general map reservation.

Also, for example, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h when the start determination of the variable display of the normal pattern is performed is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the normal pattern reserved second area to the normal pattern. Shift to the drawing reservation first area to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the general pattern reservation area (third to fourth) where data is not stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. can reduce the control burden.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the general map reservation area (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (reserved) in the normal drawing reservation area (second to fourth), so it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

Returning to FIG. 202, the description continues. The probability variation flag 203k is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. The variable probability flag 203k is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, in the case of the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "potential probability A", the probability variation flag 203k is set to ON (see S6102 or S6105 in FIG. 241). Then, when the jackpot is won, it is set to OFF (see S602 in FIG. 238). In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the probability variable flag 203k is turned on, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state as the special symbol high probability state. .

The time saving high probability flag 203m is in the on state "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "probability fluctuation state", which is a high probability state of normal symbols, and a shortening state of variable display time of normal symbols, This is a flag for indicating that the ordinary electric circuit 72 is in an extended open state. The time-saving high-accuracy flag 203m is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM is cleared (see S116 in FIG. 225). And, in the seventh embodiment, at the end of the jackpot, the time-saving high-probability flag 203m is set to ON in the case of the jackpot type “variable probability A” or “time saving A” (see S6103 or S6106 in FIG. 241). After that, the value of the time saving counter 203o is no longer greater than "0" in the time saving counting process (see S5513 in FIG. 234) executed in the fluctuation stopping process which is the process at the time of stopping the dynamic display of the special symbol. When and when the time saving high probability flag 203m is set to ON (see S5704 in FIG. 236), or is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S602 in FIG. 238) ).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the time-saving and high-precision flag 203m is turned on, as a high-probability state of normal symbols, the random number table 202h for normal symbols is referred to, and a winning lottery for normal symbols is performed. , the normal symbol variation table 202i is referred to as the shortened state of the normal symbol to set the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol opening table 202j is referred to as the extended open state of the normal symbol 72 to set the normal symbol 72. is opened.

The time reduction low probability flag 203n is in the ON state and is in the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", which is the low probability state of the normal pattern, while the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the normal electric role 72 is open for a long time. This is a flag to indicate that the The time-saving low-probability flag 203n is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM is cleared (see S116 in FIG. 225). Then, in the seventh embodiment, when the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed more than a total of "899 times" (that is, "900 times" or more) in the low probability state of the special symbol and the ceiling reaching number of times is reached , The time-saving low-probability flag 203n is set to ON in order to shift to the "normal pattern low-probability time shortening state" (see S5806 in FIG. 237). After that, when the value of the time saving counter 203o is not a value larger than "0" in the time saving counting process (see S5513 in FIG. 234) executed in the fluctuation stopping process executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol is stopped And, if the time-saving low probability flag 203n is set to ON (see S5705 in FIG. 236), or is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S602 in FIG. 238) .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the time saving low probability flag 203n is turned on, the special symbol is in a low probability state and the normal symbol is also in a low probability state, and the random number table 202h per normal symbol is referred to. However, the normal symbol variable display time is set by referring to the normal symbol variation table 202i as the normal symbol shortened state, and the normal symbol open state is set as the open extended state of the normal symbol 72. The table 202j is referred to and the normal electric circuit 72 is driven to open.

The time-saving counter 203o is a counter for determining the end condition 1 of the "time-saving function", and counts the number of times the dynamic display of each special pattern is executed after the jackpot ends and when it reaches the ceiling, and determines the time-saving end condition. is a counter for In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, time-saving end conditions are set differently depending on the number of executions of special symbols for each jackpot type, and when the set number of dynamic display executions of the special symbols is performed. , It is configured to terminate the "time saving function" being executed and shift from "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" to "normal game state".

This time-saving counter 203o is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 225) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Also in the winning process (see S203 in FIG. 228), the value of the time saving counter 203o is cleared to "0" as the initialization process at the time of the big win (see S603 in FIG. 238). Then, after the jackpot ends when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203o (see S6107 in FIG. 241). Also, in the low probability state of the special symbol, when the number of execution times of the dynamic display becomes more than "899 times", that is, when the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p described later becomes a value larger than "899". If there is and the ceiling setting completion flag 203q, which will also be described later, is not set to ON, the value of the time reduction counter 203o is set to "1140" (see S5804 in FIG. 237). On the other hand, the value of the time reduction counter 203o is subtracted by 1 each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed once in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" ( (See S5701 in FIG. 236).

Then, when the value of the time saving counter 203o becomes "0" (S5702 in FIG. 236: No), it is determined that the time saving end condition based on the number of executions of each special symbol is met, and the time saving high accuracy that is turned on is determined. It is configured to turn off the flag 203m or the time saving low probability flag 203n (see S5704 or S5705 in FIG. 236) and end the "time saving function".

The ceiling reaching count counter 203p is a counter for counting whether or not to shift to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" based on the number of execution times of dynamic display of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when dynamic display of special symbols is executed "900 times" in the low probability state of special symbols, that is, the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p reaches "900". When it does, the game state is configured to shift to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state".

This ceiling reaching count counter 203p is set to "0" as an initial value in the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S172 in FIG. 225). Then, in the low probability state of special symbols, that is, in the "normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", dynamic display of special symbols is executed once. 1 is added every time (see S5801 in FIG. 237). In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p reaches "900", if the ceiling setting completion flag 203q described later is not set to ON (that is, if it is OFF) , Set the value of the time saving counter 203o to "1140", set the time saving low probability flag 203n to ON (see S5804 and S5806 in FIG. 237), and shift to "ordinary figure low probability time reduction state".

It should be noted that this ceiling reaching count counter 203p is cleared to "0" at the beginning of the winning process when winning a jackpot (see S603 in FIG. 238). Thus, every time a big win occurs, the number of times of reaching the ceiling is reset, and when the special pattern becomes a low probability state after the big win game, counting of the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p is started, In the low probability state of the special symbols, when the period during which the special symbols are not won in the dynamic display reaches a predetermined period, a ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' is generated as a relief measure for the player. becomes possible.

The ceiling setting completion flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the special symbol has reached the ceiling reaching number once after the jackpot game. This ceiling set completion flag 203q is set to OFF as an initial value in the startup processing of the pachinko machine 10 (see S171 in FIG. 225). Then, in the low-probability state of the special symbols, when the dynamic display of the special symbols does not win the jackpot "900 times" in succession, that is, when the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p reaches "900". , After the jackpot game, the ceiling function is activated once, and is set to ON (see S5805 in FIG. 237). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when winning the jackpot (see S602 in FIG. 238).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the ceiling setting completion flag 203q is set to ON, that is, when the ceiling function is activated even once after the jackpot game, the ceiling function is not generated again. By referring to the ceiling set flag 203q, the ceiling function to be activated after the jackpot game can be limited to once. It should be noted that the ceiling function may be configured to occur two or more times.

In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, when a big win is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a jackpot referred to for opening control of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is stored. A release table 202f is stored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 219, the jackpot opening table 202f will be described. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot release table 202f stored in the ROM202. The jackpot opening table 202f is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type that generated the jackpot of each special symbol, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, etc. (the number of rounds, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of prizes won, number of prize balls) and the game state to be shifted after the end of the big win are defined.

First, the jackpot opening table 202f includes the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71, or the lower second starting port 71a (hereinafter referred to as the first starting port 64 and the upper second starting port) that are easy to win for each game state. 71 and the lower second starting port 71a may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 64, 71, 71a"). are separated.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", for "normal game state" to be referred to when winning the jackpot type "time saving A", "variable probability A" or "probability A", and "probability fluctuation state" , "Normal figure low probability time reduction state", "Normal figure high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability change state", referred to when winning the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "latency probability A" " Probability fluctuation state, low probability time reduction state, time reduction state, latency probability fluctuation state", and the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is defined.

As shown in FIG. 219, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot open table 202f, when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 (hereinafter referred to as the variable winning device 65 of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a may be referred to as a "big winning opening") is repeatedly opened and closed over 5 rounds. The opening time of the jackpot (the opening time may be hereinafter referred to as "OP time") is set to "30 seconds", and the interval is the closing time between one round of the jackpot and the next round. The time (hereinafter, the interval time may be referred to as "IT time") is set to "1 second", and the jackpot ending time (hereinafter, the ending time may be referred to as "ED time"). It is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, it is configured to shift to the "general pattern high probability time reduction state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability variable A" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. . Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the state is shifted to the "probability fluctuation state".

Next, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot open table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability A" is won, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. be. Then, the OP time is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "normal game state", after the jackpot game is completed in the case of winning the jackpot type "potential probability A", the state is changed to the "latency probability fluctuation state". In addition, it is the dynamic display of the second special design that can win the jackpot type "potential A" in the "normal game state", and the dynamic display of the second special design is recommended in the "normal game state". It is configured to be difficult to be executed in the left-handed game that is being played.

Next, in the "probability change state/low probability time reduction state/time reduction state/latency probability change state" of the jackpot release table 202f, when the jackpot type "time reduction A" is won, the variable prize device 65 is a big prize. The mouth opening/closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed over five rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the jackpot game ends when the jackpot type "time reduction A" is won After that, it is configured to shift to the "normal map high probability time shortening state".

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state/low probability time shortening state/time shortening state/latency probability fluctuation state" of the jackpot release table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability A" is won, the variable winning device 65 The winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is repeatedly opened and closed over five rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum open time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "10". is set to Then, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", the jackpot game when winning the jackpot type "latency probability A" After the end, it is configured to shift to the "latency probability change state".

In this way, in the "continuous" state in which the right-handed game is maintained and the special symbol jackpots occur frequently, the OP time, IT time, and ED at the time of the jackpot when one of the jackpot types is won. By configuring the time to be shorter than the OP time, IT time and ED time of the initial jackpot in the ``normal game state'', the time to complete the entire jackpot during the ``continuous game'' state is shortened and the ``continuous game'' state is achieved. , it is possible to shorten the arrival time to the next jackpot. As a result, the time until the next big win occurs in the "continuous" state can be shortened, and the time until the next big win arrives in spite of the "continuous" state is prolonged, thereby improving the game of the player. By generating a series of big wins at an early stage while suppressing the excitement of the game, the player can feel refreshed and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by making the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the initial jackpot in the "normal game state" longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "continuous game state", It becomes possible to execute various productions. By configuring in this way, for example, explanation of the game method in the pachinko machine 10 at the OP time and ED time of the first big win (for example, suggestion of shooting mode, suggestion of prevention of forgetting to remove the card inserted in the card sand, future (explanation of the game state, etc.), and a performance to congratulate the first big win from the "normal game state" can be executed, making it easier for the player to understand the game method of the pachinko machine 10, and finally winning the big win. It is possible to perform a performance that contributes to improving the interest of the player by making the player feel.

In addition, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a at the time of the big win based on the big win type (OP time, IT time, ED time, number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning prizes, number of prize balls and transition game state) are as described above. It is not limited to the embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of opening times (number of rounds) may be changed for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. It can be configured to change Since the number of prize balls that can be paid out differs for each type of jackpot won, it is possible to make a difference in the game value directly given according to the type of jackpot won.

Moreover, it is not necessary to shift to a separate game state for each jackpot type, and it may be configured to shift to a common game state for a plurality of jackpot types. Furthermore, the OP time and the ED time may be configured to be different, or the IT time may be set longer than the OP time and the ED time. Also, the minimum open time for one round may be set to a time shorter than the IT time, the OP time, and the ED time. Furthermore, at least one of OP time, IT time and ED time may be set to be the same time for each jackpot type. In addition, the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "latency probability fluctuation state" are changed to the OP time of the jackpot in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", Although the IT time and the ED time were configured to be shorter than each other, any one or more of the OP time, the IT time, or the ED time is configured to be shortened, and the other one or more of the OP time is configured to be shorter. , IT time, or ED time may be equal or longer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the small winning open table 202g will be described. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small winning open table 202g stored in the ROM202. The small winning opening table 202g is referred to at the time of the small winning of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on each special symbol, the opening mode of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 (number of rounds, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning prizes, number of prize balls) are stipulated. In addition, even if a small hit is won in any special symbol (excluding the transition to the "general figure low probability time reduction state"), the game state is configured not to be shifted.

First, the small hit opening table 202g is divided into opening modes and the like based on the types of special symbols, that is, the starting openings 64, 71, and 71a to be won. Specifically, for "special 1 small hit" that is referred to when winning a small hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and when winning a small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol The opening mode of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a and the like are defined for "special figure 2 small hit" to be referred to.

As shown in FIG. 220, in the "special 1 small win" of the small win open table 202g, when the small win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, The large winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the provided variable winning device 65 is opened and closed once (one round). Then, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of prizes to be won is set to "10", and the number of prize balls based on the winning is set to "10". ing. In the seventh embodiment, the opening time is set such that no more than 10 balls can win a prize within the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a based on the small winning of the first special symbol. The opened big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is configured to be more easily closed under the condition of the maximum opening time than under the condition of the maximum winning number.

Also, as shown in FIG. 220, in the "special figure 2 small win" of the small win open table 202g, even if the small win is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, The big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 provided in the game is opened and closed once (one round). The maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is set to "1.5 seconds", the maximum winning number is set to "10", and the number of prize balls based on the winning is set to "10". ing. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the opening time is set such that no more than 10 balls can be won during the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a based on the small winning of the second special symbol. The opened big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a is configured to be more easily closed under the condition of the maximum opening time than under the condition of the maximum winning number.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 221(a) to 221(c), the details of the normal pattern per random number table 202h, the normal pattern variation table 202i and the normal pattern opening table 202j will be described. First, FIG. 221( a ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202 h per normal pattern stored in the ROM 202 .

As described above, the normal pattern per random number table 202h has a low probability of normal symbols in which the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal game state", the "latency probability fluctuation state", or the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". For the "normal pattern low probability state" used in the case of the state ("probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time shortening state" (including during the special pattern jackpot)), and for the pachinko machine 10 "Normal pattern high probability" used when the game state is "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" which is a state with a higher probability of winning normal patterns than "normal pattern low probability state" It is divided into two types, one for "state" and the other for "status". Then, the number of random numbers to be hits included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different between the "normal design low probability state" and the "normal design high probability state", the "normal design low probability state" and the "normal design high probability state" , The probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols is changed.

As shown in FIG. 221(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the number of values of the normal pattern per counter C4 that becomes a win in the case of the "normal pattern low probability state" is 70, and the value "30 ~ 99" is defined (set) in the random number table 202h per normal pattern. That is, the normal pattern hit probability in the "normal pattern low probability state" (that is, "normal game state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortened state") is 70/100, and the normal pattern It is set so that the hit can be easily derived in the variable display of.

On the other hand, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal pattern that becomes a hit in the case of "normal high probability state" is 99, and the value "1 to 99" is defined (set) in the random number table 202h per normal pattern. ing. That is, the normal pattern hit probability in the "normal pattern high probability state" (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state") is 99/100, and the normal pattern variable display is almost hit. set to be derived.

Thus, by changing the success/failure probability of normal symbols according to the game state, it is possible to create a difference between a situation in which the normal electric combination 72 is easy to open and a situation in which it is difficult to open rather than the situation in which it is easy to open. can. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is possible to enter the lower second starting port 71a because the normal electric terminal 72 is easily opened, or the normal electric terminal 72 is easy to open. It is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by making the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower second start hole 71a because the state is more difficult to open, depending on the game state.

In particular, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, it becomes a "normal symbol low probability state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the normal electric role 72 is difficult to open, furthermore, when it is opened. However, since the normal electric combination 72 is opened only for a short time, even if the ball is fired in a right-handed game, it is configured so that it is difficult to win the second start opening 71a below the "normal symbol high probability state". there is In addition, the first starting port 64 is not equipped with a device for assisting prize winning, such as the ordinary electric machine 72, and a through gate 67 is not arranged in the flow-down region of the ball fired in the left-handed game. Therefore, it is not a configuration in which the ball fired by the left-handed game easily enters the first start port 64 by the time saving function. Therefore, in other words, in the "normal game state", even if the ball is hit to the right, it is difficult for the ball hit to the right to enter the lower second start hole 71a, and it is shot in the left-hand game. The ball must also enter the first start port 64 without using the time saving function, and is configured to enter the first start port 64 by itself in order to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol. there is In addition, in the "normal game state", by providing a plurality of types of variable display time of normal symbols and opening patterns of the normal electric combination 72, the player can enter the lower second start port 71a in the "normal game state". It is more preferable to make it difficult to grasp the possible timing and to make it difficult to win a prize to the lower second starting port 71a. In addition, in the "normal game state", when a right-handed game is played, an error is notified due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, so that the player and the employee of the game hall By suggesting that the game mode is not encouraged, the player may be restrained from playing right-handed games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221(b), the details of the normal pattern variation table 202i for determining the variable display time of normal patterns will be described. FIG.221(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the normal figure fluctuation table 202i memorize|stored in ROM202.

Normal pattern fluctuation table 202i is for "normal game state/latency probability fluctuation state" referred to by "normal game state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time shortening state ”Or “normal pattern high probability time reduction state” is divided into two types for “probability fluctuation state / low probability time reduction state / time reduction state”. Then, the variable display times of the normal symbols set for the "normal game state/latency probability variable state" and "probability variable state/low probability time shortened state/time shortened state" are set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbols different in each game state, the time for deriving the success/fail result of the normal symbols in each game state is changed.

As shown in FIG. 221(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the normal symbol variable display time set in the case of the "normal game state" or the "latency probability fluctuation state" is "15 seconds". It is defined in the normal figure fluctuation table 202i so that it becomes. That is, in the "normal game state" or the "latency probability variable state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the derivation of the stop symbols is set to be "15 seconds".

In addition, the variable display time of the normal pattern set in the case of "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" is set to "0.1 second" It is defined in the normal figure fluctuation table 202i. In other words, the time from the start of variable display of normal symbols in the "probability fluctuation state", "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" until the stop design is derived is without omission It is set to be "0.1 second".

Thus, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 to when the normal electrode 72 is released can be changed. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it hits the variable display caused by passing through the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric circuit 72 is opened based on the hit, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is hit. can flow into the lower second starting port 71a as it is can be varied depending on the game state. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol for each game state, it is possible to vary the winning mode of one ball to the through gate 67 and the lower second start port 71a, and the game is different for each game state. can produce sex.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, the variable display time of normal symbols is short, the winning is easy, and the normal electric Since the opening time of the hand 72 is also long, the normal electric hand 72 is in an open (immersed) state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric hand 72, and the ball is fired by the right-handed game. can enter the lower second starting port 71a. In other words, the ball hit to the right in the "probability variable state" and the "ordinary figure high probability time shortening state" is configured so as to easily enter the lower second starting port 71a and difficultly enter the variable winning device 65. It is

In addition, among the game states in which right-handed games are encouraged, in the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", although it is more difficult to win than the "probability fluctuation state" and "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", normal Since the variable display time of the pattern is short and the open time of the normal electric player 72 is also long, the ball fired by the right-handed game is configured to be able to enter the lower second start port 71a. there is In other words, the ball hit to the right in the "low probability time reduction state" is configured to easily enter the lower second starting port 71a and difficultly enter the variable winning device 65.

On the other hand, among the game states in which the right-handed game is encouraged, in the "latent probability variable state", the variable display time of normal symbols is long, it is difficult to win a winning, and the normal electric role 72 is opened for a short time. Therefore, it is configured to make it difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to enter the lower second start port 71a. Therefore, while the normal electric wire 72 is closed, the upper surface of the normal electric wire 72 can be rolled from the right end to the left end, and can flow down to the variable winning device 65 provided on the left side of the normal electric wire 72 when viewed from the front. , the ball hit to the right in the "latent probability variable state" is configured to easily enter the variable winning device 65 rather than entering the lower second starting port 71a.

Next, referring to FIG. 221(c), the normal electric service release table 202j will be described. FIG. 221(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal electric power release table 202j stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. The normal electric combination opening table 202j is referred to when a normal symbol win occurs, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of opening times of the normal electric combination 72 are defined based on the game state at the timing when the normal symbol win occurs.

The normal electric role open table 202j is divided into groups based on the game state in which the normal symbols are drawn. Specifically, for "normal game state / latent probability change state" referred to in "normal game state" and "latency probability change state", "probability change state", "normal figure low probability time reduction state" or The open state (open time) of the normal electric worker 72 is changed for "probability fluctuation state/low probability time shortening state/time shortening state" referred to in "general pattern high probability time shortening state".

As shown in FIG. 221(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in the "normal game state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state", the normal electric combination 72 is opened when the normal symbol is won. The number of times is 1, and the opening time is defined as "0.1 seconds" in the normal electric service opening table 202j. That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state", the normal electric combination 72 is opened for "0.1 seconds" x 1 times = "0.1 seconds". is set to be

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the opening time of the normal electric role 72 set when winning the normal symbol is "5. 8 seconds” and the number of times of opening is set to 1 in the normal electric service opening table 202j. In other words, when the normal pattern is won in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state" or "normal high probability time reduction state", the normal electric role 72 is "5.8 seconds" × It is configured to be opened once=“5.8 seconds”.

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the normal electric part 72 according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the normal electric part 72 is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the period during which the normal electric terminal 72 is open is long, so that it is easy to enter the lower second start opening 71a, or the normal electric terminal 72 is open. It is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by making the situation in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower second start hole 71a due to the short time to be in the game state.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", it becomes a high probability state of normal patterns, the variable display time is short, normal electric The opening period of the winning combination 72 is lengthened so that the ball fired in the right-handed game can easily enter the lower second start hole 71a.

In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed game is encouraged, in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", although it is a normal pattern low probability state, the variable display time is short, and the normal electric combination 72 is opened. It is configured such that the period becomes longer and the ball launched by the right-handed game easily enters the lower second starting port 71a.

Therefore, the ball hit to the right in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time shortening state" and "normal high probability time shortening state" easily enters the lower second start port 71a, and the second special Since the number of reserved balls for dynamic display of symbols is likely to accumulate, the variation shortening function is likely to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbols is configured to be executed efficiently.

In this way, the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state or low probability state of the normal symbol, and the long or short time of the variable display time and the opening time of the ordinary electric role 72 are combined respectively. By providing each game state, it is possible to change the game property in each game state, provide a game with a wide variety of variations, and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the hit probability of variable display of normal symbols and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is more likely to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state", etc., any ratio may be used. The probability may be set to about 1/100 to make it difficult to win, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or the low probability state of the normal pattern It may be configured so as not to win a prize at the time. Also, if the variable display time is shorter in the "probability fluctuation state" than in the "normal game state", it may be any time, for example, the variable display time of normal symbols in the "normal game state" is "30 seconds" or more. may be a long time (for example, "100 seconds") or a short time (for example, "1 second") less than "10 seconds".

Moreover, the open time and the number of open times of the ordinary electric circuit 72 are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the open time of the normal electric combination 72, any open time may be used as long as it is more advantageous for the player to be in the "variable probability state" than in the "normal game state". The opening time of the normal electric role 72 in the "normal game state" etc. may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, " 3 times”). Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "variable probability state" or the like may be a long time of "5.8 seconds" or more (for example, "10 seconds"), or a short time of less than "5.8 seconds". (eg, “1 second”). Further, the number of opening times of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be set to a number greater than "1 time" (for example, "5 times").

Next, with reference to Drawing 222, time saving end condition table 202k in a 7th embodiment is explained. Drawing 222 is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of time saving end condition table 202k memorized by ROM202 in a 7th embodiment. The time-saving end condition table 202k is referred to when the jackpot state ends or when the number of times the ceiling is reached is reached, and the termination conditions of the "time-saving function" given according to the jackpot type or ceiling function that won the jackpot are defined respectively. It is

As shown in FIG. 222, when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won in the "normal game state", the "probability variation state" is set so that the high-probability short-time function is effective until the next jackpot. In addition, when the number of times of reaching the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state", the low probability time saving function is set to be effective up to "1140 times" as a "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". Furthermore, in all game states (that is, "normal game state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state"), When the jackpot type "shortening of working hours A" is won, the high-probability short-time function is set to be effective up to "100 times" as "normal pattern high-probability time-reducing state". Also, in all game states (that is, "normal game state", "normal low probability time reduction state", "normal high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state"), When winning the jackpot type "probability of latency A", the time saving function is not given as "latency probability fluctuation state", and the number of times of time saving is set to "0 times".

Returning to FIG. 202, the description continues. The RAM 203 includes a buffer 203c for counter shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which values such as Input/Output (hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 227) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 225) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 246) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 detects the balls that have won prizes in the winning holes 63, 64, 65, 71 and 71a, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and the balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path through the out hole 66. Various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches including a switch (for example, the big winning slot switch 65c, etc.) and a group of sensors, etc., a setting key 501 for setting the start-up mode when the power is turned on, and a "setting change mode" A setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value and a RAM erasing switch 503 for erasing the data stored in the RAM 203 are connected when the button is pressed.

Also, on the output side of the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the special design display device 37, the normal design display device 83, the normal design reservation lamp 84, the variable winning device 65 opening and closing of the big winning opening A large winning opening solenoid 65b for driving opening and closing forward with the lower side of the plate 65a as an axis, a normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric 72, and other solenoids 209 are connected. It is The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, and 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and displays the display contents of the probability display device 504 as one of the execution results of the various processes. set.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 246) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Also, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes effects, It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, such as the effect hitting method instruction described later, and the "holding change notice".

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like. In the seventh embodiment, commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and commands cannot be transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to exchange commands with each other.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the back image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and displays the third pattern on the display control device 114 based on the depression of the frame button 22. The display device 81 is instructed to display.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes and produces the third pattern. It is used to control the display of usage instructions and "holding change notice". Note that the details of the performance hitting instruction will be described later in FIGS. 254 to 256. FIG.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 246). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

Now, with reference to FIG. 223, the detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp controller 113 will be described. FIG. 223 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a variation pattern table 222d are stored as fixed value data. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The sound lamp control device 113 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with the start winning, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type that are transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a fluctuation pattern table 222d, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead process.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, whether it will be a “ready-to-win display”, etc.) is determined before execution of the variable effect, and the execution of various effects is determined, and the effect of "holding change notice" that changes the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 201) Executes control to determine the content (and execution time (timing)).

The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b, a sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c, a sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d, a first reserved information storage area 223e, and second reserved information At least a storage area 223f, a first execution information storage area 223g, a second execution information storage area 223h, an effect left-handed instruction executed flag 223i, and an effected right-handed instruction executed flag 223j are provided.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance of the first special symbol should be started in the ON state. This special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1225 in FIG. 250) . Then, regardless of whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is turned off when the first special symbol variation effect is set (see S1302 in FIG. 252).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is triggered by the fact that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, and the waiting first special symbol fluctuation effect exists. When the game state is the "normal game state" (see S1306: Yes in FIG. 252), that is, when the game state encourages the variation effect of the first special symbol, the waiting state is A first special symbol variation performance setting process (see S1307 to S1309 in FIG. 252) for executing the first special symbol variation performance is performed.

In addition, even if the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, the game state is the first special symbol fluctuation effect is not encouraged "normal figure high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state" , When it is "latency probability change state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" (S1306 in FIG. 252: No), the shift of the first pending information storage area 223e and the first execution information storage area 223g to be described later Although the processing and the subtraction processing of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c are executed (see S1303 to S1305 in FIG. 252), the setting processing for the variation effect of the first special symbol (see S1307 to S1309 in FIG. 252) is executed. configured not to. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation production of the first special symbol is not encouraged "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state”, the third symbol display device 81 does not execute (display) the variable effect and the number of reserved balls related to the first special pattern, and executes (displays) only the recommended second special symbol variable effect and the number of reserved balls. can do.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance of the second special symbol should be started in the ON state. This special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1235 in FIG. 251) . Then, regardless of whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is turned off when the second special symbol variation effect is set (see S1311 in FIG. 252).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is triggered by the fact that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, and the waiting second special symbol fluctuation effect exists. In the case where the game state is other than the "normal game state" (see S1315 of FIG. 252: No), that is, the "probability fluctuation state" in which the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is encouraged, the "general figure high In the case of "certain time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state", the second special symbol variation performance for executing the second special symbol variation performance during the standby setting processing (see S1316 to S1318 in FIG. 252).

In addition, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, when the game state is the "normal game state" in which the first special symbol fluctuation effect is encouraged (S1315 in FIG. 252: Yes (see S1312 to S1314 in FIG. 252), although shift processing of the second reservation information storage area 223f and second execution information storage area 223h, which will be described later, and subtraction processing of the sub-second reservation ball number counter 223d are executed (see S1312 to S1314 in FIG. 252). , The setting process of the second special symbol variation effect (see S1316 to S1318 in FIG. 252) is configured not to be executed. By configuring in this way, in the "normal game state" where the variation performance of the second special symbol is not encouraged, the third symbol display device 81 executes (displays) the variation performance and the number of reserved balls related to the second special symbol. Instead, it is possible to execute (display) only the recommended first special symbol variation effect and the number of reserved balls.

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a first special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the first special symbol variation effect that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first pending pitch counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of held balls based on the command (the number of held balls command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first held ball number counter 223c It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol by entering the first start port 64, When the first reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 is received when the value is added, the first reserved ball number counter 203a of main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command is added. The subsequent value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved by the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 250).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a special figure 1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110 When receiving the variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command and setting the aspect of the variation production of the first special symbol regardless of whether it is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to their reception, the sub-th 1 is subtracted (updated) from the value of the 1-reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1305 in FIG. 252). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c. While synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, is a second special symbol variation effect that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command sent from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d. It's becoming

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of pending balls of the second special symbol variation effect by entering the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, and the main control device 110 When the second reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is added, the main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command The value after addition of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the reserved ball number of the second special symbol variation effect reserved by the main controller 110) is stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (Fig. 249). (see S1211 of ).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is a special figure 2 corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted in the main control device 110 When receiving the variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command, and setting the aspect of the variation production of the second special symbol regardless of whether it is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to their reception, the sub-th 1 is subtracted (updated) from the value of the 2-hold ball number counter 223d (see S1314 in FIG. 252). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d. While synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d can be updated.

The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d is used to display reserved symbols and execution symbols on the third symbol display device 81 in a game state in which variation effects of each special symbol are encouraged. Used. That is, the sound lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, sets the number of reserved balls indicated by the command to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. Stored in the number counter 223d (see S1207 or S1211 in FIG. 249), special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command, or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command In response to reception At the timing of updating the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1305 or S1314 in FIG. 252), it corresponds to a special symbol that is encouraged according to the game state. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d after storage or updating, the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number for display A number-of-balls command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number command for display, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub-first number of the sound lamp control device 113 The reserved symbols corresponding to the values of the reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d and the execution pattern indicating the variable effect being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 201(b)). control the rendering of the image as it appears in ).

As described above, the sub first reserved ball counter 223c changes its value while synchronizing with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110, and the sub second reserved ball counter 223d The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 201(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the first reserved ball number counter 203a or It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the special symbol variation effect encouraged according to the game state is reserved.

The first reserved information storage area 223e is information for performing a variable performance of the reserved first special symbol, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the first reserved ball. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the first special symbol transmitted by the number command.

Voice lamp control device 113, using the values of each counter C1 ~ C3, CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223e, and each table 222a ~ 222d stored in ROM222, variation of the first special symbol configured to perform a performance.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is information for performing a variable effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the second reserved ball. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation performance of the second different symbol transmitted by the number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223f and each table 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. configured to perform a performance.

The first execution information storage area 223g is executed at least by the special symbol display device 37, and according to the game state, the information of the variation performance of the first special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main controller 110 Stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c along with the start winning and transmitted by the first reserved ball number command. It is an area for

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the first special symbol, the above-described first suspension information storage is performed in order to perform the setting of the variation performance of the first special symbol. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) for performing the variable effect stored in the first reservation information storage first area of the area 223e is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g.

The second execution information storage area 223h is executed at least by the special symbol display device 37, and information of the second special symbol variation performance being executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state, that is, the main controller 110 Stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning and transmitted by the second reserved ball number command. It is an area for

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation performance of the second special symbol, the above-described second pending information storage is performed in order to perform the setting of the variation performance of the second special symbol. The information (values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) for performing the variable effect stored in the second reservation information storage first area of the area 223f is shifted to the second execution information storage area 223h.

The left-handed instruction execution completion flag 223i for effect is when the game state of performing the right-handed game is shifted to the game state of performing the left-handed game, that is, the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" or the "normal Determining whether or not the performance hitting instruction executed only once when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the "low probability time shortening state" and the shift to the "normal game state" in which the left hitting game is performed is completed. is a flag for This effect left-handed instruction completion flag 223i is set to ON as an initial value in the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1051 in FIG. 247). By setting in this way, when a left-handed game is started after execution of start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113, for example, at the time of opening of the hall, etc., it is possible not to bother to execute the performance hitting instruction. can be done. And, if the game state is not a "normal game state" (that is, "general pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or jackpot state ), and is set to OFF in a state in which the effect hitting right instruction completion flag 223j is not ON (see S1407 in FIG. 253). On the other hand, in the "normal game state", when the effect left-handed instruction execution completion flag 223i is not ON (that is, when the effected hitting instruction has not been executed), after setting the effect left-handed instruction command It is set to ON (see S1414 in FIG. 251).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the effect left-handed instruction execution completion flag 223i is set to ON, that is, after the shift from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, the effected hitting instruction is issued even once. If it is being executed (or after execution of the start-up process), it is configured not to execute the effect hitting instruction again. It is possible to limit the performance hitting instruction to be executed after shifting from the game to the left-hand game.

The right-handed instruction execution completion flag 223j for effect is, when the game state in which the left-handed game is performed is shifted to the game state in which the right-handed game is performed, that is, when the jackpot is won in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, Or, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and transitioning to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", a flag for determining whether or not the performance hitting instruction executed only once has been completed. is. This effect hitting right instruction completed flag 223j is set to OFF as an initial value in the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1052 in FIG. 247). And, if the game state is not a "normal game state" (that is, "general pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or jackpot state ), and in a state in which the effect hitting right instruction execution completion flag 223j is not ON (that is, a state in which the effect hitting method instruction is not implemented), the effect hitting right instruction command is set and then set to ON ( (See S1407 in FIG. 253). On the other hand, when the "normal game state" is set and the effect-use left-handed instruction executed flag 223i is not on, it is set to off (see S1415 in FIG. 253).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the effect hitting right instruction executed flag 223j is set to ON, that is, after shifting to the right hitting game, the effect hitting instruction is executed even once. In this case, the effect hitting instruction is not executed again, and by referring to the effect right hitting instruction execution completion flag 223j, the effect hitting to be executed after the shift from the left hitting game to the right hitting game is performed. Directions can be limited to one.

Details of the first pending information storage area 223e, the first execution information storage area 223g, and the second pending information storage area 223f, and the second execution information storage area 223h will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storing area 223f, the first execution information storing area 223g and the second execution information storing area 223h.

The first pending information storage area 223e has four areas of first pending information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first to fourth storage areas of the first pending information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Further, the second pending information storage area 223f has four areas of second pending information storage first to fourth areas, like the first pending information storage area 223e. In each of the first to fourth areas for storing second hold information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, in the first execution information storage area 223g, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed is stored, and the jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. at least provided.

In addition, in the second execution information storage area 223h, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol currently being executed is stored, and the jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. A jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 where is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223h4 where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. at least provided.

Specifically, the first execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed. In addition, the second execution information storage area 223h is an area relating to the variation effect of the second special symbol that is currently being executed. Furthermore, the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e corresponds to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily reserved among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is reserved. and the second area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the first reserved information is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol that is reserved the third oldest in terms of time among the variable performances of the first special symbol that is suspended, and is the first suspension. The fourth area for storing information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the first special symbol that is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performances of the first special symbol that are held.

In addition, the second reservation information storage first area of the second reservation information storage area 223f corresponds to the variation performance of the second special design that is temporarily reserved first among the variation performance of the second special design that is reserved. and the second area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is second oldest in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is suspended. , the third area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol that is retained third in terms of time among the variation performances of the second special symbol that is retained, and the second retention. The fourth information storage area is an area corresponding to the variation performance of the second special symbol which is held fourth in terms of time among the variation performance of the second special symbol which is held.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first pending ball number command from the main control device 110, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are set to the first reserve. Extract from the number of balls command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the holding balls included in the first holding ball number command in the corresponding first holding information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223e4 of the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved number of balls command is X (1≦X≦4), the number of variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved at that time is X. , the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command are the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved in the X-th time among the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command in the first reserved ball X area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the first reservation information storage X area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed to the 2 Extracted from the pending pitch command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the holding balls included in the third holding ball number command in the corresponding third holding information storage first to fourth areas. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223f4 of the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball number command is X (1 ≤ Y ≤ 4), the number of variable effects of the second special symbol that is reserved at that time is Y. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command are the variable effects of the first special symbol that is reserved in Y-th time among the variable effects of the second special symbol that is reserved. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage Y area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command in the second reserved Y area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation Y area of the main controller 110 are stored in the second stop information storage Y area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 1 variation pattern command and a special figure 1 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the first special symbol from the main controller 110, the first reservation information storage area 223e , to the first execution information storage area 223g. In other words, when there is pending information about the first special symbol, the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is temporarily suspended is started, so the first special symbol that is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reservation information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance of the currently executed first special symbol corresponding to the variable performance It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage area 223g are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special figure 2 variation pattern command and a special figure 2 stop type command that mean the start of the variation production of the second special symbol from the main control device 110, the second reservation information storage area 223f , to the second execution information storage area 223h. In other words, when there is pending information about the second special symbol, the execution of the variation performance of the second special symbol that is first suspended in terms of time is started, so the first suspended second special symbol. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reservation information storage first area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol currently being executed correspond to the variable performance. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first held ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 are stored in the first execution information storage area 223g. Also, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second held ball execution area 203g of the main controller 110 are stored in the second execution information storage area 223h. Furthermore, in the first holding information storage first to fourth areas and the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 are stored. 4 area, and the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, each counter C1~C3, CS1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and pending in the main control device 110, the first execution information It is stored in the storage area 223g, the second execution information storage area 223h, the first suspension information storage area 223e and the second suspension information storage area 223f.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when performing a look-ahead process (not shown), the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d Grasp the number of variable effects (number of pending balls). Then, based on the number of pending balls, the first to fourth areas storing the first pending information or the first to fourth areas storing the second pending information, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are read in advance, and whether or not a big win will be achieved in the variable performance, the variable time, etc. are determined. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "0", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 1 time and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first area for storing the first reserved information are read ahead and determined. I do. Also, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is "4", the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls of the variable performance of the second special symbol is 4 times, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reservation information storage fourth area are read ahead and determined. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first reservation information storage area 223e and the second reservation information storage area 223f, and the fluctuation of the first special design and the second special design reserved by the main control device 110 Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the sound lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first suspension information storage area 223e and the second suspension information storage area 223f , the read-ahead process can be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. That is, when the suspended first special symbol or/and the second special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time? etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable production, and execution of various productions can be determined.

It should be noted that the first pending information storage area 223e or second pending information storage area 223f, and the above-described shift processing in the first execution information storage area 223g or second execution information storage area 223h, special figure 1 variation pattern command and special Figure 2 Stop type command or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command Number of held balls (special figure 1 variation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 variation pattern command and special Figure 2 Based on the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d before being updated based on the reception of the stop type command), the first reservation information storage first to fourth areas Alternatively, the data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the suspended variable effect among the first to fourth areas for storing the second suspended information.

For example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223e Assume that data is stored in the (first reservation information storage first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first pending information storage area 223g is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the first The data in the third pending information storage area is shifted to the first pending information storing second area, and the data in the first pending information storing fourth area is shifted to the first pending information storing third area.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c before updating is "2", the first area for storing the first reserved information The data is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first pending information storage second area is shifted to the first pending information storage first area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first reservation information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effect is not reserved, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. , the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 or the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4 is stored in an area with an area number smaller by 1 (first execution information storage area). 223g or the second execution information storage area 223h, or the first suspension information storage first to third areas or the second suspension information storage first to third areas). In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first reserved information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second reserved information. Therefore, program creation can be facilitated.

Returning to FIG. 202, the description continues. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 249) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs a special pattern fluctuation effect or continuous notice. It controls the performance.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the variation mode of the variation performance performed by the third symbol display device 81 differs for each game state, and the ball shooting mode encouraged for each game state is shown to the player. is configured as Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" in which left-handed games are encouraged, the main display right-handed instruction 89 (see FIG. 201) is in a non-display state, and each variable composed of Arabic numerals is displayed. The pattern fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form only one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" where right-handed games are encouraged, right-hand hitting instruction 89 for main display becomes a display state, and each variable pattern composed of Chinese numerals fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. In this way, by clearly differentiating the display mode of the variable symbols in each game state, the player can easily recognize the game state, and at the same time, the game mode (firing mode) necessary for performing the recommended game can be displayed. can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in addition to the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89, a performance hitting instruction (right-hand hitting instruction 81d for presentation; see FIG. 254(d).) A display is made to make it easier for the player to understand which of the left-handed game and the right-handed game should be played, and the start timing thereof. This production hitting instruction is for performing a hitting method suggestion display only at a specific timing, and executing a right hitting suggestion display at the timing of switching from a left hitting game to a right hitting game, or conversely, from a right hitting game At the timing of switching to a left-handed game, a left-handed suggestion display is executed.

Since the main display right-handing instruction 89 and the performance hitting instruction 89 are important display information that suggests the player how to hit, other display contents executed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, each It is configured to be displayed in the forefront with priority over the third symbol in the symbol row, super reach effect, etc.). In addition, as described above, the effect hitting instruction is for displaying the hitting method suggestion only at a specific timing. It is configured to make it easier for players to understand how to hit the ball.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when executing this effect hitting instruction, the current game state, the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol By referring to the execution state of the dynamic display and the type of the special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81, it is configured to determine at which timing the effect hitting instruction is to be executed ( See Figure 253). As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can reduce the interest of the player by executing the effect hitting instruction during the execution of the special symbol variation effect, or the third symbol display device 81 can be used during the left-handed game. It is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the appearance of the suggestion of hitting right for the performance even during the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol to be played.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the variable effect of special symbols to be executed (encouraged) is set according to the game state, and the variable effect of other special symbols (not encouraged) is displayed in the main display area. It is configured not to run in Dm. Specifically, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged and the ball can enter the first starting port 64, only the variable effect and the pending display of the first special symbol are executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the variable effect and the pending display of the second special symbol are not executed in the main display area Dm and the cockpit display area Db. In addition, the right-handed game is encouraged and the ball can win the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a. ” or “normal pattern low probability time shortening state”, only the second special symbol variation effect and suspension display can be executed in the third symbol display device 81, and the first special symbol variation effect and suspension display are the main display It is configured not to be executed in the area Dm and the cockpit display area Db. With this configuration, the main display area Dm and the cockpit display area Db, which are the main display areas of the game result, are not encouraged (the game result is difficult to derive because the fluctuation time is long). To improve the interest of a game by providing a comfortable game without making the player feel discomfort (bad impression) due to the execution of the performance.

Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 225 to 246. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing the startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S101). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, wait processing ("1 second" in this embodiment) (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 202) provided in the main controller 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally. In this case, the process proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203. do.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S156 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off and the setting key 501 is turned on when the power is turned on. In order to start the raise mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability display device 504 starts displaying the probability setting value (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S111), The "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and the process proceeds to S113. do. In the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the processes of S110 to S112 are skipped and the process proceeds to S113 in order to start up in the "normal mode". do.

In the process of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value, set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 227), which will be described later.

The set value command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 228) of the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The audio ramp control device 113 is configured to store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a setting value memory (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 upon receiving the setting value command. .

On the other hand, in the process of S104, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the startup mode should be "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode". To make this determination, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

In the process of S115, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 to set the startup mode to "RAM clear mode".

In the processing of S116, initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S116, S117, S171 and S172) is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating, regardless of whether the settings have been changed, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed. be. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 503 is pressed during startup processing, RAM initialization processing (S116, S117, S171 and S172) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set (S105: No), or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initialization of the RAM 203 conversion processing (S116, S117, S171 and S172).

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117, S171 and S172), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first reserve "0" clearing of the ball number counter 203a, etc.) are set (S117). Further, the ceiling set completion flag 203q is set to OFF (S171), and the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p is cleared to "0" (S172). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), setting change processing is performed to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, referring to FIG. 226, the setting change process (S118) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode". is the processing of

In this setting change process (S118), first, the probability display device 504 is set to start displaying the current probability setting value (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. Display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is started by the setting of starting the display of the probability setting value.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be always fixed to a specific value instead of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. That is, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3") or "2" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. or "3", which is the maximum probability setting value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall staff can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. . Accordingly, the hall staff can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value " 2", and if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is "1", the display starts with the probability setting value set before the power cut off. You may do so. For example, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is as high as "3", there may often be a case where the probability setting value is desired to be slightly smaller (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is started to be displayed as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem will occur. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on. This is done by resetting to 1. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from "3" to "2", it is necessary to repeat turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 so that the probability setting value makes almost one cycle. On the other hand, if the probability set value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting to display the probability set value with "2", the probability setting can be performed while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. Values can be updated.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122). If there is (S122: No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. This initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3"), or may be "2", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. , may be "3", which is the maximum value of the probability setting values. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S122, when it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the process of S123 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

In the updating of the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that point is between "1" and "2", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is changed to "3". , the probability setting value is returned to "1". The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device 504. FIG.

The loop processing of S122→S123→S124: No→S125 (and S126)→S122 continues to be executed until it is determined in the processing of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on by the process of S124 (S124: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the probability display device 504 is set to the probability set value to be used in the game from now on. (S127), and sets the jackpot random number table 202a according to the probability set value (S128).

After the process of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S129). In the process of S129, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has changed to the OFF state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state.

As long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state as a result of the process of S129 (S129: No), the process of S129 is repeatedly executed. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is set (S130), and this setting change is performed. The process (S118) ends.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 225), the process moves to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117, S171 and S172), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased. (clear. In this way, in the process of S124, the hall personnel and the like are strongly aware that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased by having the hall personnel and the like turn on the RAM erase switch 503 to fix the probability setting value. can be made

Further, in the process of S124, the probability set value is determined by detecting the RAM erase switch 503 being turned on, but the probability set value may be determined by detecting that the setting key 501 is turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 227, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and the counter values reach their maximum values ("9999" and "99" in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S153) by the same method as the processing of S207 (see FIG. 228) of the timer interrupt processing to be described later, and the process proceeds to S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228), which will be described later, is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, a process of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65 is performed, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 controls the display of normal symbols. In the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. come. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal figure per counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, random can be sexualized.

In the process of S151, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S151: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. In FIG. 246, the NMI interrupt process, which will be described later, has been executed, so the power-off process after S154 is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and the power supply shutdown command indicating that the power supply is shut down is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). ) (S155). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S156), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished, and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, the occurrence information of the power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is finished. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting processing (S101). By setting to the predetermined value (initial value), the process of S151 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 228, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing according to the seventh embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In timer interrupt processing and main processing (see FIG. 227), commands or signals to be sent to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processing. , when a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and the pachinko machine 10 are connected) A signal is output to an external output terminal plate (not shown), etc.). In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission are transmitted to sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices), and the signals are output to various devices.

After the process of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the winning process for executing the process at the time of winning each special symbol is executed ( S203). This winning process (S203) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After S203, next, normal electric power control processing for executing drive control processing for the normal electric power 72 is executed (S204). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbols. ◯ symbol) appears and becomes a winning state, the normal electrode 72 is opened for a predetermined period of time. remains closed. This normal electric role control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S204, next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S205). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches 208, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("9999" in the seventh embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the seventh embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Then, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal pattern per counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal pattern counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (seventh embodiment Then, when they reach "9999", "99", "99", "9", and "99") respectively, they are cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure per counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the general figure per counter C4 is read as an initial value, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal pattern per counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM203.

Next, the starting winning process associated with the winning of the first starting opening 64, the upper second starting opening 71, or the lower second starting opening 71a is executed (S208). The details of this starting winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a gate passage process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in this gate passage processing (S209), the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is obtained. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203i (see FIG. 203), and the reserved number of variable display of the normal design is displayed on the normal design reservation lamp 84, for example. Details of this gate passage processing (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the gate passing process (S209) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying a special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or a process by the third symbol display device 81 based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S208) A special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S209), normal design determination is performed, and normal design variable display based on the determination result is performed in the normal design display device 83. A figure change process is executed (S211). In this normal pattern variation process (S211), the normal pattern hit probability is performed at either a high probability (for example, 99/100) or a low probability (70/100) according to the game state described above. Then, the normal symbols are variably displayed based on the result of success or failure, and the display result corresponding to the result of success or failure is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 . In addition, the detail of normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) is later mentioned with reference to FIG.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation processing (S211), the firing control processing is executed (S212), and further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), and this timer interrupt processing is terminated. .

Note that the firing control process (S212) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to fire the ball on or off. Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output processing (S201) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, processing to be executed periodically is executed by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228), and in the main processing, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. However, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). . For example, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing is executed by the timer interrupt processing, reading processing (S202), winning processing (S203), normal electric role control processing (S204), and switch reading processing (S205). ) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, the starting winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S208).

In the starting winning process (S208), it is determined whether or not the ball enters the first starting hole 64, the upper second starting hole 71, or the lower second starting hole 71a. A process of storing (reserving) the values of C3 and CS1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the starting opening 64, 71, 71a that has won is executed. Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the starting winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting hole 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the first starting port switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) of the ball into the first starting port 64, read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 228), the first A ball entering the 1 starting port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 228).

As a result of the determination in S301, when it is determined that the ball has won the first start hole 64 (there has been a start win) (S301: Yes), then whether the game state is the "normal game state", that is, It is determined whether or not the game state encourages left-handed games (S302). As a result of the determination, if it is not in the "normal game state" (S302: No), the ball fired by the non-encouraged (prohibited) left-handed game instead of the recommended right-handed game is thrown into the first start port 64. Since it means that a prize has been won, an alarm sound is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 202), and a left-handed hitting instruction such as "please hit right" is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Error processing is executed (S303), and the process proceeds to S305.

By configuring in this way, in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" where the left-handed game is not encouraged 1 When a ball is detected by a starting port switch (not shown), error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed, and the player is prompted to execute a left-handed game in a game state in which left-handed games are not encouraged. It is possible to shy away (promote right-handed games), eliminate games in a game mode different from the recommended game specifications as much as possible, and realize the game characteristics assumed in each game state.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the game state is the "normal game state" (S302: Yes), the game state encourages left-handed games, so the process of S303 is skipped and S303 is skipped. The process proceeds to S305 without performing left-handed error processing.

As a result of the processing of S301, when it is determined that the ball has won the first starting hole 64 (there has been a starting prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (main controller 110 (S305) determines whether or not the number N1 of active balls (N1) of dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that is reserved is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the seventh embodiment) (S305) . Then, even if there is a prize to the first starting port 64, if the number of balls to be activated is not N1<4 (S305: No), this starting prize processing (S208) is terminated, and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) back to

On the other hand, if the number N1 of balls held in operation is less than 4 (S305: Yes), the value of the first ball number counter 203a (number of balls held in operation N1) is incremented by 1 (S306). Then, this time, since the winning is to the first starting port 64 corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S307), and processing is performed. to S312.

In the processing of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting hole 64 (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the upper second starting hole 71 (start winning). (S304). Here, as with the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) to the upper second starting port 71 read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 228) 2), the ball entering the upper second starting port 71 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228).

When it is determined that the ball has won the upper second starting hole 71 (there has been a starting prize) (S304: Yes), the process proceeds to S309.

In addition, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the ball has entered the upper second start hole 71 (S304: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state is the "normal game state". If it is determined to be in the "game state", it is a game state in which a left-handed game is encouraged.

In the process of S304, if it is determined that the ball has not won the upper second starting hole 71 (S304: No), then whether or not the ball has won the lower second starting hole 71a (start winning) is determined (S308). Here, similarly to the first start opening 64 and the upper second start opening 71, the entry (winning) to the lower second start opening 71a read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 228) is detected. Based on the output signal of the side second starting port switch (not shown), the ball entering the lower side second starting port 71a is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228).

When it is determined that the ball has won the upper second starting hole 71 or the lower second starting hole 71a (there has been a starting prize) (S304: Yes or S308: Yes), then the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number N2 of the second special symbol dynamic display (fluctuation effect) operation suspension balls suspended in the main controller 110) is less than the upper limit ("4" in the seventh embodiment) or not (S309). Then, whether there is a prize to the upper second start opening 71 and the lower second start opening 71a (S304: No and S308: No), or to the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a Even if there is a prize, if the number N2 of operation pending balls is not less than 4 (S309: No), this starting prize winning process (S208) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228).

On the other hand, if the number N2 of operation pending balls is less than 4 (S309: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second pending ball number counter 203b (number of operation pending balls N2) (S310). And this time, since it is a winning prize to the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the random values C1 to C3, CS1. It is set as the first (S311), and the process proceeds to S312.

Also, in the processing of S301 and S304, when the ball enters the first starting port 64 and the upper second starting port 71 at the same time, or in the processing of S301 and S308, the first starting port 64 and the lower second starting port 71a When the ball wins at the same time, the winning processing of the ball to the first starting port 64 is preferentially executed, and the winning processing of the ball to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is waited. , in the start winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228), the ball winning process to the waiting upper second starting opening 71 or the lower second starting opening 71a is executed. You may

In the process of S312, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 202) and stored in each reserved ball storage area. That is, among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d set as the storage destination in S307, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a The random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 and the variation type counter storage area 203d4 are reserved (stored) (S312).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S307 based on the winning to the first start port 64, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S306 If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved first area. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area of the first reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3 , CS1 are reserved.

Also, among the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e set as the storage destination in S311, the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b The random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 are reserved (stored) respectively (S312).

Specifically, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S311 based on the winning to the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, and the processing of S310 If the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reservation second area. If there is, in each storage area of the second reservation third area, if the value of the second reservation ball number counter 203b after addition is "4", in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area Counters C1 to C3, respectively , CS1 are reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S306 (operational reserved ball number N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the process of S307, In order to transmit the first reserved ball number command including the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S313). In addition, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition by the process of S310 (number of activated ball N1), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the process of S311, and the jackpot In order to transmit the second reserved ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the second reserved ball number command is stored in the RAM 203. It is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S313). As a result, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 228) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. . When the process of S313 is finished, the start winning process (S208) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command in the process of S313 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S312. However, it is also possible to use the read value stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the process of S312.

Next, the gate passing process (S209), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing this gate passage processing (S209). In the gate passage processing (S209), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered the ball), and if the ball has passed through (entered the ball), the value of the normal game per counter C4 is stored in the normal game reserved ball. A process of storing (holding) in the area 203i is executed.

In this gate passage processing (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the passage of the ball into the through gate 67 (see S205 in FIG. 228) read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 228), (ball entry) is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 228).

In the process of S401, if the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S401: No), this gate passing process (S209) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228). On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered the ball) (S401: Yes), then whether the game state is the "normal game state", that is, the shooting of the left-handed game ball is encouraged. It is determined whether or not the player is in a game state (S402). As a result of the determination, if it is "normal game state" (S402: Yes), the ball fired by the non-encouraged (prohibited) right-handed game instead of the encouraged left-handed game has passed through the through gate 67. Therefore, a warning sound is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 202), and the third symbol display device 81 executes a performance hitting instruction such as "Return to left hitting." A hitting error process is executed (S403), and the process proceeds to S404.

By configuring in this way, when a ball is detected at the through gate 67 in the "normal game state" in which right-handed games are not recommended, error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed, thereby preventing right-handed players from being hit. To make a player avoid playing a right-handed game in a game state in which the game is not encouraged, to eliminate as much as possible the game in a game form different from the game specifications to be encouraged, and to realize the game characteristics assumed in each game state. can do.

It should be noted that, in the process of S402, if the game state is not the "normal game state" (S402: No), the "probability change state", the "general pattern high probability time reduction state", and the "latency probability Since it is a variable state or a "low probability time shortening state", the normal right hitting error process of S403 is not performed, the process of S403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S404.

In the processing of S404, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (normal pattern variable display operation reserved ball number HN reserved in the main controller 110) is the upper limit value ("4" in the seventh embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than (S404). Then, even if there is a ball passing through the through gate 67 (entering the ball), if the number of balls HN < 4 (S404: No), the gate passing process (S209) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (Fig. 228).

On the other hand, if the number of pending balls in operation HN<4 (S404: Yes), the value of the number of pending balls in normal pattern 203h (the number of pending balls in operation HN) is incremented by 1 (S405). Then, the value of the counter C4 per normal pattern is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 202), and the read data is stored in the normal pattern reservation first to fourth areas provided in the normal pattern reservation ball storage area 203i. It is stored in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (S406).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h after addition by the process of S405 is "1", the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 is reserved in the normal pattern reservation first area. In addition, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h after addition is "2", it is in the normal pattern reserved second area, and if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h after addition is "3" If the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h after addition is "4" in the reserved third area, the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 is reserved in the normal pattern reserved fourth area. After the processing of S406 is completed, this gate passage processing (S209) is completed, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) is returned to.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured not to transmit the normal pattern pending ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol to the sound lamp control device 113, but the normal pattern pending ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol It may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device 113 and perform an effect (announcement) regarding a reserved symbol or the like relating to variable display of normal symbols. In this case, by transmitting the value of the normal pattern per counter C4 in the normal pattern pending ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute the so-called pre-reading process regarding the normal pattern, and the production of the normal pattern. It may be configured to provide variations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing this special figure variation process (S210).

This special symbol variation process (S210) includes dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37, and control of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. It is something to do.

The MPU 201, in this special figure variation process (S210), firstly, determines whether or not one of the first special figure and the second special figure is in the jackpot at the moment (S501). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special pattern display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, during a predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, during the jackpot opening), During a predetermined period of time after the jackpot game ends (that is, jackpot ending). As a result of determination in S501, if it is during the jackpot of any special symbol (S501: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S210) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) is returned to.

In the processing of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S501: No), next, it is determined whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the midst of a small hit at present. (S551). During the small hit, during the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the small hit, and a predetermined time before the start of the small hit game (that is, the opening of the small hit) and during a predetermined time after the end of the small winning game (that is, the ending of the small winning). As a result of the determination in S551, if any special symbol is in the middle of a small hit (S551: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S210) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) is returned to.

In the processing of S551, when it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (S551: No), next, the special symbol display device 37 checks whether the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being displayed dynamically. If it is discriminated (S502) and the first special symbol is dynamically displayed in the special symbol display device 37 (S502: Yes), the setting process regarding the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not performed, so S503 and S504 Skip the process and proceed to S505.

In the process of S502, if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S502: No), then, after the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is stopped, a predetermined It is determined whether or not time has passed (S503). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped (S503: No), the process proceeds to S505. As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuation performance) of the first special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (the third symbol display device 81 in the case of the "normal game state") only for a predetermined time, so that the game is played. The player can be made to visually recognize the stop pattern.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S503, if a predetermined time has passed after the stop of the dynamic display (S503: Yes), whether or not to perform the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the motion of the first special symbol Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for performing various setting processing of the dynamic display in the case of performing target display is performed (S504), and then the processing proceeds to S505.

Here, with reference to FIG. 232, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S504), which is one process of the special figure fluctuation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. Figure 232 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S504).

In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S504), as described above, whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed, and the setting of the dynamic display in the case of performing the dynamic display of the first special symbol processing, etc.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S504), first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (dynamic display (variation effect) operation reserved ball number related to the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110 N1) is greater than "0" (S5001). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is not greater than "0" (S5001: No), there is no dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed. End the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S504) and return to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 231).

In addition, in the process of S5001, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operation reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S5001: No), a third symbol is displayed according to the game state. The display device 81 is configured to perform a demonstration effect. This demonstration effect is a game state in which the variation effect of the first special symbol can be executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, in the "normal game state", the variation effect (dynamic display) of the first special symbol to be executed. Executed if does not exist.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", when there is no reserved number of balls of the first special symbol to be executed, the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, and the first The period until it is judged that the value of the number of held balls counter 203a (the number of held balls in operation N1) is greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

The set demo command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 228) of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next, the sound lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

In addition, when neither the dynamic display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed, a predetermined standby screen is displayed, and when the player grips the operation handle 51, the demo is displayed from the standby screen. perform the performance. Then, during the execution of the demonstration effect, if the ball wins the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, the movement of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It may be configured to be executed by switching to a variable effect corresponding to the target display. In this case, when each variable performance is executed from the display contents of the demonstration performance, the player can easily understand that the demonstration performance is terminated and the variable performance is started immediately after the variable performance is started. , an effect (for example, a cut-in effect, etc.) different from the display content of the demonstration effect is executed so that the player can clearly and easily understand that the demo effect has ended (that the variable effect has started). good too. In this variable performance, it is determined whether or not a big win pattern that shifts from a non-big win state to a big win state appears.

In the process of S5001, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is a value greater than "0" (S5001: Yes), dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol It is determined that it is time to start execution, and first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operational reserved ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S5002). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (variable effect) of the reserved dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol is started by the processing described later, so that the reserved ball related to the first special symbol This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d (S5003). This data shift process (S5003) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the first reserved ball execution area 203f. , 1st reservation 1st area → 1st reservation ball execution area 203f, 1st reservation 2nd area → 1st reservation 1st area, 1st reservation 3rd area → 1st reservation 2nd area, 1st reservation 4th area →The data in each area is shifted, such as the first reserved third area.

After the data shift process of S5003, based on the values of various counters stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process, the special symbol display device 37 (if the "normal game state", the third symbol display In order to perform the setting process of the dynamic display of the first special symbol executed in the device 81), first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 is turned on. (S5004). As a result of determination, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203k is not turned on (S5004: No), the game state is "normal game state", "normal high probability time shortening state" or "normal low probability time shortening state" , and since the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5007. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203k is turned on (S5004: Yes), the gaming state is "probability variable state" or "latent probability variable state", and the special symbol jackpot probability is in a high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007.

In the process of S5007, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the second special symbol is being executed (S5007). As a result of the determination, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not being executed (S5007: No), the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the A jackpot lottery (win/fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is won based on the set jackpot random number table 202a is performed (S5008).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. is determined based on the relationship between the value of and the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low probability state ("normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state"). In this case, in the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot random numbers are defined such that the jackpot probability is 32/10000 when the set value is "1" and 36/10000 when the set value is "3". In addition, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state (“probability fluctuation state” or “latent probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. ” is 221/10000, and the set value “3” is 225/10000.

In the process of S5008, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, , is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the process of S5008, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S5008: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol (see FIG. 205(a)) and the first reserved ball execution area Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in 203f, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S5009).

In this process, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, and after the jackpot, the "time reduction function" is given until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times. There is a jackpot type "time saving A" or a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special pattern will be in a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the "time saving function" will also be granted until the next jackpot. The jackpot type "Probability A" that transitions to "state" or the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special pattern will be in a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the "time saving function" is not given "latency It is determined whether the jackpot type "probability A" that shifts to "probability fluctuation state" or the jackpot type. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, the jackpot type is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 205(a)).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5010). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from among the selected performance modes based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 and 14) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for the big win, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time, and the process proceeds to S5016.

On the other hand, in the process of S5007, if it is determined that the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the second special symbol is being executed (S5007: Yes), or if it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S5008 (S5008 : No), a small winning lottery to determine whether or not it is a small winning based on the value of the big winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the big winning random number table 202a set in S5005 or S5006. Processing is performed (S5011).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, whether or not a small hit is determined by referring to the big hit random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value, and the big hit random number counter stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. It is determined based on the value of C1. As described above, regardless of the game state (mode) and set values that the pachinko machine 10 can take, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot random value is defined so that the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 5000/10000. It is

In the process of S5011, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the small hit random number value defined in the big hit random number table 202a, and if they match. , it is determined to be a small hit. As a result of the processing of S5011, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S5011: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S5012). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, since only one type of small winning type is provided, the display mode is set without referring to the small winning type table or the like.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S5013). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f A dynamic time (fluctuation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from the selected performance mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of this small hit, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 and 14) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the small hit.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for small hits, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Also, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time, and the process proceeds to S5016.

On the other hand, as a result of the small winning lottery process of S5011, when it is determined that it is not a small winning (S5011: No), the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of loss is set. Therefore, the process proceeds to S5014. In the process of S5014, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved ball are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203a and the current gaming state, the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 include a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special Set one of the "reach" production modes (S5014). In the seventh embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode differs according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S5015), and the process proceeds to S5016. In the process of S5015, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S5014, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first held ball execution area 203f Select the variation pattern associated with Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In this way, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small win, and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are performed by the same random number value C3, By judging and determining with the same judging program using CS1, the program can be shared and the number of development man-hours can be reduced during development.

Next, in the process of S5016, based on the variation time according to the variation pattern of the dynamic display of the first special symbol determined by the process of S5010, S5013 or S5015, the variation pattern via the sound lamp control device 113 Set the special figure 1 variation pattern command to notify the corresponding variation time to the display control device 114 (S5016). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is "variable probability A", and further, if the "25 seconds" "super reach" variation pattern is selected, the jackpot / "variable probability A special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "25 seconds" is set. Also, if you lose in the big winning lottery and small winning lottery, and if the "25 seconds" "super reach" fluctuation pattern is selected, the special figure 1 showing the "25 seconds" "super reach" A variation pattern command is set.

After the processing of S5016, the stop type set in the processing of S5009, S5012 or S5014 is set to the special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. (S5017), this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S504) ends, returns to special figure fluctuation processing (figure 231 reference).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the special figure 1 stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) is based on the propriety of the first special symbol By grasping the stop type of the dynamic display, it is possible to determine the stop result of the variable presentation in detail based on the information.

These special figure 1 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 1 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 228 ), these commands are sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, it generates a special figure 1 variation pattern command for display and a special figure 1 type command for display according to the game state based on it. and transmits it to the display control device 114 .

In this way, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol that results in a big win is being executed, the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a small win or a loss, so that two special symbols are displayed. It is possible to prevent each jackpot result from being derived in the dynamic display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the dynamic display of the big win in one of the second special symbols or the first special symbol is being executed, the dynamic display of the other first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. The result of the display is configured to be a small win or a loss, but it may be configured so that the other dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can also be a big win.

Returning to FIG. 231, the description continues. In the process of S505, the special symbol display device 37 determines whether or not the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is being dynamically displayed (S505), and the special symbol display device 37 displays the second special symbol dynamically. If it is being displayed (S505: Yes), since the setting process regarding the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not performed, the process of S506 and S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S508.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the second special symbol (S505: No), then, after the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is stopped , it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (S506). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed after the stop of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S506: No), the process proceeds to S508. As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (“probability variation state”, “general pattern high probability time reduction state”, “latency probability variation state” for a predetermined time). Or, if it is a "normal pattern low probability time shortened state", it is displayed on the third pattern display device 81), so that the player can visually recognize the stop pattern.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S506, if a predetermined time has passed after the stop of the dynamic display (S506: Yes), whether or not to perform the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the motion of the second special symbol Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for performing various setting processing of the dynamic display in the case of performing target display is performed (S507), and then the processing proceeds to S508.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S507), which is one process of the special figure fluctuation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. Figure 233 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S507).

In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S507), as described above, whether or not to perform dynamic display of the second special symbol, setting of the dynamic display in the case of performing dynamic display of the second special symbol processing, etc.

In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S507), first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol reserved in the main controller 110 N2) is greater than "0" (S5301). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is not greater than "0" (S5301: No), there is no dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed. End the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S507), and return to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 231).

In addition, in the process of S5301, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S5301: No), the third symbol is displayed according to the game state. The display device 81 is configured to perform a demonstration effect. This demonstration effect is a game state in which the second special symbol variation effect can be executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, "probability variation state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", and "latency probability variation state". Or, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", it is executed when there is no second special symbol variation effect (dynamic display) to be executed.

Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state", "general pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state", the number of pending balls of the second special symbol to be executed does not exist, the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, and the value of the second pending ball number counter 203b (operation pending ball number N2) is determined to be greater than "0". The period up to is determined to be during the demonstration.

The set demo command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 228) of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next, the sound lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits a display demo command corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display demo command. Then, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display the demonstration effect for the variation effect of the second special symbol.

In the process of S5301, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is a value greater than "0" (S5301: Yes), the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol It is determined that it is time to start the execution, and first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operational reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1 (S5302). This is because execution of one dynamic display (variable effect) of the reserved dynamic display (variable effect) related to the second special symbol is started by the processing to be described later. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e (S5303). This data shift process (S5303) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the second reserved ball execution area 203g. , Second reservation first area → second reservation ball execution area 203g, second reservation second area → second reservation first area, second reservation third area → second reservation second area, second reservation fourth area →The data in each area is shifted, such as 2nd reserved 3rd area.

After the data shift process of S5303, based on the values of various counters stored in the second holding ball execution area 203g by the data shift process, the special symbol display device 37 ("probability fluctuation state", "general figure high probability time In order to set the dynamic display of the second special symbol executed in the third symbol display device 81) if it is a shortened state, "latency probability fluctuation state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time shortened state", first , In order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S5304). As a result of determination, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203k is not turned on (S5304: No), the game state is "normal game state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "normal low probability time reduction state" , and since the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5307. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203k is turned on (S5304: Yes), the game state is "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", and the special symbol jackpot probability is in a high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S5306), and the process proceeds to S5307.

In the process of S5307, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is being executed (S5307). As a result of the determination, when the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is not being executed (S5307: No), the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and in S5305 or S5306 A jackpot lottery (win/fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is made based on the set jackpot random number table 202a is performed (S5308).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. is determined based on the relationship between the value of and the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low probability state ("normal game state", "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state"). In this case, in the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot random numbers are defined such that the jackpot probability is 32/10000 when the set value is "1" and 36/10000 when the set value is "3". In addition, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state (“probability fluctuation state” or “latent probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. ” is 221/10000, and the set value “3” is 225/10000.

In the processing of S5308, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, , is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the process of S5308, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S5308: Yes), the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol (see FIG. 205(b)) and the second reserved ball execution area Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in 203g, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S5309).

In this process, the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. That is, the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, and after the jackpot, the "time reduction function" is given until the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed 100 times. The jackpot type "time saving A" or the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special pattern will be in a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the "latency probability change state" will not be given the "time saving function". The jackpot type is discriminated as to whether the jackpot type to be transferred is “probability A” or not. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, the jackpot type is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 205(b)).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5310). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big win, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g, and the and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from among the selected performance modes based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 and 14) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for the big win, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time, and the process proceeds to S5316.

On the other hand, in the process of S5307, if it is determined that the dynamic display that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is being executed (S5307: Yes), or if it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S5308 ( S5308: No), the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second holding ball execution area 203g, small hit to determine whether or not a small hit based on the big hit random number table 202a set in S5305 or S5306 Lottery processing is performed (S5311).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, whether or not a small hit is determined by referring to the big hit random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value, and the big hit random number counter stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. It is determined based on the value of C1. As described above, regardless of the game state (mode) and set values that the pachinko machine 10 can take, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the small hit random value is defined so that the small win probability of the second special symbol is 7500/10000. It is

In the process of S5311, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the small hit random number value defined in the big hit random number table 202a, and if they match. , it is determined to be a small hit. As a result of the process of S5311, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S5311: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S5312). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, since only one type of small winning type is provided, the display mode is set without referring to the small winning type table or the like.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S5313). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g A dynamic time (fluctuation time) of dynamic display (variation performance) is determined from the selected performance mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13 to 14) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the small hit.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for small hits, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Also, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time, and the process proceeds to S5316.

On the other hand, as a result of the small winning lottery process of S5311, when it is determined that it is not a small winning (S5311: No), the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of losing is set. (S5314). In the process of S5314, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the second reserved ball are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203b and the current gaming state, the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 include a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special Set one of the "reach" production modes. In the seventh embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode differs according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5316. In the process of S5315, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display of the missing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S5314, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second held ball execution area 203g Select the variation pattern associated with Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time.

In this way, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small win, and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are performed by the same random number value C3, By judging and determining with the same judging program using CS1, the program can be shared and the number of development man-hours can be reduced during development. Further, by determining and determining the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the same determination program, the program can be shared, and the development man-hours can be reduced at the time of development.

Next, in the process of S5316, based on the variation time according to the variation pattern of the dynamic display of the second special symbol determined by the process of S5310, S5313 or S5315, the variation pattern via the sound lamp control device 113 Set the special figure 2 variation pattern command to notify the corresponding variation time to the display control device 114 (S5316). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is a jackpot type "probability variable A", and a "25 seconds" "super reach" variation pattern is selected, the jackpot ・A special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "probability variation A" and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if you lose the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery, and if the ``25 seconds'' ``super reach'' fluctuation pattern is selected, the special figure 2 showing the lost ``25 seconds'' ``super reach'' A variation pattern command is set.

Then, after the processing of S5316, the stop type set in the processing of S5309, S5312 or S5314, set the special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 (S5317), this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S507) ends, returns to special figure fluctuation processing (figure 231 reference).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the special figure 2 stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) is based on the propriety of the second special symbol By grasping the stop type of the dynamic display, it is possible to determine the stop result of the variable presentation in detail based on the information.

These special figure 2 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 2 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (S201 in FIG. 228 ), these commands are sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command, it is based on the special figure 2 variation pattern command for display, the special figure 2 type command for display, and the special figure 2 type command for display and for display A special figure 2 effect command is generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 .

Returning to FIG. 231, the description continues. In the process of S508, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display variation time of the first special symbol being executed has passed, and whether or not the dynamic display variation time of the second special symbol being executed has passed. Then, according to the determination result, the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped (S508), and the special symbol variation process (S210) is terminated, Return to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228).

Here, with reference to FIG. 234, the variation stop processing (S508), which is one processing of the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 231) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing this fluctuation stopping process (S508).

In this fluctuation stop processing (S508), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display fluctuation time of each special symbol has passed. While displaying on the pattern display device 37 , each determination command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, when one of the first special symbols for which the variation time has passed is a dynamic display that becomes a big hit or a small hit, and the dynamic display of the other second special symbol is also being executed in parallel, or the variation time One of the second special symbols that has passed is a dynamic display that becomes a big hit, and if the dynamic display of the other first special symbol is also being executed in parallel, the other second special symbol or the first A process of stopping the dynamic display of the special symbol as a failure is performed. Furthermore, in the case of "ordinary figure low probability time reduction state" or "ordinary figure high probability time reduction state", according to the counting result of the number of times of dynamic display of the special symbol Time saving end condition of "time saving function" is established or not, and if the time reduction end condition of the "time reduction function" is established, the processing of switching the "time reduction function" from valid to invalid is performed. Also, if the special pattern is in a low probability state, it is determined whether the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern has reached the ceiling. Perform transition processing to "low probability time reduction state".

In the fluctuation stop processing (S508), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5501). As a result of determination, when it is determined that dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5501: No), the process proceeds to S5506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S5501: Yes), the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (variation time) has passed (S5502). The display time during the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 etc. (Determined according to the special figure 1 variation pattern command ), if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not passed (S5502: No), the display of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated ( S5505), end this fluctuation stop processing (S508), and return to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 231).

In the seventh embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the upper LED group 37b1 lights in a predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display of the first special symbol is started. Alternatively, a display mode of turning off is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5502, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S5502: Yes), special symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped for the upper LED group 37b1 of the device 37 (S5503). The stop design is preset by the process of S5009, S5012 or S5014 of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 232).

In the seventh embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, The upper LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the big win, and when the judgment result is a small win, each LED group is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the small win. lights up.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set in the process of S5503, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set. , In order to display the special LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37 and to perform the confirmation display, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5511. The special figure 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this special figure 1 confirmation command, if the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the game state is "normal game state", or , In the "normal game state", while the variation performance of the first special symbol is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the ceiling is reached by the variation performance of the second special symbol, and the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" is reached. If transferred), to the display control device 114 to transmit a special figure 1 confirmation command for display. The display control device 114 receives the special figure 1 confirmation command for display, stops the variation production of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and confirms and displays the stop symbol. is configured as In addition, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is not executed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 displays even if it receives the special figure 1 confirmation command. It is configured not to transmit the display special figure 1 confirmation command to the control device 114 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing related to the command related to the variation effect that has not been executed, and reduce the processing load.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 in the process of S5501 (S5501: No), then the special symbol display device 37 It is determined whether or not dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed in the lower LED group 37b2 (S5506). As a result of determination, when it is determined that dynamic display of the second special symbol is not executed in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5506: No), this fluctuation stop process (S508) is terminated. , returns to the special figure variation process (see Figure 231).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying the second special symbol (S5506: Yes), the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation time) has passed (S5507). The display time during the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 etc. (Determined according to the special figure 2 variation pattern command If the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not passed (S5507: No), the display of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated. (S5510), end this fluctuation stop processing (S508), and return to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 231).

In the seventh embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the lower LED group 37b2 lights in a predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display of the second special symbol is started. Alternatively, a display mode of turning off is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5507, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S5507: Yes), special symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped for the lower LED group 37b2 of the device 37 (S5508). The stop design is preset by the process of S5309, S5312 or S5314 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 233).

In the seventh embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a loss, only the leftmost LED of the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, The lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the big win, and when the judgment result is a small win, each LED group is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (type) of the small win. lights up.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set in the process of S5508, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set. , In order to display the special LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37 and to display the confirmation, set the special figure 2 confirmation command (S5509), and the process proceeds to S5511. The special figure 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this special figure 2 confirmation command, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the game state is "normal figure high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "hidden probability fluctuation state" or "general pattern low probability time reduction state", or "general pattern high probability time reduction state", the second special pattern is displayed in the third pattern. In the state executed by the device 81, the time saving end condition is established by the fluctuation performance of the first special symbol, and when it shifts to the "normal game state"), the display special figure 2 confirmation command for the display control device 114 to send. The display control device 114 receives the special figure 2 confirmation command for display, stops the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and confirms and displays the stop symbol. is configured as It should be noted that, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 confirmation command to the display control device 114 for display special FIG. 2 is configured not to transmit the confirmation command. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing related to the command related to the variation effect that has not been executed, and reduce the processing load.

Here, the other stop process (S5511), which is one process of the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 234) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the other stop processing (S5511).

In this other stop processing (S5511), one of the first special symbols for which the fluctuation time has passed is a dynamic display that becomes a big hit or a small hit, and the dynamic display of the other second special symbol is also being executed in parallel. In the case of, or when the dynamic display of one of the second special symbols after the passage of the fluctuation time is a big hit, and the dynamic display of the other first special symbol is also being executed in parallel, the other A process of stopping the dynamic display of the second special symbol or the first special symbol as a failure is performed.

In this other stop process (S5511), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol has stopped (whether or not the dynamic display fluctuation time has elapsed) (S5601). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol has stopped (the fluctuation time of the dynamic display has passed) (S5601: Yes), then the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5602). As a result of determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5602: Yes), furthermore, whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol after the change time has passed has been elected as a jackpot or a small hit is determined (S5603). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins the jackpot or the small hit (S5603: Yes), the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed should be stopped as a losing symbol. , to the lower LED group 37b2, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the missing symbol (S5604), the other stop process (S5511) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop process (Fig. 234 reference), and the process proceeds to S5512.

By configuring in this way, the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in the "normal game state" can be stopped as a losing symbol by the dynamic display of the first special symbol as a big win or a small win. can. As a result, a right-handed game that is not recommended in the "normal game state" is performed, the upper second start port 71 is made to win, the second special symbol is dynamically displayed, and a small win is won. It is possible to prevent an unexpected prize ball in terms of game specifications, such as winning a prize ball in the variable prize winning device 65 in an open state.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not being executed (S5602: No), the processing of S5603 and S5604 is skipped, and the other stop processing (S5511) ends. Then, the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 234), and the process proceeds to S5512. Also, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not won the big hit and the small hit (S5603: No), the process of S5604 is also skipped in this case, and the other stop The process (S5511) is terminated, the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 234), and the process proceeds to S5512.

In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not stopped (S5601: No), that is, the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped (dynamic display fluctuation If it is determined that the time has passed), then it is determined whether or not dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5605). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5605: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol wins the jackpot (S5606). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol has won the jackpot (S5606: Yes), the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is stopped as a losing symbol, the upper LED For the group 37b1, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the missing symbol (S5607), the other stop processing (S5511) is ended, and the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 234) is started. Return, and the process proceeds to S5512.

On the other hand, in the process of S5605, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not being executed (S5605: No), the processes of S5606 and S5607 are skipped, and the other stop process (S5511) ends. Then, the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 234), and the process proceeds to S5512. Also, in the process of S5606, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not won the jackpot (S5606: No), the process of S5607 is also skipped in this case, and the other stop process (S5511 ), return to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 234), and proceed to S5512.

Returning to FIG. 234, the description continues. In the process of S5512, it is determined whether or not the game state is the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" or the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" (S5512). As a result of the determination, if it is not "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" (S5512: No), it is not a gaming state in which the time saving end condition can be satisfied, so the process of S5513 is skipped. to the processing of S5514. On the other hand, in the processing of S5512, if it is determined that the game state is "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" (S5512: Yes), "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" Or because the special symbol has stopped dynamic display in the "general figure high probability time reduction state", the time saving counting process for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied due to the stop of the special symbol Execute the time saving counting process (S5513), and then the process proceeds to S5514.

Here, with reference to FIG. 236, the time saving counting process (S5513), which is one process of the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 234) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing this time saving counting process (S5513).

In this time-saving counting process (S5513), it is determined whether or not the time-saving end condition of the "time-saving function" is satisfied according to the counting result of the dynamic display of the special symbol, and the time-saving end condition of the "time-saving function" is determined. is established, the process of switching the "time saving function" from valid to invalid is performed.

In this time-saving counting process (S5513), first, the value of the time-saving counter 203o is subtracted by 1 (S5701), and then the value of the subtracted time-saving counter 203o is determined to be a value greater than "0" ( S5702). As a result of determination, if the value of the time saving counter 203o subtracted in the process of S5701 is not a value greater than "0", that is, if the value of the time saving counter 203o is "0" or less (S5702: No), time saving end conditions is established, then it is determined whether or not the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is turned on (S5703), and if the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is turned on (S5703: Yes), the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is set to OFF (S5704), this time saving counting process (S5513) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 234).

Also, when it is determined that the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is not turned on in the processing of S5703 (S5703: No), it is determined that the time saving low accuracy flag 203n is turned on, and the time saving low accuracy flag 203n is turned off. Set (S5705), terminate this time saving counting process (S5513), and return to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 234).

It should be noted that, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203o subtracted in the process of S5701 is greater than "0" (S5702: Yes), since the time saving end condition is not satisfied, S5703 ~ By skipping the processing of S5705, this time saving counting processing (S5513) is ended, and the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 234) is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 234, the description continues. In the processing of S5514, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203k is turned on (S5514). As a result of determination, when the probability variation flag 203k is turned on (S5514: Yes), it is a high probability state of special symbols, and since it is a game state that cannot reach the ceiling, the process of S5515 is skipped and this fluctuation stop The process (S508) is terminated and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 231). On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203k is not turned on (S5514: No), it is a low probability state of special symbols, and since it is a game state in which it is possible to reach the ceiling, the number of executions of dynamic display of special symbols is the number of times of reaching the ceiling. Determines whether or not has reached, and according to the determination result, executes the ceiling reaching counting process (S5515) in order to shift to the "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state", and ends this fluctuation stop processing (S508), Return to special figure variation processing (see Figure 231).

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the ceiling reaching count process (S5515), which is one process of the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 234) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing this ceiling reach counting process (S5515).

In this ceiling reaching counting process (S5515), the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is counted, and it is determined whether or not the counting result reaches the ceiling reaching number. Set the number of times of time reduction based on the transition to "probable time reduction state".

In this ceiling reaching counting process (S5515), first, 1 is added to the value of the ceiling reaching counting counter 203p (S5801). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the added value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p is smaller than "900" (S5802).

As a result of the determination in S5802, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p added in the processing of S5801 is smaller than "900" (S5802: Yes), the processing of S5803 to S5806 is skipped, and this ceiling reaching count processing (S5515 ) and returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 234).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5802, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p added in the processing of S5801 is not less than "900", that is, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 203p is greater than or equal to "900" (S5802: No), because the ceiling has been reached, it is then determined whether or not the ceiling setting completion flag 203q is turned on (S5803). As a result of the determination, if the ceiling set flag 203q is not turned on (S5803: No), since the special symbol has not yet shifted to the "low probability time shortening state" after the special symbol has become a low probability state. , In order to shift to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", first set the value of the time saving counter 203o to "1140" (S5804), to indicate that it has transitioned to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" The ceiling set flag 203q is set to ON (S5805). Then, in order to shift the game state to the "ordinary figure low probability time shortening state", the time reduction low probability flag 203n is set to ON (S5806), this ceiling reaching counting process (S5515) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop process (See FIG. 234). As a result, it is possible to generate the "ordinary map low probability time shortening state" based on the number of times of reaching the ceiling.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S5803, if the ceiling setting completed flag 203q is turned on (S5803: Yes), since it has already transitioned once to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", the processing of S5804 to S5806 is skipped Then, this ceiling reaching counting process (S5515) is ended, and the process returns to the fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 234).

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the winning process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 238 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S203).

This winning process (S203) sets the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) according to the type of the jackpot when a jackpot of each special symbol occurs, and set the opening time of Then, in the case of a big win state (game), a big win opening/closing control process (S608) for opening or closing the variable prize winning device 65 is executed, and the end of the big win state is set at the timing when the big win state ends. End processing (S610) is executed.

In addition, in this winning process (S203), when a small winning of each special symbol occurs, the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened (the number of rounds) is set according to the small winning, and the opening time of the variable winning device 65 is set. set. Then, in the case of the small winning state (game), a small winning opening/closing control process (S616) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed, and the small winning state ends at the timing when the small winning state ends. A small hit end process (S618) that sets is executed.

In the winning process (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a big win has been won in any dynamic display of special symbols (S601). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is won (S601: Yes), in order to perform the jackpot game, first, in order to invalidate the "variable probability function", the "time saving function" and the "ceiling function" during the jackpot game, The probability variable flag 203k, the time saving high probability flag 203m, the time saving low probability flag 203n and the ceiling set flag 203q are set to off (S602), and the values of the time saving counter 203o and the ceiling reaching count counter 203p are cleared to "0" ( S603). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S604). Then, in order to transmit a jackpot opening command indicating the start of the jackpot to the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S604). An opening time (for example, "30 seconds" or "10 seconds") corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S606), and the process proceeds to S611. Thereby, the jackpot opening command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 228) of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

The round counter described above is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), controls the opening of the variable winning device 65 according to the jackpot game, and the round Decrease the value of the counter by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot in progress is terminated.

In the process of S601, if it is determined that the big win is not won in the dynamic display of any special symbol (S601: No), then the small win is won in the dynamic display of any special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S607). As a result of the determination, if a small hit is won (S607: Yes), a winning opening to be opened (that is, the variable winning device 65) is set to perform a small win game, and a small win type (for a small win The number of openings of the variable winning device 65 corresponding to the type of special symbol that has been won is set in an opening counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S608).

Then, in order to transmit a small winning opening command indicating the start of a small winning to the sound lamp control device 113, the small winning opening command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S609), Next, the opening time of the small hit (for example, "0.5 seconds") is set (S610), and the process proceeds to S611. Thereby, a small winning opening command is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 228) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

It should be noted that the above-described open counter is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the open counter, and when the value is set in the open counter (that is, "1" or more), while controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65 according to the small winning game, Decrease the value of the open counter by 1. Then, when the value of the open counter becomes "0", the small prize being executed is terminated.

Next, in the process of S611, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S611). As a result of determination, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S611: Yes), a jackpot opening/closing control process for controlling the opening/closing of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S612).

Here, with reference to FIG. 239, the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed based on the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 set in the winning process (S203).

In the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), first, the opening time set in S605 of the winning process (S203), or the opening time set in S6020 (see FIG. 240) of the big winning opening opening process (S6007) to be described later. It is determined whether or not the interval time has passed (S6001). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has not passed (S6001: No), it is not the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so that the variable winning device 65 is kept closed. Skip the process and proceed to S6006.

On the other hand, in the process of S6001, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has passed (S6001: Yes), it is the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6002). , a winning counter (not shown) is set to "10" (S6003). Then, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 at the time of the big win ("30 seconds" in the seventh embodiment) is set (S6004), and a big winning opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened is issued. It is generated and set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6005), and the process proceeds to S6006. The sound lamp control device 113 that has received the command to open the big winning opening executes the information that the variable winning device 65 has been opened in the third symbol display device 81, and informs the player that the variable winning device 65 has been opened. It is configured to prompt the player to win the ball to the variable winning device 65 which is open to the player.

In the process of S6006, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open (S6006). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device 65 is not open (S6006: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open and is during the opening time or the interval time, so the processing of S6007 is skipped and this The jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) is ended, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 238). On the other hand, in the process of S6006, when it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open (S6006: Yes), in order to determine the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 that is open, processing during the opening of the big winning opening is performed. Performs (S6007), ends the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612), and returns to the winning process (see FIG. 238).

Here, with reference to FIG. 240, the process (S6007) during the opening of the big winning opening, which is one process of the jackpot opening/closing control process (S612) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 240 is a flow chart showing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007).

In this process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007), the process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In this big winning opening opening process (S6007), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S6004 of the big winning opening/closing control process (S612) has passed (S6011). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed (S6011: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is established, and the closing timing of the variable winning device 65 in the round is reached. In order to clear the counter value to "0" (S6012) and close the variable winning device 65, the process proceeds to S6016. The closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6016 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S6011, if it is not the time when the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed (S6011: No), then whether or not the big winning opening switch 65c is turned on, that is, whether the ball enters the variable winning device 65 It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (S6013).

In the process of S6013, if the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 65c and the ball has won the variable winning device 65 (S6013: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6014), then the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6015). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6015: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", 10 or more balls enter the variable winning device 65 and variable winning is achieved. Since the conditions for closing the device 65 are satisfied, the process proceeds to S6016 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

In the processing of S6015, if it is determined that the value of the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6015: Yes), the conditions for closing the variable winning device 65 are not established, and the variable winning device 65 is opened. , the processing of S6016 to S6020 is skipped, and the processing during opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is ended. After the process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is completed, the process returns to the big win opening/closing control process (see FIG. 239).

Next, in the process of closing the variable winning device 65 from S6016, first, the variable winning device 65 is set to be closed (S6016), and then the audio lamp control device 113 is notified that the variable winning device 65 has been closed. A large winning opening closing command is set (S6017), and the process proceeds to S6018. It should be noted that the large winning opening closing command set in the process of S6017 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 228). ) to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Next, in the process of S6018, since one round of the variable winning device 65 has been completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter (S6018), and then whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6019). If the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6019: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (number of times the variable winning device 65 remains open) remains, so the next variable winning device 65 is opened (for example, "1 second") is set (S6020), the process during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 239).

On the other hand, in the process of S6019, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S6019: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since all the opening operations have been completed, the interval time is not set (that is, S6020 is skipped) in order to end the jackpot state, and the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is finished, and the jackpot opening/closing control is performed. Return to the process (see FIG. 239).

Returning to the winning process (S203) in FIG. 238, the description is continued. After the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 239) of S612 ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S613). As a result of determination, if the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S613: Yes), in order to continue the big win state, the process of S614, which is the big win end setting process, is skipped, and this winning process (S203) exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S613, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S613: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since all the opening actions have been completed, a jackpot ending process is performed to end the jackpot state (S614), and the winning process (S203) is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 241, the jackpot ending process (S614), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 241 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S610).

In this jackpot end processing (S614), the probability variable flag 203k, the time-saving high-probability flag 203m and the time-saving counter 203o are set based on the winning jackpot type.

In this jackpot end processing (S614), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "probability variation A" (S6101). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "probability variation A" (S6101: Yes), the probability variation flag 203k is turned on in order to make the gaming state after the jackpot end "probability variation state" (S6102) Then, the time saving high accuracy flag 203m is turned on (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the processing of S6101, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot type "Probability A" (S6101: No), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is the jackpot type "Probability A". Determined (S6104), if the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "probability A" (S6104: Yes), the probability variation flag 203k is turned on (S6105), and the process proceeds to S6108.

On the other hand, in the process of S6104, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot type "probability A" (S6104: No), it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type "time reduction A", and the time saving high The sure flag 203m is turned on (S6106), the time saving counter 203o is set to "100" (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the processing of S6108, an ending command indicating the start of the ending effect of the jackpot is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S6108). The ending command set in the process of S6108 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 228) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the ending effect of a big win.

After the end of the process of S6108, an ending time (for example, "10 seconds") is set according to the gaming state (S6109), and a jackpot end setting process for executing various processes at the end of the jackpot is performed (S6110). , ends the jackpot end processing (S614) and returns to the winning processing (see FIG. 238).

Returning to FIG. 238, the description continues. In the process of S611, if the jackpot is not in progress (S611: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is not during the small winning (S615: No), this winning process (S203) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228). On the other hand, if it is during the small winning (S615: Yes), then, small winning opening/closing control processing for executing opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 according to the small winning game of each special symbol is executed (S616).

Here, with reference to FIG. 242, the small winning opening/closing control process (S616), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing the small winning opening/closing control process (S616) of the seventh embodiment.

In this small winning opening/closing control process (S616), the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed based on the number of openings of the variable winning device 65 set in the winning process (S203).

In this small hit opening and closing control process (S616), first, the opening time set in S609 of the winning process (S203), or set in S6320 (see FIG. 243 to be described later) of the small hitting open process (S6306) to be described later It is determined whether or not the set interval time has elapsed (S6301). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small hit has not passed (S6301: No), it is not the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so the variable winning device 65 is kept closed, so S6302 to S6304 , and the process proceeds to S6305.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small win has passed (S6301: Yes), it is the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so first, the winning counter (not shown) is set to " 10" is set (S6302), and then the opening time of the variable winning device 65 is set (S6303). Then, it generates a large winning opening opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened, sets it in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6304), and proceeds to S6305.

In the processing of S6305, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small hit (S6305). As a result of determination, if the variable winning device 65 is not open at the time of the small win (S6305: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open at the time of the small win, but during the opening time or interval time. By skipping the processing of S6306, this small winning opening/closing control processing (S616) is terminated, and the processing returns to the winning processing (see FIG. 238). On the other hand, in the processing of S6305, if it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small hit (S6305: Yes), the small winning device 65 is opened in order to determine the closing condition of the open variable winning device 65 Intermediate processing is performed (S6306), this small winning opening/closing control processing (S616) is terminated, and the processing returns to winning processing (see FIG. 238).

Here, with reference to FIG. 243, the small winning opening process (S6306), which is one process of the small winning opening/closing control process (S616) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing the small winning opening process (S6306) of the seventh embodiment.

In the small hit opening process (S6306) of the seventh embodiment, a process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In this small winning opening process (S6306), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S6303 of the small winning opening/closing control process (S616) has passed (S6311). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed (S6311: Yes), the condition for closing the variable winning device 65 is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the variable winning device 65 in the round, so the winning In order to clear the counter value to "0" (S6312) and close the variable winning device 65, the process proceeds to S6316.

On the other hand, in the process of S6311, if it is not the timing when the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed (S6311: No), then whether or not the big winning opening switch 65c (see FIG. 202) is turned on, that is, variable winning It is determined whether or not the ball has won the device 65 (S6313).

In the process of S6313, if the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 65c and the ball has won the variable winning device 65 (S6313: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6314), then 1 is subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6315). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6315: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", 10 or more balls enter the variable winning device 65 and variable winning is achieved. Since the condition for closing the device 65 is satisfied, the process proceeds to S6316 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

In the closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6316, first, the closing setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6316), and then the big winning indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been closed to the sound lamp control device 113. A mouth closing command is set (S6317), and the process proceeds to S6318. It should be noted that the large winning opening closing command set in the processing of S6317 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 228). ) to the audio ramp controller 113 .

Next, in the process of S6318, since one round of the variable winning device 65 has been completed, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 (S6318), and the process proceeds to S6319.

In the process of S6319, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter decremented by 1 in the process of S6318 is greater than "0" (S6319). If the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S6319: Yes), the number of rounds in the small win (number of times the variable winning device 65 remains open) remains, so the next variable winning Set the interval time (for example, "1 second") until the device 65 is opened (S6320), end the small winning open processing (S6306), and return to the small winning opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 242). On the other hand, in the process of S6319, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0" (S6319: No), the number of rounds (variable winning Since the remaining number of openings of the device 65) does not remain, the process of S6320 is skipped, the small hit opening process (S6306) is ended, and the small hit opening/closing control process (see FIG. 242) returns.

In the process of S6313, if it is determined that the ball has not won the variable winning device 65 (S6313: No), or in the process of S6315, it is determined that the value of the winning counter is greater than "0". If it is determined (S6315: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is not established, and in order to continue opening the variable winning device 65, the processing of S6316 to S6320 is skipped, and this small winning The process during opening (S6306) is terminated, and the process returns to the small hit opening/closing control process (see FIG. 242).

In addition, in the small winning game of each special symbol in the seventh embodiment, an opening in which 10 balls shot within the maximum opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing plate 65a based on the small winning of each special symbol cannot win a prize. Since it is set to the time (that is, the special figure 1 per small is "0.1 seconds" and the special figure 2 per is "1.5 seconds"), it is not a closing condition based on the winning number condition, but is set in advance. The closing condition of the variable winning device 65 based on the elapse of the opening time of the variable winning device 65 is easily established.

Returning to the winning process (S203) in FIG. 238, the description is continued. After the end of the small winning opening/closing control process of S616 (see FIG. 242), it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S617). As a result of the determination, if the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S617: Yes), in order to continue the small hit, the process of S618, which is the end setting process of the small hit, is skipped and this hit process (S203) is terminated, and the process returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228).

On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0" (S617: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 65 Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the small winning state, a small winning ending process is performed (S618), this winning process (S203) is terminated, and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238) back to

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the normal chart fluctuation process (S211), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing this normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211).

This normal pattern variation process (S211) is for controlling the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 83 due to passage of the ball through the through gate 67. FIG.

In the normal pattern variation process (S211), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric player 72 is currently projecting (operating), that is, whether or not the normal pattern is winning (S701). As a result of the determination, if the normal electrode 72 is protruding (S701: Yes), the normal pattern is in the process of winning, so the normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) ).

On the other hand, if the normal electric combination 72 is not protruding (S701: No), it is not during the winning of the normal symbols. Determine (S702). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the normal design display device 83 is not in the variable display of the normal design (S702: No), then after the variable display in the normal design display device 83 stops, a predetermined time (for example, "1 second ”) It is determined whether or not it has passed (S703). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed after the stop of the variable display (S703: No), the normal pattern fluctuation processing (S211) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) is returned to. As a result, the stopped symbols in the variable display are displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stopped symbols.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S703, if a predetermined time has passed after the variable display is stopped (S703: Yes), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (variable It is determined whether or not the displayed number of balls to be activated (HN) is greater than "0" (S704).

As a result of the process of S704, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (operation reserved ball number HN) is not greater than "0" (S704: No), there is a normal pattern variable display reserved ball number to be executed. Since it means that it does not, it ends this normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) and returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228). On the other hand, if the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (actuated reserved ball number HN) is a value greater than "0" (S704: Yes), it means that it is time to start executing the variable display regarding the reserved normal pattern. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203h (operation reserved ball number HN) (S705). This is due to the processing (S706 to S712) to be described later, in accordance with the start of the execution of one variable display of the reserved variable display regarding the normal symbols, the number of reserved balls regarding the normal symbols decreases by one. It's for.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the normal map reserved ball storage area 203i (S706). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the general pattern reservation ball storage area 203i toward the general pattern reservation ball execution area 203j. Reservation 1st area → Normal drawing reservation ball execution area 203j, Normal drawing reservation 2nd area → Normal drawing reservation 1st area, Normal drawing reservation 3rd area → Normal drawing reservation 2nd area, Normal drawing reservation 4th area → Normal drawing The data in each area is shifted, in a reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S706, the normal design in the normal design display device 83 is variable based on the data (that is, the value of the counter C4 for the normal design) stored in the normal design reservation ball execution area 203j by the data shift processing. In order to perform a display, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving low probability flag 203n or the time saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S707). As a result of determination, if the time saving low probability flag 203n and the time saving high probability flag 203m are not turned on (S707: No), the "normal game state" or "latency probability fluctuation state" in which the "time saving function" is invalid Then, the normal symbol variable display time is set to "15 seconds" (S708), and the process proceeds to S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving low-probability flag 203n or the time-saving high-probability flag 203m is turned on (S707: Yes), the "probability fluctuation state" in which the "time-saving function" is effective, the "general pattern high-probability time reduction state ' or 'normal pattern low probability time shortened state', the variable display time of the normal pattern is set to '0.1 second' (S709), and the process proceeds to S710.

In the process of S710, it is determined whether or not the time-saving high-probability flag 203m is turned on (S710), and if the time-saving high-probability flag 203m is not turned on (S710: No), that is, in the normal design low probability state , By referring to the group for low probability state in the random number table 202h per normal pattern, the value of the per normal pattern counter C4 stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203j is determined, and the stop pattern of the variable display of the normal pattern is determined. (That is, the propriety of the normal design) is determined (S711). Also, if the time saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S710: Yes), that is, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, refer to the group for the high probability state in the random number table 202h per normal pattern, and hold the normal pattern The value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the ball execution area 203j is determined, and the stop symbol of the variable display of the normal symbol (that is, the propriety of the normal symbol) is determined (S712). After the processing of S711 and S712, this normal figure fluctuation processing (S211) is ended, and it returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228).

As a result, by changing the winning/losing probability of normal symbols according to the game state, it is possible to determine whether or not the normal electric combination 72 is likely to open when the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the player hits to the right. can make a difference. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is a situation where the normal electric 72 is likely to open (that is, a state with a high probability of normal symbols) and is likely to flow into the lower second starting port 71a side. , a situation in which it is more difficult to open the ordinary electric ring 72 than in a situation in which it is easy to open (that is, a low probability state of ordinary symbols), and the upper surface of the closed (protruding) ordinary electric ring 72 is rolled from the left end to the right end. Depending on the game state, it is possible to create different game characteristics for each game state by varying the situation in which the game can flow into the variable winning device 65 side.

In the processing of S702, when it is determined that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S713). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the processing of S708 or S709, and if this variable display time has not passed (S713: No), the normal symbol display device 83 is displayed. is updated (S714), this normal pattern fluctuation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228).

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 has passed (S713: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol preset by S711 or S712 to the normal symbol display device 83 is set (S715), this normal pattern fluctuation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228).

As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the normal design display device 83 is set based on the normal design variation processing (S211), and the variable display is started in the normal design display device 83. until the variable display time elapses, the "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. When the result of the variable display is a win, the symbol "O" is lit, and when the result is a loss, the symbol "x" is lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, normal electric control processing (S204), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing this normal electric duty control process (S204).

In this normal electric role control process (S204), when a normal symbol hit occurs, opening/closing (protrusion and immersion) drive control of the normal electric role 72 is executed according to the game state. That is, the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric part 72 is set according to the game state, and the normal electric part 72 is driven to open based on the set time, and when the set projecting time elapses, it is opened. A control is executed to close (protrude) the ordinary electric terminal 72 during (immersion).

In the normal electric role control process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric role 72 is open (immersed), that is, whether or not the normal symbols are winning (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal electric part 72 is not open (S801: No), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbols are not winning, next, whether the variable display of the normal symbols has ended. It is determined whether or not (S802).

As a result of determination in S802, if the variable display of normal symbols has not ended (S802: No), the normal electric role control process (S204) is ended and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) is returned to. If the variable display of the normal symbols has ended (S802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a win has been won in the variable display (S803).

As a result of the determination in S803, if it is determined that the win has not been won in the variable display (S803: No), this ordinary electric role control process (S204) is ended, and timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) back to On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is won in the variable display (S803: Yes), in order to execute the control related to the winning, first, the time saving low probability flag 203n or the time saving high probability flag 203m is turned on. (S804).

As a result of the determination in S804, if it is determined that the time saving low probability flag 203n and the time saving high probability flag 203m are not turned on (S804: No), the “normal game state” or “latency” in which the “time saving function” is invalid probability fluctuation state", set the opening time of the ordinary electric worker 72 in the winning state to "0.1 second" based on the specified contents of the ordinary electric worker opening table 202j (S805), and based on the hit In order to open the normal power supply 72 once, the value of the power supply counter (not shown) is set to "1" (S806), and the process proceeds to S809.

On the other hand, in the process of S804, if it is determined that the time saving low probability flag 203n or the time saving high probability flag 203m is turned on (S804: Yes), the "time saving function" is effective "probability fluctuation state", "normal It is determined that it is a high probability time shortening state” or “normal low probability time shortening state”, and the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric worker 72 in the winning state is “ 5.8 seconds” (S807), and in order to open the normal electric circuit 72 once based on the hit, set the value of the electric circuit counter (not shown) to “1” (S808 ), and the process proceeds to S809.

In the process of S809, the normal electric part 72 is opened (immersed) (S809), the normal electric part 72 is driven from the closed (protruding) state to the open state, and the normal electric part control process (S204) is executed. End and return to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228).

As a result, when the player hits to the right, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the position where the ordinary electric terminal 72 is arranged, and the state in which the ordinary electric terminal 72 is open is long or short. can make a difference. As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided toward the lower second starting port 71a, or rolls completely on the upper surface of the normal electric element 72 from the left end to the right end when the normal electric element 72 is closed. By making the state in which the ball can flow down to the variable winning device 65 side differ depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state.

In the process of S801, if it is determined that the normal electric part 72 is open (S801: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the process of winning, then It is determined whether or not the normal electric circuit 72 has been opened once (S810). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the set opening time of the ordinary electric circuit 72 has not passed (S810: No), S811 to S813 are executed in order to maintain the open state of the ordinary electric circuit 72. The process is skipped, the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 228) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the process of S810, if it is determined that the set opening time of the normal electric terminal 72 has passed (S810: Yes), first, the closing (projection) process of the normal electric terminal 72 is executed. (S811), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the electric duty counter set in the process of S806 or S808 (S812). Then, it is determined whether or not the decremented value of the electric duty counter is greater than "0" (S813). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is greater than "0" (S813: Yes), the number of times the normal electric service 72 is opened remains based on the hit, so the process is executed. The process proceeds to S809, and after a predetermined interval process is performed, the normal electric circuit 72 is opened again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the service counter is not greater than "0" (S813: No), that is, if the value of the service counter is less than or equal to "0", the normal service based on the pertinence is determined. 72 has been completely opened, the ordinary electric circuit 72 is not reopened, the ordinary electric circuit control processing (S204) is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 228) is returned to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. 246 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, and stores power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power failure occurrence information settings (S901). ), ending the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 253, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 247) that is activated upon power-on and main processing (see FIG. 248) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 247, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1116 (see FIG. 248) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 248, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110, it executes power-off processing in S1116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), it will transfer to S1004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1116, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 248). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1010), the effect The left-handed instruction performed flag 223i is set to ON (S1051), and the right-handed instruction performed flag 223j for effect is set to OFF (S1052). Next, interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), left-handed for effect The instruction executed flag 223i is set to ON (S1051), and the effect hitting right instruction executed flag 223j is set to OFF (S1052). Next, interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The reason why the clearing process of S1009 is skipped is that when the process of S1008 is reached from S1004 via the process of S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when a setting value command is received from the main controller 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in a setting value memory (not shown) (S1013), and the main processing ( 248).

In this manner, in the start-up processing of the audio ramp control device 113, the main processing (see FIG. 248) is started until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 225) is received. By waiting for the transition, the audio lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability set value set by the main controller 110, and the main processing and subsequent processing can be executed based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main controller 110, the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not reached the final stage, and the start-up process of the main controller 110 has not ended normally. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not terminated normally, and the process is not shifted to the main process. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to grasp whether or not the start-up processing of the main control device 110 has been normally executed, and whether the main control device 110 has started up normally. It is possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 from running out of control in a non-existent state.

Next, referring to FIG. 248, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the processing of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if "1 millisecond or more" has not passed ( S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the process of S1101, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed because S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed in a short period (within "1 millisecond"), whereas S1110 This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation effect processing of S1111 and the command determination processing of S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

In the process of S1101, when it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 247, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds"). 227. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a winning effect process for executing an effect related to a big win set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect indicating that the variable winning device 65 is opened or a right-handed notification is given during the opening of the variable winning device 65 related to the jackpot by the first special symbol and the second special symbol) performance).

Next, in the processing of S1106, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the performance effect, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and during the valid period, the frame button is pressed. This is processing for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the frame button 22 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1106) is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command received from the main controller 110, or the special figure 2 variation pattern command and Variation effect processing corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed based on the special figure 2 stop type command (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1151. The details of this variation effect processing (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1151, in order to display the main display right-handed instruction 89 and the production hitting instruction on the third symbol display device 81, the current game state and the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are determined, and each A command for displaying how to play is set, and the process proceeds to S1111. The details of this hitting instruction display process (S1151) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of this command determination process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1112, counter update processing is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, the update of a counter that determines the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, and the update of a pending change counter (not shown) that draws a lottery for "pending change notice" are performed in this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment) and resetting it to “0” after reaching the maximum value (“99”).

When the process of S1112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off processing is executed (S1116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 248) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 determine the command.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main controller 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of determination, if a command has been received from main controller 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, It is determined whether or not a command (that is, a special figure 1 variation pattern command, a special figure 1 stop type command, a special figure 1 confirmation command, etc.) related to dynamic display (variation effect) of 1 special symbol is received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is received (S1202: Yes), special figure 1 command processing for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1203), and this The command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 248).

Here, with reference to Drawing 250, special figure 1 command processing (S1203) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 250 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 1 command processing (S1203).

In this special figure 1 command process (S1203), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1221). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1221: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received special figure 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1222).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 252) described later, the variation of the first special symbol is displayed for the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 1 variation pattern command for display that notifies the start of production and its variation pattern type. After that, this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 249 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1223). And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command is received (S1223: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command (S1224).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation performance process (see FIG. 252) described later, the variation performance of the first special symbol is displayed for the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 1 stop type command for display that notifies the stop type of. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol is started is set to ON (S1225), this special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination process (See FIG. 249).

It should be noted that the special figure 1 stop type command, after the main controller 110 transmits the special figure 1 variation pattern command when starting the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is indicated by the special figure 1 variation pattern command. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main controller 110 as a command indicating the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol. By setting the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1225, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 252) to be executed later, the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the first reserved ball number command Determination of whether the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted based on and the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command match I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the first pending ball number command, and the first extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variable performance of the special symbol matches. As a result of those determinations, in the variation performance of the first special symbol of 1, if the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command do not match, or the first If the stop type based on the number of pending balls command and the stop type based on the special figure 1 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and an abnormality is detected. It is configured to perform error handling to indicate

As a result of the processing of S1223, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has not been received (S1223: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1226). The special figure 1 determination command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation performance of the first special symbol when the variation performance of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . When it is determined that this special figure 1 confirmation command is received (S1226: Yes), when the variation performance of the first special symbol is executed for the display control device 114, the variation of the first special symbol Set the special figure 1 confirmation command for display to confirm and display the effect (S1227), terminate this special figure 1 command process (S1203), and return to the command determination process (see FIG. 249).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 1 confirmation command from the audio lamp control device 113, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the first special While confirming and displaying the variation performance of the symbol, when the variation performance of the first special symbol is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 confirmation command for display is ignored (the processing based on is not executed) , the display content is not changed based on the

As a result of the processing of S1226, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1226: No), the process related to the variation effect of the other first special symbol is performed (S1228), and this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 249).

Returning to FIG. 249, the description continues. In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is not received (S1202: No), then the main controller 110 displays the second special symbol dynamic It is determined whether or not a command (that is, a special figure 2 variation pattern command, a special figure 2 stop type command, or a special figure 2 confirmation command, etc.) related to display (variation effect) is received (S1204). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect) is received (S1204: Yes), special figure 2 command processing for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1205), and this The command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 248).

Here, with reference to Drawing 251, special figure 2 command processing (S1205) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 251 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 2 command processing (S1205).

In this special figure 2 command process (S1205), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 2 command process (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1231). As a result of determination, if the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S1231: Yes), the variation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is extracted (S1232).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 252) described later, the variation of the second special symbol is displayed for the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 2 variation pattern command for display that notifies the start of production and its variation pattern type. After that, this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 249 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S1231: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1233). And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S1233: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command (S1234).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 252) described later, the variable effect of the second special symbol is displayed for the display control device 114 according to the game state. It is used when setting the special figure 2 stop type command for display that notifies the stop type of. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol is started is set to ON (S1235), this special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination process (See FIG. 249).

In addition, the special figure 2 stop type command, after the main controller 110 transmits the special figure 2 variation pattern command when starting the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is indicated by the special figure 2 variation pattern command. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main controller 110 as a command that indicates the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol. By setting the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b to ON by the processing of S1235, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 252) to be executed later, the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the second pending ball number command Determination of whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted based on and the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command match I do. In addition, the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the second pending ball number command, and the second extracted from the received special figure 2 stop type command It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variable performance of the special symbol matches. As a result of those determinations, in the variation effect of the second special symbol of 1, if the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 2 variation pattern command do not match, or the second If the stop type based on the number of pending balls command and the stop type based on the special figure 2 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the abnormality is detected. It is configured to perform error handling to indicate

As a result of the processing of S1233, if it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S1233: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 ( S1236). The special figure 2 determination command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation performance of the second special symbol when the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed in the third symbol display device 81 . When it is determined that this special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S1236: Yes), when the second special symbol variation effect is executed for the display control device 114, the second special symbol variation Set the special figure 2 confirmation command for display to confirm and display the effect (S1237), terminate this special figure 2 command processing (S1205), and return to the command determination processing (see FIG. 249).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 2 confirmation command from the audio lamp control device 113, when the second special symbol variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the second special While confirming and displaying the variation performance of the pattern, when the variation performance of the second special pattern is not executed in the third pattern display device 81, the special figure 2 confirmation command for display is ignored (the processing based on is not executed) , the display content is not changed based on the

As a result of the processing of S1236, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command is not received (S1236: No), the process related to the variation performance of the other second special symbol is performed (S1238), and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 249).

Returning to FIG. 249, the description continues. In the processing of S1204, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has not been received (S1204: No), then the main controller 110 issues the first reserved ball number command. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S1206). Then, when it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (see FIG. 202) of main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1207). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the first reserved ball number command, is set to the sub-first reserved ball number updated in S1207. Stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first suspension information storage area 223e indicated by the value of the counter 223c (S1208). Then, a display first reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number of the variable effect of the first special symbol is set to the display control device 114 (S1209), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 248).

Here, the first reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning), so the process of S1207 is executed each time there is a starting winning. Thus, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the voice The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223 c of the lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203 a of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first reservation information storage area 223e. That is, when the variable performance of the reserved first special symbol is executed, what will be the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) before the execution of the variable performance It is possible to determine the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

As a result of the processing of S1206, if it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has not been received (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the second reserved ball number command has been received from main controller 110. (S1210). Then, when it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (see FIG. 202) of main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect reserved by the main controller 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1211). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the second reserved ball number command, is set to the sub-second reserved ball number updated in S1211. Stored in the second pending information storage first to fourth areas of the second pending information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the counter 223d (S1212). Then, a display second reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number of the second special symbol variation effect is set to the display control device 114 (S1213), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 248).

Here, the second reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a (start winning), so the starting Every time there is a winning, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1211. Therefore, even if the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the voice The value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223 d of the lamp controller 113 can be corrected to match the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203 b of the main controller 110 .

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the second reservation information storage area 223f. That is, when the suspended second special symbol variable performance is executed, how the result of the variable performance will be (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) before the execution of the variable performance It is possible to determine the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

As a result of the process of S1210, if it is determined that the second pending ball number command has not been received (S1210: No), then the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S1216), and this command determination process ( S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 248). Here, if the received other command is a command to be used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is to be used in the display control device 114, the command is set to the display control device 114 . For example, the demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1216, temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and then output as a command for the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by processing (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing this variation effect processing (S1110).

This fluctuation effect processing (S1110) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 248), and depending on the game state, the first special symbol or the first special symbol in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 2 Executes various processes for executing the variation effect of the special symbol. Specifically, if the game state is the "normal game state", the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, while the display regarding the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed. is configured not to In addition, if the game state is "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the main of the third symbol display device 81 While performing the variation performance of the second special symbol in the display area Dm, it is configured not to perform the display related to the variation performance of the first special symbol.

In the fluctuation production process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1301). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1301: Yes), both the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, so the first special In order to start the variation effect of the design, the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is turned off (S1302), then the data contained in the first suspension information storage first area provided in the first suspension information storage area 223e 1 execution information storage area 223g (S1303). It shifts to the third area (S1304), subtracts 1 from the value of the sub-first ball count counter 223c (S1305), and proceeds to S1306.

That is, in this case, the suspended first special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first special symbol variable effect suspended in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reservation information first area corresponding to the variable production that has been performed are changed to the values of the first special symbols that are being executed. 1 to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 are stored in the first execution information storage area 223g. Each counter C1 stored in the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 is stored in the first holding information storage first to fourth areas of the information storage area 223e. The same values as those of C3 and CS1 are stored.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the "normal game state" (S1306). As a result of determination, if it is determined that it is not "normal game state" (S1306: No), that is, "general pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low When it is determined that it is the “probable time shortening state”, it is a gaming state in which the second special symbol variation performance is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the first special symbol variation performance is performed. Since there is not, the processing of S1307 to S1309 is skipped, this variation effect processing (S1110) is terminated, and the main processing (see FIG. 248) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1306, when it is determined that the current game state is the "normal game state" (S1306: Yes), the first special symbol variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is a game state, first, based on the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c subtracted in the process of S1305, the first reserved ball number command for display is set (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. do.

The first pending ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 248). sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the number of reserved balls in the variable effect of the first special symbol indicated by the first reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1308, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation performance of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is obtained, Based on the variation pattern, a special figure 1 variation pattern command for display is set in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (S1308), and the process proceeds to S1309. .

The display special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 248) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display special figure 1 variation pattern command. Then, display control of the variation effect of the first special symbol is started.

Next, in the processing of S1309, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now is obtained, Based on the stop type, a special figure 1 stop type command for display is set in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (S1309), and this variation effect process (S1110 ) and return to the main process (see FIG. 248).

The display special figure 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 248) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, in the case of confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol executed by the display special figure 1 variation pattern command set by the processing of S1309, this display special figure 1 stop type command Set a stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1310 ). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1310: Yes), both the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received, so the second special In order to start the variation effect of the design, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S1311), then the data contained in the second reservation information storage first area provided in the second reservation information storage area 223f 2 execution information storage area 223h (S1312), and further, the data contained in the second pending information storage areas 2 to 4 provided in the second pending information storage area 223f are transferred to the first pending information storage first to fourth areas. It shifts to the third area (S1313), subtracts 1 from the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d (S1314), and proceeds to S1315.

That is, in this case, the suspended second special symbol variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the second special symbol variation effect suspended first in terms of time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reserved information first area corresponding to the variable production that has been performed are changed to the values of the second special symbols that are being executed. 2 to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage first area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second pending information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the fourth area for storing the second pending information are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the third area for storing the second pending information.

As a result, the second execution information storage area 223h stores the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold ball execution area 203g of the main controller 110. Each counter C1 stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main controller 110 is stored in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the information storage area 223f. The same values as those of C3 and CS1 are stored.

In the process of S1315, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the "normal game state" (S1315). As a result of the determination, if it is in the "normal game state" (S1315: Yes), it is a game state in which the first special symbol fluctuates in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the second special symbol. , the process of S1316 to S1318 is skipped, the variable effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 248).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1315, if it is determined that the current game state is not the "normal game state" (S1316: No), that is, the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability When it is determined that it is "variation state" or "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", it is a game state in which the second special symbol variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. , the second reserved ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d subtracted in the process of S1314 (S1316), and the process proceeds to S1317.

The second pending ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 248). sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol variation effect indicated by the second reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1317, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on is obtained, A special figure 2 variation pattern command for display is set in order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (S1317), and the process proceeds to S1318. .

The display special figure 2 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 248) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display special figure 2 variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the variation effect of the second special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1318, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now is obtained, Based on the stop type, a special figure 2 stop type command for display is set in order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (S1318), and this variation effect process (S1110 ) and return to the main process (see FIG. 248).

The display special figure 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 248) to the display control device 114 sent. In the display control device 114, in the case of confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol executed by the display special figure 2 variation pattern command set by the processing of S1317, this display special figure 2 stop type command Set a stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the hitting instruction display process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing this playing instruction display process (S1151).

In this hitting instruction display processing (S1151), the current game state is determined, and if the game state is for a right-handed game, a main display right-handed instruction 89 is displayed, and after the right-handed game is started, an effect is displayed. If the playing method instruction has not been executed even once, the performance playing method instruction is given. In addition, in the case of a game state in which a left-handed game is performed, the main display right-handed instruction 89 is erased. Give instructions on how to hit.

In this hitting instruction display process (S1151), first, it is determined whether or not a "normal game state" in which a left-handed game is performed is in progress (S1401). As a result of determination, if it is not in the "normal game state" (S1401: No), that is, "normal pattern high probability time shortening state", "probability fluctuation state", "latency probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction In the case of "state", it is a game state in which a right-handed game is performed, so it is determined whether or not the main display right-handed hitting instruction 89 has been displayed (S1402). (S1402: No), a right-handed instruction display command for main display is set (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1402, if the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 has already been displayed (S1402: Yes), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the effect hitting right instruction execution completion flag 223j is turned on (S1404). After the game state shifts from the beating game to the right beating game, since the performance beating instruction has been executed even once, the processing of S1405 to S1408 is skipped, and this beating instruction display processing (S1151) is performed. End and return to the main process (see FIG. 248).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1404, if the effect right-handed instruction execution completion flag 223j is not turned on (S1404: No), the game state is shifted from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the performance is performed once. Since the usage instruction has not been executed, it is determined whether or not the variation performance of the first special symbol is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 in order to execute the performance usage instruction (S1405). ). As a result of the determination, in the third symbol display device 81, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (S1405: Yes), that is, the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, and the right-handed Although it has shifted to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" in which the game is played, it is in the state of executing the variation performance of the first special symbol that was being executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the left-handed game. (Refer to timing 5 in FIG. 216 and FIG. 255(d)) In this state, the processing of S1406 to S1408 is skipped, and the processing of S1406 to S1408 is skipped, and the processing for displaying the playing instruction (S1151) ends. and return to the main process (see FIG. 248).

As a result of the determination of S1405, in the third symbol display device 81, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is not being executed (S1405: No), that is, the ceiling is reached in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, and the right A state in which the state is shifted to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' in which the hitting game is performed, and the variation performance of the first special pattern executed in the third pattern display device 81 during the left-hand hitting game is finished. Therefore (see timing 6 in FIG. 216 and FIG. 256(c)), a right-handed instruction command for production is set (S1406), and a right-handed instruction for production instruction execution completion flag 223j is set. It is set to ON (S1407), the effect left-hand hitting instruction executed flag 223i is set to OFF (S1408), this hitting instruction display processing (S1151) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 248). .

By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, the variation performance of the first special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the left-handed game is being executed. In the case of , it is possible not to execute the performance hitting instruction. In addition, at the timing when the game state is switched from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, if the variation performance of the first special symbol that has been executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the left-handed game is not being executed, once It is possible to execute the performance hitting instruction only. As a result, the player who is still executing the left-handed game at the timing of reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed and transitioning to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is performed While the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the instruction for striking for performance is not displayed, so the variation of the first special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81. You can increase your interest in the performance. Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the variation performance of the first special symbol which has been executed on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the performance hitting instruction is displayed, and the player can hit the right hand without a sense of incongruity. You can start playing.

In the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the player is in the "normal game state" (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 has been erased (S1409), and the main display right-hand hitting instruction is determined. If 89 has not been erased (S1409: No), the main display right-hand hitting instruction erase command is set (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1409, if the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 has been erased (S1409: Yes), the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the process of S1411, it is determined whether or not the left-handed effect instruction execution completion flag 223i is turned on (S1411). After the game state shifts from the beating game to the left-handed game, since the performance beating instruction has been executed even once, the processing of S1413 to S1415 is skipped, and this beating instruction display processing (S1151) is performed. End and return to the main process (see FIG. 248).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1411, if the effect left-handed instruction execution completion flag 223i is not turned on (S1411: No), the game state is shifted from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, and the effect is produced once. Since the usage instruction has not been executed, it is determined whether or not the variation performance of the second special symbol is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 in order to execute the performance usage instruction (S1412). ). As a result of determination, in the third symbol display device 81, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is being executed (S1412: Yes), that is, the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" or "normal Although the time-saving end condition is established in the "low probability time shortening state", and the state is shifted to the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, the second pattern display device 81 executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game Since it is in the state of executing the variable performance of the special symbol, in this state, the performance hitting instruction is not performed, the processing of S1413 to S1415 is skipped, and this hitting instruction display processing (S1151) is completed. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 248).

As a result of the determination of S1412, in the third symbol display device 81, if the variation effect of the second special symbol is not being executed (S1412: No), that is, the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" or " In the normal pattern low probability time shortening state ', the time saving end condition is established, the state is shifted to the 'normal game state' in which the left-handed game is performed, and the third symbol display device 81 is running during the right-handed game. Since the variable performance of the second special symbol has been completed, a left-handed instruction command for performance is set (S1413), and the left-handed instruction performed flag 223i for performance is turned on in order to instruct the hitting method for performance. (S1414), the effect hitting right instruction execution flag 223j is set to OFF (S1415), this hitting instruction display process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 248).

By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, the variation performance of the second special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game is being executed. In the case of , it is possible not to execute the performance hitting instruction. Further, at the timing when the game state is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, if the second special symbol variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game is not being executed, It is possible to execute a hitting instruction. As a result, the time-saving end condition is established in the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" to perform the right-handed game, and at the timing of shifting to the "normal game state" to perform the left-handed game For the player who is still playing the right-handed game, while the variation performance of the second special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the performance hitting instruction is not displayed, so the third symbol. Interest can be heightened by the variation performance of the second special symbol being executed on the display device 81.例文帳に追加Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the variation effect of the second special symbol, which was being executed on the third symbol display device 81, ends, the hitting instruction for the effect of the left-handed game is displayed, and the player can A left-handed game can be started without discomfort.

In addition, as described above, the effect hitting instruction display is configured to determine the game state and the variation effect of the special symbol being executed in the third symbol display device 81 and control whether or not to display it. , the right-handed instruction 89 for main display is configured to be displayed in synchronization with the right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 at all times. For this reason, for example, like timing 5 in FIG. In the symbol display device 81, the variable performance of the first special symbol is being executed, and even if the performance hitting instruction is not executed, the player is shown the main display right hitting instruction 89. It is possible to switch to the right-handed game by confirming that there is.

In addition, in the "normal game state", when the right-handed game is performed, even if the variation performance of the first special symbol is being executed, it is configured to display the instruction for the performance of the left-handed game. You may Since the right-handed game in the "normal game state" is not a recommended shooting mode, temporarily, after determining whether or not the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, "Please return to the left-handed". If the instruction is withheld, the effect hitting instruction will not be displayed during the variable effect of the first special symbol. For this reason, the effect hitting instruction for warning the player is configured to be immediately displayed regardless of whether or not the special symbol variation effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 254 to 256, the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" will be described. Figures 254 to 256 show the transition of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 which is performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" Fig. 3 shows.

Figure 254 (a) ~ Figure 254 (d), in the conventional pachinko machine, during the "normal game state" of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling by the variation effect of the second special symbol FIG. 254(a) is a diagram showing the transition, and FIG. 254(a) shows the variable display of the first special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". FIG. 254(b) is a diagram showing a state in which only is being executed, and FIG. 254(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol ends from the state of FIG. FIG. 254(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of executions of the variable display has decreased to one more time, and FIG. 254(c) shows the state of FIG. 254(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is being executed in the central portion of the display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. , From the state of FIG. 254 (c), the variable display of the second special symbol ends first and reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" and the right hitting instruction 89 for main display and for production It is the figure which showed the state where how-to-play instructions are displayed.

Figures 255(a) to 256(d) show, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". FIG. 255(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect, and FIG. 255(a) is a state in which the number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". FIG. 255(b) is a diagram showing a state in which only the variable display of symbols is being executed, and FIG. 255(b) shows the state of FIG. 255(a) until the variable display of the first special symbol ends and reaches the ceiling. 255(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of executions of the special symbol variation display has decreased to one more time, and FIG. 255(c) shows that the next variation display of the first special symbol is 255(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. , From the state of FIG. 255 (c), only the variable display of the second special symbol ends and reaches the ceiling, and the state shifts to the "general figure low probability time shortening state" and only the main display right-handed instruction 89 is displayed. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the effect hitting instruction is not executed. FIG.

FIG. 256(a) shows a state in which an effect result is displayed that results in a loss in the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode executed in the variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 255(d). FIG. 256(b) shows that the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode that has been executed in the variable display of the first special symbol ends from the state of FIG. 256(a), resulting in a loss. FIG. 256(c) shows a state in which the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, and FIG. 256(c) shows the state of FIG. 256(d) is a diagram showing a state in which it is notified that the state has shifted to "probable time shortening state", and instructions for playing for production are being executed, and FIG. The notification of the transition to the low probability time shortening state and the instruction for the production hitting method are completed, and the third pattern displayed in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the

FIG. 254(a) shows that only the first special symbol variable display is being executed in a state where the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling is two more times during the "normal game state". state. Also, FIG. 254(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 254(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the last stop symbol "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the second special symbol is displayed. is displayed as being unexecuted (stopped). Furthermore, "4" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the 2 special symbols is "4" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that there are "two times" left to reach the ceiling. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" that can be shifted when reaching the ceiling may be referred to as "play time".

Next, FIG. 254(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. showing. Also, FIG. 254(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 254(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 254(a) is finished, and "871" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 254 (a). state. Furthermore, as in FIG. 254(a), since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b.

Next, in FIG. 254(c), the next variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 254(b), and the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. It is in the middle, showing a state where the variable display of the second special symbol has also been started. Also, FIG. 254(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 254(c), one of the four holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol is being executed. In addition, FIG. 254(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 254(d), only the variable display of the second special symbol ends from the state of FIG. It shows a state in which a right hitting instruction 89 and an effect hitting instruction are displayed. In addition, FIG. 254(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 254(d), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 254(c), is still being executed. A state that the variable display of 1 special symbol is being executed is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol is being executed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that started execution in FIG. 254(c) is completed, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" remaining until the ceiling is reached, and 1 is subtracted from the state of Fig. 254 (c). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". For this reason, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, and in the central part of the main display area Dm, the first special symbol “Super Reach” production mode variation production is displayed. A hitting instruction 81d is displayed.

In this way, in the conventional pachinko machine, regardless of the execution content in the third pattern display device 81, the main display for the main display at the timing of reaching the ceiling from the "normal game state" and shifting to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" The right hitting instruction 89 and the effect hitting instruction are displayed. For this reason, from the player's point of view, a display suggesting a right-handed game suddenly appears while they are increasing their interest in the execution of the variable performance of the "Super Reach" performance mode, which is highly expected for a big win. There is a possibility that the game will be aroused. In addition, even though the variable performance with a high expectation for the big win of the first special symbol, which started to be executed during the left-handed game, is being executed, the performance hitting instruction is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. There is a possibility that the player may be confused as to whether or not the right-handed game should be started.

Next, FIG. 255(a) shows that only the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the "normal game state" in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling is two more. It shows the state of being. Also, FIG. 255(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 255(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. In addition, since the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed, the stop symbol "261" of the previous variation table is displayed on the special figure 2 mini-reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. 2 It is displayed that the variable display of special symbols is not executed (stopped). Furthermore, "4" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the 2 special symbols is "4" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that there are "two times" left to reach the ceiling.

Next, FIG. 255(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. showing. Also, FIG. 255(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 255(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which was being executed in FIG. 255(a) is finished, and "871" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, due to the end of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 255 (a). state. Furthermore, as in FIG. 255(a), since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b.

Next, in FIG. 255(c), the next variable display of the first special pattern is started from the state of FIG. It is in the middle, showing a state where the variable display of the second special symbol has also started. In addition, FIG. 255(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 255(c), one of the four holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol is being executed. In addition, FIG. 255(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 255 (d), from the state of FIG. 255 (c), the variable display of the second special symbol ends first and reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "general figure low probability time shortening state" and main display This shows a state in which only the right-hand hitting instruction 89 is displayed, and the effect hitting instruction is not being executed. In addition, FIG. 255(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 255(d), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. 255(c), is still being executed. A state that the variable display of 1 special symbol is being executed is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol is being executed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that started execution in FIG. 255(c) is finished, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 255 (c). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the effect hitting right instruction 81d is not displayed as shown in FIG. 254(d).

Next, in FIG. 256(a), from the state of FIG. 255(d), the effect result of the "super reach" effect mode variation effect being executed in the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. state. Also, FIG. 256(a) shows a game state similar to timing 5 in FIG. In FIG. 256(a), the variation effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol that was being executed in FIG. A state that the variable display of 1 special symbol is being executed is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the state in which the effect result of losing is displayed in the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol is displayed. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol whose execution has ended in FIG. , "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini-reel 81b, and it is displayed that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped). Furthermore, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, and in FIG. The displayed ceiling reaching counter 81c is erased. By configuring in this way, the player can increase interest in the variation effect of the first special symbol executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, in FIG. 256(b), from the state of FIG. 256(a), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode, which has been executed in the variable display of the first special symbol, ends, and the third symbol to be lost is displayed. The state displayed in the main display area Dm is shown. Also, FIG. 256(b) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. In FIG. 256(b), the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. , "434" indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and stopped is displayed. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 256(c), from the state of FIG. 256(b), in the main display area Dm, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the transition to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" is performed, and the production hitting method instruction is running. Also, FIG. 256(c) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. 216, which is the state immediately after FIG. 256(b). In FIG. 256(c), one of the three holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. On the other hand, unlike Figure 255 (a) to Figure 256 (b), in Figure 256 (c), the first special symbol is a variable display that starts execution after transitioning to "normal figure low probability time reduction state" Therefore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable effect of the first special symbol is not executed, and the character message 81e of "play time rush" indicating that the ceiling has been reached and the effect suggesting a right-handed game A right hitting instruction 81d and a character message 81f are displayed. Note that the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 is continuously displayed even when the effect right-hand hitting instruction 81d and the character message 81f are displayed. As a result, both the effect right-hand hitting instruction 81d and the character message 81f and the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 can be displayed, and either display can accurately suggest the game content to the player, and the effect right hitting instruction 81d can be displayed. By continuing to display the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 regardless of whether the hitting instruction 81d and the character message 81f are displayed, the main display right-hand hitting instruction 89 is erased by executing the performance right-hand hitting instruction 81d and the character message 81f. Since such control is not required, the control load can be reduced.

Next, in FIG. 256(d), from the state in FIG. 256(c), the entry notification to the “general figure low probability time shortening state” and the instruction for the production hitting method are completed, and displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. The 3rd design to be carried out has shown the state switched from the 1st special design to the 2nd special design. Also, FIG. 256(d) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. 216, which is the state immediately after FIG. 256(c). In FIG. 256(d), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. 256(c) is still being executed. A state that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, the third symbol displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is the second special symbol, and in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is performed, the second special symbol is displayed. A state in which the variable effect corresponding to the dynamic display is executed in the main display area Dm is displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when reaching the ceiling during the "normal game state" and shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state", during the "normal game state" While the execution is started and the dynamic display of the first special symbol executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm in the third symbol display device 81 is being executed, the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol causes the "normal Even if it shifts to "low probability time shortening state", it is configured not to give instructions on how to play for performance. By configuring in this way, a player who is playing a left-handed game can be more interested in the variation performance of the first special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the variation performance of the first special symbol which has been executed on the third symbol display device 81 is finished, the performance hitting instruction is displayed, so that the player can play the right-handed game without any sense of incongruity. can start.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" and it shifts to the "normal game state", the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" During the execution of dynamic display of the second special symbol executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm in the third symbol display device 81, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. Even if it shifts to a ``normal game state'', it is configured so as not to give instructions on how to play for performance (instructions on how to play for performance). By configuring in this way, a player who is playing a right-handed game can be more interested in the second special symbol variation effect being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the variation performance of the second special symbol which has been executed on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the performance hitting instruction is displayed, so that the player can play the left-handed game without a sense of incongruity. can start.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of an eighth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 266. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", dynamic display of special symbols "900 times" which is the number of times the ceiling is reached. is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a variable effect as to whether or not the first special symbol dynamic display jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", out of the "900 times" that is the number of times the ceiling is reached, Until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed for "899 times", the third symbol display device 81 carries out a variable performance as to whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is won or not. The dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured to perform an effect to inform that the ceiling is reached.

The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the seventh embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 257, the detailed electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 257 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment. The main difference between the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment and the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment is that the RAM 223 contains: The point is that a ceiling-reaching count counter 223k and a ceiling-reaching notification flag 223m are added.

The ceiling reaching count counter 223k counts whether or not to shift to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" based on the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special pattern, and shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". This is a counter for notifying that the third symbol display device 81 has reached the ceiling in the variable display of the first special symbol of the "900th time". In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, in the special symbol low probability state, the variable display executed at the "900th time" of the special symbol, that is, the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k reaches "899". When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the player has reached the ceiling.

This ceiling reaching count counter 223k is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on and when the ceiling counting start command is received (see S1010 in FIG. 247 and S1252 in FIG. 259). Then, in the low probability state of the special pattern, that is, in the "normal game state", "normal high probability time reduction state" or "normal low probability time reduction state", the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command When received, 1 is added (S1262 in FIG. 260 or S1272 in FIG. 261). In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k reaches "899", the first special symbol variable display starts execution, that is, in the special symbol low probability state When the variable display of the first special symbol of "900th time" starts execution, the ceiling reaching effect command is set (see S1503 in FIG. 263), and the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached. is configured to

Then, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached in the "900th" first special symbol variation display, and when the "900th" variation display is completed, the ceiling is reached and the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" is entered. In order to make the transition, the performance hitting instruction is executed.

The ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is a flag for determining whether or not the third symbol display device 81 has once notified that the ceiling has been reached in the special symbol low probability state. This ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is set to OFF when the power is turned on and when the ceiling counting start command is received (see S1010 in FIG. 247 and S1253 in FIG. 259). Then, when the variable display of the "900th" first special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol starts to be executed, and when the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is set to off, it is set to on. (See S1504 in FIG. 263).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is set to ON, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed after the "900th time" in the low probability state of the special symbol. In the starting situation, if the third pattern display device 81 has notified that the ceiling has been reached even once (see S1502 in FIG. 263: Yes), the ceiling reaching notification effect is not executed again. By referring to the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m, execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect can be limited to one time.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 258, the jackpot ending process (S610), which is one process of the winning process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (S610) in the eighth embodiment. The difference between the jackpot end processing of the eighth embodiment and the jackpot end processing of the seventh embodiment is that when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, the process of setting the ceiling counting start command is added. be.

In the jackpot end processing (S610) of the eighth embodiment, in the processing of S6104, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot type "probability A" (S6104: No), the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type " Time saving A” is determined, and following the processing of S6106 and S6107, a ceiling count start command is set (S6151), and the process proceeds to S6108. The ceiling counting start command set in the process of S6151 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 228) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When receiving the ceiling counting start command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the ceiling reaching counting counter 223k to "0" in the command determination process of the eighth embodiment described later, turns off the ceiling reaching notified flag, and Preparations are made to count the number of executions of symbol variation display (see FIG. 259).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 259 to 263, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. The main difference between each control process of the eighth embodiment and each control process of the seventh embodiment is that the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 adds a counting process of the number of executions of the variable display of special symbols. and a ceiling arrival notification process is added for notifying that the third symbol display device 81 has reached the ceiling according to the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol.

First, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1111) of the eighth embodiment. The difference between the command determination processing of the eighth embodiment and the command determination processing of the seventh embodiment is that whether or not a ceiling counting start command is received is determined, and if the ceiling counting start command is received, the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is set to "0" to turn off the ceiling reaching notification flag.

In the command determination process (S1111) of the eighth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1210 that the second reserved ball count command has not been received (S1210: No), then the ceiling counting start command has been received. Determines whether (S1251), if the ceiling counting start command is received (S1251: Yes), in order to start counting the number of executions of variable display of the special design in the low probability state of the special design, reaching the ceiling The counting counter 223k is set to "0" (S1252), the ceiling reaching notification flag is set to OFF (S1253), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 248). .

Then, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 260, the special figure 1 command process (S1203) performed by MPU221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113 in 8th Embodiment is demonstrated. Figure 260 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 command processing (S1203) of 8th execution form. The difference between the special figure 1 command process of the eighth embodiment and the special figure 1 command process of the seventh embodiment is that when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received, the addition process of the ceiling reach count counter 223k is added. It is a point.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203) of the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command is received in the process of S1226 (S1226: Yes), after executing the process of S1227, the low probability of the special symbol It is determined whether it is in the state (S1261). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1261: Yes), 1 is added to the ceiling reaching count counter 223k (S1262), this special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination process ( 249).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1261, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in a low probability state (S1261: No), the processing of S1262 is not performed, and other corresponding processing of S1228 is executed, and this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) , and returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 249).

Then, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 261, the special figure 2 command processing (S1205) performed by MPU221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113 in 8th Embodiment is demonstrated. Figure 261 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 2 command processing (S1205) of 8th execution form. The difference between the special figure 2 command processing of the eighth embodiment and the special figure 2 command processing of the seventh embodiment is that when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received, the addition process of the ceiling reach count counter 223k is added. It is a point.

In the special figure 2 command process (S1205) of the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command is received in the process of S1236 (S1236: Yes), after executing the process of S1237, the low probability of the special symbol It is determined whether or not it is in the state (S1271). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1271: Yes), 1 is added to the ceiling reaching count counter 223k (S1272), this special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination process ( 249).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1271, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in a low probability state (S1271: No), the processing of S1272 is not performed, and other corresponding processing of S1238 is executed, and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) , and returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 249).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 262, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing the variation effect processing (S1110) of the eighth embodiment. The difference between the variation effect processing of the eighth embodiment and the variation effect processing of the seventh embodiment is that in the variation that reaches the ceiling (that is, the "900th" variation in the low probability state of the special symbol), the The point is that the three-pattern display device 81 adds an effect for notifying that the player has reached the ceiling.

In the variation effect process (S1110) of the eighth embodiment, after the process of S1309 is completed, the number of rotations until the ceiling is reached is determined, and the ceiling reaching notification process is executed to notify that the ceiling has been reached according to the determination result ( S1351), this variation effect processing (S1110) is ended, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 248).

Here, with reference to FIG. 263, the ceiling reaching notification process (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing this ceiling reaching notification process (S1351).

In this ceiling reaching notification process (S1351), the number of rotations until reaching the ceiling is determined, and a ceiling reaching effect command for notifying that the ceiling has been reached is set according to the determination result.

In this ceiling-reaching notification process (S1351), first, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling-reaching counter 223k is smaller than "899" (S1501). If so (S1501: Yes), since the "900th" change for executing the ceiling reaching notification effect has not been reached, the processing of S1502 to S1504 is skipped, and this ceiling reaching notification processing (S1351) ends. Then, it returns to the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 262).

On the other hand, as a result of determination in S1501, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is not less than "899", that is, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is greater than or equal to "899" (S1501: No) ceiling reach notification effect Since the "900th" variation has been reached for executing S1502: No), since the ceiling reaching notification effect has not been executed even once after reaching the "900th" change to reach the ceiling, the ceiling reaching effect command is set (S1503), and the ceiling reaching notification is performed. The completed flag 223m is set to ON (S1504), the ceiling reaching notification process (S1351) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 262).

As a result of the process of S1502, when it is determined that the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is turned on (S1502: Yes), the ceiling is reached even once after reaching the "900th" change that will reach the ceiling. Since the notification effect is being executed and there is no need to execute the ceiling reaching notification effect, the processes of S1503 and S1504 are skipped, the ceiling reaching notification process (S1351) is terminated, and the variation effect process (Fig. 262 ).

By constructing in this way, execution of the ceiling reaching notification performance is limited to one time from the transition to the low probability state of the special pattern until the ceiling is reached and the transition to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state''. be able to.

In addition, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is constructed so that a small win can be won in addition to the big win, and the variable prize for the small win is opened based on the winning of the small win game. A pachinko machine (so-called 1 type 2) equipped with a device and a time-saving region (so-called V region) in which a big win and a "time-saving function" are given due to the ball passing through the variable winning device for small wins. Seed mixer) may be used, and may be configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state" based on the number of times the "time saving function" is given. In this case, in the "time reduction state", the end condition of the "time reduction variation" is set to the case where the second special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, "7 times"), and the second special symbol dynamic When the display reaches the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "reaching dynamic display") is started, the condition for starting the dynamic display of the second special symbol even during the execution of the reaching dynamic display can be acquired, and the number of executions of dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is the condition for ending the "time shortening state" (for example, the maximum number of pending balls of the second special symbol. So-called remaining pending. Hereinafter, The effect for the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may be referred to as "remaining reserved effect".) In some cases, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed. In such a model, in the variable performance related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time shortening state", not only the performance related to the dynamic display of the arrival, but also the dynamic display of the second special symbol for the remaining pending There is a case where the remaining pending effect is executed by extending to. That is, the arrival dynamic display of the second special symbol and the dynamic display of the remaining reserved second special symbol are executed as a series of variable effects (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "series variable effect"). It is configured. Here, at the stage when the arrival dynamic display is finished, the game state changes from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state" even if the big win or small win is not won, but the remaining reserved second special During execution of the dynamic display of the symbols, the series of variable effects are continued. Then, after the series of variable effects is completed, it is suggested to the player that it has returned to the "normal game state" (for example, the screen layout of the "normal game state", etc.), and the firing mode is changed to the "time reduction state". Executes an effect (for example, "Please return to left-handed", etc.) to prompt a left-handed game from a right-handed game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize game characteristics that are easy for the player to understand. In addition, in the series of variable effects, by executing the number of jackpots that occurred continuously during the "time reduction state" and the total number of game balls acquired, the game value and the game value acquired by the player in the "time reduction state" It is possible to grasp the number of consecutive houses, and to make the game result recognizable to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, if you win a big hit (small hit) in the dynamic display of the second special pattern for the remaining reserved portion, you can switch the production screen while displaying the above-mentioned series of variable productions, or make the character pattern appear. Alternatively, it may be configured to execute a surprise effect of suddenly notifying that a big win or a small win has been won just before the game state is shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a game with unexpectedness and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is triggered, the series of variation effects is executed, and if there is a remaining reserve for the dynamic display of the acquired second special symbol, the end screen of the series of variation effects is displayed. The execution period is configured to be extended by the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Then, when a big win is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbols for the remaining reservation, a special effect in which a predetermined character or the like suddenly appears during execution of the end screen of the series of variable effects is performed. It is configured to run to suggest to the player that he or she has won the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264 to FIG. 266, the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the eighth embodiment will be described. Figures 264 to 266 are the third symbol display device 81 that is performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the eighth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the transition of the variation effect of.

Figure 264 (a) ~ Figure 264 (d), in the conventional pachinko machine, in the "normal game state" when reaching the ceiling by the variation effect of the second special symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 FIG. 264(a) is a diagram showing the transition, and FIG. 264(a) shows the variable display of the first special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". FIG. 264(b) is a diagram showing a state in which only is being executed, and FIG. 264(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol ends from the state of FIG. FIG. 264(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of executions of the variable display has decreased to one more time, and FIG. 264(c) shows the state of FIG. 264(d) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect informing that the ceiling is reached is being executed in the central portion of the display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. From the state of 264 (c), only the variable display of the second special pattern is completed during the execution of the ceiling arrival notification effect, and the ceiling is reached, and the transition to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" is made Right-handed for main display It is a diagram showing a state in which the instruction 89 and the performance hitting method instruction are displayed.

Figures 265(a) to 266(d) show, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling due to the variation effect of the second special symbol during the "normal game state". FIG. 265(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 265(a) is a state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". FIG. 265(b) is a diagram showing a state in which only the variable display of the symbols is being executed, and FIG. 265(b) is from the state of FIG. 265(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol is reduced to one more time, and FIG. 265(c) shows that the next variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 265 (d ), from the state of FIG. 265 (c), only the variable display of the second special symbol ends during the execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, and the ceiling is reached, and the main FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state in which only a right-handed display instruction 89 is displayed, and no performance-oriented hitting instruction is executed.

Figure 266 (a), from the state of Figure 265 (d), the ceiling reaching notification effect in the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed, and in Figure 265 (a) ~ Figure 265 (d) It is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed in the upper left portion of the display area Dm is erased, FIG. FIG. 266(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the display is finished, and FIG. 266(c) shows that the ceiling reaching notification effect is finished from the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which it is notified that the shift has been made, and the instruction for the production hitting method is being executed, and FIG. A diagram showing a state in which the notification of the transition to and the instruction for hitting for production are completed, and the third design displayed in the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is switched from the first special design to the second special design. is.

FIG. 264(a) shows that only the first special symbol variable display is being executed in the "normal game state" in which the number of executions of the special symbol variable display until reaching the ceiling is two more. state. Also, FIG. 264(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 264(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, "4" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the reserved numbers of the two special symbols are "4" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that there are "two times" left to reach the ceiling.

Next, FIG. 264(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. showing. FIG. 264(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 264(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. In addition, due to the end of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of Fig. 264 (a). state. Furthermore, as in FIG. 264(a), since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b.

Next, in FIG. 264(c), the next variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 264(b), and an effect is being executed to notify that it will reach the ceiling in the central part of the main display area Dm. , which indicates a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. In addition, FIG. 264(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 264(c), one of the four holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, in FIG. 264(c), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol has started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, FIG. 264(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 264 (d), from the state of FIG. 264 (c), the variable display of the second special symbol ends first and reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "general figure low probability time shortening state" and main display It shows a state in which the right-hand hitting instruction 89 and the performance hitting instruction are displayed. Also, FIG. 264(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 264(d), the ceiling reaching notification effect of the first special symbol which was being executed in FIG. A state that the display is running is displayed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 264(c) is finished, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 264 (c). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, a right-handed main display instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, and a right-handed instruction for production is displayed in front of the ceiling reaching notification effect by the variable display of the first special symbol in the central part of the main display area Dm. 81d is displayed.

Thus, in the conventional pachinko machine, regardless of the execution content in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the "normal game state" reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". At the right timing, the main display hitting right instruction 89 and the effect hitting instruction 89 are displayed, and from the player's point of view, the ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted while the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed. A display suggesting a game will appear, and there is a possibility that the player will be aroused by the game.

Next, Figures 265(a) to 266(d) show the third symbol display when reaching the ceiling due to the second special symbol variation effect during the "normal game state" in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 265(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect in the device 81, and FIG. 265(a) is a state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state", It shows a state in which only the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. Also, FIG. 265(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 265(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, "4" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the 2 special symbols is "4" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that there are "two times" left to reach the ceiling.

Next, FIG. 265(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. showing. Also, FIG. 265(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 265(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which was being executed in FIG. 265(a) is finished, and "871" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of Fig. 265 (a). state. Furthermore, as in FIG. 265(a), since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), "261" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b.

Next, in FIG. 265(c), the next variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state in FIG. , which indicates a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is also started. Also, FIG. 265(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 265(c), one of the four holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, FIG. 265(c) shows that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, FIG. 265(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 265(d), only the variable display of the second special symbol ends from the state of FIG. This shows a state in which only a right-handed hitting instruction 89 is displayed, and the performance hitting instruction is not executed. In addition, FIG. 265(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 265(d), the ceiling reaching notification effect of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. A state that the display is being executed is displayed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that started execution in FIG. 265(c) is completed, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 265 (c). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, in the central portion of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display, reaching the ceiling. Since the notification effect is being executed, the effect hitting right instruction 81d is not displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 264(d), which is an example of a conventional pachinko machine.

Next, in FIG. 266(a), from the state in FIG. 265(d), the ceiling reaching notification effect in the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously being executed, and FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d). , the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm is erased. Also, FIG. 266(a) shows a game state similar to timing 5 in FIG. In FIG. 266(a), the ceiling reaching notification effect that was being executed in FIG. You can see what is going on. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol whose execution has ended in FIG. , "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini-reel 81b, and it is displayed that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped). Furthermore, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm in FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) is deleted. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 264(d), which is an example of a conventional pachinko machine, the ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted during execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect. , the right hitting instruction 81d for effect is not displayed, and the player can increase interest in the ceiling reaching notification effect.

Next, FIG. 266(b) shows a state where the variable display of the first special symbol has ended from the state of FIG. 266(a). Also, FIG. 266(b) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. In FIG. 266(b), the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 266(a) is finished, and the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and stopped on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. "434" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 266 (c), the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed from the state of FIG. It shows a state in which direction instructions are being executed. FIG. 266(c) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. 216, which is the state immediately after FIG. 266(b). In FIG. 266(c), one of the three holding numbers of the variable display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. ' is displayed, and a state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. 266(b), the ceiling reaching notification effect being executed is finished, and a text message 81e of "enter play time" indicating that the ceiling has been reached, and a right-hand hitting instruction for effect suggesting a right-hand hitting game. 81d and text message 81f are displayed.

Next, in FIG. 266(d), from the state in FIG. 266(c), the entry notification to the “general figure low probability time shortening state” and the instruction for the production hitting method are completed, and displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. The 3rd design to be carried out has shown the state switched from the 1st special design to the 2nd special design. FIG. 266(d) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. 216, which is the state immediately after FIG. 266(c). In FIG. 266(d), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. 266(c) is still being executed. A state that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, the third symbol displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is the second special symbol, and in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is performed, the second special symbol is displayed. A state in which the variable effect corresponding to the dynamic display is executed in the main display area Dm is displayed.

Here, when the random number value that will win the time-saving design is provided in the jackpot random number table 202a, in the example shown in FIG. Assume state. That is, in the "normal game state" (for example, the first game state), execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect (for example, the first effect) in the variable display (for example, the specific state) that the first special symbol reaches the ceiling In the meantime, if the variable display of the second special pattern wins the time saving pattern (for example, a specific condition), the transition to the "general pattern low probability time reduction state" (for example, the second game state) due to reaching the ceiling , The transition to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state" (for example, the second game state) due to winning the time saving symbol will occur at the same time. Here, further, if the number of time reductions that can be granted by winning the time reduction pattern is set to "500 times", the number of time reductions that can be granted by reaching the ceiling is higher than the number of time reductions that can be granted by winning the time reduction pattern (" 1140 times”). Therefore, if the transition to "Normal low probability time reduction state" due to reaching the ceiling and the transition to "Normal low probability time reduction state" due to winning the time saving pattern occur at the same time, The transition to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' due to reaching the ceiling is preferentially executed, and the state is more advantageous for the player. By configuring in this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed during the execution of the ceiling arrival notification effect (for example, the first effect) in the variable display (specific state) that the first special symbol reaches the ceiling. Even if the time-saving pattern is elected (for example, specific conditions), after the variable display of the second special pattern is completed, the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" due to reaching the ceiling will be performed. Therefore, the ceiling reaching notification effect in the variable display of the first special symbol can be continuously executed without being interrupted on the way.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when reaching the ceiling during the "normal game state" and shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the first In the dynamic display of the special pattern, that is, the dynamic display scheduled to be the 900th time in the low probability state of the special pattern, the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 performs an effect to notify that the ceiling is reached. configured as follows. Also, while the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed (during the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm in the third symbol display device 81), the second special symbol is moving. Even if the player reaches the ceiling by execution of target display and shifts to a ``normal figure low probability time shortening state'', it is configured not to instruct how to hit for performance. By constructing in this way, the ceiling reaching notification effect being executed in the third pattern display device 81 is not interrupted by the direction of hitting for the effect, and the player can increase interest in the ceiling reaching notification effect. can. Furthermore, after that, at the timing when the ceiling reaching notification performance being executed on the third pattern display device 81 is finished, the performance hitting instruction is displayed, so that the player can start the right-hand hitting game without any sense of incongruity. can be done.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment has the same effects as the seventh embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a ninth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 to 272. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", "899 times" out of "900 times" that is the number of times the ceiling is reached Until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect as to whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the "900th" first special symbol is displayed. In the dynamic display, an effect for informing that the ceiling is reached is performed, and the effect for notifying that the ceiling is reached is finished at the same time as the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the "900th time" is finished.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, in the dynamic display of the "900th" first special symbol, the ceiling reaching notification effect is performed in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, and the In the case where the dynamic display of the second special pattern is being executed in parallel with the execution of the ceiling reaching notification performance, the dynamic display of the second special pattern executes the ceiling reaching notification performance. When ending after the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect is extended until the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed ends. .

The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that differ from the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh to eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the seventh to eighth embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 267, the timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" will be described. In addition, the winning mode of the ball to the through gate 67, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, and the normal The relationship between the progress of the variable display of symbols, the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol and the progress of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the driving mode of the normal electric part 72 and the variable winning device 65 is described in the seventh embodiment. Since it is the same as the eighth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

Figure 267 is a case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special symbol 1 during the "normal game state" in the ninth embodiment and shifting to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state", and reaching the ceiling It is a timing chart when the variable display of the special symbol 2 is being executed in parallel at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol 1 ends.

As shown in FIG. 267, the 899th and 900th fluctuation display in the special symbol low probability state is executed by the fluctuation display of the special symbol 1, and reaches the ceiling at the same time as the 900th fluctuation display ends, Normal pattern low probability time shortening state” (see timing 2 in Figure 267).

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, it is assumed that the variable display of each special symbol such as the timing chart shown in FIG. 267 is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, in the variable display of the "900th" special symbol 1 that reaches the ceiling, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached. It is configured. Therefore, the ceiling reaching notification effect is executed in the "900th" special symbol 1 variable display, and the ceiling reaching notification effect ends at the same time when the "900th" variable display ends (FIGS. 270(a) to (b). )reference).

Then, at the same time as the end of the "900th" fluctuation display, the ceiling is reached and the state shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", so the end timing of the "900th" fluctuation display (see timing 2 in FIG. 267) Then, the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed, and subsequently the main display right hitting instruction 89 and the effect hitting direction instruction are executed (see FIG. 270(c)). Further, the third pattern displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be switched from the special pattern 1 to the special pattern 2 after the completion of the effect hitting instruction. (See FIG. 270(d)).

Furthermore, at the timing 2 shown in FIG. 267, the variable display of the special symbol 2 executed in the main display area Dm is originally a variable effect in the "normal low probability time shortened state" (for example, the character talks Notice, etc.) should be executed, but the variable display of the special symbol 2 that is being executed at the timing 2 shown in FIG. The display special figure 2 variation pattern command and the display special figure 2 stop type command for performing the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm are not set during the time shortening state (S1315 in FIG. 262 : Yes), the main display area Dm is in a state where it is not possible to execute the variable effect in the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state".

In addition, in the situation of this timing 2, the player starts the right-handed game based on the performance hitting instruction, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a. When the prize is won, the special symbol 2 is executing the variable display of "20 seconds" that started execution in the "normal game state". At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 cannot execute the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state".

Thus, the execution state of the variable display of the special symbols 1 and 2 as shown in FIG. 267, that is, the situation in which the variable display of the special symbol 2 that is not recommended in the "normal game state" is being executed. In the case of such a state that the special symbol 1 reaches the ceiling due to the variable display of the special symbol 1 and shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the variation in the third symbol display device 81 with the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment When the effect is executed, the variable display of the special symbol 2 immediately after the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" cannot perform an appropriate variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the "normal pattern low probability When the player immediately starts a right-handed game, the player wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a because the performance hitting instruction is executed immediately after the transition to the time shortening state. Even so, the third symbol display device 81 cannot execute the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "general pattern low probability time shortening state" at the same time as winning a prize.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol 2 not recommended in the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. In the situation where it is being executed, in the case of a state such as reaching the ceiling due to the variable display of the special symbol 1 and moving to the "normal low probability time reduction state", in the variable display of the special symbol 1 of the "900th time" The executed ceiling reaching notification performance is not terminated at the end timing of the variable display of the special pattern 1 of the ``900th time'', but extended to the end timing of the variable display of the special pattern 2 being executed in parallel. (See FIGS. 271(a) to 272(a)), and after the end of the variable display of the special symbol 2, the effect hitting instruction is executed (see FIG. 272(b)).

By configuring in this way, the variable display of the special symbol 2 that is being executed at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, and the "normal pattern low It will be executed in the third symbol display device 81 from the variable display of the special symbol 2, which starts to be executed after the transition to the "probable time reduction state" (see FIG. 272 (c)).

Also, at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", while the variable display of the special pattern 2 is being executed, the ceiling reaching notification effect is executed, and at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern 2 is completed After the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed, a hitting instruction for effect is displayed. Based on this display, the player starts a right-handed game. By winning the second starting port 71a, the variable display of the special symbol 2 can be immediately executed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

As a result, even when the ceiling is reached in the execution state of the variable display of the special symbols 1 and 2 as shown in FIG. It should be noted that the control contents of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 in the execution state of the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. 267 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 267, it is naturally possible to replace the relationship between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269, the detailed electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 268, special figure 1 command processing (S1203) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in a 9th embodiment is explained. Figure 268 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 command processing (S1203) of the ninth embodiment. The difference between the special figure 1 command process of the ninth embodiment and the special figure 1 command process of the eighth embodiment is that the extension process of the ceiling reaching notification effect is added.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203) of the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1262 ends, the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 2 is determined during execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, and the ceiling reaching notification is determined by the determination result Execute ceiling reach notification extension processing to extend the performance execution time (S1281), terminate this special figure 1 command processing (S1203), and return to command determination processing (see FIG. 249).

Here, the ceiling reaching notification extension process (S1281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 is a flow chart showing this ceiling reaching notification extension process (S1281).

In this ceiling arrival notification extension process (S1281), during the execution of the ceiling arrival notification effect in the variable display of the special symbol 1 that will reach the ceiling, the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 2 is determined, and the determination result is used. Extend the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect.

In this ceiling reaching notification extension process (S1281), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the third pattern display device 81 (S1551), and the ceiling reaching notification effect is performed in the third pattern display device 81. If not in execution (S1551: No), skip the processing of S1552 to S1554, terminate this ceiling reach notification extension processing (S1281), and return to the special figure 1 command processing (see FIG. 268).

On the other hand, in the process of S1551, when it is determined that the third symbol display device 81 is executing the ceiling reaching notification effect (S1551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variable effect of the special symbol 2 is being executed. Then (S1552), if the special symbol 2 variable effect is not being executed (S1552: No), there is no need to extend the ceiling reaching notification effect, so the processing of S1553 and S1554 is skipped, and this ceiling reaching notification extension is performed. End the processing (S1281), and return to the special figure 1 command processing (see FIG. 268).

As a result of the determination of S1552, if the variation production of the special symbol 2 is being executed (S1552: Yes), then the variation production of the special design 2 being executed is the variation of the special design 1 during execution of the ceiling reaching notification production It is determined whether or not to end after the presentation (S1553). As a result of determination, if the variation production of the special symbol 2 does not end after the variation production of the special symbol 1, that is, if the variation production of the special symbol 2 ends earlier than the variation production of the special symbol 1 (S1553: No ), since there is no need to extend the ceiling reaching notification effect, the process of S1554 is skipped, this ceiling reaching notification extension process (S1281) is terminated, and the special figure 1 command process (see FIG. 268) returns.

On the other hand, in the process of S1553, if it is determined that the fluctuation production of the special symbol 2 ends after the fluctuation production of the special symbol 1 (S1553: Yes), at the end timing of the ceiling reaching notification production by the fluctuation production of the special symbol 1 Since the variable performance of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the execution time of the ceiling arrival notification performance is extended until the end timing of the variation performance of the special symbol 2 (S1554), and this ceiling arrival notification extension process (S1281). , and returns to special figure 1 command processing (see Figure 268).

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect executed in the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable display of the special pattern 1 at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", special When the variable performance of the pattern 2 is also being executed and the variable performance of the special pattern 1 executing the ceiling reaching notification performance is finished first, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification performance is the special symbol 2. It can be extended until the end timing of the fluctuation production.

As a result, when the ceiling is reached in the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. In the situation where the special pattern 1 is changed, even in the case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special pattern 1 and shifting to the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'', the right-handed game is preferably played without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. can be started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270 to FIG. 272, the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the ninth embodiment will be described. Figures 270 to 272 are based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the time of reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the ninth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the transition of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation.

Figures 270(a) to 270(d) show that, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, during execution of the second special symbol variation effect in the "normal game state", by the first special symbol variation effect FIG. 270(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached, and FIG. 270(a) is the execution of the variable display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached during the "normal game state". In the state where the number of times is one more, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. Figure 270 (b), from the state of Figure 270 (a), reaches the ceiling after only the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is completed, "general pattern low probability time shortening state" the state of transition FIG. 270(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is finished and the effect hitting instruction is being executed from the state of FIG. 270(b). In (d), from the state shown in FIG. 270(c), the effect hitting instruction is completed, and the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state.

Figure 271 (a) ~ Figure 272 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, during the execution of the second special symbol variation effect in the "normal game state", by the first special symbol variation effect FIG. 271(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling is reached, and FIG. 271(a) is the execution of the variable display of the special symbols until the ceiling is reached during the "normal game state". In the state where the number of times is one more, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. Figure 271 (b), from the state of Figure 271 (a), reached the ceiling after only the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is completed, the state shifted to the "general figure low probability time shortening state" FIG. 271(c) and FIG. 271(d) show that, from the state of FIG. 271(b), the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously being executed, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is continuously executed, and FIG. 272(a) is a diagram showing a state where the variable display of the second special symbol is finished from the state of FIG. 271(d), FIG. 272(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is completed and the effect hitting instruction is being executed from the state of FIG. 272(a), and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state from the state of b) to which the instruction|indication of the hitting method for production|presentation was complete|finished and the variable display of the 2nd special design started execution.

FIG. 270(a) shows that in the "normal game state", when the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is one more, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed in parallel. This shows a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. In addition, FIG. 270(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 270(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is also being executed, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Furthermore, "0" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the two special symbols is "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that "1 time" is left until the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, FIG. 270(a) shows that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, FIG. 270(b) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends first and reaches the ceiling from the state of FIG. ing. Also, FIG. 270(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 270(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed in FIG. Furthermore, due to the end of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of Fig. 270 (a). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-handed hitting instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, since the ceiling reaching notification effect is being performed, the effect is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The right hitting instruction 81d is not displayed. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol which was being executed in FIG. 270(a) is still being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. is displayed.

Next, FIG. 270(c) shows a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is finished and the effect hitting instruction is being executed from the state of FIG. 270(b). In addition, FIG. 270(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 270(c), since the variable display of the first special symbol that has stopped in FIG. there is In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is still being executed from FIG. 270(b), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. The state that it is in the middle is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, since the ceiling reaching notification effect has ended, a character message 81e indicating that the ceiling has been reached, "play time entering", and a right hitting instruction 81d for effect suggesting a right hitting game and characters A message 81f is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 270(d), from the state of FIG. 270(c), the effect hitting instruction is completed, and the second special symbol that is being executed is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. It shows the running state. Also, FIG. 270(d) is a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 270 (d), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. there is In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is still being executed from FIG. 270(b), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. The state that it is in the middle is displayed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the instruction for the effect hitting method is finished, and the variable display of the second special symbol recommended in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is executed.

Here, the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed in the state of FIG. The special figure 2 variation pattern command for display and the special figure 2 stop type command for display for performing the variation production of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm are not set during the normal figure low probability time shortening state ( S1315 in FIG. 262: Yes), in the main display area Dm, it is in a state where it is not possible to execute the variable effect in the “normal pattern low probability time shortening state”. Therefore, while the variable display of the second special symbol, which started to be executed in the "normal game state", is being executed, only the state in which the third symbol is varied is displayed in the main display area Dm.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, in the case of the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as shown in FIG. In the display area Dm, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the state has shifted to the “normal figure low probability time shortened state”, and although it is possible to continue the game, for a while only a monotonous fluctuation effect is executed. It will be done, and there is a possibility that it will be awakened.

Next, FIGS. 271(a) to 272(c) show that in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, during execution of the second special symbol variation effect in the "normal game state", the first special symbol It is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling by the variable effect, FIG. In a state where the number of display executions is one more, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. is shown. In addition, FIG. 271(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 271(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is also being executed, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Furthermore, "0" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the two special symbols is "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that "1 time" is left until the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, FIG. 271(a) shows that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

Next, FIG. 271(b) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends first and reaches the ceiling from the state of FIG. ing. FIG. 271(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 271(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 271(a) is finished, and "174" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, due to the completion of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" until reaching the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of FIG. 271 (a). It has reached the ceiling and has transitioned to the "normal map low probability time reduction state". Therefore, although the main display right-handed hitting instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed, since the ceiling reaching notification effect is being performed, the effect is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The right hitting instruction 81d is not displayed. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 271(a) is still being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. is displayed.

Then, Figure 271 (c) and Figure 271 (d), from the state of Figure 271 (b), the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously being executed, the ceiling reaching notification effect is continuously executed This indicates that the 271(c) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. 267, and FIG. 271(d) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In Figures 271(c) and 271(d), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in Figure 271(b) is still unexecuted (stopped), the special figure 1 mini reel 81a has " 174” is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is still being executed from FIG. 271(b), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. The state that it is in the middle is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reaching notification effect is still being executed. Also, in FIGS. 271(c) and 271(d), the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm in FIGS. 271(a) and 271(b) is deleted. In this way, when the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "0 times" and then disappears after a while. Interest can be heightened by the ceiling reach notification performance provided.

Next, FIG. 272(a) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol has ended from the state of FIG. 271(d). Also, FIG. 272(a) shows a game state similar to timing 5 in FIG. In FIG. 272(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. there is In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIGS. 271(a) to (d) is finished, and "336" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reaching notification effect is still being executed.

Next, FIG. 272(b) shows a state in which the ceiling-reaching notification effect is finished and the effect hitting instruction is being executed from the state of FIG. 272(a). Also, FIG. 272(b) shows a game state similar to timing 5 in FIG. 267, which is the state immediately after FIG. 272(a). In FIG. 272(b), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. there is In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol stopped in FIG. 272(a) is also unexecuted (stopped) as it is, "336" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, since the ceiling reaching notification effect has ended, a character message 81e indicating that the ceiling has been reached, "play time entering", and a right hitting instruction 81d for effect suggesting a right hitting game and characters A message 81f is displayed.

Next, FIG. 272(c) shows a state in which the performance hitting instruction is finished from the state of FIG. 272(b) and the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Also, FIG. 272(c) shows a game state similar to timing 6 in FIG. In FIG. 272(c), since the variable display of the first special symbol stopped in FIG. there is In addition, in FIG. 272(b), the performance hitting instruction is executed, and the player starts a right-handed game, so that the ball enters the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a, and the second Since the execution of the variable display of the special symbol has started, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed is displayed in the special figure 2 mini-reel 81b. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, since the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol has started, the third symbol has started to vary.

As described above, the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as shown in FIG. In this situation, if the state is such that the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the first special symbol and the state shifts to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state", the ceiling will be reached "900th" first The second special pattern which is being executed in parallel without ending the ceiling reaching notification effect executed in the variable display of the special pattern at the end timing of the "900th" first special pattern variable display. is extended until the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol, and after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect hitting instruction is executed.

By configuring in this way, the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, instead the ceiling An arrival notification effect is executed. Then, at the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ceiling reaching notification effect is also finished, and then the hitting instruction for effect is executed, so the player starts the right-handed game. Furthermore, by starting the right-handed game, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is won, and the second special symbol can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81. Become.

As a result, even when the ceiling is reached in the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as shown in FIG. can.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment has the same effects as those of the seventh to eighth embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 279. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", "899 times" out of "900 times" that is the number of times the ceiling is reached Until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect as to whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the "900th" first special symbol is displayed. In the dynamic display, an effect for notifying that the ceiling is reached is performed, and the effect for notifying that the ceiling is reached is completed at the same time as the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the "900th time" ends.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the "900th time", the waiting effect of reaching the ceiling and preparing for the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" , and the ceiling reaching standby effect ends at the end of either the end of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the end of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. is configured to Then, after the completion of the ceiling reaching standby performance, the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" can be immediately executed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh to eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the seventh to eighth embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 273, in the "normal game state" of the tenth embodiment, the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the timing chart in the case of shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" will be described. do. In addition, the winning mode of the ball to the through gate 67, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, and the normal Regarding the relationship between the process of variable display of symbols, the process of variable display of the first special symbol and the process of variable display of the second special symbol, and the driving mode of the normal electric part 72 and the variable winning device 65, the seventh embodiment Since it is the same as the eighth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 273 is a timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling due to the variable display of the special symbol 2 during the "normal game state" of the tenth embodiment and shifting to the "general pattern low probability time shortening state". As shown in FIG. 273, the variation display of the special symbol 1 executes the variation display of the 898th and 899th rotations in the low probability state of the special symbol, and then, in the variation display scheduled to be the 900th rotation, " 60 seconds” is executed (refer to timing 2 in FIG. 273).

Also, during the execution of the variable display of the 899th rotation of the special symbol 1, the player erroneously operates the operation handle 51 for shooting the ball, and the ball is shot into the right-handed game area and shot in the right-handed game. The ball that has been drawn enters the upper second starting port 71. - 特許庁Then, based on the winning to the upper second starting port 71, a variable display of a small hit of "20 seconds" of the special symbol 2 is executed.

The variable display of this special symbol 2 is after the end of the 899th rotation of the variable display of the special symbol 1, and the execution ends after the start (during execution) of the variable display of the special symbol 1 that becomes a loss of "60 seconds". (see timing 3 in FIG. 273). In other words, the variable display of this special symbol 2 becomes the 900th rotation variable display in the low probability state of the special symbol, reaches the ceiling at the end of the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the "normal low probability time shortening state" transition to

Further, in the timing chart of FIG. 273, the right-handed game is started immediately after shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". That is, the player confirms the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for the main display displayed at the time of transition to the "normal figure low probability time shortening state", and starts the right-handed game. Then, the ball fired in the right-handed game wins the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is executed. On the other hand, at the time when the variable display of the special symbol 2 in the "general figure low probability time shortening state" is started, the variable display that becomes a loss of "60 seconds" is still being executed in the special symbol 1 (Fig. 273 timing 4).

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, it is assumed that the variable display of each special symbol such as the timing chart shown in FIG. 273 is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, in the variable display of the "900th" special symbol 1 that reaches the ceiling, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached. It is configured. In FIG. 273, since the variable display of the special symbol 1 to be lost "60 seconds" is the scheduled variable display of "900th time", in the variable display of the "60 seconds" to be lost, the ceiling reaching notification A performance is performed.

Then, while the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the third pattern display device 81, the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special pattern 2, and the state shifts to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" (Fig. 273) See Timing 3). Furthermore, the player confirms the main display right-handed hitting instruction 89 displayed at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" and starts the right-handed game, and the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port The variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed by winning the starting port 71a.

As described above, in the "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state", the variable display that becomes the small hit of the special symbol 2 is configured so that the "non-reach" production mode of "2 seconds" is uniformly selected. For this reason (see FIGS. 12 to 16), the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed in quick succession by the right-handed game.

That is, when the third symbol display device 81 is executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, after reaching the ceiling and shifting to the "general figure low probability time shortening state", the special symbol 1 "60 seconds" Although the variable display of the special symbol 2 recommended for the right-handed game is executed a plurality of times until the variable display of , the third symbol display device 81 does not display the variable display of the special symbol 1. Based on this, the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed.

In this way, in the case of the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. second”), and during the execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, the ceiling is reached by the variable display of the special symbol 2 and the transition to the “normal pattern low probability time shortening state” occurs, and the player can immediately When a right-handed game is started at 12:00, the third pattern is displayed despite the fact that the recommended special pattern 2 is being displayed in a ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' that can be in a ``renso'' state. In the device 81, the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed.

In this case, while the third symbol display device 81 is executing the ceiling reaching notification effect, the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started even though the player has started a right-handed game that can cause a "continuous" state. There is a possibility that it will not be done and it will be aroused.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, in the case of the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. When starting, instead of the production notifying that the ceiling is reached, the standby production for reaching the ceiling and preparing for the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is executed, special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 End the standby effect at the end of the fluctuation display, notify that it has moved to the "normal low probability time reduction state", and immediately change the special symbol 2 in the "normal low probability time reduction state" It is configured so that it can be executed in the third pattern display device 81 .

By configuring in this way, even when the right-handed game is started immediately after the shift to the "normal low probability time shortening state", the fluctuation production of the special pattern 2 in the "normal low probability time shortening state" immediately can be executed on the third symbol display device 81, the interest of the player can be enhanced. The details of the control contents of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 in the execution state of the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. 273 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 273, it is naturally possible to replace the relationship between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 274 to 277, the detailed electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 274, change production processing (S1110) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in a 10th embodiment is explained. FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing the change effect processing (S1110) of the tenth embodiment. The difference between the variation effect processing of the tenth embodiment and the variation effect processing of the eighth embodiment is that in the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling arrival notification processing for notifying that the ceiling has been reached is not performed, and the ceiling is reached. The point is that it has been changed to perform the ceiling arrival standby process, which is a preparation effect for moving to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state".

In the variation effect process (S1110) of the tenth embodiment, when the process of S1309 ends, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached, and depending on the determination result, the ceiling arrival standby process is executed to wait until the ceiling is reached (S1371). ), the variable effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 248).

Here, the ceiling reaching standby process (S1371) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing this ceiling reaching standby process (S1371).

In this ceiling arrival standby process (S1371), the number of rotations until reaching the ceiling is determined, and according to the determination result, the ceiling that executes the standby effect until it reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state" Set the arrival wait command.

In this ceiling reaching standby process (S1371), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is smaller than "899" (S1571). If so (S1571: Yes), since the "900th" variation for executing the ceiling standby effect has not been reached, the processing of S1572 to S1574 is skipped, and this ceiling arrival standby processing (S1371) is terminated. , returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 274).

On the other hand, as a result of determination in S1571, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is not less than "899", that is, if the value of the ceiling reaching count counter 223k is "899" or more (S1571: No), ceiling standby effect is reached, it is then determined whether or not the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is turned on (S1572), and if the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is not turned on ( S1572: No), since the ceiling standby effect has not been executed even once since the "900th" change for executing the ceiling standby effect has been reached, the ceiling reaching standby command is set (S1573), and the ceiling reaching notification has been completed. The flag 223m is set to ON (S1574), the ceiling reaching standby process (S1371) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 274).

Further, as a result of the process of S1572, if it is determined that the ceiling reaching notification flag 223m is turned on (S1572: Yes), after reaching the "900th" change to execute the ceiling standby effect, even once Since the ceiling standby effect is being executed and there is no need to execute the ceiling standby effect, the processes of S1573 and S1574 are skipped, the ceiling reaching standby process (S1371) is terminated, and the variable effect process (Fig. 274 ).

By constructing in this way, the execution of the ceiling standby performance is limited to one time from the transition to the low probability state of the special pattern until reaching the ceiling and shifting to the ``normal low probability time shortening state''. can be done.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 276, special figure 1 command processing (S1203) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in a 10th embodiment is explained. Figure 276 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 command processing (S1203) of the tenth embodiment. The difference between the special figure 1 command process of the 10th embodiment and the special figure 1 command process of the 8th embodiment is that at the time of receiving the special figure 1 confirmation command, it is determined whether the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, The point is that a process of ending the ceiling reaching standby effect and setting a ceiling effect start command according to the determination result is added.

In the special figure 1 command process (S1203) of the tenth embodiment, when the process of S1262 ends, it is determined whether or not the ceiling arrival standby effect executed in the above-described ceiling arrival standby process (see FIG. 275) is being executed. (S1291). As a result of the determination, if the ceiling reaching standby effect is not being executed (S1291: No), the processing of S1292 and S1293 is skipped, other corresponding processing is executed (S1228), and this special figure 1 command processing (S1203) is executed. Terminates and returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 259).

On the other hand, in the process of S1291, if it is determined that the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed (S1291: Yes), the ceiling reaching standby effect is ended (S1292), the ceiling effect start command is set (S1293), This special figure 1 command processing (S1203) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 259 reference).

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 277, special figure 2 command processing (S1205) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in a 10th embodiment is explained. Figure 277 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 2 command processing (S1205) of 10th execution form. The difference between the special figure 2 command processing of the 10th embodiment and the special figure 2 command processing of the eighth embodiment is that at the time of receiving the special figure 2 confirmation command, it is determined whether the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, The point is that a process of ending the ceiling reaching standby effect and setting a ceiling effect start command according to the determination result is added.

In the special figure 2 command process (S1205) of the tenth embodiment, when the process of S1272 ends, it is determined whether or not the ceiling arrival standby effect executed in the above-described ceiling arrival standby process (see FIG. 275) is being executed. (S1295). As a result of the determination, if the ceiling reaching standby effect is not being executed (S1295: No), the processing of S1296 and S1297 is skipped, and other corresponding processing is executed (S1238), and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is executed. Terminates and returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 259).

On the other hand, in the process of S1295, if it is determined that the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed (S1295: Yes), the ceiling reaching standby effect is ended (S1296), the ceiling effect start command is set (S1297), This special figure 2 command processing (S1205) it ends, returns to command decision processing (figure 259 reference).

By configuring in this way, the ceiling reaching standby effect executed at the start of the variable display of the "900th" first special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is replaced by the movement of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. At the end of the execution of the target display, that is, at the time of transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", from the start of the dynamic display of the second special pattern executed after this, in the third design display device 81 A variable production can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 278 to 279, the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the tenth embodiment will be described. Figures 278 to 279 are performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the tenth embodiment, in the third symbol display device 81 FIG. 278(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 278(a) shows the first special symbol in the state where the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is two more times in the "normal game state". 278(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of and the second special symbol is being executed in parallel, and FIG. 278(b) shows only the variable display of the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 278(a). 278(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling has been reduced to one more time after the end of FIG. 278(b). It is a diagram showing a state in which the next variable display of the special symbol is started and the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, and FIG. 278(d) shows the variation of the second special symbol from the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which only the display ends, the ball reaches the ceiling, and the state shifts to the "low-probability time shortened state for normal patterns" and the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for the main display is displayed.

In addition, FIG. 279 (a) is notified that the ceiling reaching standby effect has ended from the state of FIG. Is a diagram showing a state in which the direction instruction is being executed, Figure 279 (b), from the state of Figure 279 (a), transition notification to "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state" and direction instruction for production is completed, and the third pattern displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm during the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" is switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. There is, and FIG. 279(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol starts to be executed from the state of FIG. 279(b).

FIG. 278(a) shows that in the "normal game state", when the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols until reaching the ceiling is two more, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in parallel. It shows the state of being executed. Also, FIG. 278(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 278(a), since the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is also being executed, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Furthermore, in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, and the first special symbol is reserved It is displayed that the number is "1" and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that there are "two times" left to reach the ceiling. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed as the third symbol.

Next, in FIG. 278(b), only the variable display of the first special symbol is completed from the state of FIG. state. FIG. 278(b) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 278(b), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 278(a) is finished, and "517" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, due to the end of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the ceiling reaching counter 81c displays "1 time" to reach the ceiling, and 1 is subtracted from the state of Fig. 278 (a). state. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol which was being executed in FIG. 278(a) is still being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. is displayed.

Next, FIG. 278(c) shows a state in which execution of the next variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. 278(b), and ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed. Also, FIG. 278(c) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. 273, which is the state immediately after FIG. 278(b). In FIG. 278(c), since the remaining one of the reserved number of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. It is displayed, and it is displayed that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. In addition, the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable display that has started execution in the state of "one time" until the ceiling is reached, that is, a variable display that will reach the ceiling by the end of the execution of the variable display. be. Therefore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the ceiling reaching standby effect is being executed, and the characters "waiting for play time" are displayed. Furthermore, the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 278(b) is still being executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 278(d), from the state of FIG. 278(c), the variable display of the second special symbol ends first, reaches the ceiling, and shifts to the "general figure low probability time shortening state" and main display It shows a state in which a right-hand hitting instruction 89 is displayed. Also, FIG. 278(d) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 278(d), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. 278(c) is still being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. is displayed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed in FIG. 278(c) is finished, and "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. Furthermore, it is in the state of reaching the ceiling by the end of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". Therefore, a main display right-handed instruction 89 suggesting a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 279(a), from the state of FIG. 278(d), in the main display area Dm, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the state has shifted to the “normal figure low probability time shortening state”, and the production hitting method instruction is running. FIG. 279(a) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. 273, which is the state immediately after FIG. 278(d). In FIG. 279(a), the variable display of the first special symbol, which started execution in FIG. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a text message 81e indicating that the ball has reached the ceiling is displayed, and a right-hand hitting instruction 81d and a text message 81f suggesting a right-hand hitting game are displayed.

Then, Figure 279 (b), from the state of FIG. , the third pattern displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is switched from the first special pattern to the second special pattern. Also, FIG. 279(b) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. 273, which is the state immediately after FIG. 279(a). In FIG. 279(b), the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. is displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "582" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the notification of the transition to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" and the instruction for hitting for production are completed, and the third displayed in the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" The symbol shows a state of switching from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Next, FIG. 279(c) shows a state in which the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol has started from the state of FIG. 279(b). Also, FIG. 279(c) shows a game state similar to timing 4 in FIG. In FIG. 279(c), the variable display of the first special symbol, which started execution in FIG. is displayed. In addition, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is started by the right-handed game, and the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol has started is displayed, and simultaneously with the start of the right-handed game, the third symbol is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed.

As described above, in the case of the execution state of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as shown in FIG. is dynamic display for a long time ("60 seconds"), and during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol reaches the ceiling In the dynamic display scheduled to be the "900th time" in the first special pattern, when the player immediately starts the right-handed game, the ceiling is reached. Execute a standby effect to prepare for the transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state", end the standby effect at the end of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "normal low probability It is configured so that the third pattern display device 81 can immediately execute the variation performance of the second special symbol in the ``normal pattern low probability time shortening state'' by notifying that it has shifted to the ``probable time shortening state''.

By configuring in this way, even when the right-handed game is started immediately after the transition to the "normal low probability time shortening state", the second special symbol immediately changes in the "normal low probability time shortening state". Since the effect can be executed on the third symbol display device 81, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment has the same effects as those of the seventh to eighth embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of an eleventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 284. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state", "899 times" out of "900 times" that is the number of times the ceiling is reached Until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect as to whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the "900th" first special symbol is displayed. In the dynamic display, an effect for notifying that the ceiling is reached is performed, and the effect for notifying that the ceiling is reached is completed at the same time as the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the "900th time" ends.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, in the dynamic display of the "900th" first special symbol, a ceiling reaching notification effect is performed, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is a dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is configured to end when the display ends or when the dynamic display of the second special symbol for the jackpot starts.

The pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that differ from the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh to eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the seventh to eighth embodiments are used for the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh to eighth embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 280, the timing chart in the case of reaching the ceiling by the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state" and shifting to the "ordinary pattern low probability time reduction state" will be described. In addition, the winning mode of the ball to the through gate 67, the first start port 64, the upper second start port 71 or the lower second start port 71a in the "normal game state" of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, and the normal Regarding the relationship between the process of variable display of symbols, the process of variable display of the first special symbol and the process of variable display of the second special symbol, and the driving mode of the normal electric part 72 and the variable winning device 65, the seventh embodiment Since it is the same as the eighth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 280, during the "normal game state", the variable display of the special symbol 1 reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "normal low probability time reduction state", but during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol 1, the special It is a timing chart in the case of a big hit in the variation display of the symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 280, the variation display of the special symbol 1 executes the variation display of the 899th rotation in the low probability state of the special symbol, and then the variation display of the 900th rotation. 280 (see timing 1 in FIG. 280).

Also, during the execution of the 900th rotation of the variable display of the special symbol 1, the player erroneously operates the operation handle 51 for shooting the ball, and the ball is shot into the right-handed game area and shot in the right-handed game. The ball that has been drawn enters the upper second starting port 71. - 特許庁Then, based on the winning to the upper second starting port 71, the variable display of the special symbol 2 "70 seconds" is executed.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when it reaches the ceiling and shifts to the "ordinary figure low probability time reduction state", the number of time reduction times of 1140 times is given. (See Figure 222). In addition, when the jackpot type based on the variable display of the special symbol 2 is the jackpot type “time saving A”, 100 times of time saving is given (see FIG. 222).

That is, in the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. At the end of the , the ceiling will be reached, and the number of times of time reduction will be given 1140 times by shifting to the "normal figure low probability time reduction state", but immediately after reaching the ceiling, the jackpot type "time reduction Since the jackpot of A" is won, the number of times of shortening the working hours provided after the jackpot ends is 100 times.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, it is assumed that the variable display of each special symbol such as the timing chart shown in FIG. 280 is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, in the variable display of the "900th" special symbol 1 that reaches the ceiling, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the ceiling has been reached. It is configured. Therefore, in the "900th" variable display of the special symbol 1, the ceiling reaching notification effect is executed, and at the same time when the "900th" variable display ends, the ceiling reaching notification effect also ends.

Therefore, when the player confirms the ceiling reaching notification effect executed in the variable display of the special symbol 1 of the "900th time", if the player knows the number of times of time saving that can be given when reaching the ceiling, 1140 times of time saving It will be recognized that the number of times is given. However, by winning the jackpot type ``time saving A'' in the variable display of the special pattern 2 that occurs immediately after this, the number of times of time saving that can be granted after the jackpot becomes 100 times, so the jackpot type ``time saving A'' was won. Although it is possible to acquire balls by doing so, some players may feel that the number of times that can be reduced has been greatly reduced, and that the expectations for Renso have decreased, and there is a possibility that they will be awakened. be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. is being executed, when the variable display of the special pattern 2 wins a jackpot, at the same time as the variable display of the special pattern 2 is started, the ceiling reaching notification performance is interrupted, and the big win is notified in the variable display of the special pattern 2.例文帳に追加is configured to

By configuring in this way, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification performance is reduced, the time for the player to recognize that the ceiling has been reached is also reduced, and the big win in the variable display of the special pattern 2 can be notified earlier. can. In addition, the ceiling reaching notification performance is not continued until the end of the variable performance of the special symbol 1, but is interrupted in the middle, so that the player can recognize that some other event has occurred while reaching the ceiling. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the number of times of time saving that can be given when reaching the ceiling has decreased to 100 times of time saving times given based on the jackpot type "time saving A". can be mitigated. It should be noted that the control contents of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 in the execution state of the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as shown in FIG. 280 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 280, it is naturally possible to replace the relationship between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 281 and 282, a detailed electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 281, change production processing (S1110) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in an 11th embodiment is explained. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing the variation effect processing (S1110) of the eleventh embodiment. The difference between the variation production process of the eleventh embodiment and the variation production process of the eighth embodiment is that when the variation production of the second special symbol is started in the "normal game state", the propriety of the variation production of the second special symbol Also, a process of determining whether or not the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed and switching the ceiling reaching notification effect according to the determination result is added.

In the fluctuation production process (S1110) of the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1315, when it is determined that it is "normal game state" (S1315: Yes), the propriety of the second special symbol fluctuation production and the ceiling reaching notification production is being executed, and depending on the result of the determination, ceiling reaching effect switching processing for switching the ceiling reaching notification effect is executed (S1391), this variable effect processing (S1110) is terminated, and the main processing (Fig. 248 ).

Here, with reference to FIG. 282, the ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing the ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391).

In this ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391), it is determined whether or not the variation effect of the second special symbol is appropriate and whether the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed or not, and the ceiling reaching notification effect is switched according to the determination result.

In this ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391), first, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol has won the jackpot (S1591), and if the variation display of the second special symbol has won the jackpot. If (S1591: No), the processes of S1592 and S1593 are skipped, the ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 281).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1591, if the variation display of the second special symbol wins the jackpot (S1591: Yes), then whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is executing the ceiling reaching notification effect is determined (S1592), and if the ceiling reaching notification effect is not being executed in the third pattern display device 81 (S1592: No), the process of S1593 is skipped, and the ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391) ends. Then, it returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 281).

Further, as a result of the determination in S1592, when the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 (S1592: Yes), the ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted, and the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit. A ceiling reaching effect switching command for notifying that the game has been won is set (S1593), the ceiling reaching effect switching process (S1391) is ended, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 281).

By configuring in this way, when the variable display of the second special pattern wins a big hit during execution of the ceiling arrival notification performance in the third pattern display device 81, the ceiling arrival notification performance is interrupted and the second special It is possible to notify that a big win has been won in the variable display of the symbols. As a result, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect is reduced, and the time for the player to recognize that the ceiling has been reached is also reduced. In addition, the ceiling reaching notification performance is not continued until the end of the variable performance of the special symbol 1, but is interrupted in the middle, so that the player can recognize that some other event has occurred while reaching the ceiling. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the number of times of time saving that can be given when reaching the ceiling has decreased to 100 times of time saving times given based on the jackpot type "time saving A". can be mitigated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the eleventh embodiment will be described. Figures 283 and 284 are shown in the third symbol display device 81 performed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 283(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the variable effect, and FIG. 283(a) shows the first special symbol in the state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol until reaching the ceiling is one more time in the "normal game state". 283(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and FIG. 283(b) shows that the variable display of the first special symbol starts from the state of FIG. 283(a). 283(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed, and FIG. 283(c) shows a variable display that results in winning the jackpot of the second special symbol from the state of FIG. 283(b). It is a diagram showing a state in which the ceiling reaching notification effect has been started and interrupted, and FIG. 283(d) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol jackpot has stopped from the state of FIG. 283(c). It is a diagram showing.

In addition, FIG. 284(a) shows the execution of the variable display of special symbols in the "universal pattern high probability time shortening state" shifted from the state of FIG. FIG. 284(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of times is 99, and FIG. 284(b) shows that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped from the state of FIG. FIG. 284(c) is a diagram showing a transition to a "normal game state", and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state switched from the special design to the 1st special design.

FIG. 283(a) shows that in the "normal game state", when the number of executions of the special symbol variation display until reaching the ceiling is one more, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both It shows a state of being stopped. FIG. 283(a) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 283(a), the variable display of the first special symbol has just stopped, and "871" is displayed on the special figure 1 mini reel 81a in the lower left part of the main display area Dm. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, "193" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. (Stopping) is displayed. Furthermore, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 87a for special figure 1, and "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations of each of the 2 special symbols is "1" and "0". In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a ceiling reaching counter 81c displays a message that "1 time" is left until the ceiling is reached.

Next, FIG. 283(b) shows a state in which variable display of the first special symbol is started from the state of FIG. Also, FIG. 283(b) shows a game state similar to timing 1 in FIG. 280, which is the state immediately after FIG. 283(a). In FIG. 283(b), since the remaining one of the reserved number of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was reserved in FIG. It is displayed, and it is displayed that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the special figure 1 mini reel 81a. Furthermore, FIG. 283(b) shows that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the state of "one time" after reaching the ceiling, and the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Since the ceiling will be reached at , the ceiling reaching notification effect is being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In addition, in FIG. 283(b), similarly to FIG. 283(a), the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (stopped), so "193" is displayed on the special figure 2 mini reel 81b. It is

Next, FIG. 283(c) shows a state in which variable display for winning the second special symbol jackpot is started from the state of FIG. 283(b), and ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted. Also, FIG. 283(c) shows a game state similar to timing 2 in FIG. In FIG. 283(c), the execution is started in FIG. 283(b), and the variable display of the first special symbol that has executed the ceiling reaching notification effect is still being executed, and in the special figure 1 mini reel 81a, A state that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed is displayed. In addition, FIG. 283(c) is a "normal game state", which is a game state in which a left-handed game is played. is launched, and the ball launched in the right-handed game has entered the upper second start port 71, so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the special figure 2 mini reel 81b, A state in which the variable display is being executed is displayed. Furthermore, since the second special symbol is a big hit variable display, in the central part of the main display area Dm, based on the start of the big hit variable display of the second special symbol, in FIG. 283 (b) The started ceiling reaching notification effect is interrupted by the screen darkening effect.

Next, FIG. 283(d) shows a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol jackpot is stopped from the state of FIG. 283(c). FIG. 283(d) shows a game state similar to timing 3 in FIG. In FIG. 283(d), the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol that started execution in FIG. In addition, since the ceiling is reached by the end of the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the state is shifted to the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state", the main display right hitting instruction 89 is displayed. . Furthermore, the variation display of the second special symbol jackpot that started in FIG. 283(c) is finished, and "666" is displayed in the center of the special figure 2 mini reel 81b and the main display area Dm.

Next, in FIG. 284(a), the execution of variable display of special symbols in the "universal pattern high probability time reduction state" shifted from the state of FIG. A state in which the number of times is 99 is shown. Figure 284 (a), the second special symbol that started execution in the state of Figure 283 (c) by the variation display that becomes a jackpot transitions to the "general pattern high probability time reduction state", the "general pattern high probability time Since the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed 99 times in the "shortened state", the time saving counter 81g in the upper left part of the main display area Dm indicates that the number of remaining time saving times is "1 time". display is taking place. In addition, since the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, "145" is displayed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 mini reel 81a, and the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed ( is stopped) is displayed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed is displayed on the special symbol 2 mini reel 81b in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. It is In addition, "0" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1, and "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2, the first special symbol and the second It is displayed that the number of reservations for each of the two special symbols is "0" and "4". Furthermore, since it is in the "normal figure high probability time shortening state" in which a right-handed game is performed, a right-handed instruction 89 for main display and a character message 81f are displayed.

Next, FIG. 284(b) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped from the state of FIG. In FIG. 284(b), since the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the 100th execution in the "general figure high probability time shortening state", has ended, the lower right part of the main display area Dm, the special figure 2 mini reel 81b shows "582". In addition, due to the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving end condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the "normal game state". 0 times" is displayed, and the right-handed hitting instruction 89 for the main display and the character message 81f that were displayed in FIG. 284(a) are erased.

Next, FIG. 284(c) shows a state in which the third symbol displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol from the state of FIG. 284(b). there is In FIG. 284(c), since the "normal game high probability time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is performed has shifted to the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, the left-handed instruction for production 81h is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Further, the third symbol displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm is the first special symbol, and in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, the first special symbol is dynamically displayed. A state in which the corresponding variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm is displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, in the variable display of the special symbol 1 at the "900th time" in the low probability state of the special symbol, during execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, the special symbol 2 When the variable display wins a jackpot, the ceiling reaching notification performance is interrupted at the same time when the variable display of the special pattern 2 is started, and the big win is notified in the variable display of the special pattern 2.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification performance is reduced, the time for the player to recognize that the ceiling has been reached is also reduced, and the big win in the variable display of the special pattern 2 can be notified earlier. can. In addition, the ceiling reaching notification performance is not continued until the end of the variable performance of the special symbol 1, but is interrupted in the middle, so that the player can recognize that some other event has occurred while reaching the ceiling. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the number of times of time saving that can be given when reaching the ceiling has decreased to 100 times of time saving times given based on the jackpot type "time saving A". can be mitigated. Furthermore, when the dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed as a rare case when reaching the ceiling, the ceiling reaching notification performance is immediately ended, and the performance contents are consistent, so that there is no discrepancy in the performance contents. By configuring as above, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment has the same effects as those of the seventh to eighth embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a twelfth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment to the eleventh embodiment, in a left-handed game, the ball can enter or is likely to enter the first start hole 64, while the upper second start hole 71 or the lower second start hole It is configured so that the ball is difficult or not to enter the starting port 71a, and in the left-handed game, a second special Dynamic display of symbols is configured to be difficult or impossible to implement. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment to the eleventh embodiment, the opening time of the normal electric role 72 when winning the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is short (that is, "0.1 second ”), and is configured to make it difficult to enter the lower second starting port 71a.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the normal electric role 72b is arranged below the first start port 64, and in the left-handed game, the normal electric role 72b is in an open state. It is configured to be able to win a prize through the lower second starting port 71a. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the opening time of the normal electric combination 72b when the normal combination is won in the low probability state of the normal combination is longer than the opening time of the normal combination 72 in the seventh embodiment. It is a long time (that is, "1.0 second"), and is configured to be able to win a prize to the lower second start port 71a even in the "normal game state" in which a left-handed game is played.

The pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that differ from the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh to eleventh embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the seventh to eleventh embodiments are used for the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh to eleventh embodiments. and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 285, a specific configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 285 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. The difference between the game board 13 of the seventh to eleventh embodiments and the game board 13 of the twelfth embodiment is that an ordinary electric player 72b that can win a prize in the lower second start port 71a by being in an open state is located below the first starting port 64 .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, below the first starting hole 64, there is arranged a lower second starting hole 71a through which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric machine 72b is in an open state. . To this lower second starting port 71a, when the normal electric role 72b is in the open state in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is performed, about two balls per minute are fired in the left-handed game. Game nails are planted around the area so as to win prizes. The lower second starting hole 71a also serves as one of the prize winning holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

Below the first starting port 64 in front view, the lower second starting port 71a is opened by opening and closing two blade members that cover the opening through which the ball enters the lower second starting port 71a. A common electric actuator 72b is provided that can be displaced to a (expanded state) or a closed state (reduced state). The normal electric terminal 72b is normally in a closed state in which the blades are closed (the blades are erected upward), and the ball cannot enter the lower second starting port 71a or is difficult to enter. It's becoming

On the other hand, when the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the normal electric part 72b is operated for a predetermined time. From the state in which the blades of the normal electrode 72b stand up while the normal electrode 72b is being operated. It will be in a state of being movable in a substantially V-shape (inverted V-shape), and the ordinary electric terminal 72b will be in an open state. When the normal electric terminal 72b is in the open state, the ball can enter the lower second start opening 71a, or the ball can enter the ball more easily than in the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol "O" stops and hits, and when the normal electric part 72b is in an open state, not only the ball entering the first starting port 64 , a ball can be entered into the lower second starting port 71a, and a state in which a lot of big winning lotteries can be performed can be established.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbols in the low probability state of the normal symbols is 70/100 (see FIG. 286), and the winning in the variable display of the normal symbols is It is set so that it can be easily derived. Furthermore, the opening time of the normal electric combination 72b when the normal symbol is won in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "1.0 second" (see FIG. 286), and in the "normal game state", it is fired by the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball can enter the lower second starting port 71a.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol executed based on the winning to the first start port 64, and the lower second start It is configured so that both dynamic display of the second special symbol executed based on the winning to the mouth 71a can be executed.

Therefore, as described above in the seventh to eleventh embodiments, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling (Fig. 216, Fig. 267, Fig. 273 and FIG. 280), that is, the situation in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel in the "normal game state" is the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. is likely to occur even when a normal game is played, and as a result, when a non-recommended right-handed game is performed just before reaching the ceiling like the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh to eleventh embodiments From such a rare case, the control contents of the variation effect of each dynamic display and the direction of hitting for effect, which are executed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling, are likely to function more effectively.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 286(a) to 286(c), the details of the normal pattern per random number table 202h, the normal pattern variation table 202i, and the normal pattern opening table 202j of the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 286(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202h per normal figure stored in the ROM 202 of the twelfth embodiment, which is stored in the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment. Since it is the same as the random number table 202h per normal figure, the description is omitted.

Then, Figure 286 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the general figure variation table 202i stored in the ROM202 of the twelfth embodiment, which is stored in the ROM202 of the seventh embodiment Since it is the same as the normal pattern fluctuation table 202i, the explanation is omitted.

Next, FIG. 286(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal electric power release table 202j stored in the ROM 202 of the twelfth embodiment. The difference between the normal electric role opening table 202j of the 12th embodiment and the normal electric role opening table 202j of the seventh embodiment is that the opening times of the normal electric role 72 and the normal electric role 72b in the normal symbol low probability state are different. It is a point.

The normal electric role opening table 202j of the twelfth embodiment is referred to when the normal symbol wins, and based on the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol win occurs, the opening (immersion) time and the number of times of opening the normal electric role 72b are determined. stipulated.

The normal electric role opening table 202j of the 12th embodiment is divided into groups based on the game state in which the normal symbols are drawn. Specifically, for "normal game state / latent probability change state" referred to in "normal game state" and "latency probability change state", "probability change state", "normal figure low probability time reduction state" or The open state (open time) of the ordinary electric worker 72b is changed for "probability fluctuation state/low probability time shortening state/time shortening state" referred to in "general figure high probability time shortening state".

As shown in FIG. 286(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, in the "normal game state" and the "latency probability fluctuation state", the normal electric combination 72b is opened when the normal symbol is won. The number of times is 1, and the opening time is defined as "1.0 second" in the normal electric service opening table 202j. That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the normal electric role 72b is opened for "1.0 seconds" x 1 time = "1.0 seconds". is set to be

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", the opening time of the normal electric role 72b set when winning the normal symbol is "5. 8 seconds” and the number of times of opening is set to 1 in the normal electric service opening table 202j. In other words, when the normal pattern is won in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time reduction state" or "normal high probability time reduction state", the normal electric role 72b is "5.8 seconds" × It is configured to be opened once=“5.8 seconds”.

As a result, by changing the open mode of the normal electric part 72b according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the normal electric part 72b is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the period during which the normal electric terminal 72b is open is long, so that it is easy to enter the lower second start opening 71a, or the normal electric terminal 72b is open. By making the state in which the ball can enter the lower second starting port 71a different depending on the game state, different game characteristics can be produced for each game state.

In particular, among the gaming states where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", it becomes a high probability state of normal patterns, the variable display time is short, normal electric The opening period of the winning combination 72b is lengthened, and the balls launched in the right-handed game are configured to easily enter the lower second start hole 71a.

In addition, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is recommended, although it is a state with a low probability of normal symbols, it is set so that a certain degree (70/100) is likely to be derived, and the normal electric role 72b Since the opening period of is set to a certain degree ("1.0 seconds"), it is configured so that the ball fired by the left-handed game can enter the lower second start port 71a.

Therefore, the ball hit to the right in the "probability fluctuation state", "normal low probability time shortening state" and "normal high probability time shortening state" easily enters the lower second start port 71a, and the second special Since the number of reserved balls for dynamic display of symbols is likely to accumulate, the variation reduction function is likely to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be efficiently executed.

In addition, the ball hit to the left in the "normal game state" can win the first starting port 64 and the lower second starting port 71a (about 6 and about 2 wins per minute, respectively). , both dynamic display of the first special symbol and dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed.

Therefore, as described above in the seventh to eleventh embodiments, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling (Fig. 216, Fig. 267, Fig. 273 and FIG. 280), that is, the situation in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel in the "normal game state" is the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment to the eleventh embodiment, the dynamic display variation effect and the effect shot executed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling The control content of the direction instruction tends to function more effectively.

In addition, the hit probability of variable display of normal symbols and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is more likely to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state", etc., any ratio may be used. The probability may be set to about 1/100 to make it difficult to win, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or the low probability state of the normal pattern It may be configured so as not to win a prize at the time. Also, if the variable display time is shorter in the "probability fluctuation state" than in the "normal game state", it may be any time, for example, the variable display time of normal symbols in the "normal game state" is "30 seconds" or more. may be a long time (for example, "100 seconds") or a short time (for example, "1 second") less than "10 seconds".

Moreover, the open time and the number of open times of the ordinary electric circuit 72 are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the open time of the normal electric combination 72, any open time may be used as long as it is more advantageous for the player to be in the "variable probability state" than in the "normal game state". The opening time of the normal electric role 72 in the "normal game state" etc. may be set to "1 second" or more (for example, "5 seconds"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "3 times"). ”). Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "variable probability state" or the like may be a long time of "5.8 seconds" or more (for example, "10 seconds"), or a short time of less than "5.8 seconds". (eg, “1 second”). Further, the number of opening times of the ordinary electric terminal 72 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be set to a number greater than "1 time" (for example, "5 times").

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, below the first starting hole 64, there is a lower second starting hole into which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric machine 72b is in the open state. 71a is provided. In addition, the probability of winning the normal symbols in the low probability state of the normal symbols is 70/100 (see FIG. 286), and is set so that the winning is easily derived in the variable display of the normal symbols, and the low probability of the normal symbols. In the state, the opening time of the normal electric combination 72b when the normal symbol is won is "1.0 second". Therefore, in the "normal game state", it is configured so that the ball fired in the left-handed game can enter the lower second start port 71a. As a result, the ball hit to the left in the "normal game state" can win the first starting hole 64 and the lower second starting hole 71a (about 6 balls and about 2 balls per minute, respectively). , both the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed.

Therefore, as described above in the seventh to eleventh embodiments, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol when reaching the ceiling (Fig. 216, Fig. 267, Fig. 273 and FIG. 280), that is, the situation in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel in the "normal game state" is the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment to the eleventh embodiment, the dynamic display variation effect and the effect shot executed by the third symbol display device 81 when reaching the ceiling The control content of the direction instruction tends to function more effectively.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment has the same effects as those of the seventh to eleventh embodiments due to the same configuration.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are only examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described embodiment, the upper second starting port 71, the lower second starting port 71a, and the variable winning device 65 are placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 as the winning ports into which the ball fired in the right-handed game can win. are placed in On the other hand, in a game state in which a right-handed game is played by arranging a general prize-winning port 63 on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 as viewed from the front as a prize-winning port into which a ball fired in a right-handed game can win. The general winning opening 63 is configured so that a certain amount of balls (for example, 10 out of 100) can win, and in the right-handed game, the upper second starting opening 71, the lower second starting opening 71a, or the variable winning device 65 In addition, it is constructed so that prize balls can be paid out to the players. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while suppressing the consumption of the player's own balls during a right-handed game. In particular, it is possible to reduce the consumption of balls owned by the player by paying out prize balls based on winning to the general prize winning opening 63 in the "latency probability fluctuation state" in which the prize winning assisting function does not operate.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, when one of the first special symbols or the second special symbols is dynamically displayed as a jackpot, the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or the first special symbol starts execution, The lottery for dynamic display of the second special symbol or the first special symbol on the other hand is constructed so as to draw lots only from random numbers other than big wins (that is, random numbers that result in a loss). On the other hand, when the dynamic display of one of the first special symbols or the second special symbol is a big hit, and the dynamic display of the other second special symbol or the first special symbol starts to be executed, the other The dynamic display of the second special symbol or the first special symbol may also be configured so that the jackpot can be won. In this case, when a big win is won by the dynamic display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the loss of one special symbol, the variation of the dynamic display of the loss is temporarily stopped at the end of the variable display of the big win. , and may be configured to restart the variable display of the loss at the end of the jackpot game.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" can occur by using the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, a variable winning device for a small winning is provided so that a small winning can be won in addition to the big winning in the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and is opened based on the winning in the small winning game. Then, a pachinko machine (so-called 1 type 2 types mixed Machine) is used, and it is configured to vary whether or not the "time saving function" is given according to the number of times the "time saving function" is given. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game to which the "time saving function" is provided, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described embodiment, the end condition of the "probability fluctuation state" is configured to be ended by the number of times dynamic display of special symbols is executed (so-called ST type) or winning the next big hit (so-called loop type). are doing. On the other hand, even if a pachinko machine (so-called falling type) is used in which the "probability fluctuation state" ends (so-called falling function) when a predetermined lottery result other than a big hit is derived in the dynamic display of special symbols. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games. In this case, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state", even if it falls under the above fall lottery and shifts to "time reduction state" or "normal game state", immediately "time reduction state" Alternatively, the production in the "variable probability state" or the "variable latent probability state" is continued without shifting to the "normal game state" effect. Then, when a predetermined condition is established (for example, when the "time saving function" ends, or when winning a lottery for change in performance, etc.), a screen corresponding to the "time reduction state" or "normal game state" is executed. By constructing in this way, even if the falling lottery is applied in the "variable probability state" or the "variable latent probability state", it is made difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the player has fallen, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the game state (game result), and to execute game specifications and effects that are easy for the player to understand. can be done. It should be noted that, in the "variable probability state" or "variable latent probability state", if the falling lottery is applied, an effect that can suggest that fact to the player may be executed.

<Modification 5>
In the above-described embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol is generated by selecting the jackpot type to which the "probability variation function" is provided. On the other hand, it may be configured to provide a so-called probability limiter function in which a jackpot type that does not generate a "variable probability function" is selected for each given number of times of a predetermined "variable probability function". Also, it may be configured to provide a so-called time-saving limiter function in which a jackpot type that does not generate a high-probability state of normal symbols is selected for each predetermined number of jackpots. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress continuous excessive game values to be given to the player, and to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 6>
In the above-described embodiment, the normal electronic part 72 and the variable winning device 65 are configured to be opened based on the winning of the normal symbol or the special symbol. On the other hand, a pachinko machine equipped with a passage opening for opening a movable accessory (so-called non-motorized accessory) blocking other winning openings when a ball passes through the pachinko machine may be used.

<Modification 7>
In the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a game state in which the "time saving function" is provided after the jackpot ends is generated. On the other hand, when a predetermined pattern (for example, a time-saving pattern) other than a jackpot (small hit) is derived in the dynamic display of special patterns, the transition to a state in which the "time-saving function" is given without going through the jackpot It may be configured to By configuring in this way, during the dynamic display of one special pattern, the phenomenon of reaching the ceiling based on the dynamic display of the other special pattern, which is easily executed by the "time saving function", can occur. While enriching the variations to which the "function" is given, the game is played by displaying the performance hitting instruction at the timing when the variation performance of the first special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is completed. A player can start a right-handed game without a sense of incongruity.

<Modification 8>
In the above embodiment, the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, "1000 times") without winning the jackpot. ) is configured to give a “time-saving function” (so-called ceiling function) without going through the jackpot when executed. On the other hand, the predetermined number of times may be counted separately for the number of cumulative executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of cumulative executions of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Also, the predetermined number of times may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed concurrently. On the other hand, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation), and each dynamic display is controlled. good too. Specifically, when a trigger for dynamic display of the first special symbol is obtained during the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, during the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the It may be configured to suspend the start of the dynamic display of one special symbol. Also, the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the second special symbol (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation). Specifically, when an opportunity to dynamically display the second special symbol indicating whether or not a jackpot game will occur is obtained during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol indicating whether or not a jackpot game will occur. However, the dynamic display of the first special pattern is continued, and during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special pattern, the start of the dynamic display of the second special pattern is suspended, and the dynamic display of the first special pattern is made. is completed, dynamic display of the suspended second special symbol may be started. In this case, it is configured to display a suspended display indicating that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended. Furthermore, dynamic display may be executed in order of winning (so-called winning order variation), and each dynamic display may be controlled. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games. In addition, when executing the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special design or the first special design that has been reserved, the corresponding reserved design is continuously displayed as the execution reserved design in the third design display device 81. It may be configured such that the above-mentioned execution pending symbols are erased at the end of the variable performance or at an appropriate timing of the variable performance.

<Modification 10>
In the above-described embodiment, as the end condition of the "time saving function", it is configured to end based on a predetermined number of times of dynamic display of special symbols or winning a jackpot. On the other hand, the "time saving function" may be terminated based on the number of winnings to the small winning game or the derivation of the time saving ending pattern different from the big winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the end condition of the prize assisting state, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game. Also, when the "time saving function" is effective, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is a predetermined number (for example, a reserved full tank (i.e., 4 pieces), or a fixed number of reserved balls for a reserved full tank (for example, 2 pieces) ) It may be configured to end the “time saving function” when it is stored.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, the value of the ceiling reaching counter 81c displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated at the end of dynamic display of each special symbol in the "normal game state". . On the other hand, it may be configured to be updated at the start of execution of dynamic display of each special symbol.

<Modification 12>
In the above embodiment, the variation pattern that can be selected when reaching the ceiling in the "normal game state" is configured so that various variation times can be selected, similar to the variation pattern that can be selected before reaching the ceiling. . On the other hand, it may be configured such that the variation pattern that can be selected when reaching the ceiling is constant. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time at the time of reaching the ceiling is fixed, and the ceiling reaching notification effect can be executed in a fixed time. In addition, as in the case of reaching the ceiling by the dynamic display of the second special symbol while executing the loss or small hit fluctuation that takes a long time in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the ceiling is reached. First, it is possible to avoid a state in which the third symbol display device 81 continues to perform the variation effect of the first special symbol over a long period of time.

<Modification 13>
In the above-described embodiment, it is constructed so that the winning is 70/100 in the low-probability state of the normal symbol, and the normal electric combination 72 can be moved. On the other hand, it may be constructed so that winning is not won in the low-probability state of normal symbols, but winning is only in the high-probability state of normal symbols (for example, 100% winning). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the lower second start opening 71a due to the movement of the normal electric combination 72 in the low probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to reliably realize the playability according to the game specifications.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is opened in the jackpot game. On the other hand, a plurality of winning openings that can be opened in the big winning game may be provided, and the plurality of winning openings may be opened according to the type of big winning or the type of small winning. By configuring in this way, by opening the other variable winning device immediately after closing one of the variable winning devices, the interval time can be reduced as much as possible to contribute to the shortening of the jackpot game time.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, one type of variable display time of normal symbols is provided according to the game state. On the other hand, the variable display time of normal symbols may be selected by lottery from among a plurality of types of variable display times according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the variable display time of normal symbols is determined by lottery from "1 second", "3 seconds", "5 seconds", "10 seconds" or "30 seconds". do. By configuring in this way, in the "normal game state" in which the right-handed game is not encouraged, the right-handed game is played and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to perform variable display of the normal symbol, and according to the derivation timing. Even if the ball is shot toward the ordinary electric terminal 72 that can be opened by pressing, the opening timing of the lower second start port 71a becomes plural, so that the prize winning to the lower second start port 71a can be suppressed. can.

<Modification 16>
In the above embodiment, in the lottery for the first special pattern, a winning combination is selected from among the big win (, small win) or loss, and in the lottery for the second special pattern, the winning combination is selected from among the big win (, small win) or loss. It is configured to select roles. On the other hand, a small win may be provided only in the lottery of the first special symbol, and a winning combination may be selected from among the big win, the small win or the loss, or only in the lottery of the second special symbol. may be provided, and a winning combination may be selected from a big hit, a small win, or a loss, or a winning combination may be selected from a big win or a loss without providing a small win in any special pattern lottery. Alternatively, a small win may be provided in any special symbol lottery, and a winning combination may be selected from among the big win, small win, or loss.

<Modification 17>
In the above embodiment, the game state is changed (for example, from "probability fluctuation state" to "normal game state") according to the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. ing. On the other hand, it is possible to change the game state according to the number of executions of a predetermined effect other than the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, "ready-to-win display" or a specific effect based on winning a specific role). may be configured.

<Modification 18>
In the above embodiment, the number of reserved balls is counted for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variation time and reach probability of each special symbol are changed for each number of reserved balls. On the other hand, it may be configured to change the variation time and the reach probability of each special symbol according to the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, the ceiling reaching notification effect is configured to be performed by the variable effect of the special symbol one time before reaching the "normal pattern low probability time shortening state". On the other hand, the ceiling reaching notification production is continuously executed over the variable production of a plurality of special symbols from the fluctuation production of the special pattern before multiple times that can reach the "normal figure low probability time reduction state". can be configured to

In the above-described embodiment, the small winning type of the small winning game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, or the small winning type of the small winning game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are each composed of one type. . Instead of this, it is configured to provide a plurality of types of small winning types of small winning games in dynamic display of the first special symbol and / and small winning types of small winning games in dynamic display of the second special symbol. You may Furthermore, it may be configured to vary whether or not to end the "time saving function" according to the small hit type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the variation effect of the special symbols that are encouraged for each game state is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation effect of the special symbols that are not encouraged is executed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm. Instead of this, it may be constructed such that the non-recommended special symbol variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in a predetermined manner. Specifically, for example, to make the variation effect of the encouraged special symbols stand out in the main display area Dm (the central part, most, the area larger than the variation effect of the special symbols that are not encouraged, and the pattern display mode to be darkened Execution, etc.), while executing the fluctuation production of the special pattern that is not encouraged in the main display area Dm, so as not to stand out from the fluctuation production of the special pattern that is encouraged (corner, small part, special pattern that is encouraged) A smaller area than the variable effect, the pattern display mode is thin, etc.) is configured to be executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to grasp the execution mode of the variable effect of a plurality of special symbols by the third symbol display device 81 .

In the above-described embodiment, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of balls for which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is configured so that the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol changes according to the number of balls. In other words, the number of pending balls for dynamic display of the first special symbol affects only the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the number of pending balls for dynamic display of the second special symbol affects the dynamic display of the second special symbol. configured to affect only Instead of this, the number of pending balls dynamically displayed for one special symbol may be configured to affect the fluctuation time for dynamic display of the other special symbol. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to the total number of pending balls of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of pending balls of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. configured to change accordingly. By configuring in this way, in a state in which the number of reserved balls dynamically displayed in the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls dynamically displayed in the second special symbol are mixed, a unique variation time can be selected. By configuring, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. is not limited to six stages, and may be changed to any stage.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the big hit probability is changed by changing the probability set value has been described, but the normal symbol winning probability and the small winning winning probability may be changed.

Also, if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the start-up process, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") from the range of "1" to "6" is set. The value may be forcibly set. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during timer interrupt processing), it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before judging whether or not the RAM judgment value is normal, it is judged whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the setting change process is forcibly executed. to change the probability set value to the person concerned with the hall, urge the person concerned with the hall etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, or set a specific probability within the normal range as the probability set value. The setting value may be set forcibly.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As described above, this may be performed using the setting key 501 . Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the ON state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the OFF side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the ON state is automatically set. The setting key 501 is configured to be energized to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, It may be possible to operate it by hall personnel or the like without opening the substrate box 100 . This also facilitates determination of the set probability value.

In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the startup mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 . Further, it may be configured such that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be set so that the hole can be selected as a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 was mounted on the main controller 110 . On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and the like. On the other hand, the setting key 501 can be used to drive the number of prize balls to be paid out when one wins a prize (for example, change from 3 to 5), or to drive a movable accessory that assists the winning of a prize in a prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), driving width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or members that affect the flow of the ball (for example, a stage or a crane on which the ball can roll) It is possible to change the setting regarding the degree of advantage to the player in a plurality of stages, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees), the tilt state of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). may be configured.

In each of the embodiments described above, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the horizontal direction (left or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. may

In the above embodiment, the big hit random numbers, the small hit random numbers, and the losing random numbers are set to continuous values, and whether it is a big hit or a small hit is determined by a range (for example, "0" or more "49" or less), and the control load of the main controller 110 is reduced. On the other hand, the random numbers (that is, the big winning random numbers and the small winning random numbers) that give the game value may be arranged not in a continuous manner but in a dispersed (dissipated) manner. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated by "0 to 999", "7,341,555,777,831" as the jackpot random number and "77,175" as the small hit random number , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845".

Here, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value (for example, a jackpot if it is "0 to 50" in the low-probability state and the high-probability state) continuously, It is possible that the value could be predicted externally, increasing the likelihood of fraudulently being awarded a jackpot. Therefore, by configuring as in the above modified example, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random number to which a game value is assigned from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 .

In addition, in the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state do not overlap each other. You may set a jackpot random value. By configuring in this way, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that will be the jackpot, the value of the random number that will be the jackpot. can be made difficult to predict, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc. by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (so-called soft random numbers). On the other hand, the random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random numbers may be configured to update the jackpot random number counter C1 and the like (so-called hard random numbers). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the random value being updated from the outside, and to improve the security performance.

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot random number value increases evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, the big hit random number value (or the small hit random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, from setting values "1" to "3", the jackpot random number value is increased by "2", while from setting values "4" to "6", the jackpot random number value is "5". increase by increments. By configuring in this way, the game value that can be imparted by the setting difference can be greatly changed, and it is possible to provide a game with modulation due to the setting difference, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to change the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small hit type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the small hit is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the small hit type is changed. It may be configured such that a setting difference is caused by the change.

In the above-described embodiment, the random number that gives the game value (that is, the jackpot random number) is changed in accordance with the setting change, and the changed amount is compensated for by the random number that does not give the game value (that is, the random number that does not give the game value). It was configured as On the other hand, when the random number that gives the game value (for example, the big hit random number) is changed due to the setting change, the changed amount of the random number that gives the other game value (for example, the small hit random number) ) may be configured to be compensated from. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game value that can be imparted with a difference for each setting, provide a game with a sharpness for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "jackpot random number range", "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot random number range")", " Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be arranged in a row of "the range of the random number values that fail." Here, as the "re-jackpot random number range", the increment of the jackpot random number value associated with the setting change is configured to correspond. By configuring in this way, the random number that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number) is adjacent to the random number that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number). It is possible to fix the range of the random numbers that are not changed (that is, the big winning random numbers and the small winning random numbers that do not change even when the settings are changed). As a result, for example, in the success/failure determination control program, while making the basic success/failure determination of fixed random numbers common to all set values, the increment of the jackpot random number accompanying the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. can be determined, the design of the control program can be facilitated, and the number of man-hours for development can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, each random number may be defined (set) in the order of the number of random numbers (or the order of the number of random numbers).

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "jackpot random number range", "losing random number range", and "small hit random number range". Was. On the other hand, the "range of random numbers for big hits" that increases with the change of settings is set so that it is adjacent to the random number that decreases with changes of settings (i.e., the "range of random numbers that lose"). It may be configured to be defined (set) in the table 202a. Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number is defined (set) so as to be in a row of "small hit random number range", "jackpot random number range", and "losing random number range". . By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increment of the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the losing random number value), and according to the setting change The range of random numbers that are not changed (that is, small winning random numbers) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for judging whether or not the small hit is correct, while making the judgment of the small hit random value common to all set values, the increment of the big hit random value accompanying the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value This facilitates control program design and reduces development man-hours.

In the above-described embodiment, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the probability of winning a special symbol is improved (doubled or more). On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", it may be configured to improve the small winning probability of the special symbol. Also, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase in the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 2 times or more (for example, 10 times). Furthermore, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", even if both the jackpot probability and the small win probability are set to improve (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times and the small win probability is also 5 times) good.

In the above embodiment, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol and the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol are configured to be equal. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol, or the winning probability of the small winning game in the first special symbol may be configured. The probability may be configured to be lower than the winning probability of the small winning game in the second special symbol.

In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability state and high-probability state of the special symbol, it is configured such that the setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in any state. On the other hand, the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated, and the setting difference is provided in the jackpot probability in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state). You may

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated for by the losing random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increment of the jackpot random number value may be compensated for by the small hit random number and the losing random number value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of big hit random numbers based on the setting change from each of the small hit random numbers and the losing random numbers, and the change in the big hit random numbers is fixed. It is no longer necessary to fill from the predetermined random value of 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from 1 for the amount of change in the jackpot random number value, there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specifications, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specifications is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the normal electric element 72 is provided for the lower second starting port 71a, and the manner in which the ball flows into the lower second starting port 71a differs depending on the opening/closing state of the normal electric member 72. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, a normal electric motor 72 is provided for the upper second starting port 71, and the manner of inflow of the ball into the upper second starting port 71 is different depending on the opening/closing state of the normal electric motor 72. Alternatively, an ordinary electric motor 72 may be provided for the first starting port 64, and the manner of inflow of the ball into the first starting port 64 may differ depending on the opening/closing state of the ordinary electric motor 72. You may

In the above-described embodiment, the normal electric element 72 that displaces between the protruding state and the immersed state is used, and the immersion timing and immersion time of the normal electric element 72 are changed in each game state, thereby realizing the game characteristics of the present invention. is configured to On the other hand, the playability of the present invention may be realized by using a rotating blade member and changing the operation timing and operation time of the blade member for each game state. Specifically, for example, the blade members are arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower second starting port 71a, and when the blade members are in a non-operating state (for example, an upright state), the balls are positioned outside the blade members (non-rolling side). , and flow downstream as it is. On the other hand, in the operating state in which the blade member rotates (from the upright state to the rightward tilted state of 120 degrees), the ball collides with the inner side (rolling side) of the blade member, and moves the inner side of the blade member to the lower second starting port. It is configured to roll toward the 71a side. With this configuration, it is easier to recognize whether or not the region in which the blade member itself operates has been largely driven in the rotational mode of the blade member compared to the drive mode in which the normal electric element 72 appears and disappears. It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize whether or not the prize has been won by the variable display.

The display mode and display position of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2 are changed to the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is produced in the main display area Dm. It may be configured to change accordingly. Specifically, for example, corresponding to the special symbol being executed in the main display area Dm, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 that are being executed are positioned above, displayed in Arabic numerals, or displayed in red. , and the fourth pattern display areas 88 and 87 that are not executed are positioned on the lower side, displayed in a notation different from the above Arabic numerals (for example, Chinese numerals or Roman numerals), or displayed in a color different from red ( For example, it is configured to be displayed in blue). By constructing in this way, while distinguishing and displaying the variable performance being executed, it is constituted so that it is difficult to recognize which special pattern is being executed, and the player recognizes the game state in which he is currently staying. By constructing the game machine so that it is difficult to do so, it is possible to create a game feature of guessing the game state and improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the alarm sound, it is configured to output an alarm sound not only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in a game state in which a left-handed game is recommended, but also when a specific condition is satisfied. good too. Specifically, for example, by configuring in this way, an alarm sound is output only for actions of a malicious player who intentionally tries to obtain more balls than the game specification, and an inexperienced player can By not outputting an alarm sound for a right-handed game with good intentions due to an operation mistake, it is possible to suppress fraudulent games and suppress the player's desire to play, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The winning probability of normal symbols may be configured to be about the same in any game state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" where the special symbol jackpot probability is low, the normal symbol hit probability is set to 50/100, and the special symbol jackpot probability is In the high "probability fluctuation state" and "latency probability fluctuation state", the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 50/100 or 51/100, etc., so that it is the same or equivalent to the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the "normal game state" etc. configured to By configuring in this way, regarding the opening of the normal electric combination 72 based on the winning of the normal design, the variable display time of the normal design and the opening time of the normal construction 72 are considered, and the probability of winning the normal design is not considered. Since it is possible to calculate the ball payout rate, etc., it is possible to simplify the design of the game specifications in each game state.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbols to be selected after the big win may be different for each big win symbol. Specifically, for example, if one of the jackpot symbols 1, 3, 5, and 7 that can generate the "probability fluctuation state" is selected, the first symbol is selected in the "probability fluctuation state". Both the special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to shift to a "both long variation probability variation state" in which relatively long variation time is likely to be selected. Also, when winning with 3 symbols, while the first special symbol tends to be selected for a relatively long variation time in the "probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively short variation time. 1 long special 2 short fluctuation probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, when winning with 5 symbols, in the "probability fluctuation state", both the first special pattern and the second special pattern are shifted to a "both short fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which relatively short fluctuation times are likely to be selected. configured to In addition, when winning with 7 symbols, while the first special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively short variation time in the "probability fluctuation state", the second special symbol is likely to be selected for a relatively long variation time. special 1 short special 2 long fluctuation probability fluctuation state". By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate the special symbols that can be derived first in the game state after the big win depending on the type of the big win symbols, for example, which special symbol will stop first or not. Thus, the probability that the big win appears first can be varied for each game state. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol may be configured to differ based on the number of variations of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation performance of the special symbols for the 1st time to the 10th time after the end of the big win is configured so that a relatively long fluctuation time can be easily selected, and the 11th time and after. As for the variation performance of the special symbol, it is configured so that a relatively short variation time is easily selected. By constructing in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game while providing sharpness to the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

A plurality of types of winning types of normal symbols may be provided. Specifically, for example, a one-time opening hit in which the normal electric terminal 72 is opened once, a three-time opening hit in which the hive plate 72a is opened three times, and an ordinary electric terminal 72 that is opened three times for a long time. 3 long open hits are provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "ordinary pattern high probability time reduction state" and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, it is advantageous for the player in the order of "normal game state" → "normal high probability time reduction state" → "normal low probability time reduction state" → "probability fluctuation state" → "hidden probability fluctuation state" It was in a play state. On the other hand, the game specifications are set so that the "normal pattern high probability time reduction state", "latency probability change state", and "probability change state" are positioned as game states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the "normal game state". You may Specifically, for example, the starting port of the first special symbol is provided upstream of the starting port of the second special symbol to which the normal electric symbol 72 is attached, and the normal electric symbol 72 is activated in the "normal game state". Because it is difficult, it is easier for the player to receive the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than the second special symbol. The lottery opportunity of the second special pattern, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the special pattern, is easily received. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

The display positions of the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 may be changed when a right-handed suggesting display suggesting a right-handed game appears. Specifically, in the "normal game state" where the left-handed game is encouraged, while the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, the right-handed game is encouraged. In the "probability fluctuation state" and the like, while the indication of hitting to the right is displayed in the right small area Ds3, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the left small area Ds1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game specifications corresponding to the game state.

In the above embodiment, regarding the dynamic display of a plurality of special symbols that can be executed at the same time, the variation effect of the special symbols that are encouraged according to the game state is performed in the main display area Dm, and the variation effect of the non-encouragement special symbols is mainly performed. It is configured so that it is not performed in the display area Dm. On the other hand, regarding the effects of a plurality of symbols (for example, special symbols and normal symbols) that can be executed at the same time, the priority order of the effects to be executed depends on the game state, game specifications, the game value to be given, or the execution frequency. is provided in advance, and the performance corresponding to the priority order is preferentially executed, and for the performance with the low priority, the scale of the performance is reduced, or the performance itself is not executed. It may be configured to be difficult to recognize. Specifically, when the variable effect of the first special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the effect related to the variable display of the normal symbol, which has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special symbol, is displayed as the first special symbol. If the 3-symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 is not executed or the scale of the performance is reduced and displayed, or if the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the game is played from the second special symbol. The effect related to the variable display of normal symbols with low game value that can be given to the player may not be executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226, or may be displayed with a reduced scale of effect. By configuring in this way, the player does not feel annoyed by preferentially executing an effect that the player wants to recognize when playing the game, and by reducing (eliminating) the scale of the effect with a low priority. can perform the performance.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. A command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S1111) executed by the sound ramp control device 113, when any stop type command is received, the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b are always set to ON. However, the fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON when each fluctuation pattern command is received and then the corresponding stop type command is received. As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when any of the stop type commands is received without receiving each variation pattern command.

Further, each variation start flag 223a, 223b may be set to ON at the timing of receiving each variation pattern command. In this case, in the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by each variation pattern command is displayed on the display control device based on the fact that each variation start flag 223a, 223b is turned on. Each display variation pattern command to be notified to 114 may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of each stop type command by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is provided with each variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on each display variation pattern command. can be executed. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving each stop type command. , may be transmitted to the display control device 114 . Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols with no numerals "0" to "9". Also, a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed may execute the continuous advance notice effect, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided to display the third symbol. By displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device together with the variable effect executed by the display device 81, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed. In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, a continuous advance notice performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a role that operates according to various performances and activating the performance in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Also, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is performed, and the effect different from the usual effect is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 is made to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 is made to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 114 is made to perform the change effect, so that the pachinko machine 10 continues When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect in the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect in the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 or a combination thereof) may be changed to prepare a plurality of continuous advance notice effect modes selected according to the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is performed when the variable effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbols, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114 determines that the continuous notice command has been received, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and the other stop symbol determination flags are turned off. may be set to In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable effect, the player can be made to expect to finally get a big win.

In the above embodiment, the main controller 110 adds "1" when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a. In response to the pending ball number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number, each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer accompanying the start winning is included as it is, to the audio lamp control device 113. Although the case of transmission has been described, the types of counters included in the number-of-holds-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113 . As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension. It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss In this case, some or all of the outlier types, etc. are determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with some or all of the values of the counters, It may be stored in the RAM 223 .

In the above-described embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64, the second upper starting port 71, or the second lower starting port 71a and the passage through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times. , The maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, for the winning of the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port. The maximum number of balls held in the mouth may be any number other than "4". Also, the maximum number of held balls in each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of held balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first starting port 64, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a is displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or , The areas divided into four may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns) by the number of reserved balls. The light emitting member may be provided to notify the number of reserved balls.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in such a reduced size that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays the identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

In a slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out as a bonus (accessory) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the role ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main controller instead of the prize ball number table, and functions equivalent to the role ratio management chip or the role ratio management chip. number of wins (symbols are aligned on the activated line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), number of wins during the bonus game period, and during the AT period. The number of wins may be counted to manage the role ratio and the continuous role ratio.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown. It should be noted that each of the various inventive concepts shown below may add a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another inventive concept to the inventive concept, or add a part or a plurality of the configurations of the other inventive concept. The concept of the invention may be modified and configured by exchanging parts or the like.

<Group A: No specific effect is performed during the game result suggestive effect>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Display means (for example, third pattern display device 81) predetermined production execution means (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) can be executed (for example, sound lamp control device 113 or display control In a gaming machine comprising a device 114),
The predetermined effect execution means is
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a game result suggestive effect (for example, a variable effect of special symbols) capable of suggesting the game result to the player;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a right hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for effect) with a different occurrence condition from the game result suggesting effect;
Continuing means for continuing the game result suggesting effect (for example, continuing the variable effect of special symbols) when the occurrence condition for starting the specific effect is satisfied during the execution of the game result suggesting effect,
Specific effect waiting means (for example, Standby for right-handed instruction 81d (text message 81f) for production during variable production of special symbols,
The specific effect execution means is
The game machine A0 is characterized in that the specific effect whose start is on standby by the specific effect waiting means can be executed on condition that at least the game result suggesting effect is completed.

According to the game machine A0, information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means , wherein the predetermined effect execution means is a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a game result suggestion effect capable of suggesting a game result to the player; specific effect execution means capable of executing a different specific effect; continuation means for continuing the game result suggestive effect when a condition for starting the specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggestive effect; specific effect waiting means for waiting for the start of the specific effect at least during execution of the game result suggesting effect when a condition for starting the specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggesting effect. The specific effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect whose start is being waited by the specific effect waiting means at least on condition that the game result suggesting effect is completed. Thus, even when a condition for starting the specific performance is established during execution of the game result suggestive performance, the start of the specific performance can be put on standby, and the player pays attention to the game result suggestive performance being executed. There is an effect that it is possible to enjoy the game without spoiling it, and that the interest of the game result suggesting effect can be improved. In addition, since the specific effect can be executed when the execution of the game result effect is completed, the player can recognize the content of the specific effect without any sense of incongruity, and the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased. , has the effect of

In gaming machine A0,
When the start of the specific effect is on standby by the specific effect waiting means, a related effect (for example, a right hitting notification lamp 37c or a main display right hitting A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising a related effect executing means for executing an instruction 89).

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, there is provided a related effect executing means for executing a related effect capable of suggesting a game situation related to the specific effect to the player when the start of the specific effect is on standby by the specific effect standby means. . Thus, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are satisfied and the specific performance is on standby during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance suggests to the player the game situation related to the specific performance. becomes possible. Therefore, even when a condition for starting a specific effect is established during execution of the game result suggesting effect, the start of the specific effect can be put on standby (suspended), and the player can proceed to the game result suggesting effect being executed. It is possible to enjoy without losing the attention of the player, and it is possible for the player to recognize that the start of the specific performance is waiting by the related performance, and the player is waiting for the specific performance. Since the specific performance can be executed when the execution of the game result suggestive performance is completed while making the player recognize that, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without feeling discomfort.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The specific production is
The game machine A2 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state will change. As a result, during execution of the game result suggesting effect, the player can easily pay attention to the game result suggesting effect that is being executed by making it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can shift. It is possible to improve interest by means of a game result suggestive performance, and to make it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed by the specific performance after that, so that the player can accurately recognize the contents of the game. There is

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
The related effect execution means is
A gaming machine A3 characterized in that the related effect is executed in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect in the display means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related effect executing means executes the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect on the display means. As a result, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are established and the specific performance is on standby during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance can suggest the game situation related to the specific performance to the player. It becomes possible. Therefore, even when the occurrence condition for starting the specific performance is established during execution of the game result suggestive performance, the specific performance is not immediately performed, but the related performance is executed so as to be less conspicuous than the specific performance, and the game is played. It is possible for the player to enjoy the game result suggesting effect during execution without losing his or her attention. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize that the start of the specific effect is waiting by executing the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect so that the player can see the specific effect. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that he/she is on standby, and the content of the game can be accurately recognized.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A3,
The related effect execution means is
A third symbol display device 81 displays a related continuation means (for example, a right-handed instruction 81d (character message 81f) for performance and a right-handed instruction 89 for main display that can continue to execute the related performance even during execution of the specific performance). displayed at the same time).

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related performance executing means includes related continuation means capable of continuously executing the related performance even during execution of the specific performance. As a result, the related performance can be continuously executed even during execution of the specific performance, so that there is an effect that the player can accurately recognize the content of the game between the specific performance and the related performance. Further, by continuing to display the related performance regardless of whether or not the specific performance is executed, it becomes unnecessary to control whether or not to execute the related performance depending on whether the specific performance is executed or not, and the control load can be reduced. , has the effect of

In gaming machines A0 to A4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestion effect execution means is
The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the game result suggesting effect.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machines A0 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestive effect execution means converts the result of the first lottery or the second lottery into the game result. It is configured to be suggestible to the player in the suggestive effect. As a result, the start of the specific performance is put on hold even when the condition for starting the specific performance is established during the game result suggestion performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery. As a result, the player can enjoy the game result suggesting effect being executed without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be, and the game result suggesting effect can be performed. Amusement can be improved, and since the specific performance can be executed when the execution of the game result suggesting performance is finished, the player can recognize the contents of the specific performance without discomfort. There is

In any of gaming machines A0 to A5,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized by executing, as the specific effect, an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first firing mode or the second firing mode should be switched to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to, as the specific effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the first shooting mode is executed. As a result, even when a condition for starting a specific effect capable of suggesting to the player that the firing mode of the firing means is switched during execution of the game result suggesting effect is met, the start of the specific effect can be suspended. This enables the player to enjoy the game result suggesting performance under execution without impairing his/her attention, and suggests the player to switch the shooting mode when the execution of the game result suggesting performance is finished. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without a sense of discomfort.

In gaming machine A6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the gaming machine A7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine A6 or A7,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine A8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thus, in the first game state, during the game result suggesting effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. reaches a predetermined number of times, it is possible to wait (suspend) the start of a specific effect that can suggest to the player that the second game state will be transferred, and the player can use it as a game result suggesting effect during execution. It is possible to enjoy the result of the first lottery or the second lottery without losing attention to it, to increase interest in the game result suggesting performance, and to execute the game result suggesting performance. Since the specific effect can be executed when the is finished, the player can recognize that the game state has shifted to the second game state without a sense of discomfort.

<Group B: No specific effect is performed during the suggestive display suggesting the game situation>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of group B was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Display means (for example, third pattern display device 81) predetermined production execution means (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) can be executed (for example, sound lamp control device 113 or display control In a gaming machine comprising a device 114),
The predetermined effect execution means is
a suggestive display execution means capable of displaying a suggestive display capable of suggesting the game situation to the player (for example, a variable effect of special symbols);
a specific effect executing means capable of displaying a specific effect (for example, a right hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for effect) having different display conditions from the suggestive display;
a predetermined period display means (for example, a variation pattern command) capable of displaying the suggestive display for at least a predetermined period;
suggestive display termination means (for example, a confirmation command) for terminating the suggestive display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed;
When the display condition for starting the specific effect is established within the predetermined period, at least during the predetermined period, the specific effect non-starting means (for example, during the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol) that does not start the specific effect does not start the right hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for production),
The specific effect execution means is
The game machine B0 is configured to be able to execute the specific effect when the suggestive display is terminated by the suggestive display ending means and the conditions for executing the specific effect are satisfied.

According to the gaming machine B0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means. , wherein the predetermined effect execution means includes a suggestive display execution means capable of displaying a suggestive display capable of suggesting a game situation to the player, and a specific effect having display conditions different from the suggestive display a predetermined period display means capable of displaying the suggestive display for at least a predetermined period of time; a suggestive display termination means for terminating the suggestive display after the elapse of the predetermined period of time; and the predetermined period of time a specific effect non-starting means that does not start the specific effect for at least the predetermined period when a display condition that allows the specific effect to start is satisfied within the specified period, wherein the specific effect executing means performs the suggestion When the suggestive display is ended by the display ending means, the specific effect can be executed when the conditions for executing the specific effect are satisfied. As a result, even when an execution condition for starting a specific performance is met during execution of the suggestive display, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the player clearly recognizes the content of the suggestive display being displayed. There is an effect that the content of the game can be grasped clearly. In addition, since the specific performance can be executed when the suggestive display ends, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without any sense of incongruity, and the degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased. There is

In gaming machine B0,
The suggestive display executing means includes:
A game machine B1 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the suggestive display with a fixed execution time (for example, "60 seconds") when a predetermined condition different from the execution condition is established.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestive display executing means is configured to be capable of executing the suggestive display whose execution time is fixed when a predetermined condition different from the execution condition is satisfied. As a result, the execution time of the suggestive display that is executed when a predetermined condition different from the execution condition of the specific effect is met is fixed, and while the suggestive display that is executed in the fixed execution time is being executed, When execution conditions for the specific performance are established, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the content of the suggestive display being displayed can be clearly recognized by the player in a fixed execution time, and the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to clearly grasp the contents of the In addition, since the specific performance can be executed when the suggestive display, which is a fixed execution time, ends, the player can recognize the content of the specific performance without discomfort, and the degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased. There is an effect that it can be increased.

In gaming machine B0 or B1,
In a situation where the specific effect is not started by the specific effect non-starting means, a related effect (for example, a main display right-hand hitting instruction 89) capable of suggesting to the player a game situation related to the specific effect can be executed. The game machine B2 is characterized by comprising a related effect executing means.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B0 or B1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, in a situation where the specific effect is not started by the specific effect non-starting means, there is provided a related effect execution means capable of executing a related effect capable of suggesting to the player a game situation related to the specific effect. . As a result, even when the display conditions for the specific effect are satisfied and the specific effect is not started while the suggestive display is being displayed, the game situation related to the specific effect can be suggested to the player by the related effect. becomes. Therefore, even when the occurrence condition for starting the specific effect is satisfied while the suggestive display is being displayed, the start of the specific effect can be put on standby (suspended), and the player loses attention to the suggestive display being displayed. It is possible to clearly recognize the contents without being overwhelmed, and it is possible for the player to recognize that the start of the specific performance is waiting by the related performance, and the player is waiting for the specific performance. Since the specific effect can be executed when the display of the suggestive display ends while making the player recognize that, the player can recognize the content of the specific effect without a sense of incompatibility.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B2,
The specific production is
The game machine B3 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B0 to B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state will change. As a result, while the suggestive display is being displayed, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state can shift, so that the player can easily pay attention to the suggestive display being displayed and the suggestive display can be performed. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the contents of the game, and to make it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can be shifted by a specific performance after that, and to make the player accurately recognize the contents of the game. has the effect of

In gaming machine B2 or B3,
The related effect execution means is
A game machine B4 characterized in that the related effect is executed in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect in the display means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related effect executing means executes the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect on the display means. As a result, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are established and the specific performance is on standby during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance can suggest the game situation related to the specific performance to the player. It becomes possible. Therefore, even when the occurrence condition for starting the specific effect is established during the display of the suggestive display, the specific effect is not immediately performed, but the related effect is executed so as to be less conspicuous than the specific effect, so that the player can It is possible to recognize the display contents of the suggestive display being displayed without hindrance. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize that the start of the specific effect is waiting by executing the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect so that the player can see the specific effect. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that he/she is on standby, and the content of the game can be accurately recognized.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B4,
The related effect execution means is
A third symbol display device 81 displays a related continuation means (for example, a right-handed instruction 81d (character message 81f) for performance and a right-handed instruction 89 for main display that can continue to execute the related performance even during execution of the specific performance). displayed at the same time).

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machines B2 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related performance executing means includes related continuation means capable of continuously executing the related performance even during execution of the specific performance. As a result, the related performance can be continuously executed even during execution of the specific performance, so that there is an effect that the player can accurately recognize the content of the game between the specific performance and the related performance. Further, by continuing to display the related performance regardless of whether or not the specific performance is executed, it becomes unnecessary to control whether or not to execute the related performance depending on whether the specific performance is executed or not, and the control load can be reduced. , has the effect of

In gaming machines B0 to B5,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestive display executing means includes:
The game machine B6 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the suggestion display.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to BA3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the first lottery and the second lottery, wherein the suggestive display execution means displays the result of the first lottery or the second lottery as the suggestive display. is configured to be suggestible to the player. Thus, even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are established during the suggestive display executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, the start of the specific performance can be suspended. To improve interest in the suggestive display by making it possible for the player to enjoy the suggestive display during execution without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be. In addition, since the specific effect can be executed when the execution of the suggestive display is finished, there is an effect that the player can recognize the content of the specific effect without discomfort.

In game machines B0 to B6,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized by executing, as the specific effect, an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first firing mode or the second firing mode should be switched to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to, as the specific effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the first shooting mode is executed. As a result, even when a condition for starting a specific effect capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode of the firing means is switched during display of the suggestive display is established, the start of the specific effect can be postponed, The player can fully enjoy the suggestive display being executed without losing his/her attention, and by suggesting the player to switch the shooting mode when the execution of the suggestive display is finished, the player can There is an effect that it is possible to switch the firing mode without discomfort.

In gaming machine B7,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, a game machine B8 characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine B7 or B8,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine B9 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7 or B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thus, in the first game state, during the suggestive display executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery is predetermined. Even if the number of times is reached, the start of the specific performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be transferred can be put on hold, and the player receives the first lottery or the second lottery as a suggestion display during execution. To enhance interest in the suggestive display and to execute a specific performance when execution of the suggestive display is finished. , the player can recognize that the game state has shifted to the second game state without a sense of incompatibility.

<Group C: No specific effect is performed during the game result suggestive effect>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group C have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to games.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display means (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
The predetermined effect execution means is
Effect continuation means (for example, executing a variable effect according to a variable pattern command) that continues a game result suggesting effect that can suggest a game result to a player at least until the execution trigger of a predetermined event (for example, reception of a confirmation command). ,
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a right hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for effect) capable of suggesting the occurrence of a predetermined game state (for example, "ordinary pattern low probability time shortening state") to the player and,
During execution of the game result suggestive effect, even if an occurrence condition (for example, reaching the ceiling) that can suggest to the player that the specific effect will occur is satisfied, the game result suggestive effect is executed. A production non-starting means that does not start a specific production (for example, does not start the production right hitting instruction 81d (text message 81f) during the fluctuation production of the first special symbol),
The specific effect execution means is
Switching means for switching from the game result suggestive effect to the specific effect when the execution opportunity for the predetermined event arrives (for example, switching from the special symbol fluctuation effect screen to the effect right hitting instruction 81d (text message 81f)), A gaming machine C0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means wherein the predetermined effect execution means includes effect continuation means for continuing a game result suggesting effect capable of suggesting a game result to the player at least until a trigger for executing a predetermined event; and a predetermined game state. and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect capable of suggesting to the player that a and a performance non-starting means that does not start the specific performance during execution of the game result suggestive performance even if the game result suggestive performance is being executed, and the specific performance executing means is configured to prevent the game A switching means for switching from result suggesting performance to the specific performance is provided. As a result, even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are established during execution of the game result suggestive performance, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the player can continue to perform the game result suggestive performance. It is possible to enjoy the game without losing its attention, and it is possible to improve the interest of the performance suggesting the game result, and it is possible to switch to a specific performance and execute it after the execution opportunity of the predetermined event arrives. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can recognize the content of the specific presentation without a sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine C0,
A game state means capable of generating a normal game state (for example, "normal game state") different from the predetermined game state,
The predetermined gaming state is
The game machine C1 is characterized in that it is in a game state more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it comprises game state means capable of generating a normal game state different from the predetermined game state, and the predetermined game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. As a result, when a condition for starting a specific performance capable of suggesting to the player that a predetermined game state, which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, will occur is established during execution of the game result suggesting performance. Also, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the player can enjoy the game result suggesting performance in execution without impairing the attention of the player, thereby improving the interest of the game result suggesting performance. In addition, after an opportunity to execute a predetermined event has arrived, by switching to a specific effect and executing it, it is possible to suggest to the player that a predetermined game state that is advantageous to the player occurs. There is an effect that the player can recognize the occurrence of the predetermined game state without discomfort.

In gaming machine C0 or C1,
A detection means (for example, a first starter switch) capable of detecting game media passing through a predetermined area,
The predetermined event is
A game machine C2 characterized in that the event is triggered by the detection of a game medium by the detection means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a detection means capable of detecting a game medium passing through a predetermined area is provided, and the predetermined event is an event triggered by detection of the game medium by the detection means. As a result, even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are established during execution of the game result suggestive performance, the specific performance can be prevented from starting, and the player can continue to perform the game result suggestive performance. It is possible to enjoy the game without losing its attention, and it is possible to improve the interest of the performance suggesting the game result. After arriving, it is possible to switch to the specific effect and execute it, so that there is an effect that the player can recognize the content of the specific effect without a sense of incompatibility.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C2,
When the specific effect is not started by the effect non-starting means, a related effect (for example, the right-handed notification lamp 37c or the main display right-handed instruction 89) that can suggest the game situation related to the specific effect to the player ), a game machine C3 characterized by comprising a related effect execution means for executing.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, there is provided a related performance executing means for executing a related performance capable of suggesting a game situation related to the specific performance to the player when the specific performance is not started by the performance non-starting means. Thus, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are established and the specific performance is not started during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance suggests to the player the game situation related to the specific performance. becomes possible. Therefore, even when the condition for starting the specific performance is established during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the specific performance can not be started, and the player loses attention to the game result suggesting performance being executed. It is possible to enjoy the game without having to worry about it, and it is possible for the player to recognize that the start of the specific performance is waiting by the related performance, and to make the player recognize that the specific performance is waiting. Since the specific effect can be executed when the execution of the game result suggestive effect is finished, the player can recognize the contents of the specific effect without any sense of incongruity.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C3,
The specific production is
The game machine C4 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state will change. As a result, during the execution of the game result suggesting effect, the player can easily pay attention to the game result suggesting effect that is being executed by making it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can shift. It is possible to improve interest by means of a game result suggestive effect, and to make it possible to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed by a specific effect after that, so that the player can accurately recognize the contents of the game. There is

In gaming machine C3 or C4,
The related effect execution means is
A game machine C5 characterized in that the related effect is executed in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect in the display means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related effect executing means executes the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect on the display means. As a result, even when the conditions for generating the specific performance are satisfied and the specific performance is on standby during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the related performance can suggest the game situation related to the specific performance to the player. It becomes possible. Therefore, even when the occurrence condition for starting the specific performance is established during execution of the game result suggesting performance, the specific performance is not immediately performed, but the related performance is executed so as to be less conspicuous than the specific performance, and the game is played. It is possible for the player to enjoy the game result suggesting effect during execution without losing his or her attention. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize that the start of the specific effect is waiting by executing the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the specific effect so as not to be conspicuous. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that he/she is on standby, and the content of the game can be accurately recognized.

In any of game machines C3 to C5,
The related effect execution means is
A third symbol display device 81 displays a related continuation means (for example, a right-handed instruction 81d (character message 81f) for performance and a right-handed instruction 89 for main display that can continue to execute the related performance even during execution of the specific performance). (displayed at the same time).

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machines C3 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related performance executing means includes related continuation means capable of continuously executing the related performance even during execution of the specific performance. As a result, the related performance can be continuously executed even during execution of the specific performance, so that there is an effect that the player can accurately recognize the content of the game between the specific performance and the related performance. Further, by continuing to display the related performance regardless of whether or not the specific performance is executed, it becomes unnecessary to control whether or not to execute the related performance depending on whether or not the specific performance is executed, and the control load can be reduced. , has the effect of

In any of gaming machines C0 to C6,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestion effect execution means is
The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the game result suggesting effect.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machines C0 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestive effect execution means converts the result of the first lottery or the second lottery into the game result. It is configured to be suggestible to the player in the suggestive effect. As a result, the start of the specific performance is suspended even when the conditions for starting the specific performance are established during the game result suggestion performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery. As a result, the player can enjoy the game result suggesting effect being executed without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be, and the game result suggesting effect can be performed. Amusement can be improved, and since the specific performance can be executed when the execution of the game result suggesting performance is finished, the player can recognize the contents of the specific performance without discomfort. There is

In any of gaming machines C0 to C7,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized by executing, as the specific effect, an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first firing mode or the second firing mode should be switched to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. C8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to, as the specific effect, change from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the first shooting mode is executed. As a result, even when the condition for starting the specific effect that can suggest to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during execution of the game result suggesting effect is met, the start of the specific effect can be suspended. Thus, the player can enjoy the game result suggesting performance under execution without losing attention, and when the execution of the game result suggesting performance is finished, the player is suggested to switch the shooting mode. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without a sense of discomfort.

In gaming machine C8,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine C9 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In game machine C8 or C9,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine C10 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8 or C9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thus, in the first game state, during the game result suggesting effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. reaches a predetermined number of times, it is possible to wait (suspend) the start of a specific effect that can suggest to the player that the second game state will be transferred, and the player can use it as a game result suggesting effect during execution. It is possible to enjoy the result of the first lottery or the second lottery without losing attention to it, to increase interest in the game result suggesting performance, and to execute the game result suggesting performance. Since the specific effect can be executed when the is finished, the player can recognize that the game state has shifted to the second game state without a sense of discomfort.

<D Group: Even if the game state transitions during execution of the transition suggestive effect, continue the transition suggestive effect>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group D was made in view of the above circumstances and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display means (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
When the first event (for example, special symbol fluctuation effect) is executed for the first number of times (for example, "900 times") in the first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state), the first game state A game state transition means (for example, time reduction low probability flag 203n) that can shift to a different second game state (for example, "ordinary figure low probability time reduction state"),
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a transition suggestive effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect) performed before the first game state can be shifted to the second game state;
During the execution of the transition suggesting effect, even after the game state transition means transitions from the first game state to the second game state, effect continuation means (for example, ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of continuing the transition suggesting effect continues execution of the ceiling reaching notification performance even if the ceiling is reached during the execution of the game machine D0.

According to the gaming machine D0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring constant information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means. and a game state transition means capable of transitioning to a second game state different from the first game state when a first event is executed a first number of times in a first game state; Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a transition suggestion performance performed before a transition from the first game state to the second game state can be performed; A performance continuation means capable of continuing the transition suggesting performance even after the game state is shifted to the second game state is provided. As a result, even after the game state shifting means shifts from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the transition suggesting effect, the transition suggesting effect can be continued. Therefore, the player can recognize the contents of the performance without losing attention to the transition suggestive performance being executed, and can easily recognize the game situation accurately, thereby improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D0,
A post-transition effect execution means capable of executing a post-transition effect (for example, a right-hand hitting instruction 81d (character message 81f) for effect) performed after execution of the transition suggesting effect,
The post-transition production is
The game state transition means is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state has shifted to the second game state,
The game machine D1 is characterized in that the post-transition effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing the post-transition effect on condition that the transition suggesting effect is finished.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, post-transition effect execution means capable of executing a post-transition effect performed after the execution of the transition suggesting effect is provided, and the post-transition effect is performed when the game state shifts to the second game state by the game state transition means. The post-transition effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing the post-transition effect on the condition that the transition suggesting effect has ended. As a result, even after the game state transition means shifts from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the transition suggesting performance, the transition suggesting performance is continued, and after the transition suggesting performance is executed, the second game is performed. The player can be made to recognize that the state has been changed by the post-transition effect. Therefore, the player can recognize the content of the performance without losing attention to the transition suggestive performance being executed, and recognize that the game state has been shifted to the second game state by the post-transition performance. This has the effect of making it easier to accurately recognize the state of the game and improving the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine D0 or D1,
The transition suggestion production is
The game machine D2 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the transition suggestive effect is an effect that can suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, even after the game state shifting means shifts from the first game state to the second game state during the execution of the transition suggesting performance capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can shift, the transition suggesting performance is continued. can be continued. Therefore, the player can recognize that the game state can be changed without losing attention to the change suggesting performance being executed, and the game situation can be easily recognized accurately, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

In any one of the game machines D0 to D2,
The transition suggestion production is
The game machine D3 is characterized by a situation presentation capable of suggesting the game situation in the first game state to the player.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the transition suggesting effect is a situation effect capable of suggesting the game situation in the first game state to the player. As a result, even after the transition from the first game state to the second game state is performed by the game state transition means during execution of the transition suggestion effect, which is a situation effect capable of suggesting the game situation in the first game state to the player. The transition suggesting production can be continued. Therefore, the player can recognize the game situation in the first game state without losing attention to the transition suggesting performance being executed, and the game situation can be easily recognized accurately, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

In any of gaming machines D0 to D3,
Advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player when a specific result (e.g., jackpot pattern) appears in the predetermined effect,
The game state transition means is
A game machine D4 characterized by comprising a non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the specified result (for example, transitioning to "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling).

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player when a specific result appears in the predetermined effect, and the game state transition means is adapted to generate the specific result. non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the As a result, it is possible to change the game state without going through an advantageous state, and there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the game state may change without deriving the specific result, there is an effect that the contents can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of gaming machines D0 to D4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestion effect execution means is
The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the transition suggestion performance.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, wherein the suggestion effect execution means changes the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the transition suggestion. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player in the performance. As a result, even when the generation condition for starting the post-transition performance is satisfied during the transition suggestive performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, the start of the post-transition performance is suspended. The player can enjoy the transition suggesting performance being executed without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be, and the interest of the transition suggesting performance. In addition, since the post-transition performance can be executed when the execution of the transition suggesting performance is completed, the player can recognize the content of the post-transition performance without discomfort. There is

In any of gaming machines D1 to D5,
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). , and
The post-transition production execution means includes:
A game characterized in that, as the post-transition effect, an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first firing mode or the second firing mode is switched to the second firing mode or the first firing mode is executed. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D5, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium can be shot in a first shooting mode and in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode. An effect capable of suggesting the player to switch from the first shooting mode or the second shooting mode to the second shooting mode or the first shooting mode is executed. Thus, the start of the post-transition performance is postponed even when the condition for starting the post-transition performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means is switched during execution of the transition suggesting performance is established. The player can enjoy the transition suggesting performance without losing attention to the transition suggesting performance being executed, and the player is suggested to switch the shooting mode when the execution of the transition suggesting performance is finished. As a result, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without any sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine D6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine D7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In any one of gaming machines D5 to D7,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine D8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machines D5 to D7, the following effects are produced. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. As a result, in the first game state, during the transition suggesting effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means is increased by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times has been reached, the start of the post-transition effect capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state will be shifted can be suspended, and the player can select the first lottery or It is possible to fully enjoy the result of the second lottery without losing attention to how the second lottery will be, and the interest in the transition suggesting performance can be enhanced, and when the execution of the transition suggesting performance is completed, the transition is made. Since the post-effect can be executed, there is an effect that the player can recognize the transition to the second game state without a sense of discomfort.

<Group E: Even if the game state transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the first effect, the first effect is not terminated in the middle>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group E was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display means (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
In the first game state, when a first event that can occur in the first game state occurs, the game state can shift to a second game state in which a situation in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to the player can occur. Transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect) that can be started on the condition that the game state is the first game state;
During the execution of the first effect, when the game state transition means transitions to the second game state, the effect continuation means (for example, during execution of the ceiling reaching notification effect, (continuing the ceiling reaching notification performance being executed even when the ceiling is reached).

According to the gaming machine E0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means. and , in a first game state, when a first event that can occur in the first game state occurs, a situation in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to the player. A game state transition means capable of shifting to the second game state, a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect that can be started on condition that the game state is the first game state, and during execution of the first effect, and an effect continuation means capable of continuing the first effect when the game state is transferred to the second game state by the game state transfer means. Thus, during the execution of the first performance that can be started under the condition that the game state is the first game state, the first performance is continued even after the game state shifting means shifts from the first game state to the second game state. can be made Therefore, the player can recognize the content of the performance without losing attention to the first performance being executed, and can easily recognize the situation of the game accurately, thereby improving the interest of the game. , has the effect of

In gaming machine E0,
A second effect different from the first effect, which can suggest to the player that the game state is shifted by the game state transition means (for example, a right-hand hitting instruction 89 for main display) can be executed. a second production executing means,
The second production execution means is
The game machine E1 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the second effect in a situation where the first effect is being executed.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect and capable of suggesting to the player that the game state is shifted by the game state transition means, The second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect in a situation where the first effect is being executed. Thus, during the execution of the first performance that can be started under the condition that the game state is the first game state, the first performance is continued even after the game state shifting means shifts from the first game state to the second game state. In addition, the second effect can be executed in a situation where the first effect is being executed. Therefore, the player can recognize the contents of the performance without losing attention to the first performance being executed, and the second performance can be executed while the first performance is being executed. By constructing and making a suggestion by means of the second effect, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier to accurately recognize the situation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine E0 or E1,
The first production is
A shift suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the first game state can be shifted to the second game state (for example, from the "normal game state" to the "normal low probability time reduction state" in the ceiling reaching notification effect A game machine E2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting a shift.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect is configured to be capable of executing a transition suggestive effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be shifted from the first game state to the second game state. As a result, during the execution of the first effect that can be started under the condition that the game state is the first game state, even after the game state shift means shifts from the first game state to the second game state, the game state is changed from the first game state. A first performance, which is a transition suggesting performance capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be shifted to the second game state, can be continued, and the second performance can be executed in a situation where the first performance is being executed. can. Therefore, the player can recognize the contents of the performance without losing attention to the first performance being executed, and the second performance can be executed while the first performance is being executed. By constructing and making a suggestion by means of the second effect, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier to accurately recognize the situation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E2,
Advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player when a specific result (e.g., jackpot pattern) appears in the predetermined effect,
The game state transition means is
A gaming machine E3 characterized by comprising non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the specific result (for example, transition to "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling).

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player when a specific result appears in the predetermined effect, and the game state transition means is adapted to generate the specific result. non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the As a result, it is possible to change the game state without going through an advantageous state, and there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the game state may change without deriving the specific result, there is an effect that the contents can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E3,
While the first effect is continued by the effect continuation means, a related effect (for example, a right-handed notification lamp 37c or a right-handed instruction for main display) that can suggest a game situation related to the second effect to the player 89).

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it comprises a related performance execution means for executing a related performance capable of suggesting a game situation related to the second performance to the player while the first performance is continued by the performance continuation means. Thus, even when the conditions for generating the second performance are satisfied and the second performance is not started during the execution of the first performance, the related performance suggests to the player the game situation related to the second performance. It becomes possible to Therefore, even when the condition for starting the second performance is established during the execution of the first performance, the second performance cannot be started, and the player's attention to the first performance being executed is lost. The related performance enables the player to recognize that the start of the second performance is waiting, and the player recognizes that the second performance is waiting. Since the second effect can be executed when the execution of the first effect is completed while the second effect is being performed, the player can recognize the contents of the specific effect without a sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine E4,
The related effect execution means is
A game machine E5 characterized in that the related effect is executed in a display area smaller than the display area of the second effect in the display means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related effect executing means executes the related effect in a display area smaller than the display area of the second effect on the display means. Thus, even when the condition for generating the second performance is satisfied and the second performance is on standby during the execution of the first performance, the related performance suggests to the player the game situation related to the second performance. becomes possible. Therefore, even when the condition for starting the second performance is established during execution of the first performance, the second performance is not immediately performed, and the related performance is executed so as to be less conspicuous than the second performance. , the player can fully enjoy the first performance being executed without losing his or her attention. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize that the start of the second effect is waiting by executing the related effect so as not to stand out in a display area smaller than the display area of the second effect. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the 2nd effect is waiting, and the player can be made to accurately recognize the content of the game.

In gaming machine E4 or E5,
The related effect execution means is
A third symbol display device is provided with a related continuation means (for example, a right-handed instruction 81d (text message 81f) for performance and a right-handed instruction 89 for main display that can continue to execute the related performance even during execution of the second performance). 81 at the same time).

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4 or E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the related performance executing means includes related continuation means capable of continuously executing the related performance even during execution of the second performance. As a result, the related performance can be continuously executed even while the second performance is being executed, so that there is an effect that the player can be made to accurately recognize the contents of the game by the second performance and the related performance. . By continuing to display the related performance regardless of whether or not the second performance is executed, it becomes unnecessary to control whether or not to execute the related performance depending on whether or not the second performance is executed, thereby reducing the control load. has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines E0 to E6,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The suggestion effect execution means is
The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the first effect.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the suggestive effect execution means outputs the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the first lottery. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player in the performance. Thus, the start of the second performance is suspended even when the condition for starting the second performance is established during the first performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery. The player can enjoy the first performance being executed without losing attention to how the result of the first lottery or the second lottery will be, and the interest of the first performance. In addition, since the second performance can be executed when the execution of the first performance ends, the player can recognize the contents of the second performance without discomfort. There is

In any one of gaming machines E1 to E7,
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). , and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine E8.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game medium is provided with a shooting means capable of shooting the game medium in a first shooting mode and a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode, and the second effect execution means performs the second effect as the second effect. An effect capable of suggesting the player to switch from the first shooting mode or the second shooting mode to the second shooting mode or the first shooting mode is executed. As a result, the start of the second performance is postponed even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode of the shooting means is switched during the execution of the first performance is established. This enables the player to enjoy the first performance under execution without losing his/her attention, and suggests to the player the switching of the shooting mode when the execution of the first performance is finished. As a result, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without any sense of incongruity.

In gaming machine E8,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the gaming machine E9 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine E8 or E9,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine E10 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8 or E9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thereby, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, the start of the second effect that can suggest to the player that the second game state is to be shifted can be put on standby (suspended), and the player can wait (suspend) the second effect as the first effect being executed. The result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be enjoyed without losing attention, and the first performance can be enhanced, and the execution of the first performance is completed. Since the second effect can be executed in the case, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the transition to the second game state has occurred without a sense of incompatibility.

<F Group: Continue to extend the effect of reaching the ceiling of one special figure until the other special figure fluctuation ends>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group F was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display means (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
a first condition acquisition means (for example, the first start port 64) capable of acquiring the first condition;
a second condition acquiring means (for example, the upper second starting port 71 or the lower second starting port 71a) capable of acquiring a second condition different from the first condition;
By establishing the first condition, the first effect executing means (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a) capable of executing the first effect (for example, ceiling reaching notification effect),
Execution period extension means that can extend the execution time of the first effect based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied (for example, the execution period of the ceiling reaching notification effect is extended by the dynamic display of the second special symbol) extension), and a game machine F0.

According to the gaming machine F0, information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determination means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display means and a gaming machine comprising: first condition acquisition means capable of acquiring a first condition; second condition acquisition means capable of acquiring a second condition different from the first condition; and a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect when satisfied; an execution period extending means capable of extending the execution time of the first effect based on the satisfaction of the second condition; It has As a result, it is possible to extend the execution period of the first effect when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the contents of the first performance without the content of the first performance being hindered due to the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine F0,
The first production is
The game machine F1 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, it is possible to extend the execution period of the first effect, which can suggest to the player that the game state can be changed, if the second condition is satisfied. A first performance capable of suggesting whether or not to shift to a player ends in the middle based on the establishment of a second condition, or the content of the first performance is hindered based on the establishment of the second condition. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize whether or not the game state is to be changed without being changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
a means for counting the number of times the second condition is satisfied (for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e);
The execution period extending means is
The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the execution period of the first effect can be extended according to the number of times the second condition is satisfied counted by the number-of-when-satisfaction counting means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution period extending means is capable of counting the number of times the second condition is satisfied, and the execution period extending means is configured to calculate the number of times the second condition is satisfied in accordance with the number of times the second condition is satisfied counted by the satisfaction number counting means. It is configured so that the execution period of one performance can be extended. As a result, the execution period of the first effect can be extended according to the number of times the second condition is satisfied. A player can be made to clearly recognize the content of the first performance without hindering the content of the first performance based on the establishment of two conditions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F2,
A second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a right-handed hitting instruction 81d for effect) different from the first effect when the second condition is satisfied;
The second production is
The game machine F3 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect is provided when the second condition is satisfied, and the second effect is the game state that the game state can shift to. It is a production that can be suggested to. As a result, when the second effect, which can be executed by the establishment of the second condition and can suggest to the player that the game state can be changed, is executed, the execution period of the first effect can be extended. Since it is possible, for example, it is possible to suppress the suggestion that the game state is shifted by the second effect before the first effect that was executed earlier, or to suppress the content of the first effect that was executed earlier. To allow a player to clearly recognize the contents of the first performance without being hindered by the second performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F3,
While the first effect is being executed, when the game state can shift (for example, winning a big hit with the second special symbol) due to the establishment of the second condition, the first effect or the second A third effect executing means capable of executing a third effect (for example, a variation of the jackpot) different from the effect,
The third production is
The game machine F4 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game state can shift due to the establishment of the second condition while the first effect is being executed, a third effect different from the first effect or the second effect can be executed. A third effect executing means is provided, and the third effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed. Thus, while the first effect is being executed, when the game state can shift due to the establishment of the second condition, the third effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can shift is executed. Thus, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed even during execution of the first effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to quickly suggest to the player that the game state can be changed, provide an easy-to-understand effect, and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines F0 to F4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning to the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
A second lottery execution means (for example, the upper second start opening 71 or the lower second start opening 71a that can execute the second lottery (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) when the second condition is satisfied ) and
A gaming machine F5 characterized by comprising simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous variation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery execution means capable of executing a first lottery when the first condition is satisfied, second lottery execution means capable of executing a second lottery when the second condition is satisfied, and A simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time. Thus, by enabling the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time, there is an effect that the variety of games can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine F6.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machines F3 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the second effect executing means, as the second effect, changes from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode. An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the mode or the first firing mode is executed. As a result, the start of the second performance is postponed even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode of the shooting means is switched during the execution of the first performance is established. This enables the player to enjoy the first performance under execution without losing his/her attention, and suggests to the player the switching of the shooting mode when the execution of the first performance is finished. As a result, there is an effect that the player can switch the shooting mode without any sense of incongruity.

In the gaming machine F6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine F7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In the game machine F6 or F7,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine F8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6 or F7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thereby, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, the start of the second effect that can suggest to the player that the second game state is to be shifted can be put on hold, and the player can select the first lottery or the second effect as the first effect being executed. It is possible to fully enjoy the result of the second lottery without losing attention to how the result of the second lottery will be, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the first performance, and when the execution of the first performance is finished, the second lottery is displayed. Since the 2nd effect can be executed, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the transition to the second game state has occurred without a sense of incongruity.

<G group: End the special figure 1 fluctuation effect on the liquid crystal with the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation that reaches the ceiling>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group G was made in view of the above circumstances and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a variable effect of special symbols) on a display device (for example, a third symbol display device 81),
A counting means (eg, ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of first events (eg, dynamic display of the first special symbol);
a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect performed immediately before reaching the ceiling) capable of suggesting a game situation to a player when a second event occurs;
During the execution of the first effect, if a third event based on the counting result of the counting means (e.g. reaching the ceiling based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol) occurs, the effect of ending the first effect. A gaming machine G0 characterized by comprising end means (for example, ending the ceiling reaching notification effect at the timing when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is finished during the ceiling reaching notification effect).

According to the gaming machine D0, information obtaining means capable of obtaining predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information obtained by the information obtaining means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display device. and a counting means capable of counting the number of first events; It is provided with one performance execution means and a performance end means for ending the first performance when a third event based on the counting result of the counting means occurs during the execution of the first performance. As a result, the first effect being executed can be terminated by the occurrence of the third event based on the counting result of the counting means during the execution of the first effect. When a change in content or a change in game situation can occur, the first effect can be terminated immediately and the game can be shifted to a game based on the third event. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine G0,
A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect (for example, various effects in the "normal pattern low probability time shortened state"),
The second production execution means is
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the second effect can be executed when the first effect ends by the effect ending means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect is provided, and the second effect executing means executes the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means. It is configured to be able to execute production. As a result, when the third event occurs during execution of the first effect, the first effect being executed can be terminated, and when the first effect ends, the second effect can be executed. , it is possible to immediately terminate the first effect and execute the second effect when the content of the effect or the game situation may change. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation by the second effect to the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G1,
The second production is
The game machine G2 is characterized by being configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, the occurrence of the third event during the execution of the first performance causes the first performance being executed to end, suggesting to the player that the game state can shift when the first performance ends. Since the possible second performance can be executed, the first performance is immediately ended when the game state can be changed, and the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can be changed is executed. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest to the player that the game state can be immediately changed by the second effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The second production execution means is
A game machine G3 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the second condition. As a result, when the third event occurs during execution of the first effect, the first effect being executed can be terminated. When a change can occur, the first effect can be terminated immediately and the second effect based on the third event can be executed. Therefore, when the third event is established, the second effect is immediately executed to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G3,
A period setting means (for example, setting the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of setting the executable period of the first effect,
The production ending means
A game characterized in that the first effect can be terminated by the occurrence of the third event before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. Machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises a period setting means capable of setting a period during which the first effect can be executed, and the effect ending means is arranged before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. When the third event occurs, the first effect can be terminated. As a result, the third event occurs prior to the elapse of the executable period of the first effect, and the first effect can be terminated. or when a change in the game situation can occur, the first effect that could still be continued is ended and the game is shifted to the game based on the occurrence of the third event that is established before the executable period elapses. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G4,
First lottery execution means (for example, winning to first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery based on the first event (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol);
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start opening 71 or lower second start opening 71a) capable of executing the second lottery (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) based on the third event )and,
A gaming machine G5 characterized by comprising simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous variation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery based on the first event, a second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery based on the third event, the first lottery and the second lottery Simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the lottery. Thus, by enabling the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time, there is an effect that the variety of games can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G5,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine G6.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the second effect executing means, as the second effect, changes from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode. An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the mode or the first firing mode is executed. Thus, even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means should be switched during execution of the first performance is established, the first performance is immediately terminated and the shot is fired. A second effect capable of suggesting a change in mode to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine G6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine G7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine G6 or G7,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine G8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6 or G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state transition means includes second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when the counting means counts a predetermined number of times in the first game state. Thus, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the counting result of the counting means by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, a second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be shifted is started, and the first performance is immediately ended to suggest the player to change the shooting mode. A second production can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<H Group: If the other special symbol hits the ceiling during the ceiling reaching effect of one special symbol, the ceiling reaching effect is ended in the middle>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group H have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to games.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display device (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
At least, calculation means (for example, ceiling reaching count counter 203p) capable of calculating that the first condition (for example, special symbol fluctuation effect) is established,
a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of suggesting a game situation to a player when the first condition is satisfied;
During the execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculation means, the effect ending means for ending the first effect when the second condition is satisfied (for example, the movement of the second special symbol during the ceiling reaching notification effect The gaming machine H0 is characterized in that the ceiling reaching notification performance is terminated at the timing when the target display is terminated.

According to the gaming machine H0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display device. and a game machine comprising at least calculating means capable of calculating that a first condition is established, and execution of a first effect capable of suggesting a game situation to a player when the first condition is established. possible first performance execution means; and performance end means for terminating the first performance when a second condition is established during the execution of the first performance based on the calculation result of the calculation means. . As a result, when the second condition is met during execution of the first effect based on the calculation results of the calculating means, the first effect being executed can be terminated. When a change in the contents of the performance or a change in the game situation can occur, the first performance can be terminated immediately and the game situation can be shifted to the game situation based on the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine H0,
The second condition is
A game machine H1 characterized in that it is configured such that the first condition is less likely to be satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second condition is configured to be more difficult to be satisfied than the first condition. As a result, the second condition, which is less likely to be satisfied than the first condition, is met during the execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculating means, so that the first effect being executed can be terminated. When a second condition, which is less likely to occur than the first condition, is satisfied and a change in performance contents or a game situation can occur, the first performance is immediately terminated according to the rare case, and the game is played based on the second condition. situation can be transferred. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine H0 or H1,
at least dynamic display execution means capable of executing dynamic display of identification information on said display means when said first condition is satisfied;
The first production execution means is
The game machine H2 is characterized in that the first effect can be executed over a plurality of the dynamic displays.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H0 or H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least dynamic display execution means capable of executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means when the first condition is established, the first effect execution means performs the first effect on a plurality of Enabled over said dynamic display. As a result, when the second condition is met during the execution of the first effect that is executed over a plurality of dynamic displays, the first effect that is being executed can be terminated. When the second condition is established in a situation where the first performance is executed over the target display and a change in performance contents or a game situation may occur, the first performance is immediately terminated and the second condition is set. It is possible to shift to the game situation based on. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of the game machines H0 to H2,
A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect (for example, various effects in the "normal pattern low probability time shortened state"),
The second production execution means is
The gaming machine H3 is characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machines H0 to H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect is provided, and the second effect executing means executes the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means. It is configured to be able to execute production. As a result, when the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculating means, the first effect being executed can be terminated, and when the second condition is satisfied, the content of the effect can be changed. When a change or a change in the game situation can occur, the first effect can be terminated immediately and the second effect based on the second condition can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine H3,
The second production is
A game machine H4 characterized by being configured to be able to suggest to a player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, when the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculation means, the first effect being executed can be terminated, and when the second condition is satisfied, the It is possible to terminate the first effect and execute a second effect that can suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine H3 or H4,
The second production execution means is
A game machine H5 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the second condition. As a result, the second condition for executing the second effect is satisfied during the execution of the first effect based on the calculation result of the calculating means, so that the first effect being executed can be terminated and the second condition is satisfied. is established, the first effect can be terminated immediately, and a second effect can be executed that can suggest to the player that the game state can shift. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H5,
A period setting means (for example, setting the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of setting the executable period of the first effect,
The production ending means
A game characterized in that the first effect can be terminated when the second condition is satisfied before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. Machine H6.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of the game machines H0 to H5, the following effects are produced. That is, it comprises a period setting means capable of setting a period during which the first effect can be executed, and the effect ending means is arranged before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. When the second condition is established, the first effect can be terminated. As a result, the first effect can be terminated by satisfying the second condition before the period during which the first effect can be executed elapses. or when a change in the game situation can occur, the still continuing first performance is terminated and the game is shifted to a game based on the establishment of the second condition established before the execution possible period elapses. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H6,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning to the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) based on the first condition;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start opening 71 or lower second start opening 71a) capable of executing the second lottery (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) based on the second condition )and,
A gaming machine H7 characterized by comprising simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous variation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machines H0 to H6, the following effects are produced. That is, a first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery based on the first condition, a second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery based on the second condition, the first lottery and the second lottery. Simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the lottery. Thus, by enabling the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time, there is an effect that the variety of games can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of game machines H1 to H7,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine H8.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H7, the following effects are produced. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the second effect executing means, as the second effect, changes from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode. An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the mode or the first firing mode is executed. Thus, even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means should be switched during execution of the first performance is established, the first performance is immediately terminated and the shot is fired. A second effect capable of suggesting a change in mode to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine H8,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine H9 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine H8 or H9,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is calculated by the calculation means, second game transition means (for example, time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine H10 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H8 or H9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state transition means includes second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when the predetermined number of times is calculated by the calculation means in the first game state. Thereby, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the calculation result of the calculation means is obtained by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, a second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be shifted is started, and the first performance is immediately ended to suggest the player to change the shooting mode. A second production can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<Group I: End the special figure 1 fluctuation effect on the liquid crystal with the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation that reaches the ceiling>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group I was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display device (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
Transition condition determination means (for example, ceiling reaching count counter 203p) capable of determining whether or not the gaming state transitions;
a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect (for example, a ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of suggesting a game situation to a player when the game state changes;
a ball entry detection means (for example, a second starter switch) capable of detecting whether or not a game medium enters a predetermined area;
During the execution of the first effect, effect ending means for ending the first effect due to the ball entering the entering ball detection means The gaming machine I0 is characterized in that it is equipped with a ceiling reaching notification effect is finished at the timing of the game machine I0.

According to the gaming machine I0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display device. and a transition condition determination means capable of determining whether or not the game state transitions, and when the game state transitions, a first effect capable of suggesting the game state to the player can be executed. a first effect execution means, a ball entry detection means capable of detecting whether or not a game medium enters a predetermined area, and a ball entering the ball entry detection means during execution of the first effect. and an effect ending means for ending the first effect. As a result, during execution of the first effect that can suggest the game situation to the player, it is possible to end the first effect being executed due to the ball entering the ball detection means. The first performance can be terminated at the player's desired timing by allowing the ball to enter the ball detecting means according to his/her intention. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine I0,
A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect (for example, an effect for "normal pattern low probability time shortened state"),
The second production execution means is
The game machine I1 is characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means.

According to the gaming machine I0, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect is provided, and the second effect executing means executes the second effect when the first effect ends by the effect ending means. It is configured to be able to execute production. Thus, during the execution of the first effect that can suggest the game situation to the player, it is possible to end the first effect being executed due to the ball entering the ball detecting means, and to immediately execute the second effect. can. Therefore, for example, by making the ball enter the ball detecting means according to the player's intention, the first effect can be terminated and the second effect can be executed at the timing desired by the player, so that the game situation can be changed. There is an effect that it is possible to provide game characteristics that can be accurately suggested to the player and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine I1,
The second production is
A game machine I2 characterized by being configured to be able to suggest to a player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. Thus, during the execution of the first effect capable of suggesting the game situation to the player, the first effect being executed is terminated due to the entry of the ball by the entering ball detection means, and the game state can be immediately changed. A second effect that can be suggested to the player can be executed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to indicate to the player that the first effect can be terminated at the timing desired by the player by causing the ball to enter the ball detecting means according to the player's intention, and that the game state can be changed. Since the second effect can be executed, there is an effect that a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player is provided, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine I1 or I2,
The second production execution means is
A gaming machine I3 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect based on the detection of the entering ball detection means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect based on detection by the entering ball detecting means. Thus, during the execution of the first effect that can suggest the game situation to the player, the first effect being executed is terminated due to the entry of the ball by the entering ball detection means, and the entry of the ball by the entering ball detection means It is possible to execute a second effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can immediately shift based on this. Therefore, for example, it is possible to indicate to the player that the first effect can be terminated at the timing desired by the player by causing the ball to enter the ball detecting means according to the player's intention, and that the game state can be changed. Since the second effect can be executed, there is an effect that a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player is provided, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines I0 to I3,
A period setting means (for example, setting the execution time of the ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of setting the executable period of the first effect,
The production ending means
The first effect can be terminated by entering the ball into the entering detection means before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. Game machine I4 to play.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machines I0 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it comprises a period setting means capable of setting a period during which the first effect can be executed, and the effect ending means is arranged before the period during which the first effect can be executed set by the period setting means elapses. By entering the ball into the entering ball detection means, the first effect can be terminated. As a result, the first effect can be terminated by causing the ball to enter the ball detecting means before the executable period of the first effect elapses. When a change in the game situation can occur, the first effect that can still be continued is terminated, and the game based on the ball entering the ball entering detection means established before the executable period elapses. can be transferred. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines I0 to I4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning to the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) based on the first condition;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start opening 71 or lower second start opening 71a) capable of executing the second lottery (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) based on the second condition )and,
A gaming machine I5 characterized by comprising simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous variation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machines I0 to I4, the following effects are produced. That is, a first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery based on the first condition, a second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery based on the second condition, the first lottery and the second lottery. Simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the lottery. Thus, by enabling the first lottery and the second lottery to be executed at the same time, there is an effect that the variety of games can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I5,
At least, the game state can be changed to a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the game state transition means capable of changing the game state between a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a firing means capable of firing in a second firing mode different from the mode, wherein the second effect executing means, as the second effect, changes from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode. An effect capable of suggesting to the player to switch to the mode or the first firing mode is executed. Thus, even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means should be switched during execution of the first performance is established, the first performance is immediately terminated and the shot is fired. A second effect capable of suggesting a change in mode to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine I6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the gaming machine I7 is characterized by having a command "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In gaming machine I6 or I7,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is calculated by the calculation means, second game transition means (for example, time-saving low-probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine I8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I6 or I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state transition means includes second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state when the predetermined number of times is calculated by the calculation means in the first game state. Thereby, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the calculation result of the calculation means is obtained by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, a second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be shifted is started, and the first performance is immediately ended to suggest the player to change the shooting mode. A second production can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

<J Group: When one special figure hits the ceiling while the other special figure hits the jackpot, the variation production is switched from one special figure variation presentation to the other special figure variation presentation at that timing>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a lottery for a prize or the like is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. there is a machine

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state (for example, special symbol high probability state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. can be generated, and a winning game is won in the second game state, and the second game state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication) 2017-148264)).

In order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group J was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

Information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information (for example, starting winning process (S208));
determination means (for example, MPU 201) capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the display control device 114) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, various display images performed in the third pattern display device 81) in the display device (for example, the third pattern display device 81) In a game machine equipped with
A first effect (for example, ceiling reaching notification effect) capable of suggesting to the player a first game situation (for example, one special symbol before reaching the ceiling 1 fluctuation) based on the game by the player's predetermined operation. 1 performance executing means;
A second effect (for example, a big win) that is different from the first effect and can suggest to the player a second game situation (for example, at the start of a variable effect that wins a big win game) different from the first game situation. a second effect execution means capable of executing a winning variation effect);
Switching means for switching from the first effect to the second effect by becoming the second game situation during the execution of the first effect (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol during the ceiling reaching notification effect) , switching to a variable performance corresponding to the big win when the game machine J0 wins.

According to the game machine E0, information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information, determining means capable of determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the display device. and a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect capable of suggesting to the player a first game situation based on a game by a predetermined operation of the player; and an effect different from the first effect. a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect capable of suggesting to the player a second game situation different from the first game situation; A switching means for switching from the first effect to the second effect is provided. As a result, when the second effect can be executed while the first effect is being executed, the first effect being executed can be switched to the second effect. In addition, there is an effect that the first performance can be immediately switched to the second performance to provide a game property in which the situation can be accurately suggested to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine J0,
The first production is
The game machine J1 is characterized by an effect capable of suggesting to the player the game situation before the second effect is started.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player the game situation before the second effect is started. Thus, during the execution of the first performance capable of suggesting to the player the game situation before the start of the second performance, the first performance being executed is switched to the second performance by the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, for example, when the game situation can change from the previous game situation, the first production is immediately switched to the second production to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the situation to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

In the gaming machine J0 or J1,
The switching means is
Even during the execution of the first performance, a third performance (for example, screen darkening performance) for forcibly stopping the first performance is performed, and the second performance can be executed after the third performance. A gaming machine J2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the switching means is configured to perform a third effect of forcibly stopping the first effect even during execution of the first effect, and to execute the second effect after the third effect. . As a result, when the game situation can change during execution of the first effect, it is possible to switch from the first effect being executed to the second effect via the third effect. When the situation can change, the first effect can be terminated immediately, and the second effect can be performed after going through the third effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the switching of the contents of the presentation, to provide the game property that can accurately suggest the situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of the game machines J0 to J2,
The second production is
A game machine J3 characterized by being configured to be able to suggest to a player that the game state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the game state can be changed. As a result, when the second condition is established during execution of the first effect, the first effect being executed can be switched to the second effect capable of suggesting to the player that the game state can shift. For example, when the game situation may change from the previous game situation, the first production is immediately switched to the second production to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the situation to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines J0 to J3,
The game state can be changed to at least a first game state (for example, special symbol low probability state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, "normal pattern low probability time shortening state"). A game state transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n),
and advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player when a specific result (for example, a jackpot pattern) appears in the predetermined effect. ,
The game state transition means is
A gaming machine J4 characterized by comprising a non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the specified result (for example, transitioning to a "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" by reaching the ceiling).

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, game state transition means capable of changing the game state to at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and when a specific result appears in the predetermined effect, an advantageous state transition means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player, wherein the game state transition means is a non-derivation transition means capable of transitioning the game state without deriving the specified result. , is equipped with As a result, it is possible to change the game state without going through an advantageous state, and there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines J0 to J4,
A first lottery executing means (for example, winning the first start port 64) capable of executing the first lottery (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) when the first condition is satisfied;
Second lottery execution means (for example, upper second start port 71 or lower side Winning a prize to the second starting port 71a);
Simultaneous execution means (for example, special figure 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation) capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time,
The first production means is
The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the result of the first lottery or the second lottery can be suggested to the player in the first effect.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, first lottery executing means capable of executing a first lottery when a first condition is satisfied, and second lottery executing means capable of executing a second lottery when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and simultaneous execution means capable of executing the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time, and the first effect means outputs the result of the first lottery or the second lottery to the first lottery. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player in the performance. Thus, when the game situation can change during the first performance being executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, the first performance being executed can be terminated. For example, when a change in the content of the effect or a change in the game situation can occur, the first effect can be terminated immediately and the game situation can be shifted to the game situation based on the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any of the game machines J0 to J5,
A shooting means (eg, ball shooting unit 112a) capable of shooting game media in a first shooting mode (eg, left-handed game) and a second firing mode (eg, right-handed game) different from the first shooting mode (eg, right-handed game). , and
The second production execution means is
A game characterized by executing an effect capable of suggesting to a player that the second effect is to switch from the first firing mode or the second firing mode to the second firing mode or the first firing mode. Machine J6.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effects of the game machines J0 to J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game medium is provided with a shooting means capable of shooting the game medium in a first shooting mode and a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode, and the second effect execution means performs the second effect as the second effect. An effect capable of suggesting the player to switch from the first shooting mode or the second shooting mode to the second shooting mode or the first shooting mode is executed. Thus, even when the condition for starting the second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the shooting mode by the shooting means should be switched during execution of the first performance is established, the first performance is immediately terminated and the shot is fired. A second effect capable of suggesting a change in mode to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine J6,
In the first game state, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode, a correction presentation executing means ( For example, the game machine J7 is characterized in that it is equipped with "Please return to left-handed play").

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, the corrective presentation can be immediately executed to suggest to the player that the first shooting mode should be used. means. As a result, when the game medium is shot in the second shooting mode in the first game state, by immediately executing a corrective effect capable of suggesting to the player that the first shooting mode should be used, for example, the first game In this state, the player can immediately recognize that the second firing mode is not recommended, and the player can easily play the game according to the game specifications.

In any of game machines J5 to J7,
A counting means (for example, a ceiling reaching counting counter 203p) capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and / and the second lottery,
The game state transition means is
In the first game state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, "900 times") is counted by the counting means, a second game transition means (for example, time saving low probability flag 203n on), a gaming machine J8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J5 to J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a counting means capable of counting the number of executions of the first lottery and/or the second lottery is provided, and the game state transition means counts a predetermined number of times by the counting means in the first game state. a second game transition means capable of transitioning to the second game state in the above-mentioned case. Thereby, in the first game state, during the first effect executed based on the establishment of the first lottery or the second lottery, for example, the calculation result of the calculation means is obtained by the other second lottery or the first lottery. Even if the predetermined number of times is reached, a second performance capable of suggesting to the player that the second game state is to be shifted is started, and the first performance is immediately ended to suggest the player to change the shooting mode. A second production can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that can accurately suggest the game situation to the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

For any one of the game machines A0 to A8, the game machines B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the gaming machines B0 to B9, the gaming machines A0 to A8, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines C0 to C10, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines D0 to D8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the gaming machines E0 to E10, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines F0 to F8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines G0 to G8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, H0 to H10, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines H0 to H10, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I8 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines I0 to I8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H10 and J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines J0 to J8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to A configuration limited by any one of H10 and I0 to I8 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, J0 to J8, the gaming machine A gaming machine X1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, J0 to J8, the gaming machine A gaming machine X2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B9, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F8, G0 to G8, H0 to H10, I0 to I8, J0 to J8, the gaming machine A gaming machine X3 characterized by being a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a Right first starting port (part of starting ball area)
65 variable winning device (a part of variable winning means)
65a Grand prize opening opening/closing plate (part of opening/closing means)
65d probability variable area (part of specific area)
65e Probability variable area opening/closing plate (part of distribution means)
65g probability variable region switch (part of the first detection means)
65h discharge passage (discharge passage switch. A part of the second detection means.)
71 Second starting port (part of the starting ball area)
81 Third pattern display device (part of display means)
112a ball launch unit (part of launch means)
113 Audio lamp controller (part of display control means, part of execution means)
114 Display control device (part of display control means, part of execution means)
203j Probability variation flag (part of granting means)
203k Probability variation transition flag (part of discrimination information storage means)
203m probability variable area valid flag (part of storage control means)
203o Probability variable region passage count counter (part of storage control means)
S208 Start Winning Process (Part of Determination Means)
S1505 Voting effect processing (part of display control means, part of execution means)
S1604 Effect processing during probability variable area opening (part of display control means, part of execution means)
S6216 Probability changing area passage determination process (part of storage control means)

Claims (1)

a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area provided in a game area where game balls can flow down;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns when the result of the predetermined determination is a specific result, and stop-displaying the specific pattern at the end of the variable display;
a variable ball entry means provided in the game area and executing a special game state consisting of a plurality of variable actions after the specific symbol is displayed;
The variable ball entry means is
opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entry area;
a specific area into which a game ball can enter;
a first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area;
a second detection means for detecting a game ball that has not entered the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a distribution means for distributing a state in which game balls can flow down to the specific area and a state in which game balls cannot flow down,
The first detection means is
A predetermined number of valid variable motion times in the plurality of variable motions is set in advance, at least corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, in which the detection of the game ball is valid,
The sorting means is
The game ball is controlled to flow down to the specific area in a variable operation cycle in which the game ball can be detected by the first detection means,
The game machine is
Display for causing the display means to execute a specific notification display prompting a predetermined player to enter a game ball into the specific area at a specific timing in relation to execution of a predetermined variable action among the plurality of variable actions. a control means;
a discrimination information storage means for storing discrimination information capable of discriminating presence or absence of detection by the first detection means;
storage control means for reflecting only the detection of the first detection means a predetermined number of times in correspondence with the game state to the storage state of the discrimination information storage means;
When the determination information indicating the detection of a game ball is stored in the determination information storage means in the effective variable operation times set corresponding to the type of the specific symbol, the player is notified of the special game state. a granting means for granting a specific profit state different from
One common performance is selected from a plurality of common performances that can be executed in common for a plurality of different types of the specific pattern as the performance to be executed before the display of the specific notification display executed at the specific timing. and an execution means for executing.

Images